GOVERNMENT OF JAMMU AND KASHMIR

J&K Public Works Department

Engineering Manual
2020

PUBLISHED BY
PUBLIC WORKS (R&B) DEPARTMENT, J&K
GOVERNMENT OF JAMMU & KASHMIR

J&K Public Works Department

Engineering Manual
2020

PUBLISHED BY

PUBLIC WORKS (R&B) DEPARTMENT

Jammu & Kashmir
 Introduction

The J&KPWD manual was adopted decades back from British system of engineering
practice. Since then it has not been updated in the form of document. Time and again, the
department has felt the need for a consolidated document which shall be reckoned as
engineering reference for practice of all activities ranging from inception of project to its
completion.

In order to complete the said process Government of Jammu and Kashmir has
constituted a technical advisory team vide Govt. Order No. 193 PW(R&B) of 2020 dated
07- 07- 2020 for drafting the engineering manual as part of institutional strengthening of
Public Works Department which shall be named as J&KPWD Engineering Manual 2020.
The draft “J&KPWD Engineering Manual 2020” has been derived from various manuals
of other states, besides CPWD Manual 2019 as a basic frame work and best practices in
vogue in the country.

With the passage of time, various documents have been adopted from various states of
the country to compile rules for the award and execution of contracts. This engineering
manual has been consolidated, updated and placed all these documents under one cover
with necessary modifications. Ambiguities, if any, in previous practices, have been clarified
in this manual.

In general, all engineering practices have been standardized and set of procedures
worked out to bring transparency and accountability in deliberation of powers at all
levels. This engineering manual is expected to bring financial discipline and accountable
code of practice in engineering department. The modern technical interventions like, GIS,
RMMS have been incorporated in the manual besides quality assurance mechanism. All
these have been linked to the JKPWDOMS web portal which is under development.

The standardization of engineering practices will finally lead to uniform code of practice,
which shall bring more transparency and accountability. The general public shall also be
aware of the working system of the department, which will guarantee safety of public
interests.
 Legend of Abbreviations
AA Administrative Approval

AAO Assistant Accounts Officer

AE Assistant Engineer

AEE Assistant Executive Engineer

AO Accounts Officer

BG Bank Guarantee

BRO Border Road Organisation

BM Bituminous Macadam

CE Chief Engineer

DD Deputy Director

DDO Drawing and disbursing officer

DIQC Design Inspection and Quality Control

DPR Detailed Project Report

EE Executive Engineer

GIS Geographical Information System

HD Head Draftsman

IRC Indian Roads Congress

JE Junior Engineer

MORT&H Ministry of Road Transport and Highways

PWD Public Works Department

QA Quality Assurance

RMMS Road Monitoring Management System

SE Superintending Engineer

TO Technical Officer

TS Technical Sanction

WBM/WMM Water Bound Macadam/ Wet Mix

Macadam
 C O N Ts E N T S

Chapter Title Page no.

Part I General
1 Organizational Setup 01
2 Duties, Responsibilities & Powers 11
3 Human Resources and Training 44
4 Information Technology & MIS 50
5 Financial Management System (FMS) 57
6 Planning Policy 59
7 Planning, Budgeting & Funding 60
8 Geographical Information System (GIS) 66
9 Road Maintenance System (RMMS) 74
10 Safety Management 79
11 Environmental Management 87
12 Social Impact Management 97

Part II Engineering Practices and Procedures

13 Project Preparation 107

14 Site Investigation 108
15 Design 119
16 Estimate 120
17 Schedule of Rates 125
18 Sanctions 126
19 Registration of Contractors 129
20 Bids and Contracts 149

21 Contract Management 311

22 Execution of works 321
23 Design, Execution and Maintenance of 336
Electrical works
24 Quality Control Mechanism 342
25 Asset Management 374
26 Maintenance of Roads 376
27 Maintenance of Bridges 385
28 Maintenance of Buildings 395
29 Maintenance of Movable Assets 409

Part III Appendices

Appendices 431
PART I – GENERAL

1
 Chapter 1

Organizational Setup

In-charge Minister/Advisor to Lt. Governor

Administrative Secretary to Govt.

CHAPTER - 1
Technical Administrative Planning Finance Legal

Development
Special Additional
Commissioner Director Director
Secretary Secretary
Works

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Chief Engineer
Additional Financial
R&B Jammu/ Dy Director SLO/PLO
Secretary Advisor / CAO
Kashmir
Chief Engineer
PMGSY Deputy Assistant Accounts
Legal Section
Jammu/ Secretary Director Section
Kashmir
Chief Engineer Under
MED Jammu/ Secretary
Kashmir

Chief Engineer Section Officer

DIQC

Chief Engineer Administrative

Projects Hall Officials
Organisation
Posts Gazetted Non Gazetted Total
Managing
Civil 1426 12422 13848
Director JKPCC
Mechanical 616 1877 2493
Total 2042 14299 16341

1
 1.0.0 General
The Public Works Department is the functional arm of the UT of Jammu
and Kashmir for overall development by way of construction and
maintenance of roads, buildings, bridges and other infrastructural works.
The department has in house resources for planning, design, execution,
monitoring and maintenance of these assets. The department generally gets
projects funded by the State Government and Government of India under
various developmental schemes viz., CRF, PMGSY, NABARD, besides
schemes funded by multi-lateral agencies viz World Bank, Asian
Development Bank, etc. Works are executed under various contractual set
ups like EPC, PPP, etc. which make project execution and its funding easier
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 1

and time bound.

The Administrative Secretary PW(R&B) Department is the overall

administrative head of the department. He is assisted by the Development
Commissioner Works as technical secretary in the department All Chief
Engineers and other head of the engineering departments report to the
Administrative Secretary. The Administrative Secretary is assisted by Director
Finance, Director planning and Special Secretary/ Additional Secretary HRM
besides other sup porting staff. The department has various wings viz., Roads
& Buildings, DIQC, PMGSY, MED, Project organizations (Mughal Road
Project) who are all headed by respective Chief Engineers while as JKPCC is
headed by Managing Director being a public sector under taking.

All Chief Engineers are assisted by Superintending Engineers at circle

level who are further having a network of Executive Engineers at
divisional level. The office of the Executive Engineer is the main office
responsible for execution of the works in the field although they have to
work under close guidance and technical control of the SE and the Chief
Engineer of the department. The Executive Engineer is supported by
Assistant Executive Engineers who hold a sub divisional office at their
level. Subdivisions are further having a number of sections controlled by
Assistant Engineer/Junior Engineers. The A.Es are deputed as technical
officers to the AEEs for supporting AEEs in technical matters besides,
undertaking various quality control measures in the division.

2
1.1.0 Functional Set Up

The functional setup of various officers in the hierarchy has been briefly described
below.

1.1.1 Administrative Secretary

The Administrative Secretary exercises all administrative powers delegated to him

over the entire department. The Administrative Secretary is responsible for the
execution of developmental works and to deal with matters regarding interpretation
or modification of existing rules and procedures as and when required or felt
necessary.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 1

1.1.2 Development Commissioner Works (DCW).

· The Development Commissioner (Works) exercises administrative and

financial powers of major head of department of PWD. He is Technical
Advisor for planning, monitoring, quality control and supervision of
various sectors of R&B, PMGSY and all other non-engineering departments for
executing civil work such as Police, Tourism, Estates, Agriculture, housing
departments, etc.
· The Development Commissioner (Works) assists the Administrative Secretary,
PW (R&B) department during Contract committee meetings for the works beyond
the competence of the Chief Engineers.
· All projects having particular project costs gets technical vetting through DCW
including that of other departments.
· The DPR‘s framed by various departments shall be vetted by DCW only once
these conform to guidelines/checklist provided in the manual as appendix 2600N

1.1.2.1 Human Resources Management

1. The Human Resources Management Cell is headed by the Additional
Secretary HRM, in the office of the Administrative Secretary. This cell shall be
responsible for maintaining and updating database of all technical and non
technical staff like, service particulars, seniority, promotions, conducting DPCs,
and other human resource development related issues. Besides it refers vacancies
to JKPSC and JKSSRB time to time, etc.
2. Regularly monitor and update the Human Resource Information System (HRIS) of
the Department on JKPWDOMS.
3. Proposes restructuring the organizational setup of the department as and when
required.
4. Monitors issues of employee identity cards through HRIS of official website
JKPWDOMS. The I Cards can be downloaded from the website and got signed
and stamped by respective HODs.
5. Interacts with personnel in the department to find out and resolve any hurdles
that hinder his job performance.
6. Recommends rewards to employees in appreciation of their good performances.

3
 1.1.2.2 Designers, Architects, Legal and Financial Experts/
Outsourcing of Works.

If necessary, the Department may hire services of experts of Designers,

Architects, legal and Financial or any other specialists required by the
department at the state/ UT level to advise Chief Engineers in finalizing plans
and designs of buildings, bridges, framing of DPRs and to advise on PPP
projects so that overall quality of the project is enhanced by the expert hands
subject to the approval of competent authority.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 1

4
 1.1.3 Chief Engineer Office R&B,

The Chief Engineer is the administrative and technical head of the respective wings
of the department and at divisional level of the UT administration and is
responsible for efficient work execution, monitoring and making funds available to
SEs/EEs. The CE is assisted by a Technical officer of the rank of EE who remains
controlling officer for administrative, technical and planning sections of the
headquarter. The financial wing under the control of a Chief accounts officer with
sufficient complement of subordinate staff is responsible for all financial matters
under the overall control of Chief engineer. The Chief Engineer has powers of
sanctioning estimates and entering into contracts within the limits of delegated
powers. In addition to the above, the Chief Engineer has an electrical wing under

CHAPTER - 1
the control of an Executive Engineer (Electrical) wing.
The chief engineer office has the following sections working under the guidance of
technical officer to CE and overall control of the Chief Engineer.

1. Technical Section: It shall comprise of an EE and AE. They shall be

responsible for implementation of new technologies, vetting of designs of
minor works, maintain design data bank, coordinating with Quality control
cells of divisions, coordinating with Road Safety Cell, etc.

2. Personnel Section: Personnel section is headed by Section Officer who is

responsible for all correspondence of the chief engineer including managing
meetings and coordinating information related to RTIs, establishment of
personnel, besides grievance cell.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

3. Accounts section: It is headed by Chief Accounts officer/Accounts officer who
shall be responsible for monitoring all financial matters and submitting reports to
relevant quarters.

4. Planning Section: This section is headed by Deputy Director planning for

framing of twenty year plans/ five year plans comprising annual works
programme/plan, and shall be responsible for complete planning and monitoring of
works.

5. Drawing section: The drawing section is headed by head draftsman and shall
be responsible for checking of estimates, drawings, DPRs, and all other related
issues.

6. Works and tendering section: This section is headed Technical officer

and Head draftsman who shall be responsible for tendering works, record
keeping, digitization of documents, maintaining record of BG, security
deposits, etc.

5
 7. Receipt and Dispatch Section: This section is headed by senior Assistant
/Junior assistant for making receipt and dispatches of direction office, maintaining of
files, record keeping, correspondences, etc. The section shall have one person
dedicated for digitizing of all the correspondence.

1.1.3.1 Law Officer,

There is a Law officer deputed by Law department in all direction offices who deals
with legal matters of the department.

1.1.4 Design Inspections and Quality Control Department (DIQC)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 1

DIQC is headed by the Chief Engineer and deals with design of buildings, bridges and
other structures referred to it. The Chief Engineer is assisted by Superintending
Engineer besides an establishment wing in his office. The SE is assisted by
executive engineers to vet designs referred to the department. The divisional offices
are supported by a team of AEEs, AEs and JEs. All the staff deputed to DIQC are
having a minimum qualification of B.E/B. Tech. Engineers with Masters/ PhD. degree
are to be preferred for posting in this department. The Department shall create a core
staff of engineers who shall be having aptitude and passion for design of structures so
as to develop a think tank for the UT/state who can guide and advise the
department. The department shall also update and revise Schedule of Rates and the
Data Book regularly. Moreover there is a requirement of separate electrical and
mechanical sections in the DIQC.

1.1.4.1 Road Safety cell

A Superintending Engineer is to head the Road Safety Cell of the department and
be supported by two executive engineers, one at Jammu and one at Kashmir. It is
the responsibility of the Road Safety Cell to coordinate road safety activities
implemented by the concerned executing divisions. However, the implementation
of road safety works is done through regular divisional offices. All the Engineers
of the cell must be imparted sufficient and regular trainings on the subject. At least
two engineers of the cell shall be trained as Certified Road Safety Auditors. The
responsibilities of Road safety cell is as under:

● SE, Road Safety Cell to liaise and correspond with Road Safety Authority at UT/state
level.

● The team to audit all the roads as per road hierarchy within a specified period of
time as desired by the CE DIQC.
● SE Road Safety to submit road safety audit reports to CE, DIQC and to DCW for

6
 implementation by respective chief engineers.

● Road Safety Auditors to issue a certificate to the concerned divisions on account of

road safety clearance after which final payments to be released to the
firm/contractor by the divisions.

● The Superintending engineer shall personally visit minimum 30% of the total roads
audited by the cell supported with geo tagged photographs.
● The executive engineer shall personally visit minimum 40% of the total roads
audited by the cell supported with geo tagged photographs.
The cell shall also be responsible for conducting studies at accident-prone locations

CHAPTER - 1
and suggesting remedial measures to eliminate possibility of accidents.

1.1.4.2 Road Research and Material Testing Laboratory (RRMTL)

The DIQC Laboratory shall provide guidance in setting up local laboratories, both
in respect of equipping them and training of personnel. These laboratories shall

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

carry out confirmatory tests of samples collected by the Assistant Executive
Engineer (Quality Assurance)/Quality Assurance Units during routine inspections
of various works at the site and calibration of equipment of field laboratory .

1.1.4.3 Library

All codes for reference, technical books and publications etc. for department is to
be made available in a properly catalogued library established in DIQC.

7
 1.1.5 Circle Office

The Provinces under the control of the Chief Engineer are subdivided into circles
which are further controlled by respective Superintending Engineers at their level.
Superintending Engineer is responsible for the overall working of the circle under
their jurisdiction. The Superintending Engineer has the authority of sanctioning
estimates and entering into contracts within the delegated powers. They are
assisted by a Technical officer of the rank of Assistant Executive Engineer who
shall be administering both administrative and technical sections of the circle.
Assistant Accounts Officer deputed in the circle is to assist the SE in all financial
matters.

1.1.6 Divisional Office

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 1

The main executive unit of the department next to circle office is the divisional
office coming under the control of an Executive Engineer. He has to manage
overall execution of all the projects assigned to him. All divisions have
subdivisions under them who are controlled by Assistant Executive Engineers. The
Executive Engineer is responsible for proper execution of all works in his Division
and also in guiding and controlling the subordinate officers with regard to
execution of works, site investigation, designs, estimates, billing and payments,
etc. He has authority of sanctioning estimates and entering into contracts within the
powers delegated to him. As drawing and disbursing officer of the division all
payments for works, supplies and services is made by the Executive Engineer. The
Executive Engineer renders prescribed financial accounts to the Accountant
General every month or as prescribed by the AG. The Divisional Office has three
branches in the office besides a quality control cell, viz. drawing branch, accounts
branch and establishment branch. The Executive Engineer is assisted by a
Technical Officer of the rank of an Assistant Executive Engineer and controls all
branches of the division including quality control cell. Accounts section is headed
by an Assistant Accounts Officer whereas the establishment section is managed by
a Head Assistant/ Junior Assistant in offices where such an officer is posted with
necessary supporting staff. The Technical Officer to Executive Engineer peruses
and submit all files to the Executive Engineer for final orders.

8
1.1.6.1 Stores

All divisions shall have stores under A.E Stores supported by a store keeper with
overall control of the concerned Executive Engineer.

1.1.7 Sub Divisional Office

The sub divisional office is headed by an Assistant Executive Engineer control l i n

g all sections under his subdivision. He has the authority to enter into agreements
and sanction estimates within his delegated powers. The Assistant Executive
Engineer is to guide his subordinate officers in preparation of estimates,

CHAPTER - 1
detailed project reports, conducting site investigation and take all steps
necessary to ensure that all works under the charge of subdivision are properly
executed. He needs to maintain and render accounts as prescribed in the rules and
orders in force.

1.1.8 Section Office.

The lowest executive unit of the organizational setup is the sectional level office
under the control of an Assistant Engineer/ Junior Engineer whose jurisdiction may

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

be territorial or functional. In case of territorial sections, all works of the particular
branch within the area of jurisdiction of the section is under the control of the
Assistant Engineer/Junior engineer. In case of sections other than territorial
sections, the Assistant Engineer/Junior Engineer is under the control of specific
works or specific functions. For carrying out, executive and supervisory functions
the section have the required number of Supervisors, road workers for assisting
him in the work. In addition to executive functions, the Assistant Engineer/Junior
Engineer has to maintain the primary records of all transactions relating to works,
supplies and services under his control and render account to his superior
authorities as per rules.

1.2 Project Organization (Mughal Road Project)

Externally aided projects and specialized projects are under the Chief Engineer
(projects). Necessary technical and other staff, as per the requirement, supports
the Chief Engineer. Functions of the Chief Engineer is to be decided as per the
requirement of the project.

1.3.0 Chief Engineer Mechanical

The Setup of Chief engineer will have same as in clause 1.1.3

9
 1.3.1 Repairs of Vehicles and Machineries

The repairs and maintenances of all the vehicles and machineries is attended to in
consultation and with the approval, wherever necessary, of the Department. The
concerned Mechanical Divisions to conduct fuel consumption testing, estimates for
repair and maintenance, work supervision for departmental vehicles, inspection
and issue of fitness certificate for road construction equipments of contractors,
work supervision for repair and maintenance of road construction equipments, road
roller, refrigerators, chiller plants HVAC, Air conditioners etc. They conduct
valuation of vehicles (also for scrapped vehicles), recommendation for
condemnation etc.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 1

1.3.2 PMGSY (Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojna)

The PMGSY wing of the Department shall deal with planning, project preparation,
construction, maintenance of roads and bridges of rural and urban area works as
per the guidelines of MORD, GOI. It has its headquarters in the both regions of
Jammu and Kashmir. Each is under the control of a Chief Engineer and shall have
same setup as mentioned under clause 1.1.3

1.3.3 Planning of PMGSY

The Planning guidelines for implementation of PMGSY programme are drafted

and implemented by National Rural Infrastructure Development Agency (NRIDA)
for various schemes viz PMGSY-I, PMGSY-II, PMGSY-III and PMGSY -IV etc.
the details are also available on www.omms.nic.in.

10
Chapter 2

2.1 Duties & Responsibilities

General
The duties and responsibilities of the officers of the department are given below.

CHAPTER - 2
As regards other officers, they shall continue carrying out such duties and hold
such responsibilities, as at present, based on existing rules, orders of superior
officers and or conventions until they are modified.
In addition, the following are considered as part of the duties of every officer of
the department.
1. Every officer to, if called upon by his superior officers, carry out as a temporary
measure, in addition to his duties and responsibilities, those of another officer

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

who is on leave or otherwise not available.
2. Every officer to carry out any duties as assigned to him by his superior officers.
3. If an officer has to be absent from his post on leave or for other reasons, he, or his
superior officer to make necessary arrangement for the conduct of the work in the
absence of the officer.
4. Every officer to ensure adequate care for protection of Government property under
his charge.
5. Every officer to abide by the directions issued by a superior officer.
6. Every officer to safeguard the interest of the govt. especially during
emergencies and natural calamities.
7. All officers to exhibit a high level of co-operation and work with tandem with other
officers of the government.
8. PWD Officers who are entrusted with execution of works to strictly adhere to the
provisions of the safety code and protection arrangements.
9. All Engineers are responsible for ensuring that the environmental
requirements warranted in the Manual are met in their respective job functions.
10. Wherever necessary, adequate barricading or other means of isolating weak spots
in structures under use to be provided with until the weakness is removed. In
addition, warning notices to also be displayed.
11. In respect of structures under maintenance of the PWD, vulnerable portions to be
periodically inspected and if any weakness is noticed steps to be under taken
urgently to strengthen or replace the weak portions of the structure. Chief
Engineers to issue appropriate detailed instructions in this regard applicable to
various types of structures like roads, buildings, bridges, underpasses, flyovers and
culverts etc.

11
 12. PWD Officers to oversee sufficient environment protection arrangements are
strictly observed in the office premises as well as at work sites.
13. Every officer in charge of project preparation and execution to oversee that
minimum disturbance is caused to individuals or community in terms of loss of
physical assets, access and livelihood.
14. If there is obstruction in the discharge of duties of any officer by an outsider,
He/she to seek legal redressal/ help of the police to discharge his duties without
interference.
15. All officers to guide and control the work of their subordinates. In case of any
disobedience, malingering, insolence, etc on the part of the subordinates, action as
warranted under service rules to be followed.
CHAPTER - 2

2.2 Development Commissioner Works

The Development Commissioner Works is responsible for the efficient
and effective functioning of technical aspects of the department and shall:

1. Provide Technical Guidance for ensuring both quality and progress of work.
2. Ensure co-ordination of activities of different wings of the department.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

3. Conduct departmental enquiries and if necessary, frame charges against the

delinquent employee(s) involved.
4. Conduct random inspection of PWD offices to ascertain whether all the records
are maintained as per PWD Manual.
5. To oversee quality control mechanism of all sub ordinate Engineering Wings for
efficient results

12
2.3 Chief Engineer

It is the responsibility of Chief Engineer to ensure that the functions relating to his
wing are carried out efficiently. For this purpose, he requires to arrange to:

1. Ensure that policies of government in regard to development programmes are

implemented in a timely manner.
2. Plan, and co-ordinate works based on budget allocations.
3. Advise government on all technical matters under his control through the
Development Commissioner Works or those referred by the government.
4. Give timely instructions and guidance to subordinate officers on various matters.
5. Issue approval for publishing the information on the website (JKPWDOMS) relating

CHAPTER - 2
to his wing.
6. Inspect major work sites and works which require his guidance or instruction,
record the comments in the work spot order book and circulate the inspection note
to all concerned for follow up action.
7. Have a proper assessment of the requirements of essential items of stores and to
have them procured, stocked and distributed according to necessity.
8. Timely allot the funds under various heads as per budget allocation to the various
divisions.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

9. Ensure that works being tendered has prior fund allocation.
10. Exercise administrative, financial and technical powers delegated to him.
11. See that the rules regarding accounting and financial control at various levels are
properly enforced.
12. Prepare details for answering legislative assembly questions, submissions and
budget speech for the Government.
13. Have a system of monitoring progress of work and appropriate corrective steps
wherever required.
14. Before the commencement of a financial year, the Chief Engineers to prepare a
programme on all ongoing works and submit to Government.
15. Without waiting for any notice or call from Public Accounts
Committee/Committee on Public Undertakings, submit explanatory notes on
paragraphs and reviews included in Audit Reports, C&AG Reports indicating the
action taken or proposed to be taken. This may be done within a period of two
months of publication/presentation of reports in the Legislature.
16. Submit monthly statements showing progress of clearance of audit objections to
the Administrative Department of the Secretariat and take necessary steps to clear
such objections before the close of the Financial year
17. Designate a senior officer for ensuring prompt attention to audit objections and
inspection reports
18. Periodically review and monitor the quality control system.
19. Accord sanction for investigation estimates according to powers delegated.
20. Review progress of works in half yearly conferences. His observations to be
recorded in the minutes, and to be forwarded to all subordinate officers
21. Allocate maintenance fund to each Division at the begning of every financial year
by setting apart a portion of it as reserve for carrying out emergency works.
22. Scrutinize details furnished in the budget estimates submitted by the Divisional
/Circle Officers and furnish proposals to government.
23. Approve proposal for departmental execution and issue orders fixing ceiling cost

13
 24. Report to Government on old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals and any other item
of archaeological importance found on excavation any ancient masonry or other
old work of interest be opened up, or any religious edifice or relic be involved in
removal or destruction in the execution of a work
25. To conduct annual administrative inspections of circle and divisional offices.
Besides other things the administrative inspection team shall specifically ensure
that the records of the offices are maintained and are in safe custody. The team
shall also ensure that the digitization of records is in place and in absence of the
same shall recommend strong punitive action against the erring officers/officials.
26. To ensure mutation of revenue documents in favour of the department in case of
land/ other properties purchased by the department for road widening, establishment
of offices, etc.
27. Participate in meetings of Government tender committee, Chief Engineers‘
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

committee and Chief Engineers‘ tender committee.

In addition to the above, the Chief Engineer to carry out such other functions
assigned to him by government by virtue of any act or rules.

2.4 Technical Officer to C.E

Technical officer to C.E posted in the Chief Engineer‘s office is to assist the Chief
Engineer in all official matters.
The T.O to Chief Engineer is required to process all the technical and
administrative correspondence/ documents at his level and submit the same to the
Chief Engineer for final orders.

2.5 Superintending Engineer

The Superintending Engineer is controlling officer of a circle and has to exercise
administrative and technical control over the various Divisions under his
jurisdiction in order to ensure efficient functioning of the departmental activities in
that circle. His responsibilities include:
1. Issue of appropriate instructions in regard to investigation for new works wherever
necessary.
2. Providing guidance in the matter of design to be followed for major works or
works of a complicated nature.
3. Obtain the DPR of original works from the Executive Engineer and process the
DPR within his powers and submit to the Chief Engineer if exceeding his powers of
sanction.
4. Scrutinizing estimates and revised estimates, supplementary estimates
requiring sanctions of authorities higher than the Executive Engineer and
sanctioning them or seeking sanction thereof in accordance with the delegation
of powers after verifying through site inspection the correctness and adequacy
of the proposal.
5. Inviting tenders through the Website/print media and arranging contracts of works,
supplies etc, in accordance with the rules and the delegation of powers and for all
prequalification works.
6. Periodically inspecting all important works and also the works which require his
guidance in the matter of execution. Inspections is to be purposeful and to cover
examination of quality, progress, difficulties in execution, achieving of the objectives,

14
 etc to record comments in the work spot order book and circulate the inspection note
to all concerned for follow up action.
7. Checking expenditure against budget grant as a subordinate controlling officer and
taking timely steps to move for re-appropriations, surrender of funds or
supplemental grant as may be necessary.
8. Ensuring that sanctioned staff is made available in the various offices etc. under his
jurisdiction as per rules.
9. Annual Inspection of the Divisional offices under his jurisdiction with a view to
ensure that the system of work in the Division is in place. He shall also specifically
ensure safety and instant availability of official record and digitization of the same.
He shall also recommend punitive measures in case of deficiency in maintenance

CHAPTER - 2
or safety of office record. The inspection shall also cover various aspects of the
questionnaire given as Appendix 200A and the same forwarded to the concerned
Chief Engineer. He shall also conduct technical audit in files in respect of all
Divisions under the circle every year and randomly check the bills finalized during
previous financial year.
10. Controlling matters connected with the establishment within his delegation such as
leave, transfers and postings, promotions, disciplinary action etc.
11. Collecting, scrutinizing and coordinating all necessary information for the
preparation of budget estimates of the circle under his jurisdiction.
12. Giving technical advice or opinion on matters within his jurisdiction referred to him by

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Government, etc.
13. Directing relief and protection measures to be taken with the resources available under
his jurisdiction in the event of unforeseen calamities like flood, fire, earthquake etc.
In the event of such work being organized by other departments, cooperating with such
work to the extent necessary.
14. He shall hold periodical conference / meetings with Executive Engineers under his
control to review the progress of various works record and circulate the minutes
and report to the Chief Engineer,
15. Suggesting measures for improving the technical and administrative efficiency of
the department taking into account the technical development, which has taken
place and other relevant matters.
16. Monitoring follow-up actions for ensuring timely response of the UT/ State
Government to an audit para, draft paras and there shall be a system for discussions
with the Principal Audit Officer
17. To promptly initiate action against contractors doing inferior quality works based
on the report of the executive engineer or during his/her inspections.

2.6 Executive Engineer

The Executive Engineer is responsible for proper execution of all works under his
charge. For this purpose, he shall take timely action for the following:
1) Ensure that project reports (PPR/DPR) are prepared as per the relevant guidelines
with proper surveys, data, design, estimation, project execution schedule, etc. and
get the same administratively approved from the competent authority.
2) To ensure that concerned AEE has checked the correctness of proposals at the sites
during scrutiny of estimates and adequacy of provisions and give instructions
wherever required.
3) To move and obtain possession of land required for execution.

15
 4) Invite tenders as per rules and to make contract arrangements.
5) To forecast and take steps to procure required materials and tools and plant for
meeting departmental obligation in contract work.
6) To provide adequate staff as per the operational needs of the Division. To
supervise and manage these staff to ensure that they carry out the duties adequately
and in a professional manner
7) To inspect works during execution and ensure that the good construction
practices are followed as per standard codes of practice. Quality control checks
are done as per the codal requirement of the work. He is to ensure that the
project is being strictly executed as per the time line of the project
implementation schedule.
8) To arrange periodical payments and watch expenditure done on the project.
9) To deal with such other matters as may be found necessary for proper execution.
10) To submit annual proposals for development or new construction, maintenance or
repair works under his jurisdiction with all necessary information based on the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

Budget Manual.
11) To assess progress of works in monthly reviews. His observations shall be
recorded in the minutes which shall be forwarded to all subordinate officers and
senior officers as well.
12) To consolidate progress report of works in his division and forward to the Chief
Engineer and Superintending Engineer before 05th of every month.
13) To priorities works in his jurisdiction at the start of the financial year
14) To prepare the annual works programme ahead of the time and get the same
approved much in advance so that execution of works is started on the onset of
new financial year.
15) To ensure that the concerned AEE has finalized and approved materials, mix
design, job mix formulae, etc.
16) To visit sites and check execution of works frequently.
17) To record comments in the work spot order book and circulate inspection note to
all concerned for follow up action
18) To keep on record & update from time to time basic documents of property
rights of the govt./department i.e., land plans & land records including land
given on lease to private parties or corporations and govt. level approved lease
proposals & lease agreements.
19) To check the logbook of the equipments, machineries, plants and vehicles.
20) To report to the CE on old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals and any
21) other item of archeological importance found on excavation of any ancient
masonry or other old work of interest be opened up, or any religious edifice or
relic be involved in removal or destruction in the execution of a work.
22) To submit initial social assessment, check list along with all proposals for
works to be reviewed by the social cell (preliminary project report).
23) To obtain clearance from social cell for all categories of A and B wherever land
acquisition and displacement of people is involved, prior to execution of works.
24) To facilitate preparation of Land Acquisition Plan in co-ordination with Revenue
Department.
25) Executive Engineer must ensure that no tendering of works is done before getting
encumbrance free land for a project.
26) To prepare annual requirements of instruments based on the shortage arising either
from inadequate supply originally or from some of the available instruments
being in disorder in divisions, subdivisions and sections.

16
 .
27) To propose disposal of the plants at the place or where it is transferred and to
conduct auction as per sanction received from competent authority
28) To inspect major buildings /structures periodically under his charge.
29) He shall be responsible for the proper maintenance and upkeep of all structures
under the maintenance charge of the division. In particular, he shall see that.
a. The structures are systematically and carefully inspected by himself or through his
subordinates particularly vulnerable portions thereof.
b. Timely action is taken to carry out essential works to prevent deterioration.
c. Regular maintenance works are carried out at the appropriate time.
30) As the disbursing officer of the department in regard to works, supplies and
services under his charge, he has to exercise proper control over the expenditure on

CHAPTER - 2
these items in accordance with the rules and orders in force and render proper
accounts for the same to the Accountant General in the prescribed manner. His
responsibility in this regard is detailed in the J&K Public Works Account Code.
31) The Executive Engineer to exercise administrative control over the entire
establishment of his division and regulate the establishment expenditure in
accordance with rules and orders in force and to conduct periodical inspections of
Sub division offices under his control at least once in a year with a view to see that
the administration of the subdivision is carried on properly in accordance with the
rules and/or special instructions. In case of deficiency found in the sub divisional

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

workings punitive measures are enforced against the erring officers/officials.
32) In the case of Executive Engineer controlling project and in other special cases,
the control of some stores may vest with the Executive Engineer. He shall then
exercise all the controls required in the matter of procurement, stocking, issuing
and accounting of stores as a Divisional Officer under the control of stores
33) The Executive Engineer is responsible for the collection, remittance and
accounting of P. W. D. revenue realizable through the division. He has to maintain
Divisional Cash Book statements and furnish quarterly statements to the
Accountant General. He shall exercise proper control to see that the dues to
government are collected and remitted in time and leakages if any are prevented.
34) In case of emergencies such as serious natural calamities the Executive Engineer shall
liaise with the District Collector and other authorities in protecting life and property
under threat or damaged within the limit of his jurisdiction.
35) He shall perform test check of design, and estimates, etc., sanctioned by Assistant
Executive Engineer.
36) Ensure environmental aspects of all the works.
37) Periodically inspecting all works and also the works which require his guidance in the
matter of execution. Inspections shall be purposeful and shall cover examination of
quality, progress, difficulties in execution, achieving of the objectives, etc. To
record the comments in the work spot order book and circulate the inspection note to
all concerned for follow up action.
38) He shall ensure implementation of quality control mechanism.
39) Ensure that all mandatory tests have been performed at the stage of each running
bill, before payments. Executive Engineer shall verify and ensure availability of
the required test equipments for field tests as well as an updated copy of
specifications and copies of accepted schedule at sites of works.
40) Forward copy of all agreements executed by him to higher authorities.

17
 41) Ensure
that the APRs of all officers/officials in his jurisdiction are updated and
forwarded to HRD Cell annually or as and when required.

2.7 T.O to S.E

The T.O to S.E shall be of the AEE rank and shall look after all the correspondence
of the Superintending Engineer and submit relevant documents to the SE for final
orders. He shall be assisting the SE in all technical matters

2.8 Assistant Executive Engineer

1. An AEE controlling a subdivision is responsible for management of his office in all

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

respects. He is to ensure proper working of his staff in execution of all works

under his jurisdiction.
2. The officer is responsible for upholding high level of discipline in his office.
3. To maintain official decorum and official protocol in all official procedures.
4. To ensure safety of all men, machinery and works as per the latest standard codes
of practice.
5. To provide guidance to subordinate staff with regard to working in the department.
6. The Sub Divisional officer shall ensure following while framing a proposal for
construction of roads/buildings/bridges/etc.
i) He shall personally visit the proposed site to get acquainted with the environs and
requirements of the work.
ii) The officer shall ensure that proper survey work is conducted before framing of the
proposal.
iii) All investigations required for framing of proposal shall be carried out in detail
as required by the relevant codes of practice.
iv)Prepare documents for land acquisition in coordination with client, concerned
revenue authorities.
v) Get the designs/drawings prepared by the relevant agencies.
vi)Prepare PPR/DPR as per standard norms and guidelines of the department for
submission to higher authorities and approval thereof.
vii) Prepare documents for tendering as per standard guidelines.
viii) The officer shall follow relevant clearances from various stake holders.
ix) On fixing of the contract, he shall assign the work to the Junior Engineer as site
Incharge so as to have proper monitoring of the work.
x) Officer shall ensure that the executing agency has submitted bar chart/pert
chart at the inception of work so that the execution schedule of work is
finalized and approved by the executive engineer.
xi) Officer shall ensure that the executing agency/firm is having requisite
engineering/technical personnel as per the agreemental requirements.
xii) Officer shall ensure that the machinery as per site requirements are stationed
on site and are in full working condition.
xiii) The AEE shall make a checklist of all quality control measures to be adopted
during the execution at site.
xiv) Check and approve setting out of works by subordinate staff as per the
approved / standard drawings/designs.

18
xv) Officer shall get key materials tested so that the source of material is
approved.
xvi) The officer shall ensure issuance of relevant stationery to the subordinate staff
like, Quality control register, Daily visit register, Non compliance register, site
visit register, Material on site register (in case of departmental works) and
works register.
xvii) The officer shall ensure that the JE Incharge of works has established a
mechanism of good construction practices at site.
xviii) A laboratory as required at the site has been established by the contractor as
per agreement/ guidelines and is functional.
xix) All the tests are regularly done at the site and reports are being entered in QC
register which shall further be uploaded on the official online portal
JKPWDOMS.
xx) To check measure all concealed items of work and in addition 100% value
of item of each work which are not concealed, and measured by Assistant

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

Engineer/ Junior engineer (High value items in descending order).
xxi) The officer shall check bills in full and recommend to Executive Engineer for
payments as per rules.
xxii) In case of any deviation in the approved plan, same shall be brought in the
notice of EE and obtain necessary approvals for execution deviation plan.
Officer shall also submit revised estimate, deviation statement, etc.
xxiii) The officer shall forward monthly progress reports to the Executive engineer
of every work on 1st of every month which shall include progress of work
vizaviz the timeline of the project, QC measures taken and reports thereof,
delay of works if any and corrective measures taken for compensating the
same, corrective measures taken for substandard works.
xxiv) Assistant Executive Engineer shall inspect all RCC works prior to their casting
and shall be present on casting of the same.
xxv) Ensure compliance of environmental regulations
xxvi) In case of emergency, viz floods, earthquake, snow avalanches, etc the AEE
shall help in coordinating with other officers in protecting the life and property
under threat or damaged within his jurisdiction.
xxvii) To maintain and update periodically the basic documents of properties of govt.
department i.e., plans & land records.
xxviii) Periodically examine whether government materials, tools and plants etc.,
under control of his sub division are properly looked after and where ever
necessary take steps to correct inadequacies.
xxix) Initiating timely action for special repairs where these are needed to prevent
deterioration of structures/ roads under maintenance. AEE shall also make
arrangements for the execution of maintenance works according to
predetermined time table to suit the conditions.
xxx) Making timely arrangements for disposal of unserviceable or surplus
materials, tools and plant, scientific instruments etc. in consultation with the
executive engineer as per rules and regulations.
xxxi) To take over the completed structure/work from the contractor after ensuring
that all debris, balance materials, temporary construction etc., are removed and
site cleaned up.
xxxii) To hand over the completed works along with asset of completion drawings to
the concerned officer of the other department/agency.
xxxiii) To keep on record, the basic documents of property right of the govt./department
i.e., land plans & land records including land given on lease to private
19
 agencies or corporations and update it from time to time.
xxxiv) The officer shall take extra precautions in executing such items of work where
apprehensions of error are high viz earthwork items, layout and setting out of
works, fixing of founding levels, confirmation of Soil Investigation Reports
with actual site conditions, confirmation of mix designs, fixing of Proposed
Ground Levels (PGL) with respect to Natural Surface Level (NSL),
confirmation of HFL, etc and shall ensure execution of such items under strict
personal supervision.
xxxv) In case of earthwork items to be executed at site the AEE shall countersign in
ink pre-execution NSLs framed by the JE/AE in the works register of the work
and submit the same to the Executive Engineer prior to execution of the work.
The Executive Engineer shall also countersign the NSLs and keep the works
register in safe custody of the division.
xxxvi) The AEE shall initiate APRs of his subordinate staff on 1st of April and
submit to higher authorities by 15th of April every year.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

2.9. T.O. to Executive Engineer (AEE)

Technical Officer to the Executive Engineer (TO to Exen) shall assist Executive
Engineer in technical matters& also associate in the tendering process in the
division. He shall also assist the Executive Engineer in issuance of safety
certificates of bridges, culverts and buildings on regular basis which will be
submitted to chief office through circle office.
2.10 Assistant Engineer

Assistant Engineer posted in a Section shall be responsible for proper execution of

works under his/her charge. This shall include:

1 AE shall do setting out of works as per standard good practices of engineering and
ensure that works are carried out according to approved plans.
2 Forecasting and reporting the requirements of materials, tools and plant
etc. required for works sufficiently early so that they are arranged and supplied in
time.
3 Scrutinizing contractor's bills and recording accounts of materials, if any, issued for
works.
4 Supervising the progress of works and taking steps to remove bottle necks, if any.
5 Ensuring, in the case of contract works, that all the conditions of contract are
properly observed and taking appropriate action if any of these are violated.
6 Taking necessary steps for ensuring the effective execution of all works.
7 To keep and maintain of structures under his charge.
8 Survey, Investigation and collection of all field data necessary for construction of
new works or alterations and additions to existing works or maintenance of existing
structures which fall within his jurisdiction.
9 Controlling and overseeing the work of subordinate staff.
10 Ensure safe custody and rendering proper account (as per rules) of cash,
materials, scientific instruments, tools and plant etc. entrusted to him or which
pass through the section accounts.
11 Arrange urgent necessary action in case of an emergency to protect life and
government property.

20
 12 Prepare and submit valuation report of buildings and structures, as required.
13 Adopt relevant quality control measures to ensure that quality of work is as per
approved specifications.
14 Responsible for carrying out field-tests correctly and timely communication of test
results to the higher authorities.
15 To implement/ communicate to the contractor in writing about instructions and
orders issued through the work spot order book by the higher officers.
16 To forward progress report in the prescribed form for all works on or before the
third day of every month
17 To ensure taking possession of land for works after the disbursement
of compensation and assistances as per the R&R policy.
18 To handover the site to the contractor or the authorized agent within specified time

CHAPTER - 2
frame after Allotment of work/agreement by the department.
19 To recommend application for extension of time of completion requested by the
contractor.
20 To submit the completion certificate along with drawings to the higher officers for
approval.
21 To take over completed structure/work from the contractor after ensuring that all
debris, balance materials, temporary construction etc., are removed and site cleaned up.
22 To hand over the completed works along with asset of completion drawings to the
concerned officer of the other department/agency.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

23 To arrange for removal/ demolition of inferior quality work if contractor fails to do
so and charging the expenses to the contractor.
24 To inspect all buildings /structures periodically under his charge
25 Responsible for the verification, receipt, custody and issue of the stock materials
and maintenance of initial accounts of all store transactions.
26 To verify all the measurement recorded by the contractor. Assistant Engineer /
Junior Engineer shall be fully responsible for all the measurements recorded.

2.10.1 Assistant Engineer posted in Quality Control cell of the

divisional office.

Assistant Engineer posted in the Quality Control Cell of the divisional offices shall
assist the Executive Engineer in checking the quality of works at various sites.
They shall also issue quality control certificates which shall be entered in the
Quality Control Register (QCR) at the site for uploading the same in JKPWDOMS
for making the work eligible for payment.

2.11 Section Officer

The officer is under the direct control of Chief Engineer and shall be responsible
for all administrative matters in general and is responsible for the following:
1. Maintaining the administrative discipline of the direction office.
2. Assist the Chief Engineer in all administrative and personnel matters of the
direction office.
3. Processing and disposing of all the correspondence marked to him/her by the Chief
Engineer/ Technical Officer to the Chief Engineer.
4. Ensure safe custody of documents and other valuables entrusted to his/her care.

21
 5. To dispose off papers of routine nature.
6. To organize and distribute work in the headquarters unit in respect of subordinate
staff.
7. To conduct fortnightly review of the "Register of Establishment Audit objections"
and to conduct monthly inspection of the "Register of Draft Para".
8. Organise administrative inspection of all offices in the P.W.D. as per directions of
Chief Engineer and forward reports with review thereof to the respective Chief
Engineer.
CHAPTER - 2

2.12 Junior Engineer

1. Junior Engineer is a technical subordinate and is posted for supervision of works

carried out on contract, to take proper care over execution of works and in particular
attend to the following:
i) Assist the AE/AEE for collection of all field data for preparing layout, designs
and preliminary estimates.
ii) Prepare detailed drawings based on field data and approved designs.
iii) Prepare detailed estimates as per approved designs, after obtaining instructions
on provisions and rates from the Assistant Executive Engineer.
iv) To see that the plans and specifications are followed in the execution of each
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

item of work. Assist in setting out of the works.

v) Check the quality of materials on arrival at site, and to see that the materials
comply with the specifications while in use.
vi) To watch the proportion of ingredients in mortars, concrete and bituminous
premix, and ensure that they are as per standards specified for the particular item
of work concerned.
vii) Ensure that the workmanship in the execution of work is in conformity with the
relevant codes of practice.
viii) In case of earthwork items to be executed at site the concerned JE shall prepare
and sign in ink pre-execution NSLs in the works register of the work and submit
the same to the Assistant Executive Engineer prior to execution of the work. The
Assistant Executive Engineer shall also countersign the NSLs and submit to
higher officer.
ix) The officer shall take extra precautions in executing such items of work where
apprehensions of errors are high viz earthwork items, layout and setting out of
works, fixing of founding levels, confirmation of Soil Investigation Reports with
actual site conditions, confirmation of mix designs, fixing of Proposed Ground
Levels (PGL) with respect to Natural Surface level (NSL), confirmation of HFL,
check all reinforcement details before concreting, etc and shall personally
supervise and monitor execution of such items of work.
x) In case of road works the officer shall take extra precautions while finalizing the
road alignment with, finalize formation levels, set out vertical and horizontal
curves, proper road geometrics, CBR adopted in design with the site,
confirmation of HFL, etc
xi) Ensure that proper safety arrangements are implemented so as to avoid
accidents or risk of men, machinery and assets as per the standard safety
rocedures.
xii) Monitor that the contractor strictly observes general conditions of contract in the

22
 event of violation, the engineer in charge shall report the matter in writing to the
higher authority immediately.
xiii) Take charge of unserviceable dismantled materials obtained during the execution
of the work and arrange for their disposal in accordance with the standard
procedures.
xiv) The Engineer shall maintain and keep following registers/ docs always available
at the site
a). Spot Order Book, b). Site Visit Register,
c) Works Register,
d) Copy of Detailed Project Report (DPR) .
e) Copy of allotment with BOQ

xv) Verify bills submitted by the contractor and ensure all the supporting documents
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

viz, QC certificates issued by the Quality control team of the division, geo
tagged Photographs (Soft copy) and other requisite documents.
xvi) Carry out all instruction received from higher offices from time to time.
xvii) Plot the cross section and longitudinal section sheets and compute quantity of
earth work.
xviii) The Junior engineer being the custodian of the road shall at all times ensure
safety of the roads under his jurisdiction. In case of any unlawful activities, like,
unauthorized road cut, encroachments on road, government land, bridges, etc he
shall immediately put all his efforts to stop the violation and report the matter in
writing to the Assistant Executive Engineer / Executive Engineer.
xix) To have regular vigil over the avenue plantation and other road furniture, the
engineer shall ensure proper upkeep and safety of the same.
xx) Junior Engineer upon transfer shall ensure that he has closed all his/her works,
duly recorded on respective registers / M books signed by him and checked by
AEE, and shall handover all records to his immediate officer.
xxi) Besides routine duties JE shall also frame rent assessment and valuation of
structures as per the direction of the senior officers.
xxii) To affix signature on all documents and record prepared by Junior engineer.

2. When a Junior Engineer is posted to supervise execution of

works through departmental execution of works, his duties shall also include the
following:
i) Rendering assistance to the Assistant Engineer / AEE in setting out the works and
taking measurements.
ii) Sending timely intimation to the senior officer on the requirements of materials,
tools plant etc. so that there is no interruption or slackness due to lack of these
items.
iii) Receiving, temporarily storing, accounting and issuing departmental materials
required for execution of the work.
iv) Receiving, temporarily storing and issuing departmental Tools & Plant to the
labourer as and when required and returning them to the store or such other
place as directed by the Assistant Engineer/AEE when the tools &plant are no
longer required.
v) Mustering the labour twice everyday and keeping the labour roll as per rules.
vi) Allotting work to individual workmen or groups of workmen in such a manner, to
ensure efficient performance of the labours.
vii) Taking such protective measures as are necessary to ensure safety of workmen and
third parties, as also properties likely to be affected by the execution of the work.
viii) Keeping a close watch of the performance of the work and if necessary rearranging
23
 work and or regrouping workers to improve performance.
ix) Maintaining a record of the out put of work everyday, including issues of departmental
materials, if any, and periods of working of departmental machinery, if any. All this
information shall be noted down in work spot order book and duplicate and triplicate
copies of the same sent as daily reports.

2. When a Junior Engineer is posted in charge of the maintenance of roads, bridges, or

buildings or other structures, then his duties will also include:
i) Making systematic examination of the various structures under his charge and report
the condition and maintenance requirements to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
i) Where urgent steps are to be taken either for protection of property, life or restoring
communications, as for instance prevention of breaches in roads, cutting and
removing fallen trees from roads etc., these shall be arranged then and there and the
fact reported to the Assistant Executive Engineer on the same day. Departmental
labourer shall as far as possible be employed for such purposes subject to

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

availability.
ii) Supervising maintenance works and keeping accounts of materials
used, departmental tools & plant etc.
iv) Controlling the work done by Watchmen, Road guard, Supervisor and other such
persons who are to work under the J.E‘s direction.
v) Carrying out supervisory and other duties on original or maintenance works done on
roads, buildings or other structures under his control.
3. The J.E, if posted in general charge of investigation and quality control work, shall
in addition to the duties of J.E detailed above be responsible for
i) Investigation of works entrusted to him. This includes assisting in taking levels, site
survey and all other measurements at site.
i) Conducting soil investigation at locations identified by higher officers.
ii) Recording the SPT values and details of samples taken at each depth, during
subsoil exploration and ensuring its accuracy.
iv) Issuing necessary instructions to plant operators, during soil investigation
v) He shall be responsible for the correctness of the survey work, leveling or any other field
work or collection of data entrusted to their charge.

a. Supervisors (WS-I, WS-II,WS-III, WS-IV, WS-V & Landscape

Supervisor)

Supervisors posted in a section shall assist in the duties entrusted to a Junior

Engineer:
1. Assist in checking the detailed estimates for works and submit notes for issuing
technical sanction or forwarding to higher offices.
2. Keep in safe custody, scientific, and mathematical instruments, tools & plant
including machinery, pipes and accessories, spare parts of tools & plant, furniture.
3. Co-ordinate the work of subordinate staff.
4. Assist the J.E/A.E/AEE to conduct joint inspection with revenue staff for verification
of alignments.
5. Assist the superior officers in field work.

24
 b. Head Computer
A head computer shall be in the Chief Engineer‘s office who will be well-
versed
/ certified with AutoCAD and shall carryout the following duties.
1. Prepare drawings based on instructions given to him by higher officers.
2. Prepare prints/tracing of drawings.
3. Plot survey work based on field data furnished to him and mark contours in survey
drawings.
4. Check plotted sections and surveys received from subordinate officers/
Subdivisions with field book entries including checking reduction of levels.
5. Calculate quantities of various items of work involved from the designs and
drawings of structures and prepare detailed estimates.
6. Prepare data for items of work based on schedule of rates, and information
received from field regarding leads and lifts involved etc.
7. Check contractor's bills with regard to the estimates received from subordinate
offices.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

8. Verify issue of materials against requirement as per data in contractor‘s bill.

9. Prepare indents for departmental materials, Tools and Plant etc.
10. Prepare tender schedules and agreements.
11. Tabulate tenders.
12. Prepare draft letters and reports.
13. Carryout any other work that may be specifically assigned to him by superior officer.

2.14.1 Head Draftsman and Draftsman

Head Draftsman/ Draftsman in PWD office shall carryout the following duties.
1. Prepare drawings based on instructions given to him by higher officers.
3 Prepare tracing of drawings.
4 Plot survey work based on field data furnished to him and mark contours in survey
drawings
5 Check plotted sections and surveys received from subordinate officers with field
book entries including checking reduction of levels.
6 Calculate quantities of various items of work involved from the designs and
drawings of structures and prepare detailed estimate.
7 Prepare data for items of work based on schedule of rates, and
information received from field regarding leads and lifts involved etc.
8 Check contractor's bills with regard to the estimates received from subordinate
offices.
9 Verify issue of materials against requirement as per data in contractor‘s bill.
10 Prepare indents for departmental materials, tools and plant etc.
11 Prepare tender schedules and agreements.
12 Tabulate tenders.
13 Prepare draft letters and reports.
14 Carryout any other work that may be specifically assigned to him by Executive Engineer
and other superior officers.

c. Duties of various branches in the Chief Engineers, Circle, Division

Each PWD office has technical, financial and establishment wings. who have the
following duties:

25
2.15.1 Technical

The Technical branch in a PWD office shall be responsible for taking action on the
following,
1. Approval of structural designs.
2. Scrutiny of estimates: Any modification in the provisions in an estimate received
from the subordinate office shall be made only after the specific orders of the head
of the office. Scrutiny of estimate and issuing a copy of approved abstract of
estimate, data and detailed estimate to lower level office for execution.
3. Issuing Administrative and Technical Sanction for estimates as per prescribed
delegations. Scrutiny / sanctioning of estimates.
4. Preparation of tender schedule, tabulation of tenders, Scrutiny of tenders.
5. Submission of tenders to higher authorities.
6. Preparation of agreement documents.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

7. Scrutiny of bills
8. In case of earth work items the final quantity shall be always checked with respect to
pre execution NSLs.
9. Scrutiny and finalization of documents submitted by drawing branch
and submission to head of the office
10. Progress report and inspection notes of works.
11. Correspondence on all technical matters and works.
12. Issue of indents for material and maintaining Indent Register.
13. Any other work entrusted by the head of office.

2.15.2 Finance.

The Finance Branch shall be responsible for.

1. Preparing monthly accounts and forwarding the same to Accountant General.
2. Making payments as per codal procedures and norms
3. Preparation of works budget.
4. Preparation of capex budget and revised budget.
5. Preparation of schedule of settlement with treasuries and maintaining proper
registers.
6. Follow up action on audit notes of Accountant General.
7. Maintenance of audit files.
8. Maintenance of relevant registers such as Material at Site account, Survey Report,
Cash Book, Work Abstract, Contractor's Ledger etc.
9. Correspondence on finance matters.
10. Processing and passing of TA Bills
11. Any other work entrusted by the Head of the Office.

26
 2.15.3 Establishment

Establishment Branch is responsible for the following:

1. Administration matters of employees.
2. Transfers and postings.
3. All establishment matters including leave, salaries, medical reimbursement etc.
4. Disbursing salary and allowances of staff.
5. Preparation of establishment budget and revised budget.
6. Preparation of pension papers/sanctioning of pension.
7. Maintain the accounts of contingency funds.
8. Maintaining Service Books of all employees
9. Registration of contractors
10. Maintaining of all relevant registers.
11. Follow up action on audit notes of Accountant General.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

12. General correspondence on establishment matters.

13. Any other work entrusted by the Head of the Office.

The head of concerned branches shall forward files of works entrusted to them to the
head of the office through technical officer.
Agreement for works executed in Division and Circle offices shall be handed over
to the A.A.O of the division and the circle office respectively for safe custody who
shall maintain a separate register of agreements.

d. Electrical Wing

2.16.1 Executive Engineer Electrical

1. Scrutinizing all electrical design and drawings and submitting to Chief Engineer for
approval
2. Conducting site inspections and discussions with officials of user department,
assessing the requirements, incorporating any omissions, etc. for finalizing the design
and drawings and submitting to Superintending Engineer Electrical
3. Overall administrative and technical control of the electrical lab
4. Conducting necessary test with support of sub-ordinate technical staff to determine
the quality of various electrical materials
5. Conducting / supervising necessary tests within /outside the lab if such facility is not
available in the lab for giving approval to electrical materials
6. Issuing certificates for the materials tested
7. Recommending quality control measures in electrical works and
conducting inspection of work sites if necessary
8. Preparing inspection notes and submitting to Chief Engineer civil
9. Conduct training to the officials of PWD electrical wing.
10. Keeping in safe custody the samples of electrical materials approved by the
appropriate authority.
11. Executive Engineer Electrical for confirmation of material supplies or till the next
set of materials is approved by the authority He shall compare the samples in case
of dispute and conduct random checking whether the supplied materials are in
conformity with the standards and samples produced.

27
 12. Shall be responsible for any other matters concerning electrical design, drawing,
quality control and testing assigned to him
13. Verifying the quality of different makes of materials.
14. Inspecting all major works in every district.
15. Sanctioning of all estimates within delegated powers.
16. Issuing instructions for preparation of annual Indents for materials, Tools and Plants
etc
17. Making payment to Electrical works
18. Ensuring disposal of all technical issues from subordinate staff by devising a
mechanism to clear all the correspondence in a timely manner at all levels.
19. Taking initiative in suggesting technical improvements and energy conservation
measures to CE.
20. Any other duties assigned to him by the superior officers

CHAPTER - 2
2.16.2 Assistant Executive Engineer, Electrical

He shall be responsible for the following.

1. Checking estimates submitted by the AE/JE.
2. Inspecting works during execution, exercising quality control, check
measuring works, scrutinizing bills etc.
3. Forwarding Bills for payments to the concerned Executive Engineer.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

4. Following the instructions received from higher officers from time to time regarding
proper execution of the work.
5. Carrying out any of the duties that may be specifically assigned to him by superior
officers.
6. To represent the department in district wise meeting and conferences concerning
electrical matters.

2.16.3 Assistant Engineer, Electrical

The general responsibilities defined for the Assistant Engineer (Civil) whichever is
applicable will apply to the Assistant Engineer (Electrical) also. In addition, he shall be
responsible for:
1. Guiding and controlling of the work of the electrical staff attached to the section.
2. Arranging rectification of defects reported to him by the field staff and restoring supply.
3. Guiding in proper maintenance of installations and safety measures.
4. Periodical testing of installations, noting the test readings and making timely action
for rectification of defect, when the test readings are not within the safe limits.
5. Preparing and giving instruction for the preparation of estimates for electrification
works and verifying the adequacy in conformity with standards &norms.
6. Inspecting works in progress and giving necessary instructions
7. Taking measurements of all works and preparation of bills.
8. Carrying out any and other duties that may be assigned to him by his superior
officers.

28
 2.16.4 Junior Engineer, Electrical
His duties shall include:
1. To supervise and record measurement in M.Book all under ground works like cable
laying, earthing, concealed pipe etc and work within the TS powers of Assistant
Engineer.
2. Inspection and verification of inventory register and ensuring that it is maintained
properly and entries are made up to date.
3. Overall supervision of the work in the section
4. Arranging shift duty of the staff and allocation of work to subordinates.
5. Maintaining Material at Site Accounts.
6. Security of the inventory Register.
7. Marking of points of works, supervision of works and taking required follow-up
action.
8. Periodical inspection of installation.
9. Preparation of estimate of works.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

10. Keeping watch over the progress of work and reporting to the Assistant Engineer,
Electrical, about the same.
11. Checking the quality of materials on arrival at site and at the time of usage on work
to see that they comply with specifications.
12. Checking the quality of work under execution and checking whether the work is
executed as per agreement condition.
13. In the event of violation of any of the items referred as (11) and(12)
above, reporting the matter to Assistant Engineer/ AEE, Electrical, in writing, then
and there.
14. Maintaining work spot order book as per rules and keeping an account of the
daily usage of departmental materials on the work.
15. Taking charge dismantled materials obtained during the execution of work and
arranging for their disposal as ordered by higher officers.
16. Keeping account of Tools & Plant, if any, issued to Contractor.
17. Attending shift duty including holidays when posted in generating station/
substation.
18. Any other duties that may be assigned to him by his superior officers.

29
e. Design, Inspection& Quality Control (DIQC)

2.17.1 Chief Engineer

The Chief Engineer DIQC shall have the following duties.

It shall be the responsibility of Chief Engineer to ensure that the functions relating
to his wing are carried out efficiently. For this purpose, he shall among routine
duties arrange to:

1. Ensure that policies of government in regard to development programmes are

implemented in a timely manner.
2. Plan, and co-ordinate works based on budget allocations.
3. Advise government on all technical matters under his control through the DCW or

CHAPTER - 2
those referred to by the government.
4. Give timely instructions and guidance to subordinate officers on various matters.
5. Timely allot funds under various heads as per budget allocation to the various
divisions.
6. Exercise administrative, financial and technical powers delegated to him.
7. See that the rules regarding accounting and financial control at various levels are
properly enforced.
8. Prepare details for answering legislative assembly questions, submissions and

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

budget speech for the Government.
9. Have a system of monitoring the progress of work and the appropriate corrective
steps wherever required.
10. Before the commencement of a financial year, he shall prepare a programme on all
training programs and submit to government.
11. without waiting for any notice or call from Public Accounts Committee/Committee
on Public Undertakings, submit explanatory notes on paragraphs and reviews
included in Audit Reports, C&AG Reports indicating the action taken or proposed
to be taken. This may be done within a period of two months of
publication/presentation of reports in the Legislature.
12. Submit monthly statements showing progress of clearance of audit objections to
the Administrative Department of the Secretariat and take necessary steps to clear
such objections before the close of the Financial year
13. Periodically review and monitor the quality control system.
14. Review progress of works in half yearly conferences. His observations shall be
recorded in the minutes, which shall be forwarded to all subordinate officers
15. To conduct annual administrative inspections of the circle and divisional offices and
other units. Besides other things the administrative inspection team shall specifically
ensure that the records of the offices are maintained and are in safe custody. The team
shall also ensure that the digitization of records is in place & in absence of the same
shall recommend strong punitive action against the erring officers/officials.
16. He shall periodically review the functioning of various divisions of the wing so as
to assess the vetting of designs completed and pending with the department. He
shall also devise a mechanism for effective and quality disposal of work.
17. He shall make efforts on development of new technologies to be adopted in the
field for having better and cost effective alternatives.
18. He shall also build a state of the art Library with IT support so as to provide online
and offline library support to all PWD engineers.
19. The Chief engineer shall establish the dedicating division for updating the
30
 Schedule of Rates annually.
20. TheC.E shall ensure submission of APRS of his subordinate staff to the administrative
department in the month of April every year .

2.17.2 Superintending Engineer

The S.E shall be assisting the chief Engineer in all administrative and technical
matters. He shall focus on developing an effective management system of clearing
and vetting of designs in a stipulated time frame. The projects shall a standard time
limit of 45 days from the date of receipt of the project. However, the intending
departments shall clear all the observations within overall time period of 15 days.
He shall also develop a flow chart for effective management system so that the
designs are cleared in a stipulated time frame. In case of designs having deficient
information the same shall be shifted from this flow chart and placed on a separate
plate form.
He shall approve the designs submitted to him by the divisional offices.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

He shall also develop various design standard publications which can be used as
already recknor in the field and save considerable time in preparing the designs and
getting them vetted by concerned authorities.
The officer shall also coordinate the concern organizations like IRC, BIS etc. about
the field and design observations for incorporation in the relevant codes.
The officer shall also setup teams for development of standard software‘s for
framing of various standard PPRs the same are being used by different
departments for preparation of project reports, this will ensure uniformity in project
preparations.
Any other duty assigned to him by superior officer.
2.17.3 Executive Engineer
The Executive Engineer after receiving the designs from the S.E shall peruse the
same and assign it to AEE for checking the concept, methodology, and design
calculations of the same.
The Executive Engineer shall specify the date of completion by which AEE shall
have to submit the design depending on the quantum of work involved. The EE
shall constantly monitor the process of designing/ vetting by the AEE. He shall
ensure that the designs are not held up due to delays by the officer or by clearing of
the observations by the intending department.
In Case of delays due to clearance of observations or non cooperation of the
intending department the matter shall be immediately conveyed to the higher
authorities for a resolution by the DCW. However, the process should in no case
go beyond the standard time of 45 days. In case of projects going beyond the
deadline of 45 days the same shall have to be supported with explanation for the
delays.
He should update all the software available with the department and make them
available to the subordinate staff. He shall also keep an eye on latest developments
on new software‘s and new trends and techniques in the design. And make efforts
to keep the same available in the divisions.He shall also ensure that the latest and
updated codes having legal validity are followed in the vetting of designs.
Any other duty assigned to him by superior officer.
2.17.4 Assistant Executive Engineer

AEE shall on receipt of projects have a holistic perusal of the same so that the
proposals submitted by the intending departments are qualified on the basis of the
parameters of the project. He shall cross check all the design as per the latest
relevant codal procedures.
31
 He shall also ensure the validity of the additions of the relevant codes of practice
so that the codes deleted from a specific date are not followed its legal validity
period.
He shall ensure that the projects are completed within their stipulated time frame.
The officer shall inculcate sense of scientific temperament in his subordinate team
in dealing with the designs so that the engineers working under him develop into
designers of future.
Any other duty assigned to him by superior officer.

2.17.5 Assistant Engineer

A.E shall work as an Assistant with AEE and shall carry out works assigned to
him. The A.E shall do any other official duty assigned to him by superior officer.

2.17.6 Junior Engineer

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

The J.E shall work as an Assistant with AEE and shall carry out works assigned to
him.
Any other duty assigned to him by superior officer.

2.18.1 Research Officer

R.O shall be responsible for overall conducting of the various tests, studies and
research conducted in the RRMTL.
R.O shall be responsible / accountable to the Chief Engineer/ S. E in all official
matters, with particular reference to the following:
1. Ensure the testing procedures are strictly done in accordance with the relevant
codes of practice
2. To develop a foolproof mechanism of sample collection.
3. Develop a database of the UT/ State for creating various zones with regard to soil
profile (SBC, CBR, etc.) type of soil other parameters etc.
4. Submitting quarterly progress report of the tests and research studies conducted by
the RRMTL to the Chief Engineer.
5. Inspecting various sites, where investigations are in progress and
issuing necessary instructions.
6. Liaise with the quality control units established in various parts of the UT / State to
ensure proper co-ordination and monitoring progress of those units.
7. Authorize the conduct of investigation works.
8. Ensure the collection of all necessary data required for the design.
9. Initiate actions for applied research.
10. Assist the Chief Engineer in other matters entrusted to him.

32
 2.18.2 Deputy Research Officer

He shall be responsible for the following:

1. Assist the Research officer in day to day working of the RRMTL.
2. Assist the Research officer in maintaining the labs and conducting
testing procedures of different materials as per standard codal procedures.
3. Assist the Research officer/ Director, Research & Quality Control, as and when
required.
4. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.
5. Ensure the testing procedures are strictly done in accordance with the relevant
codes of practice
6. To ensure a foolproof mechanism of sample collection.
7. Develop a database of the UT/ State for creating various zones with regard to soil
profile (SBC, CBR, etc) type of soil other parameters etc.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

8. Submitting quarterly progress report of the tests and research studies conducted by
the RRMTL to the R.O.
9. Inspecting various sites, where investigations are in progress and
issuing necessary instructions.
10. Ensure the collection of all necessary data required for the design form the
intending department .
11. Initiate actions for applied research.
12. Assist the R.O in other matters entrusted to him.
13. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers

2.18.3 Assistant Research Officer

He shall be responsible for the following:
1. Ensure the testing procedures are strictly done in accordance with the relevant
codes of practice
2. To ensure a foolproof mechanism of sample collection.
3. Develop a database of the UT/ State for creating various zones with regard to soil
profile (SBC, CBR, etc) type of soil other parameters etc.
4. Submitting quarterly progress report of the tests and research studies conducted by
the RRMTL to the D.R.O.
5. Inspecting various sites, where investigations are in progress and issuing necessary
instructions.
6. Authorize the conduct of investigation works.
7. Ensure the collection of all necessary data required for the design.
8. Initiate actions for applied research.
9. Assist the D.R.O in other matters entrusted to him.
10. Any other duties assigned by the superior officers.

2.19 Road Safety Cell.

2.19.1 Superintending Engineer, Road Safety Cell

Superintending Engineer shall head the Road Safety Cell of the department.
He Shall be supported by two executive engineers, 01 at Jammu and 01 at
Kashmir.

33
 It shall be the responsibility of the Road Safety Cell to coordinate the road safety
activities implemented by the concerned executing divisions. However, the
implementation of road safety works shall be done through the regular divisional
offices. All the Engineers of cell should be imparted sufficient and regular
trainings on the subject, at least two engineers of the cell shall be trained as
Certified Road Safety Auditors.
The responsibilities of S.E Road safety cell shall be as under
1. He shall be controlling officer for the Central Road Safety Cell under the overall
control of Chief Engineer DIQC
2. Maintain and implement road safety policy and procedures of road safety and
audits.

CHAPTER - 2
3. Conduct road safety audit by ensuring whether the roads are confirming to
standard road safety audit requirements
4. Direct the Executive Engineers / field officers regarding road safety measures.
5. Coordinate with other agencies like traffic police, trauma care centers and motor
vehicles department
6. SE, Road Safety Cell shall liaise and correspond with Road Safety Authority at
UT/state level.
7. The team shall audit all the roads as per road hierarchy within a specified period of
time as desired by CE, DIQC/ DCW.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

8. S.E. Road Safety shall be submitting the road safety audit reports to CE, DIQC/
DCW for implementation by respective chief engineers.
9. Road safety wing shall monitor the work to ensure proper implementation of road
safety audit recommendations by respective executing agencies.
10. The road safety auditors shall issue a certificate to the concerned
divisions/executive agencies on account of road safety clearance after which only
the final payments shall be released to the firm/contractor by the
divisions/executing agencies.
11. Once certificate issued, it will be responsibility of road safety auditor if any road
accident happens due to deficiency in implementation of road safety audit.
12. The Superintending engineer shall personally visit minimum 30% of the total roads
audited by the cell supported with geo tagged photographs.
13. The S.E shall direct E.E to formulate teams for conducting studies at accident-
prone locations and suggesting remedial measures to eliminate possibility of
accidents.
2.19.2 Executive Engineer, Road Safety Cell
1. He shall be assisting superintending engineer Central Road Safety Cell
in implementing the road safety procedures and Road Safety Audits.
2. Coordinate the activities of the Cell in his Division.
3. Conduct road safety audit by ensuring whether the roads are confirming to
standard road safety audit requirements
4. Direct the Assistant Executive Engineers / field officers regarding road safety
measures.
5. Coordinate with other agencies like traffic police, trauma care centers and
motor vehicles department.
6. Executive Engineer Road Safety Cell shall liaise and correspond with Road
Safety Authority at his level.
7. He shall ensure audit of all the roads as per road hierarchy within a specified period
of time

34
 8. He shall monitor the work to ensure proper implementation of road safety audit
recommendations by respective executing agencies.
9. He shall ensure training of all the engineers working in the division for road safety
and road safety audit.
10. The Executive Engineer Road Safety shall issue road safety clearance certificate to
the concerned divisions on the recommendations of road safety auditors after
which only the final payments shall be released to the firm/contractor by the
divisions/executing agencies.
11. The E.E shall formulate teams for conducting studies at accident-prone
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

locations and suggesting remedial measures to eliminate possibility of

accidents.
12. The executive engineer shall personally visit minimum 40% of the total roads
audited by the cell supported with geo tagged photographs
13. Direct the field officers regarding road safety measures.
14. Preparing Road Safety Manuals, annual road safety engineering programs
including modifications. Preparation of annual budgets for road safety activities.
15. Procuring consultancy services on road safety issues with approval of
competent authority.
16. Arrange seminars / workshops on road safety engineering and awareness
17. The E.E shall be uploading all the data on the official website of JKPWDOMS
regarding number of roads audited with their road safety audit report.

35
2.20 Ministerial Staff
2.20.1 Section Officer
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

2.20.3Senior Stenographer

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

2.20.4 Head Assistant

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

CHAPTER - 2
2.20.5 Junior Stenographer

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

2.20.6 Senior Assistant

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

2.20.7 Junior Assistant

Junior Assistant shall carryout any or all the ministerial duties as per Manual of
Office Procedure.

2.20.8 Administrative Assistant (Treasury) / Cashier

He shall be responsible for :

1. Ensuring timely preparation, encashment and disbursement of pay, other
payments & allowances of all non gazetted staff and auditing of salary bill / TA
bills etc prepared by gazetted officers for its encashment and disbursal in the Chief
Engineer‘s office.
2. He shall be under the control of timely preparation, encashment and disbursement
of contingent bills.
3. To maintain proper accounts for all the transactions and submit monthly accounts
to the Accountant General.

2.20.9Senior Superintendents

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

2.20.10 Junior Superintendents

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

2.20.11 Head Clerk

Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure.

36
 2.21. Chauffer/ Driver-I/ Driver-II
Their duties will include:

1. Drive the vehicles carefully with in the prescribed speed limits observing all the traffic
regulations.
2. Keep the vehicles in road worthy condition. This will include washing and cleaning
of vehicles.
3. Check water levels in radiator and battery, oil level in crankcase, fuel level in fuel tank
and tyre pressures every day before the vehicle is taken out.
4. Once a fortnight check oil level in gearbox and brake fluid.
5. Report any mechanical fault or damage immediately to controlling officer or the
officer in-charge.
6. Attend to routine maintenance as prescribed such as topping up of oil, filling
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

radiator, cleaning of oil and fuel filters, inflating tyres, applying grease where
required, etc.
7. When the vehicle is taken out for servicing point out any items needing special
attention and be available at the servicing station or work-shop to see that servicing
is done properly.
8. When the vehicle is taken for maintenance or for special repairs, assist in the
completion of the repairs or carry out such other jobs as are ordered to be done by
the officer In- charge of the vehicle.
9. In case of accidents the driver shall report the matter to the nearest police station
and the officer in charge of the vehicle and abide by instructions of the police in
regard to further movement of the vehicle.
10. Be in charge of the tools and spares of the vehicle entrusted to him.
11. Keep account of materials like fuel, lubricating oil etc. entrusted to his care.
12. Maintain log books as prescribed.
13. Take order from the officer in charge of the vehicle in regard to trips to be made,
passengers or materials to be carried etc.
14. Intimate in-advance the date of renewal of tax, insurance, pollution test, fuel tests
etc.
15. They will also carry out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to him by
their superior officers.

2.22. Peon:
Duties as per Manual of Office Procedure

2.23 Finance Wing

2.23.1 Director Finance, Financial Advisor /Chief Accounts Officer / Accounts

Officer (A.O)

Role and functions of Director Finance

i. To advice the Administrative Department on a Financial matters falling within the

field of delegated powers;

37
ii. To ensure that the schedule for preparation of budget is adhered to by the
Department and the budget is drawn up according to the instructions issued by the
Finance Department from time to time;
iii. To scrutinize budget proposals thoroughly before sending them to the Finance
Department
iv. Release of funds timely under Capex/Revenue expenditure budget,
v. To see that complete departmental accounts and to ensure in particular that the
department not only maintain accounts of expenditure against Grants or
Appropriation directly controlled by it, but also obtain figures of expenditure
incurred by the subordinate offices so that the department has complete month-to-
month picture of entire expenditure falling within the jurisdiction;

CHAPTER - 2
vi. To watch and review the progress of expenditure against sanctioned grants
through maintenance of necessary Control Registers and to issue timely warnings
to controlling authorities where the progress of expenditure is not oven;
vii. To ensure the proper maintenance of the Registers of liabilities and commitments
as required under the state financial/Services Rules to facilitate realistic
preparation of budget estimates timely surrender of anticipated savings;
viii. To screen the proposals for supplementary demands for grants;

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

ix. To identify in particular specific savings in cases of creation of posts and to
maintain a register for this purpose;
x. To scrutinizing proposals for delegation of powers to subordinate authorities;
xi. To keep himself closely associated with the formulation of schemes and important
expenditure proposals from their initial stage;
xii. To associate himself with the evaluation of progress/performance in the case of
projects and other continuing schemes and to see that the result of such evaluation
schemes and to see that the result of such evaluation studies are taken into account
in the budget formulation;
xiii. To watch the settlement of audit objections inspection, reports, draft audit para‘s
etc.
xiv. To ensure prompt action on Audit Reports and Appropriation Accounts, Reports
of PAC Estimate committee and committee on Public undertakings;
xv. To screen all expenditure proposals requiring to be referred to finance department
for concurrence of comments;
xvi. To ensure regular and timely submission of reports and returns required by the
Finance Department
xvii. To process all cases involving opinion/ advice/interpretation of rules/evaluations
for reference to Finance Department and to ensure that:-
a. The Administrative Department have come to a definite conclusion giving full and
cogent reasons thereof;
b. Approval of competent authority has been obtained;
c. Any particular proposals involving relaxation of rules is based on individual
merits of the case on such exigencies which could not be visualized while framing
the rules rather than on sympathetic/personal consideration

38
 d. The financial implications as are involved spelt out in detail giving out the
basis of calculations as well;
e. If the cases pertain to the department rules and regulations, they are examined
in the light of relevant provisions of the rules and regulations and copy of such
rules and regulations is placed invariably in the departmental file;
f. The specific issue on which opinion/concurrence of the Finance Department is
needed is framed in an unequivocal language and mentioned in the
departmental noting;
g. The department continuously updates its rules and regulations and also keeps
updated copies of the J&K Civil Service Regulations, Financial Codes, and
Budget Manual etc. and refers to them before making out a performance to the
Finance Department.

Role of Chief Accounts Officer/AOs at HoD level

a. To advice the Chief Engineer on a Financial matters falling within the field of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

delegated powers;
b. To ensure that the schedule for preparation of budget is adhered to by the
Department and the budget is drawn up according to the instructions issued by
the Finance Department from time to time;
c. To scrutinize budget proposals thoroughly before sending them to the
Administrative Department
d. Release of funds to the Subordinate offices after approval from Chief Engineer.
e. To see that complete departmental accounts and to ensure in particular that the
department not only maintain accounts of expenditure against Grants or
Appropriation directly controlled by it, but also obtain figures of expenditure
incurred by the subordinate offices so that the department has complete month-
to-month picture of entire expenditure falling within the jurisdiction;
f. To watch and review the progress of expenditure against sanctioned grants
through maintenance of necessary Control Registers and to issue timely
warnings to controlling authorities where the progress of expenditure is not
oven;
g. To ensure the proper maintenance of the Registers of liabilities and
commitments as required under the state financial/Services Rules to facilitate
realistic preparation of budget estimates timely surrender of anticipated savings;
h. To screen financial part of the proposals for supplementary demands for grants;
i. To identify in particular specific savings in cases of creation of posts and to
maintain a register for this purpose;
j. To scrutinizing proposals for delegation of powers to subordinate authorities;
k. To keep himself closely associated with the formulation of schemes and
important expenditure proposals from their initial stage;
l. To associate himself with the evaluation of progress/performance in the case of
projects and other continuing schemes and to see that the result of such
evaluation schemes and to see that the result of such evaluation studies are taken
into account in the budget formation;
m. To watch the settlement of audit objections inspection, reports, draft audit
para‘s etc.

39
n. The specific issue on which opinion/concurrence of the Finance Department is
needed is framed in an unequivocal language and mentioned in the departmental
noting;
o. The department continuously updates its rules and regulations and also keeps
updated copies of the J&K Civil Service Regulations, GFR/Financial Codes, and
Budget Manual etc. and refers to them before making out a performance to the
Administrative Department.

2.23.2 Assistant Accounts Officer (A.A.O)

The Divisional Assistant Accounts Officer‘s main function shall be to assist the
Executive Engineer in exercising financial control over the transactions of the
Division and in maintaining accounts of the transactions correctly in accordance
with rules in force.

CHAPTER - 2
The Divisional Assistant Accounts Officer‘s t responsibilities shall include:

1. Proper distribution of work in Accounts Branch with the approval of Executive

Engineer.
2. Marking of papers received in the Accounts Branch to the concerned clerks in
the section.
3. Preparation of budget annual plans, 5-year plan and 20-year master plan, making

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

proposals for re appropriations etc. under instructions from the Executive
Engineer.
4. Scrutiny of all papers involving or relating to financial transactions.
5. Scrutinising contractors bill and putting up notes on financial aspects.
6. Bringing to the notice of the Executive Engineer, power of attorney related to a
work, while passing bills.
7. Safe custody of agreements and power of attorney for works and to see that
registers for the same are maintained.
8. Putting up notes on matters dealt by him for orders of Executive Engineer.
9. Controlling the work of subordinates entrusted with the safe custody of cash,
valuables, documents etc.
10. Making temporary arrangements for carrying out the work of the Accounts
Branch by suitably distributing the work attended to by a clerk or other
subordinate absent, on leave etc.
11. Ensuring prompt action being taken on urgent financial matters.
12. Assist the Executive Engineer in ensuring financial discipline particularly in
incurring expenditure within the allotment.
13. Carrying out any other duty assigned to him by the Executive Engineer.

2.23.3 Accountant

The Divisional Accountant shall be assisting A.A.O in all his duties.

2.23.4 Accounts Assistant

He shall deliver duties as per manual of office procedures

40
 2.24 Miscellaneous

2.24.1 Stewards, Butlers, Caretakers, Managers or other staff under the

control of Rest Houses, Dak Bungalows etc. of the PWD, by whatsoever
designation they are called, shall attend to the following duties: -
1. Keep the rooms and premises in a clean and tidy condition. See that rooms are
cleaned at least once every day and also keep the rooms and bathrooms in clean
and hygienic conditions
2. See that the furniture provided in each room is kept in its proper place and kept
daily dusted.
3. See that the bath room and lavatory fittings in every room are functioning
satisfactorily, and if any defect is noticed, set right the same locally if it can be
arranged and if not report to the Assistant Engineer for urgent action.
4. See that the electrical equipments are kept in good order, fused bulbs replaced
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

etc.
5. In the case of rest houses not provided with running water, see that water
required is made available in the bath rooms for occupants.
6. See that bed linen, crockery, cutlery etc. are kept in clean and usable condition.
7. Provide sufficient linen for the use of occupants of each room according to
prescribed standards.
8. Where gardens exist see that the garden is watered, trimmed and kept clear of
rubbish.
9. Maintain the occupation register and see that every occupant fills up the
required columns on arrival and before leaving.
10. Collect rent due from the occupants and send the collections together with
copy of the occupation register to the concerned officer every 15 days or at such
intervals as prescribed.
11. Where reservations are ordered by the Executive Engineer ensure that
rooms are kept so reserved without being allowed to be occupied.
12. Keep account of furniture, linen, crockery and cutlery and any other item
entrusted to his charge and make periodical checks to see that they are all
available.
13. Arrange washing of linen, bed clothes etc, and keep account of item so
arranged to be washed.
14. Where the rest house is provided with catering arrangements, arrange supply of
good food as prescribed to the occupants at approved schedule of rates. This
schedule of rates shall also be exhibited in public.
15. Control the work of such subordinates in the rest house as are placed under his
charge and report to superior officers, cases requiring sanction of appointment of
substitutes, institution of disciplinary proceedings etc.
16. See that unnecessary fans, lights & Air Conditioners are switched off at the
appropriate time and the use of water and electricity economically controlled
without any inconvenience to occupants.
17. Bring to the notice of the Assistant Engineer in charge, all repairs and
maintenance required for buildings and installations, without delay.
18. They shall also carry out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to
them by their superior officers.

41
2.24.2 Drivers of Road Rollers

Their duties shall include: -

1. Drive the road rollers with care and safety observing traffic regulations to the site
where rolling work is to be done.
2. Keep the roller in working condition and report to the superior officers, defects if
any for necessary repair work being arranged.
3. Make a routine check of all the points needing daily inspection such as fuel level
in the case of Diesel Engines, water level in the boiler in the case of steam
engines, lubricating oil levels and such other features as may be prescribed either
generally or for the particular equipment.
4. Carry out the rolling work in the prescribed manner making as many passes as

CHAPTER - 2
are necessary and are directed to be done.
5. Attend to routine maintenance as prescribed such as topping up of oil applying
grease, where required etc.
6. Whenever the rollers are left at roadside after the day's work it is his duty to see
that the danger light is put in front of the roller. This is to avert the chances of
other vehicles colliding against the roller.
7. When the roller is taken for maintenance or for special repairs, assist in the
completion of the repairs or carry out such other jobs as are ordered to bed one
by the officer under the control of the roller.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

8. Be under the control of the tools and spares of the roller entrusted to him.
9. Keep account of materials like fuel, lubricating oil etc. entrusted to his care.
10. Maintain log books as prescribed.
11. Intimate in advance the date of renewal of tax, insurance, pollution test, fuel tests
etc.
12. They shall also carry out any other duties that may be specifically assigned to them
by their superior officer.

2.25 Mechanical Wing,

2.25.1Chief Engineer, Mechanical

He shall have duties similar to clause 2.3. whichever is applicable

Superintending Engineer, Mechanical

2.25.2
He shall have duties similar to clause 2.5 whichever is applicable

Executive Engineer, Mechanical

2.25.3
He shall have duties similar to clause 2.6 whichever is applicable

42
 2.25.4 AssistantExecutive Engineer, Mechanical
In addition to the duties as per section 2.8 whichever is applicable he shall be
responsible for:
1. Testing and issuing fuel consumption certificates of vehicles.
2. Preparation of estimates for repair and maintenance works and issuing
essentiality certificates for vehicles of all Government departments
3. Supervision of works and submitting of bills for repairs and maintenance.
4. Maintenance and repairs of all construction equipments of PWD
5. Supervision of works for repair and maintenance of refrigerators, HVAC chiller
plants, air conditioner set etc.
6. Valuation of vehicles including confiscated vehicles
7. Recommendation for condemnation of vehicles/machineries.
8. Attending the Condemnation Board meetings of Fire Force vehicles.

2.25.5Assistant Engineer
He shall have duties similar to clause 2.10 whichever is applicable
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 2

2.25.6 Junior Engineer Mechanical

He shall He shall have duties similar to clause 2.12 whichever is applicable

2.26 Powers
The powers delegated to the various officers of the department in regard to
administration, technical and financial matters shall be used wisely and carefully. It
cannot and shall not be a weapon for implementing of work in piece meal evading
sanctions from higher authorities. No work may be started before a proper estimate
for it has been prepared and sanctioned by the competent authority, unless it is so
started strictly in accordance with a special order of Government or some specific
codal provisions or departmental rules. The nature and date of sanction shall be
clearly recorded in the bills relating to the work. It is the responsibility of the
implementing officer and officer who is passing the bills for the work, to see that
the respective work is executed underwritten orders of competent authority. They
shall also check and ensure that an Administrative Sanction and Technical
Sanction shall precede a tender from competent authority and sufficient funds
are provided in the budget for the respective work. All the controlling officers shall
ensure that no tenders are initiated unless administrative approval and technical sanction
has been accorded by the competent authority and funds are available in the budget. Any
violation of these principles of financial propriety shall be constraint as irregularity and
action as warranted under rules shall be initiated against the delinquent officers
including concerned DDO .

43
CHAPTER 3.

Human Resource and Training

The Public Works Department of J&K employs over 16341 persons directly and
gives employment to over 80,000 persons indirectly. Being a service department,
the officers and staff of PWD shall be morally committed to the society and shall
uphold the values of the department. This shall be reflected always in the quality of
works, integrity and demeanor.

3.1 Training Cell

CHAPTER - 3
This cell shall be under the overall control of Development commissioner works
which shall coordinate with HRM wing as per Administrative Department.

3.2 Code of Conduct

PWD is committed to a work force of officers and staff both technical and non-
technical that displays the highest standards of integrity and fairness in all aspects
of work that enhance departmental and stakeholder trust and confidence.
Developing PWD values of innovation, honesty, integrity, respect for people,

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

accountability, teamwork, sharing of knowledge all provide a sound framework
from which PWD can build a safe, professional environment for all its employees.

3.3 Recruitment Process

The requirement in terms of personnel for the effective functioning of the
department shall be assessed and reported as per clause 309 ―norms for workload
assessment‖ for non gazzetted to Service selection board and for gazzeted to the
J&K Public Service Commission as per recruitment rules. The SSRB/J&K Public
Service Commission carries out all recruitment. The JKSSRB/JKPSC has
prescribed norms for selection based on the age, qualification, screening tests and
interview.

3.4 Induction Process

Each employee in the PWD shall be aware of the obligations and the standards of
behavior that are expected from him. He shall read, understand and comply with
the provisions of the J&K Civil Service Rules, PWD Manual, PWD account code,
Manual of Office Procedures and other relevant rules and orders issued from time
to time by the competent authority.
An induction programme for orienting the new employees to their new work
environment and role shall be conducted; this includes understanding technical role
required by the employee PWD rules and procedures. An employee handbook shall
also be provided for awareness.

44
 3.5 HRIS and ID cards
The personal information of all members of staff shall be entered in to the
Human Resource Information System (HRIS) of the department JKPWDOMS
(under development in the department). The DDO shall ensure the information
regarding his office has been uploaded correctly. Once details uploaded the
members can download ID Cards
All members of staff shall possess the ID card at all times while on duty and shall be
displayed/ produced on demand. This card should be surrendered in the event of
discharge/retirement from service.

3.6 Probation periods

All newly recruited employees shall be placed on probation and the probation shall
be declared as per the relevant provisions of J&K Civil Service Rules and
Subordinate Service Rules.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 3

3.7 Rules

Officers in the respective services are governed by the rules of recruitment,

seniority, promotions, etc., applicable to the particular service. Special statutory
rules have been issued for certain services and in respect of other services until
statutory rules are prescribed, recruitment, seniority, promotion, etc., will be based
on executive orders of Government or any other authority delegated by
Government to issue such orders
The following rules generally govern the norms of leave, pay, retirement,
disciplinary action etc.
● The J&K Civil Service Rules, Volume I, (Parts I &II),
● The J&K Civil Service Rules, Volume II, (Part III),
● Special rules of PWD.
● Government Orders issued from time to time on the recommendations of the
Pay Revision Commission.
● Government Orders on the revision of pension and other related benefits
issued from time to time

3.8 Norms for workload.

The quantum of work handled by the officers in Department may vary from time to
time and it is necessary that suitable norms shall be fixed, so that the staff strength
of the Department be augmented, reduced or arranged according to
requirements. In case of specialised works, new posts/ units shall be created. The
HR cell shall assess all such requirements and submit proposals for creation/
deployment/ abolishment of post to the Development Commissioner works.
The government will fix, from time to time, such norms for the various units under
the Public Works Department.

45
 3.9 Disciplinary Actions/Misconduct

Non-compliance to any of the existing rules shall attract disciplinary actions.

Disciplinary proceedings shall be initiated and finalised as per the provisions in the
Manual for Disciplinary Proceedings.

3.10 Cessations and Retirement

Retirement from Government service is at the prescribed age decided by the

government. The appointing authority can only accept the resignation of a
Government servant after settling the liabilities in respect of the service or post in

CHAPTER - 3
question.

3.11 Miscellaneous
3.11.1 Dress Code
All officers must present themselves in neat and clean attire. Those officers who
are required to wear a uniform at work must ensure that this is kept neat and clean.

3.11.2 Outside employment

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

No officer will undertake any work for another private or public body or accept
fee, without the prior sanction of the Government.

3.11.3 Confidentiality
All information made available to employees in the course of their employment with
the department is to remain highly confidential. An officer shall not issue or
make any public statement concerning the public works department‘s operations or
release information on any operational matter.

3.12 Training

Training is an investment made on the human resource of the organization to

provide and tone the competencies, required to do an existing job well and also to
perform for future needs. Targeted and monitored training can set up an
environment of good morale and productivity and contributes in creating a
powerhouse of competencies for the public works department. One of the major
area of concern highlighted in the

46
 infrastructure Development Plan is relating to capacity building in the PW (R&B)
department for efficient implementation of the development programme. With ever
increasing interaction and mutual dependence of various stakeholders viz. Road
Agencies, Contractors, Consultants, etc. for the service and product delivery, there
is all-round need to enhance, develop and up-date the skills not only in technical
designs but also in project management, financial aspects, legal issues, social and
environmental aspects. There is need of skilled staff at all levels including skilled
labour, equipment operators, and supervisors, engineers with the government,
contractors and consultants. Jump in the project size has added to the complexities.
The concerned agencies dealing with the PWD are facing the challenge of rational
planning, project identification and development, efficient and transparent contract
procurement, administration, operation, and management of roads to provide good
quality of service to road users.
The main aim of training is:
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 3

●To impart training to professionals of JKPWD at entry level and during service.
●To help engineers build up character and develop an all-round personality as
a part of Human Resource Development.
●To assist various organizations/Departments to have better infrastructure.
●To promote co-operation and foster exchange of knowledge, ideas and
experience in all the sphere of engineering among engineers in J&K
The department is committed to provide officers with the required training and
development so as to enable to perform their work more effectively and develop
their skills in line with departmental requirements. Other Human Resource
Systems shall support and synergize the training efforts.
Being a technical organization, the focus on skills training shall be based on the day-to-
day developments in the field of construction engineering. Training shall be under the
control of Human Resources Cell within the Administration wing.
Training shall focus on induction, refreshers training for present employees and
specialization for employees whose responsibilities or duties change through
advancement or Departmental transfer.
The concerned chief engineer shall decide the needs of the training under which
the personnel have to be trained. The person thus deputed will help and benefit
the Public Works Department as a whole.
All HODs shall arrange and recommend their engineering staff for regular
trainings at institutions like IAHE, CRRI, IRC etc

3.12.1 Functions of HR &Training Cell

o Documenting key training inputs needed, covering all functions and all
categories of staff to upgrade the capability and skills levels to meet the
department‘s objectives in a cost effective manner.

47
 o Formulation of training courses as per the above need.
o Coordinating and finalizing training schedules for the staff.
o Publishing annual training calendar
o Engagement of permanent and temporary faculty for the training courses, as
required.
o Implementing training.
o Training feedback- this feedback, along with changes in individual performance
needs to be tracked, recorded and reviewed for modification in future
programmes.
o Periodic review of training course

3.12.2 Orientation Training

Newly appointed staff and staff transferred to roads wing from other wings
should be given a training to acquaint themselves about the job requirements.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 3

They should be given class room training on the subject for about two weeks
and then they should be attached to some senior staff for getting on the job
training for two weeks.
In the orientation course following aspects should be covered. Surveying and
investigation

1. Drawings

2. Road engineering

3. Structural components

4. Drainage

5. Bridge engineering

6. Record keeping

7. Rules and regulations

8. Testing of materials

9. Maintenance

10. Technical Circulars

11. Ethics

12. Human recourse management.

13. Do‘s and don‘ts etc

48
 3.12.3 Refresher Courses

Refresher courses for the field staff brushes their knowledge on the subject
periodically and keep them abreast of recent developments in the field. Such
courses should be conducted on regular basis and the duration may be about a
week or less. Refresher courses may cover the subject in general and latest
techniques, machinery, new materials and state of art technology. Every
engineering officer at the level of JE and above should attend a refresher course
at every five years interval
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 3

49
 CHAPTER 4

4.0 Information Technology and Management Information System

4.1 General
The department has already initiated the development of web portal JKPWDOMS and
same shall go live after the same portal is functional.
PWD shall be sortly using the following IT systems.
a. Web based Information and Governance System(JKPWDOMS)
b. JK Public Works Online Management System (JKPWDOMS) shall have
following modules:
i. Existing Infrastructure

CHAPTER - 4
ii. PWD Human Recourse Information System
iii. Contractors Information System
iv. Proposals
v. Tendering
vi. Store Procurement

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

vii. Execution and Progress
viii. Quality and Monitoring
ix. Billings and Payments
x. Maintenance
xi. Safety and Audit
xii. Feedback
xiii. Accomplishments
xiv. Reports
xv. Helpline for snow clearance.

4.1.1 Existing Infrastructure through JKPWDOMS

Details of all the infrastructure available with the department shall be organised in
this module:
Existing road network (road gazette). The road gazette shall be incorporated in the
module and updated regularly
●Inventory of all buildings owned by the department
●Inventory of all buildings maintained by the department
●Inventory of all bridges under the jurisdiction of the Department management.
● These details shall help in proper maintenance of the assets and their management

50
 4.1.2 PWD Human Resource Information System

Centralized personal information system of the engineering and supporting staff

of the department including following:
●Personal information. (Linked to CPIS)
●Posting details. (Linked to CPIS)
●Details of assignments held and their progress.
●Special achievements.
●Annual performance reports.
●Financial details of the officer. (Linked to PAYSYS)
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 4

4.1.3 Contractors Information System

Details of contractors/ firms based on their authorized contract cards/ pan cards:
●Personal information
●Legal Documents
●Details of contracting Card
●Bank Details
●Details of works Executed.
●Performance Certificates of the works.
●Details of works completed successfully with details like:
▪ Works Completed in time
▪ Works Completed before time.
▪ Works Completed after Time.
●Performance grading of the works executed
●Detail of works left halfway or incomplete
●Updation of the contractor with respect to latest tools, techniques and plants.
●Details of technical personnel on the rolls of the contractor.
●Details of Financial Transactions with the Department.

4.1.4 Annual Infrastructure Development Plan

●Provides an overall detail of all the works to be undertaken during a specific financial year.
●Geographical features of the site to be updated along with other relevant data.
●All the Divisions of R&B department shall be uploading their works program for
the subsequent financial year much ahead of its commencement.
The information will be generated and consolidated at appropriate levels to enable the
department to plan in advance for preparation of DPRs, processing of administrative
approvals and arrangement of funds so that the complete development plan is kept
ready on all fronts for its execution resulting in the timely implementation process of the
plan. This will definitely eliminate all lags and delays in execution of works in the
department.

51
 4.1.5 PROPOSALS

Details of all the works to be undertaken during the specific financial year shall be framed
online and will be hosted on the web portal which will be viewed / reviewed by higher
authorities thus making whole mechanism of technical sanction and administrative
approval online in a time saving and more transparent manner.
i) SSR shall be hosted online by DIQC Department which shall be accessible to all
the engineers of PWD.
ii) The Portal shall provide a window on which the items of work shall be automatically
imported from the SSR. The import of items shall also get the item code along with its
description, rate, etc.
iii) The quantities for the respective items shall be added in the said page which in turn
will generate the amount of each item of work.
iv) The appreciation if any, over various items of work shall be incorporated in the portal

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 4

as per the requirement so as to arrive at the final estimated cost.
v) The module shall be designed to automatically generate the various quantities of
materials and details of departmental supplies.
vi) The module shall also generate the number of man-days of the employment generated.
vii) The proposal shall be supported by requisite drawings and geo-tagged photographs
of the specific sites which will bring more precision and transparency in the
System.
viii) This method of framing of the DPR/ Proposals shall have following benefits
over the conventional method.
ix) Proposals can be framed with ease of time.
x) Time required to frame a proposal online shall be just a fraction of the time required
for doing the same job manually.
xi) The items of work imported from SSR being detailed and complete in description will
leave less room for litigation and arbitration.
xii) Faster framing of proposals shall result in early execution of the works.
xiii) All the proposals shall be available to the higher officials at all times for perusals and
cross checking which ever increase efficiency.

4.1.6 NOTICE INVITING TENDERS (NIT)

Includes the following information:
● List of important dates
● E-procurement NOTICE
● Invitation for bids (IFB)
● Scope of Bid
● Source of Funds
● Eligibility of Bidders
● Cost of bidding
● Bidding Documents
● CDRs
● Bid Validity
● Bid Security
● Bid opening and evaluation.
● Award of Contract 52
 4.1.7 CONTRACT AND AGREEMENT DETAILS
● Provides the following information:
o Mode of agreement viz, PPP, PBMC, etc
o Contract Agreements.
o Details of Securities viz, Bank Guarantees, FDRs,CDR Other instruments of
security.
o Documents submitted by the contractors along with the Bids.
● The item rate contract along with the BOQ shall be uploaded in the soft form so that
rates and quantities are linked with the billing module of the portal.

4.1.8 PROCUREMENT

The Procurement of departmental stores shall be done as per procurement

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 4

guidelines of PWD to be formulated separately and uploaded (linked to the

OMMAS Proposal module).
● All the materials required will be reflected from the basic proposal along with their
respective dates of requirement.
● Tracking of the stores to be monitored through the software, linking the
consumption of materials with the work-done estimates.

4.1.9 EXECUTION AND PROGRESS OF WORKS

Provides the complete project planner of the works giving following details: o Stages
of the work.
o Scheduled dates of start and completion.
o Progress of work, comparing with envisaged schedule of activities pointing out lags
and leads as per CPM charts. Corrective measures to be taken accordingly.
o Quality Control Checks as per Quality Assurance and Monitoring Module.
o Project management and monitoring tracker based on CPM, PERT, etc. to be
developed
o Separate guidelines shall be formulated for creating a mechanism for timely or
early completion of works.
o Policy for recognition of engineers and contractors to be formulated and
implemented aimed at encouraging and inspiring the team, building a healthy and
positive working environment.
o Engineers and contractors achieving the targets ahead of their targeted schedules
shall be recognized and awarded suitably. This will automatically develop a trend
of timely completion of works and ultimately result in speedy constructions
thereby saving a lot of additional cost to the exchequer on account of inflation and
delay in completion time.
o Delay in completion of works shall also attract strong punitive measures

4.1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MONITORING

A special emphasis shall be made on the quality assurance of the works.

53
 The department is having strong in-house quality control system which is
defined in chapter 24 of this manual.

4.1.11 BILLING AND PAYMENTS

The billing of the works shall be framed online on the basis of:
1. Allotment issued to the contractor
2. Final work done estimates
3. Progress of the work executed at site.
To be linked to the Procurement module of the works so that the departmental stores
issued to the contractor/firm are automatically adjusted in the bills.
Deductions for security deposits, taxes, etc. also to be linked for inbuilt adjustment in

CHAPTER - 4
the bills of the contractor.
Billings shall be processed only when the required Quality Assurance Grading (QAG) is
achieved in the quality monitoring module.
This will ensure transparency in the entire billing system as all the entries will be
Linked online.

4.1.12 MAINTENANCE
1. Assists in tracking and managing the maintenance part of the contract

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

2. Shall be linked to the Accounting Module to register Maintenance expenditures
under the contract.
3. Includes records of the condition of the Assets in the Infrastructure module by
entering Condition Index viz PCI, service life, etc. and then enabling prioritization
of maintenance. This module will help in proper maintenance of the entire Assets
network.
4. A software for monitoring the maintenance of the assets shall be developed on
the pattern of e-Marg (Electronic Maintenance of Rural Roads) as in PMGSY
Department.

4.1.13 SAFETY AND AUDIT

1. Safety norms shall be followed as per the standard codal procedures issued by
BIS, IRC and other relevant organizations from time to time.

2. The safety standards thus prescribed shall be bound to be strictly followed at all
sites of execution of works in order to ensure absolute safety of men and
machinery.
3. All contractors / firms shall be bound to have safety engineers deputed at sites as
required under the safety standards/contract documents.

54
 4.1.14 FEED BACK
1. An in-built system of getting the feedback from general masses which shall
automatically get generated in the Grievance Cell of the department.
2. The Grievance Cell shall filter the feedback & forward them to the stakeholders and
ensure the resolution of all the grievances within the stipulated period of time.
3. In case of grievances not being resolved at a specific level of authority within the
stipulated time frame, the grievance shall automatically get reported to the next
higher authority

4.1.15 Helpline for snow clearance

A snow clearance helpline well integrated with classification of roads will be

available for the general public.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 4

4.2 Responsibilities

The responsibilities of all the PWD officers regarding the IT systems and MIS are
given in chapter 2.0.

4.3 Maintenance
Maintenance and upkeep of all the IT initiatives ranging from telecommunications/
network management to application development and data center management and
processing of PWD shall be either through AMC or utilizing the services of the
Consultants in the relevant field. Considering the security, measures for network
security including Firewalls Intrusion Detection System; antivirus/anti vandal software
to protect the servers and desktops is important and hence regularly monitored.

4.4 Functions
Key activities of JK PWD OMS:
 Leveraging the tools of IT to promote productivity, communication, transparency,
knowledge management and informed decision making in all wings; thus
contributing to an image of a pro- active, efficient and customer-caring
department of Government.
 Steering the formulation of a dynamic IT strategy and program for the department;
and the direction, monitoring and controlling of itsimplementation
 Directing the acquisition of appropriate technology platforms, software
applications, GIS systems, video and teleconferencing systems, LANs, WANs,
and other resources related to the program, including their upkeep, maintenance,
expansion, up gradation and renewal.
 Sourcing the IT related human resources of the department, through in-house
sources, to the extent available and through human resource outsourcing as
required.
 Directing IT training and skill upgrading in coordination with the respective wings
with a view to creating and maintaining adequate human resources in Information
Technology in the Department.
 Be responsible for data /information integrity and security, back up, disaster
recovery, redundancies, prevention of unauthorized access and implementation of
appropriate access protocols and policies.
55
  Instituting a web portal management board for overseeing the functioning of the PWD
web portal.
 Evangelizing the process of organizational transformation, promoting and imbibing
best of class systems and procedures in the department

4.5 Web based Information and Governance System (jkpwdoms)

JKPWDOMS is the main information sharing platform of Public Works

Department. Important news and events related to PWD shall be published in the
website. Also important government orders, notices and circulars shall be
published in the website. Employee related information like transfer and promotion
orders shall be published as soon as it is issued. Administrative Secretary PWD
shall form a departmental editorial board for creating contents for publishing in the
CHAPTER - 5

website.
JKPWDRB, the PWD web portal is segregated for use of public, contractors and
the PWD officials with functions restricted to each category and transparency in
terms of information as relevant to the activities of PWD.

4.6 Annual Infrastructure Development Plan

● Provides an overall detail of all the works to be undertaken during a specific financial
year.
● Geographical features of the site to be updated along with other relevant data.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

● All the Divisions of R&B department shall be uploading their works program for
the subsequent financial year much ahead of its commencement.
The information will be generated and consolidated at appropriate levels to enable
the department to plan in advance for preparation of DPRs, processing of
administrative approvals and arrangement of funds so that the complete
development plan is kept ready on all fronts for its execution resulting in the timely
implementation process of the plan. This will definitely eliminate all lags and
delays in execution of works in the department.

4.7 Applications using IT

PWD shall prepare an IT strategy and shall get the approval of administrative
department. The department may develop new applications based on the so framed
IT strategy. The DCW shall consult Chief Engineers in developing PWD specific IT
strategy. Every three years, the strategy document may be revised according to the
progress achieved. General approach would be to develop centralized data bases and
distributed access through web technology. PWD shall also make use of
developments in Open Source to create system, which is free of perpetual licensing
wherever possible.

56
CHAPTER 5

Financial Management System (FMS)

5.1 General
As part of Institutional Strengthening Action Plan (ISAP), various e-governance
initiatives are proposed in Public Works Department. Financial Management
System (FMS) aims at automation of procedures right from budgeting to payment
and encompass automation of PWD Accounts.
For the implementation of FMS, the setup shall be as follows.

CHAPTER - 5
Chief Engineers Office Circle Office Division Office Sub
Divi
sion Office
Chief Accounts Officer AAO Divisional Head Clerk
Assistant Director Accountant / Drafts man
Planning
Junior Clerk (Budget Clerk Clerk
Superintende Section (Budg
nt LD/UD Clerk ) et Section)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

5.1.1 Organizations
To spearhead the implementation activities and to derive maximum benefit from the
proposed system, there shall be a Central FMS unit in Administrative office, provincial
FMS under C.E.‘s, Circle FMS unit under Superintending Engineer and Divisional FMS
unit under Executive Engineer. Director Finance PWD shall lead the change process and
ensure successful implementation in all the lower level offices
The organization Setup for implementation of FMS is detailed in Chapter 10.
5.2 Functions of FMS
The functions of the newly formed units are described below
1. The FMS units will closely work with JKPWD OMS web portal and
shall give all support for implementation in their respective offices.
2. Impart necessary training to the units.
3. The FMS units shall acquire necessary know how on FMS for the successful
implementation.
4. The FMS units shall put up necessary proposals to the head of office for stream
lining all finance related activities in their respective office to accommodate FMS
in the existing procedures.
5. The FMS units shall ensure that, FMS is implemented in their office and generates
all financial reports to CE's office, AG's office and Government.
6. The respective head of office shall identify the personnel who are to be nominated
to the FMS unit and shall issue orders with name from time to time
5.3 Central Office
Demand for grant for Public Works Department and detailed estimates (Vol-I and
Vol-II) shall be entered into the system as soon as the annual budget is passed. The
various heads of account operated by PWD are given under Appendix500A

57
 All Administrative sanctions with list of works for both plan and non-plan shall be
entered into FMS /JKPWDOMS system as per Appendix 500B & 500C. All works
shall get a project ID, as and when it is entered in the Project Management module of
JKPWDOMS. When the work is added through JKPWDOMS the project ID will be
generated. All offices shall note down the Project ID of each work and the project ID
shall be an integral part of all work related registers, reports and communications.
This will be used for payment of bills and financial monitoring through FMS.
JKPWDOMS shall use FMS data for project monitoring and tendering.
The central FMS unit shall make sure that all new plan and non-plan works are
available in the FMS for further processing.
All contractors entered into contract with PWD shall have a contractor ID. Division
Bill register from every Division shall be updated to FMS system Central FMS
unit shall prepare all necessary financial reports using this system.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 5

5.4 Circle/ Division FMS unit

1. Issue of ID to contractors: FMS Unit in Circles and Divisions shall issue
contractor ID through JKPWDOMS as soon as contracts are entered into with
PWD.
2. Bill Register: unit shall enter necessary details of bill register into FMS
3. T S Register: All Circles and Divisions shall use automated T S register in FMS
4. Agreement Register: All Divisions and Circles shall use automated agreement
register in FMS
5. Monthly Accounts: FMS units shall prepare monthly accounts through FMS
5.5 Monitoring and Reporting
Finance Officer shall be in the control of monitoring and reporting the progress. The
introduction of FMS implies the adoption of a completely new instrument for the
organization and its integration into daily working procedures thorough
organizational changes, work habits and patterns. Progress and benefits shall be
monitored and corrective measures undertaken. Suitable indicators for assessing the
overall success and status of the FMS implementation shall be developed for
evaluation.
5.6 Maintenance
IT Cell shall ensure smooth operation of infrastructure and related hardware for FMS
operation, and the software maintenance and update shall be arranged through
annual contracts
5.7 Training
Central FMS unit shall conduct regular training to the officers in the Circles and Division
units
There are several activities, which should be executed at regular intervals in order
to keep a certain level of know-how and to maintain the communication between the
different FMS Units:

5.8 Longterm
The maintenance and data updating is an ongoing process and may require revision of
FMS and IT related database in future.

58
 CHAPTER 6

6.1 Planning and Policy

6.1.1 Introduction

The main thrust of planning is to frame detailed road map for efficient use of available
resources by determining what is to be done and achieved within the given time period. It
formulates the policy to broke down the broad objectives of developmental programmes
into detailed works plan for each project by linking of costs with the resultant outcome of
investment made or to be made and helping in equilibrium between socio- economic and
governance parameters across the UT. The FMS, GIS and RMMS are tools that shall assist
the PWD in all the above policies and activities.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 6

6.2 Planning, Budgeting and Funding

Keeping in view volume of activities, wide spread and varied in its nature it is necessary
to have a defined structure of a budget to be followed uniformly therefore, general
frame of budget aims at Setting up of goals and how these can be achieved with comfort
with the available financial resources, Department has to prepare detailed estimates of
expenditure according to the assessments of requirements for the ensuing year. The
estimates of expenditure are prepared separately for Capital and Revenue as a
constitutional requirement. The estimates of expenditure are made on the basis of the
allocations approved by the Finance Department. After the budget is sanctioned, the
receipts and expenditure have to be watched and controlled and timely steps taken to
regularize unavoidable variations from budget provision through re-appropriations,
moving for supplemental grant, surrender of surplus funds etc. The method of
preparation of the budget, the procedure to be followed in controlling the expenditure
and correcting unavoidable variations has to be followed in accordance with Budget
Manual and as per guidelines/instructions of the Finance Department.

6.3 Planning

Besides formulation of developmental plans, planning process involve collection and

compilation of all types of statistics related to the department with focus on outcomes
of the programmes, their regular monitoring and timely implementation. The focus of
the planning is to closely monitor development works / projects for their timely
completion being highly necessary to avoid time and cost over runs leading to projects
becoming unviable/languishing and making the already incurred expenditure
infructuous In case of Major Projects, PERT and CPM charts are to be prepared for
determination of financial requirements on annual basis. This apart, planning decides
on key objectives for the coming year and move or re-establish longer-term planning,
identify and refine resource requirements based on review and build a budget and will
Work out next year‘s targets, in co-ordination with circle/division head. Annual plans
include provisions as admissible for maintenance works, continuing works and new
works, centrally sponsored schemes, NABARD assisted schemes, finance commission
works and other externally assisted works.

59
 CHAPTER 7
7.1 Budgeting

A budget is a system to control finances, provide minute details in respect of the expenditures
proposed for various programmes, enables to make confident financial decisions and meet
objectives and ensure sufficient money for future projects. It also improves decision-making
by foreseeing financial problems before they occur. Creating, monitoring and managing a
budget is key to successful implementation of projects by rendering allocation of resources
where they are needed. The annual budget proposal is based on programmes of the
department and while earmarking the funds priorities are to be fixed by the department after
analysis and assessments of the continuing works. The new works are planned only after
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 7

ascertaining the availability of necessary fund flow to the scheme. To make budgets effective,
periodical review and revisions shall be done. This shall aid as an indicator of the revenues
and expenditure linked to each activity, moreover it shall provide for the economic, efficient
and effective use of resources required to deliver services and ensure that planning processes
are integrated with governments overall strategic and financial planning, budget preparation
and reporting processes and in accordance with applicable legislation, regulations and
policies.

7.2.1 Key steps in drawing up a budget

The budget shall be realistic by use of historical information, i.e. the current annual
plan and previous Variable costs – electricity, water supply, petrol, fuel payments to
works including maintenance Fixed costs - items such as rent, establishment
charges, salaries etc. year‘s administration reports. It shall be based on a on a month-
by-month programme and shall include of equipments, vehicles and purchase of
stationary and other consumables, training costs, books Capital costs - purchases of
equipment, computers, vehicles and cost of works. and periodicals etc. The
government‘s overall strategic plan is presented to the Legislative Assembly before
budget and the describe the ministry's core business goals, objectives, strategies,
performance measures and are consistent with the government's strategic plan;
department must prepare proposals that: address the upcoming fiscal years targets;

7.2.2 Preparation and Submission of Budget

The details to be furnished when submitting budget are given in the Budget Manual. All
necessary information shall be furnished in the budget estimates submitted by the
respective Executive Engineers and other Divisional Officers and the Superintending
Engineer and the Chief Engineer concerned shall scrutinize these. They shall then be
consolidated including establishment and all other expenditure in the various offices.
The Chief Engineers under the control of Buildings, Roads and Bridges branches of
the P.W.D. are the estimating officers of the department and they have to collect the
budget estimates of all the different branches viz. Roads, Bridges, Projects,
Administration, Buildings, electrical, electronic etc.
7.3. Selection of new works (Buildings)
List of new works of buildings under the administrative control of the P. W. D. shall
be prepared each year by concerned Executive Engineer and submitted to Chief

60
 Engineer (concerned ) in accordance with the norms laid down in detailed project report
section of this manual so that cost arrived are at is realistic and it shall specify the
indicators for the cost arrived at based on technical inputs .This list shall be sent to
Chief Engineer with recommendations of the Superintending Engineer well ahead of
the date when budget proposals are to be sent to the Chief Engineer. In the case of
buildings for other departments of the UT the list of new building works to be carried
out by the P. W. D. during the budget year shall be prepared and finalized by the
departments concerned. This shall then be incorporated in their Part II proposals after
consulting the concerned Executive Engineer of the P. W. D. regarding cost and other
details. In the case of works where only investigation and preparation of preliminary
estimate are completed, the amount as per preliminary estimate can be noted in the
column 'estimate amount'. In other cases, where preliminary estimates are yet to be
prepared, the District Officer or head of the Department concerned shall furnish
sufficiently in advance- the requirements, site proposed etc. to the Executive
Engineer concerned in the district, who shall assess the rough cost of the work and
intimate the same to the concerned department for incorporation in the list of new

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 7

works. The heads of Departments shall send these proposals directly to the concerned
Administrative Department of the Secretariat with copies of the proposals to the
Chief Engineer.

7.4 Roads and Bridges.

The new works to be included under this head may be broadly divided into- (i) Improvement,
or upgrading of existing roads (ii) Strengthening or construction of existing bridges and
culverts. (iii) Construction of new roads (iv) Construction of new bridges and culverts.
When Panchayat or other local bodies pass resolution to hand over roads to PWD, the
concerned Executive Engineer shall submit proposal for such take over as per provisions
in the ‗J&K Panchayati Raj Act.

7.5 National Highways.

For all original works the department shall prepare and submit proposals through the
identified CE to the Ministry of Transport, Government of India. In case of CRIF works,
PW(R&B) department has to prepare a list of projects to be proposed under admissible CRIF
funding which shall include road map indicating district boundaries, National Highways, UT
Highways, major district roads and other rural roads in different colours for each project and
has to forward it to Ministry of Road transport and highways for sanction. The list of works
as and when sanctioned by the MoRTH is communicated to Chief engineers for further
course of action as per guidelines /codal procedures of the scheme.
7.6 Repairs and maintenance

Expenditure on repairs and maintenance of buildings, roads, bridges, and miscellaneous

public improvements are to be classified under respective heads. The requirements
of the Road Safety Cell; GIS and RMMS, environment, quality, research, investigation
& training and IT shall also be made available by the Chief Engineer in the
headquarters and Executive Engineer in Divisions through SE at circle level and
incorporated in the budget proposal. The RMMS cell in the centre shall collect the road
maintenance requirement for the entire state from respective divisions and the total
fund requirements shall be incorporated in the annual budget.

61
 7.7 Head of account
7.8 The major heads of accounts operated by PWD are given in the
appendices of the manual

7.9 Budget Allocation

Allocations for plan schemes under various major heads have to be provided based on the
annual requirement for the respective schemes/works. In the case of non-plan expenditure
such as expenditure under repairs and maintenance or on works which do not pertain
to developmental activities, etc., the total allotment under various major, minor or
objective heads shall be indicated by government and the total provision under such
major, minor or group heads shall be kept within such allotment when framing budget
proposals. The concerned Chief Engineer keeping the following principles in view, shall
ascertain the total amount available under any major, minor or group head, the
distribution of funds to various works. (a) Sufficient amount shall be provided for
works already commenced to enable the same being completed as early as possible.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 7

Careful study of the progress which can be achieved during the year shall be made after
taking into account availability of land, materials, tools and plant, delays if any, due
to seasonal conditions or other reasons etc. and the budget provision to be made shall
be based on such study by the Executive Engineer. (b) In respect of new works these
shall be listed in the order of priority and the provision of funds for each shall be
determined taking into account the progress which can be expected during the year
after allowing for delays if any which may occur for getting possession of land,
arranging contracts, making available required materials, tools and plant etc. If the total
funds required for new works after making provision for each on the lines set out
above is found to be more than the total amount available for distribution, then a few
works with lesser priority shall be eliminated. Provision of funds for repairs of the
various categories of public works shall be made based on the principles detailed
in the respective chapters on maintenance as indicated below:

(a) Buildings
(b) Roads and Bridges-
In other case according to needs based on past experience the method of working out
funds required under establishment is detailed in Budget Manual. The provision in the
budget under tools and plant covers-
(a) Purchase of new tools and plant, and
(b) Repairs and carriage of existing tools and plant.
Provision for (a) is generally made on a Lump sum basis for the items to be procured
during the year as detailed in chapter 5 of Section V, Asset Management –Movable
Assets. Provision for (b) s hall be also made as a lump sum. There shall be a minor
head provided under major head to cover suspense transactions relating to miscellaneous
public works advances. All transactions recorded under this head shall ultimately be
removed either by payment or by recovery in cash or by adjustment to be the works
concerned. The transactions therefore consist of both debits and credits and the later
are adjusted as reduction of expenditure. Although the net financial effect of the
transactions may be either zero or a small amount representing the difference between
total expenditure and total credits, it is necessary for budget purposes to forecast the
likely total expenditure to be incurred during the year without taking into account the
credits and provide for the same under this head. This forecasting shall be done
based on previous year's experience allowing for necessary variations anticipated.

62
7.10 Preparation and Submission of Performance Budget
In addition to the Financial Budget referred to above it is also necessary to prepare
and submit a performance budget in respect of the activities of the various branches of
the department. This method of budgeting shall enable a department to set out in
the budget document the objectives of the department during a year, the programs
and activities by which these objectives are proposed to be realized, the expenditure
to be incurred on each of these programs and activities during the year, indicating the
broad physical achievements that are possible. This is a useful management tool both for
the Legislature and the departments in programming and evaluating the performance
of the departments. Performance Budget for this year and for next year shall be filled
up in the prescribed form. Guidelines for filling up the proforma sub activity-wise and
object-wise are given therein. The Executive Engineers of the Divisions shall fill up the
proforma and submit to the Chief Engineer through Superintending Engineer of Circle
and then to the Secretary to Government, every year. The Chief Engineers shall submit

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 7

the proposals for next year's budget in the proforma considering the previous years
Performance Budget. At the time of finalizing the budget, the Finance Department shall
consult the Chief Engineer about revising the physical achievements proposed in the
proposals with reference to the final allocation that would be made in the budget against
each activity. The Chief Engineers shall issue supplemental instructions, if necessary,
on the above subject.

7.11 Control of Expenditure

The Chief Engineer is the chief controlling officer of the major budget heads
solely operated by the PWD. Each Chief Engineer shall function as the chief controlling
officer for the major budget heads or portions of major budget heads with which
hiswing has to deal. The Superintending Engineers under the control of Circles are
subordinate controlling officers to control the expenditure under the budget items dealt
by them. Executive Engineers under the control of Divisions and other Divisional
Officers of the P.W.D. are disbursing officers. It is the duty of the concerned Chief
Engineer to ensure that resources are collected, allocated and expenditures are
disbursed in an efficient, effective and economic manner. He shall hold subordinate
officers accountable for spending public money both in terms of outcomes achieved
and value for money. The chief controlling officers, the subordinate controlling
officers and disbursing officers shall exercise proper control over expenditure in the
manner detailed in the Budget Manual. Expenditure shall be watched in terms of each
unit of appropriation and steps taken to regularize unavoidable variations as soon as
such variation is anticipated.

The unit of appropriation so far as budget of the P. W. D. is concerned shall be:

a. For works or items for which specific provisions are made in the budget-each such
work or item.
b. For works or groups of works for which Lump Sum. provision is made- each unit in
to which the L.S. is distributed by the chief or subordinate controlling officer. Thus
the budget provision for project involving several works may be a Lump Sum. When
this is distributed among various works pertaining to the project the expenditure shall
be watched against the amount so distributed to each such work.
c. For repairs and maintenance when specific provision is made for a particular item or
structure. - each such item of maintenance.
d. For repairs and maintenance when the amount is provided as a Lump Sum. -each
unit in to which the Lump Sum. is divided by the chief or subordinate controlling
63
 officer.
e. For Tools and Plant -each unit into which the Chief or Subordinate controlling
Officer distributes the Lump Sum.
f. T. A. contingencies and other expenses for which Lump Sum. provision is made -
Each unit in to which the Lump Sum is divided by the chief or subordinate
controlling officer.
g. Suspense. The provision in the budget shall be treated as the unit of appropriation.
h. Grant in aid--each unit into which Government distributes the Lump Sum. In addition
to watching and controlling expenditure against budget grant shall be also
necessary to watch whether the physical target arrived at for each work is being
achieved.

.
7.11.1 Funding Departmental Revenues
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 7

The P.W.D. shall be responsible for the collection and accounting of certain items of
revenue. The main items of revenue are given below:-

a. Rents. -rents for residential and non-residential buildings and quarters under the
control of the P. W.D including rents of furniture, amounts arising from lease of
stalls, fees realised for the use of rooms in rest houses, etc. shall be credited to
the concerned head.
b. Sale proceeds of trees belonging to Government along the sides of roads and on PWD
land or lease amounts thereof shall be credited under the concerned head.
c. Recoveries of expenditure: Recoveries on account of damage caused by occupants
to buildings and furniture, tools and plant charges from contractors, refund of unspent
balance of grant, contribution from local bodies or private parties in respect of
works, sale proceeds of old tools and plant, etc. shall be creditable to the concerned
head.
d. Fee collected by mechanical wing for testing of vehicle for fuel efficiency,
preparation of repair estimates, supervision of work etc.
e. Hire charges for machineries and equipments
f. Fines and confiscations, etc.
g. Miscellaneous: The receipts credited to concerned head shall be lease rent and sale
proceeds of avenue trees, wood, glass, fruits, vegetables, dead stock, waste paper an
other items, rents from land etc. It shall be the duty of the Executive Engineers and
officers subordinate to them to arrange realization of revenue to be collected by them
in time and also take all necessary steps to prevent leakage of revenue.

7.12 Externally Aided projects

If the funds allotted through the budget by the State Government are insufficient for the
requirement of the department for their proper functioning, financial assistance from the
external funding agencies like NABARD, ADB, WB etc. shall be sought by the
Government to cater to the requirement.
P.W.D. may also obtained such loans for carrying out necessary roads and bridge
works. In the case of works where expenditure is reimbursed, the prescribed
proforma duly filled up shall be forwarded to the Finance Department for onward
transmission to the funding agency. The expenditure incurred for the purchase of
quality control equipments, for setting up of labs, purchase of tools and plants and
other expenses for the work shall also be reimbursed if the same is included in the
Administrative sanction of the work.
64
7.13 Administration Report

The Administrative department shall publish annual administration reports. The

report shall be based on the budget allocations of the concerned wing. It shall also
include records of transactions, accounts and financial statements in accordance with
government accounting policies, department service plans that identify goals,
objectives, and performance measures. The administration report of each wing shall
also include the expenditures including establishment charges incurred from the
Head of account of the concerned wing. The report must disclose information
concerning commitment on major project, describe the progress of each project and
include project expenditure plan information. The use of any public/ private
partnership arrangement in delivering the project, the ongoing risks associated with
those costs and benefits the costs and benefits of the projects, the objectives of the
project.
It shall briefly describe- . The salient points to be included in the Administration report
are shown in Appendix

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 7

7.14 Award of excellence:

Every year the PWD shall award persons/ offices for meritorious service to the
department and society. Similarly, contractors shall also be suitably rewarded for
exceptional performances. For this purpose a committee headed by the DCW with all
Chief Engineers and one or two experts shall be constituted every year with the approval
of government. The committee shall fix the norms, procedure and criteria for
awarding the deserved persons.

65
CHAPTER 8

8.1 Geographical Information System(GIS)

8.1.1 General
GIS is a computer system capable of capturing, storing, analyzing, and displaying
geographically referenced information.
PWD GIS shall mapped all roads in J&K State including bridges, junctions, culverts and
other objects of interest. It shall provide a complete and accurate map of the road network
in J&K.
PWD GIS shall be a tool for planning preliminary alignment; and development of the
road network to improve connectivity and to assist with better decision-making.

CHAPTER - 8
An important use of GIS is to enable PWD to develop efficient maintenance strategies
for roads and bridges. PWD GIS is the spatial database for the road maintenance
management system (RMMS). GIS plots can show roughness, potholes and other
criteria, which indicate the road, condition and thus help PWD to arrive at logical
decisions. Further, PWD can prepare and monitor annual work plans and maintenance
programs.

8.2. GIS Operation in PWD

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The GIS operations in PWD shall be carried out at two levels, the central GIS unit at
Development commissioner works office.

8.2.1 Functions of Central GIS unit

● Overall database maintenance and responsibility for changes to the GIS database
● Data integration
● Preparation of subsets for each Local GIS Unit in Circles and Divisions
● Analysis and presentations for general management
● Compile, convert and integrate new data layers
● Coordinate spatial data collection for road network and bridge maintenance
● Integrate GPS coordinates into geographical database for regular update
● Prepare and provide digital updates of GIS for Local GIS Units
● Prepare and maintain metadata documentation
● Maintain link to databases for RMMS, FMS and JKPWDOMS
● Perform analysis and prepare data for Chief Engineer/ DCW
● Perform and present adhoc analysis
● Maintain contact to Local GIS Units
● Carry out GIS introduction as training for new staff of GIS Units
● Prepare and organize regular meetings
● Prepare and organize eventual contact to other departments, institutions, private
sector
● Prepare and organize review workshop
● Coordinate and organize future expansion of the GIS
● Monitor progress of GIS implementation
● Provide large sized map printouts to Circles, Divisions, Sub-Divisions and Sections
● Prepare analysis and printouts for respective Circle /Division
● Prepare documentation and analysis results for Central and Circle Level

66
 ● Maintenance of the Geographical Database –Field collection of data for database
maintenance
● Coordinate GPS field data collection of new roads and bridges for regular
maintenance
● Inform Central GIS Unit about changes in road network for re-classification
● Maintain contact to Sub-Divisions and Sections
● Participate in regular meetings
● Provide map printouts to Sub-Divisions and Sections

8.2.2 Supporting role

The function of Sub-Divisions and Sections is mainly to provide the basis of the attribute
database through data collection. They shall also verify the various outputs and keep
these maps as reference.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 8

8.2.3 Data Collection and compilation

The source of all data in PWD is the Section, where it is collected and compiled. The
Sub- divisions hold a key function for data compilation since data will be aggregated
here. Data validation, computing and data references shall be checked at each level.
The key function for GIS and road maintenance management is at the Division level.
The data will be assembled and the first analysis is done in order to prepare yearly
maintenance programs.

8.2.4Data Processing
The table 8.1 gives an overview about the general functions in data processing of the
different levels.
Table 8.1 General functions of geographical data processing in PWD
administrative levels.

PWD Administrative Major Function in Bottom-up Data Processing /

Level Collection
Sections Data collection and surveying
Sub-Division Collection from Sections, first data assembling
Division Collection from Sub-Divisions, assembling, first analysis and
validation
(results in maintenance programs and project proposals)
Circle Collection from Divisions, scrutinizing and eventually
proposal for modifications
Note: no assembling of data
Central Collection from Divisions and Circles, analysis and validation
(results in
budget allocation) Update and maintenance of core
database.
8.3 Information Retrieval
The central unit shall perform all the analysis and output generation functions of
GIS including mapping for the Chief office, circle offices and division offices.
The GIS database shall be disabled for changes by the general Divisions but shall
have an analytical tool for performing analytical functions and first ‗planning level‘
for maintenance activities
67
8.4 Responsibility of the PWD GIS Units
The tasks covered by the different GIS Units shall be basically two fields:
1. Maintenance of the Geographical Database
2. Analytical operations, presentation and communication of information derived from
GIS

8.5 Database Maintenance Procedures

In order to assure sustainability of the GIS initiative, it is crucial to maintain the
geographical database and update it regularly. The regular maintenance of the spatial
database for PWD refers to the following data:
Alignment of roads Classification of roads
Location of bridges / cross drainage (CD) structures Maintenance and update of

CHAPTER - 8
registers
8.6 Update of new road alignments:
The major change in the GIS data base will be caused by the construction of new roads
or eventually the conversion of roads into PWD roads or which have not been
captured accidentally. In case of conversion in to PWD road, the alignment of those
roads has to be captured like a new road.
In addition of upgrading existing roads, new roads are constructed yearly in every
Division. These new alignments have to be included in the database as update of the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

road network. Ideally, the respective collection of data shall be done through the use
of the Global Positioning System (GPS). Since the maximum accuracy level of the
geographical database is at ± 6m because of the ground resolution of satellite
images, a differential correction (DGPS, Differential GPS) of G P S coordinates would
not be required, instead, simple hand-held GPS receivers shall be used for the primary
data collection for new road alignment. Handheld GPS receivers provide accuracy of
about 5-10m.
The Divisions, i.e. by the GIS Officers of the respective Division, shall coordinate the
field surveys for the GPS measurements. The GPS data have then to be forwarded in
digital format (.shp .kmz) via email to the central GIS unit in Chief Office for
integration in to the GIS database. The updated version of the GIS data base will be
returned to the respective Divisions. The updating of the road network shall be
carried out once a year.
8.7 Re-classification of roads
The classification of roads may change because of the conversions. Since the road
network in the geographical database contains all roads, regardless of their classification,
so re-alignment would usually not be necessary but would require as reclassification in
the GIS. If roads are being converted, the local GIS units shall report the same to the
central GIS by indicating the road on respective map sheets.
8.8 Location of Bridges / Cross Drainage structures
Bridges and cross drainage structures (CD) have to be added in the geographical
database in case of new constructions. The procedure in updating bridges is also
based on GPS technology. The local GIS unit in divisions needs to coordinate GPS
field surveys and forward the GPS coordinates to the Central GIS Unit for database
update. The time for the submission of coordinates for the bridge and CD
update shall be similar to road network updates so that all annual updates are done at
once

68
 Table 8.2 Proposed Sequence and responsibilities of maintenance activities
Ste Activity Responsible
ps Road alignment Road classification Location of bridges
and CD structures
1. Prepare print-out of Prepare print-out of Prepare print-out of Local GIS
Section Section / Sub-Division and Section Unit
/ Sub-Division with new mark manually alignment of / Sub-Division and
road and mark manually converted road mark location of bridge
approximate alignment / CD
Structure
2. Carry-out GPS field In case that road is not Carry-out GPS field To be
survey to capture captured in database, carry survey to capture coordinated
geographical coordinates out GPS field survey geographical by local GIS
of road coordinates of bridge / Unit
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 8

CD
Structure
3. Forward GPS coordinates Forward map with marked Forward GPS Local GIS
to Central GIS Unit converted road or GPS coordinates to Central Unit
coordinates to Central GIS Unit
GIS Unit
4. Integrate coordinates of Re-classify road or integrate Integrate coordinates Central GIS
new road coordinates of converted of new bridge / CD Unit
into road structure into
geographical into geographical geographical database
Database database
5. Segmentation of new road Segmentation of Assignment of unique Central GIS
and assignment of unique converted ID to new bridge / C Unit
ID to segments road and assignment of structure
unique ID to segments
6. Forward of print-out for Forward of print-out for Forward of print-out for Central &
final approval by final final approval by Section local GIS
Section, Sub-Division, approval by Section, Sub- Sub-Division Division Unit
Division Division, Division

8.9 Maintenance and updating of registers

The GIS local units shall maintain registers for roads, bridges and junction in formats
given in table 8.3 and regularly update it with regards to spatial data.

8.10 Analytical Operations

The Central GIS Unit and the Local GIS Units shall perform analysis.
The Divisions shall prepare annual maintenance plans, based on various analyses and
forward it to the Chief Engineer through circle offices. Maps shall be integrated in
reports as attachments. The analytical operations on Circle level will have the purpose
to scrutinize the plan documents from the Divisions. Analytical operations by the Central
GIS Unit are supporting overall management decisions, mainly in terms of budget
allocations (for road maintenance). The operations will be carried out on behalf and for
the Chief Engineer. The Divisions shall prepare a set of thematic maps, to be
forwarded for the Sub- Divisions. The Sections through the Sub-Divisions shall verify
information derived from the database.
69
 Table 8.3 gives an overview about the operational standard tasks of the
different levels.

Performing and Presenting Analysis Presentation of Spatial

Results References *
Central Perform analysis and document on A3 Provide large sized division
Office sized maps and in and circle maps
report format to Chief Engineer / DCW to every Division and Circle
Office
CirclePerform analysis for scrutinizing
Officedocuments from Divisions and forward to
CE as A3 maps and in report format
Division Prepare thematic maps for verification by Prepare reference maps fo

CHAPTER - 8
Sub-Divisions / Sections Sub-Divisions and Sections
Perform analysis for maintenance on A3 sheets
planning and forward to Chief Engineer in
reports and as A3 sized maps
Sub- Data gathering
Division Verification of analysis
Section Data gathering
Verification of analysis
*(Topographic Maps with emphasizes on roads and bridges)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

8.11 Regulations for Exchange of Spatial Data and Dissemination of Spatial
formation
The information derived from the GIS shall be disseminated as hardcopies in the
form of map sheets and reports. The different information from the GIS to be
distributed among PWD could be categorized into spatial references and analysis
results.
8.11.1 Spatial References:

Spatial references are topographic maps, showing roads, bridges, CD structures,

villages, water bodies and administrative boundaries. Every office shall have a map
as general reference of their respective area. The Central GIS Unit shall provide
large size maps (A0 format) of every Circle and Division to the respective offices.
The Divisions shall supply respective maps of Sub-Divisions and Sections on A3
size. The Central GIS Unit and the Local GIS Units upon special request could
prepare other maps. These maps shall be displayed in respective offices.

8.11.2Analysis results:
Analytical operations by the Central GIS Unit will be carried out on behalf and for
the Chief Engineer. Out puts shall be as A3 as well as A4. For presentation
purposes, maps could be printed on large sized paper. The results of analytical
operations on Circle level shall be in form of A3 sized maps. The Divisions based on
various analyses will generate maps on A4 paper. These maps shall be integrated in
various reports as attachments.

70
 8.12 Monitoring of GIS Operations

The introduction of GIS technology implies the adoption of a completely new

instrument for the organization and its integration into daily working procedures
thorough organizational changes, work habits and patterns. Progress and benefits
shall be monitored and corrective measures undertaken. Suitable indicators for
assessing the overall success and status of the GIS implementation are given in
Table 8.4
In addition to the regular maintenance activities, it shall be the task of the Central
and Local GIS Units to keep track and record consistently the following data:

Table 8.4 Monitoring Plan for overall impact of GIS.

Records for Impact Monitoring To be To be To be
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 8

recorded by recorded recorded

Division by Circle by
Unit Unit Central
Unit
Events of data update and results of quality ✓
Control
Request for maps, their contents (title) and the ✓ ✓ ✓
Inquirer
Instances when maps were presented in ✓
meetings, conferences etc.on central level to
support important instances(such as budget
allocation), contents of the presented maps and
weather there waspositive, negative or non
influence11
Events of training, training type and contents, list ✓ ✓ ✓
of participants,
trainer kind of position
Number of positions in GIS units which had to be ✓ ✓ ✓
refilled,
kind of position

The various attributed data that form the GIS system shall be documented regularly
and when changes occur. This shall be the responsibility of central GIS Cell.

8.13 Training, Support and Internal Communication

There are several activities which shall be executed at regular intervals in order to keep
a certain level of know-how and to maintain the communication between the different
GIS Units:
• All GIS Units shall meet at least once in a year with the purpose of exchanging ideas,
reporting about experiences and problems, maintaining standards and

71
 procedures and getting feedback from the Chief Engineers. The meeting shall be set,
organized and facilitated by the Central GIS Unit.
• Annually, the Central GIS Unit shall give a presentation on the complete database for
all Divisions and Circles provide a one day refresher-course about GIS technology and
introduce about latest development in general as well as within PWD in so far it is
relevant to GIS operations.
• All GIS Officers shall attend an external professional training on GIS issues for
about one week, once in two years. This training shall be tailored for the needs and
shall include need-related aspects such as refreshing the general know-how on
geographical information technology, latest trends and specific aspects, for
instance advanced spatial analysis procedures, marketing strategies, data security
aspects etc. Universities, other government organizations, private institutes or
consultants could provide the external training.

CHAPTER - 8
Besides these regular activities, there are occasional activities which may come up
or which supports the overall performance of GIS operations:
• In case of personnel transfer and open positions in GIS Units, the Central GIS Unit shall
provide and introduction course for there placement to assure smooth performances in
the different offices
• From time to time, one or two representatives of the Central GIS Unit shall visit selected
Local GIS Units for individual support. Such visits could be scheduled so that all offices
have been visited once within two years.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

• In order to expose the PWD staff to other systems and best practices and for the exchange
of experiences, it would be recommended to organize visits to other organizations such
as other government institutions where GIS is implemented (inside or outside the State)
or to special organizations in the field of geographical information technology like the
National Remote Sensing Center.

8.14 GIS in Use

8.14.1 Proximity Analysis:

The road network is the basis for the overall development of any region. Hence, it is
a crucial parameter, well monitored for any planning studies. The proximity or nearness of
any settlement or habitation to any existing road network can be measured using the
GIS tools and automation can be developed for this kind of query up to a certain extent.
This information is very useful in exploring the marketing network and other business
activities.

8.14.2 Demographic Analysis:

The information on census is very important and crucial in planning and
monitoring the schemes and plans for any service oriented organization. A direct
relationship between road network and village level once established, census data of
the revenue village level can be attached as attributes to the GIS database. This
data base would be very helpful in understanding the rural-urban phenomen on and
enables analysis like service area selection etc. This information would be useful for
developing the core networks, which is being followed in the government schemes.

72
 8.14.3 Shortest Route Identifier:

This tool is a typical travel tool to identify the optimal route from one specific point to
another one, based on criteria such as travel distance, riding quality of road, traffic
volume etc.
For PWD, the tool could be helpful to identify most frequented roads for planning
purposes. Table 900.2 relates to the identified needs for PWD to the above- described
tools and their technical functions.

Reference documents

Field Data Collection using GPS-Guidelines

Data Interchange format/ protocol Installation of RIMS – procedure/ manual
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 8

Interlinks: Attribute data / table values from: RMMS, FMS, JKPWDOMS

73
 CHAPTER 9

9.1 Road Maintenance Management System(RMMS)

9.1.1 General

The main objective of establishing the computerized Road Maintenance

Management System (RMMS) through JKPWDOMS is to optimize the use of
limited resources available for maintenance works; to have a systematic approach
and planning of road maintenance work program and to reduce the entire transport
costs through proper and timely maintenance works. Maintenance management is a
method of controlling resources to accomplish a predetermined level of service
through planning, budgeting, scheduling, reporting and evaluating. Planning consists

CHAPTER - 9
of defining maintenance activities, compiling a road inventory and condition survey
details, establishing priorities, establishing quality, quantity, performance standards
and compiling cost data.

9.2 RMMS in PWD

The road maintenance system of PWD shall have the database of all Roads and
Bridges under the control of R& B wing of PWD. The RMMS includes road data

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

such as footpath, drains, Kerbs/Devri stones, medians etc., road inventory, and
pavement condition, traffic and works history. It also includes a module, which will
identify homogeneous road sections and create a file of details for use with HDM-
4, which will be used as the principal tool for strategic, programme, and project
analysis of maintenance.
9.2.1 Functions of RMMS
The various functions that are supported by RMMS are:
a) The development of an annual road maintenance program that meets the
needs of the road user.
b) Develop strategies to enable the level of service required by the road
user to be achieved.
c) Support the preparation of an adequate annual road maintenance budget
d) Annual upkeep of the Standard Schedules of Unit Rates and data.
e) Ensure adequate spread of funding allocation to ensure preservation of roads,
bridges and related infrastructure and safety of the road user.
f) Identify emergency works required to existing roads, bridges and related
infrastructure items to make them safe and keep the road traffic worthy.
g) Making recommendations for minor road improvements and upgrading that may
preserve the assets, reduce maintenance costs, improve traffic flow, improve road
safety, reduce flooding, etc.
h) Preparation of monthly maintenance reports.
i) Preparation of reports regarding needs of the network and effectiveness and
adequacy of the maintenance budget.

74
 9.2.2 Central RMMS Cell
The RMMS cell in the direction office shall be under the control of the chief engineer.
This cell shall be responsible for running and maintaining the RMMS program in all
aspects. Only this cell shall enter data onto the RIS database. All the other RMMS
Cells/Units shall only be able to enter data onto a secondary file which, once the data
has been verified at all intervening levels, shall be the responsibility of the RMMS in
PWD Head Quarters to update
the original database. This shall ensure the integrity of the database and prevent any
manipulation of the stored data that might adversely affect or influence the decision
making process.
The following shall be the functions of Central RMMS cell
CHAPTER - 9

1. Preparation of the Annual Routine Maintenance Program for the entire

PWD road network;
2. Assist the preparation of annual road maintenance budget and program
3. Co-ordinate with the Division Offices, to set procedures and timings to ensure that
the annual road maintenance program is prepared to meet the required budgets
schedule;
4. Compile all information prepared by each District and check for adequacy of the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

annual formulate-year road maintenance program

5. Review of the proposals from field offices for allotment of maintenance funds
under different sub- heads in consideration of the defined program and budgetary
constraints.
6. Set up an effective MIS for both HQ and district offices to allow the recording and
tracing of all data collection, contract procurement information, contract progress
and payments, contractor performance and overall adequacy of maintenance;
7. Ensure that each district maintain the MIS and forward all information to HQ on
a monthly basis to suit PWD reporting procedures
8. Review of data to verify uniformity and adequacy of budgets and consistency of
contractor performance throughout the State; undertake regular audits.
9. Collect information from field offices regarding major disasters e.g flood damage,
bridge/road collapses etc. in order to provide reports on the cost of damages for
information and necessary action to PWD and Government.
10. Issue directions approved by Development commissioner works regarding changes
to maintenance procedures and techniques for more effective and cost effective
maintenance;
11. Train all staff in the latest maintenance techniques and the proper understanding of
road maintenance;
12. Direct the field officers on the implementation of routine maintenance works in
accordance with the PWD Road Maintenance Manual, standard documents etc.

75
9.2.3 Local unit

At Circle level the RMMS Cells shall have full use of the software, which shall be used
in the development of the maintenance strategy. These units shall also be able to
compare the effects of allocating some of the budget to various items such as
construction/rehabilitation of new roads.
At the Division level the RMMS Units will be able to view RIS database of the part of road
network for which they shall be responsible.
There shall be an Assistant Executive Engineer supported by Draftsman in the general
divisions under the control of the Executive Engineer with the following functions
1. The administration and upkeep of RMMS throughout the State to ensure that PWD
receives a suitable and adequate road maintenance budget to meet the required level

CHAPTER - 9
of service set by the road user.
2. Ensure the conduct of road condition survey on time to meet the
required budget submission
3. Together with the AEE(GIS) check data received from the district offices for
accuracy and consistency and note in particular any changes or queries;
4. Report to the RMMS Central Unit any problems with
the annual maintenance programme.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

5. Recommend changes to maintenance procedures and techniques for more
effective and cost effective maintenance;
6. Assist in the preparation of the Annual Routine Maintenance Programme for the
entire PWD road network and proposed distribution of funds for routine maintenance
activities.
7. Collect information from the field offices regarding major disasters e.g. flood
damage, bridge collapses etc. in order to provide reports on the cost of damages for
information and necessary action to RMMS Central unit

9.2.4 Data Collection and Validation

The Divisions shall be responsible for ensuring that the data is collected in accordance
with the instructions. Each Division will need to have a record of their road network
with full network details including traffic counts. One of their tasks will be to enter
the data collected in their Divisions onto specially prepared files, which will be
transmitted, to the appropriate RMMS Cell in the Circle for verification by them
before onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell for updating the database.
The following details shall be regularly updated:
9.3 Road Network Details
9.3.1 Road Inventory
The Divisions shall be responsible for ensuring that inventory details of all roads
added to the network are collected and transmitted to the Circle RMMS Cell for
verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell for entry on to the
RIS database. Any changes in inventory must also be sent to the Circle RMMS Cell
for verification and onward transmission to the RMMS Central Cell, and this
includes details of recently completed road maintenance works.

76
 9.3.2 Road Condition Details
The RMMS Central Cell shall be responsible for investigating all road condition
surveys. They will contact the RMMS Cells in the three Circles who will be
responsible for collection and validation.
There is a need for those engaged in road condition surveys to meet together on an
annual basis to ensure that a uniform standard system is adopted for recording the
condition of the roads throughout the State. The timing of the surveys will be
subject to the approval of the DCW but will normally take place on an annual basis
after the winter season.

9.3.3 Structures – Inventory and Condition Details of Culverts and Bridges

The Divisions will be responsible for reporting changes in the inventory to the
RMMS Cell in the Circle for verification and onward transmission to the RMMS
CHAPTER - 9

Central Cell for entry on to the database.

Collection of the condition details will follow a similar pattern to that for road condition
surveys.
9.4 Performance Monitoring
It shall be the responsibility of the Divisions to send details of all road maintenance
activity to the RMMS in the Circle for verification and onward transmission to the
RMMS Central Cell.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

9.5 Traffic Information System

Instructions regarding the collection of traffic data shall be issued by the RMMS
Central Cell to the RMMS Cells in the Circles in a similar way to that for the road
condition surveys.
Concerned Executive Engineer in contact with the weighbridge operators shall
forward axle load details to the RMMS Central Cell on a regular basis. Independent
surveys to obtain specific axle loadings to corroborate the information provided by
the weighbridges shall be conducted. The traffic data, coupled with economic
forecasts will be used to determine vehicle growth rates that area basic requirement
of HDM-4. The RMMS Central Cell will have the ultimate responsibility for
ensuring that vehicle growth rates are determined.

9.6 Vehicle Operating Costs

These Shall need to be updated on an annual basis to ensure that they reflect the
actual situation.
This task shall be the responsibility of the RMMS Central Cell.

9.7 Maintenance Intervention Costs

These costs shall be generated and updated based on either recent or current
maintenance intervention contracts. The Divisions shall be responsible for submitting
this data to the RMMS/HQ Circle via the RMMS Cells in the Circles. The RMMS
Central Cell will be responsible to analyzing the contracts to determine the required
maintenance intervention costs. Different maintenance interventions may be used and
these must be added to this group of data along with the relevant costs.

77
 9.8 Reporting

At the start of each financial year a new State version of the RMMS Database will be
released for all users. This will contain all the recently collected condition data and
Ordnance and Inventory revisions. Central unit users will be able to obtain new
versions via the network. Details of the completed maintenance work to be sent to the
RMMS Cell in the Circle for verification and onward transmission to the RMMS
Central Cell for updating the records. Maintenance intervention costs on a sq. metre
basis shall be returned to the RMMS Cell in the Circle for verification and onward
transmission to the RMMS Central Cell where they will be used to determine future
maintenance costs.

CHAPTER - 9
9.9 Specific use

9.9.1 Prioritization and budget proposal

This is the stage at which the RMMS/HDM-4 program is used to develop the
strategy to be adopted by the PWD with regard to road maintenance during the next
financial year. It gives required data for the necessity of each item of work to be
incorporated in the preparation of the maintenance estimate.
For each maintenance intervention selected the program will produce a prioritized list

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

of roads. Priority being given to that road which is in greatest need of maintenance
based on such factors as current condition and future estimated traffic volumes.
Different maintenance interventions will result in a different prioritized list of roads.
The task of the Chief Engineer and the Superintending Engineers from Circles is to
determine the optimum intervention strategy for each road and the required budget
for same.

9.9.2 Scenario generation

The maintenance interventions adopted for each road may be different and hence
there is no need to treat all the roads in the same manner. However, there is a need to
determine the optimum intervention and the length of road to be so treated. There
will be an economic length of road below, which the costs per kilometre will raise.
For example, the costs/ kilometre to carry out the same maintenance intervention are
likely to be more for a 0.5 km length than for say a 3.0 km length.

9.9.3 Constrained budget allocation

In accordance with State requirements the PWD shall submit their budgets for road
maintenance. The State will review the budget request and in turn produce an
approved list of roads for maintenance, which will form the PWD budget for the
following year. The same process covers both Plan and Non-Plan works.

9.10 Input into project planning and design

In the case of major up-gradations and strengthening projects, the detailed
planning and design stages shall require assistance from the RMMS database.

78
 CHAPTER 10

10.1 SAFETY

10.2 General.

This chapter details the safety measures to be followed in various construction and
maintenance operations. The aim is to provide and maintain a working environment
that is safe and effectively minimizes risks to the health of its employees, contractor,
equipments and members of the general public.
CHAPTER - 9

PWD shall ensure safety by

Placing the health and safety of all people ahead of the provisions of service.
Adequately training staff in the safe performance of jobs and in the basic areas of
accident prevention.
Following all specific rules of the Department consistent with PWD‘s health and
safety objectives.
Taking corrective action for every incident with the potential to cause harm, whether
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

such harm eventuates or not, and also in the case ofevery accident.
Insisting on arrangements for the safe use, handling, storage and transport of
equipment and substances.
Insisting on adequate facilities and protective clothing & equipment to protect the
health and safety of all employees
The practice of safety involves shared responsibilities and a team approach by all
employees. Everyone associated with PWD shall be responsible for their own health
and safety, and the safety of others affected by the actions of their work. Necessary
provisions for safety shall be foreseen and incorporated in the estimates during project
preparation stage itself.

10.3 Safety Equipment

PWD shall insist on provision of protective clothing and equipment where
hazards cannot otherwise be prevented or suitably controlled, and when complete
protection is essential. First Aid facilities shall be made available at all offices and
worksites, for the treatment of employees (including contractors) and visitors who are
injured or become ill.

10.4 Accidents
Working in the construction industry can sometimes be dangerous. Work-
related accidents can cause serious injuries, while most of these accidents are
preventable. Accidents are mainly classified into 4 types, viz. fatal accident, grievous
injury accidents, minor injury accidents and non-injury accidents as per IRC 53 Road
Accident Forms A-1 and
4. The following procedure shall be adopted in case of accidents.

10.4.1 Major Accident:

An accident will be considered a major one, if it involves loss of life (fatality),

79
serious injury to any person (grievous injury), non-injury accidents involving loss of
property or would cause serious disruption of normal life in the area affected, such as
by interruption to main lines of communication etc. In case a major accident
involving structures under construction or under maintenance by P.W.D. occurs, the
following procedure shall be followed.
The Junior Engineer or Subordinate under the control shall inform the Assistant
Engineer, Assistant Executive Engineer and Executive Engineer of the accidents by
the quickest possible means. The Police Inspector having jurisdiction over the area
shall also be informed in cases of death or serious injury to person and where
criminal activity is suspected.
i. The Assistant Engineer and Assistant Executive Engineer concerned shall, on receipt
of such information proceed to the spot within the shortest time possible and organise
or assist in rescue operations. The Assistant Executive Engineer or in his absence the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 10

Assistant Engineer shall immediately in form through suitable means (telegram /fax
/email) for official recording the Executive Engineer, the Collector of the District, the
Superintending Engineer and Chief Engineer briefly giving details of the accident.
Where the accident involves electrocution, the Electrical Inspector shall also be
informed.
ii. The Executive Engineer on receipt of such information shall send an email or fax
message to the, Chief Engineer and who shall report to Administrative Department,
Public Works Department giving brief details of the accident. He shall also proceed
to the spot within 24 hour, of the accident or in as short a time as possible and hold a
preliminary enquiry on the cause of the accident etc. and submit a detailed report to
the Superintending Engineer and the Chief Engineer within 3 days of the completion
of the enquiry. This enquiry shall be independent of any Police enquiry in the matter.

iii. Superintending Engineer shall, on receipt of information, inspect the site within 3
days or as short a time as possible and ascertain by personal enquiry the causes of
the accident, the adequacy of relief measures, and also find out best means of
restoring normal activities in the affected area. His report shall be sent to Chief
Engineer independently of the Executive Engineer's report within 3 days after his
inspection.

iv. The Chief Engineer shall inspect the site within a week of the occurrence of fatal
accidents or as early as possible and make such personal enquiries as he feels
necessary in order to furnish a full report of the accident to the DCW and he in turn
submit report to Government, detailing the causes, the action taken thereafter and
action to be taken to restore normalcy in the area. In addition, this report shall contain
information as to whether there is prima facie negligence or dereliction of duty on the
part of any Government servant and if so, make recommendations regarding
disciplinary proceedings to be taken against the delinquents.

10.4.2 Minor Accidents

In Minor accidents. First aid shall be provided immediately to affect persons and
medical aid sought in case of minor injury accidents. All accidents shall be reported
to superior officers and In case of damage to property the value shall be assessed and
reported to higher authorities.

80
10.5 Job Hazard Analyses

A job hazard analysis is a technique that focuses on job tasks as a way to identify
hazards before they occur. It focuses on the relationship between the worker, the
task, the tools, and the work environment. After an uncontrolled hazard is
identified, steps shall be taken to eliminate or reduce them to an acceptable risk
level.
Many workers are injured and killed at the workplace which can be prevented by
looking at workplace operations, establishing proper job procedures, and ensuring
that all employees are trained properly. The best way to determine and establish
proper work procedures is to conduct a job hazard analysis.

Job Hazard Analyses (JHAs) shall be a part of major projects that entail:

CHAPTER - 10
jobs with a high frequency of accidents which pose a significant threat to health and
safety;
jobs that have already produced fatalities, disabling injuries, illnesses or
environmental harm;
jobs that have the potential to cause serious injury, harm, or damage, even if they
have never produced an injury or illness;
jobs involving two or more workers who must perform specific tasks
simultaneously; newly established jobs whose hazards may not be evident
because of lack of experience;

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

jobs that have undergone a change in procedure, equipment or materials;
jobs whose operation may have been affected by new regulations or standards; and
Infrequently-performed jobs where workers may be at greater risk when undertaking
non- routine jobs.

10.5.1. Safe Job Procedures shall ensure a safer or healthier way of

performing the job.

Basic stages in developing Safe Job Procedures are: Identifying/selecting the

job to be analyzed
Breaking the job down into a sequence of basic steps
Identifying potential hazards in each step
Determining preventive measures to overcome these hazards This shall include:
1.Regulatory requirements
Personal Protective Equipment like
2. Safety glasses (e.g. for use during welding, blasting or other activities that could
result in eye damage).
3. Ear protection (e.g. ear plugs or ear muffs).
4. Safety shoes/boots.
5. Gloves.
6. Hats shall be provided to reduce impacts of sun and heat.
7. Shirts shall be worn at all times.
8. Reflective equipment, materials and clothing shall be provided for road workers,
particularly if work is continuing at night.
9. Safety signs and safety induction measures.
10. First Aid Kit available on site, first aid person trained on site or knowledge of
access to doctor/hospital.

81
 Training requirements
Responsibilities of each person involved in the job and publishing the names of the
persons and organizations to be contacted in the event of an emergency
A specific sequence of steps to follow to complete the work safely Permits required
Awareness of emergency procedures,
Publishing the location of the emergency responsive equipment and ensuring the
equipment is well located, visible and properly maintained.

A well-documented safe job procedure shall form the basis for initial job training
and as a briefing guide for infrequently performed jobs. It may be used as a
standard for safety inspections or observations and it will assist in completing
comprehensive accident investigations. Whenever an incident occurs, the Safe Job
Procedure shall be thoroughly reviewed by the worker and supervisor to ensure that
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 10

no important step is missing and that the Job Procedures meet current regulations.

10.6. Road Safety

An accident is a rare multi-factor eventually preceded by a situation in which one or
more road users having failed to cope with their environment, resulting in vehicle
collision, vehicle to rider or vehicle to property collision. It could be due to road
users have failed to cope with their environment. Therefore Engineers can make the
road user to cope with, by improving road and travel environments. However,
prevention and reduction in accident rate can be achieved only with education and
enforcement programmes along with engineering measures.

10.6.1. Road Safety Cell (RSC)

The Cell is primarily to coordinate the road safety activities of the PWD including
undertaking of road safety audits at various stages; identification of black spots,
improvement of accident sites in a phased manner, establishing Road Safety Cells at
a district level and interdepartmental co-operation, coordination and collaboration
with all stake holders of road safety and with the J&K State Road Safety Authority.
The following road safety activities shall be the prime responsibility of the road
safety cell of PWD,
Identification of Black spots as per Hon‘ble supreme court guidelines Prioritized
Blackspot Improvement Program
Road Safety Audit of existing roads
Mass Action schemes
Engineering measures for vulnerable road users Audit of upcoming project roads
Training and Establishing Road Safety Cells at district level Interdepartmental
coordination, cooperation and collaboration.
Accident report compilation with JKPWDOMS output, analysis, and
preparation of annual accident report
Implementation and Review of Road Safety Action Plan Development of Road
Safety Strategy and Program

82
10.6.2. Road Safety in Divisions

The road safety activity of PWD divisions shall be carried out by the Executive
Engineer assisted by his subordinates under the guidance of Road Safety Cell. They
shall also support the District Road safety wings.
The Divisional offices of road safety shall report all road accidents in their
jurisdiction to Road Safety Cell to propose safety engineering measures for such
locations; identify accident black spots; data from police departments, design and
priorities the schemes; and implement/improve such schemes under overall
supervision of Road Safety Cell. Also to coordinate the road safety activities of the
PWD at district level, prevention and eviction of encroachments on roads, action to
make the roads safe by timely maintenance and interdepartmental coordination with

CHAPTER - 10
all stakeholders of road safety. The Executive Engineer shall review and monitor the
progress of road safety works of concerned divisions and report will be submitted to
the RSC on a monthly basis.

10.6.3. Road safety engineering

A systematic, data-led process for devising and implementing road design and traffic
management that effectively prevent and reduce road accidents.

10.6.4. Road safety audit of new schemes (Accident Prevention)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Road safety audit is a systematic method of checking the safety aspects of new road
schemes before they are constructed. The process of road safety audit shall include
commissioning audit, initiating audit and provision of brief, undertaking audit, design
and BOQs, responding to audit, and finalising actions. Various aspects to consider
while undertaking audits the checklist are the following:
1. Planning
2. Cross section
3. Alignment
4. Roadside communities
5. Junctions: general.
6. Junctions: Additional check for round about.
7. Junctions: Additional check for signal controlled junctions
8. Special road users
9. Signs, Markings and lightings, and
10. Roadside hazard
Road safety audit shall be conducted as per standards of road safety

10.6.5. Road safety assessment of existing roads (Accident Reduction)

The audit procedure shall be used on existing roads. Regular audit of existing roads
enables hazard to be identified before an accident occur and to remedy those
situations that are causing accidents. This involves the regular assessment of accident
data and driving speeds on project roads and regular reassessment of road functions.
Following measure shall be strictly followed.
Advertisement hoarding shall not be allowed at or within 100m of any road junction,
bridge or another crossing, within 10 m of the edge of carriageway. (as prescribed in
the IRC- 46- 1972) or latest
83
 Road boundary shall be demarcated and all encroachments shall be evicted.
Stacking of materials in the Clear Zone (5m from the edge of pavement on rural
roads and 3m on urban roads) roadway shall not be permitted
Speed breakers for control of vehicular speeds on minor roads shall be done as
perIRC99

10.6.6. Black spot Improvement Programmes

A junction, a bend or short length (300-500m) at which accident are clustered, shall
be called as a Blackspot and following standard process shall be carried out to
improve all such spots.
1) Identify accident site
2) Preliminary accident analysis
3) Site visit
4) Final Diagnosis
5) Develop countermeasures
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 10

6) Detailed design
7) BOQ
8) Economic Evaluation
9) Prioritization and program
10) Implementation
11) Monitoring and Evaluation
Black spot improvement programme shall be implemented in a phased manner and
the details of all above mentioned process shall be carried out as per the accident site
records on: JKPWDOMS

10.7 Signs and Markings Programmes

10.7.1. Signs
Signs shall be installed based on IRC-67-2001 and shall be carried out as per the
supplementary technical advice for IRC-67 shall be available at the website:
JKPWDOMS
In installation of signs priority shall be given to gateway sign, junction signings, bend
signs, school signs, regulatory and prohibit signs and hazard markers and hump
warning and informatory signs.
10.7.2. Markings
Markings shall be applied based on IRC-35-1997 or latest. In markings on a road,
priority shall be given to centre line, edge line (where adequate width is available),
junction marking with appropriate traffic control for junction, pedestrian crossing
markings, hump and rumble strip marking and hazard markings.

10.8. Specification for road safety items.

The specification on road safety works shall be carried out as per specification section
800 of MoRTH specifications for road and bridge works and items not included shall
be carried out as per Road Safety Cell‘s specifications for traffic signs and other
safety- related works published by the J&K PWD and available at the website:
JKPWDOMS
Where no technical specifications have been mentioned in the IRC Codes and
Standards, only approved and agreed CRSC guidelines (as developed based on
International Standards
84
and proven research) are to be followed such as Chevron sign, Retro- reflective
Sheeting, RRPM Signs, Solar RRPM, Marking materials, Crash barriers, and raised
humps.

10.9. Safety Measures at Road Construction works.

All road works, no matter how small, must be provided with proper sinages. It shall
warn, inform and direct all road users at all time about the approaching hazards.
Details of guidelines like components of construction zone, traffic control devices
and traffic management practices shall be as per IRC-SP-55-2001.

10.10. Mandatory Provision

A separate estimate provision shall be included for road safety works in all
estimates of contracts. In major projects exclusive road safety provision shall be

CHAPTER - 10
included and for minor works, 5% contract value shall be set apart for road safety
items.

10.11. Safety of Buildings / Structures

The Assistant Executive Engineer under the control of buildings/ structures shall
inspect all buildings/ structures twice a year and record certificates to the effect that

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the building/structure is safe for use. All buildings/ structures are required to be
inspected once a year by the Assistant Executive Engineer under the control to
ensure that the building/ structure are safe for use. In case of electrical and other
installations the Assistant Executive Engineer (Electrical) under the control of
buildings/ structures shall inspect the same twice a year and record certificates to
the effect that electrical and other installations are safe for use. In the event of any
such deficiencies found in the building/structure necessary report shall be made to
higher authorities and immediate steps taken to get the same inspected by the
Executive Engineer and further action taken to rectify the defects. The Executive
Engineer shall also inspect important buildings/structures once a year. He shall
bring to the notice of his Superintending Engineer, cases where he has reasons to
doubt the structural soundness of any building/ structure and the latter will take
prompt action, as he considers necessary. When any deficiency is found in the
important buildings like Civil Secretariat, Hospitals, colleges, schools, Raj Bhavan,
Ministers Bungalows, Legislative complex, High Court buildings and houses of
other V.I.Ps, report about unsafe conditions shall be sent to the Chief Engineer, with
his recommendations and proposal for repairs/retrofit or disposal of the building. As
a follow up action, if it is decided to demolish any such unsafe buildings it shall be
disposed of without land by auction under the powers vested in competent authority.

10.12. Safety of Bridges

The safety and integrity of bridges shall be ensured through proper design
guidelines and regular inspection and review. The responsibility for bridge safety
shall be vested with the technical team comprising members from DIQC/NIT,
concerned Executive engineer and bridge expert from department. Team shall
provide technical review, comments and recommendations on design and
construction services, widths, load capacities and operational requirements for
bridge repairs, replacements and upgradation. Team shall maintain a bridge
inventory database of all bridges, set priorities for maintenance, repair, and
replacement needs and prepare budget proposals. Maintenance of bridge shall include
railings and signs as well. Team shall also implement and administer the bridge

85
 Safety and inspection programs through the development of policies and
guidelines. Bridge inspection reports shall be prepared as per procedures detailed in
the Chapter on Bridge Maintenance.

10.13. Disaster management

Human life may get affected due to disasters like landslide, flood, earthquake,
cyclone, tornado, building collapse, external aggression, terrorist insurgencies etc.
The Deputy commissioner shall be under the control of emergency measures as per
norms of DDMA. PWD Executive Engineers, in liaison with the Deputy
commissioner, shall be in the fore front of salvage measures and shall get into action
on a war footing basis.
Executive Engineer with proper documentation from DDMA, shall arrange for
necessary refugee camps, with water supply and sanitary facilities. The Executive
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 10

Engineer shall restore transport facilities by clearing blockages and rectify

damages to roads. The Executive Engineer shall inspect safety of bridges and
where these are found to be unsafe, shall arrange for temporary bridges/crossings.
In the eventuality of such disasters, top priority shall be given to rehabilitation/
reconstruction activities. All necessary materials, labour etc. shall be arranged through
local contractors and equipments/ vehicles hired. This shall be well coordinated with
other agencies through the District Collector.
Funds for each department shall be based on the assessment by revenue authorities,
which shall be subsequently allotted.

10.14. Safe Environment Practices

Sustainable development shall be ensured through safe environmental practices. All

construction activities cause disturbance to the environment in one-way or the other.
Care shall be taken to minimize such effects as per the provisions of various acts and
rules detailed in Chapter 11 and 12
The PWD offices shall be maintained spotlessly clean and in safe environment. The
premises shall be provided with gardens and trees. Waste disposal shall be done
regularly without affecting environment. Burning of wastes shall be done through
incinerators as far as possible, if not in an open area enclosed by fence and under
adequate fire safety measures.

86
CHAPTER 11

11.1. Environmental Management

11.1.1. Introduction
The objective of environmental management is to enhance the positive
environmental impacts and abate/mitigate negative environmental impacts of
construction activities and related works. Good environmental management also
ensures compliance with all applicable National, State and Local Environmental

CHAPTER - 11
legislations. This chapter provides the following information: Description of
environmental issues relevant to PWD activities List of applicable legislations at
the national, state and local level Institutional settings pertaining to legislation
Environmental clearance requirements For regular works, the process to integrate
environmental management measures with implementation. For certain other
works requiring further environmental studies prior to implementation, the
process for conducting the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and
developing the Environmental Management Plan (EMP). Environmental training
& capacity-building Environmental communication and consultation.
This chapter is supported with Appendices that provide guidance on various

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

environmental management activities.

11.2. Environmental issues in roads, bridges, buildings and others

Sustainable development with thrust on environmental protection has become the
corner stone of the policies, programmes, procedures and practices governing the
development of industrial and infrastructure projects in India. PWD is committed to
prevent or mitigate environmental degradation and to promote the integration of the
environmental concerns in the development projects. The environmental issues to be
considered in all stages of the project are described here.

11.3.1. Land
Projects involving land disturbance, removal of vegetation and reshaping of
topography make the soil vulnerable to erosion, dust generation and generation of
waste materials. The mitigation measures shall be included in the planning and
design stage to ensure its effective implementation during the project execution.
These include: Compensatory planting. Ensure surface is reinstated, smooth and free
of encumbrances. Minimize waste from construction and reuse of waste material
wherever possible. Solid waste shall be placed to minimize intrusion into the
carriageway in consultation with local help/government authorities. Collect similar
types of construction waste into common piles and dispose suitably. Put general litter
and waste into special purpose bins or remove to covered designated area and ensure
it is contained.

11.3.2 Air
Air pollution occurs when the air contains pollutants like gases, dust, fumes or odour
in harmful amounts that affect the health or comfort of humans and animals or which
could cause damage to plants and materials. The sources of the air pollution in the

87
 infrastructure projects include, but not limited to; Site clearance, transportation of
men and materials, construction of temporary accommodations, stock yards,
installation of construction plants during the pre- construction stage, Operation of
construction plants such as hot mix plant, concrete batching plant, crusher and wet
mix macadam (WMM) plant, Excavation of foundation, roadway and borrow areas,
Operation of machinery and vehicles, Construction of roadway, buildings and
bridges, Stock piles of materials With proper assessment of the degree of pollution
from each source, required mitigation measures and preventive measures can be
delineated for the protection of air quality from further degradation and keep the
ambient air pollution levels of the project area within limits stipulated in National
Ambient Air Quality Standards. Some of the measures for the prevention and
mitigation of the air pollution due to the project are: Selection of project location or
preferred alignment and design Fitting required air pollution control equipment for
the machinery, plants and vehicles With proper periodical maintenance and servicing
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 11

of the pollution control equipment and the machinery, plant and vehicles
Limited tree cutting, and planting of more trees Watering of the access
roads and approach roads or provide seal coat Watering of the materials before
loading into the plants for reduction of dust generation Limit the extent of disturbed
areas and restore the disturbed areas

11.3.3. Water
Water pollution is" the loss of any of the actual or potential beneficial uses of water
caused by any change in its composition due to human activity" .Source of the
water pollution and impacts on the water environment include but not limited to:
Loss of water resources such as relocation of wells, hand pumps, tube wells, loss/
filling part of water bodies and change in the flow pattern of water.
Pollution of streams due to increase of sediment laden runoff, Pollution of water
sources from the oil spills, disposal of bituminous materials, stockyard of diesel,
engine oil, chemicals, bitumen, emulsion etc., Disposal of wastewater generated
from the temporary living facilities, Waste water generated from the operation of
plants, cleaning of machinery and equipment, Wash water from the workshop and
washing bay. With the proper characterization and quantification of waste water
from each source, required treatment facilities can be designed and implemented for
the control of water pollution. Some of the mitigation measures for the prevention
and/ mitigation of the water pollution are: Controlling the generation of sediment,
oil and grease, excess nutrients, organic matter, litter, debris and any form of waste
(particularly petroleum and chemical wastes) from a construction and disallowing
these substances into the waterways, storm water systems or underground water
tables. Such materials shall be captured before they reach drains and waterways by
following methods:
(i) Cover stockpiles or spray water to suppress dust,
(ii) Store all chemicals, fuels and other hazardous liquids and solids according to
manufacturer‘s specifications within a bunded and covered area or land depression
away from water ways,
(iii) Dispose of empty drums and as soon as possible appropriately or through a licensed
contractor or to a licensed disposal centre and
(iv) Water quality management e.g. using sand bags to filter water and remove sediment
and control litter; Limiting the areas of disturbed land, progressively clearing the
site in accordance with construction needs and rehabilitate as soon as possible,
Protect drainage lines with sediment basins and silt fences, Construction of proper
sanitation
88
 facilities for the disposal of the wastewater generated from the kitchen and toilets.
Construction of proper wastewater treatment facilities for the waste water generated
from the workshops, concrete batching plants, hot mix plants and wet mix macadam (WMM)
plants. Wash out ready-mix concrete agitators and concrete handling equipment at such
facilities. Such treatment plants shall be considered while planning major infrastructure projects
and the treated water shall be recycled and reused for gardening or irrigation.
Rain water harvesting shall be done as per Clause 5.5.12 of Part 9 Section I of National
Building Code and the collected water shall be used for gardening, flushing, fire fighting or
washing purposes.

11.3.4 Noise and Vibration

Noise pollution is unwanted human-created sound that disrupts the environment.
The dominant form of noise pollution in the infrastructure projects is from vehicles,

CHAPTER - 11
machinery, equipment, construction plants, construction works and vehicles plying on the
road. The noise pollution from the project activities can be reduced with the proper
planning and design of the noise control measures and proper work planning. Some of
the noise control measures for the reduction of the noise from the project are as follows:
Use of quiet equipments, machinery, plant and vehicles available in the market Proper
maintenance of equipment, machinery, plant and vehicles
Installation of machinery with correct foundations to reduce to vibration
Enclosing the noisy equipment, Providing noise attenuation screens, wherever required
Proper planning of the working hours (noise generating activities scheduled for the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

middle of the day)

11.3.5 Flora and fauna

Construction of road, bridges, buildings and other structures may impact flora and fauna.
The degree of the impact varies based on the location, scope and size of the project. Some
of the impacts that occur are:
Cutting of trees
Damage to the aquatic life Damage to the fauna
Damage to national parks, wild life sanctuaries and reserve forests Impacts on National Parks
Damage to Biosphere Reserves and Damage to the forests
With assessment of the nature and scale of impacts on flora and fauna, required preventive
or mitigation measures can be addressed during the planning and design stage. The
damage to the biological environment can be prevented or reduced with the
implementation of preventive or mitigation measures designed during the planning and
design stage. Some of the common mitigation measures are:
Saving the trees as far as possible with proper design and alignment changes and
selection of location of the project
With proper work planning during execution for the reduction of disturbance to the aquatic
life Providing proper animal crossings, water crossings, fencing and traffic control
measures Planting tree saplings by
(i) providing temporary protective barrier around existing trees for
protection during construction works, and
(ii) not placing equipment or excavate within 2 metres of a tree.

89
 11.3.6. Cultural Environment

There may be some impacts on the cultural environment due to the infrastructure
project during the pre-construction and construction stages. The impact varies from
loss of the part of the property to the total property.
The negative impact on the cultural environment can be prevented by changing the
location of the project and/mitigated by the relocating or modifying the affected
structure. An important aspect here is the timely and open communication with the
property owners and community by:
Speaking to the local representatives. Placing signages at prominent positions.
Providing a newsletter to affected people.

11.4. Environmental Regulations (National, Territory and Local)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 11

The various prevailing environmental acts and rules relevant to the PWD
activities are listed here. This includes Central Acts & Rules administered by the
Ministry of Environment & Forests, other National legislation that are relevant
and J&K Acts & Rules

11.4.1. Central Acts

The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986 and the Environmental Impact

Assessment Notification, 2006
The Water and Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution)Act
The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991 National Environment Tribunal Act, 1995
The National Environment Appellate Authority Act, 1997 The Forest
(Conservation) Act, 1980
The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 The Biological Diversity Act, 2002
The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958
The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and
Conditions of Service) Act 1996
In Appendix 1100.1, a brief description of these Acts as well as their implementing
agency has been provided.

11.4.2. Other National legislations to be followed

In addition to the above detailed legislations, the rules and conditions of the following
Acts/ Legislations have to be followed:
Explosives Act,1884 and ExplosiveRules,1983
Petroleum Act,1934 and Petroleum Rules,2002.
The Mines and Minerals (Regulations and Development) Act, 1957 and rules
there under.

90
In Appendix 1100.1, a brief description of these Acts & Rules as well as their
implementing agency has been provided.

11.4.3 J&K Legislation and other Acts

The additional legislations, which are to be followed in J&K, are as follows: J&K
Forest Act and its amendments
J&K Forest Rules
J&K Private Forests (Vesting and Assignment) Act
J&K Forest (Vesting & Management of Ecologically Fragile Lands) Act & Rules.
Government Order – J&K Forest (Vesting & Management of Ecologically Fragile

CHAPTER - 11
Lands) Rules – Constitution of Tribunal
J&K Preservation of Trees Act J&K Forest Produce Transit Rules
J&K Restriction on Cutting and Destruction of Valuable Trees Rules. Forest
Settlement Rules
J&K water resources regulations and management act 2010 along with J&K
Water Resources Regluations and Management Rules.
In the particular context of the various PWD activities, the provisions of these
legislations should be kept in mind for their relevance in the context of each works
/ projects that are being proposed for implementation.

11.5. Organizations implementing environmental regulations

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Strict enforcement of the environmental regulations, legislation, policy guidelines
may impact the project, as many Government agencies are responsible for issuing
of permissions and monitoring of implementation of compliances to the conditions
of the permissions issued. The following agencies would play important roles in the
case of projects.

11.5.1. Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)

MoEF is the nodal agency in the administrative structure of the Central Government,
for the planning, promotion, co-ordination and overseeing the implementation of
environmental and forestry programmes. The principal activities undertaken by
Ministry of Environment & Forests, consist of conservation and survey of flora,
fauna, forests and wildlife, prevention & control of pollution, afforestation and
regeneration of degraded areas and protection of environment, in the framework of
legislations.
MoEF has set up regional offices. The regional office for the J&K is is responsible
for collection and furnishing of information relating to EIA of projects, pollution
control measures, methodology and status, legal and enforcement measures and
environmental protection in special conservation areas such as national parks,
sanctuaries, wetlands, and forests.

11.5.2. Pollution Control Board (PCB)

PCB is a statutory authority attached to the MoEF and located in New Delhi. The
main functions include the following:
Advise the Central Government on any matter concerning prevention and control
of water and air pollution,
Plan and execute a nation-wide programme for the prevention, control or
91
 abatement of water and air pollution;
Co-ordinate the activities of the State Board and resolve disputes among them;
Provide technical assistance and guidance to the State Boards;
Plan and organise training of persons engaged in programme on the prevention,
control or abatement of water and air pollution;
Organise through mass media, a comprehensive mass awareness programme on
the prevention, controlor abatement of water and air pollution;
Collect, compile and publish technical and statistical data relating to water and air
pollution; Lay down, modify or annul emissions and air/water quality standards,
Prepare Manuals, Codes and guidelines, and Disseminate information.

11.5.3. J&K Pollution Control Board(JKPCB)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 11

J&K PCB is the authority designated for pollution control in J&K

11.5.4. State Department of Ecology Environment
In relation to Ecology, environmental matters, this Ecology environment
Department performs the functions similar to the MoEF at the state level.

11.5.5 J&K Forest Department

The J&K State Forest Department is responsible for the protection and managing
the notified forests and associated wildlife within the state. The Department is
headed by a Principal Chief Conservator of Forests, and is supported by Chief
Conservator of Forests responsible for its various functions. For general
administration there are Forest Circles headed by Conservators, under their
jurisdiction forest Divisions controlled by Divisional Forest Officers. Each Division
is further subdivided by basic units–Forest Ranges manned by Forest Rangers
reporting to the Divisional Forest Officers.
11.6. Environmental and other related clearances
Various environmental, labour and other departmental permissions may be required
for the PWD activities prior to implementation. An indicative list of clearances and the
responsible department / board are included in the following table.

No Clearance Department/ Board

1. Environmental Clearance MoEF/ Department of Ecology
Environment / State Pollution Control
2. Forestry Clearance Forest Department
3. Consent for Establishment and J&K State Pollution Control Board
Consent for Operation of
Construction Plants
4. Permission for withdrawal of ground Central Ground Water Board/
water from the regulatory zones JKSWRRA/Jal Shakti Department
(PHE)
5. Permission for taking surface Irrigation Department/Jal Shakti
water from regulatory zones
6. Labour license State Labour Department
7. License for Setting up of Diesel Department of Explosives
Pumps
8. Registration of Workers J&K Construction Workers Welfare
Board
9. Permission for opening of new Department of Mining and Geology and
quarries for Aggregates I&FC/Jal Shakti/JKSWRRA

92
 10. PUC Certificate for Vehicles and Road Transport Department
Machinery
11. Permission for setting up of Local Health Departments and Local Body
Labour
12. Permission for Jal Shakti (Irrigation and Flood Control)
construction/expansion of road Department.
near or on top of embankment of
river, nallah, water channel,
irrigation channel etc.
Based on the works /projects being done, PWD needs to ensure that the
necessary clearances are obtained prior to implementation and the clearance

CHAPTER - 11
conditions are complied with during implementation.

11.7 Regular works / projects – Standard EMP

In the regular works / projects of the PWD, the environmental issues need to be
properly and effectively managed. In principle, PWD needs to ensure the following
in all its regular works / projects:
Avoid or minimize tree cutting as far as possible; if tree cutting is unavoidable, make
plans for compensatory plantation,

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Protect the state eco-sensitive areas such as national parks, wild life sanctuaries,
reserve forests and coastal zones, Reduce litter, sediment and pollutants entering
waterways and the land, Reduce noise, vibration and air emissions, Minimise waste
and dispose of it appropriately,
Use resources efficiently and reduce energy & material consumption, Provide the
safety of workers, road users and those in the neighbourhood, Provide safe, clean
and hygiene labour camps, if these are required,
Keep people affected by the construction activities regularly informed.
To operationalise these activities, a standard EMP (Appendix 1100.2) shall form
a part of the PWD standard bid documents / contract agreements and shall be
adhered to by the contractor who executes the work. PWD shall strive to ensure
that the contractor‘s activities deliver quality construction without compromising
on environmental performance. The standard EMP applies to the activities in
construction site and ancillary activities such as the transportation of materials,
sourcing of material and borrow areas. The contractor is responsible for
ensuring all sub-contractors and any other people working on the project are
aware of environmental issues and are incompliance to the EMP requirements.
In addition to the standard EMP, there are additional guidance documents such
as (i) Guidance on Oxbow lands – Appendix 1100.3, (ii) Guidance on quarry
and borrow area management – Appendix 1100.4, (iii) Guidance on
Landscaping & Tree Species – Appendix 1100.5 and (iv) Guidance for Public
Consultations – Appendix 1100.6. Wherever applicable, the PWD shall ensure
that these guidance documents are used and measures are in practice. PWD
shall provide cross-references to these guidance documents in the standard bid
documents / contract agreements as required.
In the context of the regular works /projects, PWD shall review the standard
EMP and other guidance documents in order to determine whether additional Bill-
of-Quantities (BOQ) items are necessary to achieve good environmental
performance. If required, PWD shall ensure that these additional BOQ items are
included in the standard bid documents / contract agreements.

93
 Documentary evidence shall be available to demonstrate compliance with the
standard EMP. This can include periodic progress reports, file notes, audit reports,
photographs, and minutes of meetings or video. The contractor shall retain them in
safekeeping for perusal by the PWD.
Failure to reasonably satisfy and comply with the standard EMP requirements may
result in the contractor receiving partial payment against the contract claims and
also a noting in the contractor‘s performance certificate.

11.8. Conducting Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) & preparing

Environmental Management Plans (EMP) where
required
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 11

For certain works / projects, separate environmental impact assessments have to be

conducted. This may be due to the MoEF requirements or funding agency
– such as the World Bank or Asian Development Bank–requirements. This may also
be due to the possible impacts one co-sensitive areas or due to the large scale
environmental impacts across the state. In all such cases, separate environmental
impact assessments (EIAs) will be conducted and relevant environmental
management plans (EMPs) will be prepared.

EIA is an accepted planning tool, which is integral to project decision-making. The

objective of EIA is to foresee the potential environmental problems that would arise
out of a proposed development and address them in the project's planning and design
stage. EIA integrates the environmental concerns of the project activities right at the
time of initiating for preparing the feasibility report. With this process, the
environmental concerns and mitigation measures can be integrated in project
development. The stages in a typical EIA are as follows:

Screening Screening is done to see whether a project requires environmental clearance as

per the statutory notifications.
Scoping Scoping is a process of detailing the terms of reference of EIA.
Baseline Data Base line data describes the existing environmental status of the identified study
Collection area. The site- specific primary data shall be monitored for the identified parameters
and supplemented by secondary data if available.
Impact Impact prediction is a way of ‗mapping‘ the environmental consequences of the
Prediction significant aspects of the project and its alternatives. Environmental impact can
never be
predicted with absolute certainty and there is all the more reason to consider all
possible factors and take all possible precautions for reducing the degree of
uncertainty
Assessment of Possible alternatives shall be identified and environmental attributes compared.
Alternatives, Alternativesshallcoverbothprojectlocationandprocesstechnologies.Alternativesshall
Delineation of consider ‗no project‘ option also. Alternatives shall then be ranked for selection of
Mitigation he bestenvironmentaloptionforoptimumeconomicbenefitstothecommunityatlarge.
Measures and Once alternatives have been reviewed, a mitigation plan shall be drawn up for the
Environmental selected option and is supplemented with an EMP for the implementation. The EMP
Impact is a crucial input to monitoring the clearance conditions and therefore details of
Assessment monitoring shall be included in the EMP.
Report An EIA report shall provide clear information to the decision-maker on the different
environmental scenarios without the project, with the project and with project
alternatives. Uncertainties shall be clearly reflected in the EIA report.
Public Law requires that the public must be informed and consulted on a proposed
Hearing development after the completion of EIA report.

94
 Decision Decision- making process involve consultation between the project proponent
Making (assisted by a consultant) and the impact assessment authority (assisted by
an expert group if necessary)
Monitoring of Monitoring shall be done during both construction and
the Clearance operation phases of a project.
Conditions

Conducting EIAs and preparing EMPs are studies that are done by external
consultants on behalf of the PWD. Taking into account the particular context of
these works / projects, the PWD shall prepare terms of reference for conducting the
EIAs and preparing the EMPs. PWD shall refer to the EIA Notification 2006 for
information on various aspects of conducting EIAs, its knowledge of the state and
the dimensions of the proposed works / projects in preparing the terms of reference.

CHAPTER - 11
The external consultants will be selected using the Government procurement
procedures. Once mobilized, the external consultants conduct the studies and
prepare reports that are to be reviewed and accepted by the PWD. Based on the
report outcomes, the project planning and design shall be changed so that the
environmental impacts are minimized.
EMP is a project specific plan with the following contents:
Table of preventive, mitigation and compensation measures
(collectively referred as ―management measures‖) for all identified significant
impacts at the pre-construction, construction and operational stages of the project;

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Guidance for preparing the management measures is included in Appendix 1100.7.
Organizational arrangements, training and capacity-building initiatives required to
implement the management measures, and Work program, time schedule and
budgetary estimates.
An EMP may include construction safety management plans for high-
risk events or events with potential for significant environmental damage such as
fires, fuel spills or explosions.
In preparing the EMP, the PWD shall advise the consultants to refer to the
Guidance for preparing project-specific EMPs (Appendix1100.7) format or
projects. This includes a typical table of management measures that need to be
considered. In addition to the Guidance on preparing project-specific EMPs,
there are other guidance documents such as (i) Guidance on Oxbow lands –
Appendix 1100.3, (ii) Guidance on quarry and borrow area management –
Appendix 1100.4, (iii) Guidance on Landscaping & Tree Species – Appendix
1100.5 and (iv) Guidance for Public Consultations – Appendix 1100.6. PWD
shall provide cross-references to these guidance documents in the project-
specific EMPs and standard bid documents / contract agreements as required.
In the context of these works / projects, PWD – with support from the external
consultants - shall necessarily review the project-specific EMP in order to determine
whether additional BOQ items are necessary to achieve good environmental
performance. If these are required, then PWD shall make sure that BOQ items are
included in the bid / contract documents. Like other civil works, the project-specific
EMP shall form a part of the contract agreement and shall be implemented by the
contractor. Supervision of project-specific EMP implementation can be carried out
by the PWD or given to Supervision Consultants (SC) based on the PWD capacity
and the scale of the project. The contractor has to prepare his schedule for the
physical implementation of the project-specific EMP and take periodic consent of
the supervision authority as

95
 stipulated in the project-specific EMP. PWD has to ensure that the contractor obtains
the necessary environmental clearances and also adheres to the project-specific EMP
requirements through the pre-construction and construction stages. After the
construction stage is completed, the project- specific EMP will include activities
during the operational phase. PWD shall ensure that these activities and the project-
specific EMP is compiled throughout the project cycle.

11.9. Environmental management training & capacity-building

PWD will ensure that the induction and refresher training programmes cover
environmental management as well. PWD‘s shall develop, establish and maintain
training modules on a variety of environmental subjects that will include the
following:
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 11

General awareness module on environmental issues in construction of roads,

bridges and buildings; Skill training on effective environmental planning and
designing of roads. This will include issues such as avoidance of eco-sensitive
areas, minimizing tree-cutting through proper choice of alignment, arranging for
compensatory plantation,
Skill training on good environmental practices in construction camp management.
This will include top soil storage, hot mix plant operation, WMM plant operation,
and concrete batching plant operation, diesel dispensing station operation, labour
camp management, workshop maintenance, waste management, and general
housekeeping.
Skill training on good environmental practices in quarry and borrow management.
Skill training on managing tree cutting, transplantation, compensatory tree plantation
and their maintenance, landscaping and oxbow land development.
Skill training on environmental management tools such as EIA, EMP, public /
stakeholder consultations and environmental auditing.
Awareness training on environmental laws and their relevance to PWD activities. PWD
shall also identify staff within the Department who have the background or aptitude or
interest or flair for environmental management issues, and develop them as trainers on
environmental management issues. PWD shall organize specific training programmes
for them, and also equip them with the required skills & facilities. PWD shall also
periodically send its staff to training programmes on environmental management
nationally and internationally.

96
CHAPTER 12

12. Social Impact Management

12.1. Social Impact Assessment

Social impacts of development projects will have both positive and negative effects
on individuals, households and the local community in particular and the society in
general. Social impacts of development projects vary depending on the size and
type of projects settings and the characteristics of the community affected. These
may include potential changes to population, lifestyle, cultural traditions,

CHAPTER - 12
community dynamics, and quality of life and well-being. Involuntary
displacement induced by development projects has extreme social impacts,
which in many cases warrant detailed and specific study leading to resettlement.
PWD recognizes the need to assess the potential social impacts of the projects and
is committed towards responsible management of the same. These guidelines have
been developed to assist Public Works Department officers in the management of
social issues in planning and execution of its project.
The purpose of these guidelines is to
● Demonstrate and explain the process used in PWD to manage and protect the social
values

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

● Provide guidance to PWD in managing social issues through out the life cycle of the
project
● Ensure transparency, predictability and accountability in its confirmation of social
considerations. These guidelines are applicable to all PWD projects and
programmes related to the planning, design, construction and maintenance of road
and buildings.

12.3. Social issues and counter measures

Rehabilitation of roads as such may not cause significant adverse impacts

but their upgrading (which involves widening of existing roads, construction of new
roads/bypasses, realignments and junction improvement etc.) would entail
acquisition of land and structures as well as adverse impacts on other assets,
causing disruption of livelihood. Besides, it is likely that some Common Property
Resources (CPRs) such as religious structures, passenger shelters at bus stops; hand
pumps etc. may also be adversely affected. Close examination of the social impacts
of a project during the planning phase can enable such impacts to be avoided or
minimized and suitable counter measures included in the project design. The extent
of Social Impact Assessment necessary for the project will depend upon the type
and size of the project and the size of the nature and scale of the potential impacts.

97
 Issues Measures When to
Address
Acquisition of land and assets resulting Conduct Social Impact Assessment of
in families being displaced or loss of affected community (ies) – access to
livelihood causing discomfort. Stirring houses, business, and farmlands
agitations and results in road blocks by affected and consider options for
locals. This gives negative impression of relocation, improvement, P D
the project to local community, mistrust compensation.
and lack of confidence arises which
delays the project due to numerous
reasons

Assess community facilities affected

P D
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 12

e.g., bus stop, playfield, water points

Develop time bound resettlement and
P D
rehabilitation action plan
Minimize disruption to
P D C
social
Social economic
interaction
Maximize potential
P D C
benefit of
development project
Severance of access roads to private Access roads are retained or approved
D C
or
community properties,

Destruction of social and cultural sites Conduct survey of sites of social or

which have sentimental attachment or cultural significance
historical significance to the local
community
Design project to minimize impact
on
sites of social/cultural significance
Ensure construction works
are managed to
minimize/avoid impacts
on identified sites
Development of cultural heritage
sites for promoting tourism
loss of well-being and amenity from Construction planning to manage
construction activities, prolonged delays and minimize identified impacts
to construction or lack of information
provided

Public meetings, information

bulletins etc to keep community
informed of construction program and
identify and
address any issues arising
Efficient construction practices
P- Planning Stage, D- Design, C-Construction,

12.4. Social screening and scoping process (Categorization)

A project may be categorized into three parts; based on the impacted population.
This exercise shall be carried out for all projects at project investigation stage.
The social screening format is provided as Annexure1202B

98
 S-1: Projects are those that will affect 200 PAPs or more or if Project Affected
persons (PAPs) are physically displaced and will require a detailed Social Impact
Assessment Report that would include a Resettlement Action Plan. These documents
are to be submitted for approval by concerned EE and clearance by the authority
concerned for administrative /technical sanction.
S-2: Projects are those in which no PAP is physically displaced or less than 200
PAPs are affected. In this case a Social Management Plan (SMP) is required
that would include an abbreviated resettlement plan
S-3: Projects, on the other hand will not have any households affected at all i.e, they
can be classified as ‗socially benign‘. However, submission of a Social Status
Report is required.

CHAPTER - 12
12.5. SIA Process and contents

Social impacts can be defined as the consequences to people of any proposed

action that changes the way they live, work, relate to one another, organize
themselves and function as individuals and members of society. This definition
includes social-psychological changes, trauma and stress changes in people‘s
values, attitudes and perceptions of themselves and their community and
environment, over- crowding, infrastructure pressure, and poverty.
Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is a methodology to study the social effects of
infrastructure projects and other development interventions using special tools to

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

determine the social outputs, outcomes, or impact of an intervention program. SIA is
concerned with the human consequences of development proposals, identifying all
significant social impacts that arise in this context, giving
particular attention to the mitigation of adverse or unintended aspects. All
stakeholders can anticipate benefits of the social impacts assessment:
1. Reduced impact on communities or individuals – identification of mitigation
measures is an integral element of SIA.
2. Enhanced benefits to those affected – SIA preparation also helps identify
measures such as job training packages;
3. Avoiding delays and obstruction– a well prepared SIA demonstrates that social
impacts are taken seriously and helps to gain development approval;
4. Lowered costs – addressing social impacts and mitigation measures at an early
stage helps to avoid costly errors and remedial actions imposed at a later stage
by regulatory agencies;
5. Better community and stake holder relationships–experience has shown that SIA
can help to allay fear and concern and build a basis of trust and cooperation
necessary for the proponent to successfully introduce and operate the project; and
6. Improved proposals – an SIA provides information that adds value to existing
projects and helps to design future ones.

99
 12.6. Activities comprising Social Impact Assessment

SIA comprises most of the following activities. It:

❖ identifies interested and affected peoples;
❖ facilitates and coordinates the participation of stakeholders;
❖ documents and analyses the local historical setting of the planned intervention
so as to be able to interpret responses to the intervention, and to assess
cumulative impacts;
❖ collects baseline data (social profiling) to allow evaluation and audit of the
impact assessment process and the planned intervention itself;
❖ gives a rich picture of the local cultural context, and develops an understanding
of local community values, particularly how they relate to the planned
intervention;
❖ identifies and describes the activities which are likely to cause impacts
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 12

(scoping);
❖ predicts (or analyses) likely impacts and how different stake holders are likely to
respond;
❖ assists evaluating and selecting alternatives (including and development
option);
❖ assists in sites election;
❖ recommends mitigation measures;
❖ assists in the valuation process and provides suggestions about compensation
(non-financial as well as financial);
❖ describes potential conflicts between stake holders and advises on resolution
processes;
❖ develop scoping strategies for dealing with residual or non-mitigatable impacts;
❖ contributes to skill development and capacity building in the community;
❖ advises on appropriate institutional and coordination arrangements for all parties;
❖ assists in devising and implementing monitoring and management programs.

12.7. Key elements of the full SIA process

12.7.1. Scoping

Scoping identifies the type of the social impacts that are likely to be expected and
clarifies the issues relevant to the project including the frames of reference; major
issues; key variables to be considered; the geographical area of most importance and
other areas of likely impact; the units of analysis and methods of measuring or
determining impact; interested parties or stakeholders (including those who have
vested interests in the project or the affected community, and other groups who will
suffer any impacts from the development; and identification of community leaders
and spokes persons from the stakeholder groups. Undertaking a literature review to
identify previous studies of a similar nature to the proposed intrusion is an
important step in the scoping process which should be commenced as early as
possible. Scoping is largely conceptual process undertaken by the SIA task force
with assistance from discussions with interested parties.

100
12.7.2. Profiling
Profiling, sometimes considered to be part of the scoping process, involves
gathering information about the community in the pre-impact state to be
provided initial estimates for input into prediction models, and to provide
baseline information with which to compare changes when they occur. Some
of this data may already exist in the form of secondary data such as census
and other government and community records, local histories, maps,
newspapers and telephone directories. Otherwise, a social survey may be
required to collect this essentially quantitative data. Interviewing long term
residents is also a valuable source of information. Attempt should be made

CHAPTER - 12
to consider the nature of changes that are inherent in the cultural setting and
likely to effect change on the community independent of the current
development project. The likely impact of other development projects in the
proximity of the current development and any cumulative impacts should be
considered.

12.7.3 Public consultation and participation :

The SIA task force would use a variety of community involvement strategies such
as public meetings and community workshops to hold public discussion of the type
and nature of development in the analysis of specific development alternatives.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Undesirable alternatives are discarded, and greater imagination can be applied to
the range of possibilities available. The meetings would also determine whether the
community should support the particular project being considered. The project
would still require government approval.

12.7.4. Mitigation, Monitoring and Management

The SIA task force by its involvement in the implementation planning of the
development can make concrete suggestions that mitigate impacts and maximize
the potential benefits accruing to the development. The actual mitigation and
enhancement strategies will depend on the nature of the development and the nature
of the impacts. The major task of the SIA task force is to identify the elements of
the development that can be modified in order to reduce impacts. The impact itself
is the result of a stimulus (the aspect of the development causing the impact) and a
response (the way in which the community responds). It is possible to change or
modify the nature of the community response, or its ability to adapt to new inputs,
so that potential negative impact scan become positive or beneficial features of the
development (Branch et al, 1984).
It is in mitigation that SIA is most useful, and where the science of SIA is most
developed. There are a range of possible mitigation strategies that are applicable
to almost all developments, or that are adaptable to suit the individual needs of
the specific development proposal.
12.7.5. Audit
Audit refers a review of the whole procedure of SIA as it was applied to the specific
project. It is important to review predictions and in many cases predictions could be
different to out come because SIA has been successful in its role of mitigation and
monitoring. Care needs to be placed on the interpretation of predictions at the
assessment stage, and during any audit.

101
 12.7.6 Engagement of consultants

SIA is an inherently local activity. External consultants should be employed, but the
success of SIA rests on a thorough understanding of the local culture and the way the
culture responds to specific intrusions. It is vital that local expertise be used in the
conduct of the SIA, and that information about each project be developed so that the
lessons learnt from one SIA process can be applied to others as well. For projects
in S-1 category external consultants may be engaged for preparation of SIA.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 12

Engagement of external consultants can also be done for conduction Audits.

12.8. Selection of' Site for Acquisition

The work requiring the land to be acquired should have been administratively
sanctioned and funds must have been provided. Unless otherwise ordered by the
Government the Officer competent to issue T.S. for the work concerned shall be the
authority to make selection of site. When the P.W.D undertakes construction of
buildings or other structures for other Departments, Local bodies etc., the
responsibility for selection of site shall vest with the concerned Department or
Authority, who may consult the officer of the P.W.D competent to issue T.S. for the
work regarding the technical suitability of the site before finalizing the site. The
officer who selects the land is bound to see that the interest of government, the public
and of private/ individuals likely to be affected are duly considered.
With regard to ascertaining the suitability it may be necessary to conduct some
preliminary examinations, inspections or tests at site. These should be done with the
consent of the owner, if he is willing, before moving for acquisition. The help of the
officers of the Revenue Department may be sought in this regard. If, however, there is
objection to these preliminary works being done, and if prima facie, the site appears
suitable and necessary the Executive Engineer may move for land acquisition. In such
cases, as soon as the notification under section 3(1) is published the necessary surveys
and tests should be done.

12.9. Unforeseen impacts

Any additional impacts identified during project execution shall be dealt with in
accordance with the R&R policies. The check list of social impact shall be filled in and
reported for calculation of entitlement and disbursement.

102
 12.10 RIBBON DEVELOPMENT

12.10.1 Acquisition of Adequate Highway Land

One of the most effective methods of ensuring that ribbon development does not take place is to
acquire a liberal right of way at the initial stage itself, with an adequate provision for meeting
both the present and the anticipated future requirement. The following standards need to be
followed in this respect.

Table -1

CHAPTER - 12
LAND WIDTH FOR DIFFERENT CLASSES OF ROAD.
Land width in metres
Class of Plain & rolling country Mountain and steep terrain
roads Rural areas Urban areas Rural areas Urban areas
Normal Range Normal Range Normal Exceptional Normal Exceptional
National
45 30-60 30 30-60 24 18 20 18

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

& state
highway
Major
district 25 25-30 20 15-25 18 15 15 12
Roads
Other
district 15 15-25 15 15-20 15 12 12 9
roads
Village
12 12-18 10 10-15 9 9 9 9
Roads

It should be noted however, that acquisition of adequate right of way is itself not a panacca for
the problem of ribbon development and can only be a useful supplement. Even where adequate
right of way existed, ribbon development has taken place. On many highways because of lack of
suitable measures for con training the general building activity and number of accesses along
the highways. It is. therefore, to be stressed that acquisition of liberal right-of-way should be
supplemented by other methods.

12.10.2 . Planning Measures for Controlling Land Use along Highway

A notable case contributory to linear development along trunk routes in the urban sections is the
growth of industrial establishments by the side of road. The advantages of locating industries

103
 along the highways are obvious since they would benefit much from the necessibility to the
communication arteries and nearness to the cities. The undesirable effect of such growth can be
avoided if proper control is exercised in the use to which the land abutting on the highway right-
of-way is put. Conversion of agricultural land into industrial use along the strip of high way land
can be prevented if the State reserves the right to determine the use to which land can be put. The
process by which land use is controlled effectively by the State is known as "Zoning", and in this
country, the matter is dealt with by the Town and Country Planning Authorities in the States. As
part of the overall planning process, the States or the local authorities draw up rules and
regulations governing the development of land in the area with a view to achieving safety, health
and general welfare. Master plans are prepared for the towns and the countryside, laying down
clearly the use to which land can be put, and it is incumbent on developers to conform to these
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 12

plans. Such planning measures should be enforced more extensively keeping in view the traffic
needs. Greater cooperation between the Highway Authorities and the Town and Country Planning
Agencies in this regard will be beneficial.

12.10.3 . Enforcement of Measures for Controlling Building Lines, Set-back Distances,

Control Lines, Heights of Buildings etc

In order to prevent overcrowding and preserve sufficient space for future road improvements, it is
often advisable to lay down restrictions regarding the building lines, set-back distances, control
lines, height of buildings, provision of open spaces, etc. along the highway. Such measures can
also help in securing. Adequate sight distance & preserving the aesthetic value of the highway.
Building lines express the limits beyond which totally any building construction may be
permitted. It may also be desirable to limit the nature of building activity even beyond the
building lines. In such cases, the concept of ― Control Lines‖ is established, and unrestrained
building activity permitted only beyond these lines. Preferably the following minimum standards
should be followed for Building & Control Lines:

104
Table : 2 STANDARDS FOR BUILDING LINES & CONTROL LINES

Mountain and steep terrain, distance between

Plain & rolling terrain
building line and road boundries (m)
Urban &
Rural areas Industrial Rural areas Urban areas
Areas
Width
Class of
between
roads
Width Width building

CHAPTER - 12
between between lines &
building control road Normal Exceptional Normal Exceptional
lines lines boundries
(m) (m) (set back
distance
(m)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

National
& state 80 150 3-6 5 3 5 `3
highway
Major
district 50 100 3 5 3 5 3
roads
Other
district 25/30* 35 -- 5 3 5 3
roads
Village
25 30 -- 5 3 5 3
roads

*If the land width is equal to the with between building lines indicated in this column, the building
lines shall be set back 2.5 metres from the road land boundary lines.

12.10.4. Control of Sub-Division of Land Abutting Highway Land

Even if the use to which land abutting the highway land is put is controlled by suitable zoning
regulations, many a times it so
happens that the land developers propose a large number of streets and subdivide the land into plots,
thus resulting in high density in plots.

105
 PART – II

ENGINEERING PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES

The work methodology of Public works will be shifted from Manual to online
(www.jkpwdoms.in) from April 2020 completely however the work flow will
be as per the mechanism defined in the engineering manual 2020.

106
Chapter 13
13.1. Project Preparation

13.2. Introduction
All works in PWD are classified into original new works, upgradation works and repairs &
maintenance. A project report is required for all works except emergencies, repairs and
maintenance. For maintenance and repair works, the Executive Engineer shall submit proposals
for the same to the Chief Engineer through the Superintending Engineer for consideration and

CHAPTER - 13
approval.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

107
 Chapter 14

14.1. INVESTIGATION

14.2. General.

It is most important that every work shall be properly investigated and all relevant data collected
and correlated before finalizing the design and estimate for the work. Wrong choice of site or
designs based on incorrect or insufficient data can result in considerable avoidable expenditure
and delays. Hence maximum attention shall be given to investigation and furnishing of full and
correct field data required. Modern equipments shall be used as far as possible.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

Investigation may often have to be carried out in two phases; viz. preliminary investigation
and detailed investigation. In the preliminary investigation phase, various alternative sites or
alignments etc. shall be examined and a comparative study of the merits of the different
alternatives possible to serve the purpose intended shall be made. Based on such study, the final
choice of the site or alignment as well as broad features of the proposals shall be made. The
financial implication of each proposal shall be looked into and the most economical one shall be
finally recommended without sacrificing the technical feasibility. In the detailed investigation
phase, all the data required for designing the work at the site or along the alignment finally
chosen should be collected.
The Executive Engineer concerned shall decide whether the investigation shall be done by
the department or entrusted to any other agencies considering the special nature and urgency of
the work. The Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer will be responsible to conduct the preliminary
investigations through the department investigation wing or through empaneled agencies with
the approval of Executive Engineer i.e., he will indicate the various alternatives to be
considered, and the preliminary data to be collected to enable a final choice, of site or alternate
alignment. On the basis of the preliminary investigation, the Assistant Engineer must send a
report to the Executive Engineer/ authority competent to issue technical sanction for the work,
through Assistant Executive Engineer concerned, giving the comparative merits of the different
alternatives studied and his own recommendations. The authority competent to approve the
proposal shall then make a final choice of the alternatives examined, or if additional data is
required, he shall call for the same. The economic aspect shall be looked into before the final
selection. After the final choice is made, detailed investigation shall be conducted. The Design
Engineer responsible for designing the work shall also inspect the site to acquaint himself with
all the site conditions if found necessary. Wherever shifting of utility services is required the
concerned department may be informed well in advance so as to enable them to take further
steps for shifting the same.
In the case of works for the use of other Departments of the J&K, the Executive Engineer
or the Assistant Engineer must keep the local officers of the respective Departments informed of
the investigation work being done. The opinions of the officers of the concerned Department
may also be taken into account in regard to choice of site and features required for the work. The
onus for technical details however shall be vested with the P.W.D. The bench marks and survey
reference points shall be carefully selected and properly established so that there is no likelihood
of these being missed when the work is taken up for execution. Wherever possible, the
benchmarks may be connected to the nearest permanent Mean Sea Level (M.S.L.) Bench
Mark.Funds for investigation shall be separately provided in the budget every year as lump sum
provision. This provision shall be utilised for expenses in connection with the investigation. The
competent authority shall approve the investigation estimate as per delegation of powers. If sub
soil exploration is found necessary, this shall be mentioned in the proposal submitted for
approval.

108
14.3. Preparation of investigation reports
Based on the site investigation conducted the Assistant Engineer shall prepare and submit the
investigation report in accordance with the provisions contained in the relevant codes and
practices (IRC/IBC etc) and the same shall be submitted to the next higher authority for further
necessary action and approval by the competent authority.

14.4. Investigation for Road works

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

14.4.1. Investigations, Design and Construction of new Pavements

The different classes of roads under PWD are National Highways (NH), State Highways (SH),
and Major District Roads (MDR). Other District Roads and Village Roads in the J&K are
currently under the control of JKPWD.

14.4.1.1 Investigations
The following Investigations are to be carried out during the planning stage, before design and
preparation of estimates and tender documents for the construction of new road pavements,
both for new roads and for widening of existing carriageway. For more details refer (1)
IRC:SP:19-2001, manual for Survey, Investigation and Preparation of Road Projects, First
Revision (2) IRC: 37-2001 Guidelines for Design of Flexible Pavements, Second Revision (3)
IRC:58-2002, Guidelines for Plain jointed Rigid pavements for Highways, Second Revision
(Indian Roads Congress Publications) Topographic surveys and investigations for surface and
sub-surface drainage requirements for the new road pavements. Soil Survey, material surveys
and laboratory tests (wet sieve analysis, liquid limit, plastic limit, IS Heavy / Modified
Proctor compaction test, soaked CBR test on soil and specified tests on aggregates to be used
in GSB and GB layers) to assess their properties and decision on the choice of different
pavement materials/layers, their availability and location of borrow pits/quarries. Traffic
studies, particularly classified traffic volume of all heavy vehicles. Axle load studies on heavy
vehicles and evaluation wheel load distribution and design value of cumulative standard axle
loads by conducting relevant studies on 20 percent sample or by making use of available /
secondary data and assumed values of vehicle damage factors.

14.4.1.2 Design and Drawings

 Study of various under ground utilities present, if any and possible future requirements.
 Design of sub-surface and surface drainage system.
 Decision on type of pavement to be adopted on the entire road and on some identified stretches
depending on site condition, problems pertaining to traffic and utility lines and cost
considerations.
 Design of total thickness requirement of selected type of pavement and the thickness and other
details of the pavement layers (for flexible /ICBP/ CC pavement) for the particular road stretch
under consideration or a selected group of roads of identical features/characteristics. In the case
of CC pavement, the details of transverse contraction and expansion/construction joints and
longitudinal joints are also to be designed.
 For design flexible pavements IRC publications like IRC SP 72-2015 can be used. In frost zones
relevant class of specifications is to be adopted.
 Suggesting the specifications to be adopted and special materials/conditions/instructions such as
compaction standards to be followed, equipment/machinery to be used, etc. Preparation of
working drawings for each road showing all the details including drainage system, cross
drainage structures and the details of pavement layers, their levels etc.

109
 14.4.1.3 Preparation of Estimates and Tender details
The estimates, tender details and tender documents with all conditions of contract are to be
prepared in conformity with the design and drawings prepared as above.
Investigation for the Design, Estimation and Construction of Flexible Pavement Overlay
on Existing Flexible Road Pavements
14.4.1.4 Investigations

The following investigations are to be carried out during the planning stage, before the design,
preparation of estimates and tender documents for the strengthening of existing road
pavements/construction of overlay over existing road pavements. Refer IRC:81-1997. Tentative
Guidelines for strengthening of Flexible Road Pavements Using Benkelman Beam Deflection
Technique, First Revision (Indian Roads Congress Publication).
Basic data on existing road, such as
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

(a) road length

(b) width of carriageway, shoulders/foot path, road side drains and if these vary at different
stretches the details of the same
(c) assessment of the present condition of the drainage system including the necessary maintenance
works
(d) history of the road construction and maintenance works undertaken in the past.
(e) Topographic Survey and collection of data to obtain the details of surface and sub-surface
drainage system for the existing road, including the reduced levels of longitudinal road side
drains and crossd rains upto the location for disposal of water from the road surface.
(f) Collection of details of the existing pavement layers by cutting open at least one trench across
the pavement for at least half the pavement width, from one edge up to the centre line of the
pavement, at a typical location. The trench may be about 0.3 m in width and up to depth of 0.2m
below the top of sub grade level. The details to be noted are :
i. Type of each pavement layer and the thickness value
ii. The condition of the existing bituminous surface course/courses – such as whether partially or
fully cracked or damaged or stripping of bitumen has taken place, etc.
iii. Assessment of sub grade soil type, determination of field dry density
iv. Collection of about 30 kg of soil sample for testing
v. Laboratory tests such as wet sieve analysis, liquid limit, plastic limit, IS Heavy compaction test
and soaked CBR test.
vi. Additional tests, if required on the samples of bituminous mixes from surface course (such as
bitumen extraction, bitumen content and aggregate gradation in the mix).
vii. Traffic data, particularly classified traffic data of HCV (2-axle, 3-axle-rigid base, 3- and multi
axle – articulated vehicles), LCV and bus traffic.
Axle load distribution studies on classified heavy vehicles (as above) Pavement condition
studies, such as :
(a) Pavement surface condition, indicating details/percentage cracked area, pot holes, rutting,
undulations and longitudinal profile, cross slope, etc
(b) Unevenness/Roughness index measurement by standard Bump integrator or any other reliable
method.
viii) Location of various utility/service lines such as underground drainage system, water supply
pipes and various other utility services including electricity, telephone, cable system, etc and
making provision for shifting /relocation of all/some of the service lines to edges of the road
land and also ducting system to avoid road cutting across the road in future.
Measurement topographical details/longitudinal levels along the pavement as well as
longitudinal side drains and measurement of cross section levels at suitable intervals to prepare
longitudinal and cross section drawings and to work out the quantity of materials required for
profile correction.
Decision regarding improvement of the subsurface / pavement drainage system for the existing
road including widened portion, if any. Structural evaluation of flexible pavement by
Benkelman Beam Deflection studies as per IRC:81-1997.

110
14.4.2.2. Design and drawing

 Design of pavement overlay thickness as per IRC:81-1997, IRC-SP 72-2015

 Design of overlay thickness and decision on the choice of overlay type and thickness of
the layers.
 Preparation of working drawings for each road showing all the details of the work to be
carried out, including treatment at existing man holes etc.
14.4.2.3. Preparation of Estimates and Tender Details
Preparation of estimates as per the details of design and special materials, layers etc,
Preparation of estimates by considering
(a) patching of pot-holes
(b) patching of isolated cracked areas
(c) cutting open and refilling badly filled up trenches which continue to settle down, leading to

CHAPTER - 14
repeated formation of depressions or ruts-the existing pavement layer over the badly filled up
trenches to be cut and removed including 300 mm depth of sub grade soil and refilled using
cohesion-less and compacted using plate vibrator in two to three layers, and relaying of the other
pavement layers similar to the existing pavement layers and (d) profile correction of existing
pavement surface, as separate items. Preparation of tender details and special conditions in
conformity with the design and estimates.
14.4.3. Bituminous Road construction
The compaction of embankment/fill and sub grade adopted are as per Standard Proctor
Compaction. This has to be upgraded to IS heavy compaction as per MoRTH specification. In
fact, compaction in any granular / stabilized layer must refer to IS heavy compaction as specified

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

in IRC/MoRTH specifications. In case of stabilization, in each case mix is to be designed
separately and strictly followed. Coarse grade sub base materials as per MoRTH specification
only should be used as per wet sieve analysis.
For base course only WBM has been specified. For high density traffic corridors WMM or CRM
etc are more appropriate for performance and constructability. IRC/MoRTH specifies 100 mm
forWBM-1 (G-1) and 75mm for WBM-II (G-II) and WBM-III(G-III). Also pavement thickness is
designed as per IRC SP 72-2015
The specifications for materials e.g. aggregates and bitumen are lower (less strict for quality) than
those recommended by MoRTH. For example, the water absorption, combined flakiness and
elongation index, stripping value etc are much lower in case of aggregate, and similarly for
bitumen quality.
Priming and tack coat specifications are very elemental without much clarity; priming even
allowing cut- back bitumen which is not allowed now except exceptional cases. Moreover, they
are specified with excessive bitumen content per unit area in comparison with MoRTH
specifications. Further, the use of pressure distributor is to be specified. Seal Coat type A and B
are specified. DBM, SDBC, OGPC, MSS surface dressing etc are commonly used.

14.4.4. Materials and Equipment

14.4.4.1 Materials
The quality of materials leads to quality construction. Similarly, the appropriate equipments are
required for construction of road layer as per the specifications.
Selection of materials shall be strictly as per IRC/MoRTH guidelines/requirements for the
specific construction specifications. There should be acceptance criteria for the materials also
rather than only the quality control of construction specification. Materials should be rejected if
not found to meet acceptance criteria. Manufacturer‘s certificate shall not be considered in lieu of
the tests. While contractor shall test at the site laboratory, the District level laboratory also should
test samples randomly.
Use of alternate materials for various pavement layers are to be specified with details of their
construction methods etc. For example, use of tunnel muck and similar material in
embankment/fill, sub grade and drainage layer, the demolished cement concrete for GSB layer,
etc are to be promoted.
111
 14.4.5. Shoulders

Shoulder gives adequate side support to the pavement and also drains off surface water from the
carriageway to the road side drain. Where side footpath is not constructed, normally a shoulder
exists which needs appropriate construction and maintenance for proper functioning of the road.
Shoulder is invariably neglected and remains without outward slope for efficient draining of surface
water. This is of utmost importance in J&K where the snow fall is heavy.
The construction of shoulder is required to be done in layers each matching the thickness of
adjoining pavement layer using selected earth/granular material. Only after a layer of pavement,
shoulder shall be laid and compacted for same matching thickness; next corresponding layers in
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

pavement shall be taken up, and then the shoulder. This procedure shall be followed upto the surface
course. The material, density and compaction shall be as per the specification of sub grade, where it
is earthen shoulder; and the required cross-fall should be maintained. Paved shoulders should have
the specification consisting of sub base, base and surfacing courses and conforming to the relevant
specifications of corresponding items for pavement layers.

14.5 Qualification of bidders:

Any contractor registered in the appropriate class in PWD can bid for the works. Which is discussed
in chapter 20.

14.5.2 Pre-Qualification

All Bidders shall provide in Section-2, Forms of Bid and Qualification Information, preliminary
description of the proposed work method and schedule, including drawings and charts, as necessary.
The proposed methodology should include programme of construction backed with equipment
planning and deployment duly supported with broad calculation and quality assurance procedures
along with Quality Assurance Plan(QAP), proposed to be adopted justifying their capability of
execution and completion of work as per technical specifications, within stipulated period of
completion. In this method initially a notice is published to invite intending bidders to express their
interest in bidding for the particular work. They are asked to furnish information on several points on
the basis of which screening is to be done. Tender forms are issued only to those contractors who
pass the selection criteria. In this system, the number and identify of tenderers who can bid gets
frozen at the outset. Thereafter, the bids of all the bidders have to be opened and the work awarded
straightaway to the lowest responsive bidder since every bidder is already screened. Sometimes, this
system is not favored because it consumes a lot of time because of two notice periods once for pre-
qualification and then again for the bid proper and also each bidder knows who the other bidders are.
It is also seen sometimes that an unworthy entity finds a place in the prequalified list. Proponents of
the system, however, say that bidders chosen being entities of great stature there is no fear of a cartel
being formed.

14.5.3. Post Qualification

In this system the qualification criteria are set and put in the bid documents. The bidders are asked to
supply detailed information on these criteria. The bids will be opened and bid of the lowest quoted
bidder will be evaluated on the basis of such information. The employer will evaluate and compare
only Bids determined to be substantially responsive. A substantially responsive bid is one which
confirms to all terms, conditions, and specification of the bidding documents. The employer will
award the contract to the Bidder whose bid has been substantially responsive to the bidding
documents and who has offered lowest evaluated bid price.
In this system no bidder knows in advance as to who the other bidders are since any one can
put in a bid at the last minute. However, the downside is that every bidder has to incur expenditure
and effort to prepare a detailed bid whether he is going to qualify or not.

112
14.5.4 Qualification Criteria

Mentioned under the chapter for SBD in the manual

14.6. Road Alignment Considerations

The location or layout of the centre line of the road on the ground is called alignment. The
alignment of road shall be decided only after conducting proper surveys and investigation. The
horizontal alignment includes straight paths, horizontal deviations and curves. Changes in gradient
and vertical curves are covered under vertical alignment of road.
In general, new roads will have to follow the existing cart tracks and other such existing
alignments. The provisions of IRC SP 19 and IRC SP 48 shall be followed.
The ideal alignment between two points shall satisfy the requirement as given under:

CHAPTER - 14
Short: It is desirable to have a short (or shortest) alignment between two terminal stations. A
straight alignment would be shortest, though there may be several practical considerations, which
would require deviations from the shortest path.

Easy: The alignment shall be such that it is easy to construct and maintain the road with minimum
subsequent problems. Also, the alignment shall be easy for the operation of vehicle with easy
gradients and curves.

Safe: The alignment shall be safe enough for construction and maintenance from the view point of
stability of natural hill slopes, embankment and cut slope and foundation of embankment. Also, it

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

shall be safe for the traffic operation in terms of safe geometric features.

Economical: The road alignment would be considered economical only if the total cost including
initial cost, maintenance cost and operational costs, is the lowest.

Sound: The alignment shall be on the firm ground and shall not be susceptible to large settlement,
deformation, landslide, etc.

Aesthetics: While selecting the alignment, the aesthetics of the area shall be borne in mind.

Environment: The alignment shall be decided giving consideration to environment protection,

particularly in echo sensitive hill, forest areas and coastal zone areas. Tree cutting shall be avoided
as far as possible while finalising the road alignment. Further details regarding environment aspect
are provided in section 1100(Appendix).

Social: Land acquisition and displacement shall be kept minimum

14.6.1. Factors Controlling Alignment

The various factors, which control the road alignment, may be listed as:

Obligatory points: These are control points governing the alignment of the roads. These control
points may be divided broadly into two categories:
Points through which the alignment is to pass. Points which the, alignment shall avoid. Obligatory
points through which the road alignment has to pass may cause the alignment to often deviate from
the shortest path. The various examples of this category may be a bridge site, intermediate town, a
mountainous pass or a quarry.

Traffic: In most of the cases, the people use certain routes traditionally. These may either be due
to convenience, social connection with other areas, etc. The proposed alignment shall keep in view
this traffic flow pattern. At the same time one shall also have fair judgement of future trends in mind.

113
 Geometric designs: Geometric design factors, such as, gradient, radius of curve and sight distance
would also govern the final alignment of the road. As far as possible, steep gradient shall be avoided
and limited to the ruling or design gradient. Thus, it may be necessary to change the alignment in
view of the design, speed and maximum allowable super-elevation. It may be necessary to make
adjustments in the horizontal alignment of roads keeping in view the minimum radius of curve.
The absolute minimum sight distance, which shall invariably be available in every section of the
road, is the safe stopping distance for the fast moving vehicles. Also, there shall be enough distance
visible ahead for safe overtaking operations of vehicles. Hence, the alignment shall be finalised in
such a way that the obstructions to visibility do not cause restrictions to the sight distance
requirements. The relevant IRC specifications shall be adopted.

Economy: The alignment finalized based on the above factors shall also be economical. Avoiding
high banking, deep cutting, major crossing and balancing of the cuts and fills can decrease initial
cost of construction. At the same time, care shall be taken to see that it is not likely to involve costly
maintenance and operational expenses. The vehicle operating costs may be given due consideration
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

while designing the alignment.

Drainage and Other considerations:

Various other factors that may govern the alignment are drainage considerations, hydrological
factors, social obligations, etc. The vertical alignment (particularly the gradient and change of grade)
is often guided by drainage considerations. The sub-surface water level, seepage flow and high flood
level are also the factors to be kept inview.

Special Consideration for Hill Roads

For selection of road alignment in hilly area, reference may be made to Hill Roads Manual (IRC:
SP: 48). In hill roads, additional care has to be taken for ecological considerations, such as:
Stability against geological disturbances Land
degradation and soil erosion Destruction and
denudation of forest
Interruption and disturbance to drainage system
Aesthetic considerations
Siltation of water reservoirs

14.7. Surveys

Final location of the alignment is based on ground verification, and therefore, the engineering
surveys are to be carried out. The surveys may be completed in four stages as below:
 Reconnaissance.
 Preliminary Survey.
 Determination of Final Centre Line.
 Final Location and Detailed Survey
To facilitate the survey team in the tentative selection of alternative alignments for subsequent
detailed ground reconnaissance, it will be advisable to make use of modern techniques like, aerial
survey, photogrammetry and remote sensing.

14.7.1. Reconnaissance Survey:

Keeping in view the obligatory points the next step will be to undertake reconnaissance survey in
the following sequence:
Study of topographical survey sheets, revenue maps, geological and meteorological maps, and
aerial photographs or GIS maps where available Preliminary aerial survey/ satellite imagery
reconnaissance (as against Aerial Photographs), where practicable and feasible.
Ground reconnaissance, Final reconnaissance of inaccessible and difficult stretches

114
14.7.2. Preliminary survey:

The preliminary survey is a relatively large scale instrument survey conducted for the purpose of
collecting all the physical information which affects the proposed location of a new highway or
improvements to an existing highway preliminary surveys include census surveys, traffic surveys,
soil and material surveys, topographic surveys and drainage studies.
The main objectives of the preliminary survey are:
 To survey the various alternative alignments proposed after the reconnaissance and to
collect all the necessary details of topography, drainage and soil.
 To compare the different proposals in view of the requirements of a good alignment. To
estimate the quantity of earthwork, materials and other construction aspects and to work

CHAPTER - 14
out the tentative costs of alternate alignments.
 To finalise the best alignment from all considerations.
 The survey procedure and map preparation is explained in IRC SP 19.

14.7.3. Determination of final centre line:

Making use of the maps from preliminary survey showing the longitudinal profile, cross-sections
and contours, a few alternative alignments for the final centre line of the road are drawn and
studied and the best one satisfying the engineering, aesthetic, environmental, social and economic
requirements is selected. Horizontal curves are designed and the final centre line is marked on the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

map. The vertical curves are designed and the profile is then determined.

14.7.4. Final location and detailed survey:

The alignment finalised after the preliminary surveys is to be translated on the ground by
establishing the centre line. The line to be established in the field shall follow as closely as
practicable the line finalised after the preliminary survey and conforming to the major and
minor control points established and the geometric design standards .However, modifications in
the final location may be made in the field if necessary.

14.7.5. Preparation of investigation report

For preliminary project report and DPR preparation of road projects of National Highways, State
Highways and MDR, provisions and guidelines contained in IRC SP 19 and other IRC codes, shall
be followed. Preparation of social impact assessment using the instrument and check list given in
Annexure1202C.

14.8. Investigation for Bridges

The investigation for bridges shall be done as per the IRC SP 54 and IRC Codes named in Section
(Appendices).1512, Bridges on State Highways, Major District Roads and Other District Roads.

14.8.1. Selection of sites

Adequate efforts made in selection of a good site for locating a bridge will be amply rewarded in
the form of reduced cost of the project and trouble free performance of the bridge. The cardinal
principles to be kept in view at the time of selection of a particular bridge site including river
training works are to provide a suitable crossing consistent with safety and economy and
acceptable detour from the existing road alignment.

14.8.2. Factors deciding site selection:

The site of a bridge shall be carefully selected after considering the following points: -
115
 Presence of high and stable banks:

The presence of high non-erodable banks generally offers an ideal site, which reduces the cost of
approach embankments and their protection works.
Narrowness of the channel and large average depth compared to maximum depth:
This ensures large average depth of flow compared to maximum depth of flow and reduced
waterway, which greatly reduces the overall cost of the bridge structure.

Presence of good founding strata at shallow depth:

A site, which requires a shallow foundation, shall be preferred to one, which may require a deep
foundation.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

Straight reach of the river u/s and d/s of the proposed site:

The course of river or stream over which the bridge is constructed shall have a straight reach for
at least 100 metres on either side of the proposed crossing. Straightness of the reach both u/s and
d/s ensures uniform distribution of discharge/velocity. Curvature in the stream especially on the
u/s leads to obliquity and concentration of the flow on the convex side leading to higher scour,
and consequent cost of foundation and protection works. If the bank on the convex side is
erodible, it may lead to heavy recurring expenditure in protecting the abutments and the
embankment on that side.

Possibility of right angled crossing:

Right angled crossing offers minimum possible bridge length and reduces chances of obliquity of
flow with respect to the substructure.

Possibility of good approach alignment:

Curves except gentle one are preferably to be avoided on approaches and bridge proper from
visibility and safety considerations. The approaches on both sides shall have a minimum straight
reach of 15m for major bridges and 10m for minor bridges. Also steep gradients shall be avoided
on approaches.
Where existing two-lane highway is proposed for widening to four-lane:
The additional two-lane bridge shall be sited as close to the existing bridge as possible. However,
in case of bridges having well foundations, distance sufficient for generation of passive resistance
of soil shall be provided.
Although it may not be feasible to satisfy all desirable attributes simultaneously, the selected site
shall represent the most desirable mix of the attributes consistent with overall economy, including
the cost of approaches. Sometimes more than one site may have to be examined at the preliminary
stage and comparisons made regarding cost and relative advantages and disadvantages. Based on
such study, the final choice of site shall be made.

14.9. Investigation for Major and Minor Bridges

Investigation for Major and Minor Bridges shall be done as per the provisions in IRC SP 54

14.9.1. Sub-surface investigation:

The objective of sub-surface exploration is to determine the suitability of the soil or rock, for the
foundation of bridges. The sub-surface investigation for bridges is carried out in two stages,
namely, preliminary and detailed. Sometimes, it may require additional / confirmatory
exploration during construction stage.

116
 Guidance may be taken from the following:
IS1892 – Code of Practice for Site Investigation for Foundations may be utilized for guidance
regarding investigation and collection of data.
Test on soils shall be conducted in accordance with relevant parts of IS: 2720 – Methods of Test for
Soils. The tests on undisturbed samples to be conducted as far as possible at simulated field
conditions to get realistic values. IS: 1498–Classification and Identification of soils for general
engineering purposes.
14.9.2. Preliminary Investigation:
Preliminary investigation shall include the study of existing geological information, previous site
reports, geological maps, etc. And surface geological examination. These will help to narrow
down the number of sites under consideration and also to locate the most desirable location for

CHAPTER - 14
detailed sub-surface investigation. If the bridge site is pre-determined due to other reasons, the
preliminary investigation is not necessary and shall straight away conduct the detailed
investigation.
14.9.3. Detailed Investigation:
Based on data obtained after preliminary investigations, the bridge site, the type of
structure with span arrangement and the location and type of foundations, the programme of
detailed investigations, etc. shall be tentatively decided in consultation with the Superintending
Engineer. If preliminary investigation is not conducted, the Assistant Engineer shall decide a
suitable interval, not greater than 20 metres along the alignment for taking trial pits/bore holes.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The exploration shall cover the entire length of the bridge and also at either end a distance of zone
of influence, i.e., about twice the depth below bed of the last main foundation to assess the
effect of the approach embankment on the end foundations. Generally, the sub-surface
investigations shall extend to a depth below the anticipated founding level equal to about one and
a half times the width of the foundation. However, where such investigations end in any
unsuitable or questionable foundation material, the exploration shall be extended to a sufficient
depth into firm and stable soils or rock.
14.9.4. Preparation and Submission of Investigation Report
The abstract of the investigation details and design data shall be prepared as per the provisions in
section 1403 and IRC SP13 and IRC SP 54. The competent authority shall forward the report to
the Chief Engineer works after verifying and making suitable modifications required, if any.

14.10. Investigation for Buildings

14.10.1. General
In areas which have already been developed, advantage shall be taken of existing local
knowledge, records of trail pits, bore holes, etc, in the vicinity, and the behaviour of existing
structures, particularly those of similar nature to those proposed. If the existing information is not
sufficient or inconclusive, the site shall be explored in detail so as to obtain knowledge of the
type, uniformity, consistency, thickness, sequence and dip of strata and of the ground water
conditions.
14.10.2. Selection of site;
The Engineer in charge shall approve the site for any Government building in consultation with
Govt. and revenue department Wherever master plans for town or country development have
been prepared or are under preparation the District Town Planner or the Development
Authority/Chief town planner having jurisdiction over the area may also be consulted before
finalising the selection of site. In selecting a site, the following desirable features shall be kept in
view.
 The neighborhood must be suitable for the purpose for which the building is to be
constructed. The site must be easily accessible from the main roads and important
institutions.
 As far as possible other buildings of no consequence in the locality shall such that the
building constructed in it is not hide the site.
117
  The site must be fairly level or gently undulating with out steep slopes, rock out-crops, abandoned
laterite or rock quarry pits etc.
 The site must not be subjected to water logging and shall be capable of easy drainage. The subsoil
shall be hard enough to provide good foundation at reasonable depth.
 It shall be possible to locate sources of drinking water for use of the occupants either at the site or
with in reasonable distance there from:
 The site shall have good ventilations and at the same time it shall not be exposed to heavy wind
without any protection.
 The site shall not contain places of worship, graveyards, monuments, or any other structure or
feature of religious or sentimental value whose demolition may cause offence to any section of the
population.
 For building in the vicinity of airports aviation clearance may be sought. The site shall have
minimum displacement of residences and livelihood
If more than one site is available, the relative merits of the several sites shall be examined
before a final choice is made.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 14

14.10.3. Investigation and field data to be furnished

Wherever available, previous investigation reports may be utilised as also the local knowledge.
Reference may be made to geological and agricultural soil maps if available. Where these are
inconclusive, site exploration may be required. Refer IS 4453: 1980 code for site exploration.
There shall be an index map showing the site in relation to the nearest public road, railway line
and important in situations in the neighborhood. The index plan may be at racing from the village
map or town map or a good sketch containing the information required. A detailed site map may
be prepared showing the boundaries and ground features as well as structures if any, trees of more
than one metre girth, abandoned laterite quarries wells etc. It shall also show portions of adjacent
property, and structures if any, abutting or close to the site. Spot levels shall be taken through out
the sites so that contours at 1–metre intervals can be plotted. The existing natural drainage
courses within the property if any as well as outside shall be marked. The approach road to the
site up to where it joins any public road shall also be surveyed and marked. A few cross sections
shall also be taken at convenient intervals. The survey may be done with a plane table or chain in
small areas, and with theodolite triangulation or suitable electronics devices in larger plots. A
reference line shall be established at a suitable place in the plot. It shall be permanently fixed by
means of concrete blocks at its extremities. One or two permanent Bench Marks shall be
established. The reference line and the B. Ms. shall be marked in the site survey. The north point
shall also be marked. The site survey shall be of a scale not smaller that 1 cm = 10 m. The
preliminary investigation details are forwarded to the architectural wing for preparing layout.
A report containing information on the nature of soil and subsoil and the bearing capacity
etc. shall be submitted. The location of the trial pits and bore holes shall be marked in the site
survey. It is desirable that the Executive Engineer inspects sites where foundations are poor and
indicates the number and location and minimum depth of bore holes to be taken. It is necessary
that the samples of soil obtained from boreholes are taken and sent for examination. Where
undisturbed samples are required, other approved laboratory may be consulted. Where test piles
are done to ascertain the bearing capacity, the results shall be included in investigation data. The
investigation report must also include details on the following:
 The sub soil water level during rainy season and dry season shall be observed and recorded.
Maximum flood level expected in the locality.
 Direction of prevailing wind during different season.
 Source of water supply for construction as well as for use when the building is occupied.
 If there is electric supply in the vicinity, the distance of the nearest point from which power
supply has to be tapped.
 The source from where the principal construction materials like stones, bricks, metal, lime etc.
are to be procured.
 Distance of building/ bridge from water front/ beach so as to be in conformity with the WAWDA
regulations
 Present condition of existing buildings/ bridges in the vicinity with respect to corrosion induced
distress. The investigation report is also forwarded to the design wing for detailed design.
118
Chapter 15
15.1. STRUCTURAL DESIGN

15.1.1. Layout and Structural Designs:

The competent authority as prescribed in the delegation of powers shall approve the
design of any kind of structure before the detailed estimate is prepared. The Assistant
Engineer/Assistant Executive Engineer and the Executive Engineer shall personally
inspect the site and see that the proposed design can be implemented on ground.
The Development commissioner works/Chief Engineer may, if required, entrust the
design to an empaneled consultant as he deems it fit to the context. If the Development
commissioner works feels that proof checking is required, he may do so either through

CHAPTER - 15
Designs Wing or through another approved agency. Detailed design in all such cases
shall be accepted by the Development commissioner works/ Chief Engineer and
communicated to the authority that has referred the design. The priority for the design
work shall be fixed by the concerned Chief Engineer and communicated to the DCW
For details regarding design methodology refer Appendix – 1500.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

119
 Chapter 16

16.0 ESTIMATES

16.1. Types of Estimates

All proposals for expenditure on works and on tools and plant in the PWD should be presented
in the form of one or other of the following estimate, for scrutiny by the authority competent to
sanction the same. The estimate shall be prepared using software developed by the department.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 16

The software shall contain provision for quantity survey, data preparation with schedule of rates
and local market rate, provisions for online submission and approval of estimates and other
features required. The software shall be updated as and when required.

Preliminary Estimate

Detailed Estimate

Recast Estimate

Working Estimate

Supplementary
Estimate

Revised Estimate

120
16.1.1. Preliminary Estimate.
All plan and non-plan works shall be initiated only through a preliminary estimate. This is
prepared to form a reasonably accurate idea of the probable expenditure and also the essential
features of the proposal, at a stage where the necessity or the general desirability of the works
proposed has not been decided upon by the competent authority.
Preliminary estimates for works shall be prepared by the junior Engineer based on site inspection
with the help of field staff and based on Schedule of rates in force. The Assistant Engineer shall
verify the provisions and ensure that they are adequate and as per appendix 1600 A before

CHAPTER - 16
forwarding it to his superior officer for issuing administrative sanction. In the case of buildings,
Electrical wing shall prepare rough cost estimate for electric works and forward the same to the
concerned Executive Engineer of buildings wing for incorporating the same in the preliminary
estimate. The preliminary estimate must contain a report, giving information on all aspects of the
work for satisfactory completion, with specifications, and justification for the work. It must also
include the details of site conditions, with site plan and layout drawings.
In the case of buildings, the concerned Administrative Department may also be consulted. Where
the help of the Architect is necessary he may be approached through the Development
commissioner works Above all preliminary estimate must be accompanied by a certificate from
the Assistant Engineer stating that ―I, the undersigned hereby certify that this preliminary estimate
has been prepared by me after site inspection and the provisions included are essentially required
and adequate for the proper completion of work‖. Examples of preliminary estimates in respect of
a road, a bridge and a building work are illustrated in Appendix 1600(B1, B2, B3) .
The preliminary project report (PPR) for Administrative sanction should contain the following:
1. Docket Sheet as per Appendix 1600C Site plan (also a District index map)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Typical plans/ cross sections (standard drawings of proposed work) Preliminary Estimate (as per
Appendix1600A)
Land Availability/certificate
Certificates signed by AE (as mentioned above)
Detailed estimate is required for which competent authority shall approve an investigation
estimate.
16.1.2. Detailed Estimate
Detailed estimate as per a Appendix 1600D shall be submitted in order to accord Technical
sanction for all works This shall be prepared after detailed investigation of the site by the
concerned authority assisted by subordinate officers and on the basis of detailed designs and
specifications for the work including source of supply and cost of different materials, cost of
labour, hire charges of tools and plant, if any etc. Proper care shall be bestowed on the preparation
of a detailed estimate so that it reflects as faithfully as possible the cost of work as can the foreseen
at that time.
Detailed estimates for works shall be prepared by the Assistant Engineer / junior engineer based on
approved layout and designs and on the schedule of rates in force. Actual conveyance shall be
adopted for all estimates. Detailed checking of the estimate shall be done only in the office of TS
Issuing Authority. Intermediate officers shall record their views and suggestion in the docket sheet
accompanying the estimate. All estimates received in an office shall be forwarded to the higher
offices within seven days, if the estimate amount exceeds the power of sanction. Subordinate
technical staff shall obtain written orders of the head of office before effecting corrections other
than arithmetical errors in the detailed estimate. The detailed estimate for a work consists of seven
parts, viz.- A docket sheet covering the estimates as per Appendix1600C A report containing the
following particulars :-
The justification for the work.
The location of the work or works concerned and the available approaches to the same. Salient
features of the proposal.
The total cost. (in the prescribed format)
If, after completion any operating cost is likely to be involved, the approximate cost of operation.
The extent of land acquisition and problems if any connected with such acquisition.
The approximate time required for completion.
Any special problems regarding execution of the work.
The economic aspects of the scheme, i.e., the cost as compared with benefits derived.

121
 A detailed realistic programme chart for execution.
A certificate signed by an Assistant Engineer as stated above. Plans and designs of Works
Details of quantities of different items of work involved based on the design and drawings.
Normally every item included in the estimate shall conform to the relevant clauses of standard
specification for road and bridge works of MoRTH published by Indian Roads Congress in the
roads and bridges and to the National Building Code in the case of buildings. Where items, which
are not covered by standard specification, are involved, the description of the item shall be full
and clear. A data sheet showing the' estimated unit rate for the different items of work.
For road and bridge works :- the estimate shall be prepared as per the Standard Data Book for the
analysis of rates (MoRTH) published by IRC. (available software can be utilised).
For buildings: - The estimate shall be prepared as per relevant IS codes, National Building
Code 2005 and the J&K Municipal Building Rules.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 16

Work done through contract agency, the data shall make a provision for contractor's profit at 10%
of the net cost of the items less cost of departmental materials, if any, supplied. If items not
included in the schedule of rates are included in an estimate, the data for unit rate shall be worked
out based on the market rate for the item or its components. The market rate shall be ascertained
by making local enquiries in the most suitable manner found expedient
The district average conveyance shall be adopted for preparing estimates of all works.
An abstract giving the description of the different items involved and the total quantities, the unit
rate and the cost of each item. To the total of the several items as per this abstract 3.0% is added
to cover the cost of contingencies. This abstract shall also give the total quantities of materials to
be arranged for as departmental supply.
Costing towards mitigation of environmental damages shall also be included either as apart of
civil work (5-7% of cost of work) or as a separate item of BOQ
The estimates for the specialized works pertaining to DG sets, HVAC, Sub Stations, fire fighting
and lifts should be made on category basis as provided in CPWD manual in absence of
specifications laid by concern departments. The name and make of agency / firms be avoided and
these agencies / firms should annually be graded under each category depending on their quality
and specifications.
As far as possible lump sum rules (LS) shall be avoided in a detailed estimate except for petty
items the total of which shall not exceed 5% of the estimate. L. S. provision is also permissible in
case of items whose details cannot before seen at the time of preparation of the detailed estimate
or where it is proposed to work out the details later on. In such cases working estimates shall be
prepared against these lump sum provisions as soon as the details can be known, before the L. S.
are operated on. Such working estimates will be treated as part of the detailed estimate.
There shall be no repetition of item in an estimate.
The estimates for various types of buildings such as School Building, College Buildings, Hospital
Buildings, Residential Buildings, Office Buildings etc to be framed as per standard specifications
and norms as given by CPWD and relevant competent authority.
16.1.3. Working Estimate
A working estimate is intended to give the details of the works and the cost thereof, which are to
be carried out against a L. S. provision made in an estimate. Normally therefore, the working
estimate shall not exceed the amount of L. S. provision in the estimate for the main work. If
however, it is not possible to limit the cost of the works included in the working estimate to the
L.S. provision, care shall be taken when sanctioning the working estimate that the overall excess
is within the powers of the authority sanctioning the working estimate. Working estimates shall
be prepared with the same care as in the case of detailed estimate. It shall be as realistic as
possible. If the works as per the working estimate are to be entrusted to the contractor for the
main work' then the rates to be included in the working estimate shall be his quoted rates for
agreed- items and rates worked out as per his agreement for allied and extra items. In cases where
a different agency can be entrusted with the works as per the working estimate, the rates to be
adopted shall be based on the schedule of rates prevalent at the time of preparation of the working
estimate and on the market rates where there is no schedule item.
In respect of projects, working estimates shall be sanctioned by subordinate officers only after
consultation with the authority under the control of the project, to whom a copy of the sanctioned
working estimate shall also be sent. The authority under the control of the project shall

122
 maintain a register of all working estimates sanctioned against each particular sub head of the
project estimate, to see that the provisions in the sanctioned project estimate are not exceeded.
Each working estimate shall be treated as a detailed estimate for exercising the powers of
sanction.

16.1.4. Recast Estimate

It may sometimes happen that after the estimate for a work has been technically sanctioned but
before it is taken up for execution some changes are found necessary in the estimate for the
work. In such cases a fresh estimate may by prepared and got sanctioned in cancellation of the
originally sanctioned estimate. This fresh estimate is called a recast estimate and is dealt with as
if it is an original estimate. If however, before a recast estimate is prepared some expenditure
has been incurred in an originally sanctioned estimate, then this procedure cannot be followed
and instead a revised estimate shall be prepared and got sanctioned.

CHAPTER - 16
16.1.5. Supplementary Estimate

Any development or extension of a work thought necessary while the work is in progress which
is not fairly contingent on the work as first sanctioned must be converted by a supplementary
estimate. In effect this supplementary estimate is an original estimate for the additional works
consequent on the development or extension of a project or work under execution.
Administrative sanction shall therefore be obtained for the supplementary estimate from the
same authority, which sanctioned the original estimate even if the cost can be met from savings
in the original estimate. The competent authority in this case is the authority that is empowered
to accord administrative sanction to the work as a whole, i.e., including original and

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

supplementary estimates.
The following particulars shall be invariably furnished when submitting supplementary
estimates for sanction. A full report of the circumstances justifying the need for the
supplementary estimate.
The amount of the original estimate and the amount of supplementary estimates already
sanctioned, if any, and the amount of the supplementary estimate for which sanction is sought.
Each supplementary estimate to any original estimate shall be numbered consecutively as first
supplementary estimate, second supplementary estimate and soon for easy identification.
The supplementary estimate shall be prepared in the same manner as an original work and all
details and drawings furnished. When a supplementary estimate is sanctioned the original
estimate amount stands enhanced to the extent of the amount of the supplementary estimate.

16.1.6. Revised Estimate

A revised estimate must be prepared and got sanctioned:
When there are deletions, additions or alterations to the scope of the work as originally
sanctioned, revised administrative sanction is required.
 When there are major structural alterations from the design as originally sanctioned.
 When the cost of a work is likely to exceed by more than 5% of T.S amount.
 The revised estimate shall not be kept waiting till the work is completed or reaches an
advanced stage of completion but shall be prepared and got sanctioned as soon as any of
the above two conditions are anticipated during, the course of execution of work
 A revised estimate will consist of-A variation statement inform No. Appendix 1600E
indicating briefly the nature and reasons for the main variation and the financial effect
of the variations.
 A comparative statement (in Form No. D. B. 4)-Appendix 1600F giving the quantities,
rates and amount of the items as per original estimate and as per the revised estimate
with the reasons for the variation of each item. It is not necessary that the comparative
statement shall repeat such items of the original estimate, which are not affected by the
revision, but these items shall be grouped together under the several heads as per the
estimate and noted as unaffected. The affected items shall be shown in detail in the
comparative statement. The basis for sanction of revised estimate shall be T.S amount.
123
 16.2. Estimate of National Highways

National Highways are the responsibility of the Government of India and the JKP.W.D. acts as
the agent of the Government of India for investigation, construction and maintenance of
National Highways.
Agency charges fixed from time to time will be added in the estimate to cover the cost of
establishment. For original works chargeable to National Highways, the designs shall be sent for
technical scrutiny and comments, to the Government of India, Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways (MoRTH). After it is cleared technically, the executing agency shall prepare a
detailed estimate but forward only the general abstract of cost along with detailed information to
the central government for accord of administrative approval. The executing agency shall
accord technical approval and financial sanction to the detailed estimate already prepared within
3 months from the date of according administrative approval by the central government and
shall commence execution of works within contract time from the date of according
administrative approval failing which the Administrative approval accorded by the central
government shall stand cancelled automatically and executing agency shall approach central
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 16

government for fresh administrative approval for the said work.

For any original works on National Highways, detailed estimate of the cost of execution of
work shall be forwarded by the executive agency to central government for obtaining technical
approval and financial sanction. The Chief Engineer, National Highways in the state will be
competent to accord technical sanction based on technical approval received.
When an estimate for NH original work sanctioned by the Ministry needs revision and the
amount of the revised estimate exceeds the original estimate by more than 5%, sanction of
Government of India shall be obtained for the revised estimate. Regarding estimate for
maintenance of National Highways it is necessary to give particulars of the year's requirements
under this head to the Ministry of Transport before the commencement of the financial year. On
receipt of sanction from the Ministry, detailed estimate for individual portions of works as
approved by Government of India may be prepared and sanctioned by the officers of the P.W.D.
subject to the normal limits of powers of Technical Sanction.

16.3 Annual Maintenance and Repairs Estimate

A separate estimate shall be prepared annually for all anticipated ordinary repairs of each
building or road/bridge work or group of such works during the working year. No
administrative sanction shall be required for maintenance and repair works. The original Typical
Maintenance Estimates (TME) and the changing TME due to modifications in the plan of
buildings shall be approved by the Chief Engineer Subsequent change in TME due to schedule
revision shall be approved by the Executive Engineer The Chief Engineer shall accord approval
subject to availability of funds and necessity. Estimates for maintenance work are dealt with in
Chapter 25, Asset Management and Chapter 26 to 28.

124
Chapter 17

17.1. SCHEDULE OF RATES

PWD schedule of rates shall be followed by all the government departments while preparing the
estimate for works funded by the State Government. All estimates shall be prepared based on
actual conveyance. SoR shall be updated every year with effect from 1st April. For this purpose
Chief Engineer DIQC is the authority to finalize the SoR for approval of Government. The CE
DIQC shall publish in the Web Site before 15th March. The source for various construction
materials shall be fixed by the Chief Engineer R&B on 1st April once in every 5 years based on

CHAPTER - 17
the proposals submitted by the Executive Engineers of each district for periodical revision of
Schedule of Rate.

17.2. Data Book

MORTH data as per IRC Guide lines for roads and CPW D data and National Building Code for
buildings shall be adopted.

17.3. Plinth Area Rate

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The plinth area rates shall also be revised by the Chief Engineer every year along with revision
of SoR.

17.4. Local Market Rate

The Executive Engineer of each district shall fix local market rates for materials and labour
twice every year. The rates shall be fixed as on 1st April and 1st October every year. These rates
shall be followed by Executive Engineers of all wings for preparing local market rate
justification estimate for tender approval. The justification estimate shall also include 10%
contractors profit and 5% overhead charges. The justification estimate shall be submitted to the
tendering authority directly by the Assistant Engineer before the date of opening oftenders.

125
 Chapter 18
18.0. SANCTIONS

18.1. Sanctions Required.

The estimate for an original work requires the following sanctions before it is taken up for
execution. Administrative Approval
Technical sanction

18.1.1. Administrative Approval

This is the sanction accorded by the Administrative Department concerned or Government

authorizing the P W. D. to take up a particular work at a particular cost and in a particular
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 18

location. The Executive Engineer shall forward the preliminary estimates and related documents
to the Chief Engineer with a copy to Superintending Engineer for his comments. The
Superintending Engineer shall forward his comments if any within seven days of receipt failing
which; it is deemed to be correct and approved by him. After the preliminary estimate and
sketch plans are received, the concerned department or government will decide whether further
steps shall be taken to execute the work and if so, the appropriate authority vested with power of
Administrative Sanction will issue the Administrative sanction. In some cases provisions for
certain works required by other departments of the State are made in the P.W.D. budget even
before formal Administrative Sanction has been accorded. The Executive Engineer in whose
jurisdiction the work is located shall then take the initiative in contacting the District Officer of
the concerned department for the necessary information regarding requirements, location etc.
The Executive Engineer shall then prepare a preliminary estimate with sketch plan and forward
to the Administrative Department if it is within his powers of technical sanction or to the
Superintending Engineer if it is beyond his powers of sanction. The Superintending Engineer
shall forward it to the Administrative department if it is within his powers of sanction and if it is
beyond his powers he shall forward it to the Chief Engineer. The Chief Engineer shall forward
the preliminary estimate to the Administrative Department for sanction. Where the work
concerned is a project beyond the power of sanction of Chief Engineer, Administrative Sanction
is to be accorded by Administrative department.

In case of buildings the competent authority shall accord administrative approval for works on
the basis of prelimery estimate or detailed estimate as the case may be. The estimates shall be
based on sanctioned plinth area rates/sanctioned schedule of rates. The administrative approval
by competent authority to be accorded only after technical vetting/sanction from concern
competent authority.

No work shall be started without administrative approval (circular in appendices). However

once the approval is granted work is to be started strictly in a stipulated time bound manner.

126
18.1.2. Technical Sanction.

In all cases, the competent authority in the P.W.D. is on the basis of detailed project report for
accords technical sanction. It implies that the competent technical authority is satisfied about the
suitability of the work to meet the requirement, its structural soundness and about the quantities,
specifications and rates of the different items of work, which will be involved in completing the
work. Before according T.S for major projects exceeding Rs. 10 crores, the Environment Cell
shall review the projects to ensure compliance to environmental regulations before being
accorded Technical Sanction. The TS issuing authority shall take into consideration the views
and comments recorded in the docket sheets by the intermediate officers and effect changes if
required before issuing TS.
Before according Technical Sanction to a work relating to another Department, the plans shall
be got countersigned by the head of the concerned department or such Officer who may be
delegated with power for this purpose.
Technical Sanction shall be issued only based on the Administrative Sanction for the work and

CHAPTER - 18
the amount of Technical Sanction for any work shall not exceed the amount of Administrative
Sanction by more than 10% and it should be in confirmation with GFR 2017. Before
Administrative Sanction is issued availability of funds shall be ensured for execution of the
work either through budget provision or through re-appropriation from other works under the
prescribed rules for such re-appropriation or by deposit in the case of deposit works.
The following are the usual sources of funds for execution of works. By a specific provision for
the work in the Budget for the year.
By re-appropriation of savings in the budget allotments for other work- subject to the rules
regarding such re-appropriation.
By obtaining a supplementary grant for the work.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

By withdrawal of the required amount from the contingency fund with the sanction of
Government to be later regularised through Supplementary Grant.
By funds being placed at the disposal of the P.W.D. for the specific work from out of budget
allotments of another department.
By obtaining deposits from the parties or authorities on whose behalf the work is to be done by
the P.W.D. (Applicable to Deposit works).

Other agencies
The detailed project report for all original works should necessarily contain the preparatory
documents such as the environmental impact assessment report and / or the environmental
management plan and/ or the special environmental conditions to the contract. The environment
cell should vet these and provide a note prior to according the Technical Sanction. This note
should confirm the project‘s adherence to the environmental requirement of the code and
manual. Technical Sanction for an estimate is issued in the approved form only. The delegation
of powers for technical sanction at various levels are given in the appendices.

127
 18.1.2.1. Technical Sanction Register

In every office where technical sanctions are accorded, a register in the approved form shall be
maintained as under 1800A. Each estimate sanctioned in a financial year shall be numbered
consecutively and entered in the register. Technical sanctions given to working estimates need
only be noted against the sanction given for the main work originally and need not be given a
separate number and noted in the register. When technical sanction is issued for a revised
estimate and a fresh number is given for this estimate then the fact that the original estimates
stands cancelled shall be noted against the original sanction. Correspondingly, there shall be one
entry in revised sanction quoting the original estimate. When the supplementary estimate is
sanctioned, the original technical sanction shall be cancelled and fresh technical sanction issued
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 18

including the supplementary estimate. The respective divisional offices and the central PWD
offices must also maintain the electronic form of the Register.

The power to Accord Administrative Approval, Technical Sanction and Award of Contracts shall
be as per S.O. 15, Dated. 09-01-2019, given in appendices.

18.1.3 The Power to Purchase of stores and other contingent / Miscelleneous expenditure shall be as per
delegation made vide S.O. 58 Dated 31-12-2.19, given in appendices

128
Chapter 19

19.1. Registration of Contractors

Rules for Registration of contractors executing works in the J&K PWD shall be as per SRO 122
of 1992 which is reproduced as under
(a) Only persons who have registered themselves as contractor under these rules are entitled to
submit tenders for works. The term 'works' includes (i) civil works and (ii) water supply and
sanitary installation works.(b) Civil Works & Water Supply & Sanitary Installation Works.- A
contractor who is in the register of any Circle / Division / Subdivision in the J&K P.W.D., can
tender for these works in all the Circles / Divisions / Subdivisions in the State. Temporary
special Divisions or Special Sub divisions are not authorized to register contractors or renew the
irregistration.
For the purpose of registration, the contractors will be classified into four separate categories on

CHAPTER - 19
the basis of their financial resources, professional experience and records, as follows.

Class A

Class B

Class C

Class D

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

129
 SRO : 122 Dt: 26th May 1992 : -
In exercise of the powers conferred by Section 1C of the Jammu and Kashmir registration of
Contractors Act, 1956, (Act No. XIV of 1956)., the Government hereby makes the following
rules, namely:-

(1) Short title commencement and application:-

I. These rules may be called the Jammu and Kashmir Registration of Contractors Rules, 1991
II. They shall come into force from the date of their publication in the Government Gazette.
III. They shall apply to the following departments namely.
(a) Roads and Buildings Department;
(b) Irrigation and Flood Control Department;
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

(c) Public Health Engineering Department;

(d) Mechanical Department.
(e) Store Procurement Department.
(f) Power Development Department.
(g) Forests, Fisheries, Tourism and Industries Department.
(h) Municipalities, Local Bodies and CD and NES Department.
(i) Housing and Urban Development Department, Urban Environmental Engineering
Department.
(j) Estates Organization; and
(k) Any other Government, Department required to execute civil construction works.
(2) Definition: In these rules, unless the context otherwise requires:-
(a) ―ACT.‖ Means the Jammu and Kashmir registration of Contractor Act., 1956;
(b) ―Contractor‖ means contractor registered as such under these rules.
(c) ―Form‖ means a form appended to these rules;
(d) ―Public Works Department‖ means all or any of the Departments mentioned in sub rule(3)
of Rule 1.
(e) ―Registered‖ means the registered of Contractors maintained under these rules;
(f) All words and expressions used but not defined in these rules shall have the same meanings
as assigned to them in the Jammu and Kashmir registration of Contractors Act. 1956.

3. Categories, Classification of Contractors and Area of Operation:-

1. In Public Works Department enlistment of Contractors shall be done in the following
two categories : -
(a) Civil Works:
(b) Sanitary and Water Supply:

130
 2. Civil Works Contractors: - There shall be following Classes of contractors in each
Department as per SRO 196 dated:- 28th June 2011:-

Class Limits upto which works can be allotted Area of operations

Class ―A‖ Any amount above Rupees twenty five Lacs. All the three regions of J&K State
viz Jammu, Kashmir & Ladakh
Class ―B‖ Above Rupees ten lacs upto Rupees fifty lacs. All the three regions of J&K State
Viz Jammu, Kashmir & Ladakh
Class ―C‖ Above Rupees five lacs upto Rupees twenty Any one of the three regions of J&K
five lacs State Viz Jammu, Kashmir & Ladakh

CHAPTER - 19
Class ―D‖ Upto Rupees fifteen lacs Any one of the three regions of J&K
State Viz Jammu, Kashmir & Ladakh

Explanation (as per SRO-122 dated:- 26th May 1992).

(1) The applicant seeking enlistment in class ‗C‘ and class ‗D‘ shall be required to choose the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

region / zone of his choice respectively at the time of submitting application for enlistment
for area of operation;
(2) In case a contractor wants to change his region/zone he shall have to surrender his
enlistment certificate in the particular region/zone where he has been registered and shall
have to seek fresh registration for the new region/zone where he intends to execute work.

131
 Eligibility:- No Person shall be eligible for being registered as Contractor under these rules
unless:

(a) In the case of special class Contractors, the individual or firm:-

(i) Has sound financial capacity to execute the works of the department in that class;
and
(ii) Has a permanent Engineering organization with at least one Degree holder (civil)
and Diploma holder / one Diploma holder (Mechanical) besides retained an
approved firm of consulting/Design Engineers; and
(iii) Posses the following Plant and Equipment namely:-

Dozer of shovel 1
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

Truck or Tipper 2
Concrete Mixer 2
Concrete Vibrator 2
Compressor 4
Diesel Generator with welding plant 1
Concrete Compression
Testing Machine 1
Theodolite 1
Surveying Level 1

(iv) Should have successfully and satisfactorily completed as a contractor at least

four works of an aggregate value not less than Rs. 100.00 lacs and should have
worked as Class ―A‖ contractor for at least five years and
(v) In case of technically qualified individuals or firms, the fields experience in
respect of construction of works by an individual or any one of the partners of
the firm required shall be ten years for a degree holder in Civil Engineering and
25 years for a Diploma Holder in Civil Engineering.

(b) In case of Class ‗A‘ contactors, the firm or individual.

(i) Has sound financial capacity to execute the works of the Department in that
class; and
(ii) Shall be required to employ technical staff at the time of award of works on the
following basis:-

At least one Degree holder (Civil) and one Diploma Holder (Civil or Mechanical).

132
 (iii) Possess the following plants and equipment namely:
Truck or tipper -1
Concrete Mixer -2
Concrete Vibrator -2
Compressor -1
Diesel Generating set with Welding plant concrete compression -1
Testing Machine -1
Surveying level -1 ;and
iv) Should have successfully and satisfactorily completed as a class ‗B‘ contractor at least three
works of an aggregate value of not less than Rs. 20.00 lacs and should have worked as a Class B‘

CHAPTER - 19
contractor for three years; and
v) In case of technically qualified individual or firm the field requirement in respect of
construction of civil works by an individual/ any one of the partners of the firm required shall be 7
years for a Degree holder in civil Engineering and 15 years for a diploma holder in civil engineering
( c) In the case of class ‗B‘ Contractors or the firm or individual:-
(i) Has sound financial capacity to execute the works of department in that class and
(ii) Shall be required to employ at least one diploma holder (civil) at the award of work.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(iii) Possesses the following plant and equipment namely:-
Truck or tipper 1
Concrete mixer 1
Concrete vibrator 2
(iv) Should have successfully and satisfactorily completed as a Class ―C‖ contractor at least
three works of an aggregate value of not less than Rs. 10.00 lacs and should have worked as a
Class ―C‖ contractor for three years, and
(v) In case of technically qualified individual or firm the field requirement in respect of
construction of civil works by an individual/ any one or the partners of the firm required shall be
3 years for a Degree holder in civil Engineering and ten years for a diploma holder in civil
engineering

(d) In the case of Class ‗C‘ contractor, the individual or firm:-

(i) Has sound financial capacity to execute the works of the department in that class; and
(ii) Possess the following plant and equipment namely:- Concrete mixer 1
Concrete vibrator 1
(iii) Should have successfully and satisfactorily completed as a contractor at least three works of an
aggregate value of not less than rupees two lacs and should have worked as Class ―D‖ contractor for
two years; provided that no field experience shall be required for enlistment in this class for degree
and diploma holder in civil engineering.

133
 (e) In the case of Class ―D‖ contractors, the individual or firm:

(i) Has sound financial capacity to execute the works of the department in that class, and

(ii) Should have worked at least with any registered ‗D‘ class contractor for a period of one year and
acquainted himself or themselves sufficiently with the elementary knowledge required for execution
of civil works the certificate to this effect should among other things indicate the name of work where
the applicant has worked. Provided that no field experience shall be required for enlistment in this
class for degree and diploma holder in civil engineering
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

Note: The service period of a degree of diploma holder in civil engineering in government or semi-
government organization shall be considered as a field experience required of the eligibility

Explanation:
For purpose of this rule individual or firm shall be constituted to have sound financial capacity if he or
it possess property and bank balance not below the extent shown against each written certificate of an
officer not below the rank of Assistant Commissioner (revenue) or a scheduled bank certifying
minimum cash balances during past three months
Class Movable ( liquid) Immovable (assets)
Class Special For Rupees Five Lac Rupees Fifteen Lac
Class A For Rupees Three Lac Rupees Seven Lac Fifty
Thousand
Class B One Lac and Fifty Thousand Rupees Two Lac Fifty
Thousand
Class C Rupees Fifty Thousand Rupees One Lac Fifty Thousand
Class D Rupees Twenty Thousand Rupees Fifty Thousand

Further the contractors otherwise eligible to various class under these rules and possessing degree
or diploma or diploma in civil, engineering shall be entitled to fifty percent concession in respect
of, financial requirement both under movable and immovable assets as defined above.

5. Application for registration

(1) An application for registration by a person or firm intending to carry on business as a

contractor of a particular class shall be submitted to the head of the department in form I,
along with following certificates /affidavits, namely:-
(i) Solvency certificate from a schedules bank (for all classes except class D),
(ii) Income tax clearance certificate pertaining to proceeding assessment year (for all

134
 classes except class - D)
(iii) Legal bond to the effect that machinery and immovable property declared by
him/them is free from all encumbrances except the mortgage of the lending
bank/public sector financial institution and will not be transferred or disposed
by him/them without specific authorization of the registering authority (for all
classes.)
iv) Legal bond authorizing the department to recover any money due from him/them
on any account by sale, auction of his/their immovable property (for all classes)
v) Character certificate to be issued by an Officer being not below the rank of
Superintendent of Police of the District concerned after due verification from
CID.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

vi) Certificate from Chief Engineers of different Wings or District Superintending.
Engineers that the applicant (s) has not have not/ have not backed out from any
contract and the work and conduct in relation to. Works of any of the
Department have been satisfactorily executed.
vii) An affidavit (for, a1l classes, ) to the effect --
(a) That the applicant has, not been enlisted earlier or refused enlistment or black -
1isted,"

(b) That the applicant is not already in service in any Government department,
Corporation or undertaking or member of either House of the parliament or legislature.
District Development Board or a student of any educational institute or in receipt of any
stipend from the government

(c) That the applicant (s) if a retired employee (s) of Government Corporation or
undertaking is not disallowed under service conduct Rules of the
Government/Corporation/undertaking from where he has retired.

(d) That the applicant has not been declared insolvent by a court of competent
Jurisdiction:

(e) That the applicant has not been convicted of an offence under chapter X VII and
VIII of Ranbir Panel Code same of 1989 of under the Hoarding and profiteering
Prevention Ordinance (VIX) Samvat 2000.
(f) That the applicant (s) has not/have not backed out from any contract in Public
Works Department;

135
 2. On receipt of application accompanied by certificates and affidavits indicated in sub rule (1)
the applicant or authorised representative of the firm seeking application may be called upon personal
attendance before the Head of the Department

3. The Head of Department to whom application has been made shall there on scrutinize the
application and unless the applicant is found eligible, he shall enter the contents of the application in
a register Initiated by him for the purpose and inform the applicant accordingly for payment of
registration fee, prescribed here under:-
(I) Class Special Twenty thousand
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

(II) Class A Ten Thousand

(III) Class B Five Thousand
(IV) Class C Two thousand five hundred
(V) Class D One thousand

4. The applicant may be registered even for a Class lower then applied for
Note: -
A Central register of contractors so enlisted shall be maintained by the Public works Department as
per format specified in Form No. IV. Head of Department shall furnish information in the prescribed
format to the department for purpose of maintaining a consolidated record of contractors.

6. Ground of refusal of registrations.

Notwithstanding anything contained in rule 4, the Head of Department may refuse registration or
renewal of registration of a person/firm under these rules on any of the following grounds, namely.
(a) If he has been declared as insolvent by a court of Competent Jurisdiction and has not been
discharged,
(b) If he is convicted for an offence punishable under chapters XVII and XVIII of the Ranbir Penal
code samvat 1909; 01 xxx under the hoarding and profiteering ordinance, Samvat, 2000; or
(c) If the head of the department is of the opinion that the contractor has habitually backed out from
the contract tendered by him in the public works department;

(d) If the head of the department is of the opinion that the work and conduct of the applicant has not
been satisfactory in relation to the work of the public works department executed by him in the
past.

7. Notice for refusal.

If the head of the department proposes to refuse registration of an applicant on any ground mentioned
above, he shall serve upon the applicant a notice indicating the ground on which the registration is
proposed to be refused and the applicant may either himself or through his authorised agent submit his
objections, if any, regarding order of the refusal.
136
8. Order of refusal.
If the head of department is of the opinion that the objections filled by the applicant are not
satisfactory, he shall pass orders refusing the registration and communicate the orders to the
concerned.

9. Issue of certification.
(1) The head of the department to whom application, has been made shall upon scrutinizing the
application, deposition of prescribed fee and unless the applicant is in eligible under rule 4 or
the registration or renewal thereof is refused under rule 5 or 6 and ensuring that the contents
of the application have been recorded in a register maintained by the department for the
purpose, issue a certificate of registration of the class in form II.
(2) Once the certificate of registration has been issued the contractor shall be eligible to purchase

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

tender form against fee to be prescribed by the tender inviting authority depending upon the
cost of tender document viz-a viz cost of work and, thereafter cast his tender in the manner
so circulated.

10. Validity of certificate.

(1) The certificate or registration under these rules shall be valid for one consecutive financial
year (including the one during which the certificate of registration is issued).
(2) And shall be renewable after every financial year, subject to the provisions of these rules.
The certificate shall be got renewed preferably before the end of financial year in which the
validity expires or latest before the end of the April following that financial year. fresh
affidavits/certificates shall be required to be furnished in respect of the under-mentioned
requirements;-
i) Income tax clearance certificate pertaining to preceding year;
ii) An affidavit to the effect;
(a) That the applicant has not been black listed\
(b) That the applicant is not already in service in any government department,
corporation or under taking or a member of either house of the parliament or the

state legislature, district development board or a student of any educational

institution or in receipt of any stipend from the government.
(c) That the applicant has not been declared insolvent by any court of competent
jurisdiction.

Besides the above affidavit, the following certificate shall be produced from the concerned
Superintending Engineers or Executive Engineers under whose supervision the works have been
executed during the period by the contractor, seeking renewal of registration;
(a) Character certificate to be issued by an officer not less than the rank of Superintendent of
Police of concerned district after verification from CID.
(b) A certificate to be issued by an officer not less the rank of Superintending Engineers that the
137
 applicant has not/have not backed out from the contract in public works department.
(c) A certificate to be issued by an officer not below the rank of superintending engineer that the
applicant‘s work and conduct remained satisfactory in relation to work of public works department
and the quality of work executed by the contractor remained good.
(d) A certificate to be issued by an officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer that the
applicant has not been a defaulter in making payment to the labour engaged by him and there have
not been or is any labour claim/award pending against him in a labour court on account of works
allotted.
(2) An application for renewal of registration shall be made to the head of the department in
form III and shall be accompanied by the following fees;
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

i/ Special Class Rupees for Four Thousand

ii/ Class A Rupees Two Thousand and Five hundred
iii/ Class B Rupees One Thousand Two Hundred and Fifty
iv/ Class C Rupees Six Hundred and Fifty.
v/ Class D Rupees Two Hundred and Fifty.
(3) In case any contractor fails to renew the registration as specified above, the
registration can be renewed after charging a penalty equal to the renewal fee. However, if a
contractor fails to renew his registration for two consecutive terms. It will automatically cease
to operative and he shall have to apply for a fresh registration, if he is desirous of continuing
his business.

11. Suspension or black listing :-

1) If at any time, after a person is registered as contractor, the head of department is satisfied
that such contractor has incurred any of the disqualification in these rules, he shall serve a
notice upon the contractor, indicating the ground on which it is proposed to suspend or
blacklist or remove his name from the register to show cause why such order should not
be issued.
(2) If the head of department is of the opinion that the explanation tendered by the contractor is
not satisfactory he shall pass an order of suspension of black-listing or removal of the name
of the contractor from the register and such order shall be communicated to the contractor.

Explanation : Norms for suspension or black-listing or removal shall be as under

i) One time backing out from the contractor shall invoke suspension of registration for one
year
ii) For 2nd time backing out from the contract the suspension of registration for two years shall
be invoked.

138
 iii) Third time backing out from the contract shall cause black-listing for five years provided
that no such order of suspension or black-listing or removal shall prevent the contractor
from executing and completing the works or effect his rights and obligations in respect of
any contract sanctioned to him that department or any other department while the
registration was in force.

12. All orders passed by head of department under rule 11 shall be communicated to the department
and also be got published in the Government Gazettes.
13. As per SRO-277 Dated:- 26th July 2010
a) Competent Authority means Chief Engineer in respect of ―Special class‖ and ―class A‖ and
Superintending Engineer in respect of class ―B‖, ―C‖ , and ―D‖ .

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 19

b) The words ―Head of Department‖ wherever occurring in the said rules shall be substitute by
the words ―Competent Authority‖.

Rules for Registration of Electrical Contractors in the J&K P. W. D

Shall be governed by the Chief Engineer PDCL Power Development Corporation Limited

139
 Chapter 20

20.1. Bids and Contracts

Works in the public works department are executed by any one of the following methods.
Tenders are floated online (jktenders.gov.in) as per standard bidding document

By Item Rate Contract: In this contract the total approximate quantities of the respective items
of work and the time of completion are specified and the contractual obligations cover the rate
the approximate quantities involved and the time of completion. In the case of Item Rate
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Tenders, only quoted rate of each item shall be considered.

Composite Tenders shall be followed for all kinds of Building and Road works:
(1) System of composite tendering shall be followed for all kind of building and road works
(irrespective of cost). Apart from civil work and horticulture work, the composite tender should
also include component of internal electric installations and other internal & external electrical
works including services.
(2) If requirements of the work so demand, the T/S Authority may dispense with the system of
composite tendering with recorded reasons.
Guidelines on composite tendering are given under:
1. Only one agency is fixed, i.e. the main contractor who is responsible for executing the entire
work. The Engineer in Charge of the major component of the work calls bids for the composite
work. The cost of bid document (if any) and Earnest Money is fixed with respect to the combined
estimated cost put to tender for the composite bid.
2. The officers of minor disciplines within their individual T/S powers, approve and submit the
schedules for minor components of the work along with terms and conditions to the T/S Authority
of the major component well in time. Technical sanction and approval of NIT for the combined
work is accorded by the competent authority of the major component under whose T/S powers the
total estimated cost of work falls, after combining the cost of major and minor components. If the
combined amount of the detailed estimate for the composite work does not fall within the T/S
powers of the official in-charge of the major component, then the same is sent to his/ her next
higher authority competent to accord T/S and approve the NIT for the composite work.
3. The officers of individual minor components prepare market rate justification of the minor
components before opening of the technical bid (in case of two/three bid) / financial bid (in case
of single bid) and hand it over to the NIT approving authority. The NIT approving authority
prepares the market rate justification of the total work before opening of technical bid. In case of
tenders to be accepted by RWB/CWB, the market rate justification is submitted by the NIT
approving authority to the RWB/CWB before opening of technical bid.
4. The eligible tenderers quote rates for various items of major as well as minor components of
work. The lowest tenderer is decided based on quoted rates in respect of all the schedules attached
in tender documents. It is obligatory on the part of the main contractor to sign the tender
documents for all the components.
5. The Department lays down eligibility criteria for agencies responsible for execution of
specialized components of works. Agencies engaged by the main contractor are required to fulfill
the laid down criteria. In case the main contractor himself meets the required eligibility criteria as
laid down by the Department for specialized work, he is allowed to execute the same after due
verification etc.
6. The main contractor gives detailed execution programme of the work which forms part of his
agreement with the department. He indicates in the programme, the time/stage of the work when
the agencies of specialized components of works will be deployed by him.
7. Acceptance of the tender is done by the NIT approving authority within his powers to accept
tenders as per the Financial powers delegated to the Officers vide S.O. 15, Dated 09-01-2019, and
is conveyed by the Engineer in charge of major component of the work on behalf of the Lt.
Governor of the Union Territory of J&K. After the work is awarded, the contractor signs copies
140
of agreement depending upon number of Executive Engineer‘s or any other authority designated
by Chief Engineer, PW(R&B) Department, in charge of minor components and hands over one
set of agreement to concerned officer of minor component. Executive Engineer or any other
officer as notified by Chief Engineer, PW (R&B) Department from time to time, of major
component will operate part A and part B of the agreement. Executive Engineer or any other
officer as notified by CPWD Directorate from time to time, in charge of minor components
operate Part C along with Part Á‘ of the agreement.
8. The main contractor enters into MOU with agencies associated by him for execution of
specialized component as per NIT conditions. .
9. Running payment for the major component is made by Engineer in Charge to the main
contractor. Running payment for minor components shall be made by the Executive Engineer in
charge or any other officer as notified by Chief Engineer, PW (R&B) Department from time to
time, of the discipline of minor component directly to the main contractor.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

10. In case the main contractor intends to change any agency/agencies during the operation of the
contract, he shall obtain prior approval of respective Engineer-in-Charge of the agreement. The
new agency/agencies shall also have to satisfy the laid down eligibility criteria. In case Engineer
in-Charge of respective discipline is not satisfied with the performance of any agency, he can
direct the contractor to change the agency executing such items of work and this shall be binding
on the contractor.
11. Supervision of various components of works will be carried out by concerned wings of the
department under the overall co-ordination of the NIT approving authority or any other officer as
notified by Chief Engineer, PW (R&B) Department from time to time, as the case may be.
12. Final bill of whole work shall be finalized and paid by the Engineer in Charge of major
component. Other Executive Engineers or any other officer as notified by Chief Engineer, PW
(R&B) Department from time to time will prepare and pass the final bill for their component of
work and pass on the same to the Engineer in Charge of major component, for including in the
final bill for composite work.
14. Levy of Compensation, if any, and rescheduling of milestones, will be decided by an officer
not below the rank of SE or any other officer as notified by Chief Engineer, PW (R&B)
Department from time to time, in charge of the major component in consultation with concerned
officer in charge of minor discipline and on receipt of required information in this regard from
Engineer in Charge of major discipline as well as concerned Engineer in Charge of minor
discipline.
15. Same milestones are applicable for all components of work. The amount to be withheld, will
be decided by the Engineer in Charge of the respective component. In the event of not achieving
the necessary milestones as assessed from milestone bar chart, specified percentage of the
tendered value of work will be withheld for failure of each milestone.
16. The composite work is treated as complete when all the components of the work are
complete. The completion certificate of the composite work is recorded by Engineer-in-charge of
major component after record of completion certificate by the competent authorities of all other
components.
17. Arbitration case/Court case, if any, shall be handled by the Engineer in Charge of the major
component or any other officer as notified by Chief Engineer, PW (R&B) Department from time
to time along with the support of the minor disciplines.

EPC (Engineering, Procurement and Construction) /Lump sum contract: Here the total cost
of the completed works as per drawings and specifications and the time of completion form the
essence of the contract. In adopting this contract the drawings and specifications must be full
and complete in order to prevent claims arising for variations due to any ambiguity in them.
Cases may, however, arise where some modifications to the designs or specifications are found
necessary due to site conditions or other reasons. The bidder shall assess and evaluate &
convince himself that the amount quoted by him is adequate. The department will not entertain
any extra claim for such modification within the scope of the work, during execution. This
method shall be adopted only in unavoidable circumstances where the situation warrants. The
cutoff value of projects, above which all contracts will be taken up under EPC methodology will
be decided by the Competent Authority.

141
 For executing contract on EPC methodology, the following important provisions are to be
considered while framing estimate, preparing NIT etc:
(1) The consultant appointed by the NIT approving authority shall prepare the concept design,
preliminary drawings and specifications based on detailed requirements of the work, in
consultation with the client before preparation of Preliminary Estimate.
(2) Soil investigation report shall be appended in the NIT for indicative purpose only.
(3) The responsibility of investigations, designing, planning, procurement, construction, safety,
quality, and risk of engineering lies with the contractor and the same will be incorporated in the
NIT.
(4) Mode of measurements for payment purpose will be decided by the NIT approving authority.
(6) The award of work shall be decided based on competitive call of tenders. The Chief Engineer
ascertains the reasonability of prices using analytical methods such as tendered amount for similar
works whose tenders were accepted in the recent past, PAR rates duly enhanced by the current
cost index and any other method approved by the Chief Engineer for ascertaining the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

reasonability of the tendered amount of the L1 bidder.

(7) In case the tender received is more than Administrative Approval and Sanctioned Estimate,
revised A/A & E/S or in principle approval from the competent authority shall be necessary.
General guidelines for EPC contracts are given below. NIT approving authority may incorporate
special and particular conditions as per specific requirements of the project.

Execution of Works on EPC Contract Basis:

1. After the receipt of requisition for the work, the client organizations are advised that they need
not engage Design/Structural Consultants as the same would be part of the EPC tender. The
detailed planning is the responsibility of the contractor but the monitoring is done by the Engineer
in Charge. For works undertaken in the EPC mode, sanction is obtained on the basis of Detailed
or Preliminary Project Report as per feasibility and requirement and submitted as per
understanding with the client.
2. The concept design, preliminary drawings and specifications based on detailed requirements of
the work, in consultation with the client, is prepared before framing of the Preliminary Estimate.
The NIT approving authority decides whether to get these tasks done in-house or from outsourced
agencies with recorded reasons. If done in-house, the concerned Architectural unit prepares the
concept design, preliminary drawings and specifications based on detailed requirements of the
work, in consultation with the client.
3. The Preliminary Estimate (PE) or Preliminary Project Report (PPR) or Detailed Project Report
(DPR) or any other document submitted for obtaining Administrative Approval and Expenditure
Sanction defines accurately the scope of the work in terms of outcomes and performance
parameters.
4. The following details are obtained to enable Preliminary Project Planning (PPP) (both
Engineering and Architecture) for preparation of the PE or PPR or DPR :
(i) Document showing ownership of land duly certified by the client that the same would be in
a position to be handed over to the contractor upon award of work free from all
encumbrances and encroachments.
(ii) Boundary of the plot(s) either constructed or demarcated and free from dispute.
(iii) Topographical Map of the site.
(iv) Geotechnical Data (which includes a study of foundation system of structures including
private structures - in the vicinity and is as per codal provisions for the proposed structures).
(i) Sources of the Bulk Services required as well as approved waste dumps for waste disposal.
(ii) Mandatory (e.g. fire, lift, Electrical Installations, Water Supply and Sanitary Installation
etc.) as well as optional (HVAC, STP, RO, UPS, DG, SPV, Solar water heating etc.) services
for each building/structure required by the client and found feasible.
(iii) Statutory Approvals required.
5. The Preliminary Project Planning (PPP) is developed on the basis of above details and is
submitted to the client prior to the submission of the Preliminary or Detailed Project Report and
includes the following in respect of the buildings:
(i) Scope of work.

142
 (ii) Floor plans for building etc. and geometry for other works etc.
(iii) Elevations/Sections/Perspectives .
(iv) Layout plan(s)
(i) 3-D Block view (s)
(ii) Area and/or Length statements as applicable
(iii) Specifications in detail for each structure/building and its services to be included in the
DPR.
6. The DPR (in respect of works in which detailed engineering including architectural design is
done before sanction) or PPR (Where only conceptual engineering and architectural planning is
done before sanction) based on the PPP submitted to the client includes, in addition to the PPP,
the following:-
(i) Brief description of the Procurement Method (which also mentions the name of work).
(ii) The obligations on the part of the client department, PWD, and the contractor with specified
time limits for smooth execution of work.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

(iii) Architectural, Structural and MEP services specifications along with special conditions for
execution of these jobs.
(iv) In addition to the structures and their mandatory services (e.g. Internal Electrification, Fire
Services, Lifts, Water Supply, Sewerage etc., where applicable) the list of optional services
desired by the client.
(iv) Cost Estimate on simple Plinth Area or length basis, where possible and detailed basis for
others etc. is duly enhanced by applicable cost index or by adopting any other appropriate
method as decided by NIT approving authority in case cost index is not applicable
including provision for cost of design development by contractor and risk devolving on the
contractor.
(v) Provision is made separately for post completion operational cost (for 5 years or higher as
agreed with client) and maintenance cost (beyond free maintenance period and upto 5 years
or higher as agreed with client).
(vi) List of approved makes and models for components.
(vii) Tentative time frame for completion, post completion operation and maintenance.
(viii) List of three or more suitable agencies (proof check agencies) or parameters for the
selection of the proof check agencies, tasked with checking and approving the design
submitted by the contractor from engineering and architectural aspects.
(ix) Procedure and time frame for approval of implications of changes in scope of work
requisitioned by the client as compared to that indicated in the sanctioned PPR/DPR.
7. For works undertaken by PWD in the EPC mode, the Contractor takes the full responsibility for
the design and execution. The scope, description of work, specifications, approved conceptual
drawings for engineering and architectural planning, and schedule of quantities (if available) and
as provided in the contract document, is kept on record and a No Objection Certificate is recorded
by the Engineer in Charge for the drawings prepared and submitted by the contractor after proof
check, before the same is released for execution.
8. The contractor gets NOC for the design from NIT approving authority for functional aspects and
aesthetics and from the approved proof check agency for engineering and architectural
considerations. The officers of the PWD are responsible for broad oversight of these aspects
without being expected to examine the design.
9. The tender document is approved by the authority competent to accord technical sanction for the
work of similar value in the non-EPC mode (i.e. traditional item-measurement basis) by officer of
Chief Engineer and above rank. NIT approving authority may incorporate special and particular
conditions in the contract document as per specific requirements of the project.
10. For EPC contracts, the NIT approving authority ascertains the reasonableness of prices using
analytical methods such as tendered amount for similar works whose tenders were accepted in the
recent past, PAR rates duly enhanced by the current cost index and any other method approved by
the NIT approving authority for ascertaining the reasonability of the tendered amount of the L1
bidder. The acceptance of financial bid is approved by the authority competent to approve the
financial bids for the work of similar value in the non-EPC (traditional item measurement basis)
143
 contracts.
11. Submission of measurements, in case of EPC contracts, is only for record purpose. Payment of
bills of the contractor is made on basis of stage-wise completion of work as per terms of the
contract.
12. All other conditions shall be as per the CPWD Works Manual 2019.

Percentage rate contract: In this type of contract the departmental rates for the different
items of work in an estimate are published and the contractor quotes his rate at a percentage
above, or below or at par the estimate rates so published. Only a single percentage applicable to
all the items is quoted and this percentage rate is applicable to extra items, if any, are found
necessary during construction. Other conditions of contract are similar to those applicable to
schedule contracts.
A modification of this type of contract is when, instead of estimate rates for a work, the schedule
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

of rates is published and the contractor is asked to quote a percentage above, below or at par, the
schedule of rates so published.
The most appropriate form of contract shall be decided upon in individual cases before inviting
tenders. The authority competent to accord technical sanction to the estimate is the authority,
which will decide whether the work is done departmentally or through contract. In the latter
case, the authority will also decide upon the form of contract. This method shall be followed for
all works up to and including TS powers of Superintending Engineer.

20.2. Performance Based Maintenance Contract

A Performance Based Maintenance Contract (PBMC) is a lump sum contract of all ordinary
maintenance activities (Standard Jobs) in which the contractor is paid a set monthly/quarterly
premium irrespective of the amount of work required to keep the road or building safe and
defect-free. It becomes the contractor‘s responsibility, without separate direction from PWD, to
keep the road condition to a specified standard and period and he may incur some financial
penalty if he fails to achieve this standard. Part of the contract requirement is use of specialized
equipment specifically for road maintenance, and there are limited provisional works for larger
repairs/resurfacings. This system shall be adopted only for major works on roads/Buildings,
which satisfy minimum standards as per norms. The road or buildings to be included in this
contract shall be decided by the Chief Engineer. The contract shall be valid for minimum period
of three years beyond the defect liability period. If necessary, an initial rehabilitation work shall
be done before arranging PBMC. Annual stage contract shall be incorporated for roads identified
by Chief Engineer with a maximum financial ceiling defined by administrative department.
These works shall be tendered well in advance so that the participation is large.

20.3 Deposit Works

The Pre-construction activities in the case of Deposit works are similar to activities under Normal
works with the following important provisions.
Preliminaries for Deposit Works:
(1) Officers of PWD shall have full powers to undertake deposit works upto their delegated powers to
accord T/S as per the Financial powers delegated to the Officers vide S.O. 15, Dated 09-01-2019,
for works fully funded by Central or Govt. of Union Territory of J&K, including those for PSUs,
Government funded Institutions etc.
(2) Before acceptance of any deposit, the competent officer shall send the preliminary estimate to the
client department.
(3) The norms regarding plinth areas and specifications adopted will be as approved by the client
department.
(4) The scope of work shall not be altered either during preparation of Detailed Estimate or execution,
without written permission of the client.
(5) MOU shall be drawn with the client before taking up the work. Competent Authority designated by
Chief Engineer PW (R&B) Department may approve modifications in the MOU as per the site
conditions and project requirements by following GFR provisions and other rules issued from
time to time.
(6) For multiple small works under one client, a combined MOU can be signed as per the requirement.

144
 (7) Estimates of fees of Private Architect/ Consultant are to be added in the estimate only.
(8) If specific provision is not available in the sanctioned estimate, then separate enabling estimate is
to be submitted to the client for fees of Architect/Consultant.
(9) Details for Execution, realization of deposits and settlement of accounts of Deposit works are
given as under:
Realization of Deposits :
(i) Whenever a deposit work is to be under taken, the deposit is realized before any liability is
incurred on the work.
(ii) In the case of deposit works of autonomous bodies which are financed entirely from Government
grants, and from whom receipt of deposits is assured, 33-1/3% of the estimated cost of the work
or 10% of the estimated cost of the work, is got deposited inadvance at the time of issue of A/A
&E/S and balance amount i.e.23-1/3% of the estimated cost of the work is got deposited before
award of work. Thereafter, the expenditure incurred is got reimbursed through monthly bills

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

simultaneously with rendering of monthly accounts on the progress of work.
(iii) The deposit of 33-1/3% obtained as mentioned above is retained for adjustment against the last
portion of the estimated expenditure.
(iv) Where delays are experienced in obtaining deposits, and where the expenditure has to be incurred
out of the 33-1/3% reserve to keep the works going, the matter is brought to the notice of T/ S
authority promptly for taking up the matter with the client.
(v) Whenever the expenditure is anticipated to exceed the A/A and E/S amount, a revised preliminary
estimate is submitted to the client well in time during the execution of work.
(vi) Where a client has defaulted in making the required deposit, and where the outstanding amount
exceeds Rs.10 lakhs, or where the works outlay is predominantly for purchase of capital
equipment and machineries, the entire deposit including departmental charges is realized in
advance.
(vii) In no case deposits received from a client department for its work is diverted to other works. No
expenditure is incurred on deposit works out of PWD grants and vice-versa.
(viii) An acknowledgement that the PWD does not bind itself to complete the work within the amount of
the preliminary estimate, and that they should agree to pay for the excess expenditure that may
occur is obtained from the client before the deposit work is taken in hand.
(ix) The Engineer in Charge should ensure that at any time during the progress of the work, the
expenditure is not more than the deposits received for the work. Where the E-in-C is doubtful
about the timely receipt of deposits, he/she should notify the client that if further deposit is not
received, the work would be stopped, and any contractual liability arising out of such stoppage of
work is borne by the client. He/she should also bring this to the notice of his/her higher officers
for taking up the matter with the client.
(x) While submitting preliminary estimates for deposit works for obtaining administrative approval
and expenditure sanction, a draft MOU is submitted along with the Preliminary Estimate to the
Client.
Transfer of Deposits
(i) It is incumbent on the part of the Civil/Electrical/Horticulture Divisions to transfer deposit to the
concerned Electrical/Civil/Horticulture Divisions a part of the same in proportion of the
sanctioned component of E&M/Civil/Horticulture works as per the sanctioned estimate.
(ii) This transfer of deposit is made at an appropriate stage so that at no stage the progress of work is
hampered for want of transfer of deposit.
Execution of Deposit Works and Settlement of Accounts.
(i) The scope of work is not to be altered without written permission of the client.
(ii) The Engineer in Charge sends to the T/S authority every month the Statement of Expenditure
with the Schedule of Deposit Works for onward transmission to the concerned client after
verification.
(iii) The Engineer in Charge settles the accounts against the deposit works expeditiously so that
the amount does not remain unsettled for long.

145
 20.4. Bidding of works

Before bids are invited for a work there should be Administrative Sanction for the work Technical
Sanction for the work 100% possession of hindrance free land. However, in the case of road
projects bids can be invited with prior permission of Govt. provided 60% of land required is
available and balance can be made available during the course of construction.
The arrangement of works shall normally be made through bids (tenders) for works having
administrative and technical sanctions with proportionate provisions of funds in the Budget for the
year. The bidding of works shall be resorted to only after getting possession of the required land
free of encumbrances.
If there is a time lag of one year between the date of preparation of the estimate and the date of
tender of a work, it is necessary to verify whether any changes have occurred necessitating
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

modification to the provisions in the estimate. If the modifications required are only minor the
officer competent to enter into contract may invite tenders on the basis of the sanctioned estimate.
Otherwise the estimate shall be recast and tenders invited on that basis.
The bid document shall not contain conflicting vague and ambiguous provisions resulting in
disputes, delays and financial losses. The stipulated period of completion of work shall be realistic
and based on magnitude of work.
Subordinate officer shall not split the bigger work into smaller work so that these small works fall
within their jurisdiction in respect of TS and award of work etc. The entire work shall be tendered
as one work.

Adequate time for publicity shall be given so that competition in tendering is not restricted.

20.5. Tender procedure

The Biding of works shall be as per PWD Standard Biding Document through e-Tendering
process on the web site www.jktenders.gov.in.
The tenders which do not fulfill the pre-requisites as per tender notice and tender documents can
only be rejected.

Formalities for Re-invitation of Tenders:

If the lowest bidder backs out, there should be re-tendering in a transparent and fair manner. In
such a situation, the NIT approving authority may call tender at short notice if so justified in the
interest of work. The contractor who has backed out shall not be allowed to participate in the
retendering process. All notices regarding any change in dates and time of receipt/opening of
tenders are to be uploaded on the website.

146
 20.5.1 Pre-requisites for Empanelment by PWD as Hot Mix Plant Owner
The plant holder seeking Empanelment for Hot Mix Plant shall provide the following information to
the PWD Department for consideration of Empanelment.
There after the same shall be verified by the concerned Executive Engineer and Empanelment
certificate issued by the Chief engineer PW(R&B) Department Kashmir/Jammu Engineer PWD after
the case is recommended for consideration by the concerned Superintending Engineer. The following
supporting documents shall be appended with the application for consideration of Empanelment: -
Make and Model of the plant.
Stability & durability of tools and equipment acquired. Capacity of the plant. Inventory of equipment.
Revenue papers of land on which the plant has been established. List of staff technical/Non-technical
to be working at plant.
NOC from Pollution Control Board. Material testing laboratory.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Specific recommendation of Executive Engineer together with his own remarks/recommendations. A

certificate of the land on which the plant is established depicting that the land is free from
encumbrances duly attested by Tehsildar.

Character Certificate to be issued by respective Superintendent of Police. NOC‘s from all the line

Departments, where the plant is installed.

PHE Department

PDD Department

Education Department

Health Department

Forest Department

Jal Shakti Department

(I&FC)

Any other documents as required by the concerned chief engineer in the interest of Government

147
 CHAPTER - 20
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020
STANDARD BIDDING DOCUMENT

(Standard Template)

148
 20.6.1.1. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Table of Clauses

A General
1 Scope of Bid 20 Deadline for Submission of Bids
2 Source of Funds 21 Modification & Withdrawal of Bids.

3 Eligible Bidders

4 Qualification of Bidder E Bid Opening and Evaluation

CHAPTER - 20
5 One Bid per Bidder
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

6 Cost of bidding 22 Bid opening

7 Site visit 23 Process to be confidential

24 Clarification of bids
B Bidding Documents 25 Examination of Bids and Determination of

8 Content of Bidding Responsiveness.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Documents
9 Clarification of Bidding 26 Evaluation and Comparison of Financial
Documents Bids.

10 Amendment of Bidding
Documents 27 Award of Contract

C Preparation of Bids 28 Employer‘s Right to Accept any Bid and

to Reject any or all Bids.

11 Language of Bid 29 Notification of Award and Signing of

12 Documents Comprising Agreement.

the Bid
Bid Prices 30 Performance security.

13 Currencies of Bid and 31 Advance Payment.

14 Bid Validity 32 Dispute review Expert.

15 Bid Security 33 Corrupt or Fraudulent practices.

16 Alternative Proposals by
17 Bidders.

D Submission of Bids
18 Bidding through e-
Tendering

19 Electronic submission of
Bids
149
 A. GENERAL

1. Scope of Bid

1.1 The Employer (named in Appendix to ITB) invites bids for the construction of works (as defined
in these documents and referred to as ―the works‖) detailed in the table given in the ITB. The
bidders may submit bids for any or all of the works detailed in the table given in the ITB.
1.2 The successful bidder will be expected to complete the Works by intended completion date
specified in the Contract data.
1.3 Throughout these bidding documents, the terms ―bid‖ and ―tender‖ and their
derivatives(bidder/tender, bid/tender, bidding/tendering etc.) are synonymous.

2. Source of Funds

2.1 The expenditure on the budget will be met from the budget of Govt. of India. .
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

3. Eligible Bidders

3.1 This Invitation for Bids is open to all Bidders as mentioned in NIT (Individual/Joint
Venture).Joint venture bidding is allowed for the works costing Rs.15.00 Crores and above in
J&K State/UT.(to be read with clause 2.11 of section 2 –qualification information.)

3.2 All Bidders shall provide in Section-2, Forms of Bid and Qualification Information, a
statement that the Bidder is neither associated nor has been associated directly or indirectly,
with the consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design, specifications and other
documents for the project or being proposed as Project Manager for the Contract. A firm that
has been engaged by the Employer to provide consulting services for the preparation or
supervision of the work, and any of its affiliates shall not be eligible to bid.

3.3 Bidders from Joint Venture are allowed as per 3.1and as per clause 2.11 of Section- 2
(qualification Information).

4.0 Qualification of the Bidder (Technical Bid Qualification)

4.1. All Bidders shall provide in Section-2, Forms of Bid and Qualification Information,
preliminary description of the proposed work method and schedule, including drawings and charts,
as necessary. The proposed methodology should include programme of construction backed
with equipment planning and deployment duly supported with broad calculation and quality
assurance procedures along with Quality Assurance Plan(QAP), proposed to be adopted justifying
their capability of execution and completion of work as per technical specifications, within
stipulated period of completion

4.2. In the event that prequalification of quotation bidders has been under taken, only bids for
prequalified bidders will be considered for award of contract, The qualification bidders should
submit with their bids any information updating their original prequalification application‘s
application or alternatively confirm in their bids that the originally submitted prequalification
remains essentially correct as of date of bid submission. The update of confirmation should be
provided in section 2 a copy of the original prequalification application and letter of
prequalification should also be furnished. With the updated information, the bidder must continue
to be qualified in accordance with the criteria laid down in the prequalification document. All
bidders shall also furnish the following the information in Section 2.

4.3. All the bidders shall include the following information and documents with their bids in

150
 Section -3 Qualification Information unless otherwise stated in Appendix to ITB.

a) Copies of original documents defining the constitution or legal status, registration card with
latest renewal, place of registration, and principal place of business; written power of attorney of
the signatory of the Bid to commit the Bidder
b) Financial turn over, year-wise, achieved on execution of civil
engineering works for the last five years i.e. to duly certified by the Chartered Accountant
c) Completion Certificate of having executed and completed or substantially completed successfully
single wok of similar nature as defined under clause 4.6 (A-ii)of qualification criteria in any Govt.
or Semi- Govt Department during the last five years duly issued by an officer not below the rank of
Executive Engineer or equivalent.

CHAPTER - 20
(d) The bidder shall also furnish details of other civil works of similar nature executed and completed
in any Govt. or Semi Govt. department during the last 5 years .and details of works underway or
contractually committed; and clients who may be contacted for further information on those
contracts;
(e) Copy of PAN card issued by the Income TAX Authority.
f) Reports on financial standing of the bidder such as profit and loss statement, balance sheet and
auditors report for the last five years and supported with ITR and TDS for the last five years.
(g) Major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract;
(h) Qualifications and experience of key site management and technical personnel proposed for
contract;

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(i) Evidence of access to line(S) of credit and availability of other financial resources facilities
(10% of contract value), certified by the Bankers (Not more than 3 months old).
(j) Undertaking that the bidder will be able to invest a minimum cash up to 25% of contract value of
work, during implementation of work..
(k) Authority to seek references from the Bidder‘s bankers;
(l) Information regarding any litigation, current or during the last five years, in which the Bidder is
involved, the parties concerned, and disputed amount.
m) Affidavit on Correctness of information submitted with the Bid.
n) Power of attorney.
o) Bidder shall furnish proof of latest returns in GST-3/GSTR-3B. FORM GST – 3B
i.e. latest clearance certificate FORM GST- 3B of the preceding month to the issue of NIT.
Illustrations: -
For the NIT issued in March 2020, the bidder has to upload the latest clearance certificate
FORMGST- 3B of the preceding month i.e.
p) The proposed methodology and programme of construction, backed with equipment planning and
deployment, duly supported with broad calculations and quality control procedures proposed to be
adopted, justifying their capability of execution and completion of the work as per technical
specifications within the stipulated period of completion as per milestones. The bidder shall prepare
the QAP (Quality Assurance Plan) as per the manual /guidelines available on the departmental
website.(refer Clause 4.1 &4.2 of ITB)

Bids for joint venture are accepted for the works valuing Rs.15.00 Crore and above. (To be read
with clause 2.11& 2.12 of section-2 –Qualification Information.)

4.4. (A) Pre-qualification criteria:

a)General Construction Experience: Annual Turnover

The applicant should have achieved minimum annual value of general construction work (as
certified by Chartered Accountant, and at least 50(fifty) percent of which is from Engineering
(Civil/Electrical/Mechanical as relevant to the work being procured) construction works carried
out in any of the year over a stated period (normally five to seven years, ending 31 st March of
previous year), calculated by applying an appropriate multiplier to the projected annual
151
 construction expenditure on the subject contract. The multiplier of 2 may be used, but for very
large contracts should not be less than 1.5.

However, in case of Road/Bridge works under MoRTH, NABARD and State Sector, the
guidelines as circulated by MoRTH shall apply while as in case of Road/Bridge works under
PMGSY, the guidelines as circulated by PMGSY shall apply.
b) Particular Construction Experience and Key Production Rates
The applicant should have:
1. Successfully completed or substantially completed similar works during last seven years
ending last day of month previous to the one in which applications are invited should be either
of the following:-
1.1 Three similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 40 (forty) percent
of the estimated cost; or
1.2 Two similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 50 (fifty) percent
of the estimated cost; or
1.3 One similar completed work costing not less than the amount equal to 80 (eighty) percent
of the estimated cost; and
2 The applicant should also have achieved the minimum annual production value of the key
construction activities (e.g dredging, piling, or earthworks etc) stipulated.
The similarity of work shall be pre-defined based on the physical size, complexity
methods/technology and /or other characteristics, and scope of works. Substantial completions
shall be based on 80 (eighty) percent (value wise) or more works completed under the
contract. For contracts under which the applicant participated as a joint venture member or
sub-contractor, only the applicant‘s share, by value, shall be considered to meet this
requirement. For arriving at cost of similar work, the value of work executed shall be brought
to current costing level by enhancing the actual value of work at simple rate of seven percent
per annum, calculated from the date of completion to the date of Bid opening.

However, in case of Road/Bridge works under MoRTH, NABARD and State Sector, the
guidelines as circulated by MoRTH shall apply while as in case of Road/Bridge works under
PMGSY, the guidelines as circulated by PMGSY shall apply.

4.5 (B). Each bidder should further demonstrate:

(a) Availability (either owned or leased or by procurement) of the key and critical equipment for this
work as per Annexure –I below.

(To be included for bids valued over Rs.5.00 Cr).

Based on the studies, carried out by the Engineer, the minimum suggested major

CHAPTER - 20
equipment to attain the completion of works in accordance with the prescribed construction
schedule are shown in the Annexure-I below:-

LIST OF KEY PLANT & EQUIPMENT TO BE DEPLOYED ON CONTRACTWORK

FOR BULIDING WORKS

Maximum Age as Work Above15 Crores Upto

S.No Type of Equipment on date of NIT valuing up to Rs.30.00 Crore.
15 Crores
MANUAL-2020

1 Tipper /Trucks 5-7 3 5

2 Excavator 4 2 2
3 Mixer 3 2 2
4 Lift mixer 2 1 1
5 Concrete vibrator 6 4 5
152
6 Generator 125 kv 3 1 1
7 Motor Grader 3 1 1
8 Welding machine 2 1 1
9 Dewatering pump 100mm 2 1 1
10 Shuttering kit ply / steel (1500 TO 2 1 1
2000 Sqm)

LIST OF KEY PLANT & EQUIPMENT TO BE DEPLOYED ON CONTRACT WORK

FOR BRIDGE/ROAD WORKS

Maximum Age Work Above 15crores

S.No Type of Equipment As on date of valuing UptoRs.30. 00 Crore.
NIT up to 15
Crores
1 Tipper /Trucks 5-7 3 5
2 Excavator 4 2 2
3 Mixer 3 2 2
4 Lift mixer 2 1 1
5 Concrete vibrator 6 4 5
6 Generator 125 kv 3 1 1
7 Motor Grader 3 1 1
8 Welding machine 2 1 1
9 Dewatering pump 100mm 2 1 1
10 Shuttering kit ply / steel (1500 2 1 1
To 2000 Sqm)
11 Dozer 5 1 1
12 Front end loader 5 1 1
13 Smooth wheeled roller 5 1 2
14 Vibratory Roller 5 1 1
15 Paver Finisher with Electronic 5 1 1
Sensor(Mandatory for Works valued over
Rs.5.00 Cr)
16 Water Tanker 5-7 1 1
17 Bitumen Sprayer 5-7 1 1
18 cold milling machine 5 1 1
19 Tandem Roller 5 1 1
20 Hot Mix Plant with Electronic 5 1 1
controls (Minimum 40 – 60
TPH
Capacity)

153
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTE
The Engineer in charge shall be at liberty to direct the contractor to get additional plant and
equipment if necessary for timely complementation of project. The applicant should own or
should have assured ownership/lease/hire the following key items of equipment, in full working
order, and must demonstrate that, based on known commitments; they will be available for use
in the proposed contract.

The Bidders should, however, undertake their own studies and furnish with their bid, a detailed
construction planning and methodology supported with layout and necessary drawings and
calculations (detailed) as stated in clause 12 of ITB to allow the employer to review their
proposal. The numbers, types and capacities of each plant/equipment shall be shown in the
proposals along with the cycle time for each operation for the given production capacity to
match the requirements.

(b) Availability for this work of personnel with adequate experience as required as per Annexure-II.

LIST OF KEY PERSONNEL TO BE DEPLOYED ON CONTRACT WORK

S.No PERSONAL QUALIFICATION Up to 15 Crores 15 crores above Up

to Rs.30.00 Crore.
1 Project Manager B.E Civil +10Years Exp 1 1 No
Or Diploma in Civil with
15 years experience
2 Site Engineer B.E Civil +3Years Exp 1 2 No
Or
Diploma with 7 years
experience
3 Plant Engineer B.E Mech. + 3 Years Exp. 1 1 No
Or
Dip. Mech.+ 7 Years Exp.
4 Quantity B.E Civil. + 7 Years Exp. 1 1 No
Surveyor Or
Dip. Civil.+ 10Years Exp.
5 Soil & Material B.E Civil. + 7 Years Exp. 1 1 No
Engineer Or
Dip. Civil.+ 10Years Exp.
6 Survey Engineer B.E Civil+5 years Exp. 1 1 No
Or
Dip. Civil + 8 years Exp.

The contractor should have details vetted from department of pension & pensioners' welfare /
Department of labour and employment/ department of financial services, in the form of CPF/NPS
muster roll of technical and non-technical personel as a proof of Key personnel working in
UAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

firm/company.
(c) Liquid assets and/ or availability of credit facilities of no less than amount indicated in Appendix to
ITB (credit lines / letter of credit certificates from banks for meeting the funds requirement etc. usually
the equivalent of the estimated cash flow for three months in peak construction period)
4.6(C) To qualify for a package of contracts made up of this and other contracts for which bids
are invited in the ITB, the bidders must demonstrate having experience and resources
sufficient to meet the aggregate of the qualifying criteria for the individual contracts.
4.6 Bidders who meet the minimum qualification criteria will qualify only if their available bid capacity is
more than the total estimated cost of the works. The available bid capacity will be calculated as under:-

154
 Available Bid capacity = (AxNxM-B)

A= Maximum value of engineering (civil/electrical/mechanical as relevant to work being

procured) works executed in any one year during the last five years ( updated to the current price
level of the year indicated in appendix ) taking into account the completed into as well as works
in the progress;
N = Number of years prescribed for completion of the work in question
B = Value (updated to the current price level of the year indicated in appendix ) of existing
commencements and on-going works to be completed during the next ‗N‘ years.
M= Multiplying factor (usually 1.5)
EERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20 PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Note: The statements showing the value of existing commitments and on-going works as well as
the stipulated period of completion remaining for each of the works listed should be
countersigned by the Engineer in charge, not below the rank of an Executive Engineer or
equivalent. The certificate should be furnished as per format shown in qualification
information (Section-2).

4.7 Even though the Applicants meet the above qualifying criteria, they are subject to be
disqualified if they have:

i. Made misleading or false representations in the forms, statements and attachments submitted;
and / or

ii. Record of poor performance such as abandoning the works not properly completed the contract
inordinate delays in completion, litigation history or financial failure etc and /or

iii. Participated in the previously bidding for the same works and had quoted unreasonably high bid
prices and could not furnish rational justification to employer

5. One Bid per Bidder

5.1 Each Bidder shall submit only one bid for one work. A Bidder who submits more than one
bid for one work will cause the proposals with the Bidder‘s participation to be disqualified.

6. Cost of Bidding Document

6.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his bid and the
Employer will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs.

7. Site Visit

7.1 The Bidder, at the Bidder‘s own responsibility and risk is encouraged to visit and examine the
Site of Works and its surroundings and obtain all information that may be necessary for
preparing the Bid and entering into a contract for construction of the Works. The costs of
visiting the Site shall be at the Bidder‘s own expense.

155
B. BIDDING DOCUMENTS

8. Content of Bidding Documents

8.1 The set of bidding documents comprises the documents listed below and Addenda issued in
accordance with Clause 10 of ITB.

1. Notice Inviting Tender

2. Instructions to Bidders
3. Qualification Information
4. Conditions of Contract (Part-I General Conditions of Contract, and Contract data; part II Special
Conditions of Contract).
5. Specifications
6. Drawings
7. Bill of Quantities
8. Form of Bid
9. Form of Acceptance, Form of Agreement, and Issue of Notice to Proceed with the work
10. Forms of Securities and Form of Unconditional BankGuarantee.

8.2 The bid document is available online on the websitehttp://www.jktenders.gov.in.

The bid document can be downloaded free of cost, however, the bidder is required to submit E-
challan towards cost of bid document in favour of the name given in the Bid Data Sheet.
8.3 The bidder is expected to examine carefully all Instruction, Conditions of Contract, Contract
Data,
Forms, Terms, Technical Specifications, Bill of Quantities, Annexes and Drawings in the Bid
Document. Failure to comply with the requirements of bid submission will be at the bidder‘s own
risk. Pursuant to clause 26 hereof bids which are not substantially responsive to the requirements
of the bidding documents shall be rejected.

9. Clarification of Bidding Documents

9.1 The electronic bidding system provides for online clarification. A prospective bidder requiring any
clarification of the bidding document may notify online the authority inviting the bid .The
authority inviting the bid will respond to any request(s) for clarification received earlier than 10
days prior to the dead line for submission of bids. Description of clarification sought and the
response of the authority inviting the bid will be uploaded for information of the public or other
bidders without identifying the source of request for clarification.

9.2 Pre-bid Meeting

CHAPTER - 20
9.2.1 The bidder or his official representative is invited to attend a pre-bid meeting, which will take
place at the address, venue, time and date as indicated in NIT.

9.2.2 The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter that
may be raised at that stage.

9.2.3 The bidder is requested to submit any questions in writing or by cable to reach the employer not
later than two days before themeeting.
G MANUAL-2020

9.2.4 Minutes of the meeting, including the text of the questions raised(without Identifying the source of
enquiry) and the responses given will be transmitted without delay to all bidders. Any modification
of the bidding documents listed in Sub-Clause 8.1which may become necessary as a result of thepre-
bid meeting shall be uploaded and bidder shall be automatically informed through messaging/mail
through jktenders.gov.in.

156
9.2.5 Non-attendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a bidder.

10. Amendment of Bidding Documents

10.1 Before the deadline for submission of bids, the Employer may modify thebidding
documents by issuing online corrigendum. The corrigendum will appear on the web page of the
website www. Jktenders.gov.in under the ―Latest Corrigendum‖ and e-mail notification is also
automatically sent to those bidders who have moved this tender to their ―My tenders‖ area.

10.2 Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the bidding documents and shall be
deemed to have been communicated to all the bidders who have moved this tender to their ―My
Tenders‖ area. Incase any addendum/ Corrigendum, the system will automatically send e-mail to all
bidders who have downloaded the bidding document.

10.3 To give prospective bidders reasonable time in which to take an addendum into
account in preparing their bids, the Employer shall extend, as necessary, the deadline for submission
of bids, in accordance with Clause 20.2 of ITB.

157
 C. PREPARATION OF BIDS
11. Language of the Bid

11.1 All documents relating to the bid shall be in English language.

12. Document Comprising the Bid

12.1 The bid to be uploaded by the bidder as Volume V of Bid document (Refer Clause 8.1) shall
be in two separate parts.

Part I shall be named ―Technical Bid‖ and shall comprise.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

i) Bid Security and Bid document fee in the form as specified in Section8
ii) Qualification Information and supporting documents as specified in Section2.
iii) Certificates, undertaking, affidavits in section 2.
iv) Any other information pursuant to clause 4.0 of these instructions.
v) Undertaking that, the bid shall remain valid for the period of 120 days after the deadline of
date of opening of technical bids mentioned in the NIT.
vi) Acceptance/non- acceptance of dispute reviewexpert

Part-II of the bid shall be named as ―Financial Bid and shall comprise.

(i) Form of Bid as specified in Section 6.

(ii) Priced Bill of Quantities for items specified in Section7.
12.2(a) The documents and details mentioned in clause 12.1 Part I, financial Turnover for the last
five financial years supported with all other documents as required as per NIT and SBD
must be uploaded by the bidder with his technical bid online on website
www.jktenders.gov.in.

Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents mentioned in NIT and SBD
with technical bid.

12.3 Following documents, which are not submitted with the Bid, will be deemed to be part of the
Bid separately sealed and marked

Section Particulars
1 Notice Inviting Tender
2 Instruction to Bidders(ITB)
3-4 Conditions of Contract
5 Contract Data
6 Specifications
9 Drawings

12.4 Three Bid System

Generally, works for which technical specifications have not been finalized and the same are to be finalized on
receipt of the details from the bidders are called on three bid system. The bidders shall be required to submit
three bids as given below;
Bid - 1 : Eligibility bid
Bid – 2 : Technical specifications
Bid – 3 : Financial bid.
Normally, technical and financial bids are called simultaneously, however, in case of exigencies, only technical
bids can be called first with the approval of Competent Authority.
158
 Procedure for opening of Three Bid tenders is given as:
(i) Works for which technical specification are not finalized and the same are to be finalized on receipt of the
details from the tenderers are invited in Three Bid system.
(ii) Bid-1 containing the Eligibility bid is opened first.
(iii) Bid- 2, Technical bid containing technical specifications of those bidders who satisfy the eligibility
criteria are then opened at notified time, date and place in presence of bidders or their representative. If
required, a conference in respect of technical bids is held on notified date, time and place. After
finalization of technical bid, if required, bidders are given chance to modify their financial bids.
(iv) Financial bid of qualified bidders are then opened at notified time, date and place in presence of bidders or
the representatives. The validity of the tenders is reckoned from the date of opening of the technical bids.
After opening of the Technical bids in three Bid system, the bid opening authority prepares a list of
deficiencies found in the bids of each bidder vis-a-vis requirements as per NIT within one week and
communicates the same to individual bidders by Speed Post/E mail with a request to furnish required
documents/clarifications within a week‘s time, failing which it is presumed that they do not have any
further documents/clarifications to furnish and decision on bids is taken accordingly.

CHAPTER - 20
13. Bid Prices:

13.1 The Contract shall be for the whole Works, as described in Clause 1.1 of ITB, based on the
priced Bill of Quantities submitted by the Bidder online.
13.2 The Bidder shall make online entries to fill the Item Rates in Bill of Quantities.

Item Rate Method requires the bidder to quote rates and prices for all items of the Works
described in the Bill of Quantities. The items for which no rate or price is entered by the
Bidder will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed
covered by the other rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities. Upon numerical entry, the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

amount in words would automatically appear and upon entry of rates in items of work, total
bid price would automatically be calculated by the system and would bedisplayed.

Percentage Rate method requires the bidder to quote a percentage above/below /at par of the
schedule of rates applicable/as mentioned in the advertised BOQ.

13.3 All duties, taxes and other levies payable by the Contractor under the contractor, or for
any other cause including GST, shall be included in the rates, price and the total bid price
submitted by the Bidder.

13.4 The rates & prices quoted by the bidder shall be fixed for the duration of the contract and
shall not be subject to adjustment or any account.

14 Currencies of Bid and Payment

14.1 The unit rates and the prices shall be quoted by the bidder entirely in Indian Rupees. All
payments shall be made in Indian Rupees.

15 Bid Validity
15.1 Bids shall remain valid for a period not less than 120 days (One hundred twenty days)
after The deadline date for opening of Technical bids as specified in NIT. A bid valid for a
shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive. In case of discrepancy in bid
validity period between that given in the undertaking pursuant to Clause 12.1 (v) and the Form
of Bid submitted by the Bidder, the latter shall be deemed to stand corrected in accordance with
theformer and the Bidder has to provide for any additional security that is required.

15.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original time limit, the Employer
may request that the bidders may extend the period of validity for a specified additional period.
The request and the bidders‘ responses shall be made in writing or by cable. A bidder may
159
 refuse the request without forfeiting his Bid security. A bidder agreeing to the request will not
be required or permitted to modify his bid except as provided in 15.3 hereinafter, but will be
required to extend the validity of his Bid security for a period of the extension, and in
compliance with Clause 16 of this chapter in all respects

15.3 Bid evaluation will be based on the bid prices without taking into consideration the above
correction.
CHAPTER - 20
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

160
 16 Bid Security

16.1 The bidder shall furnish as part of his Bid, a Bid Security in the amount as shown in
Column 5 of the table of (NIT) for this particular work. This bid security shall be in favour of
employer as named in Appendix and may be in one of the following forms:

a. Deposit-at-call Receipt from any scheduled Indian Bank or a foreign Bank located in India and
approved by the Reserve Bank of India

b. Bank Guarantee from any scheduled Indian bank, in the format given in Volume

c. Fixed Deposit Receipt, issued by any Scheduled Indian Bank or a foreign Bank approved by the
Reserve Bank of India
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

16.2 Bank Guarantee (and other instruments having fixed validity) issued, as surety for the bid
shall be valid for 45 days beyond the validity of the bid. The BG should be verified before
allotting the contract

16.3 Any bid not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Security and not secured as indicated in Sub-
Clauses16.1 and 16.2 above shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.
16.4 The Bid Security of the unsuccessful bidder will be returned within 28 days of the end of the
bid validity period specified in sub-clause 15.1.
16.5 The Bid Security of the Successful bidder will be discharged when the bidder has signed the
Agreement and furnished the required Performance Security.
16.6 The Bid Security may be forfeited

a) If the Bidder withdraws the bid after bid opening during the period of bid validity;

b) In the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder fails within the specified time limit to

i) Sign the Agreement and/or

ii) Furnish the required Performance Security

17 Alternative Proposal by Bidders

17.1 Bidders shall submit offers that fully comply with the requirements of the bidding
documents, including the condition of contract (including mobilization advance or time for
completion), basic technical design as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. Conditional
offer or alternative offers will not be considered further in the process of tender evaluation.

Online Submission of Bids

18 Bidding through E-Tendering System:

18.1 The bidding under this contract is electronic bid submission through website
www.jktenders.gov.in Detailed guidelines for viewing bids and submission of online bids are
given on the website. The Invitation for Bids under PW(R&B) department is published on this
website. Any citizen or prospective bidder can logon to this website and view the Invitation for
Bids and can view the details of works for which bids are invited. The prospective bidder can
submit bids online; however, the bidder is required to have enrolment/registration in the website

161
 and should have valid Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) in the form of smart card/e- token. The
DSC can be obtained from any authorised certifying agencies. The bidder should register in the
web site www.jkternders.gov.in using the relevant option available
Then the Digital Signature registration has to be done with the e-token, after logging into the site.
After this, the bidder can login the site through the secured login by entering the password of the
e- token and the user id/ password chosen during registration. After getting the bid schedules, the
Bidder should go through them carefully and then submit the documents as asked, otherwise, the
bid will be rejected.
18.2 The completed bid comprising of documents indicated in ITB clause 12, should be
Uploaded on the website given above through e-tendering along with scanned copies of requisite
certificates as are mentioned in different sections in the bidding document and scanned copies of
the Bid Document, E-challan/ receipt and Bid Security in approved form.
18.3 The bidder shall furnish information as described in the Form of Bid on Commissions or

CHAPTER - 20
gratuities, if any, paid or to be paid to agents relating to the Bid, and to contract execution
if the bidder is awarded the contract.

19 Electronic Submission of Bids:

19.1 The bidder shall submit online two separate files. Part I, marked as Part I:
Technical Qualification Part and Part II; marked as Part II: Technical- Financial Part. The
above files will have markings as given in the Bid Data Sheet. The contents of the Technical
Qualification and Technical Financial bid shall be as specified in clause 12 of the ITB. All
the documents are required to be signed digitally by the bidder. After electronic on line bid

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

submission, the system generates a unique bid identification number which is time stamped.
This shall be treated as acknowledgement of bid submission.

20 Deadline for Submission of Bids

20.1 Complete Bids in two parts as per clause 19 above must be submitted by the Bidder
online not later than the date and time indicated in the Appendix to ITB.

20.2 The Employer may extend the deadline for submission of bids by issuing an
Amendment in accordance with Clause 10.3 of ITB. In such case all rights and obligations of the
Employer and the bidders previously subject to the original deadline will then be subject to the
new deadline.

21 Modification/ Withdrawal/Late Bids

21.1 The electronic bidding system would not allow any late submission of bids after
due date and time as per server time.

21.2 Bidders may modify their bids by uploading their request for modification before
the deadline for submission of bids. For this, the bidder need not make any additional
payment towards the cost of tender document. For bid modification and consequential re-
submission, the bidder is not required to withdraw his bid submitted earlier. The last modified
bid submitted by the bidder within the bid submission time shall be considered as the bid. For
this purpose, modification/withdrawal by other means will not be accepted. In online system
of bid submission, the modification and consequential- submission of bids is allowed any
number of times. The bidders may withdraw his bid by uploading their request before the
deadline for submission of bids; however, if the bid is withdrawn, the re-submission of the
bid is not allowed.

21.3 No bid shall be modified or withdrawn after the deadline of submission of bids.

162
 21.4 Withdrawal or modification of a bid between the deadline for submission of bids and the
expiration of the original period of bid validity specified in clause 15.1 above or as extended
pursuant to Clause 15.2 may result in the forfeiture of the Bid Security pursuant to Clause 16.

22 Bid Opening and Evaluation

22.1 The Employer inviting the bids or its authorised representative will open the bids online
and this could be viewed by the bidders also online. In the event of the specified date for the
Opening of bids being declared a holiday for the Employer, the Bids will be opened at the
appointed time and location on the next working day.

22.2 The file containing the Part-I of the bid will be opened first.

22.3 In all cases, the amount of Bid Security, cost of bid documents, and the validity of the bid
shall be scrutinized. Thereafter, the bidders‘ names and such other details as the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Employer may Consider appropriate, will be notified as Part-I bid opening summary by the
Authority inviting bids at The online opening. A separate electronic summary of the opening is
generated and kept on-line.

22.4 The Employer will also prepare minutes of the Bid opening, including the information
disclosed in accordance with Clause 22.3 of ITB and upload the same for viewing online.

22.5 Evaluation of Part-I of bids with respect to Bid Security, qualification information
and other information furnished in Part I of the bid in pursuant to Clause 12.1 of ITB, shall be
taken up and completed within five working days of the date of bid opening, and a list will be
drawn up of the qualified bidders whose Part- II of bids are eligible for opening.

22.6 The result of Technical evaluation shall be made public on jktenders.gov.in site following
which there will be a period of two working days during which any bidder may submit
objections if any in writing to the tender receiving authority which shall be considered for
resolution before financial bid opening.

22.7 The Employer shall inform the bidders, who have qualified technical evaluation, of the
date, time of online opening of financial bids. If the specified date of opening of financial bid
is changed, in the event of the specified date being declared a holiday for the Employer, the
bids will be opened at the appointed time and location on the next working day.

22.8 Financial bids of only those bidders will be opened online, who have qualified in
Technical Evaluation. The bidders‘ names, the Bid prices, the total amount of each bid, and
such other details as the Employer may consider appropriate will be notified online by the
Employer at the time of bid opening.

22.9 The Employer shall prepare the minutes of the online opening of Financial Bids and
upload the same for viewing online.

23 Process to be confidential

23.1 Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of Bids and
recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons
not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful Bidder has been
announced. Any effort by a bidder to influence the Employer‘s processing of bids or award decision
may result in the rejection of his bid.

163
24 Clarification of Bids and contacting the Employer: -

No Bidder shall contact the Employer on any matter relating to its bid from the time of the bid
opening to the time the contract is awarded. If the bidder wishes to bring additional information
to the notice of the Employer, it should do so in writing.

24.1 Any attempt by the bidder to influence the Employer‘s bid evaluation, bid Comparison or
contract award decision may result in the rejection of his bid.

25 Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness

25.1 During the detailed evaluation of ―Technical Bids‖ the Employer will determine whether
each Bid (a) meets the eligibility criteria defined in Clause 3 and 4,(b) has been properly signed;

CHAPTER - 20
(c) is accompanied by the required securities and; (d) is substantially responsive to the
requirements of the Bidding documents. During the detailed evaluation of the ‗Financial Bid‘
the responsiveness of the Bids will be further determined with respect to the remaining bid
conditions i.e. priced Bill of Quantities, technical specifications and drawings.
A substantially responsive ―Financial Bid‖ is one, which conforms to all the terms, conditions
and specifications of the Bidding documents, without material deviation or reservation.
A material deviation or reservation is one
(i) which affects in any substantial way the scope, quality or performance of the works:
(ii) which limits in any substantial way inconsistent with the bidding documents the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Employer‘s rights or the bidders obligations under the contract, or
(iii) whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive position of other bidders
presenting substantially responsive bids.

25.2 If a ―Financial Bid‖ is not substantially responsive it will be rejected by the Employer
and may not subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of the non-
conforming deviation or reservation.

26.0 Evaluation and Comparison of Financial Bids

26.1 The Employer will evaluate and compare only the bids determined to be substantially
responsive in accordance with Sub-Clause 25.2.

26.2 In evaluating the bids, the Employer will determine for each bid the Evaluated Bid price
adjusting the Bid price through making an appropriate adjustment for any other acceptable
variation, deviations, and price modifications offered in accordance with sub-clause 21 of ITB.

26.3 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any variation or deviation. Variations
and deviations, and other factors which are in excess of the requirements of the bidding
documents or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits for the Employer shall not be taken into
account in Bid evaluation.

26.4 Unbalanced Bid:

The successful bidder L1 shall have to deposit an additional performance security in the shape
of CDR / FDR/ B.G before award of contract in case the bid of the successful bidder is found to
be unbalanced and the following scale shall apply there to:-

164
 Additional performance security
S.No Percentage of unbalanced bid viz -a- viz Adv.cost to be deposited on quoted bid by
L1
1 Upto and including 15% below Nil
2. >15% upto and including 20% below 5%
3 >20% upto and including 25% below 10%
4 >25% upto and including 30% below 15%
5 >30% below 20%

Payment for the items for which quoted rates are higher than estimated/DPR rates shall be
restricted to estimated/DPR rates only till completion of items for which quoted rates are
lower than the estimated/DPR rates.
It should al so be ensured than advertised Quantities as per the BOQ should not exceed
the advertised quantities in any case in order to ensure that intense position of the bidders
does not get changed.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

After evaluation of the price analyses, the Employer may require that the amount of the
performance security set forth in clause 30of ITB be increased at the expense of the
successful bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against financial loss in the
event of default of the successful bidder under the Contract.
26.5 A Bid which contains several items in the Bill of Quantities which are
unrealistically which cannot priced low and be substantiated satisfactorily by the bidder
may be rejected as non-responsive.
26.6 There should be no post tender negotiation with L1 as per CVC guidelines. In case L1
backs out, there should re-tender.

26.70. Integrity Pact

The Pact essentially envisages an agreement between the prospective vendors/bidders and
the buyer, committing the persons/officials of both sides, not to resort to any corrupt
practices in any aspect/stage of the contract. Only those vendors/bidders, who commit
themselves to such a Pact with the buyer, would be considered competent to participate in
the bidding process. In other words, entering into this Pact would be a preliminary
qualification. The essential ingredients of the Pact include:
 Promise on the part of the principal not to seek or accept any benefit, which is not
legally available;
 Principal to treat all bidders with equity and reason;
 Promise on the part of bidders not to offer any benefit to the employees of the
Principal not available legally;
 Bidders not to enter into any undisclosed agreement or understanding with other
bidders with respect to prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, etc.
 Bidders not to pass any information provided by Principal as part of business
relationship to others and not to commit any offence under PC/ IPC Act;
 Foreign bidders to disclose the name and address of agents and representatives in
India and Indian Bidders to disclose their foreign principals or associates.
 Bidders to disclose the payments to be made by them to agents / brokers or any other
intermediary;
 Bidders to disclose any transgressions with any other company that may impinge on
the anti corruption principle.

Integrity Pact, in respect of a particular contract, shall be operative from the date IP is
signed by both the parties till the final completion of the contract. Any violation of the same
would entail disqualification of the bidders and exclusion from future business dealings.

165
 Sample of integrity pact agreement is given here under:-

INTEGRITY PACT PWD

To,
………………………..,
………………………..,
………………………..
Sub: NIT No. …………………………………. for the work ……………..... ..............

Dear Sir,
It is here by declared that PWD is committed to follow the principle of transparency, equity and
competitiveness in public procurement.
The subject Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an invitation to offer made on the condition that the
Bidder will sign the integrity Agreement, which is an integral part of tender/bid documents, failing
which the tenderer/bidder will stand disqualified from the tendering process and the bid of the
bidder would be summarily rejected.
This declaration shall form part and parcel of the Integrity Agreement and signing of the same shall
be deemed as acceptance and signing of the Integrity Agreement on behalf of the PWD.

Yours faithfully
Executive Engineer

166
To,
Executive Engineer,
………………………..,
………………………..
Sub: Submission of Tender for the work of …………………… …....……………....
Dear Sir,

I/We acknowledge that PWD is committed to follow the principles thereof as enumerated in the
Integrity Agreement enclosed with the tender/bid document.
I/We agree that the Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an invitation to offer made on the condition that
I/We will sign the enclosed integrity Agreement, which is an integral part of tender documents,
failing which I/We will stand disqualified from the tendering process. I/We acknowledge that THE
MAKING OF THE BID SHALL BE REGARDED AS AN UNCONDITIONAL AND
ABSOLUTE ACCEPTANCE of this condition of the NIT.
I/We confirm acceptance and compliance with the Integrity Agreement in letter and spirit and
further agree that execution of the said Integrity Agreement shall be separate and distinct from the
main contract, which will come into existence when tender/bid is finally accepted by PWD. I/We
acknowledge and accept the duration of the Integrity Agreement, which shall be in the line with
Article 1 of the enclosed Integrity Agreement.

I/We acknowledge that in the event of my/our failure to sign and accept the Integrity Agreement,
while submitting the tender/bid, PWD shall have unqualified, absolute and unfettered right to
disqualify the tenderer/bidder and reject the tender/bid is accordance with terms and conditions of
the tender/bid.

Yours faithfully

(Duly authorized signatory of the Bidder)

167
To be signed by the bidder and same signatory competent / authorised to sign the relevant
contract on behalf of PWD.

INTEGRITY AGREEMENT
This Integrity Agreement is made at ............... on this ........... day of ........... 20......
BETWEEN
Lt Governor of Jammu and Kashmir represented through Executive Engineer, .................................,
(Name of Division)
PWD, ......................................................................., (Hereinafter referred as the (Address of Division)
„Principal/Owner‟, which expression shall unless repugnant to the meaning or context hereof include
its successors and permitted assigns)
AND
.............................................................................................................
(Name and Address of the Individual/firm/Company)
through .................................................................... (Hereinafter referred to as the (Details of duly
authorized signatory)
“ Bidder/Contractor” and which expression shall unless repugnant to the meaning or context hereof
include its successors and permitted assigns)

Preamble
WHEREAS the Principal / Owner has floated the Tender (NIT No. ................................) (hereinafter
referred to as “ Tender/Bid”) and intends to award, under laid down organizational procedure, contract
for ................................................................................................................................ (Name of work)
hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”.

AND WHEREAS the Principal/Owner values full compliance with all relevant laws of the land, rules,
regulations, economic use of resources and of fairness/transparency in its relation with its Bidder(s) and
Contractor(s).
AND WHEREAS to meet the purpose aforesaid both the parties have agreed to enter into this Integrity
Agreement (hereinafter referred to as “ Integrity Pact” or “ Pact”), the terms and conditions of which
shall also be read as integral part and parcel of the Tender/Bid documents and Contract between the
parties.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of mutual covenants contained in this
Pact, the parties hereby agree as follows and this Pact witnesses as under:

Article 1: Commitment of the Principal/Owner

1) The Principal/Owner commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to
observe the following principles:

(a) No employee of the Principal/Owner, personally or through any of his/her family members, will in
connection with the Tender, or the execution of the Contract, demand, take a promise for or accept, for
self or third person, any material or immaterial benefit which the person is not legally entitled to.

(b) The Principal/Owner will, during the Tender process, treat all Bidder(s) with equity and reason. The
Principal/Owner will, in particular, before and during the Tender process, provide to all Bidder(s) the
same information and will not provide to any Bidder(s) confidential / additional information through
which the Bidder(s) could obtain an advantage in relation to the Tender process or the Contract
execution.
(c) The Principal/Owner shall endeavor to exclude from the Tender process any person, whose conduct
in the past has been of biased nature.
2) If the Principal/Owner obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which is a criminal
offence under the Indian Penal code (IPC)/Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988 (PC Act) or is in
violation of the principles herein mentioned or if there be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the
Principal/Owner will inform the Chief Vigilance Officer and in addition can also initiate disciplinary
actions as per its internal laid down policies and procedures.
168
Article 2: Commitment of the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s)

1) It is required that each Bidder/Contractor (including their respective officers, employees and
agents) adhere to the highest ethical standards, and report to the Government / Department all
suspected acts of fraud or corruption or Coercion or Collusion of which it has knowledge or
becomes aware, during the tendering process and throughout the negotiation or award of a
contract.

2) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) commits himself to take all measures necessary to prevent

corruption. He commits himself to observe the following principles during his participation in the
Tender process and during the Contract execution:

a) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm, offer,
promise or give to any of the Principal/Owner‟s employees involved in the Tender process or
execution of the Contract or to any third person any material or other benefit which he/she is not
legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of any kind whatsoever during the
Tender process or during the execution of the Contract.
b) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not enter with other Bidder(s) into any undisclosed agreement
or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to prices, specifications,
certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission of bids or any other actions to
restrict competitiveness or to cartelize in the bidding process.

c) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not commit any offence under the relevant IPC/PC Act.
Further the Bidder(s)/Contract(s) will not use improperly, (for the purpose of competition or
personal gain), or pass on to others, any information or documents provided by the
Principal/Owner as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, technical proposals and
business details, including information contained or transmitted electronically.

d) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) of foreign origin shall disclose the names and addresses of
agents/representatives in India, if any. Similarly Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) of Indian Nationality
shall disclose names and addresses of foreign agents/representatives, if any. Either the Indian
agent on behalf of the foreign principal or the foreign principal directly could bid in a tender but
not both. Further, in cases where an agent participate in a tender on behalf of one manufacturer,
he shall not be allowed to quote on behalf of another manufacturer along with the first
manufacturer in a subsequent/parallel tender for the same item.

e) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all payments he has
made, is committed to or tends to make to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in
connection with the award of the Contract.

3) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined above
or be an accessory to such offences.

4) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm indulge in
fraudulent practice means a willful misrepresentation or omission of facts or submission
offake/forged documents in order to induce public official to act in reliance thereof, with the
purpose of obtaining unjust advantage by or causing damage to justified interest of others
and/or to influence the procurement process to the detriment of the Government interests.

5) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) will not, directly or through any other person or firm use Coercive
Practices (means the act of obtaining something, compelling an action or influencing a decision
through intimidation, threat or the use of force directly or indirectly, where potential or actual
injury may befall upon a person, his/ her reputation or property to influence their participation in
the tendering process).

169
Article 3: Consequences of Breach
Without prejudice to any rights that may be available to the Principal/Owner under law or the
Contract or its established policies and laid down procedures, the Principal/Owner shall have the
following rights in case of breach of this Integrity Pact by the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) and the
Bidder/ Contractor accepts and undertakes to respect and uphold the Principal/Owner‟s absolute
right:
1) If the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s), either before award or during execution of Contract has
committed a transgression through a violation of Article 2 above or in any other form, such as
to put his reliability or credibility in question, the Principal/Owner after giving 14 days notice
to the contractor shall have powers to disqualify the Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) from the Tender
process or terminate/determine the Contract, if already executed or exclude the
Bidder/Contractor from future contract award processes. The imposition and duration of the
exclusion will be determined by the severity of transgression and determined by the
Principal/Owner. Such exclusion may be forever or for a limited period as decided by the
Principal/Owner.
2) Forfeiture of EMD/Performance Guarantee/Security Deposit: If the Principal/Owner has
disqualified the Bidder(s) from the Tender process prior to the award of the Contract or
terminated/determined the Contract or has accrued the right to terminate/determine the
Contract according to Article 3(1), the Principal/Owner apart from exercising any legal rights
that may have accrued to the Principal/Owner, may in its considered opinion forfeit the entire
amount of Earnest Money Deposit, Performance Guarantee and Security Deposit of the
Bidder/Contractor.
3) Criminal Liability: If the Principal/Owner obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder or
Contractor, or of an employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder or Contractor
which constitutes corruption within the meaning of IPC Act, or if the Principal/Owner has
substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal/Owner will inform the same to law
enforcing agencies for further investigation.
Article 4: Previous Transgression
1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgressions occurred in the last 5 years with any
other Company in any country confirming to the anticorruption approach or with Central
Government or State Government or any other Central/State Public Sector Enterprises in
India that could justify his exclusion from the Tender process.
2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the
Tender process or action can be taken for banning of business dealings/ holiday listing of the
Bidder/Contractor as deemed fit by the Principal/ Owner.
3) If the Bidder/Contractor can prove that he has resorted / recouped the damage caused by
him and has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, the Principal/Owner may, at its
own discretion, revoke the exclusion prematurely.
Article 5: Equal Treatment of all Bidders/Contractors/Subcontractors
1) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) undertake(s) to demand from all subcontractors a commitment
in conformity with this Integrity Pact. The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for any
violation(s) of the principles laid down in this agreement/Pact by any of its
Subcontractors/sub-vendors.
2) The Principal/Owner will enter into Pacts on identical terms as this one with all Bidders
and Contractors.
3) The Principal/Owner will disqualify Bidders, who do not submit, the duly signed Pact
between the Principal/Owner and the bidder, along with the Tender or violate its provisions at
any stage of the Tender process, from the Tender process.

Article 6- Duration of the Pact

This Pact begins when both the parties have legally signed it. It expires for the
Contractor/Vendor 12 months after the completion of work under the contract or till the
continuation of defect liability period, whichever is more and for all other bidders, till the
Contract has been awarded. If any claim is made/lodged during the time, the same shall be
binding and continue to be valid despite the lapse of this Pacts as specified above, unless it is
discharged/determined by the Competent Authority, PWD.
170
Article 7- Other Provisions
1) This Pact is subject to Indian Law, place of performance and jurisdiction is the Head
quarters of the Division of the Principal/Owner, who has floated the Tender.
2) Changes and supplements need to be made in writing. Side agreements have not been
made.
3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this Pact must be signed by all the
partners or by one or more partner holding power of attorney signed by all partners and
consortium members. In case of a Company, the Pact must be signed by a representative duly
authorized by board resolution.
4) Should one or several provisions of this Pact turn out to be invalid; the remainder of this
Pact remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their
original intensions.
5) It is agreed term and condition that any dispute or difference arising between the parties
with regard to the terms of this Integrity Agreement / Pact, any action taken by the
Owner/Principal in accordance with this Integrity Agreement/ Pact or interpretation
thereof shall not be subject to arbitration.

Article 8- LEGAL AND PRIOR RIGHTS

All rights and remedies of the parties hereto shall be in addition to all the other legal rights
and remedies belonging to such parties under the Contract and/or law and the same shall be
deemed to be cumulative and not alternative to such legal rights and remedies aforesaid. For
the sake of brevity, both the Parties agree that this Integrity Pact will have precedence over
the Tender/Contact documents with regard any of the provisions covered under this Integrity
Pact.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties have signed and executed this Integrity Pact at the
place and date first above mentioned in the presence of following witnesses:

...............................................................
(For and on behalf of Principal/Owner)

.................................................................
(For and on behalf of Bidder/Contractor)

WITNESSES:

1. ..............................................
(signature, name and address)

2. ...............................................
(signature, name and address)

Place:
Dated :

171
 D. AWARD OF CONTRACT

27.0 Award Criteria

27.1 Subject to Clause 28, the Employer will award the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid has
been determined. To be substantially responsive to the Bidding documents and who has
offered the lowest Evaluated Bid Price, provided that such bidder has been determined to be (a)
eligible in Accordance with the provisions of clause 3 of ITB and (b) qualified in accordance

CHAPTER - 20
with the Provisions of clause 4 of ITB; and

(i) To be within the available Bid Capacity adjusted to account for his bid price which is
evaluated the lowest in any of the packages opened earlier than the one under
consideration.
(ii) The work shall not be awarded without proper verification of documents provided by
the tenderers such as EMD, BG, Completion Certificate, IT returns etc.

28.0 Employer‘s right to accept any Bid and Reject any or all Bids

28.1 Notwithstanding Clause 27 the Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any
bid and to cancel the bidding process and reject all bids, at any time prior to award of
Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected bidder or bidders or any
obligations to inform the affected bidder or bidders of the grounds for the Employer‘s

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

action.

28.2 The acceptance of tenders shall not be delayed without any justification.
29.0 Notification of Award and signing of Agreement

29.1 The Bidder whose Bid has been accepted will be notified of the award by the
54Employer prior to expiration of bid validity period by cable, telex or facsimile confirmed by
registered letter. This letter (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract called ―the Letter of
Acceptance‖) will state the sum that the Employer will pay the contractor in consideration of
the execution, completion and maintenance of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the
Contract. (Hereinafter and in the Contract called ―the Contract Price‖).
29.2 The notification of award will constitute the formation of the Contract subject only to
the furnishing of a performance security in accordance with provision of clause 30 of ITB.

29.3 The Agreement will incorporate all agreements between the Employer and
the successful Bidder. It will be signed by the Employer and the successful
Bidder after the Performance Security is furnished.

29.4 Upon the furnishing by the successful bidder the performance security, the Employer
will promptly notify the other bidders that their bids have been unsuccessful.
30 Performance Security
30.1 Within 21 (twenty one) days after the date of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the
successful bidder/contractor shall deliver to the Employer/concerned authority, a
Performance Security in the shape of CDR/FDR/BG for an amount equivalent to 5% of
contract price plus additional performance security in the shape of CDR /FDR/ BG for the
unbalanced bid in terms of clause 26.4 of ITB.

30.2 If the Performance Security is provided by the successful bidder in the form of a bank

172
 guarantee, it shall be issued by either (a) at the Bidder‘s option, by a Nationalized / Scheduled Indian
Bank or (b) by a foreign reservation. A material deviation or reservation is one bank located in India
and acceptable to the Employer.

30.3 Failure of the successful bidder to comply with the requirements of Sub-Clause 30.1 of ITB shall
constitute sufficient grounds for cancellation of the award and forfeiture of the Bid Security.
30.4 Standard guarantees for water proof treatment, anti termite treatment and other specialized item
of work shall be obtained from the contractor/firm.

31 No Advance Payment whatsoever shall be made by the department to the Contractor.

32 Dispute Review Expert:

The Employer proposes that (Name of the proposed Dispute Review Expert as indicated in the
Appendix to ITB)to be appointed as Dispute Review Expert under the contract at a daily fee as
indicated in Appendix plus reimbursable expenses .If the bidder disagrees with this proposal, the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

bidder should so state in the bid. If, in the letter of Acceptance, the Employer has not agreed on the
appointment of the Dispute Review Expert, the Dispute Review Expert shall be appointed by the
Council of Indian Road Congress at the request of either party.

33 Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices

33.1 The Employer will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder recommended for
award has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the contract in question and will
declare the firm ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to be awarded a contract
with National Highways Authority of India / State PWD and any other agencies, if it at any time
determines that the firm has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for the contractor,
or in execution.

33.2 Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provisions stated in Clause 53.2of the Conditions of
Contract.

34. Scope and Specifications

34.1 The scope and specifications of the work shall not be changed without prior approval of
competent authority.

173
 APPENDIX TO ITB
Clause Reference with respect to Section –I.

Name of Employer: Chief Engineer, PW(R&B) Department Jammu/ Kashmir.

2. The last five years [C1.4.6]

(20YY-YY, 20YY-YY, 20YY-YY, 20YY-YY, 20YY-YY)
3. The average annual financial turnover of any three years out of last five years is 33% of
Adv. Cost supported with TDS & Income Tax Returns [C14.6A(i)]
4. Value of work is Rs lacs [C1 .4.6A(ii)of ITB]
5. Liquid assets and/or availability of credit facilities is10% of Adv. Cost [C1.4.3(i) of ITB]

CHAPTER - 20
6. Price level of the financial year YYYY-YY (particular year to be mentioned) [C1.4.6&4.8]
7. The pre-bid meeting will take place at office of Chief Engineer, R&B Department Kashmir/Jammu
on DD/MM/YY [C1.9.2.1]
8. The technical bid will be opened in the office of Chief Engineer, PW(R&B) Department Kashmir
/Jammu On /20YY at 11.00 A.M.
9. Address of the Employer:
10. Identification of Scheme:
Bid for: Construction of Bid reference No:- dated /20YY.
Do not open before _ at 11.00 A.M

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

11. The bid should be submitted latest by DD/MM/YY at4.00 P.M (as per e-Bidding) [C1.20.1]
12. The bid will be opened in the office of Chief Engineer, PW(R&B) Department [C1.22] On
13. 11.00 A.M.

14. CDR/FDR/BG in favour of Chief Accounts Officer PWD (R&B) Jammu/Kashmir Payable at
Srinagar [C1.30 OF ITB]

15. Dispute Review Expert; T.O to Chief Engineer, PW(R&B) Department Jammu/Kashmir
Clause 32 OF IT Band 23 of GCC

174
 15(a): Performance Security shall be valid until a date 28 days after the expiry of
Defect
Liability Period of 3 years after intended date of completion.

15(b) Unbalanced Bid:

The successful bidder shall have to deposit an additional performance security in the shape of CDR/
FDR/ BG before award of contract in case the bide of the successful bidder is found to be unbalanced
and the following scale shall apply thereto: -

S.No Percentage of unbalanced bid viz -a- viz Adv. Cost Additional performance
security to be deposited on
1 Upto and including 15% below Nil
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

2. >15% upto and including 20% below 5%

3 >20% upto and including 25% below 10%
4 >25% upto and including 30% below 15%
5 >30% below 20%

16. Base year :e.g. 2014-15 (particular year to be mentioned) No escalation factor is allowed for
similar nature of work.

S.No Year before Multiplying factor

1 One 1.08
2 Two 1.17
3 Three 1.26
4 Four 1.36
5 Five 1.47
Escalation factors are for working out available bid capacity only (for the cost of works executed
and financial figures arrived thereof to a common base value for works completed in India).

20.6.1.2 QUALIFICATION INFORMATION

Notes on Form of Qualification Information

The information to be filled in by the bidders in the following pages will be used to purposes of post-
qualification as provided for in clause 4of the instructions to Bidders. This information will not be
incorporated in the contract. Attach additional pages as necessary.

175
 For Individual Bidders
1.1 Constitution or legal status of Bidder (attach copy)

Place of registration

Principal place of business

Power of attorney of signatory of Bid

1.2 Financial Turn over achieved on execution of (Rs. in lakhs)

civil works for the last five years duly certified Year 20YY-YY
by Chartered Accountant and supported with Year 20YY-YY

CHAPTER - 20
TDS, ITR, Profit and Loss statement and Year 20YY-YY
Balance sheet.** Year 20YY-YY
Year 20YY-YY

1.3. Work performed as prime contractor (in the same name & style) on construction
works of similar nature over the last five years. Attach certificate issued by an officer
not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent.
Project Name of Description Contract No Value of Date of Stipulated Actual date Remarks

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Name the of work contract (Rs issue of Period of of completion explaining
employer in crore) work completion * reasons for
* Order delay & work
completed

1.4 Work performed as sub-contractor (in the same name & style duly supported with an
authority letter regarding approval of sub-contract by the competent authority) on
construction works of similar nature over the last five years. Attach certificate issued by an
officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent.

Project Name of the Description of Contract No Value of Date of Stipulated Actual date of Remarks
Name employer work contract (Rs issue of Period of completion explaining
* in crore) work completion * reasons for
Order delay & work
completed

**** A certificate of performance evaluation of all such works/commitments in hand on the part of
the bidder issued by the concerned Chief Engineer/Superintending Engineer/Executive Engineer to
the affirmation that the contractual obligations are being performed satisfactorily without
compromise on quality parameters and time lines.

176
 1.5(a) Achieved a minimum average financial turnover on execution of civil engineering works (
defined as billing for works in progress or completed in all classes of civil engineering
construction works only) during any three out of the last five financial years(yyyy-yy to yyyy-yy)
not less than 33% of the proposed contract /contracts applied. the information supplied in this
connection should be duly certified by a chartered accountant and be duly supported by tds and
income tax returns for the last five years.

(b) Having satisfactorily completed or substantially completed, at least one contract of similar
nature of work of any Govt./Semi Govt. department during the last five years as the case may be
(Building/Road/Bridge Work) of at least 33 % of the value of proposed contract during the last
five years.(Certificate to this effect to be issued by an officer not below the rank of Executive
Engineer or equivalent.). No escalation factor is allowed for similar nature of work and only work
upto allotted amount shall be considered.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

The work may have been executed by the Applicant as prime contractor or as a member of joint
venture. In case a project has been executed by a joint venture, weightage towards experience of
the project would be given to each joint venture partner in proportion to their participation in the
joint venture. Substantially completed works means those works which are at least 90%
completed as on the date of submission of bid (i.e. gross value of work done up to the last date of
submission is 90% or more of the original contract price) and continuing satisfactorily.

For this a certificate from employer shall be submitted along with the application
incorporating clearly the name of the work, contract value, billing amount, date of
commencement of works, actual date of completion of work, satisfactory performance of the
contractor and any other relevant information.

The certificate should be furnished as per format shown in qualification information section-
2 clause no:- 1.3 supported with allotment which shall also be uploaded.

Existing commitments and ongoing construction works:-

Description of Place & Contract No. Name & Value of Stipulated Value of Anticipated
Work State & date address of contract (Rs Period of works date of
Employer in lakhs) completion remaining to completion
be completed
(Rs. in lakhs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

177
Enclose certificate(s) issued by an officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent
1.6 Availability of Major items of Contractor‘s equipment proposed for carrying out the Works. List
all information requested below. Refer also to Clause 4.3(f) and 4.6(B) of the Instructions to
Bidders.
Item of Equipment Description, make, Condition (new, good, Owned, leased (from
and age (years), and poor) and number whom?) or to be
capacity available purchased.

Financial reports for the last five years: balance sheets, profit and loss statements, auditors reports,
etc. List below and attach copies.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

1.9 Name, address, and telephone, telex, and facsimile numbers of banks that may provide
references if contacted by the Employer.

1.10 Information on current litigation in which the Bidder is involved

Name of other party(s) Cause of dispute Litigation where Amount involved (Rs.
(Court/arbitration) In lakh)

1.11 Proposed work method and schedule. The Bidder should attach descriptions,
Drawings and charts as necessary to comply with the requirements of the Bidding documents. [
Refer ITB Clause 12]

1.12 Applicants who meet the minimum qualification criteria will be qualified only if
there available bid capacity at the expected time of bidding is more than the total estimate cost of
the works. The available bid capacity will be calculated as under:-

Available Bid capacity = (AxNxM-B)

A = Maximum value of engineering (civil/electrical/mechanical as relevant to work being

procured) works executed in any one year during the last five years ( updated to the current price
level of the year indicated in appendix ) taking into account the completed into as well as works in
the progress;
N = Number of years prescribed for completion of the work in question
B = Value (updated to the current price level of the year indicated in appendix ) of existing
commencements and on-going works to be completed during the next ‗N‘ years.
M= Multiplying factor (usually 1.5)

Information on Bid Capacity (works for which bids have been submitted and works which
are yet to be completed) as on the date of this bid.
The item of work for which data is requested should tally with that specified in ITB clause
4.6 Qualification and experience of technical/key personnel required for administration and
execution of the Contract [Ref. Clause 4.6 (B) (b)].Attach biographical data. Refer also to sub
Clause 4.3 (h) of instructions to Bidders and Sub Clause 8.1 of the Conditions of Contract.

178
 Position Name Qualification Year of Experience Years of experience in
(General) similar nature of work

Attach copies of certificates on possession of valid license for executing water supply/ sanitary
work/ building electrification works [Reference Clause 4.3 of Chapter SBD ]

1.14 Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the qualification requirements:

Cash in hand, lines of credit, etc. List them below and attach copies of supports documents.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

1.15 Quality Assurance Programme (to be framed in accordance with the requirements
/guide lines/manual uploaded on departmental website.

2.0. Additional Requirements

2.1 Bidders should provide any additional information required to fulfil therequirements of
Clause 4 of the Instructions to the Bidders, if applicable.
(i) Affidavit on correctness of information.
(ii) Undertakings

2.2 (A) Pre-qualification criteria:

2.2.1 General Construction Experience: Annual Turnover

The applicant should have achieved minimum annual value of general construction work (as
certified by Chartered Accountant, and at least 50(fifty) percent of which is from Engineering
(Civil/Electrical/Mechanical as relevant to the work being procured) construction works carried
out in any of the year over a stated period (normally five to seven years, ending 31 st March of
previous year), calculated by applying an appropriate multiplier to the projected annual
construction expenditure on the subject contract. The multiplier of 2 may be used, but for very
large contracts should not be less than 1.5.

However, in case of Road/Bridge works under MoRTH, NABARD and State Sector, the
guidelines as circulated by MoRTH shall apply while as in case of Road/Bridge works under
PMGSY, the guidelines as circulated by PMGSY shall apply.
2.3 Particular Construction Experience and Key Production Rates
The applicant should have:
Successfully completed or substantially completed similar works during last seven years
ending last day of month previous to the one in which applications are invited should be
either of the following:-
1. Three similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 40 (forty) percent
of the estimated cost; or
2. Two similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 50 (fifty) percent
of the estimated cost; or
3. One similar completed work costing not less than the amount equal to 80 (eighty) percent
of the estimated cost; and
2.4 The applicant should also have achieved the minimum annual production value of the key
construction activities (e.g dredging, piling, or earthworks etc) stipulated.
The similarity of work shall be pre-defined based on the physical size, complexity
methods/technology and /or other characteristics, and scope of works. Substantial
completions shall be based on 80 (eighty) percent (value wise) or more works completed
179
 under the contract. For contracts under which the applicant participated as a joint venture
member or sub-contractor, only the applicant‘s share, by value, shall be considered to meet
this requirement. For arriving at cost of similar work, the value of work executed shall be
brought to current costing level by enhancing the actual value of work at simple rate of seven
percent per annum, calculated from the date of completion to the date of Bid opening.

However, in case of Road/Bridge works under MoRTH, NABARD and State

Sector, the guidelines as circulated by MoRTH shall apply while as in case of
Road/Bridge works under PMGSY, the guidelines as circulated by PMGSY shall apply.

2.5 Financial Position:-

The applicant should demonstrate that he has excess to, or has available, liquid assets (aggregate
Of working capital, cash in hand and uncommitted Bank Guarantee‘s) and / or credit facilities of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

not less than 10% of the value of the contract/ contracts applied for (construction cash-flow may
be taken as 10% of the estimated value of contract / contracts).
The audited balance sheets for the last five years should be submitted, which must demonstrate
the soundness of the applicant‘s financial position, showing long term profitability including
and estimated financial projection for the next two years. If necessary, the employer will make
inquires with the applicant‘s bankers.

2.6 Litigation History:-

The Applicant should provide accurate information on any litigation or arbitration

resulting from contracts completed or under execution by him over the last five years. A
consistent of awards against the applicant or any partner of a joint venture may result in failure
of the applicant.

2.7 Joint Venture:- (Applicable for the works costing Rs.15.00 Crores and above in J&K
State/UT). If the bidder is a Joint Venture ,the partners would be limited to three
(including lead partner).Joint Venture firm shall be jointly and severally responsible for
completion of the project.
2.8 Joint Venture must fulfil the following minimum qualification requirement:-
i. Qualifying factors to be met collectively:
(i) annual turnover from construction; (ii) particular construction experience and key production
rates; (iii) construction cash flow for the subject contract; (iv) personnel capabilities; and
(v)equipment capabilities;
2. Qualifying factors for lead partner:
(i) Annual Turnover from Construction; (ii) particular construction experience; (iii) financial
capability to meet cash flow requirement of subject contract –t less than of 50 (fifty) per cent
of the respective limits prescribed in case of individual contractors may be accepted;
(iii) adequate sources to meet financial commitments on other contracts;
(iv) financial soundness;
3. Qualifying factors for other partner: Same as for lead partner except that for the factors
specified in (2) (iii) above, a lower limit of 25 (twenty-five) per cent may be accepted instead
of 50 (fifty) per cent.
Provisions required to be Included in the Joint Venture Agreement

If the application is made by a Joint Venture of two or more firms ,the evidence of clear
mandate ( i,e in the form of respective Board Resolution duly authenticated by competent
authority)by such two or more firms willing to form Joint Venture among themselves for
the specified projects should accompany duly recognizing their respective authorised
signatories signing for and on behalf of respective firms for the purpose of forming the
Joint Venture .A certified copy of the power of attorney to the authorised representatives,
signed by legally

180
 authorised signatories of all the firms of the Joint Venture shall accompany the
application. The JV Agreement shall need to be submitted consisting but not limited to
the following provisions.

a) Name, Style and Project(s) specified JV with Head Office address b)Extent (or Equity)
for participation of each party in the JV

c) Commitment of each party to furnish the Bond money (i.e. Bid, security, performance
security) to the extent of his participation in the JV.

d) Responsibility of each Partner of JV (in terms of Physical and Financial

involvement)

CHAPTER - 20
e) Working Capital arrangement.

f) Operation of separate Bank Account in the name of JV to be operated by both the

partners.

g) Provision for cure in case non-performance of responsibility by any party of the J.V

h) Provision that NEITHER party of the JV shall be allowed to sign, pledge, sell or
otherwise dispose of all or part of its respective interests in JV to any party including
existing partner(s) of the JV .The Employer derives right for any consequent action

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(including blacklisting) against any or all JV partners in case of any breach in this regard .

i)Management Structure of JV with details.

j) Lead Partner to be identified who shall be empowered by the JV to incur liabilities

on behalf of JV.

k) Parties/firms committing themselves to the Employer for

jointly and severally responsible for the intended works.

l) The Joint Venture (JV) Agreement shall be duly registered by First class Munsiff.

m) Any other relevant details.

181
 20.6.1.2. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

A. GENERAL

1. Definitions

1.1 Terms which are defined in the Contract Data are not also defined in the
Conditions of Contract but keep their defined meanings. Capital initials are used to
identify defined terms. The Adjudicator (synonymous with Dispute Review Expert) is the
person appointed jointly by the employer and the Contractor to resolve disputes in the
first instance, as provided for in Clauses 24 and 25. The name of the adjudicator is
defined in the contract Data.
Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the Bid.
The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as Certified by the Engineer in
accordance with the clause 49.
The Contract is the contract between the Employer and the Contractor to execute, complete
and maintain the Works. It consists of the documents listed in Clause 2.3 below.
The Contract Data defines the documents and other information which comprise the Contract.
The Contractor is a person or corporation body whose Bid to carry out the works has been
accepted by the Employer.
The Contractor‘s Bid is the completed Bidding document submitted by the contractor to the
Employer and includes Technical & Financial -Bids.
The Contract Price is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter as adjusted
in accordance with the provision of the Contract.
Days are calendar days; months are calendar months. A Defect is any part of the works not
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

completed in accordance with the Contract.

The Defects Liability Period is the period named in the Contract Data and the Completion
Date.
The Employer is the party who will employ the Contractor to carry out the Works. The
Engineer is the person named in the Contract Data (or any other competent person
appointed and notified to the contractor to act in replacement of the Engineer) who is
responsible for supervising the Contractor, administering the Contract, certifying payments
due to the Contractor, issuing and valuing Variations to the Contract, awarding extension of
time, and valuing the Compensation events.
Equipment is the Contractor‘s machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site to
construction the works.
The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price Listed in the Employer‘s Letter of
Acceptance. The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is intended that the
Contractor shall complete the works. The Intended Completion Date is specified in the
Contract Data. The Intended Completion Date may be revised only by the engineer by
issuing an extension of time. Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the
contractor for incorporation in the Works.
Plant is any integral part of the Works, which is to have a mechanical, electrical, electronic,
or chemical or biological function.
The Site is the area defined as such in the contract Data.
Site Investigation Reports are those which were included in the Bidding documents and are
factual interpretative reports about the surface and sub-surface conditions at the site.
Specification means the Specification of the works included in the contract and any
modification or addition made or approved by the Engineer.
The Start Date is given in the Contract Data. It is the data when the Contractor shall
182
commence execution of the works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the Site
possession dates. A subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a contract with the
contractor to carry out part of the work in the contract, which includes works on the site.
Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the
Contractor which are needed for construction or installation of the works.
The Works are what the Contract requires the contractor to construct, install, and turnover
to the Employer, as defined in the contract Data.

183
2. Interpretation

In interpreting these conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male

also means female or neuter, and the other way around. Heading have no significance.
Words have their normal meaning under the language of the Contract unless specifically
defined. The Engineer will provide instructions clarifying queries about the Conditions of
contract.
2.1. If sectional completion is specified in the contract Data, references in the conditions of
contract to the works, the completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date apply to any
Section of the works (other than references to the completion date and Intended Completion date
for the whole of the works).
2.2. The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the following Order of priority:

(a) Agreement

CHAPTER - 20
(b) Letter of Acceptance, notice to proceed with the works

(c) Contractor‘s Bid

(d) Contract Data

(e) Conditions of Contract including Special Conditions of Contract

(f) Specifications

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(g) Drawings

(h) Bill of quantities and

(i) Any other document listed in the Contract Data as forming part of the Contract.

3. Language and Law

3.1 The language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract are stated in the contract
Data.
4. Engineer‘s Decisions

4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Engineer will decide contractual matters
between the Employer and the Contractor in the role representing the Employer.

5. Delegation

5.1 The engineer may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to other people except to
the Dispute Review Expert after notifying the Contractor and may cancel any delegation
after notifying the Contractor.

6. Communications

6.1 Communications between parties, which are referred to in the conditions, are effective only
when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered (in terms of Indian
Contract Act

184
 7. Other Contractors

The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors, public authorities,
utilities, and the Employer between the dates given in the Schedule of other Contractors. The
Contractor shall as referred to in the Contract Date, also provide facilities, and services for them
as described in the Schedule. The employer may modify the schedule of other contractors and
shall notify the contractor of any such modification.

8 Personnel

8.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key Personnel
as referred to in the Contract Data to carry out the function stated in the Schedule or other
personnel approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will approve any proposed replacement of
key personnel only if their qualifications, abilities, and relevant experiences are substantially
equal to or better than those of the personnel listed in the Schedule.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

8.2 If the Engineer asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the
Contractor‘s staff or his work force stating the reasons the contractor shall ensure that the
person leaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the working the
Contract.

9. Employer‘s and Contractor‘s Risks

9.1 The Employer carries the risks which this Contract states are Employer‘s risks, and the
Contractor carries the risks which this contract states are Contractor‘s risks.

10. Employer‘s Risks

10.1 The Employer is responsible for the excepted risks which are (a) in so far as they directly
affect the execution of the works in the Employer‘s country, the risks of war, hostilities,
invasion, act of foreign enemies, rebellion, revolution, insurrection or military or usurped
power, civil war, riot commotion or disorder (unless restricted to the Contractor‘s employee‘s),
and contamination from any nuclear fuel or nuclear waste or radioactive toxic explosive, or(b)
a cause due solely to the design of the works, other than the Contractor‘s design.

11. Contractor‘s Risks

11.1 All risks of loss of or damage to physical property and of personal injury and death which
arise during and in consequence of the performance of the contract other than the excepted risks
are the responsibility of the Contractor.

12. Insurance:

12.1. The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor,
insurance cover from the start date to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and
deductibles stated in the contract Data for the following events which are due to the
Contractor‘s risks:
a) loss of or damage to the works, Plant and Materials;
b) loss of or damage to Equipment; loss of or damage of property (except the works, Plant,
Materials and Equipment) in connection with the Contract; and personal injury or death.

185
 12.2Policy and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor to the engineer for
the Engineer‘s approval before the Start Date. All such insurance shall provide for
compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of currencies required to rectify the
loss or damage incurred.
12.3. If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the
Employer may affect the insurance which the contractor should have provided and recover the
premiums the Employer has paid from payments otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no
payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be a debt due.
12.4. Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Engineer.
12.5. Both parties shall comply with any conditions of the insurance policies.

13. Site Investigation Reports

13.1 The Contractor, in preparing the Bid, shall rely on any site Investigation Reports referred

CHAPTER - 20
to in the Contract Data, supplemented by any information available to the Bidder.

14. Queries about the Contract Data

14.1 The Engineer will clarify queries on the Contract Data.

15. Contractor to Construct the Works

15.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the works in accordance with the Specifications
and Drawings.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

16. The Works to be completed by the Intended Completion Date

16.1 The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall
carryout the Works in accordance with the programme submitted by the Contractor, as updated
with the approval of the Engineer, and complete them by the Intended Completion Date.

17. Approval by the Engineer

17.1 The Contractor shall submit specifications and Drawings showing the proposed
Temporary Works to the Engineer, who is to approve them if they comply with the
Specifications and Drawings.

17.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works.

17.3 The Engineer‘s approval shall not alter the Contractor‘s responsibility for design of the
temporary Works.

17.4 The contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the Temporary Works
where required.
17.5 All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary works, are
subject to prior approval by the Engineer before their use

18. Safety

18.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.
18.2 Safety helmets to be used by engineers on site as well as work men/construction
personnel‘s. It has to be made mandatory for the contractor in contract to provide the
necessary safety helmets to both skilled/unskilled work force.
The contractor should also provide safe drinking water and toilet facilities to the
labours etc besides covered enclosures for having lunch/refreshments.

186
 19. Discoveries

19.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly discovered on

the site is the property of the Employer. The contractor is to notify the Engineer of such
discoveries and carry out the Engineer‘s instructions for dealing with them.

20. Possession of the Site

20.1 The Employer shall provide adequate Site to the Contractor to start and carry out his
construction activity.

21. Access to the Site

21.1 The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and any person authorized by the Engineer
access to the Site, to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out
or is intended to be carried out and to any place where materials or plant are being manufactured
/ fabricated / assembled for the works.

22. Instructions
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

22.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Engineer, which comply with the
applicable where the site is located.

22.2 The Contractor shall permit the Employer to inspect the Contractor‘s accounts and
records relating to the performance of the Contractor and to have them audited by auditors
appointed by the Employer, if so required by the Employer.

23. DISPUTES:

23.1 : If the contractor believes that the decision taken by the Engineer was either outside the
authority give to the Engineer by the contract or that the decision was wrongly taken, the
decision shall be referred to the Dispute Review Expert within 14 days of the notification of
Engineer‘s decision.

24. Arbitration:

24.1 : The Arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the Arbitration procedure stated in
the Special Conditions of the Contract.

25. Replacement of Dispute Review Expert:

25.1 : Should the Dispute Review Expert resign or die, or should the Employer and the
Contractor agree that the Dispute Review Expert is not fulfilling his functions in accordance
with the provisions of the contract; a new Dispute Review Expert will be jointly appointed by
the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement between the Employer and the
Contractor, within 30 days, the Dispute Review Expert shall be designated by the appointing
authority designated in the Contract Data at the request of either party, within 14 days of receipt
of such request.

187
 B- TIME CONTROL

26. Programme

26.1 Within the time stated in the Contract Data the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for approval a Program showing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all
the activities in the works along with monthly cash flow forecast.

26.2 An update of the Programme shall be a program showing the actual progress achieved on
each activity and the effect of the progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the
progress achieved on the timing of the remaining work including any changes to the sequence of
the activities.

26.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, an updated Program at
intervals no longer than the period stated in the Contract Data. If the Contractor does not submit

CHAPTER - 20
an updated Programme within this period, the Engineer may withhold the amount stated in the
Contract Data from the next payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the
next payment after the date on which the overdue Programme has been submitted.

26.4 The Engineer‘s approval of the Programme shall not alter the Contractor‘s obligations.
The Contractor may revise the Programme and submit it to the Engineer again at anytime. A
revised Programme is to show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events.

27.0 Extension of the Intended Completion Date

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

27.1 The Engineer shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation Event occurs
or a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion to be achieved by the
Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining work
and which would cause the Contractor to incur additional cost.

27.2 The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion
Date within 35 days of the Contractor asking the Engineer for a decision upon the effect of a
Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor
has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay,
the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new Intended Completion Date.

27.3 The Engineer shall within 14 days of receiving full justification from the contractor for
extension of Intended completion date refer to the employer his decision. The employer shall in
not more than 21 days communicate to the Engineer the acceptance or otherwise of the
engineer‘s decision.

28. Delays Ordered by the Engineer

28.1 The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any activity
within the Works.

29 Management Meetings
29.1 Either the Engineer or the Contractor may require the other to attend a management
meeting. The business of a management meeting shall be to review the plans for remaining
work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure.

29.2 The Engineer shall record the business of management meetings and is to provide copies
of this record to those attending the meeting and to the Employer. The responsibility of the
parties for actions to be taken is to be decided by the Engineer either at the management
meeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.

188
 30. Early Warning

30.1 The Contractor is to warn the Engineer at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future
events or circumstances that may adversely affect the quality of the work, increases the Contract
Price or delay the execution of works. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide an
estimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and
Completion Date. The estimate is to be Provide by the Contractor as soon as reasonably
possible.
30.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in making and considering proposal for
how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved
in the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction of the Engineer.

C. QUALITY CONTROL
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

31. Quality Assurance Programme (For Works Valuing Rs.10.00 crores and Above)

The Contractor shall prepare and submit a quality control plan/mechanism (Quality Assurance
Plan‖ or ―QAP‖) and make all necessary arrangements to ensure its compliance. Having regard
to the requirement of the project, Quality assurance plan shall be devised by taking into
consideration the quality assurance manual/ guide which is available on the web site of
PW(R&B) Department of Chief Engineer(s) Jammu/ Kashmir; this manual or guide can also be
availed from the office of Chief Engineer Jammu/ Kashmir; District Superintending Engineers
and Executive Engineers.
While submitting the bid, the bidder along with other documents shall submit Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP)as per the clause 4.1 and 4.3(p)of ITB. However a final QAP shall be
framed by the successful bidder after the allotment of work. The Engineer –in charge shall
convey its comments to the contractor within a period of 21 days of receipt of the QAP after the
allotment of work, stating the modifications, and the contractor shall incorporate those in the
QAP to the extent required for conforming with the provisions of Quality Assurance
manual/guide, which shall be approved by the competent authority and treated as inseparable
part of agreement to be signed between the contractor and the department.

32. Tests

32.1 If the Engineer-in-Charge instructs the contractor to carry out a test not specified in the
specification to check whether any work has a defect and the test Confirms the defect, then the
contractor shall have to pay for the tests and the defective work shall have to be dismantled and
reconstructed in accordance to the IRC/MOST/BIS/PWD/NBO Specifications as applicable.
The Engineer in-charge of site shall ensure / will certify that the lab has been established & tests
performed.
The contractor will furnish documentary proof of procurement of materials like cement, steel and
other equipment and goods to the engineer in-charge. This will include original vouchers for all
quantities in lieu of purchase of materials/ equipments etc from the original manufacturer or
authorized dealer/distributor to the satisfaction of engineer in-charge for ascertaining genuineness of
materials. Attested copy of such material shall be submitted along with the bills.
No extra payment on account of quality control measures shall be paid to the contractor

33. Identifying Defects

33.1 The Engineer shall check the Contractor‘s work and notify the Contractor of any Defects that
are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractor‘s responsibilities. The Engineer may
instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and to uncover and test any work at site.

189
 34. Correction of Defects

34.1 The Engineer shall give notice to the Contractor of any Defects before the end of the Defects
Liability Period, which begins at Completion and is defined in the Contract Data. The Defects
Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain to be corrected.

34.2 Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified Defect within
the length of time specified by the Engineer‘s notice.

35. Uncorrected Defects

35.1 If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time specified in the Engineer‘s

CHAPTER - 20
notice, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the Defect corrected, and the Contractor will
pay this amount.

D. COST CONTROL
36. Bill of Quantities

36.1 The Bill of Quantities shall contain items for the Construction, Installation, testing, and
commissioning work to be done by the Contractor.

36.2 The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor is paid for

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the quantity of the work done at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for each item.

36.3. Cash Flow forecasts

36.4 When the Programme is updated, the contractor is to provide the Engineer with an updated
cash flow forecast.

37. Payment Certificate

37.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer monthly statements of the estimated value of
the work completed less the cumulative amount certifiedpreviously.

37.2 The Engineer shall check the Contractor‘s monthly statement within 14 days and certify
the amount to be paid to the Contractor after taking into account any credit or debit the month in
question in respect of materials for the works in the relevantamounts.

37.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by theEngineer.

37.4 The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the
Bill of quantities completed.
37.5 The value of work executed shall include the valuation of variations and Compensation
Events.

37.6 The Engineer may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the
proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information.

38. Payments
38.1 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments, retention, other
recoveries in terms of the contract and taxes, at source, as applicable under the law.

190
 38.2 Items of the works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid for
bythe Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in theContract.

39. Tax

The rates quoted by the Contractor shall be deemed to be inclusive of all taxes including
GST (SGST AND CGST) that the Contractor will have to pay for the performance of this
Contract up to the completion. The Employer will perform such duties in regard to the
deduction of such taxes at source as per applicable law from time totime.

40. Currencies
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

All Payments shall be made in Indian Rupees.

41. Price Adjustment

The rates quoted by the contract shall be deemed to include price escalation upto
completion of project.

42. Retention

The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the proportion stated in the
Contract Data until Completion of the whole of the Works.

42.1 On Completion of the whole of the Works half the total amount retained is repaid to the
Contractor and half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Engineer has certified
that all Defects notified by the Engineer to the Contractor before the end of this period have been
corrected.

42.2 On completion of the whole works the contractor may substitute retention money with an
―on demand‖ Bank guarantee.

43. Liquidated Damages:

43.1. In the event of failure on part of the Contractor to achieve timely completion of the project
including any extension of time granted under clause 27,he shall ,without prejudice to any other
right or remedy available under the law to the Employer on account of such breach, pay as
agreed Liquidated Damages to the Employer and not by way of penalty in a sum calculated at
the rate per week or part thereof as stated in the Contract Data .For the period that the
completion date is later then the intended completion date ,Liquidated Damages at the same rate
shall be withheld if the Contractor fails to achieve the Mile Stones prescribed in the Contract
Data .However, in case the Contractor achieves the next mile stone ,the amount of the
Liquidated Damages already withheld shall be restored to the Contractor by adjustment in the
payment certificate. Both the parties expressly agree that the total amount of Liquidated
Damages shall not exceed 10% of initial contract price and that the Liquidated Damages
payable by the Contractor are mutually agreed genuine pre-estimated loss and without any proof
of actual damage likely to be suffered and incurred by the Employer, and the Employer is
entitled to receive the same and are not by way of penalty.
The Employer may, without prejudice to any other method of recovery, deduct the amount of
such damages from any sum due, or to become due to the Contractor or from performance
security or any other dues from Government or Semi-Government body within the State.

191
 The payment or deduction of such damages shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligations to
complete the works, or from any other of his duties, obligations or responsibilities under the contract.
The Contractor shall use and continue to use his best endeavors to avoid or reduce further delay to the
works, or any other relevant stages.

43.2. If the intended completion date is extended after Liquidated Damages have been paid, the
Engineer shall correct any such payment of Liquidated Damages by the Contractor by adjusting
the next payment certificate.

43.3: It is agreed by the contractor that the decision of the Employer as to the Liquidated Damages
payable by the Contractor under this clause shall be final and binding,

CHAPTER - 20
44. BONUS – The bidder who has successfully completed three CRF works within the
Prescribed time over the last five years shall be rewarded with the multiplying factor of 2.75 instead
of 2.5 for ascertaining the available bid capacity of the bidder during the technical evaluation of his
bid. The bidder to this effect shall furnish the completion certificates of works issued by an officer
not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent.

45. Secured Advance

Security advance shall be paid for the quantity as per allotment of work or requirment at site which

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

ever is lesser after proper testing of material.
Secure advance should be avioded for perishable item. However in special cases may be provided only
against insurance cover.

46. Securities

46.1 The Performance Security (including additional Performance security for unbalanced bids)
shall be provided to the Employer no later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall
be issued in an amount and form and by a bank or surety acceptable to the Employer, and denominated
in Indian Rupees. The performance Security shall be valid until a date 28 days from the date of expiry
of Defects Liability Period and the additional security for unbalanced bids shall be valid until a date 28
days from the date of issue of the certificate of completion.

47. Cost of Repairs

47.1 Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the works between the start date
and the end of the Defects Correction period shall be remedied by the contractor at the contractor‘s
cost, if the loss or damage arises from the contractor‘s acts or omissions.

E. FINISHING THE CONTRACT

48 Completion

The Contractor shall request the Engineer to issue a CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION of the
works and the Engineer will do so upon deciding that the Work is completed.

192
 49.0 Taking Over
49.1 The Employer shall take over the Site and the works within seven days of the Engineer
issuing a certificate of Completion.

50.0 Final Account

50.1 The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a detailed account of the total amount that the
Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period.
The Engineer shall issue a Defect Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that is due
to the Contractor within 56 days of receiving the Contractor‘s accounts if it is correct and
complete. If it is not, the Engineer shall issue within 56 a schedule that states the scope of the
corrections or additions that are necessary. If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory after it has
been resubmitted, the Engineer shall decide on the amount payable to the Contactor and issue a
payment certificate, within 56 days of receiving the Contractor‘s revised account.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

51. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

51.1 If ―as built‖ Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required, the
Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated in the Contract Data.

51.2 If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates stated in the
Contract Data, or they do not receive the Engineer‘s approval, the Engineer‘s approval, the
Engineer shall withhold the amount stated in the Contract Data from payment due to the
Contractor.

52. Termination

52.1 The Employer may terminate the contract if the contractor causes a fundamental breach of
the Contract.

52.2 Fundamental breaches of Contract include, but shall not be limited to the following:

(a) The Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current
programme and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Engineer;

(b) The contractor is declared bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for approved
reconstruction or amalgamation;

c) If the contractor fails to deploy machinery and equipment or personnel as specified in the
Contract Data or Appendix to ITB at the appropriate time.

(d) The Engineer gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is fundamental breach
of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined
by the Engineer;

(e) The Contractor does not maintain a security, which is required;

(f) The Contractor has delayed the completion of works by the number of days for which the
maximum amount of liquidated damages becomes payable as defined in the Contract data; and

193
 (g) If the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent
practices in competing for or in the executing the Contract.

For the purpose of this paragraph: ―corrupt practice‖ means the offering, giving, receiving or
soliciting of anything of value to influence the action of a public official in the procurement
process or in contract execution. ―Fraudulent practice‖ means a misrepresentation of facts in
order to influence a procurement process or the execution of a contract to the detriment of the
Borrower, and includes collusive practice amount Bidders (prior to or after bid submission)
designed to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to deprive the Borrower of
the benefits of free and open competition‖.

52.3 When the Employer gives notice of a breach of contract to the contractor fora cause other

CHAPTER - 20
than those listed under Sub Clause 53 above, the Engineer shall decide whether the breach is
fundamental or not.

52.4 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract for convenience.

52.5 If the Contract is terminated the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe
and secure and leave the site without shifting any equipment as soon as reasonably possible.

53.0 Payment upon Termination

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

53.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the
Contractor, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done less Liquidated
damages, advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the certificate, less other
recoveries due in terms of the contract, less taxes due to be deducted at source as per applicable
law and less the percentage to apply to the work not completed as indicated in the Contract Data. .
If the amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor the difference shall
be adept payable to the Employer

53.2 If the Contract is terminated at the Employer‘s convenience or because of a fundamental

breach of Contract by the Employer, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the
work done, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the Contractor‘s
personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor‘s costs of protecting and securing
the Works less other recoveries due in terms of the contract and less taxes due to be deducted at
sources as per applicable law.

54.0 Property

54.1 All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works and Works are deemed to be
the property of the Employer, if the Contract is terminated because of a Contractor‘s defaulted.

55.0 Release from Performance

55.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other event entirely outside
the control of either the Employer or the Contractor the Engineer shall certify that the Contract
has been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as quickly as possible
after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all work carried out before receiving it and for
any work carried

194
 out afterwards to which commitment was made.

55.2 Death or permanent invalidity of the contractor: the contractor shall indicate nominee for
the contract at the time of signing of the agreement. If the contractor dies during currency of the
contractor or becomes permanently incapacitated, and his/her nominee are not willing to
complete the contract, the contract shall be closed without levying anydamages/compensation.

However, if the nominee expresses his/her intention to complete, the balance work and
the competent authority is satisfied about the competence of nominee, then the competent
authority shall enter into a fresh agreement for the remaining work strictly on the same terms &
conditions under which the contract was initially awarded.

20.6.1.4 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

1. LABOUR

The contractor shall, unless otherwise provided in the contract, make his own arrangements for
the engagement of all staff and labour, local or other, and for their payment, housing, feeding
and transport.

The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, deliver to the Engineer a return in detail, in
such form and at such intervals as the Engineer may prescribe, showing the staff and the
numbers of the several classes of labour from time to time employed by the Contractor on the
site and such there information as the Engineer may require.

2. COMPLIANCE WITH LABOUR REGULATIONS

During continuance of the contract, the contractor and his sub-contractors shall abide at all
times by all existing labour enactments and rules made there under, regulation, notifications and
bye laws of the State or Central Government of local authority and any other labour
law(including rules), regulations, bye laws that may be passed or notification that may be issued
under any labour law in future either by the State or Central Government or the local authority.
Salient features of some of the major labour laws that are applicable to construction industry are
given below. The Contractor shall keep the employer indemnified in case any action is taken
against the Employer by the competent authority on account of contravention of any of the
provisions of any Act or rules made there under, regulations or notifications including
amendments. If the Employer is caused to pay or reimburse, such amounts as may be necessary
to cause or observe, or for non-observance of the provisions stipulated in the
notifications/byelaws/Acts/Rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on the part of the
contractor, the engineer/employer shall have the right to deduct any money due to the contractor
including his amount of performance security. The employer/engineer shall also have right to
recover from the contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the
loss or damage suffered by the employer. The employer of the contractor and the Sub-
Contractor in no case shall be treated as the employees of the employer at any point of time.

SALIENT FEATURES OF SOME MAJOR LABOUR LAWS APPLICABLE TO

ESTABLISHMENTS ENGAGED IN BUILDING AND OTHER
CONSTRUCTIONWORK.

a) Workmen Compensation Act 1923: The Act provides for compensation in case of
injury

195
by accident arising out of and during the course of employment.

b) Payment of Gratuity Act 1972: Gratuity is payable to an employee under the Act on
satisfaction of certain conditions on separation if an employee has completed 5 years‘ service or more
or on death the rate of 15 days wages for every completed year of service. The Act is applicable to all
establishments employing 10 or more employees.

c) Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952: The Act Provides for monthly
contributions by the employer plus workers @ 10% or 8.33%. The benefits payable under the Act are:
(i) Pension or family pension on retirement or death, as the case may be(ii) Deposit linked insurance
on the death in harness of the worker. (iii) Payment of P.F. accumulation on retirement/death etc.

d) Maternity Benefit Act 1951: The Act provides for leave and some other benefits to women

CHAPTER - 20
employees in case of confinement or miscarriage etc.

e) Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act 1970: The Act provides for certain welfare
measures to be provided by the Contractor to contract labour and in case the contractor fails to
provide, the same are required to be provided, by the principal employer by law. The principal
employer is required to take certificate of registration and the contractor is required to take license
from the designated officer. The Act is applicable to the establishments or contractor of principal
employer if they employ 20 or more contractlabour.

f) Minimum Wages Act 1948: The employer is supposed to pay not less than the minimum

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

wages fixed by appropriate government as per provisions of the Act if the employment is a scheduled
employment. Construction of buildings, roads, and runways are scheduled employments.

g) Payment of Wages Act 1936: It lays down as to by what date the wages are to be paid, when
it will be paid and what deductions can be made from the wages of the workers.

h) Equal Remuneration Act 1979: The Act provides for payment of equal wages for work of
equal nature to Male and Female workers and for not making discrimination against Female employees
in the matters of transfers, training and promotionsetc.

i) Payment of Bonus Act 1965: The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 20 or
more employees. The Act provides for payments of annual bonus subject to minimum of 8.33% of
wages and maximum of 20% of wages to employees drawing Rs.3500/- per month or less. The bonus
to be paid to employees getting Rs. 2500/- per month or above upto 3500/- per month shall be worked
out by taking wages as Rs.2500/- per month only. The Act does not apply to certain establishments.
The newly setup establishments are exempted for five years in certain circumstances. Some of the
State Governments have reduced the employment size from 20 to 10 for the purpose of applicability of
this Act.

j) Industrial Disputes Act 1947: The Act lays down the machinery and procedure for
resolution of Industrial disputes, in what situations a strike or lock-out become illegal and what are the
requirements for laying off or retrenching the employees or closing down the establishment

k) Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946: It is applicable to all

establishments employing 100 or more workmen (employment size reduced by some of the State and

196
 Central Government to 50). The Act provides for laying down rules governing conditions of
employment by the employer on matters provided in the Act and get the same certified by the
designated Authority.

l) Trade Unions Act 1926: The Act lays down the procedure for registration of trade unions of
workmen and employers. The Trade Unions registered under the Act have been given certain
immunities from civil and criminalliabilities.

m) Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act 1986: The Act prohibits employment of
children below 14 years of age in certain occupations and processes and provides for regulation of
employment of children in all other occupations and processes. Employment of Child Labour is
prohibited in Building and ConstructionIndustry.

n) Inter-State Migrant workmen‘s (Regulation of Employment & Conditions of Service) Act

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

1979: The Act is applicable to an establishment, which employs 5 or more inter-state

migrant workmen through an intermediary (who has recruited workmen in one state for
employment in the establishment situated in another state). The Inter-State migrant workmen, in
an establishment to which this Act becomes applicable, are required to be provided certain
facilities such as housing, medical aid, travelling expenses from home upto the establishment and
back, etc.

o) The Building and Other Construction workers (Regulation of Employment and

Conditions of Service) Act 1996 and the Cess Act of 1996: All the establishments who carry
on any building or other construction work and employs 10 or more workers are covered under
this Act. All such establishments are required to pay cess at the rate not exceeding 2% of the cost
of construction as may be modified by the Government. The employer of the establishment is
required to provide safety measures at the Building or construction work and other welfare
measures, such as Canteens, First-Aid facilities, Ambulance, Housing accommodation for
workers near the work place etc. The Employer to whom the Act applies has to obtain a
registration certificate from the Registering Officer appointed by the Government.

p) Factories Act 1948: The Act lays down the procedure for approval at plans before setting up a
factory, health and safety provisions, welfare provisions, working hours, annual earned leave and
rendering information regarding accidents or dangerous occurrences to designated authorities. It is
applicable to premises employing 10 persons or more with aid of power or 20 or more persons
without the aid of power engaged in manufacturingprocess.

ARBITRATION (GCC CLAUSE 24 and 25)

The procedure for Arbitration will be as follows:

Any Dispute or difference arising between the department and contractor shall be dealt in
accordance with J&K Arbitration Act in vogue.

(a) In case of Dispute or difference arising between the Employer and a domestic contractor relating
to any matter arising out of or connected with the agreement ,such disputes or difference shall be
settled in accordance with the Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996.The parties shall make efforts
to agree on a sole Arbitrator and only if such an attempt does not succeed then the Arbitral
Tribunal

197
 consisting of 3 Arbitrators one each to be appointed by the Employer and the contractor and the
third Arbitrator to be chosen by the two Arbitrators so appointed by the parties to act as presiding
Arbitrator, shall be considered. ,In case of failure of the two Arbitrators appointed by the parties
to reach upon a consensus within a period of 30 days from the appointment of the Arbitrator
appointed subsequently, the Presiding Arbitrator shall be appointed by the Council ,Indian Road
Congress.

b) The Arbitral Tribunal shall consist of three Arbitrators one each to be appointed by the Employer
and the Contractor. The third Arbitrator shall be chosen by the two Arbitrators so appointed by
the parties, and shall act as Presiding Arbitrator. In case of failure of the two Arbitrators
appointed by the parties to reach upon a consensus within a period of 30 days from the
appointment of the Arbitrator appointed subsequently, the Presiding Arbitrator shall be appointed
by the Council, Indian Road Congress.

CHAPTER - 20
c) If one of the parties fails to appoint the Arbitrator in pursuance of sub-clause (a) and (b) above
within 30 days after receipt of notice of appointment of its Arbitrator by the other party, then the
Council of Indian Road Congress shall appoint the Arbitrator. A certified copy of the order of the
Council of Indian Road Congress making such appointment shall be furnished to each of the
parties.

d) Arbitration proceedings shall be held at Srinagar/Jammu , India and the language of the
arbitration proceeding and that of all documents and communications between the parties shall be
English.

e) The decision of the majority of Arbitrators shall be final and binding upon both the parties .The
cost and expenses of Arbitration proceedings will be paid as determined by the Arbitral Tribunal.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

However, the expenses incurred by each party in connection with preparation, presentation etc. of
its proceedings as also the fee and expenses paid to the Arbitrator appointed by such party or on
its behalf shall be borne by each party itself.

f) Performance under the contract shall continue during the arbitration proceedings and payments
due to the contractor by the owners shall not be withheld, unless they are the subject matter of the
arbitration proceedings.

20.6.1.5. CONTRACT DATA

Items marked ―N/A‖ do not apply in this contract.

1. The Employer is [Cl.1.1]

Name: Chief Engineer, PW(R&B) Department _

Address: Engineering Complex .

Name of authorized representative Executive Engineer R&B Division

2. The Engineer is Executive Engineer, R&B Division

Name of authorized Representative:

3. The Dispute Review as per Arbitration (GCC) Clause 25.

4. The defects liability period is 03Years from the actual date of completion [Cl.1.1 & 35]

198
 5. The start date shall be seven days from the date of issue of the notice to proceed
[Cl.1.1of this chapter] with the work.

6. The intended completion

date for the whole of the works is -days Calendar Months
after [Cl.1.1,16&27 of G.C.C] start of work with the following milestones.

Milestone dates: [Cl.2.2 & 49.1 of this chapter]

Milestone to be achieved during the contract period.
1/8th of the value of entire contract upto 1/4th of the period allowed for completion of construction.
3/8th of the value of entire contract upto ½ of the period allowed for completion of construction.
3/4th of the value of entire contract upto 3/4th of the period allowed for completion of contraction.
Rest of the work within the remaining time period.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

7. The site is located in District . [C 1.1.1]

B. Amount of liquidated damages for delay in completion of work ------ For whole of work 1% of the
initial contract price, rounded off to the nearest thousand, per week.

C. Maximum limit of liquidated damages for delay in completion - 10% of the initial contract price of
work rounded off to thenearest

8. The name and identification number of the contract is:

[Cl.1.1]

9. The works consist of -------------------------------------- The work shall, inter-alia, include the
following as specified or as directed. [Cl.1.1]

(A) Road works

Site clearance; setting out and layout; widening of existing carriageway and strengthening
including camber correction; construction of new road/ parallel service road ; bituminous
pavement remodeling /construction of junctions, intersections, bus bays, lay byes; supplying
and placing of drainage channels, flumes, guards post and guard other related items;
construction/ extension of cross drainage works bridges, approaches and other related stones;
road markings, road signs and kilometre /hector meter stones; protective works for roads/
bridges; all aspects of quality assurance of various components of the works; rectification of the
defects in the completed works during the Defects liability period; submission of ―As built‖
drawings and any other related documents; and other item of work as may be required to be
carriage out for completing the works in accordance with the drawings and provisions of the
ensure safety.

(B) Bridge works

Site clearance; setting out, provision of foundations, piers, abutments and bearings; pre-stressed
/reinforced cement concrete superstructure; wearing coat, hand railings expansion joints
approach slabs, drainage spouts/ down take pipes arrangements for fixing light posts, water
mains, utilities etc; provision of suitably designed protective works; providing wing/ return
walls; provision of road markings, road signs etc; all aspects of quality assurance; clearing the
site and handing over the works on completion; rectification of the defects during the Defects
Liability Period and submission of ―As-

199
 built‖ drawings and other related documents; and other items of work as may be required to be
carried out for completing the works in accordance with the drawings and the provisions of the
contract and to Insure safety.

(C)Building Works

To be incorporated

D) Other Items

Any other items as required fulfilling all contractual obligations as per the [Cl.1.1] of ITB Bid
documents.
The following documents also from part of the contract: [Cl.2.3(i) of GCC]

CHAPTER - 20
Specification of Roads and Bridges (4th edition)
1. The law which applies to the contract is law of Union of India [Cl.3.1 of GCC]
2. The language of the contract documents is English. [Cl.3.1 of GCC]
3. The Schedule of other contractors [Cl7 of GCC]
4. The schedule of key personnel [Cl.4.6(B) of Section-I]
5. The minimum insurance cover for physical property, injury and death is Rs. 5 lakhs per
occurrence with the number of occurrences limited to four. After each occurrence, contractor
will pay additional premium necessary to make insurance valid for four Occurrences always.
[Cl..12 of GCC]
6. Site investigation report [Cl..13 of GCC]

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

7. The Site Possession Dates shall be same as date of letter toproceed With the work
[Cl.19 of GCC]
8. Fees and types of reimbursable expenses to be paid to the Dispute Review Expert (As per
clause 23 of GCC)
9. Appointing Authority for the Dispute Review Expert – To be nominated in the Bidding
document) (As per clause 23of GCC)

10. The period for submission of the programme for approval of Engineer shall be [Cl.26 of GCC]
21 days from the issue of Letter of Acceptance.

11. The period between Programme updates shall be 30 days. [Cl.26 of GCC]

12 The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated programme shall be

Rs. lacs).[Cl.26 of GCC]

13. The currency of the contract is Indian Rupees. [Cl..40 of GCC]

14. The formula (e) for adjustment of price are : (Not Applicable)
15. The proportion of payments retained (retention money) shall be 10%. from each bill subject to a
maximum of 5% of final contract price.
16. Bonus for early completion of Shall be As per clause 45 OF GCC whole of the works

200
 17. The Securities shall be for the following minimum amounts equivalent as a percentage of the
Contract Price: Performance Security for 5% of contract price plus additional security on account of
un-balanced bid in terms of ITB Clause 26.4

18 The standard form of Performance Security acceptable to the Employer shall be CDR/FDR or an
unconditional Bank Guarantee of the type as presented in Section 8 of the Bidding Documents.

19. The Schedule of Operating and Maintenance Manuals Not Applicable.

20 The date by which ―as-built‖ drawings (in scale as directed) in 2 sets are required is Within 28
days of issue of certificate of completion of whole or section of the work, as the case may be.

21 The amount to be withheld for failing to supply ―as built‖ drawings by the datarequired
Rs.2% of contract value.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

22. The following event shall constitute fundamental breach of contract. ―The Contractor has
Contravened Clause 9 of GCC.‖ [Cl.53 of GCC]

24. The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed representing the Employer‘s
additional cost for completing the Works shall be 20 percent [.Cl.54 of GCC]

20.6.1.6 TECHINCAL SPECIFICATION

Specification for Road & Bridge works, MORT&H (4th Revision) with latest amendments
thereto and relevant
IRC specifications shall be followed in execution of the project.

20.6.1.7 BILL OF QUANTITIES (BOQ)

201
 Annexure-I

20.6.1.8 SECURITIES AND OTHER FORMS

In Original

BID SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE)

WHEREAS [Name of Bidder] (hereinafter called ―the

Bidder‖) has submitted his bid dated [Date] for the Construction
of (Name of Contract hereinafter called ―the Bid‖).KNOW ALL
PEOPLE by these presents that We [Name of Bank] of

CHAPTER - 20
[Name of Country]having our registered
office at (hereinafter called ―the Bank‖)are bound unto the
Name of Employer](hereinafter called ―the
Employer‖)in the sum of * for which
payment well and truly to be made to the said Employer the Bank binds himself, his successors and
assigns by these presents.
SEALED with the Common Seal of the said bank this day of 20 . THE
CONDITIONS of this obligation are:
1) If after Bid opening the bidder withdraws his Bid during the period of bid validity specified in
the Form of Bid.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

or
2) If the Bidder having been notified of the acceptance of his Bid by the Employer during the
period of Bid validity:
a) Fails or refuses to execute the Form of Agreement in accordance with the Instructions to
Bidders, if required ;
or
b) Fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with the Instruction to
Bidders,
or
c) Does not accept the correction of the Bid price pursuant to Clause 27.We undertake to pay to
the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written demand, without the Employer
having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the Employer will note that the amount
claimed by him is due to him owing to the occurrence of one or both of the two conditions, specifying
the occurred condition or conditions.
This Guarantee will remain in force up to and including the date............................. **days after the end
of the validity period of the bid stated in the Instructions to Bidders or as it may be extended by the
Employer, notice of which extension(s) to the Bank is hereby waived. Any demand in respect of this
Guarantee should reach the Bank not later than the above date.
DATE SIGNATURE
WITNESS SEAL
[Signature, Name, and Address]
* The Bidder should insert the amount of the guarantee in words and figures denominated
in Indian Rupees. This figure should be the same as shown in Clause 16.1 of the Instructions to
Bidders.
* 45 days after the end of the validity period of the Bid. Date should be inserted by the Employer
before the bidding documents are issued

202
 .
Annexure-II
(BID Validity)

UNDERTAKING
1. The undersigned do hereby undertake that our firm M/s
agree to abide by this bid
for a period days for the date fixed for receiving the
same and it shall be binding on us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of
that period.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

(Signed by an Authorized Officer of the Firm)

Title of Officer

Time of firm

Date

Annexure-III

Credit facility

SAMPLE FORMAT FOR EVIDENCE OF ACCESS TO OR AVAILABILITY OF CREDIT

FACILITIES (CLAUSE 4.2 (I) OF ITB)
BANKCERTIFICATE

This is to certify that M/s._

company with a good financial standing. If the contract for the work, namely
is a reputed

is awarded to the above firm, we shall be able to provide overdraft/ credit facilities to the
extent of Rs.
to meet their working capital requirements for executing the above contract
during the contract period.

(Signature) Name of
Bank Address of the
Bank

203
 Annexure-IV
AFFIDAVIT on correctness of Information furnished with the Bid.

1. I, the undersigned, do hereby certify that all the statements made in the required attachments
are true and correct.
2.The undersigned also hereby certifies that neither our firm
M/s have abandoned any work on National
Highways in India /any other work of state Government or central Govt. Nor any contract awarded to
us for such works have been rescinded, during last five years prior to the date of this bid.
That our firm has not been black listed or debarred in any state or central Govt. department .Neither
our firm has any history of litigations.
In case the contract for the work is awarded in our favour we shall invest a minimum cash up to 25%
of value of the contract during the implementation of work.

CHAPTER - 20
We authorise the department to seek references from our bankers
Name of bank is Branch Account No.
3. The undersigned hereby authorize (s) and request (s) any bank, person, firm or
Corporation to furnish pertinent information deemed necessary and requested by the Department to
verify this statement or regarding my (our) competence and general reputation.
4. The undersigned understand and agrees that further qualifying information may be requested,
and agrees to furnish any such information at the request of the Department/Project implementing
agency.
WE solemnly affirm that the information give in the bid is correct to the best of my knowledge and
belief and nothing of any sort has been concealed.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Note: Affidavit to be notarized.
(Signed by an Authorized Officer of the Firm)

Title of Officer

Name of Firm
DATE

Annexure-V
PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE

To,
.............................................. [Name of Employer]
………………………… …[ address of Employer]
……………………………………………………………..….
WHEREAS [name and address of
Contractor] (hereinafter called ―the Contractor‖) has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract
No. dated to execute _ [name of
Contract and brief description of Works] (hereinafter called ―the Contract‖);AND WHEREAS it
has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall furnish you with a Bank
Guarantee by a Nationalized/Scheduled bank of India for the sum specified therein as security for
compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract.
AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee.
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the guarantor and responsible to you on behalf
of the Contractor, up to a total of Rs. [amount of guarantee] (Rupees________________)

204
 such sum being payable in the types and proportions of currencies in which the Contract Price is
payable, and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand and without cavil or
argument, any sum or sums within the limits of [amount of guarantee] as aforesaid
without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum
specified therein. We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the
Contractor before presenting us with the demand.
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract
or of the Works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which may be
made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this
guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall be valid until 28 days from the date of expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
Signature and seal of the guarantor
Name and Designation
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Name of the Bank

Address
Date

* An amount shall be inserted by the Guarantor, representing the percentage the contract price
specified in the contract including additional security for unbalanced Bids. If any and
denominated in Indian Rupees.

Annexure-VI

UNDERTAKING

The undersigned to hereby undertake that our firm M/s

would invest minimum cash up to 25% of the value of the work during implementation of the
Contract.

(Signed by an Authorized Officer of the Firm)

Title of Officer

Name of Firm

DATE

205
 Annexure-VII
Letter of Acceptance
(Letterhead paper of the Employer)
…………………………… (Date )
To:
( Name and address of the contractor)

Dear Sirs,

This is to notify that your Bid dated for execution: completion and
maintenance of the (name of the contract and identification number,
as given in the Instruction to Bidders) for the Contract Price of Rs. (Rupees

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

( ) (amount is words and figures as corrected
and modified in accordance with the Instruction to Bidders1 is her by accepted by our agency
We accept/do not accept that be appointed as the Adjudicator2. You are hereby
requested to furnish Performance Security, in the form detailed in Para 34.1 of ITB for an amount for
an amount equivalent to Rs. within 21 days of the receipt of this letter of acceptance
valid up to 28 days from date of expiry of the Defects Liability Period i.e up to and
sign the contract failing which action as stated in clause 34.3 of ―Instructions to Bidders‖ will be
taken.
. Yours faithfully

Authorized signatory
(Name & title of signatory
(Name of Agency)

1. Delete ―corrected and‖ or ―and modified‖ if only one of these actions, Delete as corrected and
modified in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, if corrections or modifications have not been
affected.
2. To be used only if the contractor disagrees in his Bid with the Adjudicator proposed by the
Employer in the ―Instructions to Bidders‖.

Annexure-VIII
Issue of Notice to proceed with the work
(Letterhead of the Employer)
(Date)
To,
(Name and address of the Contractor)

Dear Sir (S)

Pursuant to your furnishing the requisite performance security as stipulated in ITB clause 34.1 and
signing of the contract for the construction of ________at a Bid Price of Rs.
You are hereby instructed to proceed with the execution of the said works in accordance with the
contract documents.

Yours faithfully,

(Signature, name and

title of signatory
authorized to sign on
behalf of Employer)

206
 .

Agreement Form
Agreement

Annexure-IX

This agreement made the day of . between

(name and address of

Employer) (herein after called ―the Employer)‖ and __
(name and address of Contractor) (hereinafter called ―the Contractor‖ of the other part). Whereas
the Employer is desirous that the Contractor execute
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

name and identification number of Contract) (hereinafter called ―the Works‖) and the Employer
s accepted the Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the
remedying of any defects therein, at a contract price of Rs._ NOW THIS AGREEMENT
WITNESSETH as follows:
1. In this Agreement, words and expression shall have the same meanings as are respectively
assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to, and they shall be deemed
to form and be read and constructed as part of this Agreement.
2. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter
mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the
works and remedy any defects therein conformity in all aspects with the provisions of the
Contract.
3. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying the defects wherein the Contract price or such other
sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner
prescribed by the Contract.
4. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and constructed as part of this
Agreement viz:
i) Letter of Acceptance
ii) Notice to proceed with the works:
iii) Contractor‘s Bid;
iv) Contract Data:
v) Conditions of Contract : Special Conditions of Contract;
vi) Additional condition:
vii) Drawings:
viii) Bill of quantities and
ix) Any other document listed in the Contract Data as forming part of the contract.
In witnessed whereof the parties there to have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and
year first before written.
The Common Seal of ..................was hereunto affixed in the presence of: Signed, Sealed and
Delivered by the said……………………………………………………………………………

207
 ......................................................................................................................................................

in the presence of:

Binding Signature of Employer.......................................................................................................

Binding Signature of Contractor....................................................................................................

CHAPTER - 20
20.6.1.9 Drawings & BOQ

The necessary drawings and BOQ to be annexed.

NOTE: The SBD is broadly based on the generic guidelines necessarily broad in nature
on the Manual for procurement of works 2019 issued by department of Expenditure, Ministry
of Finance, GoI. It has been supplemented to suit the local/specialized needs ofPWD.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

208
 20.6.2 Standard Bidding documents for Heritage work.

Tender Document
Conservation of _ (Heritage Site) Contents

S. No. Particulars

Memo of issue of tender

Tender notice

General condition of the tender

Form of tender for works

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Articles of agreement

Condition of the contract

Proforma 1 to 9

Specifications

Schedule of quantities

Drawings

209
1. Memo of issue of tender

Conservation of (Heritage Site)

Project title : Conservation (Heritage Site), J & K
of
Employer :
Tender issued to :
(Name & Address of the Contractor/Firm) : ------------------------------------------------
Date of issue :

CHAPTER - 20
Date of submission :

Tenders are to be submitted at

- Pin
J &K

2. Tender notice

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Inviting tenders for the Conservation of (Heritage Site), J & K state/UT
Tenders are hereby invited to submit financial proposals for contractors Services required for the
above referred work. The contract documents consisting of Schedule of Quantities, Form of Tender
Conditions of Tender, Articles of Agreement, Brief Specifications (if any), Condition of contract,
Drawings, to be completed by the intending tenderer can be had from the office
of on payment of a non-refundable sum of Rs.1, 500/- (Rupees Fifteen Hundred Only) - in the form
of crossed demand draft in favour of--------------payable at--------------with an application issue of
the documents, during working hours every day except on Sundays and public holidays from --------
--------20YY. Tender documents shall be available till 5.00 p.m. on--------------------------- 20YY.

Qualification Required for Bidder

Experience
Tenderer shall have experience of doing at-least three conservation projects costing varying from
20 lacs to crore.

Assessing Quality of Work

The quality of previous conservation works of the contractors would be analyzed by the qualified
conservation architect before short listing of the contractors for this project.

Infrastructure
The contractor should have supporting infrastructures such as scaffoldings, grouting machines,
and lime mortar machine, water spray machines, tools used for conservation works etc.

In-House Team
The contractor shall have in-house skilled labors, masons craftsmen, supervisors and technician.
He/ she shall also appoint a conservation architect or a well-qualified civil engineer or
experienced architect on site to supervise the work full time.

210
 Important points for applying
1. The conditions should be read carefully and, understood clearly before applying and pricing the
schedule for various items. Only those shall apply who have working experience in building
conservation.

2. The documents supplied comprise of various sections as detailed on the "Contents" sheet. Tender
shall be completed filling all the blanks appropriately.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

3. Full signatures should be affixed as required at places particularly marked "Signature ofTenderer"
and the form of Tender shall also be witnessed.

4. All other pages of the tender documents shall be initialed before submission of the tender.
Rates must invariably be quoted in words also.

5. List of works in hand at the time of submission of tender should be given together withrelevant
contract amount, contract period and date of commencement of such works.

6. We shall appreciate if the schedule of quantities is submitted duly priced, togetherwith

all the papers duly signed as required before---------------------
p.m. on the
20YY in two sealed covers both addressed to and superscribed as Tender for conservation
of at .

7. Complete set of documents and the schedule of quantities should be returned in a sealedcover
together with the drawings, if supplied.

8. Complete set of documents and the schedule of quantities should be returned in a sealed cover together
with the drawings, if supplied.

9. The tender shall be submitted in two envelopes:

Envelop No.1: This is to contain forwarding letter and instrument of earnest money and
the cost of tender document if not submitted. There will be only specified document as
stated below.

Envelop No.2: This is to contain the priced schedule of quantities, the specifications,
conditions, etc. No alterations shall be done to the documents, is any changes /
clarifications, counter conditions, etc. will be in the forwarding letter in envelop No.1 only.

211
List of documents to be submitted along with tender:

a. Valid Income Tax Clearance Certificate /Copy of PAN Number.

b. Proof of registration with WORKS CONTRACT TAX / valid SALE TAX/latest GST
3Rclearance certificate.
c. Copies of Similar works executed in last three years along with work order/performance
certificate duly listed.
d. History / Structure of firm name of director/ partners / proprietor with technical staff.
e. Audited balance sheet for previous three years.
f. Latest bank Solvency certificate of value not less than 40 % of the estimated cost. In any case
it should not be older than 12 months from the last day of issue of NIT.
g. List of Machinery tools and plants
h. An affidavit stating "In case any ambiguity is noticed in the Documents,(List out

CHAPTER - 20
Documents) submitted at any stage, we shall be entirely responsible and liable for any action
as deemed fit under the Law".
i. Original documents shall be produced as required for cross verifications. on opening of
technical bid of tender- ENVELOPE–I.

All the above certificates / documents shall be submitted duly signed with seal and attested
from a Gazetted Officer or an officer in PSE or their C.A.

The tendering process should be as per E-tendering norms.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

9. No consideration shall be given to a tender received after the time above stipulated and no
extension of time shall be allowed for submission of the tender.

10. Every tender shall be accompanied by Earnest Money of Rs. 50,000/- (Rupees Fifty Thousand
Only) in the form Demand Draft drawn in favour of-------------------------- J & K‖ and any--------
---
------ payable at of ― tender not accompanied by such Earnest
Money is liable to be rejected straightway. (E.M.D. in any other form shall not be accepted)

11. Conservation architect of the project will first scrutinize and settle all conditions stated by all
the tenderers in their covering letters (if any) before opening the priced part of the tender. If
necessary, the priced schedule of quantities will be kept in the safe custody of the Employer
until such time as all clarifications/negotiations necessitated due to the conditions stated
by the tenderers are obtained/conducted to the satisfaction of Employer/Architect / to enable
him to consider the priced schedule of quantities on a reasonably comparable basis. The rates
shall be all inclusive.

12. Notwithstanding the option of the Employer / Architect / to seek clarifications / negotiations on
conditional tenders, he never- the less reserves the right to summarily reject conditional tenders.
No escalation except as provided in the standard conditions will be considered for any other
item and such stipulation, if made, will render the tender liable to be rejected.

13. Time is the essence of the contract. The time allowed for the completion of the work is 4 (four)
months from 2 weeks after the date of written order to commence work. The successful
contractor will have to consult the conservation architect of the project and finalized the
conservation strategy, process of specialized conservation items of works, specification and
resources of the materials required for the project, mortar proportions etc. A bar chart of,
various activities of work should be prepared so that the work gets completed within the
stipulated time and required quality could be obtained. The exercise shall be done within 15
days from the date of acceptance of tender.

212
 14. The Earnest Money will be retained in the case of the successful tenderer as part of the security
for due fulfillment of the contract. In case the successful tenderer does not accept work order or
does not start the work physically within two weeks from the date of issue of work order,
earnest money will be forfeited in favors of the Employer. There upon the work order shall
stand withdrawn.

15. The tenderer will submit his tender after carefully examining the whole of the tender documents
and the conditions of tender and of contract, Appendix to the conditions of contract, the
drawings and specifications, the bills of quantities, etc. and after a detailed examination of site
conditions likely to be met.

16. The Contractor whose tender is accepted shall furnish by way of initial security deposit, for the
fulfillment of the contract such sum as will amount to 2% of the total value of the contract
including the Earnest Money (E.M.) deposited along with the tender and the Earnest Money will
form part of the security Deposit. The initial security deposit is to be paid by the contractor, to
the Employer / within 14 (fourteen) days of intimation to him of the acceptance of this
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

tender. This initial security Deposit (excluding the EMD) shall be acceptable in the form
of a Bank Guarantee. Such Bank Guarantee shall be from a nationalized bank in the form to be
approved by the Employer/Architects.

17. Together with the money paid under clause 17 above further retention of 8% of the value of the
work done from every running bill will be deducted till total retention including EMD and
initial security Deposit paid earlier is 5% of the contract value, and shall be held by the
employer as Total Security Deposit. This Deposit will also be acceptable in the form of a Bank
Guarantee from any nationalized Bank. On the Architects/Employer certifying to the
completion of the work, 50% of the total Retention amount shall be released to the contractor
with the final certificate of payment and the balance 50% will be retained for a further period of
12 months after the completion certificate is issued by the Employer/Architects, or shall be
released against Bank Guarantee from any nationalized bank , valid for 12 months.

18. In case, where the same item of work is mentioned at one or more places in the schedule of
quantities the lowest of the rates quoted by the contractor for the item shall be taken for the
payment of this item, and shall be binding on him.

19. The rates quoted by the contractor shall include all eventualities such as heavy rain, sudden
floods etc., which may cause damage to the executed work or which may totally wash out the
work. Until the completion certificate is issued to the contractors, the employer will not be
responsible for such damage or wash out of the construction work.

20. If the contractor fails to complete the work by the scheduled date of completion or within any
sanctioned extended time, he will have to pay liquidated damages at 0.5 % (half) of balance
contract amount for each week beyond the date that the work remains incomplete subject to
maximum of 5% of the contract value ( without extra items) as per clause 29 of the General
conditions of contract.

21. If the contractor completes the work before the scheduled date of completion he will be able to
get incentives at 0.5% for each week.

22. Mobilization advance, if required by the contractor, can be granted up to maximum of 5% of the
contract value against Bank

213
23. Guarantee of equivalent amount from any nationalized Bank valid for the full currency of the
contract. The total advance will be recovered with interest in installments to be decided by the
Employer/Architects in such a manner that the total recovery is made before 80% of the total
contract amount work is complete.

24. The notice inviting tenders (filled up pre-qualification document), the conditions of tender andthe
duly completed form of tender will form a part of the agreement to be executed by the successful
tenderer with the Employer.

Your faithfully

CHAPTER - 20
For J & K SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

214
 3. The General Condition Of The Tender

1. In the event of the tender being submitted by a firm, it must be signed by a person duly
authorized through a power of attorney issued by all the partners and a certified copy of the
power of attorney should be enclosed with the forwarding letter or separately by each member
thereof, or in the event of the absence of any partner, it must be signed on his behalf by a person
holding a power of attorney authorizing him to do so and such power of attorney shall be
produced with the tender and it must disclose that the firm is registered under the Indian
partnership Act.-'Each and every signature given shall be separately witnessed. A Contractor or
Contractors who himself / themselves has/have tendered or who may tender for the work shall
not witness the tender of another person for the same work. Failure to observe this condition
would render tenders of the contractors tendering as well as witnessing the tenders liable for
summary rejection.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

2. The tenderer must quote his rates only on the proper form of the tender, both in figures and
words and both in decimal coinage in the respective spaces provided there for . If the rates' are
not quoted in words also the tender is liable for rejection. The amount for each item should be
worked out in figures only for the probable quantities specified in the bills of quantities and the
requisite total given both in figures and words. Special care is to be taken to write the rates in
figures and words in such way that no interpolation is possible. Erasures and alterations must be
avoided, but if made unavoidably while pricing the bills of quantities, the wrong figures and
words must be neatly scored under the initials of the tenderer and the correct figures and words
neatly rewritten (but not overwritten or by using white fluid).Overwriting is not permitted. In the
case of figures, the word ‗Rs.‘ should be written before the figure of rupees and the word 'P'
written after the decimal figures, e.g. Rs. 2.15 P & in the case of words, the word 'Rupees' should
similarly precede and the words ' Paise only' should be written at the end, closely following each
rate & each amount. The words 'only' should not be written in the next line. Unless the rate
quoted is in whole rupees closely followed by the word 'only' the amount should invariably be up
to two decimal places.
3. Errors in the pricing of bills of quantities shall be dealt with in the following manner :-

(I) In the event of a discrepancy between the rates quoted in words and the rates in
figures the former shall prevail.

(ii) In the event of an error occurring in the amount column of the bills of quantities as a
result of the wrong extension of the unit rate and the quantity, the unit rate shall be
regarded as firm and extension shall be amended on the basis of the correct rates.

(iii) All errors in totaling in the amount column and in carrying forward the totals shall be
corrected.

(iv) The tender total shall be accordingly amended except that there shall be no
rectification of any errors, omissions or wrong estimate, in the prices inserted by the
tenderer in the bills of quantities.

4. Where alternative items are given, only the rates in figures and words are to be entered and not
the amounts there of. A tender which does not show the rates in figures and words for the
alternative items may be rejected. The Employer reserves to himself the right to take into account
any or all of the alternative items for the purpose of accepting a tender or to operate upon any or
all of the said alternative items during the execution of the work, partly or fully, as required. The
resultant variation in quantities of the relevant items shall not vitiate the contract.

215
5. The quantities furnished in the bills of quantities are only probable quantities liable to alternation
by omission, deduction or addition, and it would be clearly understood that the contract is not a
lump sum contract and the Architects do not, in any way, assure the tenderer or guarantee that
the said probable quantities are correct or that the work would correspond thereto. Payments will
be regulated on the actual quantities of work authorized done and measured at the site at the
accepted rates. No claims for change in quantities (+ or -) will be entertained. The drawings,
forming parts complementary installations specifications and the bills of quantities, of the
contract, are explanatory of and are to one another, representing together the works / to be carried
out.

If neither the drawings nor the specifications nor the accepted bills of quantities include any
part/parts the intention to include which is nevertheless clearly inferred and which are obviously
necessary for the proper completion of the works/ installations, all such parts shall be supplied
and executed by the contractor at no extra charge.

CHAPTER - 20
Anything contained in one or another of (a) the drawings, (b) the specifications and (c) the
accepted bills of quantities and not found in the others will be equally binding as if it were
contained in each of them.

6. No alterations, which are made by the tenderer in the drawings, specifications, or probable
quantities accompanying this notice will be recognized and if any such alterations are made the
tender will be invalid. Remarks or explanations should be set out in duplicate in a separate
covering letter and will become binding only if specifically accepted in writing by the Employer
at the time of acceptance of the tender. Conditional tenders will however be liable for summary
rejection.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

7. The tenderer must obtain for himself on his own responsibility and at his own expense all the
information necessary, including risks, contingencies and other circumstances to enable him to
make a proper tender and to enter into a contract with the Employer. He must examine the
drawings specifications, conditions and so on and must inspect the site of work, examine the
nature of the work and acquaint himself with local conditions, means of access to the work,
material availability, storage facilities, weather condition or areas for workers, in fact all matters
pertaining thereto before he submits his tender.

8. The tenderer shall also bear all expenses in connection with the preparation and submission of
his tender and attendance for subsequent negotiations/clarifications. Omission, neglect or failure
on the part of the tenderer to obtain requisite and reliable information on any matter affecting his
tender, the contract and the construction, completion and maintenance (during defects liability
period) of the work shall not relieve the tenderer whose tender is accepted from any liability in
respect of the contract.

The tenderer whose tender is accepted shall not be entitled to make any claim for increase in
the rates quoted and accepted excepting in pursuance of any specific provision in the contract as
such and then only in terms of that specific provision or to make any representation on the
ground that he was supplied with any information or given any promise or guarantee of any sort,
by the Employer, his agents and servants of by the Architects or their representatives or by any
'other persons, unless such information, promise or guarantee was furnished to the tenderer in
advance of the date of receipt of tenders and in writing under proper authority.

9. The Contractor, upon award of work, shall furnish the following details for the approval of the
Conservation architect of the project:
Material specification should be finalized in consultation with the project conservation architect.
Contractor should collect the samples of the required materials such as lime, sand, surkhi, wood,
bel, san, colors, mud etc.

216
 These should tested in the lab and then approve. The names of manufacturers of specialized items
such as patented water proofing systems / materials, flush doors, flooring tiles, false ceilings,
insulating materials, , steel, glazing, etc. which he proposes to use in the work.

The makes and types of fittings, materials, subject to the makes and type stipulated in the
specifications, which he proposes to use in the work.

The details of licenses granted to him and/or to professional qualified and/or licensed technical
personnel on his staff who will be engaged on the work (and submit, if called for, the licenses for
inspection by the Architects).

Only approved agencies shall be use to obtain such specialized items and approved agencies
deployed to carry out requisite items of work. The Architect's decision in this regard shall be
binding to all the parties concerned.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

10 The rates quoted in the bills of quantities shall unless specified otherwise will be for all heights,
be deemed to be for finished work insitu, item by item as provided for, and shall include cost for
all necessary material and labors, all necessary incidental charges such as water, electricity, tools
and plants and machinery, sheds, marking out, clearing site, etc. and for all taxes, octroi, excise,
Sales Tax on works contract and any other tax or duty levied by Government, Central or Local,
or Local Authority, if any as applicable. The rates shall be firm and not be subject to any
variations in exchange rates, in taxes, duties etc. in railway freight and the like including labor
conditions, etc. The rates are not subject to escalation otherwise than as specifically provided for
in the contract.

11 It will be the sole responsibility of the contractor to procure all required materials such as Lime,
wood, sand and as well as equipments such as lime chakki , water spray machines etc required
for the work and for its safe storage and custody at site. The contractor shall purchase these
materials only of approved manufacturer and only from the authorized dealers. These materials
shall conform to the relevant ISI standards and the detailed specifications stipulated elsewhere in
this contract. The contractor shall maintain a proper account of quantity of lime , surkhi , sand
and other materials purchased and brought to the site of work and that utilized in the work and he
shall also maintain any other accounts in the manner as may be required by the
Employer/Architects. He shall also allow inspection of all these accounts, records and also of
stocks in hand, by the authorized representatives of the Employer/Architects.

12 The tenders submitted shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 90 days from the date
of their opening. Should any tenderer withdraw his tender before the expiry of the said period or
make any modifications to his tender which are not acceptable to the Employer the earnest
money will stand forfeited.

13 The Employer does not bind himself to accept the lowest tender and reserves to himself the
right to reject any or all of the tenders received without assigning any reason. Further, the
Employer reserves the right to award any component of the project or group of components to
tenderers or to award the entire work to one tenderer.

14 The Employer further reserves the right to delete or reduce at any time, any section of the
bills of quantities with out assigning any reasons whatsoever there for and no claim will be
entertain in this regard.

217
15 The tenderer whose tender is accepted is bound to execute formal agreement with the Employer
within one month of the date of intimation of award of work in accordance with the draft
agreement which will include but not be limited to the notice inviting tender, condition of
tender, form of tender, Articles of Agreement, Bills of quantities, Conditions of contract,
Special conditions if any, the drawings and specifications, but his liability under the contract
shall commence from the date of written order to commence work whether the formal
agreement is drawn or not. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with the
execution of the said agreement including fees for stamping and registration of documents as
required.

16 The Contractor whose tender is accepted shall furnish by way of initial security deposit, for the
fulfillment of the contract such sum as will amount to 2% of the total value of the contract
including the earnest money (E.M.) deposited along with the tender and the Earnest Money will
form part of the security Deposit. The initial security deposit is to be paid by the contractor to
the Employer within 14 (fourteen) days of intimation to him of the acceptance of his tender.
This Initial security Deposit (excluding the EMD) shall be acceptable in the form of a bank

CHAPTER - 20
guarantee such guarantee shall be from a nationalized bank in the form to be approved by the
Architect and the Employer.

17 The Retention Money will be realized by deduction from the running bills at 8% of the value
of work done as certified by the Architects from time to time till such time when together with
the initial security deposit such deductions amount to a maximum 5% of the contract value.

18 The Total Retention amount will be acceptable in the form of a Bank Guarantee from any
nationalized bank. 50% of the Total Retention amount shall be released to the contractor
with the final certificate of payment and the balance 50% will be retained for the duration of

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the defects liability period, which will be 8 months in this case, or shall be released against
Bank Guarantee from any nationalized bank for 6 months.

19 The Security Deposit or Retention Money will bear no interest what so ever until the date of
release.

20 Any tender which is conditional or purports to alter, vary, omit any of these conditions is likely
to be rejected.
21
a) The contractor, upon award of work, is required to consult the conservation architect of the
project and should prepare the conservation strategy, bar charts for various items, process
of specialized conservation items of work, materials specifications, tools specification,
drawing verifications to carry out conservation works on site etc He should get written
approval of the conservation architect for all conservation items of work .

b) Over and above the contractor has to supply monthly programme chalked out showing
important milestones to be achieved and the progress actually achieved compared with, the
target of the same in the programme and shortfall, if any planned for being made up in the
programme for next month. It should be submitted in Proforma given on page No.---------
c) The first running bill of the contractor shall not be certified by the Architect unless the
programme is satisfactorily submitted to the architect. Further the architect shall have the
power to withhold subsequent certificates if relevant detailed monthly programs are not
submitted.
22
a) The work in general shall conform to the "Specifications 91-92-96 & latest electrical
specification published PWD, and the "Specifications for works" stated in this tender.
b) In case items not covered by the general specifications referred to in 22 (a) above, reference
shall be made to the appropriate I.S. Code.

218
 c) Should there be any difference in the particular specifications of individual item of work
and the description of item as given in the Schedule of quantity, the latter shall prevail.
d) In case of any work for which there is no specification in I.S. specifications or in the
specifications forming part of tender documents or in case there is any variation, such work
shall be carried out in all respects in accordance with the instructions to be issued by the
Architect..
23 Water supply, Drainage, Sanitary Installations and Electrical work shall be executed in
conformity with the rules, regulations and byelaws of local Municipal / Electrical
Authorities.

24 The Contractor, upon the award of contract, shall furnish all the particulars required and
make the necessary applications, if any, to the local Municipal Authorities or Electrical
Boards for obtaining water supply and under ground sewage or electricity connections,
transformer and obtain the same at his cost for temporary connection, but for permanent
connection Employer will reimburse the amount after submitting proper document.

25 The work shall be carried out under the directions and supervision of and subject to the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

approval in all respects by the Architects.

26 Canvassing in connection with tenders is strictly prohibited and the tender submitted by the
Contractor who resorts to canvassing is liable to be rejected.

27 Any item rate tender containing percentage below / above will be summarily rejected but
there is no objection to Contractors giving over all rebates on their rates in the tender.

28 On acceptance of the tender the Contractor shall in writing and at once inform the Employer
and the Architects the name of his accredited representative(s) who will be responsible to
take instructions from the Architects / Employer.

29 The work of any part of it shall not be transferred, assigned or sublet without the written
consent of the Employer.

30 The Contractor shall be required to co-operate and work in co-ordination with and afford
reasonable facilities for such other agencies / specialists as may be employed by the
Architects on other works /sub-works in connection with the project/scheme of which this
work forms a part.

31 The Contractor will be required to insure the work as per clauses 25 and 26 of the Conditions
of Contract.

32 The Contractor shall be required to conduct required tests of tube-well water (if a new tube
well is to be bore) from approved Laboratory.

33 The Contractor is required to comply with all Acts of Government relating to labour and the
Rules and Regulations made there under from time to time and to submit at the proper times
all particulars and statements required to be furnished to the appropriate Authorities.

Signature of Accepting Authority Signature of the Bidder (L1)

Date Date

219
4. Form of the Tender Works
To
,J & K

Dear Sir/s,

Having duly examined the tender documents including the drawings, specifications, designs, schedule
of quantities relating to the works specified in the under written memorandum and having visited the
site of the said works and having acquired all the requisite information relating there to as affecting
this tender, I we hereby offer to execute the works specified in the under written memorandum within
the time specified there in at the rates specified in the schedule of quantities and in accordance, in all
respects, with the specifications, designs, drawings and instructions in writing referred to in the
conditions of tender, the Articles of Agreement, special conditions, the schedule of quantities and

CHAPTER - 20
conditions of contract and with such materials as are specified by and in all other respects in
accordance with such specifications, the schedule of quantities and the conditions of contract as
applicable.

Memorandum

a) Name of work: Conservation of______________

(Heritage Site), J & K

b) Earnest Money: Rs 50, 000/- (Rupees Fifty thousand only)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

c) Initial Security Deposit: 2% of the contract amount (including earnest money ).

d) Total Security Deposit: Maximum of 5% of contract amount including initial security

deposit

Percentage, if any, to be deducted: 8% from running bills (From Running Account Bills)

e) Time allowed for the work from

two weeks after written order to commencement of work: 4 months
f) Schedule of quantities: as attached

I / We do hereby undertake to execute and complete the whole or part of the work (as desired by
you) at the respective rates which I/We have quoted in this tender, I/We further hereby agree to
abide by and fulfils all the terms and provisions of the said conditions of contract annexed hereto
and the conditions of tender as applicable or in default there of to forfeit and pay the sums of
money mentioned in the said conditions.

A sum of Rs.50, 000/- (Rupees Fifty Thousand only) is hereby forwarded as Earnest Money
Deposit (E.M.D.) in the form of Demand Draft drawn in favor of― ___ ,payable at
On .

I/we agree that should I/we fail to commence the work as specified in the above mentioned
memorandum the Employer shall without prejudice to any other right or remedy be at liberty to
forfeit the earnest money, otherwise the said earnest money shall be retained by him towards
security deposit mentioned in the above memorandum (ii) to execute all the works referred to in
the tender documents upon the terms and conditions contained or referred to therein and to carry
out authorized variations at the rates quoted in the tender.

220
 Our Bankers are:-
1.

2.

3.

The name of Directors / Partners of our firm are :

1.

2.

3.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Dated the day of 20YY.

Witness. Signature of Tenderer.

Name & Address

Name & Address

221
5. Articles of agreement

Articles of Agreement made this day of 20YY between M/S

----------------------------- of ,______, PWD, -, J& K
(hereinafter called "the Employer") of the one part and M /S.------------------------------------------ ----------------------
of (hereinafter called "the Contractor")
of the other part.

WHERE AS the Employer is desirous to conserve the _ at ,

as per schedule-I, to this agreement and has caused drawings, bills of

CHAPTER - 20
quantities and specification describing the work to be done to be prepared by the
, , (hereinafter called "the Architects / conservation architect").

AND WHEREAS the said drawings numbered as on page ----------- inclusive, the bills of quantities
marked page --------(inclusive) and the specifications as stated have been signed by or on behalf of
the parties hereto:

AND WHEREAS the Contractor has agreed to execute the work upon the conditions of tender and
the conditions of contract and further subject to the special conditions set forth in schedule- II
hereto attached (hereinafter collectively referred to as " the said conditions") as per the said
drawings and as described in the said specification and included in the said bills of quantities for the
sum of Rupees. ---

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Now it is hereby agreed as follows:

In consideration of the sum of Rupees

-----------to be paid at the time and in the manner set forth in the said conditions, the contractor shall
upon and subject to the said drawings and 'described in the said specification and bills of quantities.
The Employer shall pay to the Contractor the said sum of Rs. ----------------------------------------- ----
---
-----------such other sum as shall become payable hereunder at the times and in the manner specified
hereinafter.
The term ―The Architects or conservation architect " in the said conditions shall mean
‖ or in the event of their ceasing to be
Architects for the purposes of this contract, such other persons as shall be nominated for that purpose
by the Employer, not being a person to whom the contractor shall object for reasons considered to
be sufficient by the Employer mentioned in the said conditions. Provided always that no persons
subsequently appointed to be Architects under this contract shall be entitled to disregard or over
rule any decision or approval or direction given or expressed by the Architects for the time being.
The said conditions, specifications and priced bills of quantities shall be read and construed as
forming part of this agreement, and the parties hereto shall respectively abide by and submit
themselves to the conditions and stipulations and perform the agreement on their parts respectively
in such conditions, specifications and priced bills of quantities contained.
This agreement is subject to jurisdiction of courts in J & K only.

222
 Schedule I

Conservation of at ,all as described in pages

to and drawing No. inclusive hereto as specifications.

Schedule II

As per addendum, correspondence and the letter of acceptance marked pages--------to ----- --.
As Witness our hands the day and year first above written, in presence of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Signature: Name Signature by the said employer Name:

Occupation: Designation:

Address: Address:

in presence of

Signature & Name Signature by the contractor

Occupation : Designation
Address: Address:

6. Condition of the contract

1. Interpretation Clauses

In construing these conditions, the specifications, the schedule of quantities and contract
agreement, the following words shall have the meanings herein assigned to them except where the
subject or context otherwise requires.

Headings and marginal notes to the conditions of contract shall not be deemed to form part thereof
or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construction thereof or of the contract.
Where the context so required, words importing persons include firms and corporations and words
importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa.
Employer shall mean, PWD, ― ― ADDRESS_
Architects/ conservation architect shall mean project team of
PWD , Address , J & K.
Contractor shall mean -
include his/their (Legal representatives,) permitted assigns or successors.
Site shall mean the land and/or other places on, into or through which work is to be executed
under the contract or any adjacent land, path or street through which work is to be executed under
the contract or any adjacent land, path or street which may be allotted for use for the purpose of
carrying out the contract.
The contract or this contract shall mean the tender documents comprising of the notice
inviting tender, instructions to tenderers, form of tender, the tender conditions, the drawings,
priced bills of quantities, the acceptance thereof and the articles of agreement, together with the

223
conditions of contract with the appendix and special conditions, if any, the specifications, designs,
drawings and instructions issued from time to time by the Architects. And all these documents
taken together are deemed to form one contract and they shall be complementary to one another.
Bills of quantities variously also termed 'priced bills of quantities', 'Schedule of quantities',
'Schedule of rates' shall mean the schedule of quantities originally furnished with the notice
inviting tender, duly priced in by the tenderer and accepted by the Employer for inclusion as a part
of the contract for contract agreement it may also be referred to as the contract schedule.
Notice in written or written notice shall mean a notice in written, typed or printed

CHAPTER - 20
characters sent (unless delivered personally or otherwise proved to have been delivered) by
registered post to the last known private or business address or to the registered office of the
addressee and shall be deemed to have been received when in the ordinary course of post it would
have been delivered. "Drawings" shall mean the drawings referred to in the Specifications and any
modifications of such drawings approved in writing by the Architect and such other drawings as
may from time to time be furnished or approved in writing by, the Architect.
Act of Insolvency shall mean any Act of Insolvency as defined by the Presidency Towns
insolvency Act or the Provincial Insolvency Act or any act amending such original.
Net Prices: If in arriving at the contract amount the Contractor shall have added to or deducted
from the total of the items in the tender any sum, either as a percentage or otherwise, then the net
price of any item in the tender shall be the sum arrived at by adding to or deducting from toe
actual figures appearing in the tender as the price of the item a similar percentage or proportion of

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the sum so added or deducted by the Contractor, the total amount of any prime cost items and
provisional sums of money shall be deducted from the total amount of the tender. The expression
―net rates‖ or " net prices‖ when used with reference to the contract or account shall be held to
mean rates or prices so arrived at.
The works (or the work) unless there be something either in the subject or context repugnant to
such construction be considered and taken to mean the works by or by virtue of the contract
contracted to be executed whether temporary or permanent and whether original, altered,
substituted or additional.
Wherever the word ―works" is used it shall cover II installations" also under the same definition.
Provisional Item shall mean item for which approximates amount has been included in the tender
documents.
Virtual Completion of works shall mean that the building is in the opinion of the Architect, fit for
occupation.

2. Architects Instructions:
The contractor shall execute the whole and every part of the work in the most substantial
(superior) and workmanlike (1st class) manner both as regards materials and work man ship and
otherwise in every respect in strict accordance with the specifications, conforming exactly, fully
and faithfully to the designs, drawings and instructions in respect of the work given by the
Architects and under the directions of and under the supervision of and subject to the approval in
all respects by the Architects who may in their discretion and from time to time issue further
drawings and/or written instructions, directions and/or details and explanations which are
hereafter collectively referred to as "Architects Instructions" in regard to:

a. Variation or modification of the design including structural design, quality or quantity of

works at the addition or omission or substitution of any work.

b. Any discrepancy in the drawings or between the schedule of quantities and/or drawings
and/or specifications.

224
 c. The removal from the site of any materials brought thereon by the Contractor and the
substitution of any other materials there for.

d. The removal and/or re-execution of any works executed by the contractors.

e. The dismissal from the works of any persons employed there upon.

f. The opening up for inspection of any work covered up.

g. The amending and making good of any defects under clause- 20. Conditions of Contract.

h. The testing of materials specifically ordered, besides normal mandatory tests.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

i. The Contractor shall forthwith comply with and duly execute any work strictly in accordance
with such Conservation architect/ architect instructions provided always that verbal instructions,
directions and explanations given to the Contractor or his representative upon the works by the
Architects shall, if involving a variation, be confirmed in writing by the Contractor within seven
days and if not dissented from in writing within a further seven days of receipt of such
confirmatory order by the Architects such shall be deemed to be ―Architect's instructions ―
within the scope of the contract.
j. Manner of execution of work: The Architect shall be entitled to direct at what point or points
and in what manner the works are to be commenced and from time to time carried on.

k. Variation to be approved by Employer: Not with standing anything herein contained, the
Architects or their representative shall not, without the prior concurrence in writing of the
Employer, issue any instructions verbal or in writing which will result in the employer having to
pay the Contractor an additional sum greater than Rs. 10,000. When such instructions are issued
to the Contractor shall submit through the Architects a statement of variations giving quantity
and rates duly supported by analysis of rates, vouchers, etc. The rates of scrutiny and final
acceptance of the Employer under the terms of clause 18 here of shall form a supplementary
schedule of rates.

3. Agreement copies to be supplied:

The contract shall remain in the custody of the Employer and shall be produced by him at his
office as and when required, by the Architects or the Contractor. The Contractor on the signing
hereof shall be furnished by the Architects free of cost, with a certified copy of the agreement
and two copies of each of the said drawings issued during the progress of the works. Any further
copies of such drawings required by the Contractor shall be paid for by him. The Contractor
shall keep one copy each of all drawings on the works and the Architect or his representative
shall at all reasonable times have access to the same. Before the issue of the final certificate the
Contractor shall, if so required, forthwith return to the Architect all drawings and specifications.

4. The Contractor to provide everything necessary

The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to the correctness
and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and amounts stated in the schedule of
quantities and/or the schedule of rates and amounts which rates and amounts shall, except as
otherwise specifically provided, cover all the obligations under the contract, and all matters and
things necessary for the proper completion of the works. The Contractor shall provide at his
own cost all materials, appliances, implements, ladders, cordage, tackle, scaffolding, temporary
works, etc. together with carriage there for to and from the site, in fact every thing necessary or
proper for the proper execution of the work (whether original, additional, altered or substituted)
according to the true intent and meaning of the drawings, schedule of quantities and
specifications taken together, whether the same mayor may not be particularly shown or

225
 described therein provided that the same may be reasonably inferred there from, and if the
contractor finds any discrepancy in the drawings, or between the drawings, schedule of
quantities and the specifications, he shall immediately and in writing refer the same to the
Architects who shall decide which is to be followed, subject to :
a. Any thing shown or contained in anyone or other of
(i) the drawings,
(ii) specifications and
(iii) the contract schedule and not shown in the others shall be equally binding as if it were
contained in each of them.
b. Figured dimensions are to be followed in preference to the scaled and large scale details in
preference to small scale drawings.,

c. The following, order of preference shall apply:

CHAPTER - 20
i. The drawings,
ii. Specifications, covered by bills of quantities,
iii. Architect's specifications,
iv. The latest CPWD Specification
v. IS Codes and Standards.
5. Contractor to Conform to Local Regulations
The Contractor shall conform to the provision of any Act of the legislature relating to the
works and to the Regulations and Bye-laws of any Authority and of any water, lighting and other
companies and/or Authorities with whose systems the works are proposed to be connected., and

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

shall before making any variations from the drawings or specification that may be necessitated by
so conforming, give to the Architects written notice, specifying the variation proposed to be made
and the reason for it, and apply for instructions thereon. In case the Contractor shall not within ten
days receive such instructions he shall proceed with the work, conforming to the provision,
Regulations, or bye-laws in Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all obligations
arising under the statutes or Bye- laws or such Regulations. The Contractor shall bring to the
attention of the Architect all notices required by the said Acts, regulations or byelaws to be given
to any Authority and pay to such Authority or to any public office all fees that may be properly
chargeable in respect of the works and lodge the receipts thereof with the Architects. The
Contractor shall indemnify the .Employer against all claims in respects of patent rights and shall
defend all actions arising from such claims and shall himself pay all royalties, license fees,
damages, cost and charges of all and every. sort that may legitimately be incurred in respect
thereof.
6. Contractor responsible for setting out works:
Immediately on taking possession of the site the Contractor shall establish and erect one (or more
if so directed) standard bench mark, which shall be permanent reference point for all future check
ups, during the currency of the contract and until the works are completed. The Contractor shall
on the basis of dimensioned drawings and information necessary for the purpose,
furnished by the Architects, set out the works on site at his own expense and be responsible for the
correctness of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts thereof and also
examine in respect of the positions of the proposed buildings in relation to any existing structures,
electric/ telephone wires, lines, drains etc. for any possible obstruction or impediment to smooth
progress of works. The checking of any setting out by the representative of the Architect or of the
Employer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the correctness
thereof and he shall amend at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the Architect any error in the
setting out or consequential to wrong setting out, found at any stage during the progress of the
work or during the defects liability period.
7. Materials to conform to specifications:
All materials and workmanship shall conform strictly to requirements in accordance with the
drawings and as described in the schedule of quantities and/or specifications and as in accordance

226
 with the Architect's instructions, and the Contractor shall upon the request of the Architect furnish
proof to his satisfaction that they so conform and, if required, shall also furnish all invoices,
accounts, receipts and other vouchers for the purpose. The Contractor shall place orders for all
materialsrequired in time and in any case not later than the dates fixed in the approved programme.
Where in the matter of procurement of such materials as arecontrolled or the distribution of
which is regulated by Government, Central or Local, or by any other Central or Local Authority, the
Employer is obliged to issue any certificates or sign applications for license permit, by virtue of
orders of such Government or Authority or by custom or practice it shall be the sole responsibility
of the Contractor to arrange for matter with the concerned Authorities and to procure the materials
in time for incorporation in the works/installations according to the programme, and the Employer
or the Architects will not assume any responsibility for delays in this regard nor any responsibility
for the payment of fines, penalties, demurrage and the like due to the Contractor not taking timely
action in the process of procurement.
The Contractor shall not raise any plea, quoting delays in the completion of the formalities or
ofdelays by the Authorities concerned, for any compensation whatsoever. However, the Contractor
shall before he places orders for supply, furnish to the Architect, at his own expenses, samples of
materials proposed to be used in the works, well in time. The Architects shall within two weeks of
the day of supply of samples or within such further period as it may require depending upon each
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

case intimate to the Contractor whether the samples are approved or not. If samples are not
approved the contractors shall forth wise arrange to supply to the Architect for his approval fresh
samples complying with specifications and with the Architect‘s instructions.
The Contractor shall indemnify the" Employer or any agent, servant or employee of the Employer
against any action, claim or proceeding relating to infringement or use of any patent or design or
any alleged patent or design rights and shall pay any royalties or other charges which may be
payable in respect of any article or material or part thereof included in the contract. In the event of
any claims being made or action being brought against the Employer or any agent, servant or
employee of Employer in respect of any such matters as aforesaid, the Contractor shall
immediately be notified thereof provided that such indemnity shall not apply when such
infringement has taken place in complying with specific directions issued by the Employer or the
Architect in connection with the contract in spite of the Contractor having brought to their notice
such likely infringement or other wise. However, the Contractor shall pay any royalty or other
charges in respect there of. All charges on account of octroi, terminal or sales tax and other duties
including cartage on materials obtained for the work from any source shall be borne by the
Contractor. The Contractor should include in his rates all charges mentioned above.

8. Test of Material
The Architect shall be entitled to have tests carried out where and when deemed necessary (in
addition to the mandatory tests required by the C.P.W.D. Specifications) for materials to be
incorporated in the works/installations, supplied by the Contractor or otherwise, notwithstanding
that as provided in the previous sub-clauses, satisfactory proof has already been furnished, at the
cost of the Contractor who shall also provide at his expense all facilities which the Architect may
require for the purpose Samples, whether submitted to govern bulk supplies or required for testing
before use, and suitable packages to contain them shall be provided free of all charges by the
Contractor. Testing charges, if any, shall be borne by the Employer. All other expenses required to
be incurred for taking the samples, packing, conveying, transportation etc. shall be borne by the
Contractor himself. The Employer's liability to bear testing charges is in nature of reimbursement to
the Contractor i.e. the Contractor shall pay the charges initially direct to the testing agency. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to any other expenses, overheads, incidentals. He shall produce
proper account, and supporting details for verification by the Site In charge and the Architect. The
site In charge shall maintain a register of tests. The entries shall be signed by Contractor‘s
representative and, by the Site In charge. The register shall remain in custody of the Site In charge. /
Assistant Engineer. For the field tests made at site by the Contractor, there shall be no payment by
the Employer. The methods of sampling, the nature and extent of the tests to be carried out and their
interpretation shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian standards unless otherwise provided
for in this contract. The names of the laboratories or test houses in which the tests are to be carried
out shall be got approved by the Architects.

227
9. Supervision by Contractor
The Contractor shall give all necessary personal superintendence during the execution of the
works, and as long thereafter, as the Architects may consider necessary until the expiration of the
"Defects Liability Period", stated in the Appendix hereto, and this shall include due and proper
attention to all communications, oral or written and to all correspondence in a business like and
serious manner. All claims and other submissions etc. shall be supported by and based on
authentic and relevant facts only. The Contractor shall also during the whole time the works are in
progress, employ a competent and qualified supervisor preferable from conservation background
who shall be approved by the Architect and who shall be constantly in attendance at the works.
Any directions, explanations instructions, or notice given by the Architects to such
representative(s) shall be held to have been given to the Contractor.

CHAPTER - 20
If the Contractor fails to appoint and keep on the works a competent and qualified supervisor as
aforesaid the Architects shall have powers to suspend the works till such time a competent and
qualified representative as aforesaid is posted and the Contractor shall not be entitled to claim
extension of time and/or compensation on the plea of such suspension of the works.
The Architects may deduct at the rate of 15,000 / per month for the period a qualified
representative as aforesaid is not employed by the Contractor.

Aid for the expeditious execution of the works the Contractor shall be required to apply for a
temporary telephone connection .under C.Y.T. category and keep the same current for the
duration of the contract. All cost and charges in this connection will be borne by the Contractor. It

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a telephone at site within one month from
the date of start of work. The Employer will help the Contractor to install the telephone by way of
signing necessary documents or recommending the application for telephone. Failure to install the
telephone will be considered as breach of contract and the Contractor is liable for penalty at the
rate of Rs. 1500/- per month in addition to bearing expenses of any telephone calls made by the
Site In charge / Asstt. Engineer from some other installations & Architects representative. Further
the Employer at his option is at liberty to arrange to install the telephone and deduct the entire cost
from the Contractor.

10. Dismissal of workmen

The Contractor shall on the request of the Architect / Employer immediately dismiss from the
works any person employed thereon by him who may, in the opinion of the Architect /Employer
be incompetent or mis - conduct himself, and such persons shall not be again Employed on the
works without the express- permission of the Architect / Employer.

11. Access to works-

The Employer, the Architect and his respective representative(s) shall at all reasonable time have
free access to the works and/or to the workshops, factories or other places where materials are
lying or from which they are being obtained and the Contractor shall give the Employer, the
Architect and his respective representative all reasonable facilities necessary for inspection,
examination and test of the materials and workmanship. No person unauthorized by the Employer
or the Architect, except the representative of Public Authorities, shall be allowed on the works at
any time. Inspection by the Chief Technical Examiners (Vigilance )-The proposed work covered
under this tender, during its progress and/or after completion, can also be inspected by the Chief
Technical Examiner/Technical Examiner or Officers of the Central Vigilance Commission,
Government of India, on behalf of Employer/Architect to ascertain that the execution of the work
has been done with materials and workmanship all as stipulated in the contract and as
directed. Any defects,

228
 improvements or testing etc. pointed out by the Chief Technical Examiner should be carried out
by the Contractor at his cost and any deduction suggested by such C.T.E. will be effected from
any sums which may be due to which may become due to the Contractor. Contractor shall afford
all reasonable facilities to the above Vigilance staff and also provide them with ladders, tapes,
plumb, bob, level etc. as required and directed and also necessary labourers skilled, unskilled to
enable them to complete their inspection/study/technical scrutiny and no extra shall be admissible
to the contractor on this account.

12. Assistant. Engineer / Site In charge.

The term "Asstt. Engineer / Site In charge‖ separate for civil & electrical shall mean the person
appointed by the Contractor but acting under the instruction of the Architect/ Employer to inspect
the works in the absence of the Architects or the Employer. The contractor shall afford the Asstt.
Engineer every facility and assistance for inspecting the works and materials and for checking and
measuring the works and materials. Such person / persons shall be considered to act essentially if
not solely as Inspectors. If any work or material is not approved by the Asstt Engineer or any such
representative such work shall be suspended or the use of such material shall be discontinued,
until the decision of the Architect is obtained. The work will from time to time be examined by
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

the Architect, the Asstt. Engineer or the Architect's representatives, but such examination shall not
in any way exonerate the Contractor from the obligation to remedy any defects which may be
found to exist at any stage of the work or after the same is completed. Subject to the limitation of
this clause the contractor shall take instructions only from the Architects. The contractor must
provide to be available at site permanently such measuring tools, implements and instruments as
are necessary to execute and periodically examine the correctness of the works. A leveling
instrument and staff must be available at site through the currency of the contract, while other
instruments arranged promptly when needed at site. The Contractor is to provide and keep in good
repair one proper temporary office, with toilet complete with furniture, storage units, electric
lights, fans and cooler for the use of the Asstt. Engineer and clear the same away on completion of
the contract. The contractor shall also allow the said persons or the representatives of the
Architects/ Employer free use of the contractor‘s telephone at the site at all reasonable times in
connection with the work.

13. Work not to be sublet

The whole of the works included in the contract shall be executed by the contractor who shall not
directly or indirectly transfer, assign or underlet the contract or any part or share thereof or interest
therein without the written consent of the Employer; and no undertaking shall relieve the
contractor from the full and entire responsibility under the contract or from active superintendence
of the works during their progress. Work can be sublet: Electrical work can be sublet to the
qualified electrical contractor before taking the prior approval of Employer.

14. Variation not to vitiate the contract

No alteration, omission or variation shall vitiate this contract but in case the Architect thinks
proper at any time during the progress of the works to make any alterations in or additions to or
omission from or substitutions for the original drawings, specifications, design and instructions or
any alterations in the kind or quality of the materials to be used in the work and shall give notice
thereof in writing under his hand to the Contractor, the Contractor shall alter, add to or omit from
or substitute for as the case may require, in accordance with such notice and carry out the
amended work on the same conditions in all respects on which he agreed to do the main work but
the Contractor shall not do any work extra to or make any alterations or additions to or omissions
from or' substitutions in the works or any deviations from any of the provisions of the contract
stipulation, specification or contract drawings without the previous consent in writing of the
Architect and the value of such extras, alterations, additions, or omissions or substitutions shall in
all cases be determined by Architect with the prior approval in writing of the Employer in
accordance with the provisions of clause 18 hereof, and the same shall be added to or deducted
from the contract amount accordingly. No such items works shall be carried out without prior
approval of the rates.
229
 The supply and execution of any part or the carrying out of any work incidental to the execution
of any item or class of work shown in the schedule of quantities shall not constitute a
variation entitling the Contractor to extra payment provided that the said item or class of work
cannot be executed satisfactorily according to the true intent and meaning of the specifications
without the said part there of or the said work incidental thereto whether the same mayor ,may not
be particularly shown or described in the drawings, specifications and schedule of quantities and
provided the same may be reasonably inferred there from . Similarly the changing of the
position of the work from one to another, or to a more difficult position than that shown in the
drawings or described in the specifications or the contract schedule, or the carrying out of the
work under circumstance not contemplated in the specifications or the contract schedule shall not
constitute a variation entitling the Contractor to extra payment. The time for completion of
work shall in the event of authorized variations, result in an addition to the contract sum in
excess of 10% be extended on request by the Contractor as follows :-
In the proportion which the total executed contract value including authorized variations bears to
the original contract value, the certificate of the Architect being conclusive as to such proportion:

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

plus. 25% of the additional time calculated by way of (a) above or such further time as may be
considered to be reasonable by the Architects.
No compensation for alteration in or restriction of work
a) If at any time after the commencement of the work the Employer for any reason what so ever
does not require the. whole work thereof as specified in the tender to be carried out the Architect
shall give notice in writing of the fact to the Contractor who shall have no claim for any
compensation whatsoever on account of any profit which he might have derived from the
execution of the work in full, but which he did not derive in consequence of the full amount of the
work not having been carried out. Nor shall he have any claim for compensation by reason of any
alterations having been made in the original specifications, drawings, designs and instructions
which shall involve curtailment of' the work originally contemplated, as also no claim shall be
admissible for any incidental work or works, which could have been foreseen by the Contractor
during his site visit before tendering or during subsequent presence at site, but which the
Contractor failed to notice and account for due to the bill of quantities or in terms of clause 18 of
these conditions of contract.

Provided that the Contractor shall be paid the charges for the cartage only of materials actually
and bonafide brought to the site of the work by the Contractor and rendered surplus as a result of
the abandonment or curtailment of the work or any portion thereof and then taken back by the
Contractor, provided however, that the Employer shall have in such cases the option of taking
over all or any such materials at their purchase price or at local current rates whichever may be
less.

15 Schedule of quantities on standard method of measurement

The schedule of quantities shall be deemed to have been prepared in Accordance with method of
measurement as adopted by C.P.W.D. or in its Absence with IS - 1200. For conservation items it
should be based on actual quantities measured by the conservation architects during the condition
assessment of the structure. Actual condition should be marked on the drawings for
quantifications.
16. Errors in bills of quantities
Any error in description or in quantity or in omission of items from the schedule of quantities
shall not vitiate this contract but shall be rectified and the value thereof as ascertained under
clause 18 hereof shall be added to or deducted (as the case may be) from the contract amount
provided that there shall be no rectification of errors in the 'Contractor's rates
17. Measurement of work
The Asstt. Engineer may from time to time intimate to the contractor that he requires the works to
be measured, and the' Contractor shall forthwith attend or send a qualified agent to assist the
Asstt Engineer in taking such measurements and making calculations and to furnish all particulars
or to give all assistance required by him.
230
 a. Provided that the Contractor shall give notice, of not less than clear 10 days to the Asstt.
Engineer before covering up or placing beyond the reach of measurement any work in
order that the same may be measured and correct dimensions thereof be taken before the
same is so covered up or placed beyond reach of measurement and shall not cover up and
place beyond reach of measurement any work without the consent of the Asstt. Engineer
who shall within the aforesaid period of ten days inspect the work and cause the
measurements to be made; if, any work be so covered up without the consent of the Asstt.
Engineer, the same shall be uncovered at the Contractor's expense, or in default thereof
payment or allowance shall be made for such work or materials with which the same was
executed.

b. Should the Contractor not attend or neglect or omit to send such agent then the
measurements, as taken by the Asstt. Engineer shall be taken to be correct measurements of
the works and the Contractor shall be legally bound by such measurements. Such
measurements shall be taken in accordance with the prescribed method of measurements.
The Contractor or his agent may at the time of measurement take such notes and
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

measurements as he may require.

c. All extra works, omissions and variations made without the Architect's knowledge, if
subsequently sanctioned by him in writing (with the prior approval in writing of the
Employer), shall be included in such measurements but grouped separately at the end if so
required.
d. The measurements of all hidden and high rated items to be checked by senior officer such
as Superintending Engineer, Executive Engineers.

18. Prices of variation

The rates for additional, altered, substituted work shall be arrived at in accordance with the
following rules:-
a. The net rates or prices in the contract schedule shall determine the valuation of (the rates for)
the extra work (items) where such extra work is of similar character and is executed under
similar conditions as the work priced therein.

b. If the rates for the extra, altered or substituted (deviated) work are not provided for
(available) in the contract schedule, they shall to the extent possible be derived out of the
rates given in the schedule for similar or near similar items. For the purpose of such
derivation, where necessary and when so directed, the Contractor shall furnish detailed
analysis.
c. Where (a) and (b) are not applicable or where applicability of (ii) is rather too indirect or
inconsistent, the rates shall be arrived at using rates of items of work taken from J & K
schedule of rates (Latest/ LMR to be vetted By DIQC). Such rates from DSR shall be
increased or decreased by ratio representing:
Rate from Contract Schedule
Rate from J & K schedule of rates (Latest/ LMR to be vetted By DIQC)
of similar comparable items from the same trade as that of extra, altered, substituted work.

d. In respect of a contract which incorporates more than one schedule the rate applicable in case
(a) above if not provided for in the corresponding schedule pertaining to the work in which the
addition, alteration or substitution (deviation) occurs, shall be taken as the west applicable rate
in the other schedule; similarly, in case (b) above, if similar or near similar items cannot be
found in the corresponding schedule pertaining to the work in which the addition, alteration or
substitution (deviation) occurs, similar or near similar items of the lowest rate from the other
schedule shall be adopted.
e. In the case of additional, altered. or substituted (deviated) work for which rates cannot be
reasonably derived as at (a), (b) & (c) above, the rates shall be worked out adopting market
prices, substantiated by purchase bills / vouchers / dependable standard price lists, using
231
 factors and constants for quantum of materials, labour, T& P and sundries from standard
P.W.D. data / Analysis adding 15% towards profits and overheads together. When called
upon to do so the Contractor shall submit to the Architects his purchase bills/vouchers or
such other satisfactory proof in support of the market rates.
f. The question as to what particular items, being similar or near similar to the additional,
altered or substituted (deviated) work in the contract schedule are to be adopted for
derivation of rates for the additional, altered or substituted (deviated) work and whether the
said rates cannot contract schedule will be decided by the Architect entirely at his
discretion which is not open to be questioned. Like wise the question of applicability of (b)
being indirect or inconsistent andof similar comparable items from the same trade or
otherwise will be decided by the Architect at his discretion which is not open to be
questioned.

CHAPTER - 20
g. In cases (b), (c), & (d) the Contractor is required to submit his analysis of rates adopting the
principles enunciated and the Architects after scrutinizing the analysis and other
information furnished, will allow such rates as he considers reasonable after obtaining
Employer's sanction.
h. Where extra work is of such nature that it cannot be properly measured or valued the
Contractor shall be allowed day work prices at the net rates stated in the tender or the
priced schedule of quantities or, if not so stated then, in accordance with the local day work
rates and wages for the district, provided that in either case if required by the Architects,
vouchers, muster rolls and other documents required for proper verification of the labour
employed and the materials deployed on the said work and the costs thereof be delivered to

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the Architect or his representative at or before the end of the week following that in which
the work has been executed, or daily if so demanded. The question as to whether extra
work is of such nature that it cannot be properly measured or valued will be decided by the
Architects. The margin to be allowed on actual costs to the Contractor towards profits
overheads together shall be 15%.
i. The rates of extra/substituted items duly approved from competent authority to be analysed
as per SSR or book of analysis keeping in consideration the percentage lower than the
advertised cost.
19. Unfixed materials
Where in any certificate (of which the Contractor has received payment) the Architect has
included the value of any unfixed materials intended for and/or placed on or adjacent to the
works such materials shall become the property of the Employer and they shall not be removed
except for use upon the works, without the written authority of the Architect. The Contractor
shall be liable for any loss or damage to such materials.
20. Removal of improper work materials etc
The Architects shall, during the progress of the works, have full powers to order in writing
from time to time, removal from the works within such reasonable time or times as may be
specified in the order, of any materials which in the opinion of the Architects are not in
accordance with the specifications or the instructions of the Architects or do not conform to
approved samples, the substitution of the rejected materials by other proper materials, and
removal and proper re-execution of any work executed with materials not in accordance with
the contract notwithstanding that the same may have been passed or/and certified or/and paid
for, the Contractor shall forthwith carry out such order at his own cost. In case of default on the
part of the Contractor to carry out such order, the Employer shall have the power to employ and
pay other persons to carry out the same without being answerable or accountable for any loss or
damage that may happen or arise to such materials removed and all expenses consequent or
incidental thereto as certified by the Architect shall be borne by the Contractor, or may be
deducted by the Employer from any money due or that may become due to the Contractor.
21. Defects Liability Period

Any defect, shrinkage, settlement or other faults which may appear within the 'Defects Liability
Period' stated in the Appendix hereto, or if none so stated, then within 12 to 36 months as per
232
 Employer‘s direction after the completion of the works, arising in the opinion of the Architects
from materials or workmanship not being in accordance with the contract, shall on demand which
shall be made within the defects liability period, in writing by the Architects and within such
reasonable time as shall be stated therein specifying the work, materials or articles complained of
notwithstanding that the same may have been passed or/and certified, paid for, be amended and
made good by the Contractor, at his own proper charge and cost and in case of default the
Employer may employ other person or persons to amend and make good such defects, shrinkage,
settlements or other faults, and all damages, loss and expenses shall upon the Architect's
certificate in writing, be recoverable from him by the Employer or may be deducted by the
Employer from any money due or that may become due to the Contractor or the Employer may in
lieu of such amending and making good by the Contractor deduct from any money due or that
may become due to the Contractor a sum to be determined by the Architect equivalent to the cost
of amending and making good such work and in the event of the amount retained under clause 35
being insufficient recover the balance from the contractor together with any expenses the
Employer may have incurred in connection therewith. Should any defective work have been done
or material supplied by any sub-contractor employed on the works who has been nominated or
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

approved by the Architect as provided in clause 13 and 23 the contractor shall be liable to make
good in the same manner as if such work or material had been done .or supplied by the Contractor
himself and been subject to the provisions of clause 2 hereof. The contractor shall remain liable
under the provisions of this clause notwithstanding the signing by the Architect of any certificate
or the passing of any accounts.
22. Completion Certificate
The works shall not be considered as completed until the Architect has certified in writing that
they have been so completed and the defects Liability Period shall commence from such certified
date of completion of work. Within ten days of the completion of the work, the contractor shall
give notice of such completion to the Architect and within ten days of the receipt of such notice
the Architect shall inspect the work and if there is no defect in the work, shall furnish the
Contractor with a certificate of completion, otherwise a provisional certificate of completion
indicating defects (a) to be rectified by the Contractor and/or (b) for which payment will be made
at reduced rates, shall be issued. No certificate of completion, provisional or otherwise shall be
issued nor shall the work be considered to be completed until the Contractor shall have removed
from the premises on which the work was executed, all scaffolding, surplus materials, rubbish and
all huts and sanitary arrangements required, for his/their work people on the site in connection
with the execution of the works and as shall have been erected or constructed by the Contractor(s)
and cleaned off the dirt from all wood work, doors, windows, walls, floors or other parts of any
building, in upon or about which the work, was executed, or of which he may have had
possession for the purpose of the execution thereof, and not until, the work shall have been
measured by the Architects. If the Contractor shall fail to comply with the requirements of this
clause as to removal of scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish and all huts and sanitary
arrangements as aforesaid and cleaning off dirt on or before the date fixed for the completion of
the work, original or extended in terms of clause 30 herein, the Employer after issuing due notice,
may at the expense of the Contractor remove such scaffolding, surplus materials and rubbish etc.
and dispose of the same as he think fit and clean off such dirt as aforesaid and the Contractor shall
have no claim in respect of any such scaffolding or surplus material as aforesaid except for any
sum actually realized by the sale thereof. And the expense, if any, so incurred may be recovered
from any money due or that may become due to the Contractor by the Employer. If several sub-
works covered by separate schedules are included in the contract, and if at any time before the
completion of the entire work, the Employer takes possession of any of the separate sub works
that may have been duly completed in accordance with the contract and so certified by the
Architects, notwithstanding any other provision in this contract in this regard, a completion
certificate may be issued in respect of that sub-work subject to the provisions in the previous sub-
clauses (regarding completion certificate), having been complied with in respect of the said duly
completed work, the defects liability period for such sub work may be reckoned from the separate
date of completion so certified and that part of the full security deposit as may be proportionate
(contract value of this sub work to the whole contract value) be attributed to this sub work may be
refunded in accordance with and subject to
233
 the provisions of clause 21 . The same principles will apply where different dates are specified in
the contract for different sub works.
23. Specialists
All specialists, merchants, tradesmen and other executing any work or supplying and fixing any
goods for which prime cost prices or provisional sums are included in the schedule of quantities
and/or specification who may be nominated or selected by the Architects shall be deemed to be
sub- contractors employed by the Contractor and are herein referred to as nominated sub-
contractors. The co-ordination between various specialist agencies shall be ensured by the
Contractor who should keep them supplied with a copy of each of the memorandum of work
/ programme chart, or the part concerning and its amendment if and when made, and of the
probable dates their presence is required in such manner so that the progress of the project is
not affected adversely and is obtained consistently. No nominated sub-contractors shall be
employed on or in connection with the works against whom the Contractor shall make
reasonable objection or (save where the Architect and Contractor shall otherwise agree) who will

CHAPTER - 20
not enter into a contract providing :
a. That the nominated sub-contractor shall indemnify the Contractor against the same
obligations in respect of the sub-contract as the Contractor is under in respect of this contract.
That the nominated sub-contractor shall indemnify the Contractor against claims in respect of any
negligence by the sub- contractor, his servants or agents or any misuse by him or them of
scaffolding or other plant, the property of the Contractor or under any workman's compensation
act in force.
b. Payment shall be made to the nominated sub-contractor within fourteen days of his receipt of
the Architect's certificate provided that before any certificate is issued the Contractor shall upon

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

request furnish to the Architect proof that all certificates have been duly discharged, in default
whereof the Employer may pay the same upon a certificate of the Architect and deduct the
amount thereof from any sums that may then be due or may become due to the Contractor. The
exercise of the powers under this clause shall not create privities of contract as between Employer
and sub-contractor.
24. Employer may use premises
The Employer with the concurrence of the Architects reserves the right to use the premises and
any portion of the site for the execution of any work not included in this contract which he may
desire to have carried out by other persons and the Contractor is to allow all reasonable facilities
for the execution of such work but is not required to provide any plant or materials for the
execution of such work except by special arrangements with the Employer. Such work shall be
carried out in such manner as not to impede the progress of the works included in this contract
and the contractor is not to be responsible for any damage or delay which may happen to or be
occasioned by such work.
25. Contractor liable for damage done
The Contractor shall be responsible for all injury to persons, animals, or things, and for all
structural and decorative damage to property which may arise from the operation or neglect of
himself or of any accident or any other cause whatever in any way connected with the carrying
out of the contract. This clause shall be held to include, inter alias, any damage to buildings,
whether immediately adjacent or otherwise and any damage to roads, streets, foot-paths, bridges
or ways as well as all damages, caused to the buildings and works forming the subject of this
contract by fire, frost or other inclemency of weather. The Contractor shall indemnify the
Employer and hold him harmless in respect of all and any expenses arising from any such injury
or damage under any acts of Government or otherwise and a1so in respect of any award of
compensation or damage consequent upon such claim including that of third parties passing
from/within the site. The Contractor shall reinstate all damage of every sort mentioned in this
clause, so as to deliver up the whole of the contract works complete and perfect in every respect
and so as to make good or otherwise satisfy all claim for damage to the property including that of
third parties. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims which may be made
against the Employer by any member of the public or other third party in respect of anything

234
 which may arise in respect of the works or in consequence thereof and shall at his own expense
arrange to effect and maintain, until the completion of the contract, with an approved insurer a
policy of insurance in the joint names of the Employer and Contractor against such risk and
deposit such policy or policies with the Architect from time to time during the currency of this
contract. The Contractor shall also similarly indemnify the Employer against all claims which
may be upon the Employer whether under the Workmen's compensation Act, or any other statute
in force during the currency of this contract or at common law in respect of any employee of the
Contractor or subcontractor and shall, at his own expense, effect and maintain until the virtual
completion of the contract, with an approved insurer a policy of insurance in the joint names of
the Employer and the Contractor against such risks and deposit such policy or policies with the
Architects from time to time during the currency of the contract. The Contractor shall be
responsible for anything which may be excluded from the insurance Policies above referred to
and also for all other damages to any property arising out of and incidental to the negligent or
defective carrying out of this contract. He shall also indemnify the Employer in respect of any
cost, charges or expenses arising out of claims or proceedings and also in respect of award of or
compensation for damage arising there from. The Employer with the 'concurrence of the Architect
shall be at liberty and is hereby empowered to deduct the amount of any damage, compensation,
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

costs, charges and expenses arising or occurring from or in respect of any such claims or damage
from any or all sums due or to become due to the Contractor.

26. Responsibility for safety of Buildings

The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the works (including the materials,
temporary buildings and plant) until they are taken over by the Employer and they shall stand at
the risk, and be in the sole charge of the Contractor, who shall be responsible for and must with
all possible speed make good all damage whatever the cause.

27. Insurance of the works

The contractor shall within 14 days from the date of commencement of the work insure the works
athis cost and keep them insured until one month after the works are taken over by the Employer
or three months after the date of completion whichever is earlier against loss or damage by fire,
storm tempest, lightning, flood, earthquake, aircraft or anything dropped there from , aerial
objects, riots and civil commotion etc. or such usual risks' with an insurer to be approved by the
Architects, in the joint names of the Employer and Contractor (the name of the former being
placed first in the policy) and in any stage for any additional sum as called upon to do'. so by the
Architects, with the prior written consent of the Employer the premium of such additional sum
being allowed to the contractor as an authorized extra. Such policy shall cover the property of the
Employer only and Architect's fees for assessing the claim and in connection with his services
generally in reinstatement and shall not cover any property of the Contractor or of any sub-
contractor or of any of his employee. The Contractor shall deposit the policy and receipts for the
premium paid with the Architects within twenty one days of the date of commencement of the
work unless otherwise instructed by the Architect. In default of the Contractor insuring as
provided above, the Employer or the Architect on his behalf may insure and may deduct
the premiums paid from any money that may be due of that may become due to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall as soon as the claim under the policy is settled, or the work reinstated by the
insurers should they elect to do so, proceed with all due diligence with the completion of the
works in the same manner as though the fire or other such cause had not occurred and in all
respects under the same conditions of contract. The Contractor in case of rebuilding or
reinstatement after fire or other such usual cause shall be entitled to such extension of time for
completion as the Architect deems fit. The Contractor nevertheless shall be responsible for any
exclusion from the policies and shall indemnify the Employer in all respects as in clause 25
hereinbefore.

28. Date of Commencement & Date of Completion

The Contractor shall be allowed admittance to the site on the "date of commencement‖ stated in
the Appendix, and he shall thereupon and forthwith begin the works and shall regularly proceed
with to complete the same (except such painting or other decorative work as the Architects may
desire to

235
 delay) on or before the "Date of completion" stated in the Appendix subject nevertheless to the
provision for extension of time hereinafter.

29. Liquidated Damages

The time allowed for carrying out the work as entered in the tender shall be strictly observed by the
Contractor and shall be deemed to be the essence of the Contract on the part of the Contractor and
shall be reckoned from two weeks after the date on which the order to commence the work is issued
to the Contractor. The work shall throughout the stipulated period of the contract be proceeded with
all due diligence and the Contractor shall ensure good progress during its execution. The Contractor
shall be bound in all cases in which the time allowed for any work exceeds one month (save for
special jobs) to complete one eighth of the whole of the work before one fourths of the whole time
allowed under the contract has elapsed, three eighths of the work before on half of such time has
elapsed and three fourths of the work before three fourths of such time has elapsed. However, for any
job, if a, time schedule has been submitted by the Contractor and the same has been accepted by, the
Architect the Contractor shall comply with the said time schedule. In the event of the Contractor

CHAPTER - 20
failing to complete the works on or before the date specified in the Appendix as "date of completion"
or such extended date under clause 30 he shall be liable to pay as compensation an amount stated in
the Appendix as "liquidated damages" for every day that the work remains incomplete beyond the
"date of completion" or extended date. as the case may be, provided always that the entire amount of
compensation to be paid under the provisions of this clause shall not exceed five percent of the
contracted amount.

30. Extension of Time

If the Contractor shall desire an extension of time for completion of the work on the grounds of his
having been unavoidably hindered in its execution or any other ground, he shall apply in writing to

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the Architects within 15 days of the date of such hindrance on account of which he desires such
extension as aforesaid and the Architect, if in his opinion reasonable grounds have been shown there
for , may with the previous approval in writing of the Employer make a fair and reasonable
extension of time for completion of the contract works provided:

a. that the Contractor shall have no claim other than extension of time for the delay in completion
of the work due to such hindrance

b. that the Contractor shall suspend the works whenever called upon to do so in writing by the
Architects and shall be allowed reasonable extension of time for completion of work due to such
suspension of work and nothing else.

c. that the Contractor's application for extension of time is open to be rejected if it is not submitted
within 15 days of the date of hindrance

d. The Architect shall, in granting extension, specify separately the period which shall not qualify
for application of PVA.

31. Failure of Contractor to comply with Architect‘s Instructions

If the Contractor after receipt of written notice " from the Architects, requiring compliance within
ten days, fails to comply with such further drawings and / or Architect's instructions without
sufficient and Employer may employ and pay other persons to execute any such work whatsoever
that may be necessary to give effect thereto, and all costs incurred in connection therewith shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer on the Certificate of the Architects as a debit or
may be deducted by him from any money due or to become due to the Contractor.

32. Termination of Contract by Employer

If the Contractor being an individual or a firm commits any "Act of Insolvency", or shall be
adjudged an insolvent or being an Incorporated Company shall have an order for compulsory

236
 winding up made against it or pass an effective resolution for winding up voluntarily or subject
to the supervision of the court and of official assignee or the Liquidator in such of insolvency or
winding up, as the case may be, shall be unable within seven days after notice to him requiring
him to do so, to show to the reasonable satisfaction of the Architects that he is able to carry out
and fulfill the contract and to give security there for if so required by the Architects.
Or if the Contractor (whether an individual, firm or incorporated Company) shall suffer
execution to be issued,
Or shall suffer any payment under this contract to be attached by or on behalf of any of the
creditors of the contractor; or shall assign or sublet this contract without the consent in writing of
the Employer first obtained;
Or shall charge or encumber this contract or any payments due which may become due to the
Contractor there under;
Or if the Architect shall certify in writing to the Employer that the Contractor:
a. has abandoned the contract or has failed to commence the works, or
b. has failed to commence the work, or has without any lawful excuse under these conditions
suspended the progress of the works for 14 days after receiving the Architects' notice to proceed,
or
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

c. has failed to proceed with the works with such due diligence and failed to make such due
progress as would enable the works to be completed within the time agreed upon, or
d. has failed to remove the materials from the site or to pull down and replace work for seven days
after receipt from the Architect of written notice that the said materials or work were condemned
and rejected by the Architect under these conditions or
e. has neglected or failed persistently to observe and perform all or any of the acts, matters or things
by this contract to be observed and performed by the Contractor for seven days after written
notice shall have been given to the contractor requiring the Contractor to observe or perform the
same, or has to the detriment of good workmanship, or without the consent in writing of the
Employer sublet any part of the contract, or
f. has violated any conditions of contract.

Then and in any of the said cases the Employer may notwithstanding any previous waiver, after
giving seven I days' notice in writing to the Contractor, determine the contract, but without
thereby affecting the powers of the Architects or the obligations and liabilities of the Contractor
the whole of which shall continue in force as fully as if the contract had not been so determined
and as if the works subsequently executed had been executed by or on behalf of the Contractor.

And further, the Employer by his Agents or servants may I enter upon and take possession of the
works and all plant, tools, scaffoldings, sheds, machinery, steam or other power utensils and
materials lying upon the premises or the adjoining lands or roads and use the same as his own
property or may employ the same by means of his own servants and workmen in carrying on and
completing the works or by employing any other Contractor shall not in any way interrupt or do
any act, matter or thing to prevent or hinder such other contractor or other person or persons
employed for completing and finishing or using the materials and plant for the works. When the
work shall be completed or as soon thereafter as convenient the Architect shall give notice in
writing to the Contractor to remove his surplus materials and plant, and should the Contractor fail
to do so within a period of 14 days after receipt thereof by him, the Employer shall be entitled to
sell the same by public auction and give credit to the Contractor for the amount realized.

The Contractor's account shall also be credited with the amount that would have been payable to
him, for the uncompleted work (completed by the Employer through other contractor or person or
persons as aforesaid) in terms of his agreement as if the contract had not been determined and he
(the Contractor) had continued to execute the work to its completion. The actual gross expense to
the Employer including incidental charges in completing the uncompleted work through other
contractor or person or persons shall be debited to the Contractor's account if it be not less than
the credit for the uncompleted work as above referred. If however, the said debit to be made be
less than the said credit, then the amount to be debited shall be equal to the value of the credit
given as above referred. The Architect shall thereafter ascertain and certify in writing what if

237
 anything in the final accounting is due to or payable to the Contractor by the Employer or to the
Employer by the Contractor taking into account the credit (if any), to the Contractor for the sale
of the surplus materials and plant and the loss the Employer shall have been put to in procuring
the works to be completed. The amount, if any, owing to the Contractor and which shall be
certified shall there upon be paid by the Employer to the Contractor and vice versa, and the
certificate of the Architect in this regard shall be final and conclusive between the parties.

33. Termination of Contract by Contractor

If payment of the amount payable by the Employer under any certificate of the Architects shall
be in arrears and unpaid for thirty days after notice in writing requiring payment of the amount
as aforesaid shall have been given by the Contractor to the Employer,
Or if the Employer interferes with or obstructs the issue of any such certificate, Or if the
Employer commits any "act of insolvency",
Or if the Employer (being an Incorporated Company) shall have an order made against him or

CHAPTER - 20
pass an effective Resolution for winding up either compulsorily or subject to the supervision of
the court or voluntarily,
Or if the official Assignee or the Employer shall repudiate the contract,
Or if the Official Assignee or the Liquidator in any such winding up shall be unable within
fifteen days after notice to him requiring him to do so to show to the reasonable satisfaction of
the Architect that he is able to carry out and fulfill the contract and to make all payments due,
and to become due there under , and if required by the Architect to give security for the same,
Or if the works be stopped for six months under the order of the Architect or the Employer or by
any injunction or other order, of any Court of law, then and in any of the said cases the
Contractor shall be at liberty to determine the contract by notice in writing to the Employer

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

through the Architect, and he shall be entitled to recover from the Employer, payment for all
works executed and for any loss he may sustain upon any plant or materials supplied or
purchased or prepared for the purpose of the contract. Provided further that this clause shall not
be in operation if the Employer has reasons to object to the certificate on account of
miscalculations or errors or imposing of clauses not provided for in the contract in which case
the Architect will further reexamine the certificate and issue corrected certificate if so required.
In arriving at the amount of such payment the net rates contained in the Contractor's accepted
tender shall be followed or where the same may not apply, valuation shall be made in
accordance with clause 18 hereof.

34. Prime costs, Provisional sums

a. Where 'Prime Cost' (P.C.) prices or provisional sums of money are provided for any goods or
work in the specification or schedule of quantities the same are exclusive of any trade discounts,
rebates or allowances, discount for cash, or profit which the Contractor may require and of
fixing, but are inclusive of all proper charges for packing, carriage and delivery at site.

b. All goods or work for which prime cost prices or provisional sums of money are provided
may be selected or ordered from any manufacturers or firms by the Architects in consultation
with the Employer who reserves to himself the right of paying direct for any such goods or work
and deducting the said prices' or" sums from the amount of contract. Should any goods or work,
for which prime cost prices or provisional sums are provided or portions of the same be not
required, such prices or sums, together with the profits allowed for the same and such additional
amounts as the Contractor may have allowed for carriage and fixing will be deducted in full
from the amount of the contract. Whether the goods be ordered by the Contractor or otherwise,
the Contractor shall receive and sign for such goods and be responsible for their safe custody as
and from the date of their delivery upon the works, and for such payment in the contract.
shall fix the same, if called upon to do so, at his own cost. Fixing shall cover unloading, getting
in, unpacking and return of empty and other incidental work.

c. In cases in which provisional quantities of material are contained in the contract the
Contractor

238
 shall provide such material to such amounts or to greater or less amounts as the Architect shall
direct in writing at the net rates at which he shall have priced such items in the schedule of
quantities; should however any such items be entirely omitted, which omissions shall be at the
Architect's discretion, no profit on such items shall be allowed to the Contractor.

d. No prime cost sum or sums (or any portion thereof) shall be included in any certificate for
payment to the Contractor until the receipted accounts relating to them have been produced by
the Contractor to the Architect. Such account shall show all discounts and sum or sums in
respect of such discounts shall be treated as a trade discount provided always that should the
Contractor in lieu of producing such receipted accounts request the Architect in writing to issue a
certificate on the .Employer for such sum or sums due either on account in settlement to a sub-
contractor direct, the Architect shall upon satisfying himself that the sub-contractor is entitled to
the same, so issue the certificate, and such sum or sums shall be deducted from the amount of the
contract at the settlement of accounts and any profit or further sums which the Contractor is
properly entitled in respect of such sub-contract, and which is in conformity with the terms of the
contract, shall be allowed to the Contractor at the settlement of accounts as though the amount of
such certificate to the sub-contractor had been included in a certificate drawn in favor of the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Contractor.

e. If the Contractor neither produces the receipt nor gives authority to the Architect to issue a
certificate in favor of such sub-contractor direct, the Architect may, upon giving the Contractor
seven days‘ notice in writing of his intention to do so, issue to the subcontractor such certificate
direct on the Employer and obtain the receipt from the sub-contractor, which receipt shall be
deemed as discharge for the amount of such certificate as though given by the Contractor. In the
event of such default on the part of the Contractor, he shall not be allowed any profit he may
have added in the schedule of rates upon such sub contract.

f. The exercise of the option before referred to by the Contractor and the issue of certificates
before described to sub-contractor upon the Contractor's request or the issue to the sub-
contractor direct of the certificates by the Architect shall not however, relieve the Contractor
from any of the liabilities in respect of insufficient, faulty or incomplete work of the sub-
contractor for which he may be liable under the terms of the contract.

g. If any provisional items are provided for work of a nature usually carried out by the Contractor
in the ordinary course of his business the Employer shall give the Contractor an opportunity for
tendering for the same without prejudice to the Employer's right to accept any or reject any or all
of the tenders received.

35. Certificates and payments

The detailed measurements for the works done will be jointly taken by the Assistant Engineer
and the contractors authorized representative and recorded by the Assistant Engineer in the
authorized measurement books. The Contractor will sign the measurement book at the end of the
measurements in token of acceptance of measurement. The Contractor will then prepare a
bill based on the measurements and submit the typed bill in triplicate on or before the date fixed
by the Architect or if no date is so fixed by the 15th of month for the work done during the
previous month, and the: Architect shall, consistent with the stipulation in the Appendix to these
conditions of contract regarding "value of work for interim certificates" (or at closer intervals at
his discretion), cheek/take the measurements or cause the measurements to be checked/taken for
the purpose of having the same to be verified. And to the extent work has been executed in
accordance with the contract, issue interim certificate, and the Employer shall make payments to
the Contractor on the basis of such certificates within the period specified for honoring ,
interim certificates (in appendix to these conditions of contract), subject to retention of such
sums at the percentage marked in the said Appendix till the whole of the retention money
(security deposit) is collected where after the installments (interim payment) shall be up to the
full value of the work subsequently so executed and fixed.

239
 a. The Architect may in his discretion certify on general assessment about 80% of the claim
immediately on receipt of an interim bill verified by the Assistant Engineer prior to
checking/taking measurements and issue the relevant certificate for the balance after duly
'checking / taking measurements as aforesaid.
b. The Architect may at his discretion include in the interim certificate such amount as he may
consider proper on account of any materials which are in his opinion nonperishable and are in
accordance with the contract and which have been brought on the site in connection therewith and
are adequately stored and/or protected against damage by weather or other causes but which have
not at the time of advance been incorporated in the work 80% of their purchase value on
production of vouchers for the same. When materials on account of which such advance has been
made under this sub-clause are incorporated in the work the amount of the advance shall be
deducted from the next payment to be made under any of the clauses of this contract.
c. And when the works have been completed and the Architect shall have certified in writing that
they have been so completed the contractor shall submit the final bill in respect of the contract
works within one month thereafter. In accordance with the certificate to be issued by the Architect

CHAPTER - 20
a payment shall be made by the Employer as named in the Appendix ―Installment after virtual
completion". And the Contractor shall be entitled to the payment of the final balance in
accordance with the final certificate to be issued in writing by the Architect after the expiration of
the he period referred to as "the Defects Liability Period" in the Appendix hereto from the date of
completion or as soon after the expiration of such period as the works shall have been finally
completed and all defects made good according to the true intent and meaning thereof whichever
shall last happen. Provided always that the issue by the Architect of any certificate during the
progress of the works or at or after their completion shall not relieve the Contractor from his
liabilities under clause 2 and 21 nor relieve the Contractor of his liability in case of fraud,
dishonesty, or fraudulent concealment relating to the works or materials or to any matter dealt

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

with in the certificate, and in case of all defects and insufficiencies in the works or materials
which a reasonable examination would not have disclosed. No certificate of the Architect shall of
itself be conclusive evidence that any work or materials to which it relates are in accordance with
the contract nor will the Contractor have a claim for any amounts which the Architect might have
certified in any interim bill and paid by the Employer and which might subsequently be
discovered as not payable and in this respect the Employer's decision shall be final and binding.
d. The Architect shall have power to withhold any certificate if the works or any parts thereof are
not being carried out to his satisfaction.
e. The Architect may by any certificate make any correction in any previous certificate which shall
have been issued by him. No certificate of payment will be issued by the Architect if the
Contractor fails to insure the works (including third party and work-men compensation) and keep
them insured for the period mentioned in clause 2.

36. Retention Money to bear no interest

Retention Money (security deposit) available with the Employer however, shall be refunded to
the Contractor in the manner specified in the Appendix to the conditions of contract and shall
bear no interest whatsoever until the date of its return.

37. Matters accepted from Arbitration

The decision, opinion, direction, certificates (except for payment) with respect to all or any of the
matters under clause 2, 4, 7, 10, 14, 18, 20, 30, 32, 44, hereof (which matters are herein referred
to as the excepted matters) shall be final and conclusive and binding on the arties hereto and shall
be without appeal. Any other decision, opinion, direction, certificate or valuation of the Architect
or any refusal of the Architect to give any of the same shall be subject to the right of Arbitration
and review in the same way in all respect (including the provision as to opening the references) as
per clause 38.It is also a term of the contract that if contractor (s) do/does not make any demand
for arbitration in respect of any claim(s) within 90 days of receiving intimation from Employer /
Architect that the bill after due verification is passed for payment of a lesser amount, or
otherwise, the contractor's right under this agreement to refer to Arbitration shall be deemed to
have been forfeited and Employer / Architect shall be relieved and discharged of their liability
under this agreement in respect of such received by the Contractor(s) within 2 days of posting

240
 of the letter by Employer /Architect or when delivered by hand immediately after receipt thereof
by the contractor(s), whichever is earlier. Further, a letter signed by the officials of
Employer/Architect that the letter was so posted to the contractor(s) shall be conclusive.

38. Arbitration clause

a. All disputes or differences of any kind whatsoever which shall at any time arise between the
parties hereto touching or concerning the works or the execution or maintenance thereof under
this contract or the rights under this contract or the construction operation or effect thereof or
liabilities of the parties arising out of or in relation thereto whether before, during or after
completion, determination, foreclosure or breach of the contract (other than those in respect of
which the decision of any person is by the contract express to be final and binding) shall after
written notice by either party to the contract to the other of them and to Appointing Authority
who shall be designated for this purpose by the Employer be referred for adjudication to a sole
arbitrator to be appointed as herein after provided.
b. For the purpose of appointing the sole arbitrator referred to above, the Appointing Authority
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

will send within thirty days of receipt by him of the written notice aforesaid to the contractor a
panel of three names of persons who shall be presently unconnected with the organization for
which the work is executed, and they should be either a fellow of the Institute of Engineer's
(India) or fellow of Indian Institute of Architects
c. The Contractor shall on receipt by him of the names as aforesaid select anyone of the persons
named to be appointed as a sole arbitrator and communicate his name to the Appointing
Authority shall thereupon without any delay appoint the said person as the sole arbitrator. If the
Contractor fails to communicate such selection as provided above within the period specified,
the Appointing Authority shall make the selection and appoint such selected person as the sole
arbitrator.
d. If the Appointing Authority fails to send to the Contractor the panel of three names as
aforesaid within the period specified, 'the Contractor shall send to the Appointing Authority a
panel of I three names of persons who shall be unconnected with either party. The Appointing
Authority shall on receipt by him of the names I as aforesaid select anyone of the persons named
and appoint him as the sole arbitrator within 30 days of receipt by him of the panel and inform
the Contractor accordingly. If the Appointing Authority fails to communicate such selection as
provided herein within the period specified the Contractor shall be entitled to appoint one of the
person from the panel as the sole arbitrator and communicate his name to the Appointing
Authority.
e. If the Arbitrator so appointed is unable or unwilling to act or resigns his appointment or vacates
his office due to any reason what so ever another sole arbitrator shall be appointed as aforesaid.
f. The work under the contract, shall however, continue during the arbitration proceedings and no
payment due or payable to the Contractor shall be withheld on account of such proceedings.
g. The Arbitrator shall be deemed to have entered on the reference on the date he issues notice to
both the parties fixing the date of the first hearing.
h. The Arbitrator may from time to time, with the consent of the parties, enlarge the time for
making and publishing the award.
i. The Arbitrator shall give a separate award in respect of each dispute or difference referred to
him. The Arbitrator shall decide such dispute in accordance .with the terms of the contract and
give a reasoned award.
j. The fees, if any, of the Arbitrator shall, if required to be paid before the award is made and
published, be paid half and half by each of the parties. The costs of the reference and of the
award including the fees, if any, of the Arbitrator who may direct to and by whom and in what
manner, such costs or any part thereof shall be paid and may fix or settle the amount of cost to be
so paid.
k. The award of the Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.
l. Subject to aforesaid the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 or any
statutory modification or reenactment thereof and the rules made there under, and for the time
being in force, shall apply to the arbitration proceeding under this clause.
m. The venue for Arbitration shall be New Delhi unless otherwise directed by the Arbitrator under
241
 compelling circumstances (e.g. a hearing at site for physical inspection / verification).

39. Right of technical scrutiny of the bills

The Employer shall have a right to cause a technical examination of the works and the bills final or
otherwise of the Contractor including all supporting vouchers, abstract, etc. to be made before or
after payment thereof. If as a result of this examination or otherwise any sum is found to have been
overpaid or over-certified it shall be lawful for the Employer to recover such sum(s). This shall be
done by the Employer within 6 months of the presentation of Certificate of payment i.e. after final
certificate.

40. Employer entitled to recover compensation paid or payable to workmen

If, for any reason, the Employer is obliged, by virtue of the provisions of sub-section (1) of section
12 of the Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923, to pay compensation to a workman employed by the
Contractor, in execution of the works the Employer will recover from the Contractor the amount of

CHAPTER - 20
compensation so paid, and without prejudice, to the rights of the Employer under subsection (2) of
section 12 of the said Act, the Employer will be at liberty to recover such amount or any part
thereof by deducting it from the security deposit or from any sum due by the Employer to the
Contractor under this contract or otherwise. The Employer shall not be bound to contest any claim
made against him under sub section (1) of section 12 of the said Act, except on the written request
of the Contractor and upon his giving to the Employer full security for all costs for which the
Employer might become liable in consequence of contesting such claim.

41. Labour Laws / Regulations

a. The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient numbers directly or through sub-contractors to

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

maintain throughout the period of the contract the rate of progress required according to the
approved programme of work and of quality to ensure proper workmanship in accordance withthe
specification and drawings and the Architect‘s instructions. The Contractor will comply with the
provisions of all Acts of Government relating to labour and the rules and regulations made there
under from time to time. He shall also submit at the proper time all particulars and statements
required to be furnished to the labour authorities on being directed to do so by the Architects. The
Contractor shall provide at the site facilities for first aid drinking water, washing and bathing,
latrines and urinals. The Contractor shall maintain a crèche at the site for the benefit of the working
women with children. It is necessary to obtain a certificate of Registration from the concerned
Labour Commissioner for carrying out the work. Non obtaining of the certificate is violation of
section 7 of C.L. (R&A) Act, 1970 Legal action by way of prosecution under section 23 of the Act
can be taken by appropriate authority.
b. Payment of Wages -The Contractor shall pay to labour employed by him either directly or through
sub-contractors, wages not less than fair minimum wages as prescribed for the locality where work
is performed or as per the provisions of the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970,
and the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules, 1971, wherever applicable.
c. The Contractor shall, notwithstanding the provisions of any contractor the contrary, cause to be
paid fair wage to labour indirectly engaged on the work, including any labour engaged by his sub-
contractors in connection with the said work, as if the labour had been directly employed by him.
d. In respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the works for performance of the
Contractor's part of this agreement, the Contractor shall comply with or cause to be complied with
the C.P.W.D. Contractor's Labour Regulations as made by the Government from time to time in
regard to payment of wages, wage period, deductions from wages, recovery of wages not paid and
deductions un authorized made, maintenance of wage books or wage slips, publication of scale of
wages and other terms of employment, inspection and submission of periodical returns and allother
matters of the like nature and/or as per the provisions of the contract Labour (Regulations and
Abolition) Act, 1970 and the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Central Rules 1971,
wherever applicable.

242
 42. Apprentices Act
The Contractor shall comply with provisions of the Apprentice Act,1961, and the Rules and
orders issued there under from time to time. Failure to do so will amount to a breach of contract
and the Employer may in his discretion terminate the contract. The Contractor shall also be
liable for any

43. When Contractor Dies

Without prejudice to any rights or remedies under this contract, if the contractor dies, the
Employer shall have the option of terminating the contract without compensation to the
Contractor.

44 . Use of materials
Contractor is required to use materials as described in the specifications and approved by the
conservation architect.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

45 Site Drainage
All water which may accumulate on the site during the progress of the works, or in trenches and
excavations, from other than the excepted risks (as defined in this contract) shall be removed
from the site to the satisfaction of the Architect by the Contractor at his own expense.

46. Nuisance
The Contractor shall not at any time, do, cause or permit any nuisance on the site or do anything
which shall cause unnecessary disturbance or inconvenience to owners, tenants or occupiers of
other properties near the site and to the public generally.

47. Watching and Lighting

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense, all lights, and guards, fencing
and watching when and
Where necessary or required by the Architects for the protection of the works or for the safety
and convenience of those employed on the works or the public.

48. Condition for storage of material

Contractor should follow the guidelines for storing materials for the conservation as specified in
the specification chapter.
a. The Contractor shall construct suitable go-down(s)at the site of works for storing the material
safe against damage by sun, rains, dampness, fire, theft, etc. at his own cost and also employ
necessary watch and ward establishment for the purpose at his own cost.
b. Lime bags shall be stocked by the Contractor in separate go downs constructed by him having
waterproof roofs, floors consisting of layers in dry bricks or stone slabs away from the damp
areas.
c. Day to day receipt and issue account of various materials such as lime, surkhi etc shall be
maintained in the prescribed register and signed by the Contractor or his authorized agent and
the Assistant Engineer.
d. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safe custody of and damage to materials.

49. Water and Electricity

Contractor shall make his own arrangements for water required for drinking and instruction and
also for electric supply at site, at his own cost. The contractor shall get water used for
construction purpose tested periodically at his cost and shall get the same approved from
Architect/ Employer. However the water thus drawn should be made available to the other
agencies also working at site.

50. Income Tax / Sales Tax on Works Contract / Vat

Income Tax/GS Tax on works Contract / shall be deducted at source by the Employer from the
contractor interim and final bill's payment as required by law

243
51. Suspension of Works
If the Contractor, except on account of any legal restraint upon the employer preventing the
contingency of the works, or on account of any of the causes mentioned in the clause 'Extension
of Time' or in the case of a certificate being withheld or not paid when due, shall suspend works
or if the opinion of the Architects, shall neglect or fail to proceed with due diligence in the
performance of his part of the Contract of if he shall more then once make default in the
respects mentioned in clause 20 (removal of improper work and materials), the Employer
through the Architect shall have the power to give notice in writing to the Contractor requiring
that the works be proceeded within a reasonable manner, and with reasonable dispatch such
notice shall not be unreasonably given and must signify that it purports to be a notice under the
provisions of this clause and must specify the acts or defaults on the part of the Contractor upon

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

which it is based. After such notice shall have been given, the Contractor shall not be at liberty
to remove from the site of works, or from any ground contiguous thereto, any plant or materials
belonging to him which shall have been placed there on for the purpose of work, and the
Employer shall have lien upon such plants and materials to subsists from date of such notice
being given until the notice shall have been complied with provided always that such lien shall
not under any circumstances subsist after the expiration of 30 (thirty) days from the date of such
notice given, unless the Employer shall have entered upon and taken possession of the works
and site as hereinafter provided. If the Contractor shall fail for seven days after such notice has
been given, to proceed with the works as therein prescribed, the Employer may enter upon and
take possession of the works and site, and of all such plants and materials thereon intended to be
used for the works, and the Employer shall retain and held a lien upon all such plants and
materials until the work shall have been completed under powers hereinafter conferred upon
him.
If the Employer shall exercise the above power, he may engage any other person to
complete the works and exclude the Contractor, his agents and servants from entry upon or
access to the same, except that the Contractor or any person appointed in writing may have
access at all times during the progress of the works to inspect, survey and measure the works.
Such written appointments or a copy thereof shall be delivered to the Architects before the
person appointed comes on to the works and the Employer shall take such steps as in the
opinion of the Architect may be reasonably necessary for completing the works, without undue
delay or expense using for that purpose the plant and materials above mentioned in so far as
they are suitable and adopted to such use. Upon the Completion of the works, the Architect shall
certify the amount of the expenses properly incurred consequent on and incidental to the default
of the Contractor as aforesaid and in completing the works by other persons. Should the amount
so certified as the expenses properly incurred be less than the amount which should have been
due to the Contractor upon the completion of the works by him, the difference shall be paid to
the Contractor by the Employer should the amount of the former exceed the latter- the
difference shall be paid by the Contractor to the Employer. The Employer shall not be liable to
make any further payments or compensations to the contractor for or on account of the proper
use of the plant for the completion of the works under the provision herein before mentioned
other than such payments as is included in the Contract. After the works shall have been so
completed by persons other than the Contractor, under the provisions herein before contained
the Architect shall give notice to the Contractor to remove his plant and all surplus materials as
may not have been used in the completion of the works from the site. If such plant and materials
are not removed within a period of 14 days after the notice shall have been given, the Employer
may remove and sell the same, holding the proceeds less the cost of the removal and sale, to the
credit of the Contractor. The Employer shall not be responsible for any loss sustained by the
Contractor from the sale of the plant in the event of the Contractor not removing it after notice.
52. Architect‘s Delay in Progress
The Architect may delay the progress of the works in case of rains or other wise, without
vitiating the Contract and Grant such extension of time with the approval of the Employer for
the completion of the Contract as he may think proper and sufficient in consequence of such
delay, and the Contractor shall not make any claim for compensation or damage in relation
thereto.

244
 .

53. Sales Tax

As this contract is treated as a transaction of overall sale the contractor shall get himself
registered with the Appropriate Authority for the purpose and file returns as required by rules.
(The resultant extra burden of such tax shall be borne by The contractor). No other expenses,
overheads, incidentals shall be borne by the Employer. The contractor shall produce proper
accounts and supporting details.

54. Materials at site

Where unfixed materials at site are proposed to be included in an interim certificate for payment
the permissible 80% of the purchase value shall not be more than 80% of the value reflected by
relevant break up of the appropriate item rate in the bills of quantities (i.e. the lower of the two
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

shall be applied/adopted). Subject to other conditions being satisfied it shall be open to the
Architect to consider certification of a bill which is dominantly for materials at site only.

55. Sources of materials

The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Architect for sources from which he proposes to
procure materials. Such approval shall be obtained well in advance of purchase/ordering of the
materials. In particular samples of cement, steel, aggregates, sand, stone etc. which are required
to be used almost at commencement of work shall be submitted and tested without delay. Failure
of the contractor to implement this shall not entitle him to any extension of time in respect of
delay arising there from. A site order note book should be maintained at site right from the
Commencement of the work. It should be kept available for the Inspecting Officer or Assistant
Engineer or any authorized person of the Employer or the Architect. The rectification / changes
/ instructions, ordered / suggested in the site order book should be incorporated point wise and
intimated to the office of the Architect within 30 days from date of such instructions. If the
Contractor fails to incorporate/intimate in time such instruction given to them it will be
considered as breach of contract and is liable to be penalized. In this regard the decision of the
Architect will be final and binding on theContractor.

56. Obtaining of Water and Sewerage Connections

The Contractor shall be responsible for filling necessary forms duly signed by the Employer
through Architects and follow up of application for ‗C‘ ‗D‘ forms or equivalent forms if any and
water connection, sewer connection to the project. The Contractor shall carry out all the liaison
work required for obtaining water supply at site commencing from filing of application. This
liaison shall be deemed to be a part of the contract. The Employer‘s liability to bear the deposit
amount, any fees or cost of meters etc. whatsoever is in nature of reimbursement to the
contractor that is the contractor shall pay the charges initially direct to the relevant authorities
The contractor shall not be entitled to any other expenses, overheads incidentals etc. He should
produce account and supporting details for verification by the Architect. The contractor shall not
raise any plea, quoting delays in completion of the formalities or of delays by the concerned
authorities.

Contractors Signature For PWD

245
7. Referencing appendix
Appendix 1

Clause No.

Defects Liability Period months

Minimum amount for third party Insurance Rs /(Rupees
Date of commencement

CHAPTER - 20
Date of completion i.e months from the above date

Liquidated Damages at the rate of 5% per week upto a maximum of 5% of

the. contract amount

Value of Bills for interim Certificates Rs minimum.

Retention percentage 8% on running bills

Initial Security Deposit 2% of the total value of the contract

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(Including earnest money Deposited).

Total Security Deposit Maximum of 5% of contract value

(including) Retention Money.

Installment after virtual completion 50% of the Total Security Deposit will be
released along/ with the final certificate
of payment and the certified balance after
Defects Liability Period (after due
adjustments, if any).

Period for honoring Interim Certificates Ten working days from the date of receipt
of the certified bill from the Architect.

Period for Honoring Final Certificate 12 weeks from the date of receipt of the

Appointing Authority
Signature of the Bidder

246
 Appendix 2

Drawings

The following drawings are available for inspection at the office of the Architects as stated
hereinbefore and the tenderers are deemed to have studied the same. This set of drawings will
form a part of the formal agreement.

=====================================================================
SL. Type Drawing No. Total No.
=====================================================================
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

247
 Proforma 1
CONTRACTOR‘S LIABILITY AND INSURANCE: SUMMARY

Sl. Nature and Insurance Value of Name of Validity period of

No scope of Policy Number Insurance Insurer Insurance
work

CHAPTER - 20
a. Loss or damage to works or any part thereof and all materials at site from any cause whatsoever
b. b
b. Damage loss or injury to any property of the Employer or consultant to any person including the
Employer or Consultant his Agent and servants.
c. Claims under the workmen‘s Compensation Act 1933, the Minimum Wages Act 1948 and the
contract 1 above (Regulation and Abolition Act 1970)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Signature of Contractor: Address:

………………………… ……………….

………………………… ……………….

Witness:

……………………

……………………

……………………

248
 Proforma 2

No. As per As per For Remarks

Current Bill Previous Bill Current Bill

Number Number Number Amount
Amount Rs. Amounts Rs. Rs.

Name of work- Interim Bill No.

Deviated Items
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Extra Items
Deleted Item (-)
Net Excess Savings

Tender Items (As executed)

Actual total as executed

Tender amount

249
 Proforma 3

Name of
Work

Interim Bill No

Tender Provision Actual Amount (Rs) ...................... remarks

CHAPTER - 20
Deviated Items
(Pink Sheets)

Extra Items
(Yellow
Sheets)

Deleted Items (-)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Tender items (As executed)
Actual Cost:
(As executed) Less tender Cost

Net Excess/Saving

250
 Proforma 4
Contractor liability

Name & Number Value of Validity Loss or Damage

of insurance policy Insurance period to work (covered
With Description under policy for
any part thereof
and all materials
at site from any
cause whatsoever
1. 2 3 4
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

==================================================================
a)
b)
c)
===================================================================
Damage loss or injury Claim under the workman Remarks
to any property of compensation Act 1923
Employer/Consultant The minimum Wages Act
or his Agents and 1948 & Contract Labour
Servants Regulation & Abolition
Act 1970
====================================================================

5 6 7
NB: Details o further policies if any taken and the loss or damage if any under that policy may please be indicated
separately at appropriated places.

Signature of Contractor

Address………………..

…………………..
Witness………………………….

251
 Proforma 5

Draft for letter to be written by the Contractor to the Consultant in connection with the Virtual
Completion

Certificate as per clause No. Page No……of the Contract.

Having executed the work in terms of the Contract, we hereby certify and affirm that we have virtually
completed the contracted works.

CHAPTER - 20
We hereby certify that the works has been executed wholly to our satisfaction and with the materials
and workmanship in accordance with the contract between us. We do certify further that we have
executed the work in accordance with the applicable laws and without any transgression of such laws.

Signature of Contractor

Address…………………………….

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

…………………………….

252
 Proforma 6
Certificate of insurance policy

This is to certify that the work for which this bill is resented was executed only after obtaining
the necessary insurance policies in accordance with obligation under this contract and during the
execution of such work, the Insurance Policy was current and valid as detailed below:

Particulars covered Contractor‘s Third Workman‘s Insurance

Plant, Machinery Party
Covered by Workmen‘s No covered
and materials Insur
Insurance ance Compensation Act workman‘s
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Compensation
Act
1 2 3 4 5

Name of Insurance Company -

Policy No. -

Value in Rs. -

Date of issue -

Date of Expiry -

253
 Proforma 7
BANK GUARANTEE

(On non-Judicial stamp paper of appropriate value) (For - EMD etc. )

- 20
In the consideration of PWD , (hereinafter referred

MANUAL-2020
as Employer ) having agreed to exempt M/S___a company registered under the , having its registered
office at (hereinafter called the said Contractor) from the

PWD ENGINEERINGCHAPTER
demand, under the terms and conditions of the Agreement dated made between
Employer and the Contractor (hereinafter as the said Agreement) from the security deposit for the due
fulfillment of the said Contractor of the terms & conditions contained in the said Agreement on production
of a Bank Guarantee for Rs.----------------(Rupees ), we constituted under the
Banking Companies (Acquisition & Transfer of Undertaking Act 1970) having its Head Office at------------
--and one of its branches at (hereinafter referred to as ―the Bank") at the request of M/S (contractor)
do hereby undertake to pay to Employer an amount not exceeding Rs.-------- (Rupees ) against any loss or
damage caused to or suffered or would be caused to or suffered by the Employer by reason of any breach
by the said Contractor of any terms & conditions contained in the said Agreement.

We -------------------------------------------------------------- do hereby undertake to pay the amount due and

payable under this guarantee without any demur, merely on a demand from Employer stating that the
amount claimed is due by way of loss damage caused or likely to be caused to or suffered by Employer by
reason of breach by the said contractor of any of the terms and conditions contained in the said Agreement
or by reason of the Contractor(s) failure to perform the said Agreement. Any such demand made on the
bank shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the bank under this guarantee. However,
our liabilities under this guarantee shall be restricted to an amount not exceeding Rs.. (Rupees ).

We undertake to pay to the Employer an y money so

demanded notwithstanding any dispute or disputes raised by the contractor in any suit or proceedings
pending before any court or Tribunal relating thereto, our liabilities this present being absolute and
unequivocal. The payment so made by us under this bond shall be a valid discharge of our liabilities for
payment there under and the Contractor shall have no claim against us for making such payment.
We further agree and undertake that the guarantee herein contained shall remain infill force and
effective during the period that would be taken for the performance of the said Agreement and that it shall
continue to be enforceable till all the dues of the Employer under or by virtue of the said Agreement have
been fully paid and its claims satisfied or discharged or till the Authorized representative of Employer,
certifies that the terms and conditions of the said Agreement have been fully and properly carried out by the
said contractor and accordingly discharges this guarantee. Unless a demand or claim under this guarantee is
made on us in writing on or before the we shall be discharged from all inabilities under this guarantee
thereafter.

We ---------------------------------------------------------- further undertake and agree that the Employer shall have
the full liberty without our consent and without effecting in any manner our obligations hereunder to vary
in all the terms and conditions of the said Agreement of to extend time of performance by the said
contractor from time to time, or to postpone for any time or, from time to time, any of the powers
exercisable by the Employer against the Contractor and to forebear or enforce any of the terms and

254
 conditions relating to the, said Agreement and we shall not be relieved from our liabilities by reason or any
such variation or extension being granted to the said Contractor or for any forbearance, act of omission on
the part of the Employer or any indulgence by Employer to the said Contractor by any such matter or thing
whatsoever under the law relating to sureties would, but for this provision have effect of so relieving us.
This guarantee shall remain valid and in full force till------------- and if no demand or claim under this
guarantee is made on us in writing on or before ------------- we shall be discharged from all liabilities under
the guarantee. Our liabilities under this guarantee are restricted to Rs.---------------------------------- Rupees--
----------------) we further undertake to renew this guarantee on the receipt of call from Employer without
any reference to the Contractor. Our liabilities to renew the guarantee shall be absolute.
This guarantee shall not be discharged due to the change in the constitution of Employer, or the
Contractor We----------------------------------------------------------------lastly, undertake not to revoke this
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent of Employer in writing.

Place:

Signature
Dated : day of

255
 Proforma 8
BANK GUARANTEE
(On non-Judicial stamp paper of appropriate value (For Mobilization Advance)

In consideration of the Employer which expression shall unless repugnant to the subject or
context include its successors and assigns) having agreed under the terms and conditions of
contract vide its agreement dated --- made between ---------------------------------------- and the
Employer in connection with the ― conservation of --------------------------------------------- (Heritage
Site)‖ (hereinafter called the 'contract' which expression shall, wherever the context so requires
include its successors and assignee).
Whereas one of the conditions of the contract places on the contractor is that the owner should
make a payment of Rs ------ (Rupees _____) being ( )

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020CHAPTER - 20

of the contract value as Mobilisation Advance to the Contractor, hereinafter referred to as
Mobilisation Advance on production of Bank Guarantee of an equal value and such
Mobilisation Advance shall be recovered after the Running Account Bill of the Contractor in
such a manner that the total advance is recovered before 80% of the total contract amount work
is complete.
Now therefore in consideration of the mutual covenants and at the instance of the Contractor,
the surety hereby gives and irrevocable and unconditional guarantee to pay on first part without
demur to the owner a sum of Rs. Rupees ) or such portion
thereof not exceeding the said sum as may from time to time required by the owner in such
manner as the owner may direct should the contractor commit default in performing any of the
terms and conditions of the contract, or in payment of any money due to the owner or in case the
amount cannot be deducted by the owner from the Running bills of the contractor towards the
payment of Mobilisation Advance. The owner shall have the full liberty, without "reference to
SURETY and without affecting the guarantee to postpone for any time or from time to time the
exercise of any of the powers and rights conferred on owner under the contract with the
contractor and or to enforce' or forebear from enforcing any powers or rights or by reasons of
time being given to the contractor and such postponement of fore bear would not have the effect
of releasing the SURETY from its obligations under this deed. The right of the owner to recover
a sum of Rs.--------------------(Rupees ) from the Surety in the manner
aforesaid will not be affected or suspended by reason of the fact that any dispute or disputes has
or have been raised by the contractor and/or that any dispute or disputes is or are pending before
any officer, Tribunal or court. The Guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or
affected by the liquidation or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of
the contractor but shall in all respects and for all purpose be binding and operative until payment
of all money due to the owner in respect of such liability or liabilities.
The liabilities of the Surety under this Guarantee is restricted to Rs. -------------- (Rupees--------
----).This Guarantee will remain in force until --. Unless a demand or claim under this
Guarantee in writing is filed against Surety on or before where after all the rights of the owner
under the said Guarantee shall be forfeited and the Surety shall be relived and discharged from
all liabilities there under. Notwithstanding anything herein contained our liability under this
Guarantee shall: be limited to a sum of Rs. -----------------(Rupees )
Stand completely discharged and all your rights under this Guarantee shall stand extinguished
if no claim or demand is made upon us in writing on or before--.

Place
Signature
Dated day of

256
 8. Specifications
I. General Specifications

Without forgoing the requirements of the conditions of Tender and the Conditions of Contract the
works in general shall conform to the "CPWD Specifications-" published by PWD, J & K and the
"Specifications for works" stated in this tender. In case items not covered by the general specifications
referred above, reference shall be made to the appropriate I.S. Code. If there is any difference in the
particular specifications of individual item of work and the description of item as given in the Schedule
of quantity, the latter shall prevail. In case of any work for which there is no specification in I.S.
specifications or in the specifications forming part of tender documents or in case there is any variation,
such work shall be carried out in all respects in accordance with the instructions to be issued by the
Architects. The term engineer-in-charge appearing in the specifications shall mean the Arch. or his
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

authorized representative as the context may demand consistent with the conditions and other
stipulations of this contract. The term Department shall mean the Employer. Any reference to ISI shall
also mean reference to its successor Bureau of Indian Standards. All corrections to "Specifications-" or
latest revisions of I.S. shall be deemed to apply to this contract.
Materials bearing ISI certification mark shall be given highest preference for use in the works.
Where the Contractor is required to do, perform, execute (etc.) any work or service or the like it shall
be deemed to be at his own cost. Absence of terms providing, Supplying, installing, fixing, etc. shall
not even remotely entitle the Contractor to any additional payment therefor. The rates accepted in
the Schedule of Quantities apply to all floors, heights, depths, leads lifts, spans, sizes, shapes,
locations, etc. unless a distinction has been included in the very Schedule.
The Specifications and the Schedules may have been divided into various sub-heads for convenience
only. This does not limit applicability of one to the other nor does it absolve the Contractor of his
responsibility to complete any trade/item of work as reasonably inferred from one or more of such sub-
heads.
All work under this contract is deemed to be performed above subsoil water level. However,
removalof water collected from rains and the like shall be treated as part of contractual risk /
obligation. Screws, bolts, nuts, washers, hold fasts, lugs, anchors, clamps, plugs, suspenders, brackets,
straps and fasteners of the like are deemed to be included in the rates of various items unless the
Schedule of Quantities expressed a different intention. Resetting any displacements, making good
holes/chases and such other incidental jobs are included in rates of respective items for which these are
required
Material specifications‘

A) Non hydraulic lime

Non hydraulic lime is also known as quick lime or fat lime or rich lime. It is available in lump
forms packed in air tight bags so also known as lump lime. It is manufactures by Calcination of pure
0
lime stone at 700 C.Calcinations is accomplished by heating the pure lime stone (that is to say 99 %
CaCO3) at around 700°C-8000C to produce quick lime or calcium oxide ( CaO) or non-hydraulic lime
.At this temperature carbon dioxide and water driven off. Produced quick lime has maximum purity
and so called as Fat lime.
When limestone burnt, it loses weight due to release its CO2 this is known as the loss of ignition.
Generally, it looses approximately half the weight.

1) Selection of quick lime for conservation

Non hydraulic lime should be preferred for this specific work. It should be tested before
buying using following methods:

257
a) Testing the type of lime while buying
Slaking of quick lime is the best way to analyze the lump lime (quick lime) before buying.
Firstly, fill a litre (quart) measure with the burnt quicklime lumps available in the market or
local resources. Take small lumps of quicklime into an open container and filled it filled with
fresh clean water so that the quicklime is fully covered. Hold it in position below the water for
few minutes only and observes the reaction very carefully it gives all required information while
reacting with water.
Pure lime or fat lime -The lime hisses, swells rapidly, decrepitates, increases in temperature
sufficiently to produce water vapor, and turns to powder almost immediately or within a few

CHAPTER - 20
minutes. Volume is at least doubled by slaking.
Slightly hydraulic lime - The lime is inactive for a longer period than for fat lime, up to quarter
of an hour before there is any change. This will tend to be the slow opening up of cracks with
little or no falling to powder. A small amount of vapor may be seen, but considerably less and
cooler than for pure lime.
Moderately hydraulic lime -Similar to slightly hydraulic lime, but the change of state does not
commence for at least an hour or more after immersion.
Eminently hydraulic lime -An alteration in the state of the lime is barely noticeable, increase in
temperature is slight and cracks formed are very small and in some cases do not appear at all.
b) Testing of well burnt lime

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Size of lumps is important while buying lime. The lump to be tested need to be into small lumps
about the size of a walnut or small plum, say about 25mm to 50mm (1" to 2") in diameter .In
case of bigger size, it will not be fully calcined underneath. So while slaking, under burnt lime
stone will be procured which will act as an inert material in lime mortar. Well-burnt limestone
will produce good quicklime when the stone has been fully calcined. If lime stone is over burnt
or under burnt, there will be wastage of material as it never slaked.
2) Storage of quick lime
Quicklime exposed to the air will immediately start absorbing carbon dioxide as well as
moisture. This is termed air slaking, and will eventually convert the lime back into inert calcium
carbonate which has no binding properties. Storing quick lime-Ways in which to ensure that the
lime used is at its most reactive and will maintain its binding power and qualities of workability
are either to use it fresh from the kiln (i.e. the same day following burning), or to slake it under
water, also immediately after burning. Stored under water it cannot absorb carbon dioxide. Fat
lime stored this way will therefore remain indefinitely as excellent putty in the form of calcium
hydroxide, and improves with age. So it is required to store slaked lime in tank and it should be
covered with a layer of water to check the carbonation before use
3) Lime slaking
This process creates a lots of heat to cause the water to boil or split and produces Slaked lime
or Calcium Hydroxide or Portlandite ( Ca(OH)2) which is known as lime putty. Putty lime
produced by slaking quicklime in an excess of water to form lime putty. Lime putty is matured
for several months in pits or under a thin film of water to prevent carbonation .It is used for the
production of lime plasters, mortars, and lime wash. Also known as 'air' limes, 'fat' limes and
'high calcium' limes.
B) Aggregates
Sand and other aggregates comprise over 65 % of the volume of lime mortar.
The characteristics of the aggregates chosen are critical to the performance
of the mortar. Aggregates include natural sands and gravel from the river beds
and pits, materials such as crushed shells, various types of crushed rock- particularly sand stone
and occasionally lime stone.

258
 .

a) Sand
Sand particles plays an important role in the bonding .It is always preferred to use sharp and
angular sand for preparing lime mortar which provides good bonding of these crystals. Round
sand particles have tendency to slip one another so it does not produce workable lime mortar.
Sand shall be clean and gritty and from approved sources of fine sand and course sand. It shall
be well graded, and shall be free from salt, loam dust or other impurities. It shall be washed with
fresh water on site if so directed by the architect. The fine aggregates used shall confirm of IS:
383 f or grading, strength and all other impurities. Where required by the Architect, the fine
aggregated shall be subjected to the following tests in accordance with the procedures specified
in IS: 383.
b) Course aggregates
The course aggregates used shall be clear, hard washed and screened gravel of crushed stone
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

having a specific gravity of not less than 2.56 and shall be free from dust, fine materials, clay of
loam and soft or elongated particles. The course aggregate used shall conform of the IS: 369 for
grading, strength and other properties. Where required by the Architect, the course aggregates
shall be subjected to the following tests in, accordance with the procedure specified in IS: 383.

C ) Pozzolans for lime mortars

Non hydraulic limes can achieve hydraulic properties by adding certain pozzolans to fat
limes. Materials which enables lime mortars to set more rapidly include ash and brick dust(
surkhi) known as pozzolans . These additives are widely found in historic mortars of Indian as
well. In general materials from clay bricks fired at less than 600-900*C, will produce more
permeable and flexible mortars whist the hard burnt materials will tend to produce harden
mortar. These brick are crushed to produce fine brick dust (below 50 microns) known as sukhi
in the northen India. Lime ash ( khaka), bagra and rakhi are the other pozollanic additives which
can be used if available.
D) Hair and other reinforcement
Jute fibers should be used as reinforcement materials for plastering. The jute should be cleaned
and greese free, untangled and around 25 mm to 100 mm long. They should be added in lime
mortar shortly before use.
E) Other Organic additives
Other organic additives such as dal, bel, methe and jaggery should be added as directed by the
conservation architect.
F) Stones
The color of stone shall match with that of original stones. Stone shall be of type specified; it
shall be hard sound, free from decay and weathering. It shall be obtained from approved query.
Stone retrieved from damaged wall of building can be used if not damaged. Stone with round
surface shall not be used. It shall be roughly chiseled, uniformly dressed and fairly equal in size.
Size and style of ashler masonry shall be approved from the Architects Before execution all the
motifs style of monuments, corner stones, moldings, cornices, etc. shall be remade to its original
condition. The stitching shall be in line level, plump uniformity of joints.
G) Bricks
Bricks for plinth protection and external paving- Classification of bricks are according to its
average compressive strength ( kg / square cm.). The brick work shall be classified according to
the class designation of bricks used. The thickness of joints shall not exceed 1cm for brick work
with bricks of any class designation. The bricks shall be hard or machine molded. They shall be
free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. In general bricks of 9cm height shall be
molded with a frog of 10cm in length, 4cm in width, 1to 2 cm in depth on one of its flats sides.
The average water absorption of common burnt clay brick shall not be more than 20% by
weight. Brick Tiles where modular tiles are not freely available in the market, the tile brick of
F.P.S. thickness 4.4 cm shall be used unless otherwise specified. Brick bats shall be obtained
from well burnt bricks

259
 .
Brick for lakhori masonry repair works- Same size and color of bricks should be preferred for
the masonry repair works. If old bricks are not decayed, they should be reused. If old bricks
easily available from other resources, they can be used for such kind of repair works.

H) Timber
Timber is to be of the best of its kind, properly seasoned, of mature growth, free from worm
holes, saps, wraps, cracks and other defects. In general wood means best available wood of J &
K su ch as for Deodar wood to be used or the kind of wood already used in the historical
building. All woodwork shall be planned neatly and truly finished to the exact dimensions. All
joints shall be neat and strong truly and accurately fitted and glued before being fitted together.

CHAPTER - 20
I) Reuse of old material
As this is a specialized work of restoration the work will also entail reuse of historic material
were ever possible. After removal or demolishing or areas all serviceable material needs to be
staked safely and all non serviceable material may be disposed, only after the approval of the
consultant. Contractor will make efforts in preserving the authenticity of the building. Material
taken out of the building will be first checked for their possibility of reuse after proper treatment
& repairs. The decision of the consultant in this regard will be final. When dismantling stone
masonry, pre-cast or wooden / steel members previous to re building, it may be necessary to
mark or number the old items so that it could be replaced to its original position more readily. In

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

doing this care should be taken not to incise the number or to apply to the exposed side of the
member, any oil paint or other pigment or stains which will be difficult to remove from the
surface. The number should be made on the face by chalk and photograph them before
dismantling. After dismantling the members could be numbered on the back with a durable
medium.

(J) Preparation of lime mortars

Lime putty, sand, surkhi and organic addives mixed together in specified proportions in lime
chakki or lime mortar machine. No water should be added to avoid shrinkage cracks in the
resulting lime works.

Lime mortar chakki Lime mortar machnie

K) Storage of lime mortar

Lime mortar should be stored in a shaded area protected from sun light and air. It should be
covered with a layer of water to check the carbonation process.

260
 III) Tools for conservation
Racking and repointing tools, plastering tools, measuring tools, ramming tools should be
made as per the site specific conditions and as directed by the conservation architect. For curing
of lime work only specified water spray pump should be used.

IV. Principal for conservation

Conservation should make use of all the knowledge, skills and disciplines which can
contribute to the study and care of the place. Traditional techniques and materials are preferred
for the conservation of significant fabric. In some circumstances modern techniques and
materials which offer substantial conservation benefits may be appropriate. The use of modern
materials and techniques must be supported by firm scientific evidence or by a body of
experience. One who is working on historic buildings should keep in mind that historic
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

character of a heritage resource is based on the assumptions that the historic materials and
features and their unique craftsmanship are of primary importance and that in consequence, they
are to be retained, and restored to the greatest extent possible, not removed and replaced with
materials and features which appear to be historic, but which are in fact new.
Conservation should be carried out in accordance with a conservation plan, which brings
together all of the information and research necessary to guide the proposed action; ensure that
what is to be conserved is properly recorded before, during and after work; make provision for
recording where continued preservation is no longer possible or where loss is taking Place
through change or ongoing decay, and ensure that all records are retained in readily accessible
archives;
Conservation should include effective arrangements for monitoring the condition and
safety of the site and for routine maintenance and good housekeeping.

Guidelines for selecting material for conservation

Database to be used for selection of material for conservation
Material database including material characteristic should be prepared during documentation of
building. Database should include materials used in the structures, available locally and regional
markets and if these materials are not available in this area other resources should be identified.
Identifying historic material proportions and properties which is identified in labs and visual
inspection and Preparing a list on material needed, their properties and quantities Selecting
appropriate material from the database prepared during the documentation work having similar
properties as historic material having. In case of mortar /plaster, preparing samples as per
historic proportions and testing it on similar surfaces. After getting desired results using it
conservation works. Properties to be checked for selection of appropriate material for
conservation: Strength of the material in comparison to historic material or required material
Color of the material should match with the historic material Cement or other inappropriate
material should not be used for any conservation works Workability, consistency, plasticity,
setting time and kind of setting should be checked before using it on historic structures In
selection of material Standards should also be referred for their properties, which it should
possess.
Technical Guidelines for material conservation
It is required to identifying the source of material for conservation. After testing of the
materials their original resource should be identified and procure for conservation. If original
material not available material which is similar to original material in terms of chemical
properties, color, texture and other process should be reversible so membrane materials should
be used required material qualities otherwise the closest options should be identify. Use of
modern materials and techniques should always be the second option .The use of local materials
and traditional techniques must invariably be preferred. Their choice must be based on the
availability of traditional knowledge systems. In some circumstances modern techniques and
materials which offer substantial conservation benefits may be appropriate. The use of modern
materials and techniques must be supported by firm scientific evidence or by a body of
experienced professionals.1 Modern substitutes should be considered only after their use is
proven efficient and judicious, and must not compromise the integrity and continuity of local
building traditions. Modern material and techniques can be used for conservation if some
261
 other alternative is not possible and it is must for the survival of the structure. It has
experienced that for some specific items such as earthquake retrofitting, structural
strengthening; water proofing etc. modern materials are more efficient. While selection of
appropriate materials we should always consider that these materials should not react with the
historic materials and fabric and if required these materials should be easily removed from the
structure. More appropriate to say the When deterioration occurs, repair the material and any
other related problems promptly to prevent further decay. Frequently, damaged materials can be
patched or consolidated. In other situations, however, some portion of the material may be
beyond repair. In such a case, consider replacement. In the case of primary historic building
materials the new material should match the original. It is important, however, that the extent of
replacement be minimized, because the original materials themselves contribute to the
authenticity of the property as a heritage resource. Even when the replacement material exactly
matches that of the original, the integrity of a heritage building is to some extent compromised
when extensive amounts are removed. Covering the original building material with a new

CHAPTER - 20
material is inappropriate covering original building material with a new material is inappropriate
and shall not be approved. Stucco should not be applied to existing heritage properties where
other original materials survive. When feasible remove later covering materials such as cement
plastering, inappropriate painting etc that obscures the original building material and have not
achieved historic significance. After removal of the outer layer, original layer should be repaired
as required. Painting brick masonry/ stone masonry/ historic decorative works is inappropriate.
It changes the character of a building and may deteriorate the original material as well as affect
the sense of visual continuity among other masonry structures in the area. Repair deteriorated
primary building material in a manner that maintains its heritage character. Modern consolidant
such as Epoxies and resins should not be used for any type of consolidation work. Use the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

gentlest means possible to clean the surface of a primary material. Perform a test patch to
determine that the cleaning method will cause no damage to the surface. Many procedures can
have an unanticipated negative effect upon building materials and result in accelerated
deterioration or a loss of character. Harsh cleaning methods, such as sand blasting, damage the
weather-protective glaze on brick and change its historic appearance. Such procedures should be
avoided. When cleaning is an appropriate treatment, a low pressure water wash is preferred.
Chemical cleaning also may be considered if a test patch is first reviewed.
Replacement of original materials should be avoided. If not feasible new material shall match
the original in composition, scale and finish. Replace only the amount required. If a portion of
any wooden are damaged beyond repair, then only they should be replaced, not the member.
Similarly, if some bricks of any wall are so badly damaged that they must be replaced, then the
new brick should match the original in size, finish and color. This is because the original
material exhibits a record of the labor and craftsmanship of an earlier time and this is lost when
it is replaced.
Deteriorated historic features shall be repaired rather than replaced. Where the severity of
deterioration requires replacement of a distinctive feature, the new feature shall match the old
design in color, texture, and other visual qualities and, where possible, materials. Replacement
of missing features shall be substantiated by documentary, physical, or pictorial evidence.
Repair rather than replace character- defining elements. Where character-defining elements are
too severely deteriorated to repair, and where sufficient physical evidence exists, replace them
with new elements that match the forms, materials and detailing of sound versions of the same
elements. Where there is insufficient physical evidence, make the form, material and detailing
of the new elements compatible with the character of the historic place. And if we are replacing
missing features from the restoration period with new features whose forms, materials and
detailing are based on sufficient physical, documentary and/or oral evidence.

NOTE: THE STANDARD BIDDING DOCUMENT FOR HERITAGE BUILDINGS SHALL BE

BROADLY GOVERNED BY HANDBOOK OF CONSERVATION OF HERITAGE BULIDINGS
OF CPWD.

262
 20.6.4 Consultancy Services
Consultancy services involve providing expert or strategic advice for project related
consultancy services which include feasibility studies, project management, engineering
services, training and development etc.

Engagement of consultants may be resorted in situations requiring high quality services for
which the procuring entity does not have requisite expertise. Approval of competent authority
should be obtained before engaging of consultant(s).

CHAPTER - 20
In consultancy services:-

i) A well defined scope of work/terms of reference (TOR-description of services) and the

time frame, for which services are to be availed of, should be determined consistent with
overall objectives of procuring entity.
ii) Equal opportunity to all qualified service providers/ consultants to compete should be
ensured.
iii) Engagement should be economical and efficient.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

iv) Transparency and integrity in the selection process (i,e proposed, awarded,
administered and executed according to highest ethical standards).

For details regarding consultancy may refer to manual for procurement of consultancy and
other services 2017 issued by Government of India Ministry of Finance, Department of
Expenditure.

Available on website : www.doe.gov.in

20.6.4.1 Standardization of EOI for hiring of architectural firms and

consultants

EXPRESSION OF INTEREST TWO COVER SYSTEM FOR

CONSULTANCY SERVICE
(THROUGH E- PROCUREMENT MODE)
FOR CONSTRUCTION OF

1. Construction and Design of to be constructed

at_____

263
 OFFICE OF THE EXECUTIVE ENGINEER R&B Division
FRESH TENDER NOTICE
NIT No.
Dated:
Expression of interest (EOI) for Consultancy service (Through e-procurement mode)
(TWO COVER SYSTEM)
For and on behalf of the President of India, Executive Engineer, PWD (R&B) Division
invites Expression of Interest (EOI) for selection of consultant for Architectural and allied
Engineering Consultancy Services from Registered firms /Consultants/Agencies under Indian
Partnership Act/Societies Registration Act or registered companies under companies act or the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

following work

S.NO Particular Tender fee Earnest Money

1

The bidding document consisting of qualifying information, eligibility criteria, bill of

Quantities set of terms and conditions of contract and other details can be viewed/
downloaded from the website www.jktenders.in as per the schedu1e given below
1 Date of Issue of Tender Notice
.
2 Period of downloading of bidding
. documents
3 Date, Time and place of pre-bid meeting
.
4 Bid submission Start Date
.
5 Bid Submission End Date
.
6 Date & time of
. opening
of Technical Bids
{Online).
7 Date & time of opening of Financial Bids be notified after technical bid
. 'Online). evaluation

Bid documents can be seen at an d downloaded from the website http://jktenders.gov.in. Bid
documents contain qualifying criteria for bidder, specifications, bill of quantities, Conditions and
other details.
Bids must be accompanied with cost of Tender document in shape of e-challan through Treasury
indicating Treasury Voucher No. & date and also indicating the name of work duly crediting to
0059-PWD (Revenue) uploading a copy of treasury challan /receipt. Earnest money/Bid security in
shape of CDR/FDR/ BG Pledged to the original instruments in respect of cost of documents, EMD
and relevant documents of L1 must be submitted to the Chief Engineer PW (R&B) Department -
before the issuance of allotment in favour of lowest bidder.

264
Financial Bids will be opened online in the office of the Chief Engineer PW (R&B) Department of
the technically responsive bidders.
The bid for the work shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 120 days from the date of
opening of bids. H any bidder/tenderer withdraws his bid/tender before the said period or makes any
modifications in the terms and conditions of the bid, the said earnest money shall stand forfeited.
Other details can be seen in the bidding documents. Instructions to bidders regarding e-tendering
process The interested bidder can download the NIT/bidding document from the website
http://jktenders.gov.in
To participate in bidding process, bidders have to get (DSC) "Digital Signature Certificate" as per
Information Technology Act-2000, to participate in online bidding. This certificate will be required
for digitally signing the bid. Bidders can get above mentioned digital certificate from any approved
vendors. The Bidders, who already possess valid (DSC) Digital Signature Certificates, need not to
procure new Digital Signature Certificate.
The bidders have to submit their bids online in electronic format with Digital Signature. The bids
cannot be uploaded without Digital Signature. No Proposal will be accepted in physical form. Bids
will be opened online as per time schedule mentioned above. Before submission of online bids,
bidders must ensure that scanned copies of all the necessary documents have been produced when

CHAPTER - 20
required. The department will not be responsible for delay in online submission of bids whatsoever
reasons maybe. All the required information for bid must be filled and submitted online. Bidders
should get ready with the original copies of cost of documents & EMD as specified in the tender
documents. The original instruments in respect of cost of Documents. EMD and relevant documents
of L1must be submitted to the Tender Opening Authority before the issuance of letter of allotment is
issued in favour of the lowest bidder.
The details of cost of documents, (copy of each challan) Copy of EMD instrument specified in the
tender documents should be Uploaded online (scanned copies) otherwise bid will not be accepted.
Bidders can contact the undersigned for any guidance for getting DSC or any other relevant details
in respect of e-tendering process.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The guidelines for submission of bid online can be downloaded from the website:
https://jktenders.gov.in The Department will not be res online for delay in online submission due
to any reason.
The Bidder must upload the copy of cost of document for Rs. 6000/- mentioned in the above e-NTT
through e- Challan/ treasury Challan indicating Treasury Voucher No. & Date and also indicating
the NIT and name of work duly crediting to 0059-PWD (Revenue) favoring Executive Engineer
R&B Division
No:-
Dated

Executive Engineer

PWD(R&B)______

Copy to the

265
 1. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER
Scope of Bid
The Executive Engineer as a representative of the President of India invites bids for the
Expression of Interest (as described in these documents and referred to as "the EOI'). The
name and identification number of the EOI is provided in the Appended NIT. The bidders may
submit bids for any or all of the EOI detailed in the table given in the Notice Inviting Tender.
Bid for each EOI should be submitted separately.
Throughout these documents the terms "bid" and "tender" and their derivatives (bidder/
tenderer, bid/tender, bidding/tendering etc.) are synonymous.
Q Qualification of the Bidder I Eligibility Criteria).
In order to qualify, all bidders must upload copies of documents as deined below:-
documents /Annexures to be uploaded
Annexure 1 -Copy of GSTIN registration and latest clearance certificate FORM GST - 3B
I.e. latest clearance certificate FORM GST- 3B of the preceding month to the issue of NIT.
For the NIT issued in month. the bidder has to upload the latest clearance certificate FORM
GST- 3B of the preceding month i.e. of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Annexure 2- Copy Of PAN Card

Annexure3-The bidder most upload coy of cost document for Rs60001- through e-
Challan/Treasury Challan indicating treasury voucher no. & date and also indicating NIT
No. & the name of work duly crediting to 0059-PWD (Revenue) favoring Executive
Engineer(PWD) R&B- .
Annexure 4- Demand Draft/CDR/FDR (Rs. 1000000/-) from any nationalized/scheduled
bank pledged to payable at
Annexure 5- Copy of the valid certificate of registration with Council of Architecture
(CoA), India
Annexure 6- Brief Profile of the organization.
Annexure7- Brief Bio data of Key Professionals with names of full time in house
architects/ retainers/consultants/associates.
Annexure 8- An affidavit of not being blacklisted.
Annexure 9- The certificate establishing that the applicant has continuous work experience
for the last 05 years in the relevant field from the date of this EOI.
Annexure 10- The certificate establishing that the applicant has a current N agreement
(Consortium) if applicable.
Annexure 11 - Details of similar projects awarded/designed and completed during the last
five years with names and addresses of clients, supported by drawings, sketches,
photographs, etc. in hard copies as well as soft copies.
Annexure 12- Document establishing that the applicant has experience in designing Green
Buildings conforming to GRIHAILEED etc. (If any).
Annexure 13- Income tax returns of last three years i.e. YY-YY.YY-YY, and YY-YY
along with Profit & Loss Statements certified by a chartered accountant.
Annexure14-Undertaking that the EOI bid uploaded by the applicant shall be valid for 120
days from the date of submission.
The applicant must have, at the minimum, continuous practice in the relevant field of
planning and designing of buildings for Five Yean till the year ending 31st March YYYY.
(Copies of work allotments to be uploaded).
The applicant must have been awarded/designed and completed, in the last five years
ending March 20YY, at least one similar nature of work of the magnitude of R Crores. The
details of such completed works must be uploaded by the applicant.
The applicant must have architects/structural engineers etc. with relevant qualifications and
experience working in-house on a full-time basis either as
employees/retainers/consultants/associates. Even though the bidders meet the above
qualifying criteria, they are subject to be disqualified If they have:

266
a). Made misleading or false representations in the forms, statements, affidavits duly attested
by magistrate and attachments submitted in proof of the qualification requirements: and/or
b). Record of poor performance such as abandoning the works, not properly completing the
contract inordinate delays in completion, litigation history, or financial failures etc.
One Bid per Bidder.
Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid for one work. A Bidder who submits more than one Bid
will cause the proposals with the Bidder's participation to be disqualified.
Cost of Bidding
The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his Bid, and
the Employer will, in no case be responsible or liable for those costs.
Site Visit
The Bidder, at his own cost, responsibility and risk is encouraged to visit, examine and

CHAPTER - 20
familiarize himself with the site of works and its surroundings and obtain all information that
may be necessary for preparing the Bid and entering into a contract for construction of the
works. The costs of visiting the site shall be at the Bidder's own expense. He may contact the
Executive Engineer in-charge of work for any guidance relating to site visit.

BIDDING DOCUMENTS.

Content of Bidding Documents

The set of bidding documents comprises the documents listed below:-. Notice Inviting Tender
Instruction to Bidders

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Qualification of the bidder/ Eligibility criteria Scope of Work Schedule of Payment Proposal
evaluation criteria Technical Proposal
Description of Registered Firm as per Annexure-A Declaration as per Annexure-B Contact
Details as per Annexure-C
List of Architect/Experts on pay roll as per Annexure-D
The bidder is expected to examine carefully all instructions, conditions of contract, terms and
specifications, bill of quantities, drawings in the Bid Document. Failure to comply with the
requirements of Bidding Document shall be at the bidder's own risk. Bids which are not
substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Documents, shall berejected
Clarification of Bidding Documents
A prospective bidder requiring any clarification of the bidding documents is advised to attend
the pre bid meeting for seeking clarifications if any.
Amendment of Bidding Documents
Before the deadline for submission of bids the Employer may modify the bidding documents by
issuing addenda.
To give prospective bidders reasonable time to take an addendum into account, in preparing
their bids the Employer shall extend, as necessary, the deadline for submission of bids.
Preparation of Bids Language of Bid is English.

DCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID

The bid submitted by the Bidder in electronic form shall be in two separate parts:

(TWO COVERSYSTEM)
Part I. This shall be named Technical Bid and shall comprise of Scanned copies mentioned it
serial No.2 Qualification of the bidder.
Part II. This shall be named Financial Bid and shall be uploaded in separate part in the financial
cover as .xls format in Electronic form which the bidder shall qote % age rate for the
complete job.

267
 NOTE:- Disclosure of Financial bid in Technical bid part I shall render the bidder no
responsive.
Copy of EMD in the form of CDR/FDR/Demand Draft in favour of ______________________
All duties taxes, royalties and other levies payable by the contractor under the contract, or for any
other cause, shall be included in the rates (excluding the Goods and Services Tax), prices and
total Bid price submitted by the Bidder .and nothing extra what so ever shall be payable in this
regard to the bidder.
The rates and prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed for the duration of the contract and shall
not be subject to adjustment on any account.
Currencies of Bid and payment.
The unit rates and the prices shall be quoted by the bidder entirely in Indian Rupees. All
payments shall be made in India Rupees.
Bid Validity
Bids shall remain valid for period of submission 120 Days after the deadline date for bid
In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original time limit, the employer may request the
bidder to extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. The request and the bidder's
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

responses shall be made in writing. A bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his earnest
money. A bidder agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify his bid, but will
be required to extend the validity of his earnest money for a period of the extension, and in
compliance with clause 16 of ITB in all respects. Earnest Money. The bidder shall furnish, as part of
the Bid, earnest Money as mentioned in above NIT. Any bid not accompanied by an Earnest Money
shall be rejected by the Employer as non responsive.
The earnest money of unsuccessful bidders will be returned within 30 days of the end of the Bid
validity period. The earnest Money of the successful Bidder will be released after successful
completion of the work to be certified by the Engineer- in-charge
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
Submission of Bids: The Bidder must submit separately "Technical Bid" and "Financial Bid"
Technical Bid: to be opened on (As per Date Schedule) in the presence of Evaluation Committee.
Financial Bid: Shall be opened in case of qualified bidders Only thereafter.
DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS
Complete Bids (including Technical and Financial) must be submitted online not later than the (As per
Date Schedule). The employer may extend the deadline for submission of bids by issuing an
amendment, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the bidders previously
subject to the original deadline will then be subject to the new deadline. Process to be Confidential
Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation, and comparison of bids and
recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to bidders or any other persons not
officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful Bidder has been announced.
Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer's processing of bids or award decisions may result
in the rejection of his Bid.
19.0 . Clarification of Bids and Contacting the Employer
No Bidder shall contact the Employer or any matter relating to its bid from the time of the bid opening
to the time the contract is awarded.
Any attempt by the bidder to influence the Employer's bid evaluation, bid comparison or contract
award decision may result in the rejection of his bid.
Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness During the detailed evaluation of
"Technical Bids", the Employer will determine whether each Bid
(a) meets the eligibility criteria defined in Qualification criteria and fulfils all other terms and conditions
of bidding documents and 2
(b) has been properly signed;
(c) is accompanied by the required securities; and
(d) is substantially responsive to the requirements of the bidding documents.
A subsequently responsive "Financial Bid" is one which conforms to all the terms, conditions, and
specifications of the bidding documents, without material deviation or reservation. A material
deviation or reservation is one
268
(a) which affects in any substantial way, inconsistent with the bidding documents, the employer's rights
or the Bidder's obligations under the Contract; or
(b) whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive position of other bidders presenting
substantially responsive bids.
IF a "Financial Bid" is not substantially responsive it will be rejected by the employer,
and may not subsequently be made responsive by corrections or withdrawal of the nonconforming
deviation or reservation. PRICE PREFERENCE
There will be no price preference to any bidder. SCOPE OF WORK
The Firms/Consultant shall be required to provide service for:- Construction of
1.1 Taking clients instructions and preparation of drawings.
Preparation of site plan.
Site evaluation, analysis and impact of existing and I or proposed development on its immediate

CHAPTER - 20
environs.
1.4 Inspection, supervision and evaluation of works. Any other individual / specific requirements of the
project.
Preparation of concept and technical project report and preparation of tender documents on
BOQ basis.
1.7 Rendering of comprehensive Architectural Services including issuing good for construction
drawings and all other construction documents.

SCHEDULE OF SERVICES:
The Firms/Consultant shall after taking instructions from the client render the following

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

services:- Ascertain and examine site constraints & potential and prepare drawings for client's
approval. Prepare report on site evaluation and analysis and impact of existing and I or proposed
development on its immediate environs. Prepare conceptual drawings with reference to
requirements given and prepare rough Bill of Quantities. Preliminary Design and Drawings.
Modify the conceptual drawings incorporating required changes and prepare the preliminary
drawings, sketches for client's approval along with preliminary estimate of cost. Drawings
for client's I statutory approvals. Prepare drawings necessary for client's statutory approval and
ensure compliance with codes, standards and legislations as applicable and assist the client in
obtaining the statutory approvals thereof if required.

WORKING DRAWINGS & COST ESTIMATES.

Prepare working drawings, specifications and schedule of quantities /BOQ & to prepare cost
estimates

PREPARATION OF TENDER DOCUMENTS.

All the above services shall be prepared & submitted strictly as per the project requirement & as
per directions of the Engineer-In -charge, which shall be final & binding on the consultant.

1. CONSTRUCTIONSTAGE
I. Prepare and issue working drawings and details for proper execution of works during
construction. The working drawings shall have to be submitted in hard & soft copies as per
requirement as directed by Engineer in-charge.
II. Inspect, supervise and evaluate the construction works during execution and wherever
necessary clarify any decision, offer interpretation of the drawings/specifications

2. COMPLETION STAGE
Prepare and submit 06 sets of as built drawings for structure in hard and soft copies.

269
 4. FEES FOR THE WORK.
Fees payable for the assigned works shall be inclusive of all services like sanitary, plumbing,
electrification, sewerage line, landscaping and development of site etc. Complete job to the
satisfaction of the Engineer -in-charge.
5. For preparation of conceptual drawings scheduled fee shall be paid to the Firms /
Consultant.
Mere preparation of conceptual drawing & its approval from project authority shall not confer
any right on the Architect for claiming the allotment for entire work.

S
chedule of Payments

Stage 1 On submitting concept drawing & rough 10% of total fees payable
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

estimate cost(only if accepted by intending party)

Stage 2 On submitting required preliminary scheme for 20% of total fees payable less already
client's approval along-with the preliminary paid.
estimate cost.
Stage 3 a) On incorporating client's suggestions and a) 30% of total fees payable less already
submitting drawings for approval from client / paid.
statutory authorities, if required.
Stage 4 Upon submission of working drawings, 60% of total fees payable less already
specifications and schedule of quantities (BOQ) paid.
with detailed estimate.
Stage 5 Upon submission of working drawings 75% of total fees payable less already
for services viz, electrical, plumbing, HVAC, etc. paid.
Stage 6 i) On completion of 40% of allotted work a) 85% less already paid.
ii) On completion of 70% of allotted work b) 90% less already paid.
iii) On Virtual completion of work c) 95% less already paid.
Stage 7 On submitting completion report and submission 100% of total fees payable less already
of as built drawings in four sets in hard and soft paid.
copies.

The Firm/ Consultant shall be required to visit site as & when required, however nothing extra
shall be paid for site visits.

PROPOSAL EVALUATION CRITERIA

1. A two-stage procedure will be adopted in evaluating the proposal. In the first stage,
Technical evaluation will be carried out Only those 3 technical proposals which score
maximum marks out of 100 marks in aggregate shall be considered for financial bids in second
stage.

Evaluation of technical proposals

The detailed criteria for evaluation of tenders invited on Quality and Cost based system shall
be as under:
Under this stage, the proposals submitted by the bidders shall be evaluated by applying the
evaluation criteria, sub-criteria, and point system as stipulated here in below.

270
Sr. Criteria Marks Maximum
No Marks
A. Average Annual Turnover for last 03 Financial
Years ending
0 t o 2 crores 5 20
2 to 5 crores 10
5 to 10crores 15
Above 10 crores 20
B Maximum size of Institutional/Office building
complex project handled in terms of built up
area within last five years. 20
above 1.00 lacs sft 5

CHAPTER - 20
1.0 lac to 3.00 lac sft 10
above 3.00 Lacs sq.ft 20
C Architectural firm with experience of
5 yrs or more 5
10 yrs or more 10 20
15 yrs or more 15
20 yrs or more 20
D Team members on permanent pay roll of the
organization.
Architect (with more than 3 yrs exp) 2

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Architect (with more than 10 yrs exp) 5
Structural engineer (with more than 3 yrs exp) 2
Structural engineer (with more than 10 yrs exp) 5 20
Civil engineer (deg) 2
Plumbing and Sanitary engineer 3
Interior Designer (AIIID) 3
Quantity surveyor 2

E Write-up on Architectural vision, Approach &

Methodology and work plan 20 20

TOTAL 100
Only the financial bids of top three scores of technically responsive bidders will be opened o
online.

Illustration
A,B,C,D,E,F are six bidders having the following technical marks:
BIDDER TECHNICAL MARKS
A 95
B 75
C 84
D 80
E 78
F 88

Here bidders A, F and C are top three scores, which shall be considered for financial opening.
inancial Opening of Bids (TWO COVER SYSTEM)
F

271
 The bids of only the bidders shortlisted as defined above shall be opened financially and
selection shall be made on the basis of Least Cost Method i.e the bidder who has quoted
lowest% age rate shall be considered for assignment of the job. However the agency
securing the highest score in Technical evaluation shall have the option of matching the
price bid of the lowest bidder & shall be preferred for assignment of the job, in case the
agency matches the price bid of the lowest bidder among the shortlisted bidders.

Executive Engineer
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

272
The necessary documents and annexures to be attached by the consultant taking part in
Bidding process.

A. Technical Proposal
B. Brief description of the registered Firm/Consultancy
C. Declaration for competing
D. Contact details of the Firm
E. List of experts / architects

CHAPTER - 20
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

273
 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL

From: To

Chief Engineer PW (R&B)

Department
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Sub: 1). Construction of

Dear Sir,

I, on behalf of as an
Firms/Consultant herewith enclose Technical Proposal for engagement of
my / our Organization for:-
1). Construction of

Yours faithfully,
Signature of the authorized signatory:
Name of the authorized

Name of the Firms/Consultant:_

Seal of the Firms/Consultant:

274
 "Annexure A"

A) Brief Description of the registered Firms/Consultant (Enclose separate page)

B) Assignments of similar nature successfully completed:

(Note: The Firms/Consultant should also give details of the ongoing similar
assignments in the below format).

Name of Name Was

CHAPTER - 20
Owner/ Cost of Date of Date of
Assignment of Assignment
S.No. Sponsor Assignment Commencement Completion
(Brief Project satisfactorily
Scope) completed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Signature of the authorized signatory: _________________________

Name of the authorized signatory: ____________________________

Name of the Firms/Consultant:_

Seal of the Firms/Consultant: _______________________________

Note: The applicant must attach documentary evidence in support of their submission above

275
 "Annexure B"

Declaration

We hereby confirm that we are interested in competing for the

consultancy service to undertake the task related to:-
1). Construction of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

All the information provided herewith is genuine and accurate.

Authorized Person's Signature.

Name and Designation:
Date of Signature:

Note: The declaration is to be furnished on the letter head of the organization.

276
"Annexure C"

Firms/Consultant Contact Details

1. Name of Firms/Consultant

2. Main areas of business

3. Type of Organization Firm
Company/ partnership firm

CHAPTER - 20
registered under the Indian
Companies Act, 1956/ the
partnership Act, 1932

4. Whether the
Firms/Consultant
has been blacklisted by any
Central Govt. / State
Govt./PSU/ Govt. Bodies /

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Autonomous?
If yes, details thereof.

5. Address of registered office

with telephone no. & fax

6. Contact Person with

telephone no. & e-mail ID

Enclose:-
1. Copy of Certificate of Incorporation.
2. Copy of Article of Association in respect of 3above.
3. Undertaking in respect of 4above.

Signature of the
applicant Full name of
the applicant
Stamp and Date

277
 "Annexure D"

ist of Architect/Experts on payroll

L

S. Relevant
Name Designation Qualification Experience
NO
1
2
3
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

4
5
6
7
8
9

Signature of the
applicant Full name of
applicant
Stamp & Date

278
 IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS

Due to technical/Software constraints the %age rate for the work Expression of interest (EOI)
shall be uploaded in.xlsx format. The%age quoted by the bidder in the basic rate column shall be
treated as %age for the said work. The total Amount Columns in Figures and Words shall not be
considered.

For Example

CHAPTER - 20
Basic Rate in Figures to be entered

By the Bidder (Column 5of BOQ) = Rs.1.00

Column 6th &7th of BOQ shall not be considered

Shall be treated as

%age entered by the Bidder = 1%

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

279
 20.6. Check List for Release of CDR

S. No Particulars Remarks
01 Position of AAA whether accorded or not
02 Position of Technical Sanction
03 Date of actual start of work
04 Date of completion of work
05 Actual date of completion of work
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

06 Certificate with regard to store recoveries.

07 Copy of agreement / supplementary if any
08 Delay if any
09 Whether plenty case settled or not
10 DLP stands over
11 Payment due if any
12 Works stands completed
13 Present status of work
14 Whether the work finalled up
15 Intimate if any store is involved in due payments
16 Major head of account
17 Funds released for said work

280
 (a) 20.7. Technical Evaluation checklist and format

Qualification Eligibility Criteria (Technical Evaluation)

Name of Work :- .
Advertised cost:- lacs

NIT No
Last date of receipt of Bids = / /2020
Date of Opening Technical Bids = / /2020

CHAPTER - 20
Bidder No: T ---/ ---

S.No Requirement as per Bidding Document Demonstration by Bidder

Name of Bidder M/S

Bid participation
Single

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Constitution / Legal Status
1 Aay-Class Civil

Registration NO.
duly renewed

Place of Registration/Incorporation

Tender document Cost

2 Requd. Amount= Rs. /- in favour of
Rs. lacs in the shape of Challan bearing T.R No Dtd:
Executive Engineer R&B
/ /2020 Pledged to EE-R&B

TDR of Rs. lacs in f/o Chief Accounts Officer PWD

Earnest Money/ Bid Security in terms of (R&B) Kashmir bearing TDR No: Dtd: / /20YY
CDR / FDR / B.G (for Rs. Lacs pledged Type valid upto - 20YY
to

Deposit – at – call receipt from any scheduled

3 Indian Bank or a foreign bank located in India Amount
and approved by the Reserve Bank of India.

Bank Guarantee from any scheduled Indian

Bank valid for 45 days beyond the validity of Validity months
the bid.

281
 Fixed deposit receipt, issued by any scheduled
Indian Bank or a foreign Bank approved by the Name of
Bank
Bank
Reserve Bank of India.

4 PAN No

GST No with Latest clearance Certificate (

5 Form GSTR-3B)

Proposed Programme-- Work method,

6 Schedule and Charts etc.

7 Details of participation in joint venture

Financial reports for the last five years: balance

8 sheets, profit and loss statements, auditors'
reports, etc.

Evidence of Access to or availability of credit

facilities/ Financial Resources certified by the
bankers
9 (10% of the Estimated/Advertised Cost)

Name, address and telephone/Fax numbers of

banks that may provide references.
-

10 Authority to Seek and Reference

Undertaking that the bidder would be able to

11 invest a minimum of 25% of Contract Value.

Undertaking that the bid will remain valid for

12 120 days from the date of opening of Technical
bids.

Affidavit affirming that the Information

furnished by the bidder in the bid/Supporting
13 documents is correct to the best of his
Knowledge and belief.

Information on litigation /Arbitration Debarring

14 / Expelling or Abandonment of work during
last 05 Years and disputed amount.

Qualifications and experience of key personnel

15 required for administration and execution of the
contract with bio data

Site Engineer B.E Civil +3Years Exp =2 No

Works Supervisor 10+2 with Diploma ITI 04

No

Availability of key items of contractor's

17 equipment essential for carrying out the works.
282
S.NO Equipment Number

1 Tipper Trucks

2 Excavator

3 Lift Mixer

4 Mixer

5 Vibrator

6 Generator (125 KV

7 Dewatering Pump

Shuttering ( Kit Ply/

8
Steel) Sqm

9 Welding Machine

10 Roller

283
 Experience with respect to pre-qualification
criteria mentioned in SBD.

18

Qualifying requirement as per SBD

19 Rs. /-lacs
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

284
 The statements showing the value of existing
commitments and on-going works as well as
the stipulated period of completion remaining
for each of the works listed should be
20
countersigned by the Engineer in charge, not
B = Rs. Lacs,
below the rank of an Executive Engineer or
equivalent.

For joint ventures refer SBD/Appendix to ITB

21

CHAPTER - 20
Basic Amount ITR/TDS Index
Year (Lacs) Factor Indexed Amount (Lacs)
Financial Turn with respect to SBD

20YY-YY 0.00

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

20YY-YY 0.00

23 20YY-YY 0.00

20YY-YY 0.00

20YY-YY 0.00

Qualifying requirement as per SBD

Rs____________________lacs Max Avg Financial turn Over 0.00
24 A= Maximum Value of engineering works in 0.00
any one Year during last five years (updated at
the current price level).

M =multiplying factor (usually 1.5)

1.5
N=Number of Years prescribed for
Completion of work.

(A* N* M -B)
Available Bid Capacity
Qualifying Requirement more than Rs. Lacs
( ) = Rs.

Amount - Lacs

285
 Remarks
Responsive/ Non Responsive

Head Draftsman Technical Officer to, Executive Engineer

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

R&B

Superintending Engineer Chief Accounts Officer/AAO

PW (R&B) Circle

(b)

Qualification Eligibility Criteria (Technical Evaluation)

Name of Work :-

Advertised cost:- 1903.79 lacs

NIT No
Last date of receipt of Bids = / /2020
Date of Opening Technical Bids

Bidder No: T 2/02

Requirement as per Bidding

S.No Demonstration by Bidder
Document

286
 Name of Bidder

Bid participation

1
Constitution / Legal Status

CHAPTER - 20
Registration NO.

Place of Registration/Incorporation

Tender document Cost

Requd. Amount= Rs.1100/- in favour

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

2
of Executive Engineer R&B Cd 2nd
Srinagar

Earnest Money/ Bid Security in terms

of CDR / FDR / B.G (for Rs. 30.08
Lacs pledged to Chief Accounts Type
Officer PWD (R&B) Kashmir

Deposit – at – call receipt from any

scheduled Indian Bank or a foreign
bank located in India and approved by Amount
the Reserve Bank of India.
3

Bank Guarantee from any scheduled

Indian Bank valid for 45 days beyond Validity
the validity of the bid.

Fixed deposit receipt, issued by any

scheduled Indian Bank or a foreign
Bank approved by the Reserve Bank Name of Bank
of India.

4 PAN No

GST No with Latest clearance

5
Certificate ( Form GSTR-3B)

Proposed Programme-- Work method,

6
Schedule and Charts etc.

287
 Details of participation in joint
7
venture

Financial reports for the last five

8 years: balance sheets, profit and loss
statements, auditors' reports, etc.

Evidence of Access to or availability

of credit facilities/ Financial
Resources certified by the bankers
(10% of the Estimated/Advertised
9 Cost)

Name, address and telephone/Fax

numbers of banks that may provide
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

references.

10 Authority to Seek and Reference

Undertaking that the bidder would be

11 able to invest a minimum of 25% of
Contract Value.

Undertaking that the bid will remain

12 valid for 120 days from the date of
opening of Technical bids.

Affidavit affirming that the

Information furnished by the bidder in
13 the bid/Supporting documents is
correct to the best of his Knowledge
and belief.

Information on litigation /Arbitration

Debarring / Expelling or
14 Abandonment of work during last 05
Years and disputed amount.

Qualifications and experience of key

personnel required for administration
15 and execution of the contract with bio
data

Site Engineer B.E Civil +3Years Exp

=2 No

Works Supervisor 10+2 with Diploma

ITI 04 No

Availability of key items of

17 contractor's equipment essential for
carrying out the works.

288
 Tipper Trucks 4 No

Excavator = 2 No.

Lift Mixer =2 No.

Mixer =4 No.

CHAPTER - 20
Vibrator = 6 No.

Generator (125 KV) 2 No

Welding Machine (2 No)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Dewatering Pump 2 No

Shuttering ( Kit Ply/ Steel) 3000 Sqm

Experience with respect to pre-

18 qualification criteria mentioned in Certificates for similar nature of work uploaded by
Bidder are either under value or Ongoing work.
SBD/ITB

289
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

19 Qualifying requirement as per SBD Rs LACS

Rs____________________lacs

The statements showing the value of existing

commitments and on-going works as well as
the stipulated period of completion
remaining for each of the works listed should
20 be countersigned by the Engineer in charge,
not below the rank of an Executive Engineer
or equivalent.

For joint ventures refer SBD/Appendix to ITB

21

Inde Indexe
Financial Turn with respect to SBD x d Amoun
Year Basic Amount (Lacs) ITR/TDS Fact t (Lacs)
or

23

290
 Qualifying requirement as per SBD
Rs____________________lacs
Max Avg Financial turn Over

A= Maximum Value in one Year duly

24 i A= Maximum Value of engineering
works in any one Year during last five
years (updated at the current price
level).
M =multiplying factor (usually 1.5)

CHAPTER -
1.5
N=Number of Years prescribed for
Completion of work.

(A* N* M -B)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Available Bid Capacity =
Qualifying Requirement more than Rs. Rs.
Lacs

Amount

Remarks Non-Responsive

The Bidder T1/02 namely ABC has not Uploaded the registration
Card nor Renewal of registration . Besides the bidder has uploaded
Certificates for similar nature of work which are either under
value or Ongoing work. Further the the latest GST Clearence
Certificate has not been uploaded .Hence the Bidder has been
assessed as NON-RESPONSIVE .

Head Draftsman Technical Officer to, Executive Engineer

Chief Engineer PWD (R&B) R&B

Chief Accounts Officer

Superintending Engineer Direction Office Chief Engineer
PW (R&B) Circle PW(R&B) Deptt. PW(R&B)Deptt.

291
9
 (C)Technical summery evaluation sheet

Office of the Chief Engineer PWD (R&B)

Name of Work :-

NIT No
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Position of bidders after "Evaluation of Technical Bids" of all the bidders

S.No Name of Bidder Bidder No Remarks

1 RESPONSIVE

NON
2
RESPONSIVE

As such we may load the Technical Bid Evaluation Summary / Results on the web
site for information of all the concerned and opening of financial bids of the
responsive bidders.

Note:-Objection if any shall be given in writing to the Chief Engineer PWD

(R&B) ithin (02) Two days of uploading of Technical Summary
sheet. No objections whatsoever shall be entertained thereafter.

Head Draftsman Technical Officer to, Executive Engineer

Chief Engineer PWD (R&B) R&B

Chief Accounts Officer

Superintending Engineer Direction Office Chief Engineer
PW (R&B) Circle PW(R&B) Deptt. PW(R&B)Deptt.

292
9
20.8.Vendor Development
The program for providing training to the new generation contractors who are qualified
in civil engineering shall be conducted by the HRD wing of the department. The objective shall
be to attract interest from new generation contractors into the construction industry.

CONTRACT MANAGEMENT

General provisions common to both Construction and Maintenance works. Provision related to
Construction works Provisions related to Maintenance works.

Provisions related to Green Buildings and Sustainability Measures.

CHAPTER - 20
The financial powers given separately as ―Compendium of Financial Powers Delegated to
PWD Officers‖.

Relaxation of any provision of the SOPs in the interest of requirements of work in keeping with
the provisions in the preamble to the PWD Works Manual 2020 would be allowed to any officer
by the next higher authority not below the rank of a Chief Engineer with recorded reasons.

In case of any conflicting provisions in the Manual and SOPs vis-a-vis ―The General Conditions
of Contract (GCC)‖, the provisions made in the GCC shall prevail in contract management.

Similarly, Acts, Laws as notified by the government, GFR provisions and CVC guidelines shall

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

prevail over provisions of the Manual and the SOPs.

293
 20.9. Single cover
(A) NOTICE INVITING T,ENDE _RFOR CIVIL WORKS FOR SINGLE COVER
SYSTEM( upto Rs.2.50 Crores)
NIT No. of 20YY-YY DATED:••

For and on behalf of the Lt. Governor, UT J&K, e-tenders (In single
cover system) are invited on Percentage basis from approved and eligible Contractors
registered with J&K Govt., CPWD, Railways and other State/Central Governments for
the following works

Cost of Earne
M.H of Closs of
Nome of Work T/Doc. st
Account Contracto
Money r
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Position of AAA:
Accorded Position of funds Available
The Bidding documents Consisting of qualifying information, eligibility criteria, specifications,
Drawings, bill of quantities (B.O.Q),Set of terms and conditions of contract and other details
can be seen/downloaded from the departmental website www jktenders.gov.in as per schedule
of dates given below·-
1 Date of Issue of Tender Notice
2 Period of downloading of bidding documents I. /.2020 from 10.00 AM.
3 Bid submission Start Date I. 2020 from 10.00 AM.
4 Bid Submission End Date I. /.2020 upto 4.00 PM.
5 Date & time of opening of Bids (Online)
_1._/..2020 at 11.00 A.M in the office of

Executive Engineer Division Bids must be accompanied with cost of Tender document in shape
of Treasury Challan in favour of Executive Engineer R&B Division (tender inviting authority)
and Earnest money I Bid security in shape of CDR/FDR/BG(The Date of Treasury Challan
earnest money/Bid securitv should be between the date of start of bid and Bid Submission End
date)pledged to Executive Engineer R&B Division (tender receiving authority).
The date and time of opening of Bids shall be notified on Web Site www.jktenders.gov.inand
conveyed to the bidders automatically through an e-mail message on their e-mail address.
The bids of Responsive bidders shall be opened online on same Web Site in the Office of
Executive Engineer R&B Division
(tender receiving authority).
The earnest money in favour of unsuccessful bidder shall be released only after submission of
Treasury Challan
The bids for the work shall remain valid for a period of 120 davs from the date of opening of
Technical bids
The earnest money shall be forfeited, lf:-
Any bidder/ tenderer withdraws his bid/ tender during the period of bid validity or makes any
modifications in the terms and conditions of the bid.

294
Failure of Successful bidder to furnish the required performance security within the specified
time limit. Failure of Successful bidder to execute the agreement within 28 days after fixation of
contract. Instruction to bidders regarding e-tendering process.
Bidders are advised to download bid submission manual from the "Downloads" option as well as
from
"Bidders Manual Kit" on website www.jktenders.gov.into acquaint bid submission process. To
participate in bidding process, bidders have to get 'Digital Signature Certificate {DSC)' as per
Information
Technology Act-2000. Bidders can get digital certificate from any approved Vendor.
The bidders have to submit their bids online in electronic format with digital Signature. No bid
will be accepted in physical form.
Bids will be opened online as per time schedule mentioned in Para-1.

CHAPTER - 20
Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents with the bid. Besides,
original photocopies of documents related to the bid be submitted physically / by registered post
/through courier before the date specified in Para-1.
Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents with the technical bid.
Note:- Scan all the documents on 100 dpi with black and white option.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The department will not be responsible for delay in online submission due to any reasons.
Scanned copy of cost of tender document in shape of Treasury Challan in favour of Executive
Engineer R&B Division _____and Earnest Money Bid Security in shape of CDR/FDR/BG. (The
date of earnest money/Bid security should be between the date of start of bid and Bid Submission
End date) pledged to Executive Engineer R&B Division……..must be uploaded with the
documents of the bid. The original Treasury Challan (cost of tender document), CDR/FDR/BG
(earnest money/bid security) and relevant bid documents shall be obtained from the lowest bidder
before the fixation of contract.
Bidders are advised not to make any change in BOQ (Bill of Quantities) contents. In no case they
should attempt to create similar BOQ manually.
Price escalation on and Taxes:- The %age rate method requires the bidder to quote a percentage
above / below / at par of the schedule of rates applicable/ as mentioned in the advertised BOQ. The
percentage quoted by the bidder shall be deemed to include price escalation and all taxes upto
completion of the work. Deduction on account of taxes shall be made from the bills of the
contractor on gross amount of the bill as per the rates prevailing at the time of recovery.
Bidders are advised to use "My Documents" area in their user on R&B e-Tendering portal to
store such documents as are required.
In case of CRF and any other specified project. The relevant guidelines standard bidding
document shall be followed.
Instructions to Bidder (ITB)
All bidders shall upload the following information and documents along with qualification criteria
qualification information with their bids:-
Copies of original documents defining constitution/ legal status, place of registration and
principal place of Business with Cell No .and Correspondence address. Treasury Challan
&/CDR/FDR/BG Valid GSTIN No. & PAN No.
Scanned Copy of Gm N Registration and latest clearance certificate FORM GST-38 I.e.
latest clearance certificate FORMGST-38 of the preceding Month to the Issued of Nrr
The bidder at his own responsibility and risk should visit and examine the site of work and its
surroundings before submission of bid.
Non attendance of pre-bid meeting will not be cause of disqualification of the bidder. All
documents relating to the bid shall be in the English Language.
Bidder must ensure to upload scanned copies of all necessary documents including earnest money
and tender documents fee in terms of sop copies with technical bid. No document (s} which has

295
 /have not been uploaded shall be entertained in the form of hard copv. However, in case of any
clarification the bidders shall have to produce original documents in support of sop copies if need
arises
General Conditions of Contract:-
The date of start of the work shall be reckoned within one week from the date of issuance of
LOI/Contract allotment as the case may be Penalty for delay in completion:- ln case of delay in
completion of work beyond stipulated period of completion, penalty upto maximum of 10% of
the contract shall be imposed.
Time extension:-Suitable time extension shall be granted in case of increase in scope of work and
in the event of delay beyond control of contractor to be determined by the department.
Advance Payments:- No mobilization advance/equipment advance shall be paid unless
otherwise specified in the SBD.
Secured Advance:- No secured advance is admissible unless otherwise specified.
Schedule of Payment:- The payment schedule shall be fixed after award of contract in favour of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

successful bidder, on the basis of availability of funds and value of work executed, shall be
determined by the Engineer. Amendment of bidding document:- Before the deadline for
submission of bids the employer may modify the bidding documents by issuing Addendum.
The tender receiving authority reserves the right to accept or reject any tender or all tenders
without assigning any reason thereof.
Unbalanced Bid:- In case bid of the bidder Is unbalanced. The bidder has to upload additional
performance security in shape of CDRIFDRIBG as per the breakup given below .failing which
the tender shall be rejected The date of CDRIFDRIBG should be between the date of start of
bid and bid submission end date).
Percentage of unbalanced bid viz advertised
S.No coston account of low rates Additional Performance Security

1. Upto and including 15% below Nil

02. >15% upto and including 20% below 5% of Advertised Cost
03. >20% upto and including 25% below 10% of Advertised Cost
04. >25% upto and including 30% below 15% of Advertised Cost
05. > 30% Below 20% of Advertised Cost
The additional performance security shall be released only after successful completion of work.
The additional performance security of unsuccessful bidder shall be released in a week's time
after technical evaluation.
Restoration of work:- On completion of contract the contractor shall be responsible to remove
all un-used material and restore all work in its original position at his own cost.
Traffic regulations:-The contractor is bound to adhere to traffic regulations as is applicable
from time to time and ensure arrangements of smooth regulation of traffic during execution of
work.
Arbitration:- The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedure
stated in the J&K Conciliation and Arbitration Act No:-xxxv of 1997 issued vide SRO No:-403
vide Notification of J&K Govt.,"Law Department" 11th December-I997.
Defect Liability period:- The DLP shall be Calculated from date of certified completion of work
and period shall be 36 months. The defects noticed in the work during execution or D.L.P. shall be
corrected by the Contractor within the length of time specified by the Engineer. If the contractor
does not correct the defects pertaining to D.L.P. to the satisfaction of the Engineer within the time
specified, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the defects corrected and contractor will pay
this amount on correction of defects.
The date of start of work shall be reckoned within seven days from the date of issuance of allotment/
Letter of intent. In case the agency fails to execute the work, the deposits in the shape of
CDR/FDR/BG and Additional performance guarantee shall be liable for forfeiture besides initiating
other punitive actions against the defaulter without serving any notice.
ALL KEY CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL shall have to be strictly as per prescribed specifications and
approval of the Engineer In-charge.
296
 20.9. Single cover
(A) NOTICE INVITING TENDER FOR CIVIL WORKS
SINGLE COVER SYSTEM ( upto Rs.2.50 Crores)
NIT No. of 20YY-YY DATED:••

For and on behalf of the Lt. Governor, UT J&K, e-tenders (In single cover system) are
invited on Percentage basis from approved and eligible Contractors registered with J&K
Govt., CPWD, Railways and other State/Central Governments for the following works:-

CHAPTER - 20
Cost of Earnest
Adv. Cost (Rs.ln Locs) Time of M.H of Closs
S.No Nome of Work T/Doc. Money (ln
completion Account of
(In Rupees} Rs.}
Contr
actor
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Development of
1. -- 600/- 1- Days "
Position of AAA: Accorded Position of funds Available
The Bidding documents Consisting of qualifying information, eligibility criteria,

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

specifications, Drawings, bill of quantities (B.O.Q),Set of terms and conditions of
contract and other details can be seen/downloaded from the departmental website www
jktenders.gov.in as per schedule of dates given below·-
1 Date of Issue of Tender Notice
2 Period of downloading of bidding documents I. /.2020 from 10.00 AM.
3 Bid submission Start Date I. 2020 from 10.00 AM.
4 Bid Submission End Date I. /.2020 upto 4.00 PM.
5 Date & time of opening of Bids (Online)
_1._/..2020 at 11.00 A.M in the office of
Executive Engineer Division

Bids must be accompanied with cost of Tender document in shape of Treasury Challan in favour of
Executive Engineer R&B Division (tender inviting authority) and Earnest money I Bid security in shape
of CDR/FDR/BG(The Date of Treasury Challan earnest money/Bid securitv should be between the date
of start of bid and Bid Submission End date)pledged to Executive Engineer R&B Division (tender
receiving authority).
The date and time of opening of Bids shall be notified on Web Site www.jktenders.gov.in and conveyed
to the bidders automatically through an e-mail message on their e-mail address. The bids of Responsive
bidders shall be opened online on same Web Site in the Office of Executive Engineer R&B Division
(tender receiving authority).
The earnest money in favour of unsuccessful bidder shall be released only after submission of Treasury
Challan
The bids for the work shall remain valid for a period of 120 davs from the date of opening of Technical
bids
The earnest money shall be forfeited, lf:- Any bidder/ tenderer withdraws his bid/ tender during the
period of bid validity or makes any modifications in the terms and conditions of the bid.

297
 Failure of Successful bidder to furnish the required performance security within the specified time
limit. Failure of Successful bidder to execute the agreement within 28 days after fixation of contract.
Instruction to bidders regarding e-tendering process.
Bidders are advised to download bid submission manual from the "Downloads" option as well
as from "Bidders Manual Kit" on website www.jktenders.gov.into acquaint bid
submission process.
To participate in bidding process, bidders have to get 'Digital Signature Certificate {DSC)' as per
information Technology Act-2000. Bidders can get digital certificate from any approved Vendor.
The bidders have to submit their bids online in electronic format with digital Signature. No bid
will be accepted in physical form.
Bids will be opened online as per time schedule mentioned in Para-1.
Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents with the bid. Besides, original
photocopies of documents related to the bid be submitted physically I by registered post /through
courier before the date specified in Para-1.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents with the technical bid.

Note:- Scan all the documents on 100 dpi with black and white option.
The department will not be responsible for delay in online submission due to any reasons.
Scanned copy of cost of tender document in shape of Treasury Challan in favour of Executive
Engineer R&B Division
and Earnest Money Bid Security in shape of CDR/FDR/BG. (The date of earnest
money/Bid security should be between the date of start of bid and Bid Submission End date)
pledged to Executive Engineer R&B Division must be uploaded with the documents
of the bid.The original Treasury Challan (cost of tender document), CDR/FDR/BG (earnest
money/bid security) and relevant bid documents shall be obtained from the lowest bidder before
the fixation of contract. Bidders are advised not to make any change in BOQ (Bill of Quantities)
contents. In no case they should attempt to create similar BOQ manually.
Price escalation on and Taxes: - The %age rate method requires the bidder to quote a percentage
above / below / at par of the schedule of rates applicable/ as mentioned in the advertised
BOQ. The percentage quoted by the bidder shall be deemed to include price escalation and
all taxes upto completion of the work. Deduction on account of taxes shall be made from the
bills of the contractor on gross amount of the bill as per the rates prevailing at the time of
recovery.
Bidders are advised to use "My Documents" area in their user on R&B e-Tendering portal to
store such documents as are required.

In case of CRF and any other specified project. The relevant guidelines standard bidding
document shall be followed.

Instructions to Bidder(ITB)

All bidders shall upload the following information and documents along with qualification criteria
qualification information with their bids:-
Copies of original documents defining constitution/ legal status, place of registration and
principal place of Business with Cell No .and Correspondence address. Treasury Challan
&/CDR/FDR/BG
Valid GSTIN No. & PAN No.
Scanned Copy of GSTIN Registration and latest clearance certificate FORM GST-38 I.e.
latest clearance certificate FORMGST-38 of the preceding Month to the Issued of Nrr
The bidder at his own responsibility and risk should visit and examine the site of work and its
surroundings before submission of bid.

298
 Non attendance of pre-bid meeting will not be cause of disqualification of the bidder. All
documents relating to the bid shall be in the English Language.
Bidder must ensure to upload scanned copies of all necessary documents including earnest money
and tender documents fee in terms of sop copies with technical bid. No document (s} which has
/have not been uploaded shall be entertained in the form of hard copy. However, in case of any
clarification the bidders shall have to produce original documents in support of sop copies if need
arises
General Conditions of Contract: -
The date of start of the work shall be reckoned within one week from the date of issuance of
LOI/Contract allotment as the case may be.
Penalty for delay in completion: - ln case of delay in completion of work beyond stipulated period
of completion, penalty upto maximum of 10% of the contract shall be imposed.
Time extension: -Suitable time extension shall be granted in case of increase in scope of work

CHAPTER - 20
and in the event of delay beyond control of contractor to be determined by the department.
Advance Payments:-No mobilization advance/equipment advance shall be paid unless otherwise
specified in the SBD.
Secured Advance:-No secured advance is admissible unless otherwise specified.
Schedule of Payment:-The payment schedule shall be fixed after award of contract in favour of
successful bidder, on the basis of availability of funds and value of work executed, shall be
determined by the Engineer. Amendment of bidding document:-Before the deadline for
submission of bids the employer may modify the bidding documents by issuing Addendum.
The tender receiving authority reserves the right to accept or reject any tender or all tenders

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

without assigning any reason thereof.
Unbalanced Bid:- In case bid of the bidder Is unbalanced. The bidder has to upload additional
performance security in shape of CDRIFDRIBG as per the breakup given below .failing which
the tender shall be rejected The date of CDR/FDR/BG should be between the date of start of
bid and bid submission end date).

Percentage of unbalanced bid viz advertised

S.No cost Additional Performance Security
on account of low rates
1. Upto and including 15% below Nil
02. >15% upto and including 20% below 5% of Advertised Cost
03. >20% upto and including 25% below 10% of Advertised Cost
04. >25% upto and including 30% below 15% of Advertised Cost
05. > 30% Below 20% of Advertised Cost
The additional performance security shall be released only after successful completion of work.
The additional performance security of unsuccessful bidder shall be released in a week's time after
technical evaluation.

Restoration of work:- On completion of contract the contractor shall be responsible to remove all
un-used material and restore all work in its original position at his own cost.

Traffic regulations:-The contractor is bound to adhere to traffic regulations as is applicable from

time to time and ensure arrangements of smooth regulation of traffic during execution of work.

Arbitration:- The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedure
stated in the J&K Conciliation and Arbitration Act No:-xxxv of 1997 issued vide SRO No:-403
vide Notification of J&K Govt.,

299
 "Law Department" 11th December-I997.
Defect Liability period:- The DLP shall be Calculated from date of certified completion of
work and period shall be 36 months. The defects noticed in the work during execution or D.L.P.
shall be corrected by the Contractor within the length of time specified by the Engineer. If the
contractor does not correct the defects pertaining to D.L.P. to the satisfaction of the Engineer
within the time specified, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the defects corrected and
contractor will pay this amount on correction of defects.
The date of start of work shall be reckoned within seven days from the date of issuance of
allotment/ Letter of intent. In case the agency fails to execute the work, the deposits in the shape
of CDR/FDR/BG and Additional performance guarantee shall be liable for forfeiture besides
initiating other punitive actions against the defaulter without serving any notice.
ALL KEY CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL shall have to be strictly as per prescribed
specifications and approval of the Engineer In-charge.
The EMD shall be released after successful completion of DLP
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Failure on part of the contractor to fulfill his obligations of maintenance schedules shall result in
forfeiture of the deposits held for this purpose as well as the CDRIFDR/BG for this work.

Safety:- The contractor shall be responsible for safety of all activities at site of work.

Discoveries:- Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly

discovered on the site shall be the property of the Govt.

Tests:-The contractor shall be solely responsible for carrying out the mandatory tests required for
the quality control at his own cost.

Termination:- The employer may terminate the contract if the contractor causes a
fundamental breach of the contract.

Fundamental breach of contract will include:-

Continuous stoppage of Work for a period of30 days without authorization of Engineer in-
charge. Contractor is declared bankrupt.
Any evidence of involvement of contractor in corrupt practices.
If the contractor indulges in willful disregard of the quality control measures put in place by the
department. Contractor delays the completion of work beyond stipulated time of completion.
Pursuant to the process of termination of defaulted contract, the employer reserves the right to
invite fresh tender for the balance work at the risk and cost of defaulting contractor.
If in case contractor failed to start /complete the work, within the stipulated time period, his Earnest
Money shall be forfeited after termination of the contract. Besides, defaulting contractor shall be
debarred from taking works in R&B Department at least for one year.
Major Labour Laws applicable to establishment
engaged in building and other construction Work:-
Workmen compensation act 1923.
Payment of Gratuity Act 1972.
Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act
1952. Maternity Benefits Act 1951.
Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act
1970. Minimum Wages Act 1948.
Payment of Wages Act 1936.
Equal remuneration Act 1979.
Payment of bonus Act 1965.

300
 Industrial disputes Act 1947.
Industrial employment standing orders Act 1946.
Trade Union Act 1926.
Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act 1986.
Inter State Migrant workmen's (Regulation of employment & Conditions of service)Act 1979.
The Building and other Construction workers (Regulation of employment and Condition of
service) Act 1996 and the Census Act of 1996.
Factories Act 1948.
Compliance with Labour Regulation Laws of J&K .
Specification/Quality Control:-All items of works shall conform to specifications as per IRC/
MORTH/ NBO/ CPWD/ SSRI Any other prescribed specifications.

Insurance:- Insurance cover to Labour I Machinery I Work I Plant material I Equipment by

CHAPTER - 20
the contractor shall be mandatory.

Laws Governing the Contract: -The contract shall be governed by Laws of the land.
Court's Jurisdiction:-In case of a disputes/differences between contractor and Department the
jurisdiction shall be J&K.

Time Extension: -
The work is to be completed within the time limit specified in the NIT and the time of
completion will also increase I decrease in proportion with additional I deleted quantum of

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

work depending upon the actual quantum of work.
Request for extension of time shall be made by the contractor in writing not later than fifteen
days of happening of the event causing delay. The contractor shall also indicate in such a request
the period for which extension is desired.
Abnormal /bad weather or Serious loss or damage by fire or Civil commotion, strike or lockout
(other than among the labour engaged by the contractor) affecting any or the trades employed on
the work, or Non availability of departmental stores. Any other cause which in the absolute
discretion of the accepting authority is beyond the contractor's desire.
On contractor's representation based on the grounds as detailed above the time for completion of
the work may be extended by a period considered reasonable by the Department.
Extension of time shall be also admissible in the event of temporary suspension of work.
The tender I bid is liable to rejection if it does not fulfill the requirements as laid down in NIT.
All other terms conditions are as per PWD Form 25 (Double agreement Form) and detailed
NIT issued vide this office No. dated .

No. _
Executive Engineer
Dated: } }.2020 R&B Division _

Copv to the:-

Chief Engineer PW(R&B)Department far favour of information.

District Development Commissioner, for favourof information.
Superintending Engineer PWD (R&B} Circle, for information.
Joint Director Information Deptt, J&K for publishing the NIT in two leading dailies before due date.
Head Draftsman, Divisional Office for information.
Notice Board.,1/C Computer Section for publication in website www.jktenders.gov

301
 NOTICE INVITING TENDER
MACADAM WORKS

FOR SINGLE COVER SYSTEM ( upto Rs. 2.50 Crores)

NIT No. of 2020-21 DATED:_} }.2020.

For and on behalf of the President of India ,e-tenders (In single cover system) are invited on
CHAPTER - 20

Percentage basis from approved and eligible Contractors registered with J&K Govt., CPWD,
Railways and other State/Central Governments for the following works:-
Adv. Cost Cost of Eomest Time of
S.No Name of Work T/Doc. Money
(Rs.In Lacs} completion
(In Rupees) (inRs.)
2 3 4 5 6
improvement/upgradtion of road
1. Surface (Machine mix to Incl. C/o 1- 1- Days
be laid with Paver). Bitumen
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Position of AAA: Accorded Position of funds: Available

The Bidding documents Consisting of qualifying information ,eligibility criteria, specifications,

Drawings bill of quantities (B.O.Q),Set of terms and conditions of contract and other details can be
seen/downloaded from the departmental website jktenders.gov.in as per schedule of dates given
below·-
1 Date of Issue of Tender Notice
2 Period of downloading of bidding
documents
3 Bid submission Start Date
4 Bid Submission End Date
_ ______at 4.10 PM in the office
5 Date & time of opening of Bids of Executive Engineer R&B Division
(Online)
Bids must be accompanied with cost of Tender document in shape of Treasury Challan in favour
of Executive Engineer R&B Division (tender inviting authority) and Earnest money / Bid
security in shape of CDR/FDR(The Date of Treasury Challan earnest money/Bid security should
be between the date of start of bid and Bid Submission End date) pledged to Executive
Engineer R&B Division ,(tender receiving authority).
The date and time of opening of Bids shall be notified on Web Site www.jktenders.gov.in and
conveyed to the bidders automatically through an e-mail message on their e-mail address. The
bids of Responsive bidders shall be opened online on same Web Site in the Office of Executive
Engineer R&B Division(tender receiving authority).
The earnest money in favour of unsuccessful bidder shall be released only after submission of
Treasury Challan.
The bids for the work shall remain valid for a period of 120 days from the date of opening of
Technical bids The earnest money shall be forfeited, lf:-
Any bidder/ tenderer withdraws his bid/ tender during the period of bid validity or makes any
modifications in the terms and conditions of the bid.
Failure of Successful bidder to furnish the required performance security within the specified time
limit.

302
Failure of Successful bidder to execute the agreement within 28 days after fixation ofcontract.
Instruction to bidders regarding e-tendering process.
Bidders are advised to download bid submission manual from the "Downloads" option as well as from
"Bidders Manual Kit" on website www.jktenders.gov.into acquaint bid submission process.
To participate in bidding process, bidders have to get 'Digital Signature Certificate {DSC)' as per
Information Technology Act-2000. Bidders can get digital certificate from any approved Vendor.
The bidders have to submit their bids online in electronic format with digital Signature. No bid
will be accepted in physical orm.
Bids will be opened online as per time schedule mentioned in Para-1.
Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents with the bid. Besides,
original / photocopies of documents related to the bid be submitted physically / by registered post
/through courier before the date specified in Para-1.
Bidders must ensure to upload scanned copy of all necessary documents with the technical bid.

CHAPTER - 20
Note:- Scan all the documents on 100 dpi with black and white option.
The department will not be responsible for delay in online submission due to any reasons.
Scanned copy of cost of tender document in shape of Treasury Challan in favour of Executive Engineer
R&B Division and Earnest Money / Bid Security in shape of CDR/FOR. (The date of earnest
money/Bid security should be between the date of start of bid and Bid Submission End date) pledged to
Executive Engineer R&B Division must be uploaded with the documents of the bid. The original Treasury
Challan {cost of tender document), CDR/FDR/BG {earnest money/bid security) and relevant bid
documents shall be obtained from the lowest bidder before the fixation of contract.
Bidders are advised not to make any change in BOQ {Bill of Quantities) contents. In no case they should
attempt to create similar BOQ manually.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Price escalation on and Taxes: - The %age rate method requires the bidder to quote a percentage
above / below / at par of the schedule of rates applicable/ as mentioned in the advertised BOQ. The
percentage quoted by the bidder shall be deemed to include price escalation and all taxes upto
completion of the work. Deduction on account of taxes shall be made from the bills of the
contractor on gross amount of the bill as per the rates prevailing at the time of recovery.
Bidders are advised to use "My Documents" area in their user on R&B e-Tendering portal to store
such documents as are required.
In case of CRF and any other specified project. the relevant guidelines I standard bidding
document shall be followed.
Instructions to Bidder (ITB)
All bidders shall upload the following information and documents along with qualification
criteria I qualification information with their bids:-
Copies of original documents defining constitution/ legal status, place of registration and
principal place of Business with Cell No. and Correspondence address. Treasury Challan
&/CDR/FDR/BG Valid GSTIN No. & PAN No.
Scanned Copy of GSTIN Registration/on and latest clearance certificate FORM GST-3B I.e.
latest clearance certificate FORM GST-3B of the preceding Month to the Issued of NIT
The bidder at his own responsibility and risk should visit and examine the site of work and
its surroundings before submission of bid.
Non attendance of pre-bid meeting will not be cause of disqualification of the bidder. All
documents relating to the bid shall be in the English Language.
Bidder must ensure to upload scanned copies of all necessary documents including earnest
money and tender documents fee in terms of sop copies with technical bid. No document (s}
which has /have not been uploaded shall be entertained in the form of hard copv. However,
in case of any clarification the bidders shall have to produce original documents in support of
sop copies if need arises

303
 General Conditions of Contract:-
The date of start of the work shall be reckoned within one week from the date of issuance of
LOI/Contract allotment as the case may be.
Penalty for delay in completion: -ln case of delay in completion of work beyond stipulated
period of completion, penalty upto maximum of 10% of the contract shall be imposed.
Time extension:-Suitable time extension shall be granted in case of increase in scope of work
and in the event of delay beyond control of contractor to be determined by the department.
Advance Payments: -No mobilization advance/equipment advance shall be paid unless
otherwise specified in the SBD.
Secured Advance:- No secured advance is admissible unless otherwise specified.
Schedule of Payment:-The payment schedule shall be fixed after award of contract in favour of
successful bidder, on the basis of availability of funds and value of work executed, shall be
determined by the Engineer. Amendment of bidding document:-Before the deadline for
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

submission of bids the employer may modify the bidding documents by issuing Addendum.
The tender receiving authority reserves the right to accept or reject any tender or all tenders
without assigning any reason thereof.
Unbalanced Bid:- In case bid of the bidder Is unbalanced. The bidder has to upload additional
performance security In shape of CDR/FDR/BG as per the breakup given below. failling which
the tender shall be rejected. (The date of CDR/FDR/BG should be between the date of start of
bid and bid submission and date).
Percentage of unbalance bid
S.No Additional Performance Security
viz., advertised cost on account of Low rates
01. Upto and including 16% below Nil
02. >16% upto and including 20% below 6% of Advertised Cost
03. >20% upto and including 26% below 10% of Advertised Cost
04. >26% upto and including 30% below 15% of Advertised Cost
05. > 30% Balow 20% of Advertised Cost

The additional performance security shall be released only after successful completion of
work. The additional performance security unsuccessful bidder shall be released in a week's
time after technical evaluation.

Restoration of work:- On completion of contract the contractor shall be responsible to

remove all un-used material and restore all work in its original position at his own cost.

Traffic regulations:-The contractor is bound to adhere to traffic regulations as is applicable

from time to time and ensure arrangements of smooth regulation of traffic during execution of
work.

Arbitration:- The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedure
stated in the J&K conciliation and Arbitration Act No:-xxxv of 1997 issued vide SRO No:-403
vide Notification of J&K Govt., "Law Department" 11th December-1997.

Defect Liability period:- The DLP shall be Calculated from date of certified completion of
work and

304
period shall be 36months. The defects noticed in the work during execution or D.L.P. shall be
corrected by the Contractor within the length of time specified by the Engineer. If the
contractor does not correct the defects pertaining to D.L.P. to the satisfaction of the Engineer
within the time specified, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the defects corrected and
contractor will pay this amount on correction of defects. The date of start of work shall be
reckoned within seven days from the date of issuance of allotment/ Letter of intent. In case
the agency fails to execute the work., The deposits in the shape of CDR/FDR/BG and
Additional performance guarantee shall be liable for forfeiture besides initiating other
punitive actions against the defaulter without serving any notice.

All Key Construction Material shall have to be strictly as per prescribed specifications and
approval of the Engineer In-charge.
Retention Money & Maintenance Liability:- An amount equal to 15% of the payments due shall
be retained and treated as a deposit on account of retention money and maintenance liability for a

CHAPTER - 20
period of (03) three years from the date of virtual completion of the work. The same shall be
released after successful completion of maintenance liability for the said period as per schedule
give below:-.
50% of such deposit after One year of maintenance to be counted from Virtual date of
completion.

25% of such deposit after two years of maintenance to be counted from Virtual date of
completion 25% of such deposit after three years of maintenance to be counted from Virtual date
of completion

Note:-
The maintenance liability will not include damages caused due to natural calamities like

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

floods, earthquakes etc nor damages caused due to the damaged I leaking water supply
pipelines.
Any road cut conducted authorized by or un- authorized by any Govt.
Department/Private Enterprises/ person shall not be the responsibility of the agency and
will not be considered a defect of the work. Any other damages caused to the road surface
by movement of any heavy machinery shall not be the responsibility of the contractor.
Any such damages shall have to be brought to the notice of the department by the
concerned field units I contractor within a period of fifteen days with substantial
evidence to corroborate the reason of such damages.
The EMD shall be released after successful completion of DLP
Failure on part of the contractor to fulfill his obligations of maintenance schedules shall result in
forfeiture of the deposits held for this purpose as well as the CDRIFDRIBG for this work.

Safety:- The contractor shall be responsible for safety of all activities at site of work.

Discoveries:- Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly

discovered on the site shall be the property of the Govt.

Tests:-The contractor shall be solely responsible for carrying out the mandatory tests required for
the quality control at his own cost.

Termination:- The employer may terminate the contract if the contractor causes a
fundamental breach of the contract.

Fundamental breach of contract will include:-

Continuous stoppage of Work for a period of 30 days without authorization of Engineer in-
charge. Contractor is declared bankrupt.
Any evidence of involvement of contractor in corrupt practices.

305
 If the contractor indulges in willful disregard of the quality control measures put in place by
the department. Contractor delays the completion of work beyond stipulated time of
completion.
Pursuant to the process of termination of defaulted contract, the employer reserves the right to
invite fresh tender for the balance work at the risk and cost of defaulting contractor.
If in case contractor failed to start /complete the work, within the stipulated time period, his
Earnest Money shall be forfeited after termination of the contract. Besides, defaulting contractor
shall be debarred from taking works in R&B Department at least for one year.
31.0 Major Labour Laws applicable to establishment engaged in building and other
construction work:- Workmen compensation act 1923.
Payment of Gratuity Act 1972.
Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952.
Maternity Benefits Act 1951.
Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act 1970.
Minimum Wages Act 1948.
Payment of Wages Act 1936.
Equal remuneration Act 1979.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 20

Payment of bonus Act 1965.

Industrial disputes Act 1947.
Industrial employment standing orders Act 1946.
Trade Union Act 1926.
Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act 1986.
Inter State Migrant workmen's (Regulation of employment & Conditions of service) Act 1979.
The Building and other Construction workers (Regulation of employment and Condition of
service) Act 1996
and the Census Act of 1996. Factories Act 1948.
Compliance with Labour Regulation Laws of J&K .

32.0 : Specification/Quality Control:-All items of works shall conform to specifications as

per IR.C/ MORT/ NBO/ CPWD/ SSR/ Any other prescribed specifications.

33.0 Insurance:- Insurance cover to Labour / Machinery / Work / Plant material Equipment
by the contractor shall be mandatory.

Laws Governing the Contract:-The contract shall be governed by Laws of the land.

35.0 Court's Jurisdiction:- In case of any disputes/differences between contractor and

Department the jurisdiction shall be J&K.

36.0 Time Extension:-

The work is to be completed within the time limit specified in the NIT and the time of
completion will also increase I decrease in proportion with additional I deleted quantum of
work depending upon the actual quantum of work.
Request for extension of time shall be made by the contractor in writing not later than
fifteen days of happening of the event causing delay. The contractor shall also indicate in
such a request the period for which extension is desired. Abnormal /bad weather or Serious
loss or damage by fire or Civil commotion, strike or lockout (other than among the labour
engaged by the contractor) affecting any or the trades employed on the work, or Non
availability of departmental stores. Any other cause which in the absolute discretion of the
accepting authority is beyond the contractor's desire.

306
On contractor's representation based on the grounds as detailed above the time for
completion of the work may be extended by a period considered reasonable by the
Department.
Extension of time shall be also admissible in the event of temporary suspension of work.
Special Conditions regarding Specifications and Quality control for Machine laid B.T.
Works:-
All the components of the work shall be executed strictly as per specifications laid down in
the Ministry of Road transport and Highways publication "Specifications for road and
bridge Works" and I.R.C:SP:20 read with revised guidelines as per I.R.C:SP:72 and
amendments made till date of issuance of N.I.T.
All the road materials for use shall conform to the specifications laid down in "Rural Roads
manual" a publication of I.R.C.
For items not covered in Rural Roads manual the Ministry of Road Transport & Highways
(MORTH) Specifications for Road and Bridge works- Latest edition shall be followed.
Physical properties of aggregates for bituminous works i.e Shape, Strength, durability and

CHAPTER - 20
Stripping value should satisfy the requirements prescribed in I.R.C: SP: 20.
Periodic sieve analysis of each type of aggregate and periodic check of aggregates at the
gradation control unit shall be carried out to ensure that the proportion of the aggregates as
specified is complied with. Conducting of mandatory quality control tests for various
components of the advertised work like Thickness tests, tests for impact value, stripping,

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

flakiness, gradation of aggregates, determination of Binder content in bituminous mix, tests
for density and other tests as prescribed in I.R.C: SP : 20 as per frequency recommended
therein, during and after execution of the work will be sole responsibility of the contractor
as well as the Correctness of the test results whether performed in his laboratory or
elsewhere.
The location at the Hot mix plant of adequate capacity and capable of yielding a mix of
proper and uniform quality. from which bituminous macadam is to be transported to the site
in clean. tarpaulin covered vehicle shippers and shall be so placed that the manufacturing
laving/spreading and rolling temperatures are within the specified limits as laid down
in.I.R.C:SP:20.
The spreading of mix, compaction and quality control during these operations shall be done
as per prescribed norms of I.R.C.
The longitudinal profile of the finished surface shall be tested with a straight edge and the
Transverse profile with a camber template. Any irregularity greater than 6mm shall be
rectified.
The defects noticed in the work during execution or maintenance period shall be corrected
by the Contractor within the length of time specified by the Engineer. If the contractor does
not correct the defects pertaining to maintenance period to the satisfaction of the Engineer
within the time specified, the same shall be got rectified at his risk and cost.
The tender I bid is liable to rejection if it does not fulfill the requirements as laid down in
NIT.
All other terms conditions are as per PWD Form 25 (Double agreement Form) and detailed
NIT issued vide this office No. dated _
No. _ Executive Engineer
Dated: / /.2020 R&B Construction Division

307
308
309
310
 Chapter 21

21.01. Contract Management. (Refer CPWD Manual 2019)

21.01.1. General

All officer s concerned with the supervision, management and control of contract works shall
thoroughly familiarize themselves with the general and special conditions of contract, the
technical details and specifications of the work. The officer who has executed a contract
agreement shall be responsible for the proper execution of the work as per specifications in
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 21

accordance with the conditions of contract. There shall be advance planning of each item of
work to keep up the progress of work specified in the agreement. For this advanced methods in
planning and management techniques shall be adopted.

This planning shall be done in accordance with the schedule of work and the time frame fixed
for the project, by the Assistant Engineer or Assistant Executive Engineer in respect of contracts
entered into by them, or by the Executive Engineer in respect of other works. The contractor
shall abide by the planning schedule of the concerned authority and direction of the field
Engineers. All preliminaries such as removal of hindrances like underground cables, pipelines,
electric posts, etc., shall be completed before the award of contract. Difficulties if any shall be
brought to the notice of the head of departments concerned or to government. Where delay is
anticipated, the matter shall be brought to the notice of the authority who executed the
agreement so that the date of commencement may be fixed suitably in consultation with the
contractor.

21.02. Contractor‘s authorized agent

The contractor shall if possible, be present himself at the site of work. Incase this is not
possible; he shall appoint an authorized agent who shall be present at the site of work. The agent
so appointed shall be responsible to act on behalf of the contractor in all matters as far as the
contracts is concerned except to sign agreements or to receive payments. Contractor shall
engage Engineering personal as prescribed in the bidding document.

21.02.1. Handing over the site

After executing the agreement the contractor or his authorized agent shall take over the site
from the Assistant Engineer within ten days and commence the work immediately. If the
contractor does not turn up, the acknowledgement form for handing over of site duly signed by
the Assistant Executive Engineer shall be sent to the contractor through registered post and it
shall be deemed that the contractor has taken over the site from the date of posting. The
contractor shall sign an acknowledgement in the form given in Appendix 2100A or his
authorised agent while the site is taken over by the contractor. The Assistant Executive Engineer
shall forward copy of acknowledgement directly to the agreement authority under intimation to
the other officers. For roads works in case the entire area is not available to be handed over at
one stretch, the site shall be handed over in stages according to availability. In such cases, the
program of construction shall be so phased as to fit in the availability of land and contractor
shall accept the program so prepared. The officer under the control of the work shall see that the
contractor complies with the conditions regarding use and care of site.

311
21.02.2. Working Drawings
For all works except maintenance, it may be necessary to supply working drawings giving full
details of the work. Such working drawings may be prepared by the site Engineers of the contractor
and may be adopted with the approval of the officer who has executed the agreement. Where,
however, there is substantial variation contemplated from what is provided for in the original
design, modifications shall not be approved, except with the approval of the authority who gave
technical sanction to the estimate. Wherever necessary, approved working drawings may be made
to form part of thecontract.

CHAPTER - 21
21.02.3. Setting out of works
Before starting any work, the work shall be set out on the ground as per approved plans. The
responsibility for setting out a wo rk is that of the contractor as p er terms of contract. It is however
necessary that the setting out is checked and approved by the departmental Officers. This shall be
done bythe Assistant Executive Engineer in other cases. If in the course of checking, the J.E,
Assistant Engineer or the Assistant Executive Engineer feels that the advice of any higher authority
is necessary he shall refer the matter to such higher authority and abide by his instructions. The
Agreement Authority may in the case o f major works, direct that the setting out shall be got
checked and approved by an officer of rank higher than that of an Assistant Executive Engineer.
All benchmarks and setting out marks to be adopted for a work shall be of a permanent nature.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

It is desirable to have more than one benchmark and these shall be properly interconnected to
enable checking on a future date. The position of these benchmarks and setting out marks shall be
shown in a sketch drawn in the field book and the work spot order book.

21.02.4. Approval of Foundations

Works for which the Executive Engineer executes agreement, all foundations have to be approved
by the concerned officer. If any advice regarding the bearing capacity or adequacy of a foundation
is required then the Assistant Executive Engineer shall refer the matter to the Executive Engineer
who shall take a final decision in the matter, immediately after it is brought to his notice. The
Executive Engineer shall inspect and approve the foundation. If he feels that a change is required in
the foundation of a work for which estimate is technically sanctioned by a higher authority, he shall
refer the matter to the authority that sanctioned the estimate, which will be finally competent to
order a deviation. The Assistant Executive Engineer shall inform Executive Engineer of any change
required as above through consultation or a note on the changes required which shall be submitted
directly. The Executive Engineer shall take a decision himself or refer the matter to the
Superintending Engineer or Chief Engineer through discussions and similar notes. In any case, a
decision on the change shall be taken in the minimum time possible, so that the program for
completion is not affected.
In case of well foundations of bridges, the concerned Superintending Engineer shall approve the
plugging/ seating. Where a work contains several sub items, the Executive Engineer may delegate
the responsibility of inspecting and approving the foundation of some minor items to the Assistant
Executive Engineer concerned, provided such minor items are in dependent structures and will not
affect the safety of the main structure concerned or the work as a whole.

312
 21.03. Quality Control
Every work has to be properly supervised to ensure that it is carried out in accordance with the
required specifications. Effective supervision shall be insisted for maintaining quality of all items
of work. Where there is no specification for a particular item described in the schedule, the
specification of the item in the MoRTH/ NBC as the case may be, or the Indian Standard
Specification shall be adopted. Every officer and subordinate controlling the construction of the
work shall be fully conversant with these specifications. Any deviation from the standards
prescribed shall be reported fourth-with by the Junior Engineer, Assistant Engineer to the Assistant
Executive Engineer. The Junior Engineer under the control of a work shall be responsible for
maintaining quality of all items of work. They are bound to act according to the duties and
responsibilities laid to them. It will also be the duty of the Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer and
other inspecting officers to check the quality of works to see that the specifications are properly
followed. If any bad work is noticed even though passed by a subordinate officer, it shall be
ordered to be removed forth with, at the cost of the contractor. Important items like R.C.C. in
works shall be carried out only in the presence of the Assistant Executive Engineer. The Assistant
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 21

Executive Engineer may delegate supervision of small items of R.C.C. work like lintels, coverings
lab, sunshade and other similar items to Assistant Engineer, in case he is unable to be present at the
time of concreting. Plain cement concrete works for levelling course, side drains and other similar
items shall be done in the presence of the Junior Engineer/Overseer in charge. However, plain
concrete works for major structures shall be done only in the presence of the Assistant Executive
Engineer. In all major works, the Executive Engineer shall decide, the items, which are to be done
in his presence. Quality control shall be effected as per the provisions of the chapter on Quality
Control. Certificates as required in this chapter shall also be
insisted.

● A list of mandatory tests should be prepared and attached with the tender documents
● Test Registers should be issued to all officers under the control of the work by Executive
Engineer.
● Test Reports of all mandatory tests should be submitted along with the final bill of the work.

21.03.2. Sub Standard Work

If any work done is found defective or not in accordance with the specification, the Engineer under
the control of the work may order its removal and re-construction or its rectification is deemed fit.
The contractor is bound to carry out such removal and re-construction or rectification at his cost.
The Engineer shall refer the matter to the agreement authority, who will decide whether to accept
reject or rectify the same. In case it is decided to be accepted, the agreement authority will also
decide the rate at which the work may be accepted.

21.04. Issue, use and care of departmental materials

No departmental materials shall be issued to the contractor from the department. Bitumen required
for the work shall be issued as per NIT and SBD conditions

21.05. Work spot order book

For all works exceeding T S powers of Assistant Executive Engineer a works pot order book shall
be maintained in the prescribed form in Appendix 2100B at the site of work. The following
instructions shall be followed in maintaining work spot order book.
1. Each page of the book shall be machine numbered. The books shall be serially numbered
and a register of work spot order books shall be maintained in the Sectionoffice.
2. The Junior Engineer/Overseer under the control of the supervision of the work shall be
responsible

313
for the safe custody and maintenance of the book issued to him for a particular work.
3. The Junior Engineer/Overseer at site shall record in the Work spot order book, the day-
today progress of the work; procurement of materials, inspecting officers shall record their remarks
and instructions in the work spot order book.
The work spot order book shall invariably be perused and initialed with date by the Junior
Engineer/Assistant Engineer in charge, during his inspection, irrespective of whether he has any
remarks to offer or not.
The work spot order book shall not be treated as a substitute for measurement book or field book.
The orders issued by the inspecting officers shall be recorded in the work spot order book. If such
orders are beyond his competence, the officer issuing the orders shall address the appropriate
authority and obtain ratification. The instructions and orders issued through the work spot order

CHAPTER - 21
book will be binding on the departmental subordinates at site. The Overseer shall submit copies of
the instructions to the Junior /Assistant Engineer. The Junior/Assistant Engineer shall communicate
copies of instructions to be complied with by the contractor to him in writing.

21.06. Progress Report

The Progress reports of works are very important for Department and Government, which enables
them to monitor progress of work and to complete the work in time so as to fulfill the commitment
to the public. For budgeted works, progress report in the prescribed form in Appendix 2100C1 shall
be forwarded by the Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer on or before the 02ndday of every month
and these shall be consolidated and forwarded to the Executive Engineer before 3rd of every month

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

by the Assistant Executive Engineer. The Executive Engineer shall forward monthly/consolidated
progress report of works in his division to the Chief Engineer and Superintending Engineer before
05th of every month. The observations made by these officers after analyzing the progress report
and instructions if any shall be forwarded to all the subordinate officers immediately after receipt
of the progress report. However, the field officer concerned shall give maximum effort to avoid
unnecessary delays in the execution of works.
The Executive Engineer shall review progress of other works monthly, the Superintending
Engineer quarterly and the Chief Engineer half yearly. Conferences and their observations shall be
recorded in the minutes, which shall be forwarded to all subordinate officers. The Physical and
Financial progress of each work shall be analyzed in detail with the concerned field officer and
bottlenecks, if any, discussed and remedial measures suggested for speedy execution of the work.
The form of the progress report is as given in Appendix2100C2.21.07.

21.07 Safety provisions

The J.E/field staff under the control of a work shall ensure that all safety provisions given in
Appendix 2100D applicable to the work are complied with. He shall arrange to take corrective
steps wherever required. The inspecting officers shall also examine whether such provisions are
adhered to.

21.08. Labour
As per special conditions of contract (above) 20.6.1.4

21.09. Measurements and payments:

Payment for the works within the TS powers of the Superintending Engineer shall be based on
measurements recorded at various stages of the work by the Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer as
the

314
 case may be and duly checked by superior officers. The contractor or his authorised agent shall be
present at the time of recording of each set of measurements and shall sign the measurement book
and/or level field book in token of his acceptance. If the contractor fails to be present at the time of
taking measurements either in person or through his authorised agent or fails to accept the
measurements or file objections to the measurements with reasons before check measurement, the
measurements taken by the Engineer shall be deemed to be correct subject to check measurements.
The measurement book i n the form given in Appendix 2100E1 is the original record of actual
measurements. Except for quantities of work paid on level basis, all measurements are recorded in
the measurement book. The J.E shall record the measurements. The measurements shall be checked
by an officer higher in rank to the officer who has recorded the measurement, but not by an officer
below the rank of an Assistant Engineer. All measurements shall be recorded directly in the
measurement book or in the field book and the description shall be lucid to enable easy
identification and check. All the Measurement books and Field books belonging to each Division
shall be numbered serially and pages of each book shall be machine numbered and a register of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 21

them shall be maintained in JK.P.W. Form 84 in the Division Office, showing the serial number of
each book, names of sections to which issued, the date of issue and date of return so that its
eventual return to the Division Office may be watched. The completed measurement books shall be
sent to the Division Office for final record.
The above procedure shall be adopted for the maintenance of Standard Measurement books also. A
movement register shall be maintained in the Section, Sub Division and Division offices for noting
the receipt and return of measurement books and LF books.
As a general rule, earth work shall be measured by level section where the total quantity exceeds
300 cum. and where the site conditions are such that level sections, will give correct indications of
the quantity of work involved. If the site conditions are not suitable for working out the quantities
through level sections, orders of the officer who accorded technical sanction shall be obtained for
taking measurements otherwise, than by level sections in cases where the total quantity exceeds
300cum. Where level sections are taken for computing the quantity of earth work the initial levels
and final levels shall be entered in properly numbered field books (Appendix 2100E2) by the
concerned Junior/ Assistant Engineer. Computerized calculation methods shall be utilized for
earthwork computation wherever available. The agreement authority shall approve the proposals
for earthwork in the initial level sheets. The method of measurement as indicated in the standard
data book in metric system shall be followed. Where there is no specific direction in this matter in
the standard data book, the Indian standard method of measurement for building work shall be
followed (I.S. 1200 as amended from time to time).
Electronics device shall be utilized for earthwork computation as far as possible wherever available
in which case computerized printout duly signed by the contractor and verified by the Junior /
Assistant Engineer checked by the Assistant Executive Engineer shall be treated as records.
If an item of work is measured in incomplete stages, up to date measurements shall be recorded
each time and the quantity for payment at any stage shall be worked out by deducting the total
quantity already paid from the up to date quantity measured at that time.
In making interim payments, care shall be taken to see that no over payments are made. For this
purpose, if tape measurements are taken for earthwork, requiring level calculation a deduction of
not less than 10 percent shall be made in the quantity assessed for payment.
In case of works, which will be covered up, measurements shall be taken prior to such covering up
and got verified checked and accepted even though a bill may not be immediately due.
In case of works like demolition of an existing structure etc., which cannot be measured after
execution of the work, pre measurement of the work to be done shall be taken and got check
measured before the commencement of the work.

315
Payment for the works above the TS powers of the Superintending Engineers shall be based on
measurements / reduced level recorded and signed by the contractor in computer format at various
stages of the works duly verified by the Assistant Engineer and checked by the Assistant Executive
Engineer. The measurement shall be in computerized M-Book format. In quadruplicate the
measurements shall be verified by Assistant Engineer and checked the Assistant Executive
Engineers and two copies to be returned to the contractor. One copy of this approved measurement
shall be accompanied with the bills submitted by the contractor. The bill shall be prepared and
submitted by the contractor in quadruplicate supported by approved measurement with soft copy.
The contractor shall jointly be responsible for the correctness and completeness of the
measurements with the verifying and checking officers. Computerized level field books to be
issued and maintained in the same way as computerized measurement books as 5th para noted
above.
The items of test check by Executive Engineer should invariably include

CHAPTER - 21
R.C.C./Reinforcement/other high value item which will also ensure structural safety.
Interim bills may be paid at suitable intervals according to the stage of execution of the work subject
to availability of funds. Junior/Assistant Engineer shall prepare the bill on the basis of measurements
taken by him and deal with it after getting the bill accepted by the contractor. After verification and
check measurement, the Assistant Executive Engineer or Executive Engineer will pass the bill and
effect payments as per powers delegated to them.
Payment for deposit works shall be made by the concerned officers as per powers delegated for
passing and payments of bills.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

21.10. Payment of Work Bills
The Payments of work bills are paid as per actual Measurement recorded and checked in the M-
book. if the officer himself is satisfied of genuineness of the bills subject to the condition that if any
excess payment is noticed, the officer who authorized the payment will be held responsible. The
officer, who passes the bill,1 before making payment, will record a certificate to this effect in the
bill (referclause2214also).
The actual measurements shall conform to approved/vetted drawings.
No payment shall be made for the items which are incomplete with respect to the
description/specifications of the said items incorporated in the allotment of works.

21.11. Deviations and Extra Items

Alterations in sanctioned designs, shall not be made in a work without the approval of the TS
authority. The agreement authority shall be kept informed then and there of all deviations ordered
by authorities‘ subordinate to him. All deviations, which involve major structural alterations,
whether excess cost is involved or not shall be reported to the authority who technically sanctioned
the estimate and his approval obtained before effecting the deviation.
The Engineers under the control of the work shall be careful to adhere to the estimate as far as
possible and shall not carry out excess quantities as a matter of course. If, however, in any item,
excess over estimate quantity is inevitable and has to be carried out, before authorizing the
additional work to be executed the inter SE position of bids is examined and extra financial
implication communicated to higher authorities for their concurrence.
● Deviation from the quantities in agreement which may result in exceeding the contract value
shall be taken up only after the approval of the competent authority.
● Extra/substitution of item shall be executed only after the approval of the competent
authority.

21.12. Extension of Time

Time shall be considered as the essence of contract except in the case of piecework contract. The
contractor shall submit a chronological programme for execution of each stage of work before
executing agreement which shall be examined by the agreement authority and the approved
316
 programme form part of the agreement. If it is found that contractor is not adhering to the approved
programme fine shall be imposed / contract terminated as contemplated in the Standard Bidding
Document. If however the failure of the contractor to complete the work on the stipulated date is
due to any departmental delays or due to design and construction problems faced during execution,
then he may apply for extension of time through the Assistant Engineer before the expiry of the
period of completion. This shall follow the procedure of the Bidding Document. Every such
application shall be properly enquired into by the Assistant Engineer /Assistant Executive Engineer
under the control and a report with recommendation shall be submitted in preform given in
Appendix 2100F to the authority who executed the agreement.
The extension of time of completion is granted after ascertaining the balance time period for
completion of work.

21.12.1. Fines for Extension of Time of completion

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 21

The Contractor is bound to complete the work within the stipulated period as per the agreement.
When the contract period has to be extended wholly or partly due to default on the part of the
contractor, the Agreement Authority may sanction extension of time after imposing fine prescribed
in the bidding document.
It is also open to the agreement authority to refuse sanction to a modified program or extension of
time if such modification or extension is wholly or partly due to default on the part of the
contractor. The agreement authority may in such cases cancel the contract and arrange the balance
work following the procedure laid down in the General Conditions of contract/standard bidding
document and rearrange the work within ninety days from the date of order of termination.
Application for extension of time from the contractor shall in all cases be made before the expiry of
the time of completion as per agreement. The Junior/Assistant Engineer shall submit the
application received from the contactor to Assistant Executive Engineer with his remarks /
recommendations regarding the genuineness of the reasons stated by the contractor. If the
contractor fails to make such application in time as mentioned above the contract will stand
terminated on the expiry of the time of completion stipulated in the agreement including extension
already sanctioned. In case there is no default on the part of the contractor the termination will not
attract any penalty. When there is default on the part of the contractor, he shall he liable for
penalties as per general conditions of contract for termination.
The contractor shall not execute any work as per the agreement after the expiry of the time of
completion unless the agreement authority duly sanctions extension of time. If any work is carried
out by the contractor in contravention to this, the same shall be treated as unauthorized and no
payment will be made for such work. The department will also have the right to claims from the
contractor, cost of dismantling and removing such unauthorized works. Departmental officers shall
be responsible for the delay in completion of a project if the delay is attributed due to lapses on
their part
Fines for extension of time
Period Rate of fine
First Extension as per SBD

Beyond First Extension as per SBD

Incentives of timely completion

Bonus in Bid capacity by 0.5 in multiplying factor M from 2.5 to 3.0

317
 21.13. Date of Completion of Work
The date of completion of a work is the date of last measurements taken by the concerned
Assistant Engineer/contractor on completion of work. A completion certificate in the prescribed
proforma (Appendix 2100G) along with the as built drawings of the work shall be submitted to
the TS authority with copies to the superior officers. Final bill will be paid only after completion
is certified by the competent authority.
21.14. Suspension of Works
If, in the course of execution of work, circumstances arise necessitating the suspension of the
work in whole or part, the agreement authority may order suspension of the work in accordance
with the provisions in the general conditions of contract. However, before ordering such
suspension, the agreement authority shall consider all alternatives for different and speedy

CHAPTER - 21
execution of the work and order suspension only if it is inevitable. The period of suspension shall
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 21

be kept to the absolute minimum required.

21.15. Foreclosure
Cases may arise where a work or part of it may have to be abandoned after the contract
agreement for the same is executed. In such cases foreclosure shall be ordered by the agreement
authority immediately after the decision is taken regarding abandonment of a p art or whole of
the work and further action taken in accordance with the provisions in the general conditions of
contract. In such cases the contractor will not be eligible for any claim other than extension of

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

time of completion to the extent of suspension period.

21.16. Termination of Contract in Case of Death, Insanity or Insolvency:

If the contractor is an individual or a proprietary concern and the individual or the proprietor
dies, becomes insane or insolvent, the agreement authority has to satisfy himself whether the
legal heirs or legal representatives of the contractor are capable of carrying out and continuing
the work, and if they are willing, he may entrust the balance portion of the work to such legal heir
or representative on a fresh agreement on the same terms and conditions as in the original
agreement. In other cases the agreement authority shall cancel the contract in respect of the
incomplete portion of the work and rearrange the work otherwise without any penalty or
damage to either party on account of such cancellation and rearrangement. All liabilities due to
government arising under the contract up to the date of death of contractor shall be realized
from the estate of the contractor.
21.16.1. Termination - Default by Contractor
As per general conditions of contract, the agreement authority has the power to cancel the
contract and arrange the work otherwise in the event of default by the contractor. The agreement
authority in exercising the power vested with him shall follow the procedure outlined in the
general conditions of the contract. The damages and penalties provided there in and applicable to
the particular contract shall also be realized in accordance with the general conditions of
contract.
Compensation for delay / Liquidated Damage
1) If the contractor fails to maintain the required progress as per conditions of contract or to
complete the work and clear the site on or before the contract or extended date of completion, he
shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy available under the law to the Employer on
account of such breach, pay to the employer as liquidated damages an amount calculated @
0.1% (zero point one percent) of the contract price of the work for every week of delay subject a
maximum of 10% of the contract price or as per SBD
2) The amount of compensation may be adjusted or set-off against any sum payable to the
contractor under this or any other contract with the government. In case, the contractor does not
achieve a particular milestone mentioned in the conditions of contract or the re-scheduled
milestone(s), the amount shown against that mile stone shall be withheld, to be adjusted against
the compensation levied at the final grant of extension of time.

318
 3) With holding of this amount on failure to achieve the completion of work or of milestones
shall be automatic without any notice to the contractor.

21.16.2. Termination of Contract

Broadly termination shall be as per the SBD clause however the department can terminate the
contract and rearrange the work at the risk and cost of contractor in the following cases
i. If the contractor does not turn up for starting the work within the specified period to take charge
of the site after executing the agreement.
ii. If the contractor does not show the proportionate progress during the extended period of time of
completion.
iii. If the contractor abandons the work after executing a portion without genuine reason and does
not resume or complete it even after specific direction from the Department.
iv. Fails to make application for extension of time of completion in time.
v. The license of the contractor whose work has been terminated shall be cancelled with
immediate effect and shall be barred from quoting for another work for a minimum period of
five years. Contract license shall not be renewed in his name or different name of a binamy.
vi. A company or person or firm once terminated shall be disqualified from participating in any
tender in his name or by using a different name or binamy. There shall also be a fine and
forfeiture of deposits

21.16.2.1 Realization of loss on account of termination

The balance work shall be got executed through e-tenders on the risk & cost of contractor. The
contractor shall be directed to remit the risk and cost amount within three months. There is no
need to wait till the work is arranged alternatively through another contractor and the total loss
sustainable due to the default of the original contractor is assessed. Such loss, if any, shall be
realized after completion of the work. If he fails to remit the amount within this periods
following steps can be adopted for realization of loss. The amount can be realized from the
following.
2. EMD /Security
3. Bill amount / retention if any due to the contract.
4. Any dues from department to the contract
5. Bank Guarantee / Performance Guarantee or By filling civil suit against the contractor

21.16.2.2 Revoking of termination

The contract for a work on terminated by the agreement authority can be revoked by the
immediate superior officer if the contractor expresses his willingness at later date to complete
the balance work.

21.17. Rearrangement of work after termination

The procedure to minimize the loss to government on account of termination of contract shall be
as incorporated in the general and special conditions of contract. Rearrangement of works
should be done
as expeditiously as possible and there should not be any substantial changes in the specification
of balance works re-arranged.

319
21.18. Settlement of Disputes and Differences
The agreement authority as well as the contractor shall follow the procedure contained in the
relevant clause in the general conditions of the contract for settling the disputes arising out of
the execution of the contract as per SBB.

21.19. Handing over work and site on completion

On completion of a work, the contractor shall hand over the completed work with as built
drawings to the Assistant Engineer concerned after removing all debris, balance materials,
temporary construction etc., and cleaning up the site. The Assistant Engineer shall hand over

CHAPTER - 21
when the work is intended for the use of any other Department or agency, the completed works
along with a s et of completion drawings to the concerned officer of that Department/ Agency. If
any land is excess of that required by the completed work had been taken over for the work and
if it is no longer required for the Department the Assistant Executive Engineer will take action
to hand over such land to the Revenue Department.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

320
 Chapter 22

22.01. Execution of works

22.01.1. General

All works shall be executed based on the specification of MoRTH for road works and National
Building Code for building works. The Assistant Engineer is the first responsible engineering
officer at the site of any construction work like buildings, bridge, roads, etc., who looks after
day to day king of the project. The efforts taken & the strict supervision on his part have direct
relation to the quality of work. He shall therefore get conversant with various aspects of
execution of work, to discharge the duties efficiently. The Assistant Engineer can depute one or
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

more Overseers to a work site for the effective supervision and proper quality control.

22.02. Handing Over Site

The Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer will hand over the site to the contractor as specified in
section 2102.1 of contract management.

22.02.1 Study of Concerned Documents by the Contractor

The basic document related to work is the estimate. Therefore it shall be thoroughly studied for
its scope and provisions. The relevant valid drawings shall also be studied and understood
properly. The tender document and specification of items must be clearly understood. The
provision in the contract document and schedule shall be studied with reference to time limit,
escalation, defect liability, progress schedule & quantities and rates mentioned. The
specifications relevant to the schedule of items shall also be refreshed.
The site may be finalized and desired location of site office, storage sheds, batching plant,
casting yard, labour camp etc. fixed. Source of construction material like sand, aggregates,
cement and steel etc. also to be identified. Draw a detailed work programme on the basis of
availability of plant, material manpower etc. for the smooth progress of work.

22.02.2. Site office

The contractor shall setup site office and a permanent board shall be erected at the site
displaying the details of the work including estimate cost, contract amount, period of contract,
scheduled date of completion of work, name of contractor etc. The following details shall be
available in the site office at all times.

1. Drawings
All drawings like plan, elevation, layout plan, sections, R.C.C. layout, alignment plan etc. shall
be maintained in site office. Such plans are required for daily reference and during the inspection
of higher officers. These drawings shall be properly preserved. Such drawings shall bear the
signatures of officers approving such drawings, to avoid use of any other drawing. Outdated or
superseded drawings shall be clearly marked as such and removed from the site. Also all
drawings in CD may be kept at the office.

2. Estimate &Tender
Copy of the technically sanctioned estimate shall be kept in site office under custody of
Assistant Engineer for correct reference. Similarly, the contract copy containing all documents
shall be kept at site for study and guidance

321
 3. Other Registers
Some other registers are also required to be maintained like dewatering, record for foundation,
labour attendance/ wages register maintained by the contractor.

4. Instruments to be kept at Site office

Essential instruments for execution of work shall be kept at site or carried along with if possible.
The Asst. Engineer/Junior Engineer shall take care for safe custody and proper calibration of the
instruments. If there is loss/theft of any instrument, in that case t he cost of instrument can be
recovered from Assistant Engineer /Junior Engineer.

CHAPTER - 22
These are Auto level/Dumpy Level, Theodolite Vernier Caliper and Tapes. Tapes are required
to be carried always for checking measurements. Generally, following tapes shall be available.
i. Metallic tape 15 m &-30m.
ii. Steel tape lm, 15 m,30m.
iii. Cloth tape 15m, & 30m.
In addition each Asst. Engineer/Junior Engineer must carry a 3m. steel tape and a calculator in
his pocket at all times. The following tools are also helpful in execution.
• hammer and peg
• chisel

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

• brush
• Nylon String
• 1 m straight edge +wedge
• Spirit Level
• 1m meter square template
• Chalk
• Clipboard
• File folder
• Torch with batteries
• Signboard
• Red & green flag (for roadworks)
• Umbrella/raincoat

5. Tools and Plants

Available modern instruments, tools and plants shall be used for speed and quality work
wherever possible.

22.03. Safe construction practices

Public safety as well as safety of the workforce is of utmost importance. In case of buildings the
provisions of Part 7 of National Building Code 2005 shall apply. For roads and bridges refer
IRC SP- 55

22.04. Environmental considerations

For all construction activities, provisions of environmental requirements in the code and manual
shall be followed. All necessary clearances at the local, state and national levels shall be obtained
prior to the start of work.

322
 22.04.1 Green buildings
· A green building is one which uses less water, optimizes energy efficiency, conserves
natural resources, generates less waste and provides healthier spaces for occupants, as compared
to a conventional building. The Indian Green Building Council (IGBC) is the leading green
building movement in the country. India is witnessing tremendous growth in infrastructure and
construction development. The construction industry in India is one of the largest economic
activities and is growing at an average rate of 9.5% as compared to the global average of 5%. As
the sector is growing rapidly, preserving the environment poses a host of challenges. To enable
the construction industry environmentally sensitive, CII-Sohrabji Godrej Green Business Centre
has established the Indian Green Building Council (IGBC). IGBC, is a consensus driven not-
for-profit Council, represents the building industry, consisting of more than 1,923. committed
members. The Council encourages, builders, developers, owners, architects and consultants to
design & construct green buildings, thereby enhancing the economic and environmental
performance of buildings. The Green Building Movement in India has been spearheaded by
IGBC since 2001, by creating awareness amongst the stakeholders. Thus far, the Council has
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

been instrumental in enabling 2.23. Billion sq.ft of green buildings in the country. The Council‘s
activities have enabled a market transformation with regard to green building materials and
technologies. IGBC continuously works to provide tools that facilitate the adoption of green
building practices in India. The development of IGBC Green New Buildings rating system is
another important step in this direction. Green building is the practice of creating structures and
using processes that are environmentally responsible and resource-efficient throughout a
building's life-cycle from sitting to design, construction, operation, maintenance, renovation and
deconstruction. This practice expands and complements the classical building design concerns
of economy, utility, durability, and comfort. Green building is also known as a sustainable or
high performance building.
· Benefits of Green New Buildings
Green New buildings can have tremendous benefits, both tangible and intangible. The most
tangible benefits are the reduction in water and energy consumption right from day one of
occupancy. The energy savings could range from 20 - 30 % and water savings around 30 - 50%.
The intangible benefits of green new buildings include enhanced air quality, excellent day
lighting, health & well-being of the occupants, safety benefits and conservation of scarce
national resources.
· National Priorities Addressed in the Rating System
The IGBC Green New Buildings rating system addresses the most important national priorities
which include water conservation, handling waste, energy efficiency, reduced use of fossil fuels,
lesser dependence on usage of virgin materials and health & well-being of occupants. The rating
system requires the application of National standards and codes such as t he NBC, ECBC,
MoEF guidelines, CPCB guidelines, and several others. The overarching objective is to be better
than the national standards so as to create new benchmarks. IGBC Green New Buildings Rating
System 5.

· Water Conservation
· Most of the Asian countries are water stressed and in countries like India, the water table
has reduced drastically over the last decade. IGBC Green New Buildings rating system
encourages use of water in a self-sustainable manner through reduce, recycle and reuse
strategies. By adopting this rating programme, green new buildings can save potable water to an
extent of 30 - 50%.
· Handling of Consumer Waste
Handling of waste in buildings is extremely difficult as most of the waste generated is not
segregated at source and has a high probability of going to landfills. This continues to be a
challenge to the municipalities which needs to be addressed. The rating system intends to
address this by encouraging buildings to segregate the building waste

323
· Energy Efficiency
The building sector is a large consumer of electrical energy. Through IGBC Green New
Buildings rating system, buildings can reduce energy consumption through energy efficient -
building envelope, lighting, air conditioning systems, etc., The energy savings that can be
realized by adopting this rating programme can be to the tune of 20 - 30%.
· Reduced Use of Fossil Fuels
Fossil fuel is a slowly depleting resource, the world over. The use of fossil fuel for
transportation has been a major source of pollution. The rating system encourages the use of
alternate fuel vehicles for transportation.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

· Reduced Dependency on Virgin Materials
The rating system encourages projects to use recycled & reused material and discourages the
use of virgin materials, thereby, addressing environmental impacts associated with extraction
and processing of scare natural resources.

Health and Well-being of Occupants

Health and well-being of occupants are the most important aspect of IGBC Green New
Buildings rating system. The rating system ensures adequate ventilation, daylight and occupant
well-being facilities which are essential in a building. The rating system also recognises
measures to minimize indoor air pollutants.

The impacts of the built environment:

Aspects of Built Consumption: Environmental Ultimate Effects :

Environment: Effects:

· Sitting · Energy · Waste · Harm to Human

Health
· Design · Water · Air pollution
· Environment
· Construction · Materials · Water pollution Degradation

· Operation Natural · Indoor · Loss of Resources

Resources pollution
· Maintenance
· Heat islands
· Renovation
· Storm water
· Deconstruction runoff

· Noise

324
 Green buildings are designed to reduce the overall impact of the built environment on human
health and the natural environment by:

· Efficiently using energy, water, and other resources

· Protecting occupant health and improving employee productivity

· Reducing waste, pollution and environmental degradation

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

For example, green buildings may incorporate sustainable materials in their construction (e.g.,
reused, recycled-content, or made from renewable resources); create healthy indoor
environments with minimal pollutants (e.g., reduced product emissions); and/or feature
landscaping that reduces water usage (e.g., by using native plants that survive without extra
watering).
The built environment has a vast impact on the natural environment, human health, and the
economy. By adopting green building strategies, we can maximize both economic and
environmental performance. Green construction methods can be integrated into buildings at any
stage, from design and construction, to renovation and deconstruction. However, the most
significant benefits can be obtained if the design and construction team takes an integrated
approach from the earliest stages of a building project. Potential benefits of green building can
include:
· Environmental benefits
· Enhance and protect biodiversity and ecosystems

· Improve air and water quality

· Reduce waste streams

· Conserve and restore natural resources

· Economic benefits
· Reduce operating costs

· Create, expand, and shape markets for green product and services

· Improve occupant productivity

· Optimize life-cycle economic performance

· Social benefits

· Enhance occupant comfort and health

· Heighten aesthetic qualities

· Minimize strain on local infrastructure

· Improve overall quality of life

325
22.05. Quality Assurance of works
For all construction activities the provisions of quality manual shall be followed.

22.06. Clearing and Grubbing

Before any construction starts the site must be cleared of debris. All materials including trees,
grass, vegetation, crops and structures, which fall within the area, must be removed. All stumps
and roots need to be removed (grubbed out) and the holes/ hollows left must be filled with
compacted suitable filling materials.
Existing structures that has to be demolished, shall be done as per the provision of Section 5 of
Part 7, National Building Code 2005.

CHAPTER - 22
The products of the clearing are to be stacked in such place and in such manner as may be ordered
by the Assistant Engineer and the ground shall be left in a perfectly clear condition. All products
of the clearing shall be the property of Government. These shall be disposed of as per existing
rules without damage to the environment.

22.06.1 Layout of the Work

After having cleared the site, fix up permanent benchmarks, guide reference pillars, and transfer
the alignment with the help of reference pillars fixed at site during the location survey. The layout
shall be done correctly to true lines, dimensions and locations as per approved drawings. The

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

junction pillars beyond layout area shall be erected marked, painted and maintained throughout for
reference. It shall be crosschecked for right angles, diagonals etc. The Assistant Executive
Engineer shall approve all layouts.

22.06.2. Excavation for road work and drain and approval of foundation
All excavation shall be done as per section 300 of MoRTH specification. The Assistant Executive
Engineer shall approve all excavations.

22.06.3. Excavation for structures

Excavation for structures shall consist of the removal of material for the construction of
foundations for buildings, bridges, culverts, retaining walls, headwalls, cut off walls, pipe culverts
and other similar structures, in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the
lines and dimensions shown on the drawings or as indicated by t he Assistant Engineer. The work
shall include construction of the necessary cofferdams and cribs and their subsequent removal; all
necessary sheeting, shoring, bracing, draining and pumping; the removal of all logs, stumps,
grubs and other deleterious matter and obstructions, necessary for placing the foundations;
trimming bottoms of excavations; backfilling and clearing up the site and the disposal of all
surplus material.
Old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals and any other item of archeological importance found on
excavation or pulling down shall be the property of the Government. Shall any ancient masonry
or other old work of interest be opened up, or any religious edifice or relic be involved in removal
or destruction in the execution of a work, a clear report on the matter shall be sent to Government
through the Development commissioner works and orders obtained before the demolition or
removal of such works or relics. Regarding the disposal of old curiosities, the Assistant Executive
Engineer shall consult the District Collector.

326
 22.06.4. Dewatering and protection
Normally, open foundations shall be laid dry. Where water is met with in excavation due to
stream flow, seepage, springs, rain or other reasons, the Contractor shall take adequate measures
to keep the foundation trenches dry when so required and to protect the green concrete/masonry
against damage by erosion or sudden rising of water level. The Contractor shall take all
precautions in diverting channels and in discharging the drained water as not to cause damage to
the works, crops or any other property.

22.06.5. Preparation of foundation:

The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both longitudinally and transversely or stepped as
directed by the Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer. Before footing is laid, the surface shall be
slightly watered and rammed. If, during inspection, it is found that the contractor has over
excavated the foundation in excess by what is shown in the drawings, he shall not be allowed to
refill this with earth but, the additional excavation shall be got filled up by concrete or masonry
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

of such proportions as decided by the Executive Engineer. No extra cost is payable to the
contractor on this account.
When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be freed of all soft and loose material,
cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level and stepped as directed by the Junior
Engineer/Assistant Engineer. All seams shall be cleaned out and filled with cement mortar or
grout to the satisfaction of the Junior Engineer/ Assistant Engineer. When foundation piles are
used, the excavation of each pit shall be substantially completed before beginning pile-driving
operations therein.

22.06.6. Public safety:

Near towns, villages and all frequented places, trenches and foundation pits shall be securely
fenced and provided with proper caution signs and marked with red lights at night to avoid
accidents. The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation
operations do not affect or damage adjoining structures. For safety precautions, guidance may
be taken from IS:3764.

22.06.7. Backfilling
Back filling shall be done with approved material after concrete or masonry is fully set and
carried out in such a way as not to cause undue thrust on any part of the structure. All space
between foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled to the
original surface in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thicknesses. The compaction shall
be done with the help of suitable equipment such as mechanical tamper, rammer, plate vibrator
etc., after necessary watering, so as to achieve a density not less than the field density before
excavation.

22.06.8. Excavated material

Excavated materials need assessing as su itable or unsuitable. Suitable materials shall be used
when required for works. The excavated materials can be temporarily stockpiled, but must
cause no damage to services or property. Any excess suitable material, which is not required for
the construction of the works or any material classified as u nsuitable is the property of
Department. The contractor shall stockpile these materials separately, as directed, or place the
material in an approved location on site. To be suitable as fill material the soil must not contain
any vegetable matter. (Details as per MoRTH)
22.06.9. Borrow Pits
The borrow pits, if any required, shall be kept as drained as possible. It shall be made only at the
specified distance from the proposed structure. It shall not be cut opened where they might: -

327
a) affect the stability or safety of the highway, or any railway or other structures, which may be
present.
b) prevent natural or artificial drainage or irrigation.
c) damage adjacent property or future expansion plans for the highway.
After the correct layout is marked, cross checked and approved the excavation for
foundation starts. Before starting excavation, it is necessary that ground levels are taken
correctly and recorded in level book and the foundation plan. The levels at all junctions of
building shall be taken at a large number of points to give correct idea of ground occupied in
foundation.
Unauthorized entries to site of work shall be prohibited. The contractor shall obtain proper
license for explosives whenever explosives are required to be stored at site and proper
magazines as per rules must be insisted on.

CHAPTER - 22
22.07. Formwork
The concrete acquires exact shape of the mould in which it is placed. For good concrete work,
shuttering, centering and concreting operations are three important things. It is therefore
important that principle of sound design, erection of the shuttering is strictly followed. Any
negligence on this count may lead to mishaps resulting in loss of human life and Government
money.
The provisions of clause 11 of IS 456:2000 shall be followed for formwork. The plan of the
formwork proposed to be employed by contractor shall be obtained and examined by the Junior
Engineer Assistant Executive Engineer in respect of contracts entered into by him or higher
officers. In respect of contracts executed by the Assistant Engineer, the plans shall be obtained

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

and examined by the Assistant Engineer. If such plans are not satisfactory to the Assistant
Executive Engineer or the Assistant Engineer as the case may be, the contractor shall be asked
to make such changes in them as may be required.
The formwork shall be robust and strong and the joints shall be leak-proof and must be
properly sealed. The number of joints in the formwork shall be kept to a minimum by using
large size panels.

22.07.1 Forms
In designing forms, concrete shall be treated as a fluid weighing 2400 Kg. per cubic metre and
in addition a live load of 700Kg. per square metre on horizontal projection of surfaces shall also
be allowed. Forms shall be so designed and constructed that they may be removed without
injury to the concrete. Blocks and bracings shall be removed with the forms and in no case shall
any portions of the wood forms be left in the concrete. The forms must be so constructed, set
and maintained that the finished concrete shall be of the form and dimensions shown on the
plans and true to line and grade. Allowance for the deflection of forms and for shrinkage and
settlement of staging or centering in addition to the allowance for dead loads, and camber, as
shown upon the plans shall be provided.
Forms used a second time shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be free from bulge, splits or
warps. In case of compaction of concrete by vibration, the forms shall be so designed as to
withstand the effects of vibration. The formwork shall be coated with an approved release agent
that will effectively prevent sticking/ coating the reinforcement and will not stain the concrete
surface. Lubricating oil(machine oils) shall not be used for this purpose.
The forms shall remain in place for the period required as p er clause 11.3 of IS 456 2000. The
foregoing specification for forms shall also apply to steel forms. The sheets used shall be of
such thickness that the forms will remain true to shape. All bolt and rivet heads shall be
countersunk. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms
rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. Steel forms, which do not
present a smooth surface or line up properly, shall not be used. Special care shall be exercised to
keep steel forms
328
 free from rust, grease or other foreign matter, which will discolor the concrete.
Broadly, the following steps shall be observed
i) Proper design of centering system for all dead & live loads that is approved by competent
officer.
ii) Proper use of shuttering & centering material. Centering shall be of steel props & beams
(telescopic), shuttering of waterproof ply board (preferably laminated on one side) & steel
centering plates.
iii) The erection shall be done carefully. The ground on which it is to be supported shall be firm and
unyielding even during rains. The supports shall be adequatelybraced.
iv) After erection, the Assistant Engineer and Assistant Executive Engineer shall check it for
dimension, line, level &safety.
v) The centering shall be removed only after the minimum prescribed curing period is over.

22.07.2 Scaffolding
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

Scaffolding is the responsibility of contractors, but the departmental officer must ensure that the
scaffolding provided is adequate and properly fixed together and strengthened so that workmen
and others using them can carry on work safely.

22.07.3 Shuttering and Centering Work

The Executive Engineer may require the contract or to use screw jacks or hardwood wedges to
take up any settlement in staging or centering either before or during the placing of the concrete.
All staging and false work shall be built on foundations of sufficient strength to carry the load
without appreciable deformation. On stable soils, like rock, shale, stiff clay and sands free from
scour, spread footings may be used and shall be of size to be determined by the load to be
supported. In other locations, the formwork shall be supported on pi les. The piles shall be
spaced and driven to support the required loads without settlement
Special measures in the design of formwork shall be taken to ensure that it does not hinder the
shrinkage of concrete. The soffit of the form work shall be so designed as to ensure that the
form work does not restrain the shortening and/or hogging of beams during pre- stressing. Any
cut outs or openings provided in any structural member to facilitate erection of formwork shall
be closed with the same grade of concrete as t he adjoining structure immediately after removal
of formwork ensuring watertight joints. Provision shall be made for safe access on, to and about
the formwork at the levels as required. Close watch shall be maintained to check for
resettlement of form work during concreting. Any settlement of Form work during concreting
shall be promptly rectified.
Water used for curing shall not be allowed to stagnate near the base plates supporting the
staging and shall be properly drained.

2208.1. Materials Cement

Cement to be used in the works shall conform to clause 5.1 of IS 456: 2000
Bagged or bulk cement which has partially set or which contains lumps of caked cement must
be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or used bags is not permitted. Any
cement stored for a long time needs to be tested before its use.

22.08.2. Aggregate
It includes both fine and coarse aggregates and shall comply with the requirements of IS 383

2208.3 Coarse Aggregates

Coarse aggregate shall consists of clean, hard, strong, dense, non porous crushed stones,
crushed gravel , natural gravel or other approved inert materials. These shall not consist of
pieces of disintegrated stones, soft, flakey, elongated particles, salt, alkali, vegetable matter or

329
 or other deleterious material. Coarse aggregates having positive alkali-silica reaction shall not
be used. Coarse aggregate shall confirm IS 383 and tests for conformity shall be carried out as
per IS 23.86 Parts I to VIII.

22.08.4Fine Aggregates
It consists of natural sand or hard pieces of crushed stone or gravel or combination thereof.
They shall be clean and shall not contain mica or other deleterious material in such quantities as
to reduce the strength and durability of the concrete or to attack the embedded steel. It also
confirm to IS 383.

CHAPTER - 22
2208.5.Water
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids,
alkalis, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may cause deterioration to
concrete or steel. It shall conform to requirements of clause 5.4 of IS 456:2000. Potable water is
generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. Mixing and curing with sea water shall
not be permitted.

22.08.6. Admixtures
The admixtures for concrete shall be as per clause 5.5 of IS 456:2000.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

22.08.7. Reinforcement
Reinforcements shall be as per clause 5.6 of IS456:2000. The schedule & drawing of
reinforcement shall be correctly prepared as per the design and got approved. The cutting length
& bending schedule shall be drawn in a correct manner to be understood by the site supervisor.
Some principles to be followed are
i) The laps shall be staggered.
ii) Extra care is needed during concreting at the crowded locations of reinforcement for good
results.
iii) Cover shall be ensured by use of proper cover blocks of concrete.
iv) Cover shall be maintained during concreting.
v) Reinforcement in case of projection like canopies to be maintained at its correct location (i.e.
top) during concreting.
vi) The bars placed shall be measured and recorded properly by J.E and crosschecked by
A.E/Assistant Executive Engineer before concreting.
vii) Wherever required, the bars shall be treated for protection from corrosion, particularly in coastal
areas and areas prone to industrial and environmental pollution.

22.08.8. Bricks
Burnt clay bricks shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1077, except that the minimum
compressive strength when tested flat shall not be less than 8.4 Mega Pascal for individual brick
sand 10.5 MPa for average of 5 specimens. They shall be free from cracks and flaws and
nodules of free lime. The brick shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp comers and emit
a clear ringing sound when struck. The size maybe according to local practice with
toleranceof±5percent.

22.08.9. Stones
Stones shall be of the type specified. It shall be hard, sound, and free from cracks, decay
and weathering and shall be freshly quarried from an approved quarry. Stone with round surface
shall not be used. IS 1127 shall be adopted for the dimensions of natural building stones. The
crushing

330
 strength of building stones when tested as described in IS 1121 shall have a minimum value of
350 Kg/cm2
Following IS codes give specification for various stones used for construction.

Lime Stone IS 1128

Granite IS3316
Marble IS1130
Sand Stone IS3622
Laterite IS3620

22.08.9.1 Storage of Materials at site

Materials shall be stored as described in IS 4082
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

22.08.9.2 Approval of Materials

All materials shall be got approved by the concerned Assistant Engineer or Assistant Executive
Engineer as the case may be and job mix formulae / Mix design shall be got approved by the
concerned Executive Engineer. For this the relevant details have to be submitted at least 20 days
ahead of the planned start date.

2208.10. Supply of Materials for Road Work

Aggregate supply required for any roadwork shall be from an approved quarry/ source. The
materials shall conform to the specifications in section 500 of MORTH and shall be stacked as
provided in Section 514 of MoRTH.
All aggregates required for road work shall be properly stacked in stacking areas near the plant
or on the road side in such a manner as not to interfere with traffic. Before the stacking is done
the stacking area shall be examined to see that it is level and dimensions of the stockpiles and
the Engineer shall approve their location.
Materials supplied for work during dry season shall be utilized not later than 15 days and if any
contamination occurs, shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost. Aggregates shall not
be stacked until it has been thoroughly screened to gauge and free from all earth, rubbish,
vegetable matter and other foreign materials. If necessary, aggregates shall be washed and
allowed to drain for at least 72 hours. When ready, it shall be stacked entirely clear of the
roadway either upon the berms and platforms provided for the purpose or outside the side drains
where such berms do not exist. When aggregate supplies for renewal and for patch work are
both to be supplied for the same reach of a road, these shall be stacked on opposite sides.
The contract unit rates for different sizes of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and stone
filler shall be paid in full for collecting, conveying and stacking or storing at the site including
full compensation for:
(i) All royalties, fees, rents where necessary;
(ii) All leads and lifts; and
(iii) All labour, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work to the Specifications.
(iv) All necessary testing of material, both initial, to approve the source, and regular control testing
thereafter.
Aggregates shall be stacked in heaps of regular cross section. The deposition shall commence at
one end of the kilometre and be carried continuously to the other end unless the Executive
Engineer shall direct otherwise. Stacking shall begin at points farther from the quarry and
progress continuously towards the nearer point. Suitable length in a road not more than 2
kilometre will be considered one stretch and the materials required for this stretch shall be fully
supplied and stacked before measurements are taken.

331
 No road material in excess of requirements shall be stacked in that stretch. Any excess quantity
shall be removed to where It is required, before the materials in that reach are measured.
If sufficient land with not available for stacking in the stretch and/or if safety consideration
demands, the stacking of materials can be permitted in suitable stacking yards with prior
permission from the Assistant Engineer.
All aggregates shall be measured by the J.E and check measured by Assistant Executive
Engineer before it is spread. After check measurement, each stack shall he marked by white
wash or otherwise to prevent the possibility of it being measured again. This shall be reported
to the Quality Cell for verification of quantities as per section 2213. As a rule, collecting and
spreading shall not be carried on at the same time in one and the same kilometer, or in two
adjoining kilometers.

CHAPTER - 22
During the time the aggregate is supplied and stacked, there shall be frequent inspections by the
Overseer as well as by J.E/ Assistant Engineer to guard against stacks being formed over
heaped up earth or debris.

22.08. Job Mix Formula/ Mix Designs

The contractor shall submit the job mixing formula / mix design before the commencement of
work. While establishing the job mix formula, the contractor shall ensure that it is based on a
correct and truly representative sample of the materials that will actually be used in the work
and that the mixture and its different ingredients satisfy the physical and strength requirements.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Approval of the job mix formula shall be based on independent testing by the Engineer for
which the contractor shall furnish samples of all ingredients of the mix as required by the
Engineer. The approved job mix formula shall remain effective unless and until a revised job
mix formula is approved. Shall a change in the source of materials be proposed; a new job mix
formula shall be forwarded to the Executive Engineer for approval before the placing of the
material.

22.09.1. Plant trials - permissible variation in job mix formula:

Once the laboratory job mix formula is approved, the contractor shall carry out plant trials at
the mixer to establish that the plant can be set up to produce a uniform mix conforming to the
approved job mix formula. The permissible variations of the individual percentages of the
various ingredients in the actual mix from the job mix formula to be used shall be within the
permissible limits. These variations are intended to apply to individual specimens taken for
quality control tests as given in the Chapter on Quality control.

22.09.1.1 Concreting
Concrete proportioning shall be as per clause 9 of IS 456:2000. Nominal mix concrete may be
Usedfor M15 or lower. Design mix is adopted for higher grades. Concreting under special
conditions shall be as per clause 14 of IS456:2006

22.09.1.2. Mixing, placing, compacting and curing of concrete

Mixing shall be as per clause 10.3 of IS 456:2000. The transport, placing, compaction and
curing of concrete shall be as per clause 13 of IS 456: 2000

22.09.2. General precautions

i) Themixingproportionshallbeachievedcorrectlybyusingweighbatchingorvolumetricmethod.
ii) Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed and then immediately transported and placed without
segregation and before the initial setting time. Retarding chemicals can be used for delaying the
initial set, if required.

332
 iii) Concrete shall be well compacted, immediately on placing with vibrators. Over or under compaction
shall be avoided. Care shall be taken where reinforcement is heavy in narrow sections. The finished
surface shall be retro welled after initial set to avoid surface cracks.
iv) The curing must begin after the final set but not later than 24 Hrs. The date of concreting shall be
written by paint on column/ beam faces, after removal of shuttering for easy reference. Curing shall
continue for 14 days. When maintaining of proper curing is difficult, curing compounds shall be
used. To conserve water, fine sprayers shall be used for curing the sides & bottoms.
v) At least three cubes shall be taken from the working mix prescribed for day's concreting and their
record shall be maintained. These cubes shall be tested in the laboratory on due dates and proper
cognizance of results shall be taken. In case of abnormal results, the fact shall be immediately
brought to notice of the superior officers.

2209.3 Removal of Shuttering Centering:

Normally, side shuttering of column, beam faces is removed after 24 Hours. However, the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

centering shall be removed only after the prescribed period. While removing centering, care shall
be taken to avoid injuries to the labourers or staff working there. Particular care shall be taken
while removing shuttering below cantilever slab/ beams etc. Unless sufficient counter weight for
the cantilever portion is developed the centering shall not be removed. If proper sequence of
removal of props is not followed, the beam or truss may collapse due to wrong support pattern.

22.10. Ladder
Necessary ladders must be provided in accordance with the clause 14.3 of part 7 of NBC for
supervision and inspection of the official during execution and safety of the workers.

22.11. Measurement of Works:

22.11.1. Measurements
Measurement shall be as per section 2109. The Assistant Engineer /Junior Engineer / Contractor
shall take measurements in time so as to get the same checked and bills passed as per terms of
contract. The contractor may also furnish measurements, in which case these shall be checked by
Assistant Engineer and further checked by Assistant Executive Engineer. Any corrections shall be
brought to the notice of the contractor, to be effected accordingly.

22.11.2 Recording Measurement of Work

The Assistant Engineers / J.Es are given powers to record measurements of works subject to
certain rules & regulations. It shall be clearly borne in mind that these powers are given only to
accept sound work.
i) Measurements shall be recorded date wise. The measurements shall be signed with name &
designation. If any item is going to be covered by another item so as to be inaccessible for
subsequent measurement, it shall be finally measured and measurements got checked 100% before
covering.
ii) The measurements for works as per the specifications shall only be recorded. The recording of
measurements in the Measurement Book means accepting the work. Therefore any inferior work
below acceptance norms shall not be recorded.
iii) The signature & designation with date of the checking/ cross checking officer shall be invariably
got recorded, however the responsibility of getting the measurements checked lies with the officer/
contractor who records the measurements.
iv) While recording measurements for composite items, i.e. single items in the tender which includes
many sub items; Viz

333
 1. Composite masonry of stone &brick.
2. Item of door, which includes frames, panels, fixtures etc.
3. Items of w/c. containing the pan, flushing cistern, with connections, valves P/Strapor urinals
stands consisting of urinal pot, connecting water supply pipe, flushing tank with overflow,
disposal pipe etc.
Recording of the measurements signifies that all the sub items are completed as p er the
specification. However, if it is necessary to release payments for such item, then proportionate
payments for work done & measured shall be recorded.

22.11.3. Recording False And Incorrect Measurement or Advance Measurement

- Punishment For :

CHAPTER - 22
The basic document for effecting payment is the Measurement Book and all payments to
the contractors are governed by the measurements recorded there us & bill recorded. If false,
incorrect, or excess measurements are recorded, it leads to payment not due and Govt. money is
misappropriated. The punishment for such act/lapse is severe and the incumbent shall be
proceeded against as per rules.

22.11.4. Cross-Checking of Measurement:

The measurements of aggregate collected at road side and the steel for RCC slab work are to
be got checked by Assistant Executive Engineer before spreading/concreting to ensure that

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

complete aggregate is collected and steel bars as per design are used. This principle shall be
followed thoroughly.

22.11.5 Computerization of Measurements

Measurement can also be entered and kept in the centralized computer system of the
department.

22.12. Visit of Higher Officers for Inspection

Generally, important road, bridge & building works are inspected at higher levels by the
EE, SE & CE. During such visits, the relevant information, plans, estimates, drawings etc. shall
be made available for ready reference. At such times the plans are displayed properly, progress
reports/bar charts are properly updated or targets/achievements. All the quality control registers
should be kept ready. Detailed Project Report, copy of the agreement etc. are to be kept handy in
proper form. A short note in the form of work memo should be prepared highlighting the salient
features, progress, bottlenecks, expenditure and future plans etc. The movement paths for
inspection of roads, bridge & building sites are to be clearly marked, to avoid repetition and
confusion in movements. These opportunities shall be utilized for seeking guidance,
highlighting achievements and difficulties, highlighting shortfalls and its reasons etc. for spot
decision or follow up decision. The inspecting officers shall record their comments in the work
spot book and circulate the inspection note as per Appendix 2200A to all concerned for follow
up action

22.13. Verification of Quantity by the Quality cell:

Earth work in all works exceeds 1000 Cum and the quantity of any aggregate supplied
for Road work exceeds 100 cum the Assistant Executive Engineer shall

334
 report by e-mail or fax to Quality Cell in the proforma given in Appendix 2200B so as to verify
the reported quantity. Earth work and usage of stacked materials can be used only after the
verification or on completion of three working days from the date of sending the messages. In
case of urgency the Executive Engineer shall super-check the full quantity and give sanction to
proceed with the work.
In road works involving multi layer pavements powered by the level measurements initial
level with proposal for subsequent layers shall be reported to the Quality cell without resorting
to reporting of final levels of intermediate levels.

22.14. Bills and Payment

Bills are normally paid at suitable intervals according to particular stages of execution of
work as per the agreement for which the contractor shall submit the bill. The Junior
Engineer/Assistant Engineer shall then verify the bill by taking requisite measurements and
same should be crosschecked by competent authority of the division before making payments.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 22

Preparation of Bill and payment for the work shall be done only with of the following
certificates:
The contractor has to produce the necessary certificates/test results for compliance to quality
procedures as per chapter on quality control. Environment certificate as per the chapter on
environmental aspects shall also be produced. In case of road and bridge works, Road Safety
Certificate as per the chapter on road safety shall be produced (refer clause 2110 also). This
shall be for works within the technical sanction powers of the Executive Engineer and above.

22.15. Road Machinery

As a matter of policy modern machineries shall be used for all public works and the same
should be encouraged Mechanization of road construction is not only necessary for speedy
construction but also for overall economy and for achieving the desired quality of the finished
job. Starting from grubbing or site clearance, the road construction machinery can be deployed
at all stages of construction till completion of the project. The requirement of appropriate
machinery for excavation of different operation of road construction is given in Appendix
2200C.The expected output of machines is given in Appendix 2200 D.

335
Chapter 23

23.1. DESIGN, EXECUTION & MAINTENANCE of ELECTRICAL WORKS

23.1.1 General
The term "Electrical Works" is used to denote all works necessary for distributing
electrical energy from the supplier‘s service within particular premises. In addition, the
installation and maintenance of certain appliances operated by electricity may also be carried out
as part of electrical works e.g. lifts, air conditioners, water coolers, refrigerator, heaters, cooking
ranges, D.G sets, transformers, fire detection and protection systems, computer networking etc.
The responsibility for carrying out electrical works in all Government buildings is vested

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 23

with the Electrical Wing of the P.W.D. All allied electrical installations shall follow the
provisions of National Building Code part 8 Section 2, amendment No.3 to National Building
Code (SP7), National Electrical Code, National Illumination Code, Indian Electricity Act, Indian
Electricity Rules, relevant rules of Indian Standard Specifications (ISS) and International Electro
Technical Committee (IEC), amended from time to time. Even where the cost of the work
involved is small, it is necessary that the estimate for electrification is prepared, technically
scrutinized, and the work supervised by the technical personnel of the Electrical wing of the
P.W.D.
When there is only a L.S. provision for electrification, working estimate shall be got
prepared and sanctioned by competent authority and the provisions made in the estimates shall be
given in consultation with the appropriate authority of the PWD Electrical wing. If variations
from the norms are found necessary, specific sanction of the Chief Engineer shall be obtained.
The number of lights, fans and other fixtures to be provided shall follow the norms
specified in Part 8 of the NBC 2005 a nd all the standards mentioned above. If additional points,
fixtures, etc., are found necessary, specific sanction of the Chief Engineer shall be obtained
before provision for the same shall be included in the estimate.
In cases where the continuous functioning of life saving equipments, lights and A/C
system is to be ensured even when there is failure in power supply, such as i n operation theatres
of hospitals, stand- bye energy source shall be installed and maintained by the Electrical Wing.
This alternate system shall have ample capacity to take care of the essential loads and function
independently of normal power supply system (grid supply from KSEB). Government shall
decide the buildings where such installations are to be provided. The capacity of the D.G set for
captive power generation shall be fixed to deliver power supply considering essential loads as per
requirements fixed in consultation with the Head of the concerned institutions and as per the
norms specified in the above-mentioned standards.
If a building is to be used for industrial purposes and power wiring is necessary, the
requirement shall be assessed on the basis of the various machinery to be installed and the wiring
designed as per I.S.S. and other relevant standards.

336
 23.2 Estimate for Electrification Works
The estimates are to be prepared by the Assistant Engineer of Electrical Wing of PWD based on
client requirements, but subject to prescribed norms. All estimates shall be accompanied by
dimensioned plans indicating the purpose for which each room is proposed to be used and a
circuit diagram and report with the following details.
i. Location of building
ii. Purpose of the building and nature of work conducted in the building.
iii. Details of light points, fan points, light fittings, fan fittings and plug points etc.
iv. Specification of working accessories and fittings.
v. Details of major appliances, fixed and portable.
vi. Cost of existing installation and fittings (in case of old buildings).
vii. Details of repairs and replacements of electrical installation last effected and approximate cost
(in case of old buildings)
viii. Proximity to electric supply lines and feasibility of service connection.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 23

ix. The authority that will look after the maintenance of the building.
No estimate for electrification shall be technically sanctioned unless scrutinised and approved
by the concerned officer of the Electrical Wing. Where lifts are to be provided, it shall be ensured
that the lift well and its approaches are in conformity with the relevant Indian Standard Codes, for
the type and size of lift proposed.
Sometimes it will be necessary to obtain sanction from the inspecting authorities such as
electric inspection division and the Fire Force Department for which necessary scrutiny and
inspection fee will have to be paid. Provision for the same shall be included in the estimate for
preparation of necessary drawings and to make necessary fees to the respective departments. The
charges for the preparation of drawings and connected documents shall be included in a realistic
manner so as to meet the actual expenses incurred for this purpose. The fees are to be paid by the
selected contractor to the concerned department and such amounts shall be reimbursed to
him/them on production of documentary evidence.
To ensure the quality of certain products as well as certain panel assemblies etc., such items
will have to be tested either in any of the CPRI Test Centres or any other institutions approved by
BIS to carry out such tests. In such a case, either the product or the panel assembly will have to be
conveyed to the test centres and necessary testing fees will also have to be paid. It will be the
responsibility of the selected contractor to convey the materials and to pay the required fees. The
department shall reimburse the expenses towards one-time to and fro conveyance to the nearest
Test Centre from the place of manufacture / fabrication, having the facility to conduct the
prescribed test and one-time remittance of fees. If the product or the panel assembly has to be
conveyed and tested further, the subsequent expenses to this effect will be on the contractors
account. If tests are proposed, necessary provision shall be made in the estimate to make
payments for such tests.
The estimate for electrification shall be scrutinised by the competent authority of the Electrical
wing as detailed in the Delegation of powers. In the case of existing buildings under construction
where electrification was not originally contemplated, the electrification estimate will require
both Administrative Sanction and Technical Sanction.

337
23.2.1 New Buildings
In the case of new buildings to be constructed by P.W.D. adequate provision shall be made in the
detailed estimate towards electrification works, subject-to the requirement of the concerned
department and in compliance with the standards and statutory rules mentioned above. The
competent authority in Electrical Wing shall sanction necessary working estimate against any lump
sum provisions made in the estimate. The electrical works shall be done along with the civil works
and completed simultaneously so as to occupy the buildings soon after construction.

CHAPTER - 23
23.2.2 Building of other departments
In the case of existing buildings under the control of other departments on request of the District
Officer of' the concerned department the Assistant Executive Engineer concerned shall arrange to
get the estimate for electrification work prepared and scrutinized by the competent officers of the
Electrical Wing after realizing the centage charges as per rules provided. It shall be ensured that
funds are available for the execution of the work. In the case of deposit works, the approved
estimate will be forwarded to the concerned department for Administrative Sanction and placement
of necessary funds on receipt of which, necessary technical sanction for the estimate will be issued
by the competent authority and the work arranged for execution.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

23.3 Specifications for materials and works
Detailed specification for the materials to be used and the principal items of work normally
involved in electrification works shall be drawn up by the Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in
the office of the Chief Engineer. After approva1 by the Chief Engineer, this shall be published for
adoption in the department. In preparing the specification, wherever I.S. specifications are
available, the relevant I.S. specifications shall be followed. In other cases, detailed specifications
shall be prepared to suit the requirements.
To facilitate easy check of the quality of materials, the Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in the
Office of the Chief Engineer Building, shall also prepare a list of brands and makes of different
wiring materials, fans, fluorescent lamps fittings and other equipments/control devices/gadgets
which are, inconformity with the specifications and circularize the list. If different catalogue
numbers/sub sections area vailable for the same brand, the particular catalogue number/subsection
shall be mentioned. This list shall be reviewed and revised and brought up-to-date from time to
time. If any material or fitting outside such accepted 1ist is proposed to be used in any work, the
Assistant Engineer (Electrical) under the control shall report the matter to the Superintending
Engineer (Electrical) who will arrange for tests etc., and give instructions as to whether such
materials can be used or not.

23.4. Schedule of Rates

The Superintending Engineer (Electrical) in the Office of the Chief Engineer shall also prepare a
schedule of rates for the electrification works in Government buildings periodically as ordered by
Govt. The Chief Engineer shall follow the procedure laydown in section1701 and publish this for
use. Estimates for electrification shall be based on this schedule of rates and whenever any
deviation is necessary, sanction of the DCW s hall be obtained.

338
 23.5. Materials fittings to be provided and stocked by the department for use
in electrification works
Supply of materials and labour shall be combined and work arranged. In unavoidable
circumstances some electrical materials and fittings can be procured directly by the department
with the approval of the Chief Engineer and arrange to have the same used in electrification
works.

23.6. Execution of electrification works

23.6.1 Contractors for Electrical works

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 23

The electrification works in Government buildings shall be arranged only through competent
PWD registered electrical contractors.

23.6.1.1. Invitation of Tenders

Before inviting tenders for electrification, it shall be ensured that there is a sanctioned estimate
for the work and that funds are available for carrying out the work. Tenders for Electrical works
shall be invited so as to complete the electrical works on the completion date of civil works. The
Executive Engineer in charge of civil works shall seek the assistance of Executive Engineer
electrical to lay the conduits etc for which provision shall be included in the civil works.

23.6.2 Service Connection

On completion of the electrical wiring and checking the same, the Assistant Engineer (Electrical)
shall give to the Assistant Executive Engineer (Civil)/ concerned authority, a test report and
completion report for availing service connection. The Executive Engineer (Electrical)
responsible for maintaining the Register of Building shall keep a copy of the circuit diagram and
inventory of the buildings along with the Register. The agreement authority as per procedure shall
issue a completion certificate. A copy of the completion certificates shall be issued to the
concerned Assistant Executive Engineer (electrical). The Assistant Engineer (civil) under the
control of the construction of the building shall arrange for the transfer of the building with the
electrical installation to the occupying department. The inventory shall also be handed over to the
concerned department. The authority who has control over the building and who is responsible
for payment of electrical charges shall make the application for service connection.
If there is any delay on the part of the occupying department to take over the completed building
together with the electrical installations, the fact shall be reported to Government so that
appropriate action can be taken on the basis of Government orders.

23.07. Inventory of Electrical Installations in Government Buildings.

Inventory of electrical installation in all Government buildings shall be prepared by the Assistant
Engineer concerned, verified by the Assistant Executive Engineer concerned and submitted to the
Executive Engineer. An inventory register of these installations shall be maintained at the
Division Level. This shall contain the plan of the building, cable route, schematic diagram of the
installation etc. All fittings/gadgets/ equipments specifying the make, size, etc. date of completion
and handing over the installation, cost and subsequent changes effected, maintenance done etc.
Installations shall be tested periodically and test readings shall be recorded in the inventory
register. The inventory register shall be reviewed periodically and the installation also shall be
inspected.

339
23.08. Maintenance
In an electrical installation, a defect which remains unnoticed, can cause serious and fatal
accidents. It is therefore very necessary that electrical installations in Government buildings are
periodically inspected and minor defects set right then and there. During such inspection, besides
attending to minor repairs, if major repairs are necessary details shall be collected and the
estimates prepared on the basis of such inspection.
The subordinate staff in the electrical wing shall examine the electrical installations in

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 23

government buildings during service calls, attend to petty defects then and there and make a
record of such inspection with a report to Assistant Engineer (Electrical). Any major repair and
replacement found necessary during such service calls have to be reported to Assistant Executive
Engineer (Electrical) and further action pursued to get them done after obtaining sanction from
the competent authority. The details of work attended to shall be recorded in a register maintained
by the J.E and verified by the Assistant Executive Engineer. An extract of the same shall be
submitted to the Executive Engineer (Electrical) within three days after the work is done, under
intimation to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
The Assistant Engineer shall periodically inspect electrical Installations in government
building once in three months and by the Assistant Executive Engineer once in every six months.
In respect of buildings in which the installations are in poor conditions the inspection shall be
carried out more frequently. Special repairs in the nature of re-wiring and replacement of major
parts, if any, during such inspection will be reported any found necessary to the Executive
Engineer (Electrical) through the Assistant Executive Engineer(Electrical) control to take prompt
steps to get sanction for the estimate and carry out the repair.
Normally rewiring shall not be done in buildings within a period of 15 years of the initial
installation. If for any specific reason such rewiring is found necessary after conducting insulation
test, the matter may be brought to the notice of the Chief Engineer and sanction obtained before
rewiring is taken up. Insulation resistance and earth readings of all installations subject to
periodical inspection shall be conducted at least once in a year and the reading shall be recorded
in the inventory register. In case the readings are not within the permissible limits immediate
action shall be taken to rectify the defects.
Funds required to meet the expenditure for the rectifications maintenance and also special repairs
if any required for electrical installation, shall be made available from the allocation made for the
maintenance and repairs of the buildings under the concerned Executive Engineer. The
requirement shall be assessed early in financial year and the amount required earmarked for this
purpose, subject to availability of grant.
Such minor repairs and replacements necessitated during the periodical inspection and
testing have to be carried out charging to respective maintenance head of account. With regard to
major repairs and replacements such as rewiring, replacements of fans, fluorescent lights etc.,
special estimates have to be got prepared and sanction obtained from competent authority and
work executed charging to relevant maintenance head. All such maintenance and special repairs
estimates have to be prepared and submitted at the beginning of the financial year so as to take up
the works after obtaining necessary sanction in time. In preparing the revised maintenance
estimates, the cost shall not exceed the limit allowed as per Government orders or departmental
circulars.

340
 Tool kit must be available with the field staff, which they shall carry with them while they visit a
centre either on routine inspection or on receipt of any notice.
The field staff shall maintain a diary of works attended and submit the same to the Assistant
Engineer periodically for review.

23.09. Precautions to be noted in Execution of works

• Drilling holes etc for the purpose of wiring shall not compromise the structural safety of the
buildings.
• Electrification works shall be considered as complete only after rectification, plastering, and
painting of walls are accomplished.
• Open wiring shall be resorted to as far as possible
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 23

23.09.1. Safety Precautions

It is of utmost importance that electrical installations are maintained in good order as, even minor
defects if unattended to, can cause serious accidents. All those who are connected with wiring or
maintaining the electrical installations in any structure shall promptly take steps to set right the
defects noticed through the appropriate technical authority after cutting power supply to the
defective section of the installation.

23.09.2. Accidents
In all Industrial establishments notices indicating how to treat persons who have suffered electric
shock shall be displayed at prominent places as per rule 44 of the Indian Electricity Rules.
When accidents are caused due to electricity, information shall be given to the Electrical
Inspector to Government as per Rule 44 A of the Indian Electricity Rules.

23.09.3 Duties of Client Department

After the electrical works are completed and handed over to the user department, they shall
be responsible for charges like payments of electricity charges, consumables like diesel, oil to
generator, maintaining of battery etc. Petty repairs and fuse coils are to be attended by the user
department. Petty repairs include changing off uses, switches cleaning of electrical fixtures,
repairs of fans and light subject to expenditure of Rs.
2000/- at a time. Improper additions will affect the installation and can be fatal to human and
properties. Hence, all additions and alterations should be done through electrical wing of PWD.

341
 Chapter 24

24.01. Quality Control

24.01.1. General
Quality is an attribute to excellence. According to BSS 4778 (1) quality is totality of features and
characterization of a product or service that bears on its ability to satisfy, the stated or implied
needs. Quality in fact should be an ongoing process of getting the best continuously. Quality is
fundamental to reliability and durability of a product. The quest for quality calls for integrity,
commitment, dedication, knowledge, ethics and team work of persons involved in construction
activity. Quality upgrading is a continuous process of innovations of products, processing and

CHAPTER - 24
adapting control tools. The quality must be consistent. There are two types of quality control (1)
Process control includes control at every stage specifically; and (2) End Control based on end
results. Quality management covers management responsibilities, internal and external control,
tests, acceptance criteria, corrective actions, documentations, transparency etc.

24.02. Road Works

Quality control of road works shall be as per the guidelines provided in Section 900 of MoRTH
specification for road and bridge works. Guidelines on quality systems for roads have been
evolved by IRC vide SP 57 to facilitate preparation of appropriate quality systems for road

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

projects. Procedures laid down for roads and bridges as per Quality Manuals of the department
issued from time to time shall also be followed. The table2400.1 gives the physical requirements
of aggregates for bituminous base course.
Table 2400.2 gives physical requirements for coarse aggregate in surface (wearing) courses and
table 2400.3 the requirements of Mix for Surface (wearing) course.
For all renewal programme work mandatory tests shall be done and results incorporated with the
bill. For all prequalification and post qualification works tests results from quality control wing
shall be incorporated with bill. For all other works above the TS powers of Assistant Executive
Engineers tests results from approved lab / field lab / district quality control lab shall be
incorporated with the bill.

24.02.1 Traffic Diversions and Other Disturbances include abetment of construction noise and
environmental hazards, (Refer EMP for the work).

24.02.2 Steps for Proper Patching of Pot-hole Given Below

a) Preparation of area at pot-hole be patched by cutting to rectangular with vertical edges
b) Removal of all weak and loose materials and removal of dust by hand brushes and clearing
fine dust and excess moisture (if any) using air blower
c) Application of tack coat using appropriate type and grade of cationic bituminous emulsion by
a hand operated pressure sprayer on the entire receiving surface of the prepared area including the
vertical edges (Tack coat may also applied along the vertical faces of the rectangular cut by hand
brush)
d) Laying of pre mix of appropriate thickness by making allowance for compaction.

e) Thorough compaction o the mix in the patch using a small vibratory roller or any other
suitable roller or compacting equipment (or even by the rear wheels of a loaded heavy truck if
none of these are available), soon after laying the mix and finishing to the same level as the
adjoining/surrounding area of the patch.

342
 24.03. Bridge Works
To ensure construction of safe, serviceable, durable and economically viable bridges, it is
necessary to have a strategy for management of human skills by way of quality systems defining
quality policy, quality assurance and quality audit. Guidelines on quality systems for road bridges
have been evolved by IRC vide SP 47: 1998 to facilitate preparation of appropriate quality systems
for new bridge projects. Procedures laid down for roads and bridges as per Quality Manuals of the
department issued from time to time can also be followed. For all bridge works tests certificate
from the quality control wing shall be incorporated with the bill.
24.04. Building Works
Quality checks shall be performed at every stage from preparation of building layout,
construction, till the completion of the work. The provisions of part 0, 2 and 3 of National
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

Building Code and the prevailing rules and regulation of the local bodies shall be followed in
preparation of architectural plans and layouts. Also the provisions contained in Section 5A(b) Part
6, Materials workmanship, inspection and testing for concrete works shall be followed. In case of
masonry construction, the details as per National building code Par t 6 Section 4 shall be
followed. Details in Part 7, 8 and 9 of National Building Code relating construction, safety and
building services shall be followed. For test on various building materials the relevant IS Codes
as listed in Part V of National Building Code shall be followed. The Executive Engineers in the
Division / Assistant Executive Engineer in Sub division shall furnish copy of the contract
documents to the Zonal Executive Engineers in the Quality Monitoring Cell. For all works
contractor shall set up field laboratory for conducting mandatory tests.
For all original building works except prequalification work tests results from approved lab/field
lab shall be incorporated in the bill. For the prequalification works certificate from the quality
control wing shall be incorporated with the bill. Procedures laid down for structures as per
Quality Manuals of the department issued from time to time can also be followed.
24.05. Physical requirement of aggregates and requirement of mix for surface wearing course refer
table 2400.
24.06. Technical Audit
The objective of Technical Audit on works is to encourage Departmental officers to pay adequate
level of attention to quality in works. All works shall be subjected to Technical Audit
immediately after physical completion of works through an expert agency. The Executive
Engineers shall report the details along with a copy of abstract of final bill direct to the DCW for
transmitting to the agency appointed for technical audit. Further details for verification by the
Technical Audit agency may be forwarded on demand. The Technical Audit agency shall conduct
detailed checks at every kilometer of road or as required at site including quality of materials
used, thickness of layers, workmanship etc by carrying out mandatory test as per IS, IRC
standards and specifications and quality manual. National building code and other standards and
specifications shall be in the case of building works. Copies of the audit details including findings
shall be forwarded to the DCW who shall promptly call for Action Taken Reports (ATR) from
the Executive Engineer and Superintending Engineer on the rectification works, if any suggested
by the Technical Auditor, under intimation to Govt. Incase there are defects in the quality of
materials, thickness in layers, or workmanship which cannot be rectified, suitable actions against
the contractor and the officers responsible may be initiated under intimation to Govt. However, the
technical audit shall not be linked to payment of contractor‘s regular and final claims as per rules.

24.07 Need of New Materials/technologies

With tremendous increase in traffic volume as w ell as i n the load carried by the commercial
vehicles per axle, it is necessary to introduce better materials in road works – both new
construction as w ell as i n maintenance works. Moreover, the road technology has advanced
tremendously and lot of new materials and techniques are available for better performance and
durability of road. There are many high performance bituminous and cementations materials
available for both flexible and rigid pavement construction. Some of the new materials and
techniques are indicated in the following sections for developing suitable specifications adopting
from MORTH and other agencies.

343
24.07.1 High Performance Bituminous Materials

24.07.1.1 Cationic Bituminous Emulsion

Bitumen emulsion is a liquid product in which a substantial amount of bitumen is suspended in a
finely divided condition in an aqueous medium and stabilized by means of one or more suitable
materials. In India, among various types, normally cationic type of emulsion is used. A small
proportion of an emulsifier is also used to facilitate dispersion and to keep the globules of
dispersed binder in suspension. The bitumen content in emulsions is around 60 percent and the
remaining is water. When cold mix with emulsion is used on the road, it breaks down resulting in

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020CHAPTER - 24

release of water and the mix starts to set. Bituminous emulsion based construction is very
efficient in terms of avoiding wearing of the ingredient of the mix and preparation of the mix.
However, emulsion based technology is somewhat more stringent in terms of compliance to the
proportion and requirements about the cleanliness of the aggregates. The special advantage is that
moist aggregates can be used for preparation of the mix. Emulsion is advantageous for both new
constructions as well as for the repair and maintenance.

24.07.1.2 Modified bitumen

Properties of bitumen binders and bituminous mixes can be improved to meet requirements of
pavements with the incorporation of certain additives or blend of additives. These blends of
additives are known as modifiers and bitumen premixed with these additives are known as
Modified Bitumen. IRC:SP:53-2002 deals with ―Guidelines for Use of Polymer Modified
Bitumen in Road Construction‖. The specification of modified bitumen by BIS has also been
published recently (IS:15462-2004). The advantages of using polymer and rubber- modified
bitumen are given as under.
i. Lower susceptibility to daily and seasonal temperature variations
ii. Higher resistance to deformation at elevated pavement temperature
iii. Better age resistance properties
iv. Better adhesion between aggregate and binder
v. Higher fatigue life of mixes
vi. Delay of cracking and reflective cracking
vii. Overall improved performance in extreme climatic conditions and under heavy
traffic conditions.
The modified bitumen are classified as:
PMB - Polymer Modified Bitumen (EMB or PMB)
NRMB - Natural Rubber Modified Bitumen
CRMB - Crumb Rubber Modified Bitumen

The issues related to handling of modified bitumen and mixes at sites are very important. It is
extremely important that modifier is thoroughly blended with bitumen before preparation of mix
so that modified bitumen retains its premium properties. The other precautions shall be as under:

344
 i. Preferably be blended at refinery or proper mixing plant.
ii. Product supplied hot in tankers or if supplied in drums shall be agitated in melted conditions
with suitable device.
iii. Penetration, softening point, separation and elastic recovery test shall be conducted at site for a
lot of 10 tonnes.
iv. Multiple heating shall be avoided.
O
v. In case of NRMB, material shall be supplied at 130-150 C and shall be used within 24 hours
of its filling.

24.07.1.3 Modified bitumen emulsions

Modified emulsions are those whose residue is modified bitumen. Modified emulsion may be
classified as mono-phase and bi-phase system. The types of modifying agents used for production
of mono- phase modified emulsions are EVA, SBS, SIS etc. In case of bi-phase modified
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

emulsions, latex of natural or synthetic origin having extremely fine particles are used for
modification in aqueous phase. The main property of this modifier is their elastic rubber behavior
of residue that allows them to accept and recover from large strains when they are exposed to
temperature. This property of residue from modified emulsion can be observed by elastic
recovery test. The merits of modified emulsions over normal emulsions are many but some are
listed below:
i. High cohesion at medium and high service temperature
ii. Improved performance at low temperature
iii. Improved theological behavior.
iv. Increased plasticity interval
v. Better resistance to ageing.

24.07.1.4 Multi-grade Bitumen

Multi-grade bitumen performs over a wide temperature range than conventional bitumen and re
formulated to resist both pavement rutting/deformation at high summer temperature and
pavement cracking at low winter temperature. These bitumen are mainly characterized by high
value of penetration index, typically greater than 0 but less than 2. Multi-grade bitumen can either
be considered to bridge the performance gap between conventional bitumen and Polymer
Modified Bitumen. These bitumen are in most cases applied in thick wearing courses although in
special situations of very heavily trafficked roads. Multi-grade bitumen can be applied in both the
binder and wearing course to increase overall performance including resistance to rutting like
polymer modified bitumen. Multi-grade bitumen will require higher mixing and compaction
temperature than those of conventional bitumen.

24.07.1.5 Super-pave asphalt binder specifications

The super-paver binder specification (US-SHRP) is intended to control permanent deformation at
highest pavement temperature, low temperature cracking and fatigue cracking in flexible
pavements. The specification accomplishes this by controlling various physical properties. They
are known as ‗performance grade‘ meaning that the performance for the specified period is
guaranteed. For example, a PG 58-16 grade is designed to be used in an environment to offer
protection for an average seven day maximum temperature of– 16oC. the performance grade
bitumen binder is normally selected on the basis of climate from the grades. Of course, the
equipments needed for performance based testing of bituminous binders are more sophisticated
than the normal bitumen.

345
24.07.1.6 Production of Cubical Aggregates
The Indian Road aggregates industry is not so very well organized as in the west. In India, hand
breaking of stones is still continued in many Projects. The ideal is a hammer or a percussion
crusher which by giving an impact blow would shatter the rock boulder into smaller fragments
resulting in uniformly angular or cubical aggregates rather than flaky ones. Depending upon the
magnitude of work involved, an integrated crushing plant should be setup for each Project.
Further, introducing shaping unit after secondary crushing stage can control shape of aggregates.
Crusher type also has effect on shape of aggregates is well known. The shape of aggregates gives
strength to bituminous mixes. If the flakey particles are more, these are likely to be crushed under
traffic and the gradation will be changed which will affect the void sin the mix and subsequently
the strength properties of the mix. The reduced flakiness index, increase the mix strength and
reduces the binder consumption significantly.

CHAPTER - 24
24.07.1.7 Mastic Asphalt
Bitumen mastic, alternatively known as Mastic Asphalt, is a mixture of bitumen, mineral filler
and fine aggregates in suitable proportions designed to yield a void less compact mass. Its
consistency is such that it flows like a viscous fluid at temperatures of around 200 0C, but on
cooling to normal temperature; it solidifies into a dense mass. Thus, its construction required no
compacting effort. Mastic Asphalt is used as wearing course material for heavy- duty pavement,
city street carrying high volume of traffic, bus stops where heavy tangential forces are expected
due to deceleration and acceleration, junctions where cornering stresses are predominant and on
bridge decks. Thin mastics are also used for footpaths.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

24.07.1.8 Milling/Recycling of Bituminous Pavement
Cold and hot recycling of the bituminous pavement is in vogue all over the world, specially for
the urban roads where increasing the levels of the road surface is often not possible. Moreover the
top1- 2 cm of the bituminous surface get oxidized and become brittle to develop micro-cracks
under traffic load, and bituminous materials in lower part of the bituminous layers are much
better which can be reused after rejuvenating.
Moreover, the most voluminous part of the road pavement, i.e the aggregates; can be reused for a
fresh layer after correction of the grading by additional of required sizes. Presently, only a part of
the recycled materials from bituminous layers is used in the lower layer of granular base course.
However, it must be used in bituminous binder course and surfacing layer also using hot or cold
recycling method approximately correcting the mix for the specifications.

24.07.1.9 Stone Matrix Asphalt

Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) is a substitute to dense graded bituminous mix. It is a tough, stable,
rut resistant mixture that relies on Stone-on-Stone contact to provide strength and a rich mortar
binder to provide durability. SMA consists of two parts: a coarse aggregate skeleton with high
binder and stabilizing additive. The coarse aggregate skeleton provides stone-on-stone contact, and
the stabilizing additive acts to hold the asphalt binder from drain down in the mixture during the
high temperatures of production and placement. SMA has proved superior performance on
heavily trafficked roads in city traffic condition. The application of SMA are given below;

With high trucks frequency On bridges

Intense wheel tracking In bus lanes
At traffic lights At bus-stops

346
 At intersections In car parks
On highways On air port runways
On gradients On unloading areas

24.07.1.10Porous Asphalt
Porous asphalt mix is a thin open graded mix, which has been found to eliminate the danger of
hydroplaning, enhance surface friction, reduces spray, and night glare during wet weather
conditions as porous mixes have inter connected voidsand high permeability. Porous asphalt mixes
are designed so as to form a surfacing with a voids ratio of about 18- 22% after laying and
compaction. With such a high percentage of voids, a network of channels is created in the layer,
capable of carrying off the water that has fallen on the pavement during a rain/shower and
penetrated the surface. The benefits from porous asphalt are:
i. Hydroplaning potential during rainstorm is minimized
ii. Skid resistance at high speeds during wet weather is improved
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

iii. Splash and spray during wet weather is minimized

iv. Road smoothness is improved (due to correction of minor surface irregularities)
v. Wheel-path rutting is minimized
vi. There are fewer glares at night during wet weather
vii. Riding surfaces are quieter (because of less noise from tyres)
viii. There is better wet-night visibility of traffic stripes
ix. Safety is increased (because of reduced stress on the operator during rain storms)

24.07.2 Geosynthetics
Geosynthetic is a revolutionary material for various applications for road works to provide
advantages in the performance and level of service of the specification in which it is used. These
are available in various forms: geotextile, geogrid, geonet, geomembrane, geocomposite, etc for
appropriate applications. Each of these are produced in different forms; for example, the
geotextile can be woven or non-woven type with different gauge of the fabric to meet different
strength requirements in the two perpendicular directions. Geosyntehtics can be used in pavement
structure for various purposes: as separation layer, drainage layer, to enhance tensile strength, to
prevent reflection cracks in bituminous layers, to use in reinforced earth/fill, for consolidation of
clayey layer and many other such applications.

24.07.3 Cold Mix Technology

Cold mix technology aims to save heating energy in bituminous construction by use of materials in
cold condition such as bitumen emulsion or cutback (only in special cases). Mix for both
surfacing layer or the binder course can be prepared using cold mix method, while certain
specifications for preventive maintenance are otherwise cold mix,
e.g slurry seal and micro-surfacing. The cold mix technology has various advantages over
conventional hot mix technologies.
i. Non polluting and consumes only 70 per cent energy of the quantum consumed in 20-40 mm
thick hot mix laying
ii. Raise in pavement height is marginal say 4-6mm
iii. Execution is fast and safe
iv. Surface is resistant to skidding, oxidation and stripping
v. Cost effectiveness is also in that it saves pavement materials.

347
24.07.4 Slurry Seal
The slurry seal is a mixture of fine aggregates, Portland cement as filler, bitumen emulsion and
water. It is like a slurry of thick consistency to be laid in a l ayer of 1.5-5 mm thickness to seal
the cracks and to fill any voids left in the surface course. Emulsion of modified bitumen provides
better result. Slurry seal may be used on top of single coat surface dressing. The surface shall be
opened to traffic in about 2 hours.

24.07.5 Micro Surfacing

Micro sufacing is a high performance mixture of polymer modified emulsified bitumen, dense
graded crushed mineral aggregate, filler(normally Portland Cement), Water chemical additive to
facilitate early setting of mix. A typical micro surfacing mix contain 12% modified emulsion,
86% dense graded aggregate, 1% cement, 1% additive and sufficient water for workability. It is
applied by synchronized machine through spreader box. The micro surfacing is a similar

CHAPTER - 24
specification as that of slurry seal. This can be laid in thickness of 4mm to 16 mm depending on
the present undulations of the surface.
Structurally adequate pavements having the bituminous surface oxidized and with micro- cracks
are most suited for this treatment as preventive maintenance intervention. Micro surfacing have
the following advantages over convention hot mixed techniques:

i. Marginal raise in pavement height

ii. Least environment pollution
iii. Life comparable to hot mix renewals
iv. Increased skid resistance

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

v. Faster laying process
vi. High durability due to rubber additives

24.07.6 Fibre Reinforced Concrete

Fibre Reinforced Concrete is a C omposite material, which consists of conventional concrete
reinforced by randomly, dispersed short length fibres of specific geometry, made of steel,
synthetic (polymeric) or natural fibers. The secondary reinforcement (fibres) is used to uniformly
improve the structural quality and also the inherent flexural strength of concrete. Internal stresses
due to shrinkage are restrained by uniformly mixed fibers in the concrete. Secondary
reinforcement is the approach to modify the brittle properties of concrete. The fibers are capable
of carrying load across the crack.

24.07.7 Roller Compacted Concrete (RCC)

RCC is a technique which makes use of zero slump concrete with or without fly ash, laying
manually or with mechanical spreader and compacting with vibratory road roller of 4-6 tonnes
capacity. Construction of RCC layer is fast and it is a suitable alternative technique for providing
a surfacing layer for medium to low traffic roads. The grade of concrete may be M-35. The riding
quality of roller compacted concrete pavement (RCCP) is not as good as cement concrete roads,
but it is comparable to the bituminous roads. While the flexible pavement layers require high
volume proportions of good qua lity aggregates (coarse and fine), this provides a v ery good
alternative as semi-rigid base course also. Moreover, bituminous surfacing can be provided on
RCC as it is done in case of DLC.

24.07.8 Wet Mix Macadam (WMM)

In most of the road construction work the normal WBM technology is still in use and rarely in
some special cases only WMM is considered. In view of the weakness left out in WBM
construction due to non-uniformity over the surface area of the road (due to largely manual
construction process), and the excessive water required to construct WBM specification,

348
 it is no longer popular for higher category of roads as well as city roads. WMM is a mix prepared
from clean crushed aggregates and fine aggregates with proper grading, premixed with water, to
form a dense mass, which is laid by pavers in the required thickness providing the needed camber
and compacted to the finished thickness. WMM so laid is popular nowadays for all types of road
and is a much better specification than WBM in many ways. WMM can be laid in thickness from
75mm to 200mm in one layer depending on the compacting equipment available. WMM
specifications given in clause 406 of MoRTH specification should be used directly.

24.07.9 Ready Mixed Concrete

Ready mixed concrete (RMC) is a need of today‘s concrete construction industry to produce and
deliver high quality produce economically. It is extremely useful on congested sites or in road
construction where limited space is available for keeping a mixing plant as well as aggregate
stock piling. It is a concrete delivered at site or into the purchaser‘s vehicle in plastic condition
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

and requiring no further treatment before placing in the position in which It is to set and harden.
By using RMC, there may be less chances of spillage of concrete and its constituents and the
concrete mix would be of better quality than conventionally mixed concrete, since better quality
control measures are adopted in making RMC is not only a ―quality material‖ but also a ―service‖.

24.07.10 Concrete Overlay on Bituminous Pavement

24.07.10.1 White Topping(WT)

A white Topping can be defined as: ―A concrete overlay of adequate thickness bonded to an
existing as phalt pavement‖. A solution for rutting asphalt pavement is ‗White Topping‖, which
means that the placement of a concrete overlay on top of asphalt pavement. This is an acceptable
pavement restoration practice since 1977. Much of the white topping technology has been
developed in the USA and other countries. Rigid pavement could be built in 15 to 20 cm depths
over the enhanced sub grade capacities of deteriorated asphalt pavements after correcting the
existing level or providing leveling course of dry lean concrete of grade M-10 over bituminous
layer.

24.07.10.2Ultra thin while topping (UTW)

With the advent of new fast track concrete pavement technologies that allow the opening of a
concrete pavement within 24 hou rs or less of initial paving, white topping technology is
advancing. Ultra Thin White Topping (UTW) is the next generation concrete pavements. It
involves the construction of a concrete pavement of thickness 9cm(90mm) or less. Reduction in
concrete pavement depths results in a substantial reduction in concrete pavement cost with large
scale economy. This type of pavement is suggested where the minimum thickness of bituminous
layer after milling is 75 mm and also existing bituminous layer is in good condition so that
reflection cracks or sympathetic cracks are as minimum as possible. The left out cracks after
milling shall be repaired first with either bituminous or cement concrete or any other suitable
polymers; and thereafter, ultra thin white topping is applied. The basic purpose of UTW is to
improve the riding quality along with the load carrying capacity.

24.07.10.3 High Performance Concrete (HPC)

High Performance Concrete (HPC) is defined as co ncrete specially designed to meet long term
strength and durability. Use of HPC in pavements may result in extended service life, and
improvement of compressive/flexural strength and performance of the concrete. HPC

349
 is generally characterized by low water/cement ratio and may contain silica fume and fly ash as
mineral admixtures as replacement of cement. The cost of the production of HPC is higher (by16-
32percent) as compared to that of the normal concrete at equivalent mix proportion. However,
there is 20 to 50 percent increase in the compressive and flexural strength as compared to
conventional or normal concrete. Further, the benefits accrued from the use of HPC, such as low
maintenance cost. Longer life of the structure, higher strength, trouble free service etc, shall
compensate the high initial cost of the HPC. Possible benefits include:
i. Reduced construction times
ii. For rapid repair of distressed pavements and bridges
iii. Chloride resistance
iv. Reduced Permeability
v. Reduced corrosion of steel bars

CHAPTER - 24
vi. Improved durability, and service ability, and
vii. Enhancement of the life of concrete pavements and bridges.

24.07.11 Materials for Special Applications

24.07.11.1 Ready to use patching mixes/materials for repair

Carbon core asphalt is a cold mix commercially available which is a ready to use mix that can be
used for resurfacing, patching and filling of potholes. It is available in disposable bags or drums.
Similarly, other brands are also available like Shell mac etc, which are also capable of doing the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

same job. There are other polymeric cement and resin materials available commercially which can
be used even in wet climate for emergency repair of roads as they set very fast.

24.07.11.2 Controlled low-strength material (CLSM)

Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) is defined by ACI Committee 229 as a ―self-
compacted material used primarily as a backfill material in lieu of compacted fill with a
compressive strength of 1200 psi (8400kPa) or less‖. However, where future excavation may be
required, the ultimate compressive strength of CLSM should be less than 300 psi (2100 kPa). The
level of strength is very low compared to concrete, but very strong when compared to soil. CLSM
is the only viable method of completely filling the voids, and additionally there is no associated
cost for vibration or compaction of the material in place. Controlled low strength material
(CLSM) is an useful construction material for filling the utility-cut trenches, specially for the
lower layers. It is flow able grout for trench filling as it is a self- compacting grout which is
pumped into the location and water is allowed to flow out.

24.07.12 Quality Control for New Materials

New materials like geotextiles and modified binders or SMA and Micro surfacing or any of the
other materials described in this chapter can also be used to advantage where very appropriate.
All such new materials will require appropriate quality control for the material as well as for the
construction specification to derive the true advantage.
Therefore, specifications and quality control requirements of each of these are to be understood
clearly before their use. The quality control tests as required for use of some of these materials are
given in MoRTH specification also; for example, the quality control requirements of geotextiles
and modified bitumen are as given in clause 703 and 521 respectively of MORTH specifications.
Each of these new materials may be adopted for use of appropriate, but with due care for actual
method of its use. Moreover, the material should be tested by more than one

350
 equipped laboratory for that purpose to prove the efficacy of the same as per available
specification. If it is not used anywhere in India under similar conditions, it must be used first for
experimental purpose as test sections of the actual road for evaluation under normal traffic. For
such experimentation, the manufacturer of the material should also contribute to fund the study.
Such study shall comply to the following equipments.
i. The quality control and quality assurance for such experimental (construction) sites shall be
more stringent.
ii. The proper plan for monitoring the performance of the road be made and data recorded over
sufficiently long period to justify the use of such materials.
iii. The proper record of planning and design of the experimental section is also to be maintained
so as to replicate and to develop design methodology after the successful experimentation.
iv. The manufacturer of the material should provide minimum period (normal performance)
guarantee for the performance of the material under experimentation.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

24.07.13 Pavement Performance Evaluation

24.07.13.1 Importance of Pavement Performance Evaluation

The performance of a pavement needs to be continuously evaluated with respect to both
functional and structural performance. The functional evaluation needs to be carried out more
frequently to know the riding quality of the pavements and the localized failures such as potholes.
Raveling, cracking, rutting etc. These problems may be addressed by way of minor surface
treatments. Whenever there is a need for provision of major overlays, structural evaluation needs to
be carried out for designing the overlay thickness.
The deterioration in pavement riding quality due to the above mentioned failures will increase the
road user costs in a significant way. By comparing the various parameters of pavement
performance with their respective permissible values one can taken decisions regarding the type
of maintenance measure to be implemented. Also several maintenance options for improving the
pavement performance to an acceptable level could be evaluated and an economical one could
bead opted.
The whole pavement performance evaluation should be a part of a Road Maintenance
Management System (RMMS), where it is also possible to predict the pavement condition using
deterioration models. These deterioration models could be calibrated for the local conditions by
utilizing the pavement performance data. Therefore, an RMMS is essentially a preventive
maintenance system which keeps the pavement performance always at an acceptable level.
Thus, the main objectives of pavement performance evaluation are
● Establish maintenance priorities
● Determine maintenance and rehabilitation strategies
● Predict pavement performance
● Evaluate the performance of new materials and techniques.

24.07.13.2 Methodology of Performance Evaluation

The performance evaluation for flexible pavements in normally carried out by objectively or
subjectively measuring the condition of the pavement surface with respect to roughness, surface
distresses such as cracking, raveling, pothole formation, shoving, rutting, localized depressions,
and skid resistance. The structural evaluation is also carried out by measuring the pavement
deflection. The various techniques of objective measurement of these distresses and pavement
deflection are explained below.

351
24.07.14 Methods of Measuring Distress
The pavement performance is largely defined by evaluation in the following categories.
Roughness / Unevenness Surface distress
Skid resistance
Structural evaluation – Deflection
Roughness / Unevenness
Pavement roughness or unevenness is generally defined as an expression of irregularities in the
pavement surface that adversely affect the ride quality of a vehicle (and thus the user). Roughness is
an important pavement characteristic because it affects not only ride quality but also vehicle delay
costs, fuel consumption and maintenance costs.

Subjective measurement of Roughness

Pavement Roughness can be measured subjectively or objectively. In subjective measurement, a

CHAPTER - 24
set of road users can be asked to rate the riding quality on a 0-5 scale as shown below: Present
serviceability Rating (as suggested in AASHTO on a scale of 0-5) can be worked out from these
subjective ratings.

Objective Measurement of Roughness / Unevenness

In the objective measurement, the roughness is indicated in terms of cumulative measure of
vertical displacements as recorded by a recorder when due to the unevenness in the longitudinal
profile of the road. The cumulative measure of ups and downs in road profile to termed as
roughness index or unevenness index and is represented in m/km or mm/km.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Roughness Measurement Equipment
Following are the methods/equipment that can be used for computing roughness index.

Road and level survey

A survey can provide an accurate measurement of the pavement profile. The use of surveys for
large projects, however, is impractical and cost prohibitive.

Dipstick Profiler
This instrument can record the pavement profile measurement very accurately. The device
records 10 to 15 readings per minute. Software analysis provides a profile accurate to 0.127 mm.
However, measurements by dipstick are time consuming and therefore, it is commonly used to
measure a profile for calibration of more complex instruments.

Profilographs
Profilographs have a sensing wheel, mounted to provide for free vertical movement at the center
of the frame. The deviation against a reference plane, established from the profilograph frame, is
recorded on graph paper from the motion of the sensing wheel. Profilographs can detect very
slight surface deviations or undulations up to about 6 m in length. However, they are not practical
for network condition surveys due to slow speed.

Response type road roughness meters (RTRRMs)

These instruments provide indirect measure of longitudinal road profile. The RTRRMs measure
the relative movement between the body of the automobile and the centre of the real axle. The
RTRRM measurements are sensitive to the type of tyre, tyre pressure, load, vehicle suspension
system, speed of vehicle, etc. Because of such sensitivity they need to be calibrated when any of
the above factors change significantly. The CRRI‘s

352
 fifth when bump integrator that is normally used in India also falls in this category. The advantage
of these RTRRMs is that they can record the road roughness at speeds upto 80 km/hr. Since no
two RTRRMs are exactly alike, it is necessary to convert measures (unevenness index) to a
standard common international scale.
To provide a common quantitative basis on which the different measures of roughness can be
compared, the International Roughness Index (IRI) was developed by World Bank. The IRI
summarises the longitudinal surface profile in the wheel path and the computed from surface
elevation data collected by either topographic survey or a mechanical profilometer or a dipstick.
IRI is reported in units of m/km.
All the RTRRMs need to be calibrated by measuring the unevenness of a standard stretch for
which IRI value are known.

Profile devices
These devices very accurately can establish the longitudinal profile of a pavement by either using
contact or non-contact sensor systems. Then on-contact systems use laser/ultrasonic devices form
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

aping the road profile. These profilometers are expensive and are normally used to calibrate
RTRRMs.

Range of Roughness Values

The following figure shows the range of IRI values for different pavements and the corresponding
speeds. There are several correlations between PSR and IRI. One of the correlations is presented
here. Where, PSR = present serviceability rating IRI = International roughness index 2

24.07.15 Surface Distress

Surface distress is any indication of poor or unfavorable pavement performance or signs of
impending failure. The general surface distresses can be grouped under the following three road
groups. The distresses under each of the groups are also mentioned along with the unit of
measurement in parentheses.
● Fracture – Cracking (% area cracked)
● Distortion – Localized settlements and depression (depth in mm) rutting (rut depth in mm)
and shoving
● Disintegration–raveling, stripping, potholes and patching (%effected are a of no of
potholes per km length)
Surface distress is related to roughness (the more cracks, distortion and disintegration – the
rougher the pavement will be) as well as structural integrity (surface distress can be assign of
impending or current structural problems).Measures of distress can be either subjective or
objective. A simple example of a subjective measurement may be rating of each type of defect
based on visual inspection on a scale of 0-5 as Very Poor, Poor, Fair, Good and Very Good as in
PSR.
Objective measurements, which are generally more expensive to obtain, use different types of
automated distress detection equipment. Older techniques, used teams of individuals who drove
across every km of pavement to be measured. The measurements were made using simple
instruments and by visual estimation. The rut depths were measured using straight edge and the
area of cracking, patching, raveling, etc were visually estimated. Based on the objective
measurements the present serviceability index (PSI) could be obtained using the ASSHTO
equation.
Current methods record pavement surface distresses using video imaging using a specially
equipped van that is fitted with high resolution cameras. The van can travel at the usual highway
speeds. Evaluation is either done manually by playing the video back on specially designed
workstations while trained crews rate the recorded road surface or automatically by computer
image processing software‘s. In more advanced Integrated Pavement Analysis Units, in addition to
high resolution video cameras, other instruments

353
 such as non-contact (laser) profilometers for mapping longitudinal as well as transverse pavement
profile, distance measuring instrument and computer workstations for processing the data are
fitted. Automatic Road Analyzer and Laser Road Surface Tester fall in this category.
Using integrated pavement analysis units one can obtain the following measurements.
● Roughness
● Distress(cracking, rut depth)
● Gradients, camber, curvature
● Pavement texture
The rating suggested by IRC in its guidelines or maintenance management of primary, a
secondary and urban road is given in the following table:

Pavement condition rating based on Different Types of Defects

CHAPTER - 24
Defects Range of Distress

Cracking (%) >30 21 11 to 20 5 to <5

to 30 10

Ravelling (%) >30 11 6 to 1 to 5 0

to 30 10

Pothole (%) >1 0.6 0.1 to 0.5 0.10 0

to 1.0

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Shoving (%) >1 0.6 0.1 to 0.5 0.10 0
to 1.0

Patch (%) >30 16 6 to 2 to 5 <2

to 30 15

Settlement and >5 3 Up to 2 Up to 0

depression to 5 1
(%)

Rutting (mm) >50 21 11 to 20 5 to <5

to 50 10

Rating 1 2 3 4 5
Condition Very Poor Fair Good Very
Poor Good
(Source: Guidelines for Maintenance Management of Primary, Secondary and Urban
Roads, IRC, 2004)

354
 24.07.16 Skid Resistance

Skid resistance is the force developed when a tyre that is prevented from rotating slides along the
pavement surface (Highway Research Board, 1972). Skid resistance is an important pavement
evaluation parameter because inadequate skid resistance will lead to higher incidences of skid
related accidents. Skid resistance depends on pavement surface texture. Skid resistance changes
over time.
Typically it increases in the first two years following construction as the roadway is worn away
by traffic and rough aggregate surfaces become exposed, and then decreases over the remaining
pavement life as aggregates become more polished.
Skid resistance is generally quantified using some form of friction measurement such as a friction
factor or skid number.
Friction factor (like a coefficient of friction) : = F/L Skid number: SN = 100 (f)
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

Where: F = Frictional resistance to motion in plane of interface

L = Load perpendicular to interface
Measurement Techniques
● Portable pendulum skid tester
● The locked wheel tester
● The spin up tester
● Pavement surface texture measurement

Portable Pendulum Skid Tester

It is a dynamic pendulum impact type tester for measuring the resistance offered by a surface
under test. It is used for measuring spot value of surface friction at representative locations.
Though, it provides good information on the skid resistance of the pavement, it cannot provide
data with different speeds.

The locked wheel tester

This method uses a locked wheel skidding along the tested surface to measure friction resistance.
It is possible to measure skid resistance at different speeds in this method. The spin up tester

A spin up tester has the same basic setup as a locked wheel tester but operates in an opposite
manner. For a sp in up tester, the vehicle (or trailer) is brought to the desired testing speed
(typically 64 km/hr) and a locked test wheel is lowered to the pavement surface. The test wheel
braking system is then released and the test wheel is allowed to ―spin up‖ to normal travelling
speed due to its contact with the pavement. The friction force can be computed by knowing the
test wheel‘s moment of inertia and its rotational acceleration. This avoids the use of costly force
measuring equipment.

Pavement surface texture measurement

In this method the pavement skid resistance is correlated with the pavement macro texture. By
measuring the pavement texture and using the established correlation between the macro texture
and the skid resistance, the skid resistance is obtained.

355
Deflection

Pavement surface deflection measurements are the primary means of evaluating a flexible
pavement structure. Although other measurements can be made that reflect (to some degree) a
pavements structural condition, surface deflection is an important pavement evaluation method
because the magnitude and shape of pavement deflection is a function of traffic (type and
volume), pavement structural section, temperature affecting the pavement structure and moisture
affecting the pavement structure. Deflection measurements can be used in back calculation
methods to determine pavement structural layer stiffness and the subgrade resilient modulus.
Furthermore, pavement deflection measurements are non-destructive destructive in nature which
adds on to the overall viability of usage.

Measurement Technique

CHAPTER - 24
The pavement surface deflections can be measured using either static deflection equipment or
impact load deflection devices. Static deflection equipment measure pavement deflection in
response to a static load. Benkelman Beam falls in this category. Impact load devices deliver a
transient impulse load to the pavement surface. The subsequent pavement response (deflection
basin) is measured by a series of sensors. The most common type of equipment is the falling
weight deflectometer (FWD)

Benkelman Beam
Is a simple device that operates on the lever arm principle. The Benkelman Beam is used with a
loaded truck – typically 80 KN on a single axle with dual tires inflated to 480 to 550 kPa. Placing

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the tip of the beam between the dual tires and measuring the pavement surface rebound as the
truck is moved away to make measurement. The Benkelman Beam is low cost but is also slow,
labor intensive and does not provide a deflection basin. The procedure of measuring rebound
deflection and finding the characteristic deflection using Benkelman Beam is documented in the
following standard.
IRC:81-1997 Guidelines for strengthening of flexible road pavements using Benkel man Beam
deflection technique.
Using the above standard one can design the overlays after arriving at the pavement
characteristic rebound deflection.

Falling Weight Deflectometer

(FWD) is an impact load device that delivers a transient impulse load to the pavement surface
and the resulting pavement response (deflection basin) is measured by a ser ies of sensors
(geophones). Vertical deflection of the pavement in multiple locations is recorded by the
geophones, which provides a more complete characterization of pavement deflection. The area of
pavement deflection under and near the load application is collectively known as the ―deflection
basin‖. One of the advantages of FWD is that multiple tests can be performed on the same
location using different weight drop heights. The advantage of FWD over BB is that it is quicker,
the impact load can be easily varied and it more accurately simulates the standard loading of
trucks, both with respect to time of application of the load as well as the magnitude of the load.
Therefore, using FWD deflection data one can characterize the existing pavement layers in terms
of their layer modulii using back calculation procedures with the help of mechanistic structural
models.
Once the pavement layers are characterized in terms of their present resilient modulii, overlays
can be designed using mechanistic procedures.
The characteristics of important equipment or the pavement performance evaluation is
documented in guidelines for Maintenance Management of Primary, Secondary and Urban
Roads, ―IRC, 2004.

356
 24.07.16 Intervention Criteria

Based on the objective/subjective rating of the pavement distress one can adopt a
maintenance strategy to bring back the distress ratings to an acceptable level. This kind of
maintenance termed, as pavement condition responsive maintenance is very effective when
compared to the traditional scheduled maintenance approach.
In order to determine the intervention criteria with respect to various distress indicators, it
is necessary to classify the roads. For the purpose of fixing the intervention criteria and for
determining the level of pavement evaluation to be adopted the following classification.
Category-I : All State Highways and City Roads Category-II : Major District Roads
Category-III: Other District Roads

Table -1 Intervention Criteria for PWD Road Networks

S Serviceability Indicator SH & MDR Other Roads
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

lN City
o Roads

1 Deflection 1.0mm 1-1.5 mm 1.5-2.0mm

.
2 Roughness by bump 2500 3000 4000 mm/km
. integrator mm/km mm/km
(max. permissible)
3 Pot-holes/l, (max. Nil 2-3 4-8
. numbers of size
<100 sq cm and depth
<2.5 cm)
4 Cracking and patching 5 percent 10 10-15 percent
. repairs (max. percent
permissible)
5 Rutting (max. 5mm 5-10 mm 10-20 mm
. permissible)
6 Skid Resistance (Skid 50 SN 40 SN 35 SN
. number by
ASTM-274 minimum
desirable)
7 User Information All road Major road Major road
. signs, signs, road signs and
road markings in markings in fai
markings good
in good condition
condition

Pavement performance is evaluated both functionally and structurally. However, functional

evaluation is more frequent than structural evaluation. A poor rating in functional evaluation leads
to structural evaluation.
The two ways of carrying out functional evaluation of pavements can be summarized as follows:
I. Qualitative approach based on subjective ratings of the above parameters and working out a
single performance index (similar to PSR on 0-5scales)
II. Using objective measurements on rut depth, cracked and patched area, rutting, raveling and
roughness using appropriate instruments and working out the performance index

357
 In the long run, the data on Roughness, surface distress, skid resistance and structural
evaluation should be collected using suitable instruments as explained in Annexure 12-A in an
objective manner. At a network level, as speed of collection of such data is also an important
factor, integrated analysis units may be used for collecting data on pavement distress and FWD
may be used for structural evaluation. Ultimately, an objective system of road performance
evaluation should be in place as a part of the Road Maintenance Management System. In the
mean time a qualitative approach of pavement performance evaluation could be attempted.
In the mean time- A detailed qualitative rating system on each and every parameter Table-2 may
be tried for State Highway & MDR.
This pavement performance evaluation when implemented in its full form should become
part of a road maintenance management system, which will guide in deciding the best
maintenance strategy.
The data on pavement performance evaluation could be used for arriving at workable

CHAPTER - 24
quality assurance and quality control criteria.
Table 2 : RATING OF PAVEMNT SURFACE
Name of Road: Rater:
Section: Date and Time:
Number of Traffic Lanes:
Distress Rating Scale

Cracking G OO D F AI R P OO R

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

5 4 3 2 1 0
Rutting G OO D F AI R P OO R

5 4 3 2 1 0
Patching G O OD F A IR P O OR

5 4 3 2 1 0
Raveling G O OD F A IR P O OR

5 4 3 2 1 0
Bleeding G O OD F A IR P O OR

5 4 3 2 1 0

358
 Potholes GOOD F A IR P O OR

5 4 3 2 1 0
Riding G OO D F AI R P OO R
Quality

5 4 3 2 1 0

Explanatory Notes
Cracking : Good: Generally un-cracked
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

Fair: Single crack along the when path or localized very fine cracking.
Poor: Extensive cracking
Rutting Good: Deformation along wheel path up to10mm
Fair: Deformation along when path between 10 and 20mm Poor:
Deformation along wheel path above20mm
Patching : Good: No patching or potholes or localized depressions observed
Fair: Localized patching or potholes observed at some places
Poor: Extensive patching or potholes spread all along the section.
Raveling : Good: No raveling or stripping observed
Fair: Stripping confined to localized pockets but exposed aggregate
remain stable Poor: Aggregate surface is exposed extensively and
extensive raveling observed.
Bleeding: Good: No bleedingobserved
Fair: Bleeding confined to a few localized patches Poor: Extensive
bleeding spread all along the section
Riding Quality Good: Comfortable travel inside the vehicle
Fair: Generally comfortable with occasional bumps
Poor: Uncomfortable ride with frequent bumps.

Simple qualitative rating shown in tables below could be used for other roads.

1. Measurement based on visual inspection only

An experienced engineer can rate the PCI by visual inspection of the pavement for
each kilometer on a scale of 1 to 5 as under:

Description of Surface PCI

Condition
Very Good 5
Good 4
Fair 3
Poor 2
Very Poor 1

2. Based on riding comfort

A jeep or car is driven at 50km /hr and the riding comfort noted for each kilometer. Based
on riding comfort while driving at the design speed of 50km /hr, the PCI is assessed as
under

359
 :

Riding Comfort at 50 km/ hr PCI

Smooth and pleasant ride 5
Comfortable 4
Slightly uncomfortable 3
Rough and bumpy 2
Dangerous 1

3. Based on comfortable driving speed possible

The driver is instructed to drive at the most comfortable and safe speed possible on the road.

CHAPTER - 24
The PCI then assessed for each kilometer based on normal driving speed as under:
Normal Driving Speed PCI
Over 50 km/hr 5
40 to 50 km/hr 4
30 to 40 km/hr 3
20 to 30 km/hr 2
Less than 20 km/hr 1

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

24.07.17 Performance Evaluation for New projects and Techniques
As mentioned earlier, evaluation of performance of the roads constructed by using new
materials or new techniques is to be carried out to get an idea about their behavior after 2 to 3 years.
The techniques of performance evaluation are similar to those described above and additional tests
or methods may be employed as necessary. The results of such post construction performance
evaluation will be educative which enable the implementation of corrective measures and carry out
modifications in future works of similar type and design.

24.07.18 Drainage Aspect

24.07.19.1 Drainage is the most important aspect for proper upkeep of roads. Strength and life of
the pavement greatly depends on the moisture present in and below the pavement. Performance and
durability of the pavement is inversely proportional to be quantum and duration of the presence of
moisture in the road structure. Failure of bituminous pavement in rainy season is mainly due to the
action of moisture on the various components of pavement.

24.07.19.2 Entry of Moisture

Moisture gets into the road structure through various sources like-rain water falling on the
pavement, water flowing on the surface, moisture getting into pavement through cracks in the
pavement, water seeping into the pavement through uncovered soil, moisture from below rising by
capillary action, water getting in to the pavement by way of spring flow and pipe leaks and
stagnation of water due to flooding or other reasons.

24.07.19.3 Action of Moisture of Pavement Components

Once moisture finds entry into the pavement structure it acts in various ways. It saturates
the soil which reduces its bearing capacity and the pavement starts sinking. Moisture present in the
WBM loosens the interlocking of the metal pieces and they move from their original position
disturbing the upper layers. Moisture present in the bituminous courses reduces the adhesive
property of the bitumen which results in to stripping of the metal. Such loose metal under the

360
 moving rubber tyres start grinding the surface. This grinding results in to further loosening of
other metal pieces in the pavement and with the sucking and churning effect of traffic the whole
surface starts raveling. Water accumulated in depressions and pot holes continuously supplies
moisture to lower layers weakening the whole structure for the pavement. Prolonged contact of
moisture affects all the components of the pavement.

24.07.19.4 Dealing with Moisture

Best approach to tackle the moisture problem lies in totally eliminating the water
contact. However, it is very difficult to have such an environment. So attempt should be to
minimize the quantity of moisture entry and to reduce the duration of the moisture contact with
pavement. This can be achieved by providing efficient drainage system to quickly carry away
the surface water and quickly removing the subsoil water that has found entry into the
structure. Also create such situation that the entry points of moisture penetration are effectively
sealed. Problem of flooding on the road is dealt separately below.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

24.07.19 For new road

1) A drainage layer having good permeability with inverted choke should be provided
below the pavement. Thickness should be minimum150mm.
2) In locations where water table is high, to prevent entry of soil particles into the drainage
layer/capillary cut off, some capping layer should be provided such as geo- fabric, quarry
spall, moorum etc
3) Drainage layer and GSB should be provided for the full width up to road side gutters and
weep holes should be provided at suitable level and suitable intervals in the
gutter(Fig.2407A)
4) Road side edge of the open gutter should be lower than the edge of the pavement at
that location.
5) Built up gutter should have min gradient of 1:400, however 1:300 is preferable. Invert
gradient should be checked by third party preferably with sight rails.
6) Curb inlets /Drop inlets should be at least 25-30 mm lower than the edge of the
pavement. Incase of pipe laterals depth of 50mm is preferable.
7) Built up drains should finally lead to some natural water course or SWD system of
sufficient capacity. This should be ensured by some third party inspection.
8) In case of foot paths proper edge gully and kerb in let arrangement should beprovided.
9) Before issue of work order fresh levels should be taken by the executing staff, invert
levels of longitudinal drains and final disposal point should be determined. A working
drawing should be prepared or the project and it should be available on the site all the
time.
10) At the location of C.D work and bridges provision of one or two conduits cross wise and
in the kerb is very useful in laying future utilities.
11) Road formation should be at least 300mm higher than the general ground level except
where the road passes through cutting. No land development above the road level should
be permitted.
12) Minimum camber for bituminous surface should be 2.5% however 3% camber would be
more desirable.
13) Camber should be attempted from the formation itself, and all pavement layers should
have the desired camber during construction itself.
14) Shoulder should have min camber of 5% and should have good permeability.

24.07.20 For Existing Roads

1) When road work is taken for improvement or relaying etc. pot hole filling and camber
correction should be done in advance.

361
 2) Due to creep if the edges of the pavement are higher than the adjoining portion they
should either be chopped out or leveling courses should be so adjusted that the finished
surface is at desired camber.
3) Existing drainage system should be thoroughly checked by some experienced and
responsible person. Any deficiencies noted, modifications suggested etc should be duly
undertaken on priority, preferably before main work of pavement is taken up.
4) Leaking pipes, spring flows, chronic damage spots and cracked up portions should be
investigated and proper corrective measure should be taken before the main work.
5) If adjoining plots are higher than the main road they should be trimmed. Alternatively
a cattle trap type drain should be provided and joined to SWD system.
6) Edge gutter/gully, inlet etc should be examined for their levels and clearance.
7) Provision of shoulder drains should be made where soft shoulders exist. Similarly incase

CHAPTER - 24
of roads in cutting and at chronic spots provision of subsoil drains should be made.
(Appendix2407C&D)
8) At the end of the flyovers and ramps water flowing along the slopes should be arrested
and diverted to SWD system by providing aslotted/ cattle trap type drain at the foot of
the slope.
9) Water flowing through water spouts of the flyovers should be lead through suitable pipes
to the ground chambers and connected to SWD.
10) Wearing coat on the flyover and bridges should be 15 to 20 cm short from the Kerbs/
Devri stones. The notch formed will serve as a drainage gully. This will avoid stagnation
on the bridge decking and avoid damages to wearing coat.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

24.07.21 Road Work Maintenance
1) Pot-holes should be filled timely and systematically.
2) Cracked up, sunken, dislodged portions should be removed fully and rebuilt inlayers.
3) Top surface of the filled pot-hole should be flush and in camber with the adjoining
surface. Smooth flow of surface water to the side drains should be ensured.
4) Raisedbituminousedgesshouldbetrimmedandmadelowerthantheneighboringsurface.
5) Pipe leaks should be attended by stopping the leaks immediately; in case it is not
possible, a suitable outlet by way of a bypass should be provided to leaking water.
6) Reinstatement of trenches with loose material without proper compaction gives easy
entry to moisture and renders the adjoin pavement week. Subsequent settlement of the
loose fill results into local sinking which further attracts moisture and leads to failure of
the pavement. Reinstatement should be with non-cohesive material compacted in layers.
Top surface of the reinstatement should be regular pavement and it should be flush with
the surface in level and camber. Subsequently if it shows some settlement it should be
made good time and again, but in no case it should be keptproud.
7) Building debris and other heaps obstructing the flow of water should be immediately
removed.
8) The system of pot-hole repairs with Pre Mix material laid in cold condition, with out
removing the loose material filed during monsoon, without tack coat and without rolling
should be discontinued. Similarly pot-hole filling by contracting agencies needs a fresh
look, as it is proving to be costly and ineffective.
9) Pre-monsoon and post-monsoon inspections of surface drainage system by the section in
charge should be strictly enforced. It should be monitored by his superiors and test
checked.

362
 24.07.23. Work Zone Traffic Management
24.07.23.1General
The purpose of any work zone Traffic Management Plan (TMP) is to ensure that the
impacts of road works on the public domain, in particular with respect to temporary
interruptions to vehicular and pedestrian traffic, are considered by the authority. The TMP must
ensure safety to the workers, pedestrians and vehicle users at all times, and that the delay due
to interruptions is minimized. The TMP should also ensure that the minimum required time is
made available to the roadwork before the road is opened for traffic.

24.07.23.2 Present Status of Traffic Management for Road Works

At present it appears that there is very little planning carried out for work zone traffic
management for all road works of PWD. For all cement concrete road works construction is
done lane wise allowing traffic on the remaining lanes. The impact of lane closure however is
not being scientifically assessed. Provision of the traffic control devices and signs are also
decided at the time of construction in the site. Only bare minimum work zone safety measures
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

are being under taken by the contractor. Flexible pavement maintenance works at present are
carried out during night time when the traffic volume levels are negligible. No specific traffic
management measures are being implemented for these road maintenance works. One of the
important problems observed in the case of road resurfacing works is that these works are
opened to traffic much earlier than the minimum required curing period. A proposer work zone
traffic management plan will ensure the availability of minimum required time for a roadwork
before it is opened to traffic, safety at the work zone and minimum delay to the road users.
Therefore, it is suggested the PWD should prepare and implement a traffic management plan
for all road works. Particularly attention should be paid to requirements for smooth and safe
pedestrian flow.

24.07.23.3 Components of Temporary Traffic Control Zones of Road Works

The temporary traffic control zone includes the entire section of roadway between the
first advance warning sign (―ROAD WORK AHEAD‖ sign) and the last traffic control devices
(―ROAD WORK ENDS‖ sign). The four components of temporary traffic control zones, in the
order that drivers encounter them, are

Advance Warning Area

This area notifies the driver of an impending temporary traffic control zone. This
advance warning may vary from singeing to a series of signs and/or flashing lights on a vehicle
preceding the transition area. The distance the warning area should be placed ahead of the
transition area depends on factors such as the speed limit, roadway condition, and type of road.

Transition Area
When traffic needs to be redirected from normal lanes, channelization devices are used
to move traffic to a new path. This redirection should occur at the beginning of the transition
area. Transition areas usually involve the use of roadway tapers. Tapers are created using a
series of channelizing devices or pavement markings placed out of or into the normal traffic
path. There are several types of tapers; merging, shifting, shoulder downstream, and one –lane
/ two–way.

Activity Area
Actual road works is conducted within the activity area. This area is made up of the
worm space, the traffic space, and optional buffer spaces. The works pace is that portion of the
roadway closed to traffic and set aside for workers, equipments, and material. The work space
can be stationery or move as work is conducted. The traffic space is the portion of the roadway
in which traffic is routed through the activity area. Buffer space is intended to provide an area

363
 of separation and security between the work site and traffic. The buffer space can be placed
longitude in all y and/or laterally to the work area. Buffer spaces are optional.

Termination Area
The termination area is used to return traffic to the normal traffic path. In this area,
tapers can be used to achiever routing of the traffic back to the normal traffic lanes. The
termination area extends from the downstream end of the work area to an ―END OF ROAD
WORK‖ sign if posted.
All these four components are shown for a typical work zone in Fig. 18.1 wherein one
lane is closed for maintenance.

24.02. 23..4 Work Zone Traffic Control Strategies

CHAPTER - 24
A suitable strategy from the ones mentioned below should be adopted for traffic
control at work zones after assessing the impact.
Lane Constriction ie., reducing the width of one or more lanes to retain the number of lanes
normally available. Lane constriction is usually the least disruptive to traffic but is applicable
only if the work area is predominantly outside the normal traffic lanes and if should are
available.
Lane Closure ie., one or more traffic lanes are closed after determining that serious
congestion will not result based on a capacity analysis.
Shared right – of –way ie., utilizing one lane for both directions of traffic flow with flaggers
or signals to coordinate the two directions of traffic or possibly traffic control signing alonefor

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

short term work zones on very low volume two lane roads
Temporary by-pass, ie., total closure of the roadway in one or both directions where work is
being executed, and rerouting the traffic to a temporary roadway constructed within the
highway right –of –way Where a temporary diversion is constructed, the geometrics of the
same should be as per the standards that apply to the normal traffic lanes and the number of
lanes for diversion should be decided based on the volume of diverted traffic and a minimum
level of service of D should be ensured during peak hour. The pavement section for the
diversion should be designed based on the diverted traffic loading and duration following the
normal standards that apply to the regular traffic lanepavements.
Intermittent closure, ie, stopping all traffic in one or both directions for a relatively short
period of time to allow work to proceed, then after a certain time (based on traffic volume)
reopening the roadway (normally applicable on very low volume roadways).
Crossover, ie, routing a portion or all of one direction of the traffic stream across the median
to the opposite traffic lanes, or utilizing the shoulder and / or lane construction to maintain the
same number of lanes

Use of the shoulder or median, ie., the existing shoulder or median acts as a temporary
traffic lane Where shoulder lane is used for diverting the traffic, shoulders should be
strengthened to take the regular traffic during the duration of closure. Earthen shoulders for
the purpose strengthening shoulder be provided with 150mm thick granular base covered with
bituminous surface dressing or carpet or mix seal surface.
Detour, ie, total closure of the roadway (one or both directions) and rerouting traffic to
existing alternate facilities.

24.07.23.5 Impact Analysis of the Work Zone Traffic Control Strategy

For a given roadwork several alternative traffic management plans could be generated using
the above listed strategies. All these alternatives are evaluated by qualifying their impacts. One
of the measures that could be used to evaluate the plans is the delay to traffic which is the
difference between the normal travel time and the increased travel time due to the

364
 implementation of the strategy. Capacity deficiency due to the road work is overcome by
implementing traffic management strategies. The impact of each strategy is worked out. Simple
speed flow curves could be used to work out the reduction in speed for each of the strategies.
The best strategy that has minimum adverse impacts could be selected.
The work zone traffic management plan should also identify any interruption to bus services or
bus stops and provide details of any measure to ensure continued access to public transport.
Existing bus routes will be maintained as far as is reasonably practicable and any diversions
necessary will be well publicized. The TMP should also ensure that satisfactory access for
emergency vehicles such as ambulances, fire fighting vehicles etc is not impeded.
Emergency vehicles require reasonable access to every property, along the construction route
all times.

24.07.23.6 Traffic Control Devices Used in Temporary Traffic Control Zones

A traffic control device is a sign, signal, marking or other device placed on or adjacent
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

to a street or highway. Devices should be placed by an official or public body withjurisdiction

to regulate, warn, or guide traffic.

Types of Work Zone Devices

Traffic control devices within temporary traffic control ones serve essentially the same
functions as traffic control devices do generally. The types and uses of the various devices
used in temporary traffic control zones include:

Signs
Temporary traffic control zone signs are similar in their communication objectives to
all other traffic signs. Leathering‘s, temporary traffic control signs are categorized as
regulatory signs, warning signs, and informatory signs. Signs used at night need to be retro-
reflectorized or illuminated to achieve a night time visibility that is comparable to that in day
light. The illumination can be internal or external; street or highway lighting is not usually
adequate to satisfy this requirement. Signs used in temporary traffic control zones are often
relocated and subject to considerable wear and tear during handling. Therefore, they should be
routinely inspected for cleanliness, visibility, excess wear, and proper positioning and should
be replaced if necessary. Descriptions of specific signs are available in IRC: 67- 2001.

Arrow Displays
An arrow display is a sign with a matrix of elements. The matrix, capable of with either
flashing or sequential displays, provides the driver with additional warning or information. The
direction of movement of vehicle at diversions could be effectively indicated by these arrows.

High level Warning Device

A high level warming device, or flag tree, is designed to be visible over the top of
vehicles, has at least two flags, and may contain an appropriate warming sign. They are often
used in high volume urban temporary traffic control zones to warn motorists of short-term
operations.

Channelizing Devices
Channelizing devices warn and guide drivers through work activities in or near the
roadway and protect workers in the temporary traffic control zone. Types of channelizing
devices include: cones, tubular markers, vertical panels, drums, barricades, portable barriers,
and temporary raised islands. Each device is subject to specific requirements as to size, color,
stripe patterns and use of retro reflectorized material.

365
 Pavement Markings
Pavement markings provided in a temporary traffic control zone must be comparable to
the markings maintained along adjacent roadways. Pre-existing markings need to be evaluated
for their potential to misguide vehicles Any such markings need to be thoroughly removed (black
spray paint is not satisfactory as in certain lighting it can appear to motorists as an existing
marking). All markings and devices used to delineate vehicle paths and pedestrian routes should
be evaluated in differing lighting and weather conditions to assess the risk of misguidance.
Descriptions of pavement markings are available in IRC: 35-1997.

Lighting Devices
It is often necessary to supplement retro reflectorized signs, barriers and channelizing devices
with lighting devices at night. Floodlights should be used to illuminate flagger stations,

CHAPTER - 24
equipments crossings, and other work areas where existing light is not adequate. The
floodlights should not be used where they may create a disabling glare for drivers. A flashing
beacon is a flashing yellow light used to alert drivers to special road conditions. Steady –
burning lamps placed in a line on channelizing devices are effective in delineating the proper
vehicle path through a temporary traffic control zone. Because warning lights attract a driver‘s
attention, they are used to help drivers identify road hazards.

Other Devices
Other devices include impact absorbing attenuators, portable barriers, temporary traffic
signals, rumble strips, screens and lane dividers. Impact attenuators, which may be stationary

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

or mounted on a vehicle, protect motorists from the exposed ends of barriers, fixed objects,
and other hazards. Like all traffic control devices, these temporary devices must be routinely
inspected to ensure they function as untended. Details of road delineators are available in IRC:
79-1981.

24.07.23.7 Pedestrian Safety

The following points should be given due consideration for pedestrian safety at road works.
1) Pedestrians and vehicles should be physically separated (ie, by barriers, barricades, or
similar items).
2) Pedestrian walkways should be maintained free of any obstructions and hazards such
as holes, debris, mud, construction equipment‘s, stored materials etc.
3) Temporary lighting should be considered for all walkways that are used at night,
particularly if adjacent walkways are lighted.
4) Walkways should be at least 1.5m wide and should be wider in areas of high pedestrian
activity.
5) All hazards (ditches, trenches, excavations, etc) near or adjacent to walkways should
be clearly delineated.
6) Walkways under or adjacent to elevated work activities such as bridges or retaining
walls may require a protective roof.
7) Advance information is needed if the pedestrian pathway is blocked or detoured. Signs
and traffic control devices should be provided at points of decision to properly guide
the pedestrians along the detour. Pedestrian signals that no longer apply should be
covered. Signs and traffic control devices should not be a hazard to pedestrians. Signs
located near or adjacent to a side walk should have a 2mclearance.
8) Where safe pedestrian passage cannot be provided, pedestrians should be directed to the
other side of the street by appropriate traffic control devices (eg. ―Foot Path Closed- Use
Other Side‖ and ―Pedestrian Detour- Follow the Arrow ―signs).
9) Where construction activities involve sidewalks on both sides of the street efforts should
be made to stage the work so that both sidewalks are not out of services at the

366
 same time.
10) In the event that sidewalks on both sides of the street are closed, pedestrians should be
guided around the construction site.
11) Reflectorized traffic control devices are of little value of pedestrians.
Warning lights should be used to delineate the pedestrians‘ pathway and to
mark hazards as appropriate.
12) Particular attention should be given to avoid inconvenience to senior citizens
and handicapped pedestrians.

24.07. 23.8 Worker Safety

Worker safety is another primary objective of the TMP, Key elements of
traffic control management that enhance worker safety are: Training workers about
how to work safety next to traffic; Equipping workers with bright and highly visible
clothing; Using barriers to separate work space from traffic; Reducing speed zones
and using law enforcement; Lighting the work area; Preparing public relations
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 24

efforts to reduce traffic through the temporary traffic control zone; and Closing
roads.

Third Party Inspection of Projects

24.8 Three Tier Quality control Mechanism in PW(R&B) Department

Quality is an attribute to excellence. Quality is totality of features and characterization

of a product or service that bears on its ability to satisfy, the stated or implied needs.
Quality in fact should be an ongoing process of getting the best continuously. Quality
is fundamental to reliability and durability of a product. The quest for quality calls for
integrity, commitment, dedication, knowledge, ethics and team work of persons
involved. Quality upgrading is a continuous process of innovations of products,
processing and adapting control tools. The quality must be consistent. Quality
management covers management responsibilities, internal and external control, tests,
acceptance criteria, corrective actions, documentations, transparency etc.
24.9 Proposed Mechanism for Quality control

24.10 State Quality Control Coordinator (SQCC)

A third party quality control mechanism in the department to be headed by a State

367
 Quality Control Coordinator (SQCC), an officer of S E rank supported by two
executive engineers (Each for Jammu and Kashmir), two Assistant executive
engineers (Each for Jammu and Kashmir),and two Assistant engineers (Each for
Jammu and Kashmir). The post of which can be made available out of existing
sanctioned strength under deputation category. The system shall be conceived and
designed on the pattern of PMGSY deptt., where the pattern has been successfully
implemented and yielded encouraging results. The SQCC shall be independently
working under the direct control of Administrative Secretary/DCW/Chief Engineer
DIQC. He shall be deputing State Quality Monitors (SQM) while as State Quality
Auditors (SQA) shall be deputed by the Administrative Secretary/DCW to various
work sites for monitoring of quality control of works as per the guidelines. The SQAs
shall be drawn from retired CEs/SEs while as SQMs shall be drawn from retired
SEs/EEs and enrolled with SQCC whose performance shall also be audited
periodically as per the guidelines. The Honorarium for SQAs/SQMs will be met out
of the contingency component of the Capex Budget. The Honorarium pattern, present
in vogue in PMGSY is proposed to be adopted.
24.11. Three tier set up for quality management system
The three-tier quality management mechanism comprises:I
a. Tier I Quality control shall be conducted by the in-house departmental engineers
at various levels.
b. Tier II Quality control shall be conducted by a pool of retired SE/EE engineers of
the state/UT called as State Quality Monitors (SQM) and controlled by the State
Quality Control Coordinator (SQCC) of the rank of SE to be appointed under
DCW on the pattern of SQC in PMGSY deptt.
c. Tier III Quality control shall be conducted by a pool of retired Chief
Engineers/SE, called as State Quality Auditors (SQA) working under the
Development Commissioner Works who will be deputing the SQAs for tier three
supervision and audit of the works.
24.11.1 First tier

The Executive Engineer is envisaged as a first tier of quality management with the
primary function of construction supervision and quality control. The quality
management functions of the Executive Engineer shall include the following:
(i) Preparation of realistic detailed project report (DPR) on the basis of detailed drawings
and design, with adequate attention to investigations and pre-construction activities
which are essential for proper design and estimation of the project as per standard IS,
IRC codes of practice and guidelines issued by the state PW R&B department for time
to time.

(ii) Preparation of bid documents and effective selection process for procurement of
works, based on proven capacity and ability of the contractors in accordance with the
relevant guidelines.

(iii) Ensuring that:

(a) Contractors have brought the necessary machinery and equipment to site.

(b) Field laboratory/testing Equipment has been established at the site.

(c) A comprehensive CPM/PERT charts/Bar charts reflecting all the activities of the work
along with their critical time of completion shall be prepared by the contractor and
approved by the engineer incharge.
(d) The work programme has been approved.

368
(iv) Supervising Site/off Site, Quality Control arrangements including materials and
workmanship, primarily through testing.

(v) The following frequency of inspection visits to site by Executive Engineer staff is
recommended while the work is in progress:

(a) Junior Engineer – Daily

(b) Assistant Engineer /Assistant Executive Engineer – Twice a week

(c) Executive Engineer – Once a week

(vi) Taking timely action to ensure replacement of defective material and rectification of
defective workmanship.

(vii) To ensure effective Quality Control on materials and workmanship, the following
standard procedure shall be followed:

(viii) A monthly return of the tests shall be submitted in the prescribed proforma
by the AEE to the EE in the first week of every month. The EE will review this return
regularly to see that the Quality Control tests are being performed at the desired
frequency and with the desired accuracy. The EE will also verify that the Non-
Conformance Reports (NCR) are being issued by the AEE whenever non-
conformance occurs and the Contractor is taking action promptly on the NCR.
Payment to the Contractor shall be regulated by the EE as per the returns of the
Quality Control tests. Any deviation will be the personal responsibility of the EE.

(ix) Quality Control Registers shall be maintained for all works issued by the
divisional office for recording of test results and Non conformity of quality in the
work. The NCR, (Non-Conformance Report) shall be submitted to the executive
engineer within 3 working days.

(x) The SE in charge of the circle and the Chief Engineer having jurisdiction are
responsible for the proper functioning of the Executive Engineer as part of their
normal administrative duties. Their inspection and quality testing supervision will
therefore be counted as part of effective supervision of the first tier of quality
management (and not as a second tier of quality management). The SE/CE shall:

a. During his visits to the work, oversee the operations of the quality control testing
procedure and record his observations in the Quality Control Register. The SE/ CE
will also verify that the Non-Conformance Reports are issued in time and action is
being taken by Contractor promptly.

b. Prepare Inspection Reports which shall be sent to the Executive Engineer for
taking remedial action.

24.11.2 Second tier

The second tier of quality management shall be headed by the State Quality Control
Coordinator (SQCC). Who will be directly reporting to DCW.
The first tier of quality management has the primary function of quality control
through enforcement of technical standards and quality control requirements through
regular testing, close supervision and inspection. While as the function of the second
tier quality management is to inspect the works and ensure that the Quality
Management System at the site is functioning satisfactorily and suggest possible
improvements where required. For this, they may be required to carry out and report:

369
i) Independent quality tests in accordance with the standard codal requirements and to
verify that the quality management system is achieving its intended objectives.
ii) The State Quality Monitors shall carry out inspections at appropriate stages of work
under progress.
iii) SQMs shall also help the field engineers in developing a scientific working
environment in execution of the works.
iv) Observations of SQMs shall be placed on JKPWDOMS website so that these are
available for viewing by the stakeholders.
v) While deciding upon the stages of inspection by SQMs All Executive Engineers and
Assistant executive engineer shall be responsible for getting the works inspected at
critical stages of progress of work and ensure minimum no of inspection as per the
guidelines.
vi) All works shall be inspected by the SQM as per the prescribed table. However, the
inspections shall not be spaced beyond three working months. In addition, the
Executive Engineer can request for an out of plan inspection depending upon the
requirement of work at site.
24.11.2.1 Reporting Methodology and Performance Evaluation

Under the Second Tier of Quality Monitoring, the following guidelines for reporting
methodology and process of performance evaluation shall be adopted by the
Department.

Organizing the Inspections:

The SQCC shall take the following action for organizing inspections under this tier:

(a) The SQCC shall draw up programmes for inspection by SQMs in such a way that
every work is inspected as per the schedule of visits as per the manual. The first two
inspections of every work should be carried out during the execution of work spaced
at least three months apart and the last inspection should be carried out on the
completion of work or at the finishing stage but in no case later than one month after
completion of work.

(b) The schedule should generally be drawn up every month for various works. However
every work shall be visited as per the above schedule not spaced more than three
months apart.

(c) The SQCC shall ensure inspection of works by the SQMs strictly as per provisions of
these guidelines.

The observations shall be recorded and reported by the SQMs in prescribed formats.
24.11.2.2 Grading of Works:
i) Upon inspection of work, the quality of every item and sub item of work would be
evaluated by the SQM on the basis of methods of observations prescribed in
Annexure 2. The grading of work would be done with an intention to quantify the
observations showing level of satisfaction in relation to prescribed specifications
of the work/item under observation. The grading would be recorded in every item and
abstracted at appropriate space provided in relevant format.
ii) The objective of the grading is to indicate to the Executive Engineer that whether the
material or workmanship is acceptable, or unacceptable. If the item is unacceptable,
the improvement could be done by either replacement of the entire material/portion of
work or by rectification in workmanship or material. Therefore, based on the type of
item and method of observation, each item/ sub-item of work would be graded in any

370
 of the categories indicated as ‗Satisfactory (S)’, ‘Satisfactory Requiring
Improvement (SRI)’ or ‘Unsatisfactory (U)’ as prescribed in format.
iii) Based on grading, the Executive Engineer shall take action for rectification of defect,
therefore, it is very important to record the defect as well as the suggestive method by
which the rectification could be done. The SQM shall record, in the observation
sheet, the grade as well as clear and express reasons for grading the item of work
as ‗SRI‘ or ‗U‘ along with his suggestions for improvement. The reasons and
suggestions shall be recorded clearly in such a way that there are no ambiguities or
contradictions with observations in other items.
24.11.3 Third tier

The third tier of quality management shall compose of State Quality Auditors (SQAs)
who shall be working directly under the control of Administrative Secretary/DCW.

The objective of this tier is to monitor the quality of works executed by the
department to ensure that the works conform to standards and to see whether the
quality management mechanism in place is effective. The role of this tier shall be to
audit and inspect the works and provide guidance to the field engineers. SQAs shall
also help in developing a systemic and scientific working environment in the
department besides identifying the shortcomings in the system and provide a feedback
to the department for rectification of the same. The role of SQA shall be more of a
teacher than that of an examiner.

i) Conduct Independent quality tests in accordance with the standard codal requirements
and to verify that the quality management system is achieving its intended objectives.
ii) Carry out inspections at appropriate stages of work under progress.
iii) Help the field engineers in developing a scientific working environment in execution
of the works.
iv) Observations of SQAs shall be placed on JKPWDOMS website so that these are
available for viewing by the stakeholders.
v) While deciding upon the stages of inspection by SQAs all Executive Engineers and
Assistant executive engineer shall be responsible for getting the works inspected as
per the schedule during the progress of work.
vi) All works shall be inspected by the SQA as per the prescribed table. In addition, the
SQCC can request for an out of plan inspection depending upon the requirement of
work at site.
24.11.3.1 Reporting Methodology and Performance Evaluation

Under the Third Tier of Quality Monitoring, the following guidelines for reporting
methodology and process of performance evaluation shall be adopted by the
Department.
Organizing the Inspections:

The DWC shall take the following action for organizing inspections under this tier:

i) The DCW shall draw up programmes for inspection by SQAs in such a way that
works to be inspected by the SQAs shall be critically selected so that the quality of
works is randomly cross checked at a higher level.
ii) The schedule should generally be drawn up every month for various works to be
inspected by the SQAs. However, every work shall be visited as per the above
schedule.

371
iii) The DCW shall ensure inspection of works by the SQAs strictly as per provisions of
these guidelines.
24.12 Independent External Monitoring
24.12.1 Role and Duties of IEMs (Independent External Monitoring)

The IEMs appointed by the Competent Authority would have access to all contract
documents, whenever required, only for large scale works.

It would be desirable to have structured meetings of the IEMs with the Head of the
Department of the Organization on a quarterly basis including an annual meeting to discuss
/ review the information on tenders awarded during the previous quarter. Additional
sittings, however, can be held as per requirement.

The IEMs would examine all complaints received by them and give their
recommendations/views to the Head of the Department of the Organization, at the
earliest. They may also send their report directly to the Vigilance Organisation, in case
of suspicion of serious irregularities requiring legal/administrative action. IEMs are
expected to tender their advice on the complaints within 10 days as far as possible.

For ensuring the desired transparency and objectivity in dealing with the complaints
arising out of any tendering process, the matter should be examined by the full panel of
IEMs jointly as far as possible, who would look into the records, conduct an
investigation, and submit their joint recommendations to the Management.

IEM should examine the process integrity, they are not expected to concern themselves
with fixing of responsibility of officers. Complaints alleging mala-fide on the part of
any officer of the organization should be looked into by the VO of the concerned
organisation.

The role of IEMs is advisory, would not be legally binding and it is restricted to
resolving issues raised by an intending bidder regarding any aspect of the tender which
allegedly restricts competition or bias towards some bidders. At the same time, it must
be understood that IEMs are not consultants to the Management. Their role is
independent in nature and the advice once tendered would not be subject to review at
the request of the organization.

Issues like warranty / guarantee etc. should be outside the purview of IEMs.

All IEMs should sign no disclosure agreements with the organization in which they are
appointed. They would also be required to sign a declaration of absence of conflict of
interest.
A person acting as an IEM shall not be debarred from taking up other assignments such
as consultancy with other organizations or agencies subject to his declaring that his /
her additional assignment does not involve any conflict of interest with existing
assignment. In case of any conflict of interest arising at a later date from an entity
wherein he is or has been a consultant, the IEM should inform the Head of the
Department of the Organization and recluse himself/herself from that case.

All organizations may provide secretarial assistance to IEC for rendering his/her job as
IEM. In case of any misconduct by an IEM, the Head of the Department of the
Organization should bring it to the notice of the Competent Authority detailing the
specific misconduct for appropriate action at it‘s end.
372
The role of the VO of the organization shall remain unaffected by the presence of IEMs.

24.12.2 Appointment of IEMs

The IEM‘s appointed should be eminent personalities of high integrity and reputation. The
Competent Authority would invite applications from willing interested persons and maintain a
panel of persons eligible to be appointed as IEM. The Competent Authority may make
independent and discreet background check before including a name in the panel.

The choice of IEM should be restricted to officials from the government and public sector
undertakings who have retired from positions of the leveI of Additional Secretary to the
Government of India and above or equivalent pay scale, and for Public Sector Undertakings,
Board level officers in Schedule A Companies, Public Sector Banks, Insurance Companies and
Financial Institutions. Officers of the Armed Forces who have retired from the rank equivalent of
Lt. General and above may also be considered for appointment.
Prior appointment as IEM the Head of the Department of the Organization has to forward a panel
of suitable persons to the Competent Authority. This panel may include those who are in the
panel maintained by the Vigilance Organization or they may propose names of other suitable
persons for appointment as IEM. While forwarding the panel of suitable persons, the
Organization would enclose detailed bio-data in respect of all names proposed. The details would
include postings during the last ten years before superannuation, special achievements,
experience, etc., in Go vernment sector. It is desirable that the persons proposed possess domain
experience of the PSU activities or the relevant field with which they may be required to deal.

The Commission would not consider the name of an officer / executive who is either serving or
who has retired from the same organization to be an IEM in that organization, although they may
have served in the top management.

The appointment of IEM would be for an initial tenure of three years and could be extended for
another term of two years on a request received by the Competent Authority from the
organization appointing the IEM. An IEM can have a maximum tenure of 5 years in an
organization with an initial term of three years and another term of two years.

Age should not be wore than 70 years at the time of appointment / extension of tenure.
Remuneration payable to the IEMs by the organization concerned would be equivalent to that
admissible to an Independent Director in the organization and in any case should not exceed Rs.
20,000/- per sitting. Remuneration being paid to existing IEMs may not be changed till the
termination of their tenure.
The terms and conditions of appointment, including the remuneration payable to the IEMs,
should not be included in the Integrity Pact or the NIT. This may be communicated individually
to the IEMs concerned.

373
Chapter 25
25.1. Asset Management

25.1.1. Introduction
Maintenance of all the assets is far more important than continuous creation of new assets
without provision for proper upkeep. Currently the backlog of maintenance activities has caused
the deterioration of structures and most of them have to be reconstructed. It is vital to the
economy of the UT that timely maintenance is carried out.
The maintenance activities should be properly planned and implemented periodically. For
this all the assets shall be recorded in registers and regular inspection and verification done.

CHAPTER - 25
25.1.2. Land Plans & Land Records
The land plans & land records are the basic documents of property right of the Govt.
/Department. Therefore, land plan showing boundaries of the area etc. should be kept on record
& updated from time to time. Sometimes part of Govt. land is given on lease to some private
parties or corporations. In such cases lease proposals are approved at Govt. level & lease
agreements are signed at Executive engineer‘s level. The Ex. Engineer has no power to give any
piece of Govt. land to any party without permission from the competent authority. In all such
cases of leases of Govt. property a lease register & agreement copies of lease deed should be
maintained by the Executive Engineer for record, reference, renewal or termination of lease.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Proper Mutation of the land documents is must and should be completed in time bound manner.

25.1.3. Encroachments
The encroachments generally occur on Government land of buildings or adjoining the
roads/ bridges. Such encroachments should be removed with the help of revenue and police
authorities then and there.

25.1.4. Auction of Usufructs

The fruit bearing trees and other trees on Government land viz. along the internal road,
quarters, office premises, rest houses etc. and along the PWD roads should be protected properly.
Every year auction should be held for sale of usufructs. The money realized should be credited to
govt.

25.1.5. Dismantled Material Account

The useful materials obtained from dismantling of the old structures, buildings, roads or

374
 bridges etc. should be taken on record as per provisions in section.3019.3. Before dismantling
any old building, permission of the competent authority should be obtained for dismantling and
to write off the structure from Building Register as per section 2901.1.3. In case of culverts the
same shall be noted in the concerned register as per section 2702 and bridges as per section 2802.

25.1.6 Theft of Government Property / Articles

Any theft of Government property is to be immediately brought to the notice of higher
officers.
Similarly, action to lodge the complaint with the police is also to be taken.

25.1.7 Accident Reporting

Sometimes accidents happen on site of work involving injuries to persons, deaths, loss of
property etc. All efforts should be made to give medical treatment at the earliest. Such instances
should be immediately brought to notice of higher officers. Similarly, action should be initiated
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 25

to mobilise support of relief/ rescue from local police/ revenue officers. The detailed reporting
should follow later on. In case of major accidents, the matter is to be reported.

25.1.8 Erosion control and environment protection

Any maintenance activity also include necessary precautions for the control of erosion and
leaching. In case of buildings, retaining wall and toe wall with turfing shall be done. The
provisions of the guidelines for environmental protection shall be adhered to. In case of roads and
bridges, erosion control shall be done by turfing or seeding and mulching as per clause 306, 307
and 308 of Standard Specification for Roads and Bridges of MoRTH.

25.1.9 Maintenance Estimates

The divisional officer shall forward the maintenance requirements within his jurisdiction
by end of each calendar year to the concerned planning wing who shall incorporate this in the
annual budget. Once the budgets are passed the concerned Chief Engineer shall place at the
disposal of each divisional officer a lump sum amount at the start of the financial year. It is the
responsibility of the divisional officer to priorities the works in his jurisdiction within the allotted
amount.

25.1.10 Retrofitting of Buildings:

The retrofitting of existing structures shall be governed by various codes of practice.

375
Chapter 26
26.1. Maintenance of Roads

26.1.1. General
The maintenance of road is an elaborate activity and includes maintenance of basic records,
maintenance of structures and tools & plants required including carrying out inspection of all the
structures at regular prescribed intervals. While maintenance of State Highways and Major District
Roads is the responsibility of PWD, the J&K Government acts as the agent of the Union

CHAPTER - 26
Government for carrying out maintenance works on National Highways. Remaining all roads are to
be maintained by the P. W D. if it does not belong to any organization/authority/private party. Even
when roads are constructed in highest quality, over a period of time, they will show signs of distress
due to the effects of increase in vehicular traffic, climatic effects and other reasons.
Traffic on most of the roads have exceeded their capacities, and do not cater to the needs of
modern multi axle heavily loaded vehicles. Moreover, reclassification to higher categories is done
without properly designed upgradations. Hence, this has resulted in deterioration of roads which in
turn causes loss to the economy by way of increased fuel consumption, wear and tear to vehicles,
accident costs and increased travel times. The need of the hour is to create a road network of desired
level of service for which upgradation of existing roads shall be done in a phased manner.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Maintenance of all elements of the road is important but the condition of the pavement is
the most important in predicting the performance of the road. Appendix 2600A details the type of
distress, symptoms, probable causes and possible types of treatment. Road maintenance is required
on a regular basis to keep these effects to a minimum, extend the life of the road and provide a high
level of service to users. The criterion for maintenance shall be as per Appendix2600B
All maintenance and repairs are to be carried out as per relevant codes and specifications of
IRC and similar instruction/orders issued by the competent authority on the subject.
The basic objectives of maintenance are
a. Affording riding comfort, convenience and safety to the public
b. Preservation of the investment in roads and appurtenances
c. Preservation of the aesthetics and compatibility of highway system with environment; and
d. Accomplishing necessary expenditure of resources with continuing emphasis on economy.

26.2. Road Maintenance Unit:

At each Division, there is a Road Maintenance Unit (RMU) under the Divisional Officer,
Executive Engineer It shall have the responsibility of maintaining a register of all assets with
periodical updating. This may be obtained from the respective Assistant Executive Engineer, who
shall maintain current records in the form of registers for all the roads and culverts under his
charge. Wherever necessary the RMU shall undertake regular monitoring surveys and the reports
submitted to the Divisional Officer and forwarded to the Central Road Maintenance Unit. The
Executive Engineer shall prioritize the roads for maintenance for next financial year in his Division
before the end of each calendar year. The RMU cell in the centre shall collect the road maintenance
requirement for the entire State from respective divisions and the proposal for total fund
requirements shall be incorporated in the annual budget as a planneditem.

26.2.1. Maintenance Planning:

The annual maintenance plan for the next financial year shall be prepared by the Executive
Engineer and forwarded to the Chief Engineer before end of November.

376
 Chief Engineer shall finalize actual fund requirement based on output from Road Maintenance
Management System and this shall be transmitted to the Finance Department before 31stDecember
every year. Chief Engineer shall allocate the maintenance fund to each Division at the start of every
financial year.
The Executive Engineer shall arrange and execute the maintenance work based on fund
allocation as regular maintenance contract or as Fixed Term Maintenance Contract. To enable this,
the Assistant Executive Engineer shall prepare detailed maintenance estimate of the identified roads.
The specifications for maintenance shall be as per Section 3000 of specification for road and bridge
works of MoRTH and shall apply to all items of road maintenance works as required to carry out
under the contract or as directed by the Executive Engineer. The works shall be carried out in
conformity with the relevant specifications to the required level, grade and lines using approved
materials. The works shall be carried out using light duty machinery or manual means provided the
quality of the end product does not suffer. In execution of maintenance works, a reference is made to
the IRC publications Manual for Construction and Supervision of Bituminous works and Code of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 26

Practice for Maintenance for Bituminous Surfaces of Highways, IRC 82 for guidance and compliance
wherever applicable. Wherever the specification is not clear, good engineering practice shall be
adopted in the construction to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer.

26.2.2. Inspection Schedule

The Assistant Engineer/ Junior Engineer under the control of the road shall inspect the roads
frequently at least once a month. The frequency of this inspection shall be increased during
monsoons, winters or calamities. Overseer/road guard/ supervisor on directions from the J.E/ A.E
shall also conduct routine checking and report the condition of roads. He shall also check the
condition of avenue trees from time to time and take such steps as lies within his means to prevent
unauthorized cutting of avenue trees or damages to culverts, Kilometer stones, signboards etc. Should
there be any accidental obstruction to traffic by fallen trees, erosions slips, damages to bridges,
culverts etc., the Road guard must immediately get orders from the J.E/ Assistant Engineer and
provide necessary caution boards and report the fact to the Assistant Engineer/ J.E and under his
instructions arrange the removal of the obstruction as early as possible.
It shall be the duty of the Highway Authority to conduct annual check of the boundaries of the
Highways in its charge with a view to locating and removing encroachment, if any.

26.2.3. Maintenance of National Highways

Estimates for maintenance of National Highways shall necessarily give particulars of the
annual requirements under this head to the MoRTH, before the commencement of every financial year.
This shall be sent with full details of type of works and amount as prescribed by MORTH from time to
time.
The Ministry will sanction the maintenance based on the detailed estimate submitted by the
state NH wing. Normally fund shall be allotted for this head by the Ministry to the Divisions.
Executive Engineer will be permitted to carry out ordinary repair works subject to availability of
funds. Works under ordinary repairs will be carried out by Executive Engineers of NH wing by issuing
AS and TS as per their delegation of power.
On receipt of sanction from MoRTH, technical sanction by the officer of P.W.D. as per
delegation of powers and subject also to such individual items not exceeding the amount shall be
accorded for this purpose.

26.2.4. Maintenance of State Highways and Major District Roads

The work of maintenance on these roads may be broadly divided into the following heads-.-

377
 (a) Ordinary Repairs
(b) Renewal of Surface (periodic maintenance)
(c) Special repairs.
Maintenance of roads shall be as per section 3000 of Specification for Road and Bridge Works
Published by MoRTH. For specific treatment of surface distress, and other maintenance of bituminous
surface, the Manual for construction and supervision of Bituminous works by MoRTH and as per
relevant IRC publications shall be followed.

26.2.4.1. Ordinary Repairs

All items of routine maintenance except renewal of surface required for keeping the road
in good condition and which are of a repetitive nature shall be included under ordinary repairs.
The following are some of the main items normally included under this head:

CHAPTER - 26
(i) Filling up potholes and patchwork to black topped surface.
(ii) Thorough repairs including clearing of jungle growth, sectioning and forming of
berms, clearing side drains
(iii) Clearing of culvert and opening outlets.
(iv) Filling up erosions and removal of slips.
(v) Repairs to pitching, retaining walls, masonry works, culverts.
(vi) Painting Signboards, Kilometer stones, Hectometer stones, Guard stones, Boundary
stones, road markings etc.
(vii) Planting avenue trees and maintaining the same.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Maintenance of traffic signs and markings shall also be an inevitable component of
maintenance activity.
The patch work shall be measured by volumetric measurements of broken stones
collected for the work and paid for with necessary utilization certificate.
26.2.4.2. Renewal of surface:
This provides for resurfacing the road at regular intervals or when found necessary.
Normally the following periodicity may be adopted for renewals.
Concrete roads once in 10years or as
per
Bituminous Roads
Chipping carpet once in 3years
Standard
BM and AC once in 6years
Practice
If in any particular reach renewal has to be carried out earlier than the period mentioned
above the necessity shall be specifically brought to the notice of the Executive Engineer and his
sanction shall be obtained. A renewal coat shall be done after all the defects, like pothole,
undulations etc. has been rectified.
A road chart shall be maintained in the form given in Appendix 2600H for each important
road, which will give all data about the history of renewal of surfacing of different sections of
the road. This will be helpful in selecting the reaches requiring renewal or special attention.
The funds available under renewal shall not be utilized to upgrade the surface of the
road. All up- gradation shall be considered as original work.
The renewal of surface shall be done as per provisions in Section 3000 of Specification
for Road and Bridge Works published by worth

378
 26.2.4.3. Special Repairs
Special repairs are such items of repairs, reconstruction, or additional construction found
occasionally necessary to keep the road in good condition. These may be divided into Special
repairs to roads, such as construction or reconstruction of retaining walls, raising a portion of
the road, widening of pavements, maintenance of shaller, construction of drains etc.
a. Special repairs to culverts up to 6mts span, construction and maintenance of road
side drains these may include reconstruction as well as construction of new culverts
if found necessary.
b. Emergency works related to VVIP visit.
c. Repairs to flood damages/ damages due to snow clearances.
d. Repairs to frost damages and other natural calamities.
The nature of repairs consequent of floods, drought and other natural calamities may fall under
one or other of the above categories or may be a new type of work such as training of a river
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 26

course etc. Even when a flood damage work comes under the category of special repairs to roads
or to culverts, this is kept distinct from original repairs mentioned in (a) and (b) above since the
financing is from an allocation specially earmarked for this purpose.
Adequate signboards and road markings, not provided as per requirements, shall also be included
in special repairs.
Necessary provisions shall be made in the estimate for carrying out periodical maintenance
including clearing of drains, jungles, painting of sign boards, road markings and shaller maintenance
etc. during the defect and maintenance liability period.
For renewal coat, the defect and maintenance liability period shall be 3 years. All the periodical
maintenance including clearing of drains, jungles, and shaller maintenance etc. in the defect and
maintenance liability period shall be done by the contractor for the up keep of the road. After the
end of 3 years (defect and maintenance liability period), ordinary repairs (annual maintenance) shall
be done for next 2 years. After end of 5 years, surface renewal shall be done.

26.2.5. Schedule of Maintenance operations.

Maintenance of roads involves several operations some of which can be done during rainy season
and others which can be done only in dry weather. All bituminous works shall be carried out only
during dry weather. A timetable for the various operations in the different roads under each section
shall be drawn out and adhered to by the Assistant Engineer.

The table on the Schedule of maintenance operations given in Appendix 2600I may be
used as a guidance in preparing the timetable over a two year period.

379
Periodicity of Routine Maintenance Activities
N Name of item Frequency of operation in
o the year
.
1 Clearing of road side gutters Twice
.
2 Pothole filling (WBM & BT) Once
.
3 Filling up edges of asphalt surface of (i) Single lane
. excavating borrow pit. T. I*.0-1000 Twice
T.I. 1000-5000 Four
times

CHAPTER - 26
(ii) One and Half lane
T.I.0-1000 Once
T.I.1000-5000 Twice
T.1.Over5000 Four
times
(iii) Two lane
T.I.1000- Once
5000 Twice
T.I.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Over500
0
4 Dressing of berms Once
.
5 White washing/ Painting guard stones/ Twice
. Kilometer
Stones/Hectometer Stones, Boundary Stone,
Road markings
6 Fixing/ Painting disturbed caution Once
. board/Village name
board/ Traffic sign boards, etc
7. Refixing displaced guard stones/ Once
Kilometer
Stones/Hectometer Stones, Boundary Stones
8 White washing and numbering of trunks of Once
. trees
9 Cutting of branches of trees, etc. Once
.
1 Topping of W.B.M. blind age operation 18 times
0 including
. Picking of loose metal
I Maintenance of catch water drains Once
I
.
1 Clearance of C.D. works Twice
2
.
1 Clearing of wild seasonal growth on berms Twice
3

380
 .
1 White washing parapets of C.D. Works Once
4
.
1 Earthwork in berms, de-silting of drains, etc. As per actual requirement
5
.

*T.I. = Traffic Intensity

Supply and stacking of materials shall be done as per section 514 of specification of road and
bridgework by MoRTH
26.2.5.1. Important points to be attended to when carrying out maintenance operations
This includes thorough repairs, clearing jungle, clearing drains and culverts etc. The side drains
shall be cleared off all jungle growth and obstructions and graded so as to have proper slope. All
overhanging jungle growth, which may obstruct traffic or vision, shall be cut along with such
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 26

repairs. All unauthorized advertisement boards, banners and arches across and along
the roads shall be removed. In the case of masonry works, if any jungle growth is observed, the
same shall be rooted out. The site or work spot shall be cleared by the contractor after
construction by removing waste material like aggregate wastes, dust, timber woods, ashes etc
and disposed according to the environmental guide lines.

26.2.6. Maintenance of shoulder

This is an important part of maintenance activity and shall be done as per section 3003 of
MoRTH. Exposed earth berms above the level of road surface shall be restored to original profile
so as to facilitate easy access and drainage.
26.2.7. Painting and Maintenance of Traffic signs
Maintenance of traffic signs and road marking including painting of bridges and culverts parapet,
Kerbs/Devri stones, Kilometer stones, Hectometer stones, Boundary stones and guard stones are
part of maintenance activity. Road signs (other than enameled/ Reflective signs) shall be painted
legibly once a year. All these works shall be done as per the section 800 of MoRTH
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works.

26.2.8. Defects of Roads

The various defects on flexible pavements are cracks, potholes, bleeding, corrugations,
depression/settlement, disintegration, raveling, rutting shoving and upheaval. In semi rigid and
rigid pavements, usual defects are blowup, pumping, reflection racks, scaling and spalling. The
details of various defects are given in chapter 11 of IRC SP 20. The maintenance practices shall
conform to MORTH clause-3000 and the chapter of ―Manual for Construction and Supervision
of Bituminous Works‖.
26.3. Special types of pavement rectification courses 2603.1. Slurry Seal
Slurry seals are mixtures of fine aggregate, Portland cement filler, bitumen emulsion and
additional water. When freshly mixed, they have a thick consistency and can be spread to a
thickness of
1.5 - 5 mm. They may be used to seal cracks, arrest fretting and fill voids and minor depressions,
to provide a more even riding surface or a base for further treatment; they may also be used on
top of a single coat surface dressing.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and
opening to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 516.

381
26.3.2. Fog Spray
Fog spray is a very light application of low viscosity bitumen emulsion for purposes of
sealing cracks less than 3mm wide or incipient fretting or disintegration in an existing
bituminous surfacing, and to help reduce loosening of chips by traffic on newly finished surface
dressing.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and
opening to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 518.

26.3.3. Crack Prevention Course

This clause covers the provision of Stress Absorbing Membrane (SAM) and Stress
Absorbing Membrane Interlayer (SAMI) as measures to inhibit the propagation of cracks. A
SAM is an elastomeric bitumen rubber membrane, which is laid over a cracked road surface,
together with a covering of aggregate chips, in order to extend the life of the pavement before

CHAPTER - 26
major treatment is carried out. SAM can be laid as a single coat or a double coat. A SAMI is a
layer which is applied to a cracked pavement surface but which is followed (within 12 months)
by the application of an overlay course. A SAMI may be a material similar to that used for a
SAM. It may alternatively consist of a bitumen-impregnated geotextile.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and
opening to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 522.

26.4. Planting and Maintenance of avenue trees

Avenue trees shall be planted on road sides as per environmental guidelines in practice.
Planting shall be carried out in the early part of the rainy season so that the tree saplings can take

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

root and grow. Suitable guard fences shall be provided for a height of 1½ metres to protect the
young tree from cattle, until it reaches sufficient maturity.
Avenue trees shall be properly numbered, and a register of avenue trees maintained in
each sub- division vide form given in Appendix 2600J. The numbering shall be clearly made
after stripping the bark for an area not less than 15 cm. x 15 cm. at height 1.2 metres from ground
level and facing the road. The numbering shall be checked and re- numbered once in every five
years.

26.4.1. Auction of Usufructs

The usufructs of revenue yielding trees shall be properly disposed. The right of enjoying the
usufructs may be sold by auction or tender and the amount realised credited to P.W.D Revenue.
It shall be ensured through suitable conditions in the auction or tender notice that the person who
is enjoying the usufructs does not cause any injury or damage to the tree as such. This right may
be auctioned either for a year or for such longer period as the Executive Engineer thinks fit.
The Junior Engineer/ Supervisor under the control of sections of road shall keep a careful watch
of the avenue trees. If any unauthorised attempt to cut, damage or remove avenue trees is
observed he shall take immediate action to protect Government property and also concurrently
report to higher officers and lodge complaints with the police.
In the case of dead trees and decayed branches of trees, the Assistant. Executive Engineer in
whose jurisdiction the tree exists has the power to authorize cutting and removal of such dead
tree or branches. When a tree or branch is in a condition as to cause damage to the road or
adjoining property and the removal of such dangerous tree or branch is imminent, the Assistant
Engineer may order its removal in anticipation of approval of the Assistant Executive Engineer
after making a report to the Assistant Executive Engineer explaining the circumstances. In all
cases where a living tree has to be cut, sanction of the Executive Engineer shall be obtained.

382
 Branches of avenue trees shall have to be cut to maintain sight distances form Road safety point
of view. It may also happen that branches be cut for maintenance of or extension of electric lines,
telegraph lines or telephone lines. In the case of maintenance of existing lines, the authorities
under the control, can cut the obstructing branches in order to restore service quickly without
prior intimation to P.W.D. In the case of extension, the Executive Engineer under the control of
the concerned road shall be informed of the proposal by the authority concerned. Even here the
authority under the control may arrange the actual cutting of branches, after intimating the
Executive Engineer P.W.D. All branches, leaves etc. cut during such process shall however be
disposed by the P.W.D. For this purpose, the Overseer/ Supervisors shall arrange to collect the
branches etc., in suitable places and help in disposal as directed by the Junior Engineer/Assistant
Engineer. Roadside arboriculture could be a separate contract to the maintenance works.

26.5. Kilometer stones.

Kilometer stone and 5th Kilometer Stones as per type designs and colour scheme shall be
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 26

planted on all the roads as per IRC 8 and IRC 26 for 200-meter stones. They shall be placed
clear of the shallers of the road so as not to obstruct traffic but shall be in such a position as to
be quite visible. They shall be maintained clean and legible always. The provision of kilometer
stones and 200 meter stones, wherever absent, shall be taken up as part of renewal coating or
special repairs.

26.5.1. Boundary Stone

Standard boundary stones as per IRC: 25-1967are to be laid in both boundaries of the
road so as to identify encroachments if any in the P.W.D. land during inspection of the roads.
The boundary stone shall be the responsibility of the Junior Engineer Assistant Engineers and
wherever absent shall be brought to the notice of the higher officers and installed then and there
without waiting for any renewal work or special repairs.

26.6. Advertisement Board

In the case of National Highways advertisement boards shall not be erected without the
sanction of MoRTH.
For all other roads in the state, the authorities under the control of the road can permit display
of advertisement boards after collecting prescribed fees, which shall be remitted directly to State
Treasuries with proper application to concerned Executive Engineer. Any displays within the
right of way shall be permitted only by the Highway authority who is the Executive Engineer,
P.W.D, who while granting such permit, shall be careful to see that following are not allowed.
(a) At or within 100 metres of any road junction.

383
 (b) WheretheplantingofsuchboardsislikelytoobstructthevisionoftheDriver.
(c) At hairpin bends of curves, approaches of bridges.
(d) Near prestigious buildings, hospitals, educational institutions etc.
(e) Within 50 metres of any of the signboard erected.
(f) In such a manner as may obstruct the vision or distract the attention of the driver of a
vehicle on the road.
(g) To mar the aesthetic appearance of this background especially in localities which are
predominantly residential or where the national scenery is likely to be spoiled by such
display. National Building Code Part 10 Section 2 also provides the guidelines fordisplay
boards.
The highway authority may permit the display of advertisements in the typical formats on the
railings fences and bus bays built under private sector participation after levying the prescribed
fees/ rent, which shall be deposited to State Treasuries. This agreement shall be renewed
annually or a new agreement executed. The Highway Authority has the power to order removal
of all unauthorised display of advertisements and other encroachments.

CHAPTER - 26
26.7. Cutting roads/ overhead crossing
For any work involving the opening of the PWD roads, the road cutting protocol as per
Appendix 2600K shall be followed. It shall be unlawful for anyperson or authority or agency
intending to construct, place, maintain or carry any cable, wire, pipe, drain, sewer, channel of
any kind through, across, along, under, in or over any PWD road to make an excavation/
Crossing in or disturb the surface of any road to make an excavation/ Crossing in or disturb the
surface of any PWD road without written permission from the concern Authority, whose
decision shall be final and binding.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Application for permit for road cutting shall be submitted to the Concerned Authority
and after examining the urgency the concerned Authority shall issue the permit. Upon receipt
of the permit from the road Authority, the person or authority or agency intending to dig the road,
shall execute an agreement/Memorandum of Understanding, before taking up the work.

26.8. Encroachments
J&K Service rules empowers the officers of the department i.e. Executive Engineer and
his subordinate officers to take action for removal of encroachments with the help of district/
municipal and Police administration.

384
 Chapter 27

27.1. Maintenance of Bridges

27.1.1. General
Bridges are vital links in the highway network and if a bridge goes out of commission
for any reason, the resultant disruption of traffic seriously affects the capacity and efficiency of
the network. Highway structures, both old and new have to be maintained in a traffic-worthy
condition to facilitate uninterrupted flow of traffic. For this, regular and systematic inspection
of the structures shall be made by responsible officers to find out defects or deterioration of the
various parts and urgent action taken to remedy the defects.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 27

27.2. Maintenance of records of bridges

For recording maintenance of bridges, the respective Assistant Engineer shall maintain a
bridge register. These records in the form of registers for all the bridges under his charge shall
be kept updated. The report shall be submitted to the Division office and the Executive
Engineer shall forward the same along with his recommendation to the higher authorities.
However, for each bridge, there shall be two reports
i) Original bridge report
ii) Inspection report

27.3. Inspection
Periodical inspection shall be conducted for all bridges as per IRC guidelines. Weak
bridges shall be inspected more often according to necessity and appropriate steps shall be
taken to remedy defects if any noticed.
27.3.1. Routine inspection
This involves visual assessment using conventional standard tools to determine obvious
deficiencies in the bridge structure, which might lead to traffic accidents or cause high
maintenance and repairs cost, if not attended promptly. The frequency of routine inspection shall
be at least once a year but preferably twice a year before and after monsoon. However, bridges
located in high altitude terrain prone to effects of landslides and bridges in severe exposure
conditions shall be inspected twice a year, i.e. before and after monsoon. In general, the
designation of the inspecting officer may be as per table 2700.1, but the same can be altered
depending upon the importance of the work.

385
 Table 2700.1 Minimum Yearly Inspections by Engineers
Designation Type of Structure Test Check
Junior/Assistant All culverts and bridges of span less
Engineer than 30 m

Culverts inspected by Assistant Engineer

Assistant
All minor bridges of span less than 60m, especially those in a dangerous condition
Executive
Engineers causeways of like length

CHAPTER - 27
Executive All major bridges of span greater Bridges and culverts inspected by the
Engineers than 60 m and less than 200m subordinate officers especially all minor
bridges marked weak and dangerous.
Superintending Allbridgesofspangreaterthan200mand Above cases especially those marked as
Engineers all pre-stressed concrete, continuous weak and dangerous.
structures, suspension bridges, cable
Stayed bridges and special structures
Chief Bridges above 500m in length Any Bridges
Engineer

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The inspection reports shall be submitted to higher officers within 10 days from date
of inspection.
The following instructions may be followed as an aid to systematic inspection.

386
 27.3.2. Waterway:
Conditions in the stream bed shall be noted as to adequacy of channel afforded by the existing
structure, risk of scour that may endanger the foundation, presence of obstructions such as
drift, logs, undergrowth, stumps of old piers etc. that may be diverting the current so as to
cause undermining of the foundation and need for any bank protection to keep the channel
properly confined.

27.3.3. Foundation and Substructure:

(a) Timber and steel Piles: Piles supporting Timber Bridge shall be inspected carefully
at and below the ground line for any decay. A crow bar with one end sharpened to a long
tapering point and the other end provided with a chisel face is a very useful tool in such an
examination. It can be jabbed in to a pile to disclose deterioration not apparent on the surface
and to determine the extent of saprot. Piles in which the diameter of sound materials has been
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 27

reduced to 15 cm or less shall be marked for replacement. Sills, bottom of posts and mud sills
for trestle piers shall be similarly tested. Steel or CI tubular piers shall be carefully examined
for corrosion in rivet or bolt head connecting the cylinder sections. Examination shall also be
made to note whether there has been appreciable movement or sink age of the tubes due to
impact of heavy loads on the structure; if so additional footing sor bracings may be needed. If
the tubes are out of plumb, it shall be checked whether this is due to undermining or the lack
of proper bracing or inadequate support below.

(b) Concrete or masonry piers or Abutments-These shall be examined for damages if any
arising from impact of floating matter or undermining or cracks. Further, they shall be examined
whether they are plumb. If cracks exist, the cause shall be properly investigated so as to choose
appropriate remedial measures. In the case of masonry abutments any tendency of bulge shall he
particularly noted as this will indicate excessive lateral pressure. When any such defect is noticed,
corrective steps shall be taken to relieve suchpressure.

27.3.4. Superstructure:
Where flooring is provided as in culverts and small bridges, any upheaval or sink age in
the flooring shall also be carefully noted and corrected. Where the deck is of reinforced
or pre-stressed concrete, the examination shall cover the following:
(i) Expansion joints and bearing plates examined to ensure that they are functioningproperly
and that their lubricating arrangements are satisfactory.
(ii) Drainage facilities verified to see that there is no collection of water in any part of the
structure and that water is drained easily.
(iii) Roadway surface checked to see whether there is excessive scaling or unevenness.
(iv) The bottom and sides of girders of slabs checked to note whether there is any honeycomb
area exposing reinforcement and further whether any cracks appear on such parts.
(v) Kerbs /Devri Stones and handrails to be checked for any spalling and exposed
reinforcements. The inspection of Steel trusses shall include the following points.-
(i) General alignment of the span to see whether in the case of ―through Bridges ‗the end posts
and top chords are straight and in line. Any buckling would indicate that the structure has
been overloaded.
(ii) Whether any of the structural members is kinked or rusted or has in any other manner
suffered deterioration.
(iii) Where there is excessive deflection of any member.
(iv) Whether any of the rivets and bolts in important junctions has worked loose.
(v) Whether the conditions of end shoes and rollers are good. The examination of Timber

387
 Trusses shall cover the following: -
(i) Whether there is any noticeable sag. If sag is present, note whether it is due to failure of
splices. Improper adjustment of vertical rods or crushing or diagonal members.
(ii) The condition of the bearing and the caps over the pier piling.
(iii) Whether all bolts through splices packing blocks and cross bracing are tight and in good
order.
(iv) The condition of the stringers.
(v) The condition of the stringers as seen from the bottom particularly with regard to full bearing
on pier caps and indications if any, of crushing.
(vi) Examination of the deck and hand rails from roadway.
(vii) Whether all bolts in the deck are properly tightened or have become loose due to shrinkage of
the timber.
(viii) The condition of the underside of the decking.

CHAPTER - 27
27.3.5. Culverts: The waterway shall be examined whether it is obstructed by jungle growth, or
silting etc. In the case of pipe culverts, examine whether the pipes have gone out of alignment
either vertically or laterally and also whether any of the pipes has cracked The condition of the
headwalls shall also be noted particularly to see whether they are plumb and free from cracks.
To facilitate proper routine inspection reporting, a simple check-list as suggested in IRC:SP: 35
shall also be used.

27.3.6. Principal inspection

This is a more intensive and detailed inspection involving close examination of elements of
structure with a purpose to determine the nature and degree of distress in any component of a

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

bridge. It will primarily be close visual assessment supplemented by standard instrumented aids.
Detailed inspection of foundation shall also be included and may involve underwater inspection
wherever appropriate. The first principal inspection shall be conducted before the expiry of
defect liability period of contract but not later than 6 months after completion and opening of
the bridge to traffic. The frequency of principal inspection thereafter shall not be more than 3
years. This inspection shall be carried out by a senior level engineer against a comprehensive
check-list

Underwater inspection: Visual examination of the surface may be done after removing marine
growth like coral deposits, algae, etc. Detailed inspection for obtaining more information of
deteriorated areas shall be done after clearing the surface growth as to enable closer inspection.
Underwater inspection is a highly specialized activity and as such shall be be entrusted only to
competent agencies experienced in underwater inspection. Such agencies shall be carefully
briefed on the components to be inspected and the nature of defects to be inspected. Close circuit
television may be used where the water is reasonably clear. Where visibility is poor, portable
echo sounding equipment can be used to provide a reasonably accurate profile.

27.3.7. Special inspection

This shall be undertaken in the event of unusual occurrences such as strong earthquake,
accidents, passage of unusual loads or floods, heavy impact of barges or floating debris on
substructure and/or foundations, major weaknesses noticed during routine or principal
inspection, unusual settlement of foundations and substantial changes of traffic pattern. When
any bridge of similar design and constructed almost at the same time are showing some
distresses, all such bridges may be subjected to special inspections. Such inspections may require
a good deal of supplementary testing and structural analysis and will invariably require

388
388
 detailed involvement of design organizations and experts in the relevant fields, who shall be
senior level engineers.

27.3.8. Inspection procedure

The activities scheduled during the inspection of the bridge shall be planned in detail
including sequence of inspection. Where mobile bridge inspection unit is used, the inspection
shall be carefully planned beforehand so as to minimize the period of use of such equipments as
the hourly cost of use of such a unit is quite high and it obstructs one lane of traffic on the bridge.
The inspection shall follow a pre-determined pattern to ensure that no component is overlooked.
The inspection shall be undertaken in those periods of the year, which offer the most
critical evaluation of the performance of the structures as suggested below:

Items Time of inspection

(a) Foundations, protective works, During and after monsoons
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 27

scour effects,
maximum flood level, etc.
(b) High structures During and after season of high
velocity wind.
(c) Bearings and expansion joints During extreme seasons and after
floods.
(d) Bridges in hilly terrain Before and after monsoons.

27.3.9. Means of access

Appropriate means of access are a pre-requisite for all the three forms of inspection. For
every means of access, special emphasis shall be laid on safety, ease and convenience. Due
consideration shall be given at the design stage itself to the provision of proper means of access
taking into account individual requirements of the structure and its components such as type of
structure, topographical, local and climatic conditions of the bridge site, height, minimum water
level. The possible means of access can be of the followingtype:

(a) Built-in access

Manhole, Built-in ladders and Permanent catwalks.

(b) Semi-mobile access:

Access ladders, Catwalks, Platforms, Inspection pits, Planking & scaffolding, etc. and Semi-
stationery inspection equipment.

(c) Mobile equipment‘s:

Equipment operating under the bridge from river bed/water barges, Equipment operating from
the bridge deck and Mobile inspection unit.

27.3.9.1 Guidelines
Detailed guidelines for highway bridge inspection and maintenance are contained in the
following and the same should be invariably followed.
i) IRC SP 35 "Guidelines for Inspection and Maintenance of Bridges",
ii) IRC Special Publication No 18 "Manual for Highway Bridge Maintenance Inspection"
iii) IRC: 52-1998 "Bridge Inspection's Reference Manual".

389
389
27.3.9.1. Inspection Report
The inspection report shall be in the prescribed formats. Properly referenced sketches
or photographs shall be used to illustrate the defects and condition of the bridge. Free hand
sketches shall be made during the inspection at the site itself. The size and location of the
defects shall be dimensioned though the sketch itself need not be to scale. For taking
photographs, reference number of the bridge and the location of the defects may be written in
colour at the appropriate place on the bridge. Apart from reporting defects and deficiencies any
proposals or recommendations for strengthening and repairs of the affected components shall
also be included.

27.3.9.2. Follow-up action

The Junior Engineer/Assistant Engineer-in-charge shall immediately attend to minor
points or shortcomings noticed during inspection. However, in case of any important or major

CHAPTER - 27
shortcoming / distress noticed either during routine inspection or principal inspection, the matter
shall be reported to the senior level Engineer and the latter shall decide further line of action in
consultation with the Design Wing/ Consultants, if he considers it necessary and give detailed
instructions as to whether special inspection is called for.
If during the inspections any bridge is found to indicate distress of serious nature leading
to doubt about structural adequacy, the bridge will have to be evaluated for its load carrying
capacity.
If the assessment shows the bridge to be inadequate for the design loads, one or more of the
following actions shall be taken:
• The load on bridge shall be restricted to its assessed capacity. The condition of thebridge

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

shall be monitored by special inspection at intervals not exceeding 6months.
• The bridge shall be closed for all traffic where the rated capacity of the bridge is lower than
the lowest level of traffic load expected to ply on it.
• Replacement or strengthening of the bridge or its affected part shall be undertaken.

27.3.9.3. Remedial measures

The purpose of detailed inspection as outlined above is to find out whether damage or
deterioration has occurred in any part of the structure and if so to take appropriate remedial
measures. The inspection report of each bridge shall contain a specific remark as to the works
necessarily to be taken up based on the results of such inspection. These works shall have the
highest priority regarding maintenance of bridges. In addition to such special works, certain
works of a routine nature shall invariably be carried out in respect of bridges and culverts. These
are:-
(i) Keeping the water clear.
(ii) Where there is any growth of vegetation, shrub, etc. in the masonry or concrete part
of the structure, the removal of such vegetation and steps to prevent such growth.
(iii) Wherever bearings are provided the greasing or oiling of such bearings.
(iv) Periodical painting of steel and cast iron structures of parts of bridges. Normally
painting shall be done once every year unless special circumstances warrant changing
the periodicity.
(v) Wherever scours are noted, filling up the scours with stones of suitable size in such a
manner as is found best suited to circumstances.
(vi) Wherever cracks, spalling of concrete, disintegration etc. are noted in wearing coat,
drainage spouts, hand rails, footpaths and construction joints shall berectified.
(vii) Corrosion of reinforcement shall be attended.
(viii) Wherever scours are noted, filling up the scours with stones of suitable size may be
placed in such cases.
(ix) Missing and broken footpath slab shall be replaced immediately.

390
390
 27.4. Repair and Rehabilitation of Bridges
All bridges are to be kept in good condition and their rehabilitation and strengthening
needs shall be attended to as and when they arise. It is now well recognized that bridges not only
require systematic maintenance but also strengthening or rehabilitation during their service life.
IRC: SP-40 "Guidelines on Techniques for Strengthening and Rehabilitation of Bridges"
provides guidance on basic approach to repair and rehabilitation, identification, assessment and
diagnosis of distress, repair materials and repair and strengthening techniques to be adopted in
respect of concrete bridges. These guidelines may be followed while undertaking rehabilitation
or strengthening of concrete bridges.

27.4.1. 1 Steps Involved in Repair and Rehabilitation

Various steps involved in arriving at an appropriate solution to the problem of a distressed
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 27

bridge and implementation of remedial measures can be broadly identified as:

i) Identify signs of distress and need for rehabilitation through routine inspection and study
of construction drawings.
ii) Carrying out special inspection by expert team.
iii) Investigation of type and extent of distress and the causes thereof based on in-situ and
laboratory tests.
iv) Analysis of investigation data supplemented by structural analysis and formulation of
detailed plans for repair or strengthening.
v) Implementation of repair or strengthening measures.
vi) Documentation of repair works done.
vii) Evaluation and monitoring of rehabilitation measures.

27.4.1.2. Repair materials

Selection of a repair material must be based on an evaluation of damage, characteristics
of the repair material and local conditions. Repair material must be compatible with the concrete
being repaired. The selection of material depends on many factors such as physical and chemical
properties, mechanical response, long-term durability, cost and record of field performance.

27.4.1.3. Techniques of repair and strengthening

Repair and remedial measures vary according to the location, form and severity of distress
of deterioration. These may range from protective coatings or patch repairs in the case of mild
deterioration to reconstruction or replacement of key elements in the case of severe distress.
Different repairs and strengthening techniques have been described in IRC: SP-40. Some
commonly used techniques of repair and strengthening of distressed concrete bridges are as
follows:
i. Patching and grouting: Patching is carried out for repair of deep and wide cracks and for
replacement of spalled concrete. Dry-pad mortar or conventional replacement mortar are
normally used for filling cavities and around rebars. For very large areas concrete may be
used. Cracks are also repaired by means of pressure grouting with epoxy resins for fine
cracks and Portland cement grout for larger cracks.
ii. Hydro demolition: Hydro demolition technique involves selective removal of damaged
concrete by means of one or more high speed water jets without using any abrasive. Hydro
demolition is unanimously accepted as the best process for concrete removal.
iii. Vacuum grouting: Vacuum grouting with epoxy resin or cement grout can be used for filling
up voids in cable ducts. The equipment used sucks the air out of the cavity and then via a
relay valve presses the injection material into the cavity.

391
 iv. Epoxy injection: Epoxy injection for sealing fine cracks as small as O.05mm shall be applied.
The epoxy is injected under pressure to penetrate the very fine and tortuous cracks that may
exist. Ensure good quality of epoxy resin, correct selection of equipment and experienced
operating personnel for the application.
v. External pre-stressing: External pre- stressing consists of adding cables placed externally
to the girders with new anchorages at suitable locations. It can be used to compensate the
loss of pre-stress in the cables and partly/ fully restore the bridge deck to its original
service ability level.
vi. As the external cables are fully exposed and do not have concrete cover, they shall be
encased in either a strong High Density Poly Ethylene (HDPE) tubing or rigid metallic pipe
protected against corrosion by special coating. Pressure grouting of external pre- stressing
cables after tensioning is essential. Special care shall be taken while drilling holes or cutting
recesses in the structure for fixing anchorage assemblies to ensure that the existing pre-

CHAPTER - 27
stressing tendons are not damaged.
vii. Epoxy bonded steel plates: Steel plates bonded to concrete surface with epoxy structural
adhesive can strengthen RCC members in flexure and shear.
viii. Full depth concrete overlay/deck slab replacement: Where deterioration of large areas of
concrete surface of bridge decks has occurred, it may not be possible to repair it by crack
repair or patching. In such cases, a full depth concrete overlay may be required. Similarly,
where the deck slab has become structurally weak due to loss of cross pre-tress or other
reasons, complete replacement of the deck slab may have to be resorted to. The overlays can
be of dense Portland cement concrete with special quick setting admixtures of latex modified
cement concrete. They shall be bonded structurally to the underlying old concrete and shall

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

match the underlying concrete in thermal properties. In all such cases of overlays or deck
replacement, the work can be carried out over half the width of the deck while permitting
traffic on the other half. Traffic management or restrictions may be required during the
course of the work.

27.4.2. Repairs to Masonry Structures

Existing masonry bridges are sometimes considered as historical landmarks and need
preservation. Strengthening and widening will, therefore, mean maintaining the same
appearance. Widening is usually not possible but strengthening can often be done. The general
defects and remedial measures for arch bridges in stone or brick masonry are as follows.

27.4.3. Loss of Bond for the Crown stone

Flat jacks have been successfully used for pushing the stone back to its original position.
Generally, low pressure cement grouting is done to strengthen the old mortar. The mortar is
sometimes replaced by epoxy mortar also, though epoxy is not ideal.

27.4.4. Longitudinal cracks along the direction of traffic

Rake mortar joints and refill with cement mortar. However, it must be mentioned that
the depth of penetration is important, as usually it is not possible to suspend traffic. The portion
of earth fill shall be removed to ensure that penetration is limited to masonry only. Fine cement
grouting (injection) shall be adopted for remedial measures.
27.4.5. Transverse cracks
Injection of cement will provide a good bond between stones and brick masonry
27.4.6. Strengthening of arch rings
The arch ring can be strengthened in two ways - by adding material to the - intrados or
to the extrados. Adding to the intrados causes the least disturbance but is more difficult to
complete successfully. Also it results in a reduction in head room or clearance, which his often

392
392
 restricted, and will, in most cases be the cause of new damage to the intrados as experienced on
many bridges even where the headroom/clearance satisfies legal limits. Extra material may be
placed by shuttering and pumping concrete (which is difficult to compact at the crown) or by
fixing a mesh to the intrados and spraying concrete. In both cases, any shrinkage of the new
concrete will tend to make the old and the new material separate radically. Also these impervious
rings prevent natural drainage between the stones or brickwork of the arch so that special
provision must be made to deal with water or under severe climatic conditions. Sprayed-on
concrete will in any case change the appearance of an arch constructed of stone, brick or a
combination of the two.
A more effective, but at times a more expensive, treatment is to remove the fill and cast
the extra required thickness on the extrados of the arch. Usually, a full ring is cast but
occasionally only the end quarters are strengthened to act as cantilevers and reduce the effective
span of the arch. Normal concrete placing techniques are satisfactory. Replacement backfill may
be with normal or lightweight concrete. The latter will reduce dead load on the foundations but
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 27

may also reduce the factor of safety for stability of thesubstructure.

Another expedient which is satisfactory where the increase in load carrying capacity is
relatively small, especially for small span bridges is to cast slab at road level to act as an auxiliary
deck which spreads the wheel loads.
For cracks in arches, grouting with cement, at pressure 4 to 6 kg/sq.cm is sometimes quite
effective, through care shall be taken to see that pressure will not damage the surrounding
masonry.

27.5. Repairs to Steel Structures

27.5.1. Deck replacement of older steel bridges

Many of the old bridges (usually truss or arch bridges) have either warped steel plates
with a bituminous surfacing or a concrete deck. Due to insufficient waterproofing, the steel
plates are often corroded. Bridge decks can be replaced by new concrete decks or by new
orthotropic steel decks. Usually, when a reduction in dead load or additional widening (adding
cycle or pedestrian lanes) is necessary, replacement by an orthotropic steel deck is preferred.
Bolting is the preferred method of connecting the new deck system to existing structural
members

27.5.2. Strengthening of structural members

Strengthening usually involves more conventional techniques such as installing new
diaphragms to existing double compression members (increasing buckling strength)
strengthening or replacement of diagonals. Plate girders may be strengthened by external pre-
stressing cables, anchored and fixed on the web in the required parabolic curvature acting in a
similar way as in pre-stressed concrete. Strengthening is sometimes concerned with compression
failure and has involved the addition of stiffeners to flanges, webs, and diaphragms.

275.3. Repair of cracks

Crack repair methods depend on the root cause of crack initiation. The structure and
especially those components, which influence the overall safety of the structure, shall be
analyzed. Action to be taken when a crack is detected or suspected in welded steel bridge girders.
Repairs can be made by techniques such as drilling holes at the crack tip (this shall only be done
in less sensitive locations), cutting out the cracked material and bolting plates in place, cutting
out the crack and re-welding with a higher class weld (e.g. increasing the size and penetration of
a fillet weld) strengthening the connection by introducing stiffening and by

393
changing the structural action so that loads are supported in a way that prevents high stress
range from developing.

27.5.4. Underwater welding

Arc welding has become an accepted procedure in underwater construction, salvage
and repair operation.

27.5.5. Use of steel arch superposition scheme

This can be used to strengthen old truss bridges. The strengthening scheme consists of
superimposed arches, hangars and additional floor beams.

CHAPTER - 27
27.5.6. Excessive vibrations
Suitable structural alterations and increased damping for which a specialist in dynamic
behavior of structures may have to be consulted can overcome these.

27.6. Monitoring
After the rehabilitation/strengthening of the structure is completed, it is essential that the
bridge structure is kept under observation and its condition monitored regularly so as to ascertain
its performance and the efficacy of the measures adopted. The monitoring may involve
inspections at more frequent intervals, carrying out of certain laboratory and field-tests as well

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

as condition surveys and measurements to detect even small strains, movements, changes in
deformation etc.

394
 Chapter 28
28.1. MAINTENANCE OF BUILDINGS

28.1.1 General
All Government buildings are to be maintained properly. As a matter of convenience, heads
of various departments of the State are authorized to arrange and carry out maintenance works
of buildings under their administrative control provided the annual maintenance cost of any
building or group of building in one campus does not exceed the estimate does not exceed 10%
of the capital cost of building. This shall be intimated to the PWD. In addition, departments
other than P.W.D, which are having engineering wings under them such as Rural Engineering
Department, are allowed to carry out maintenance works of all the buildings under their
administrative control. Quasi Government Organizations and local bodies and Government
owned corporations attend to maintenance of their buildings even if the buildings were originally
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 28

put up at Government cost. Subject to these and other exceptions ordered by Government from
time to time, the P.W. D. has the responsibility to maintain all Government buildings.
Maintenance includes white washing, coloring, painting, repairs to doors, windows, roofs,
sanitary & water supply fittings, structural repairs, internal roads, fencing, compound walls etc.,
However, expenditure towards day to day cleaning, sweeping, watch & ward, gardening,
payment of rent, water and electricity charges, taxes & tariffs etc. shall be borne by the user
department.

28.1.1.1. Layout Plans & Building Plans

The Assistant Engineer, in-charge of the section is to maintain correct layout plans of
the area with position of roads, buildings, gardens, water supply, electric O/H lines, sewer & w/s
lines etc.
Similarly, the detailed building plan of the individual building showing plan elevation & section
shall also be maintained for record & reference purpose. For any new work in an existing
building, as built drawings shall be furnished along with the proposal.

28.1.1.2. Protection of Govt. Property

All the properties in-charge of the department like buildings, lands, parks, gardens, grounds
etc. are required to be protected from unauthorized encroachments, unauthorized construction,
use etc.

29.1.1.3. Register of buildings

This is a very important register to be maintained in each Buildings Division of the
P.W.D showing therein inventory of all the buildings under its charge, constructed, purchased
or acquired by the Govt. irrespective of the manner in which the Govt. funds are allotted for such
procurement. It shows year of construction, cost, use of building, occupant, maintenance cost
etc. The number allotted to such buildings in the Register of buildings is displayed prominently
in front face on each building. All government buildings shall have a name display board and
list of all offices housed there in.
Whenever a new building is completed, the maintenance of which is to be attended by
the Building Division, details regarding the building shall be added to the register. Disposal of
any building or part by dismantling or sale shall be recorded in the building register. Transfer
of control of any building or part of the building from other Divisions or Departments etc.
shall be incorporated in the Building Register. Alterations or additions of substantial nature in
such buildings shall also be noted. Similarly, if the extent of land surrounding a building is

395
increased or decreased by acquisition, transfer or otherwise, the fact shall be noted in the
register. The intention is that the register shall give full and up-to-date information about the
buildings under the maintenance charge of every building division. Possession
Certificate showing property rights of the land /building shall be obtained from concerned
authorities and maintained in proper order.

28.1.1.3.1. Inventory in the Buildings

An inventory of all the fixtures in each building viz. electrical fixtures, like fans, lights,
geysers, Air-conditioner or Civil fixtures like mirrors, basins, taps, flushing cisterns etc. and
furniture if provided shall be maintained building wise. In case of non-residential buildings such
inventory of fixtures is to be got signed from the representative of the user department, at the
time of first occupation. Thereafter the user department is responsible for their safety. In case of
residential buildings, the inventory is to be got signed from each new occupant and checked by
the Assistant Engineer concerned when the residence is being vacated. Any shortfall is to be
made good by the occupant.

CHAPTER - 28
28.2. Maintenance of Government Buildings
DesignatedPWDCivilEngineersandElectricalEngineersunderthecontrolofeachGovernent
building shall be responsible for its upkeep and maintenance. All maintenance and construction
shall be done under their supervision and direction. Other quasi government agencies or private
agencies shall not carry out any modification, minor or major works in such government
buildings.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

28.1. Fixing of maintenance grant
Each building or group of buildings in one campus forming one administrative unit shall
have an annual maintenance grant fixed by the Chief Engineer. This grant is intended to meet
the, cost of ordinary repairs such as petty repairs to walls floors, doors and windows, roof etc.,
white washing, painting etc. which are of a recurring nature. This grant shall be fixed on the
basis of a standard estimate for its ordinary repairs. Annual cost shall include proportionate
amounts for items like painting. The grant also includes cost of maintenance of water supply,
sanitary installations and electric installations.
Divisional Officers will program the works in the Divisions suitably under the various
sub heads of account and forward them to the Chief Engineer at an appropriate time every year
for incorporating in the budget for the coming financial year. Total budget provision is allotted
by Chief Engineer amongst the divisions under the different sub heads in April of every year
and the Divisional Officers shall plan their programs within the funds so allotted.
Maintenance of buildings shall be taken up-as soon as the winter is over and all items
according to the sanctioned estimate carried out. If changes are required in the approved estimate
for any reason it shall be effected before according sanction to the estimate. On no account shall
the limits set out for carrying out the repairs exceeded.
The fixing of grant for ordinary repairs subject to the conditions laid down above shall
be approved by the Chief Engineer, Buildings and recorded in the register for typical
maintenance estimate kept in that office. The approval and copy of sanctioned estimate shall be
forwarded to the Executive Engineer Building Division concerned for recording. In any
particular case where the grant of (say)2% will not meet the needs of the situation, sanction of
the Government shall be obtained for the fixation of the grant.
In some cases requiring expenditure by way of labour charges may have to be met from
the maintenance, as for instance, wages of staff appointed to look after rest houses, or staff for
operation of water supply scheme to colonies, cleaning of toilets and urinals in the office
complex etc. The amount required for such engagement of workers may be considered as over
and above the grant ceiling fixed for ordinary maintenance grant. The nature of workers to be
employed, the number and the grades of persons shall however be got

396
 sanctioned by Government as per rules in force.
In the case of certain classes of buildings like Tourist Bungalows, Rest Houses etc. Linen
curtains, crockery etc. originally provided at Government cost and responsibility for renewal is
with the P.W. D, shall be dealt with as part of special repair. The cost on account of these need
not be included as part of the ordinary maintenance grant of the concerned building. In all other
cases such charges shall not be incurred by the P.W.D. except under special orders of
Government
The grant fixed for ordinary repairs for every building shall be revised once in every five
years or as often as found necessary. In all cases where the existing grant is altered, the alteration
shall be on the basis of the standard estimate and the then current schedule of rates. The ceiling
of grant of capital cost will not apply in such cases. Revisions shall also be noted in the typical
maintenance register.
Maintenance grant do not include expenditure. Like –
a) Municipal taxes,
b) Service charges,
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 28

c) Water charges,
d) Telephone,
e) Electricity,
f) Internal roads etc.

28.2.2. Periodicity of certain items of ordinary repairs

White washing in Government buildings shall be carried out once every year. One coat
will normally suffice.
Distemper washing when provided shall normally be carried out once every two years.
Here also one coat will suffice. However, in buildings where distemper washing is badly soiled,
the bottom portion of the wall for a height of 2 meters may be distempered with one coat even
in years when the full distempering is not done.
Water proof colored cement washing like snow cem etc. need be redone only once in 2
years. The renewal need be of only one coat. If fungus or moss growth is observed here and
there, such portions may be cleaned and touched up with the waterproof cement wash of the
same color (snow cem etc.). Ordinary cement washing wherever provided may be redone every
year.
Painting of walls, woodwork and doors and windows is to be normally redone once every
two years. As an exception to the above painting of walls etc. in the case of laboratories,
hospitals, such other buildings as are considered by the Executive Engineer to require special
treatment may be carried out once every year. One coat of paint will do in all cases except where
the old paint has peeled of or has shown blisters. In such cases the old paint has to be completely
scraped and two coats of new paint applied.
Painting of iron work including fittings and fastenings in doors, windows etc. shall be
redone once every year with one coat. Where the existing paint is damaged and rust or corrosion
is seen, the particular area shall be thoroughly cleaned of all old paint and two coats of paint one
base coat and one final coat shall be applied.
Galvanized iron work as in pipes, or G.I. sheets etc. need not be painted for the first 2
years. Thereafter because of gradual wearing out due to abrasion etc., the protection afforded by
galvanization gradually wears out and hence after the first two years such items may also be
included along with iron work for painting purposes.Varnishing and wood oiling are to be redone
once in two years with one coat wherever there are Shingled roofs, re-Shingling shall be done
normally once in two years with using old and new Shingles and slate stones.
In case of prestigious buildings declared as such by the Chief Engineer, the Chief
Engineer concerned will issue special instructions regarding periodicity and items of

397
maintenance work to be carried out.

28.2.3. Special repairs

These refer to repairs which are not periodic or frequent e.g.-rebuilding of a damaged
wall, re- roofing a building, renewal of flooring etc. Although funds for such special repairs are
allotted from the grant under maintenance, such works shall be treated generally as original
works and shall be arranged only after the estimate is sanctioned and funds are specifically
allotted for the purpose. In other words, special repairs shall not be started anticipating sanction
to estimate and funds except in emergent cases when certain works may have to be carried out
in the interest of safety of life and or property. Officers sanctioning special repairs estimates
must take care to see-
The estimates shall be prepared and sanctioned as per book of financial powers.

(a) That the standards prescribed for the class of buildings are not increased.

CHAPTER - 28
(b) That the estimate does not include items which shall be provided by the occupant or
occupying department
(c) That the works include major repairs, which strengthens the building, prolongs, its life,
improves its hygienic condition & safety of the building.

28.3. Responsibility of the occupant or occupying department

It is the responsibility of the occupant or occupying department to attend to the following
works in regard to the building and premises under its occupation.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

i. Sweep and keep the building and premises clean.
ii. Remove cobwebs and white ants as and when they are detected.
iii. Remove rubbish and silt from drains and grit chambers if any, and keep them clean.
iv. Keep the sanitary fittings cleaned up.
v. Replace electric bulbs and tube lights when they get fused, cleaning electrical
installations like fans, tubes, air-conditioner and inverters and filling distilled water in
batteries, radiator coolant and toping up of diesel to generators.
vi. Arrange watch and ward.
vii. Arrange lease of usufructs of trees in the premises and dispose decayed, dangerous or
unwanted trees (applicable only to occupying departments).
viii. Maintain garden, if any.
ix. Maintain furniture.
x. Keep overhead tanks, if any, cleaned up periodically.
xi. See that the structure is not damaged in any way, as for instance by heavy furniture
being dragged on the floor.
xii. Deal direct with the electric supply authorities in regard to payment of bills, and in regard
to complaints regarding service.
xiii. Deal direct with the authority controlling the public water supply system supplying water
to the building in regard to payment for water charges and complaints regarding service.
xiv. Deal direct with the authority controlling the public sewerage system serving the
building, regarding payment of bills and complaints regarding service.
xv. Deal direct with the Local Bodies regarding payment of property tax.
xvi. Request the Public Works Department for any maintenance/additional works
xvii. Deal directly with concerned authorities for payment of telephone and internet charges.
xviii. Deal directly with concerned authorities for payment of land tax, other leviesetc.

Further, the occupant or occupying department shall not make any structural alterations or
put up additional structures, or dismantle any portion of the building. Such construction work,
if required shall be done by the Building wing of PWD, who is responsible for the safety and
maintenance of the building. The Electrical wing of PWD shall attend to any alterations to

398
 the electric circuits.
In case any damage in the structure or the internal electrification or water supply or sanitary
installation is noticed the same shall forthwith be intimated by the occupant or occupying
departments to the concerned PWD officers for necessary action. On receipt of any such
complaint it is the responsibility of the P.W.D. officers concerned to arrange to inspect the
building and rectify the damage as early as possible. If such rectification is likely to take time
the fact shall be intimated to the occupant or occupying department and where possible,
necessary temporary arrangements may be made to enable the building being occupied and put
to use before permanent rectification is done. Such temporary arrangements shall be treated as
special repairs.

28.4. Inspection
It is essential that buildings under the maintenance of the P.W.D. are periodically inspected
so that damage, if any noted, is attended to then and there and not allowed to cause deterioration
of the structure. The Assistant Engineer shall inspect all the buildings (whose maintenance is
under his/her charge).
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 28

a. At least once before preparation of estimate for annual repairs.

b. As often as is necessary for quality control during the execution of repairwork.
c. As often as is necessary for measurements and for accompanying superior officer for
check measurement.
d. When the occupying department points out damage if any.
The Assistant Executive Engineer shall inspect all buildings under his maintenance charge
as often as possible for quality control of maintenance works and for check measurement.
The Executive Engineer shall inspect once every year all the major buildings under his
maintenance charge where the annual maintenance grant is over and above the TS powers of
Assistant Executive Engineer. He shall also inspect once in a year at least 50% of the other
buildings under his charge.
Inspections shall be purposeful. Attention shall be particularly directed to the following: -
i.Whether any wall is cracked or is bulged or is thrown out of plump.
ii.Whetherdoorsandwindowscloseandopenproperlyandhavealltheirfasteningsandfittings.
iii. Whether the drainage from the bathroom is satisfactory.
iv. Whether the general drainage is satisfactory.
v. Whether there is any subsidence or crack in floor.
vi. Whether there is seepage of water and consequent damages in walls andfloors.
vii. Whether the compound wall and fencing, gate etc. are in good condition.
viii. Whether woodwork particularly in doors show signs of decay orrot.
ix. Whether there are leakages.
x. Whether the floors of open terraces are properly slopped towards outlets and whether
the down water pipes are intact and clear.
xi. Whether the valley sheets are in good condition.
xii. Whether the yard is clear of jungle growth and unwanted vegetation
xiii. Whether any vegetation growth observed on walls or roofs.
xiv. Whether the sanitary installation is satisfactory.
xv. Whether water supply installation is satisfactory.
xvi. Whether the electrical installations such as lifts, air conditioners etc. arefunctioning
satisfactorily
Note: The examination of the electrical installation shall he got done by the concerned
officers of Electrical Wing of the P.W.D.

399
28.1. Maintenance of Heritage Structures
Buildings maintained by PWD also include many heritage structures of prestigious nature.
While attending to repairs of such buildings it shall be ensured that the original characteristics
and aesthetics of these structures are preserved.

28.4.2. Repairs of Emergency nature

Certain items of repairs of emergency nature such as dampness, leakages in roofs and walls,
water percolation through water supply and sanitary installations, damaged stairways etc. shall
be attended to immediately by the concerned Assistant Engineer under intimation to the
immediate superior officers.

CHAPTER - 28
28.4.3. Cracks in Buildings
Cracks if any noticed in any part of the building needs to be investigated thoroughly and
cause ascertained before taking remedial measures.

28.4.4. Calendar for Maintenance of buildings

The work of maintenance of building shall be so programmed as to cause least
inconvenience to the occupants. As far as possible, special repair, if any, shall be carried out
along with ordinary repairs. Work shall be started only after all the requisite materials are
available and completed within the shortest time possible. Suitable penalties shall be prescribed

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

for delays in executing contract agreements and completion for maintenance works.
In the case of vacation departments like Schools, Colleges, Courts etc., the maintenance
works shall be carried out during the vacation period (avoiding ―Chilai kalaan‖ if possible)
unless such vacation period happens to be the other season.
In the case of buildings other than those of vacation departments and buildings of such
departments as have the vacation in chilay kalan period; the maintenance work shall be done
avoiding chilay kalaan if possible.
For buildings whose maintenance work has to be carried out between April and May,
tenders shall be invited and finalized even before the commencement of the new financial year
so that work can be started as early as possible in April.
Tenders for the maintenance of other buildings shall be invited and finalized well before
December every year.
Since the buildings will be under occupation, the actual period when maintenance works are to
be done shall be settled in consultation with the authorities of occupying department.

28.6. Arrangement of contracts for maintenance works

It is preferable to arrange contracts for maintenance works on the basis of percentage
rate contracts.
The quality of materials, paint etc. to be used in maintenance works shall be clearly
specified in the tender documents. This is because there is a wide range of quality of paints etc.
available in the market and it is essential that the quality of the material to be used shall be
understood by the tender. During execution the departmental subordinates shall ensure that the
proper quality of materials, paint etc. as provided in the contract has been used.
In all contracts for maintenance works there shall be a condition that the contractor shall
carry out the work without causing hindrance or disturbance to the occupants of the building. If
during the course of the work, the floor or walls or other portions of the structure

400
 under use are spoiled by debris, spots of paint, whitewash etc. such portions shall be cleaned up
then and there without waiting for the whole work to be completed. This is in addition to the
contractor's responsibility for removal of debris on completion of work.

28.6.1. Use of standard measurement

It is very desirable that standard measurement books containing detailed measurements
of various items of ordinary repair of major buildings are maintained as prescribed in Para
10.2.12 and 10.2.13 of the JK.P.W.A. Code. This will considerably lighten the work of
measurements of maintenance works year after year.

28.7. Rest Houses

The Assistant Engineer shall see that as far as possible the rest houses are not occupied without
valid reservations. Rules for the reservation, occupation, etc of travelers‘ bungalows, rest houses,
inspection bungalow, camp shed etc., under the control of PWD are given as Appendix 2900B
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 28

28.7.1. Inventory of Furniture, Crockery & Fixtures of Rest Houses

The Rest Houses requires both perishable, non perishable items & consumables for its
running. Therefore, purchases as per requirement shall be done and taken on record promptly.
Items get unserviceable in due course which shall be properly surveyed and survey report
prepared for further inspection and sanction from the competent authority. These materials shall
then be destroyed/ disposed and written off from the record as per procedure.

28.7.2. Proper upkeep & Cleanliness

The Rest Houses requires both perishable, non perishable items & consumables for its
running. Therefore, purchases as per requirement shall be done and taken on record promptly.
Items get unserviceable in due course which shall be properly surveyed and survey report
prepared for further inspection and sanction from the competent authority. These materials shall
then be destroyed/ disposed and written off from the record as per procedure.

28.7.3. Misuse of Rest Houses

The Assistant Engineer of the Building Section shall be responsible for the proper use of
Rest Houses. He shall avoid unauthorized occupation and use of Rest Houses. Holding meetings,
arranging lunches, marriage functions, ceremonies etc. in the R.H premises, shall not be allowed
without prior permission of the Executive Engineer of concern Division.

28.8. Allocation of Quarters

The Government employees can be allotted Government accommodation on availability.
The District Collector as per rules issues the allotment of the quarters other than PWD quarters.
The employer to whom quarter has been assigned shall execute an agreement with advance
payment equal to an amount of two months‘ rent. The copy of the agreement shall be
forwarded to the Executive Engineer under intimation to the Assistant Executive Engineer.
A full list of furniture, fittings and equipments like Electric items, Water supply fittings,
locks, keys, etc. of each residential building shall be maintained by the Junior engineer/Assistant
Engineer under the control of the maintenance of the building. When the

401
building is handed over for occupation, the occupant shall sign and acknowledge the various
items included in the inventory. When the occupant vacates the house he shall give prior
intimation to the Assistant Engineer and handover all the items in the inventory list as well as
any additional items subsequently fitted, in good condition. The occupant shall also produce
necessary no due certificates from the Jal Shakti Dept. etc. at the time of handing over the
quarters. The Assistant engineer shall intimate the vacancy of the quarters to the Executive
Engineer on the same day when the occupant handover the key.

28.9. Miscellaneous Provisions

28.9.1. General
All major public buildings and government quarters shall have provision for waste

CHAPTER - 28
disposal. Solid wastes shall be disposed in an incinerator. Non-biodegradable waste materials
shall be, segregated and suitably disposed.
Public buildings shall be provided with sufficient urinals and latrines, as per norms and
shall be properly maintained. Their location must be clearly exhibited with name boards.
Electrical installations such as lifts, escalators, AC etc. shall be periodically inspected
and maintenance arranged as per specification of the manufacturer. Backup electric power shall
be provided for such installations with staff posted for operation.

28.9.2. Furniture

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The responsibility for providing furniture in any public building shall be that of the
occupying department. In the case of Rest Houses and Tourist Bungalows under the Control of
P.W.D., the supply of furniture cutlery, crockery, linen etc., shall be provided by the P.W.D. and
the same shall be charged to the estimate for the construction of the building.

28.9.3. Fire Fighting Systems

The occupying department shall render all assistance for renewals and repairs of the
firefighting system, if any, if sought from the Fire Force Department.

28.9.4. Advertisement/ Display boards

All display boards in government property shall comply with the provisions of part 10
section 2 of National Building Code. All advertisement/ display boards utilizing
Government/PWD building, land and compound wall shall require permit from the concerned
Executive Engineer, buildings, which shall collect the prescribed fees and remit it directly to the
treasuries/. This amount shall be released for any maintenance works on request of concerned
Executive Engineer.

28.9.5. Fixing of Rent for Building

When government buildings are not available it may be necessary to hire private
buildings for government purpose. The officers of the administrative department will locate
suitable buildings, get the consent from the owner and furnish a copy of same along with a
certificate that no other private building at a lesser rate of rent is available shall be forwarded to
the Assistant Executive Engineer, Buildings, Sub Division of the locality. The Assistant
Executive Engineer will then issue a certificate that no government building in his charge is
available in the locality for the purpose. The administrative department will then decide to take
the building on rent.

402
 The Executive Engineer, Buildings Division will act as the Estate Officer of all
government buildings.
Once the building is decided to be taken on rent the head of the occupying office will
forward the following documents to the Assistant Engineer/ Assistant Executive Engineer
concern for fixing rent of the building.
1) Consent document in original with dated counter signature.
2) Land value certificate indicating the market value of land on the date of
occupation/proposed date occupation issued by the Thasildar.
3) Age certificate of the building issued by the local authority.
4) A list of officers and staff of the office with a note on special request of space if any..
5) The prescribed proforma duly filled up and signed.
The Assistant Engineer/ Assistant Executive Engineer is responsible for taking exact
measurements and working out rent as per the guidelines prescribed in the specific proforma.
The construction material, construction method etc. shall be properly verified on site and the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 28

rent worked-out The Assistant Engineer shall prepare the rent calculation on the basis of clause
28.9.5 and approve the same and issue rent certificate if the rent calculated is within his powers
of sanction and if not forward it to the superior officer to approve the rent calculation as per
delegation of powers.
The rent calculation and processing shall be completed within 20 days in the section office and
10 days in each higher office/ as per valuation schedule . The competent authority of the
occupying department, who shall get the administrative sanction from the competent authority
of their department and pay the rent from their funds, shall forward the rent certificate. On receipt
of the administrative sanction the concerned officer of the occupying department shall execute
a lease deed with the owner of the building and pay the rent to the parties from the date of
occupation or date of agreement whichever is earlier. The occupying department or the
occupant shall pay the electricity and water charges for the building during the period of
occupation. Once a building is occupied and rent fixed for the same, revision of rent will be
permissible only after the expiry of a period of 3 years from the date of agreement or date of
occupation whichever is earlier. Any revision of rent shall be made only on specific request
from the owner of the building and shall be effective only from the date mentioned above or from
the date of application for revision of rent whichever is later. Notwithstanding the above if any
alterations or additions are made to the rented building by the owner at the request of the
occupying department rent may be revised to allow for the above alteration or additions from
the date of completion of the same.
If the rent demanded by the owner is higher than the P.W.D. rate of rent the same has to be
treated as special rent. In case of special rent approval of the Government Rent Committee
constituted for this purpose shall be obtained before the administrative department passes orders.
Government will fix the procedure for this from time to time through technical circulars or
orders. If special rent is sanctioned the same shall be valid for five years and the owner can
demand revision only after this period. The lease deed shall be executed specifying this period

28.09.6. Rent Calculation

The capital cost of a building at current rates as per technical circular of the Chief
Engineer from time to time will be calculated and depreciated capital cost worked out at the rate
provided as detailed under clause 2810.2.1. The cost of actual land limited to 3 times of the
plinth area of the main building and 1½ times that of the outhouse will also be calculated at the
rate as per the land value certificate issued by the Thasildar. This will be added to the depreciated
cost of the building to arrive at the total capital cost. 6 % (six Percent) of the capital cost will be
taken as the annual rent. It shall be the responsibility of the owner to do the

403
maintenance work as also to pay the taxes due to the building and premises. The details of rent
calculation for partially occupied building etc., will be worked out based on the technical circular
issued by the Chief Engineer from time to time.

28.10. Valuation

28.10.1. Valuation of Building

First a detailed plan and specifications of the items of work in the structure shall be
prepared. It is likely that certain details like mortar proportions or quantity of steel used in R.
C. work cannot be found out by usual observation. In such cases assumption may be made that
the mortar or concrete of the type used contains the minimum proportion of cement material,
which will be required for the stability of the concerned portion of the structure. Similarly in

CHAPTER - 28
R.C. work, in the absence of any other data, the minimum of steel necessary for the particular
item may be assumed as having been used. With regard to foundations a few examination pits
shall be taken to find out dept. hand nature of foundations.

Statement showing plinth area rates to be adopted for valuation Of

structures/assessment of rent for various structures in Kashmir
Province with effect from 01-10-2018

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Category on Plinth area rates per Square feet
specification Single Double Three Four Five
Storeyed Storeyed Storeyed Storeyed Storeyed
1 2 3 4 5 6
A Rs.1893/- Rs.2922/- Rs.4024/- Rs.4915/- Rs.5756/-
B Rs.1673/- Rs.2509/- Rs.3445/- Rs.4285/- Rs.5123/-
C Rs.1440/- Rs. 2182/- Rs.2960/- RS-3625/- Rs.4399/-
D Rs.1263/- Rs. 1851/- Rs.2602/- Re.3315/- Rs.4028/-

For attic floor, an allowance equal to 30% (Thirty percent) of the difference of rates assessed
for the floor comprising Attic and the floor immediately under it may be allowed. However
Attic floor over 5th story shall not be accounted for.

Explanation for valuation of Attic (For example,03 storied with Attic) 30% of
(Assessment of Attic as 4th floor minus assessment of 3rd floor).

The allowance for services is approved as under-

1. Sanitary fittings @Rs.1.70 Lacs/point (Rupees One Lac Seventy Thousand per
point) (One sanitary point shall mean one W.0 with flushing cistern, one wash basin with
mirror, one bath / shower point, water storage tank, wafer supply system and disposal
system including septic tank and soakage pit).

For additional points having common disposal and water supply system @Rs.0.35
Lacs / point (Rupees Thirty Five Thousand per point) shall be accounted for.

404
 2. Extra water point @Rs.10,000/point (Rupees Ten Thousand per point) which shall
Include steel sink, Of 01 bib cock, 01 stop cock, 01 gully chamber & necessary fittings) (Not
applicable for toilet and bathrooms).

3. Electric fittings:-

I. Lighting point @ Rs.995/point (Rupees Nine Hundred and Ninety Five per point)
One Lighting point shall Ind. wiring for lighting points in 1.5 Sq.mm PVC insulated Copper
wire 8 2.5 Sq.mm PVC insulated multi-strand Copper wire for lighting Sub-mains, 6 Amp one
way switch, 2 mm thick PVC conduit I Channel with bends, Junction boxes etc, 6 Amp S Pole
MCB , 10 Amp DP MCB , 2 way DB for Housing MCB and Hylem Sheet with wooden box
accessed in wells with accessories.
II. Heating points @Rs.1900/Point (Rupees One Thousand Nine Hundred per point)
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 28

One Heating point shall incl. wiring for heating points in 2.5 Sq.mm PVC insulated Multl-
Strand Copper wire & 4 Sq.mm PVC insulated multi-strand Copper wire for heating Sub-
mains, 16 Amp switch socket combined, 2 mm thick PVC conduit / Channel with bends,
Junction boxes etc. 10 Amp S Pole MCB 2 way DB for Housing MCB and Hylem Sheet with
wooden box recessed in walls with accessories.

III. Fan points @Rs.3400/Point (Rupees Three Thousand and Four Hundred per
point) One Fan point shall include wiring for Lighting points in 1.5 Sq.mm PVC insulated
Multi-Strand Cooper wire, 1200 mm ceiling fan / 225 mm exhaust an with ceiling roses & PVC
Square block, 350 Watts electronic fan dimmer, 2 mm thick PVC conduit / Channel with
bends. Junction boxes etc. 6 Amp S Pole MCB . 10 Amp DP MCB , 2 way DB for Housing
MCB for lighting circuits and Hylem Sheet with wooden box recessed in walls with
accessories.

4. Extra for wardrobes / Almirahs made of Budloo planks / block boards having
paneled / (Flush shutters with teak wood / $(117117iC0 facing incl. all furnitures complete
shall be assessed as under:-

Block
Board Budloo board
a) In built Almirahs 9"
deep Rs.398/Sft Rs.462/Sft
b) in built
wardrobes 24" deep
Rs.513/Sft Rs.602/Sft
5.Extra for Marble store flooring @Rs.130/Sft
6.Extra for Marble chips flooring @.48/Sft
7.Extra for Kota stone flooring @Rs.87/Sft
8.Extra for Vitrified tile flooring @Rs.108/Sft
9.Extra for Ceramic galazed tiles @Rs.82/Sft
10. Extra for Mild steel grills for windows @Rs.80/Kg
11. Miscellaneous items not covered under this schedule shall be loaded as per
prevailing market rates.

405
The rates are applicable for the base year 2018 and for successive years rates be
determined on the basis of yearly appreciation as per All India whole sale price index
which shell be issued by this office on yearly basis.

Statement showing the approximate break up of various components of buildings (for

approximate valuation purposes only).
S.No. Category of Percentage of total cost of building
specification Single Double Three of Five
storeyed storeyed Storeyed building storeyed
Four

CHAPTER - 28
storeyed
1. Foundation and 10% 9% 8.75% 8.50% 8.00%
underground work
2. Plinth 6% 4% 3% 3.% 2.%
3. Superstructure 15% 21% 25% 27% 29%
(Brick / stone work
only).
4. Doors & Windows 13% 16.75% 18% 19% 20%
(Frames and _

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

shutters complete)
5. RC.C Slab Nil 9% 13% 16% 18%
6. Flooring (Cement 7% 6% 5% 4.0% 3%
concrete / limber /
tile)
7. Ceiling 10% 6.50.% 4.75% 3.5.% 2.%
8. Roofirg 33% 21% 15% 12% 10%
9. Finishing
External: 1.5% 1.75% 2% 2% 2.25%
Internal: 4.5% 5% 5.5% 5.5% 5.75%

406
 CATEGORY "A‘ CATEGORY
CATEGORY "B‖ CATEGORY "C‖ "D‖
Maas concrete / Random rubble
Random rubbe1 Random rubble /pot/penal stone
polygonal Stone /pot/penal stone meson/yin Random rubble
masonry In cement mason/yin swear are swear ere stone masonry
Foundation
over ROC strip / mortar over mortar over dry or In mud
cement conc. bed cement/lime concrete cement/lime mortar.
block or RCC Bed Block. concrete Bed
footing Block.
Mass concrete / R Polygons? /
Random rubble
class random rubble Polygons / Coursed Ceased I Random
atone masonry
/ polygonal/ /Random rubble stone rubble stone
In mud mortar
Plinth Conned stone masonry in cement masonry in cement
with brick bond
masonry in concrete /lime with face dressed /time mlh face
or Devdar wood
With lace dressed stones end DPC dressed stones
Dasa
stones and DPC end DPC
CHAPTER - 28

1" class brick

Brick work in
masonry in cement
nd mud mortar
havI73 lace or 2 class block
partly with
machine cut / masonry in cement
mud bricks
special 1.1 class /lime mortar with
and partly
bricks with RCC/ 2nd class brick masonry RB inlets/ Arches
sundried bricks
RB lintels /Arches n cement /lime mortar OR)
with limber
(OR) with RB inlets/ Arches 131 class( Polygonal
lintels
Sper structure 1st class polygons'/ R) 131 class( Polygonal atone work in
OR
tendon) rubble atone work in cement cement /hire RCC
Random rubble
stone work in /hire RCC lintle / book liltle/ book
stone work an
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

cement having face Arches /comers / Jambs Arches /comers /

mud mortar Will
dressed stones whit Jambs
pucca brick
Arches/ ROC
jambs /corner
Inlets
and timber
lintels.

A Class deodar wood

frames, Kail wood ‗B' Class deodar ‗C‘ Class Kail
peneled / glazed "B' Class deodar wood wood frames, Kail wood hams
shutters & wire frames, Kail wood wood paneled/ and paneled/
Doors & Windows
gauze shutters or paneled/ gazed shutters gazed shutters & glazed/
metallic doom and & Wilt gauze shutters Wilt gauze Battened' Wire
windows with meta, shutters gauze shutters
Frames
Plank floor over
Cement concrete floors Kail wood joists /
Cement concrete floors over Cement concrete floors
deodar/ T&G/ plaink mud floor/ earthen
Floors RCC Slab /A class deodar over RCC Slab / deoder
floor over kail wood tile/ mud Puska
wood flooring. wood T&G
joints. over wooden
flooring.
Rebated wooden caging
TG Khutembandi Ceiling
/particle boards over Overlapped / Country type
Ceiling over Budloo wood frame
Budloo wood frame Plywood/Chufti ceiling
work/ RCC slab
wonV RCC slab
CGI Sheets shingle CGI sheets shingle
CGI Sheets over A-class CGI sheets overr timber
over trusses of B Class over ordinary
Roofing buck° /tail wood or gee' trusses (Budloo wood
budloo and papular trusses of popular
Roofing eaves boarding.
wood(assorted) wood.
Internal: POP/Washable Internal : POP/
Internal : POP/
Distemper/Colour wash Distemper over Cement Internal : Mud
Distemper over Cement
over Cement plaster. Wood plaster. Wood work plaster with
plaster.
work painted Finsh painted. External: distemper
Finish External : cement
External: Finished Coat of Finishing of cement External : lime
plaster / cement or lime
commit primer over Cement primer over Cement plaster/ lime
pointing on the stone
grader/ Rough cast/ pointing plaster/ Rough cast/ pointing
work
on stone work. pointing on stone work.

407
 28.10.2. Cost Estimation
An estimate shall be prepared for the construction of the structure using the current PWD
schedule of rates. Where non-standard items of work are done, special data for the same shall be
worked out on the basis of prevailing market rates. In case the building is electrified, the estimated
cost of electrification shall be worked out in consultation with the Assistant Engineer, Electrical
Wing of PWD. For leveling site, only the minimum quantity necessary for construction of a
building of the size shall be assumed unless there is evidence at site that extra quantity of work
was involved and it is possible to measure such extra quantity. Leads and lifts for materials shall
be worked out as if the structure is being constructed by the department at that site. If any item of
work done is sub- standard as compared to the same item as per P. W.D. specifications, suitable
percentage reduction may be made for the same. Similarly, if any item of work is of especially
superior standard as compared with the corresponding item of P.W. D specification, a suitable
extra percent on the rate of the concerned item due to such superior work may be allowed.

CHAPTER - 28
28.10.2.1. Depreciation
From the estimated cost of the building worked out on the above basis, depreciation shall
be deducted for the period, which had elapsed after the building was constructed. The age of the
building shall be ascertained by l ocal enquiries including enquiries from local bodies like
Municipalities, etc., having jurisdiction over the area. The facts ascertained through such local
enquiries shall also be verified by examination of the condition of the building and its component
parts.
Depreciationisaffectedfromtheestimatedcapitalvalueworkedoutandabove.Thedepreciati on
is applied successively for each year, i.e., by compounding the depreciation annually. The

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

depreciation constant for calculation is given in Table2800.1

Table 28.00.1 Depreciation Constant

Depreciation constant @0.5% per annum shall be applicable as per schedule of valuation.
In addition to normal depreciation, deductions shall be made for damages in any point of the structure.
When allowing normal depreciation rates, it is expected that the structure is maintained properly.
Hence depreciation does not cover special damages such as cr acked walls, damaged roof, rotten state
of wood work etc. A reasonable amount, which may be more or less equal to the cost of rectification,
shall be deducted from the depreciated value of the building to arrive at the final cost to be intimated
to the revenue authorities.
Powers of the officers of the P.W.D. regarding valuation of buildings shall be as per delegation
of powers given in section 200. The maximum time that can be allowed for completing such valuation
in the section office shall be 30 days.
In all cases of valuation of buildings, the Assistant Engineer concerned shall make the
preparation of the plan, specifications and estimate. Where the valuation has to be approved by officers
higher in rank than Assistant Engineer sufficient time (15 days in each of the higher offices) shall be
allowed. Before the valuation is approved it is imperative that the officer who is competent to approve
the valuation shall inspect the structure with the plan and estimate and satisfy himself about the various
provisions made there in.

28.11. Lease of Government Property/ Buildings

The government may provide its land or buildings on lease for public use to other agencies like
bank/ societies/ public undertakings etc. for a specific period on remittance of monthly rent. The
Government and the lessee shall enter into an agreement .Under no
circumstances government land or building shall be leased free of cost. Chief Engineer shall fix a
reasonable rent and the agreement executed.

408
 Chapter 29
29.00. Maintenance –Movable Assets

29.00.1. General
This chapter includes the maintenance of articles, which are necessary for carrying out
the various works of the Department. It includes items like vehicles, office accessories like
furniture and communication systems, survey instruments and other tools and plants, reference
books and codes, appliances, etc., which are not consumed in the course of execution of works.
This invariably includes the replacement/procurement of obsolete/requisite items also. This
chapter also includes materials and other stores that get consumed in due course.
Most of the works in the P. W. D. are carried out through contract agencies and the
selected contractor is to supply all the materials required for the complete work, including special
items as in the case of projects. However, for departmental execution, supply of certain materials
for the construction is necessary and these shall be procured as per section.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

Projects under departmental execution may require a number of special items to be

procured and stocked particularly tools and plants and their spares and accessories. In such cases,
the list of items to be stocked shall be prepared by the officer under the control of the project
and the approval of the concerned Chief Engineer obtained. Such projects shall have its own
store to cater to the needs of the project.
In the case of completed projects with special tools & plants charged to the project, the
see shall be disposedoffinpublicauctionafterobtainingsanctionforthesurveyreportofthearticles
from concerned MED divisions. Tools and plants shall be grouped under the following heads
prescribed in the list of Major and Minor heads of account with sub-groups wherever necessary
under nomenclature of :
(a) Scientific and drawing materials
(b) Tools, Plants and Machinery

29.01. Registers
A Register of movable assets shall be maintained in each office. Every item acquired by
purchase, transfer or through any other way shall be included in the appropriate groups in the
register kept in the concerned Division Office. Similarly every item, which is disposed of
finally by transfer to other divisions or by sale or in any other manner shall be noted in the
appropriate register. Each division will have an up to date register of all the assets like vehicles,
office furniture, survey instruments and other tools and plants, reference books and codes, all
appliances and spares including those in subordinate offices grouped under proper heads as
above.
To ensure that all acquisitions and final disposals are posted in the register, the vouchers
dealing with the acquisition or final disposal shall contain a certificate from the Accountant
under the control of work in the division that the transactions have been posted in the Register
giving also the page and item number of the entry. The certificate shall be checked and initialed
by the Divisional Accountant after verifying the concernedregister.
Cases may arise where the transactions regarding acquisitions or final disposal are dealt
in the subdivision office. Before the concerned vouchers or other documents dealing with these
are finally accepted, the same shall be got pre-checked and passed by the Executive Engineer so
that appropriate entries are made in the register of the division.
Each item of tools and plants, scientific and mathematical instruments and furniture shall
be given an identification number when first received in the division and this number shall be
quoted in all transactions relating to the same. The identification numbers will be preceded by a
n initial representing the name of the Division and followed by initials

409
representing the group and sub group to which the item belongs. The number itself will be based
on the serial number of the item in its subgroup or groups in the concerned register.
Spares shall also be entered in the register and treated as stock items and when used for
replacement or in repairs shall be shown as issue on the register and concerned repair estimate.
Accessories however are additional equipments to improve its performance. If these are kept
separate, these shall be numbered and accounted in the register. If fitted, the accessory need
not be separately accounted but the descriptions of the Plants shall indicate the fact of the
accessory being fitted in it.
All movements of tools and plants, scientific instruments etc., which are given separate
identification numbers shall be watched through a movement register so that at any time the
location of any item is easily known. To enable the movement register kept in the Division
Office being posted up-to-date, all movements of such Tools and Plants shall be accompanied
by a transfer note, a copy of which shall he sent to the Division Office.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

29.02. Classification of Stores.
For easy identification, docketing and control, each item to be stored shall be suitably
grouped/ classified under different trade groups and given a permanent identifying number by
the Executive Engineer. All the transactions shall indicate the code identification number and
the measurement of each item shall be in standard units only. The variation, if any, between the
quantities entered in the store accounts and the quantity computed from the suppliers bill shall
be adjusted in the account then and there.

29.03. Estimating the Requirements

Requirements vary with the nature of work. If additional instruments are required, as in
the case of special investigation work or in project work, the sanction of competent authority
shall be obtained for procuring the same.
In the case of Divisions, Subdivisions and Sections the annual requirement must be prepared by
the Executive Engineer based on the shortage arising either from inadequate supply originally
or from some of the available instruments being in disorder. In the latter case, be for e arranging
for fresh supplies in lieu of instruments in disorder, an examination must be made whether the
same can be repaired at reasonable cost. Repairs shall be done at the Government approved
workshop. Where electronic or other sophisticated equipments are required, estimate shall also
include the necessary cost for annual maintenance contract if the manufacturer has such
provision.

29.04. Instruments
Regarding, mathematical and drawing instruments each Draftsman. Junior Engineer,
Tracer and Assistant Engineer shall have one set of drawing instruments consisting of-
(a) One Mathematical Instrument Box
(b) One tee square/ Mini drafter
(c) Two setsquares
(d) One parallel ruler
(e) Box of scales including plotting scales and architectural scales.
(f) Field instruments like total station, DGPS, auto level with level and staff.

In addition in each Division Office there shall be one set of French curves, Pantograph and
Planimeter and computers with drafting software‘s like AutoCAD and a printer/ plotter. If in any
Division, Subdivision, or Section the normal standard as specified above is found inadequate
then additional instruments and/or Superintending Engineer or Chief Engineer may sanction
additional quantities of the listed items according to necessity.

410
 29.05. Tools and Plants
Tools and plants required for the general use of the department will be held as part of
stock and will be accounted for as such. The Executive Engineer shall annually review the
existing stock of the Tools and Plants available in the Division.
Existing hand tools like mammatties, pickaxes, shovels etc. not in use shall be accounted
and survey report prepared. These shall be disposed off in public auction after getting sanction
to the survey reports from the competent officer.
Machineryrequiredforworksdonebycontractorshallbeprovidedbythecontractorhimselfan
d shall not be provided by the department on hire. The department shall hire all machinery
required for departmental execution of works.
Existing road rollers, bitumen rollers asphalt hot mix plants, sprayers and accessories of
the above f or road surfacing work, which are not in use, shall be accounted and survey reports
prepared. These shall be disposed off in public auction after obtaining sanction from the
competent authority
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

29.06. Departmental Vehicles

Departmental vehicles may broadly be divided into goods vehicles and vehicles for
inspection. Contractors shall provide the goods vehicles necessary for all transport of goods in
connection with the execution of the contract. Hence all the departmental goods vehicles shall
be accounted and survey report prepared. These shall be disposed off in public auction after the
competent officer sanctions the survey report. If there occurs a need for goods vehicle, it shall
be hired by the department.
For inspection work officers are expected to use their own conveyances for which they are
entitled to get T. A. as per rules. However, it is necessary that some Departmental vehicles are
also available for inspection and for use as a staff jeep/car. The number of such staff cars shall
be kept to a minimum, with each Division being given one car and each subdivision one jeep or
a car. Where the vehicles provided are inadequate, sanction of Government shall be obtained for
the additional vehicles. Wherever SUV are available and are in use this may be considered
against the provision for jeep. In addition to the above there will be one car/jeep/SUV under
each Chief Engineer and each Superintending Engineer and the Chief Architect to serve as staff
car..
In some cases as in projects, it may be necessary to provide special facilities by way of
school bus, ambulance etc. These shall be considered as sp ecial requirements and shall be
provided only with sanction of Government.
Vehicles may be taken on hire with the approval of concerned Chief Engineer, if
department vehicles are not provided.

29.07. Office Accessories- Furniture, Communication Systems.

All the offices of PWD shall have the necessary means of communication service for
improving the performance. Telephone and photocopiers, Computers, printers etc shall be
provided to all the offices of PWD. In addition Chief Engineers shall also be provided with
laptop. Offices of Executive Engineer and above shall have fax. In addition, concerned Chief
Engineer shall sanction Fax facility to other offices as per requirement. All officers of and above
the rank Assistant Executive Engineer are provided with email facility and communications may
be sent as email also.
Apart from the existing postal delivery system, modern communication facilities such
as, email and web connectivity, couriers etc. may also be suitably used. Mobile phones, call
conference, video conference, shall be made available as per requirement.
All PWD offices shall have necessary tables, chairs, stools, racks/ shelves, almarah and

411
cash chest as per Government rules. Computer tables and chairs shall also be provided.

29.08. Bitumen
The Executive Engineer shall procure the bitumen for works up to TS powers of
Executive Engineer, from approved sources.

2909. General principles regarding procurement.

For works executed through contractors, the contractor with the exception of clause
130.3 shall do all procurement. The procedures laid down in the Store Purchase Manual shall be
followed for all other procurements of the department. the procurement shall be done in
accordance to general financial rules (GFR)
All purchasing officers of the Department when exercising their powers of purchase shall
also note the following points.

CHAPTER - 29
a. If any tools & plants and vehicles are required, the concerned Chief Engineer shall
sanction a proposal with an estimate for the same. This will form the basis for
procurement.
b. Office accessories like furniture, small tools, survey instruments and reference booksand
codes shall be procured by an officer not below the rank of an Executive Engineer based
on the sanctioned estimate
c. All purchases shall be against specific provision in sanctioned estimates. As an exception
to the above, spares/ replacements may be purchased against L. S. provision provided in
the annual maintenance estimate.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

d. The Executive Engineer as per sanction shall procure Scientific and Mathematical
instruments, etc. by the competent authority. Special specifications if any shall be clearly
indicated in notice inviting tenders.
e. No unserviceable article shall be accepted/ procured.
The procedure to be followed for inviting tenders and arranging purchases will be as
detailed in the Store Purchase Manual of Government of J&K. On receipt of the items, the
Executive Engineer shall conduct proper inspection and where necessary test of the
equipment and articles received. If required, the help of any Government approved
Workshops may be availed for conducting tests and in inspecting the plants, spares and
accessories.

29.10. Custody and protection of Equipments

Scientific and Mathematical instruments allotted to an office shall be under the custody of
a technical officer working in that office subject to the overall control of the Head of the office.
Mathematical instruments, and articles like tapes, foot rules etc. may be entrusted to the officers
using the above instruments regularly on their personal receipts, subject to the over-all control
of the Head of the office.
Plants and Machinery in use will be under the custody of the officer to whom they are issued.
Where operators or drivers are employed the operator or driver will be in direct charge of the
Plants during the period it is in operation subject to the control of the officer having custody of
it. During the period when the Plants are not being operated or where there is no operator for the
Plants, the custodian shall arrange for its protection including watch and ward where necessary.

29.11. History Book

The custodian of the each and every equipment/ tool/plants/ instruments, etc. shall
maintain a history book (Appendix 2900D) that records all the relevant information like
registered number, equipment number, date of purchase, model, make, manufacturer, cost of

412
 equipment, maintenance schedules, dates of repairs, type of repair, cost of repair, replacements,
transfer from Division/ offices and any other special remarks.
If any plants or equipment needs repairs, the custodian shall report the fact to the
Executive Engineer through his official superior. The custodian shall also arrange a competent
mechanic or Engineer/ government approved workshop to inspect the plants and report on the
nature of repairs to be done, the time required and the probable cost. If the plants is beyond the
stage of economical repair this fact also shall be reported by the inspecting mechanic or
Engineer. Executive Engineer may then propose to dispose off the plants at the place where it is
or transferred to a suitable place and may then be auctioned as per sanction received from
competent authority.
ThecustodianshallarrangetherepairsaftergettingsanctionfromthecompetentEngineer.Wh
ere operators or drivers are under the control of a vehicle or plants, they shall notify the
custodian immediately of any special requirements or replacements needed for safe
functioning of the vehicle or plants.

29.12. Use and operation of Tools and Plants

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

Scientific instruments like levels, theodolites, Total stations etc., shall be handled and
used only by technical hands having the requisite training in the use of these instruments. When
they are not in use, these instruments shall be kept properly in their boxes or containers. When
transported, the boxes or containers shall be carefully supported in cushions without the chance
of getting jolted, during the journey. Necessary skilled labour shall be employed for conveyance
and carrying out the work.

29.12.1. Calibration
Prolonged use may stretch tapes and chains, and the Legal Metrology department as per rules
shall do standardization. Measuring and weighing apparatus shall be calibrated at least once in
6 months. Other scientific measuring instruments and lab equipments shall be calibrated
periodically as per rules. Calibration and validity certification shall be the responsibility of the
custodian.

29.12.2. Operation
Operation of plants and machinery shall been trusted only to operators competent to
handle them. For this purpose the required training shall be given to persons selected to work as
operators. Such training may be given in special training establishments or by a period of
apprenticeship under a skilled operator. Wherever the manufacturers of the equipment issue
operating instructions, the same shall be translated to local language and the operator asked to
get fully conversant with it. A copy of such operating instructions shall be kept along with the
equipment and exhibited in such a manner that the operator can at all times refer to it easily.
Where the manufacturers issue no operating instructions, the Assistant Engineers shall write out
the important operating instructions for the guidance of operator.
Road vehicles as well as plants that require the operators and crew to have licenses issued
by certain statutory authorities shall have Operators who shall possess the required licenses,
which shall be periodically renewed and kept current at their own expenses.
All-important items of equipment such as vehicles, road rollers, plants, pile driving plants, U
compressors, mixers, pumps etc., shall have log books maintained for each such equipment. The
log book shall be written by the operator-in-charge of the equipment and frequently checked by
the Junior Engineer/ Assistant Engineer, and reviewed by Assistant Executive Engineer
concerned. In the case of vehicles, the log book shall be written by the officer in- charge of the
vehicle or the officer assigned to use the vehicles.
In the case of plants consuming fuel, lubricants etc., the standard rate of consumption
of these per hour of operation or for a certain unit of work done shall be prescribed after

413
carefully watching the performance of each such plants. When reviewing the logbook, a check
shall be made whether the actual consumption is reasonable as compared with the prescribed
standard. If any abnormality is noticed, the plant‘s performance shall be tested and if
necessary repairs or tuning as are required shall he carried out. The standard of consumption
shall be re fixed once a y ear or as often as found necessary by the Junior Engineer/Assistant
Executive Engineer.
Remittance of Motor vehicle tax, insurance premia, pollution control tests, obtaining
vehicle fitness certificate, etc. shall be the responsibility of the operator/ driver and custodian
officer.

29.13. Stores
Each store will have a custodian /A. E(stores) who will be responsible for the
verification, receipt, custody and issue of the stock materials and maintenance of initial accounts
of all store transactions. The administrative control over such custodians will be exercised by

CHAPTER - 29
stores officers (Assistant Executive Engineer) who will be stationed in suitable places. The
Stores controlling Officer (concerned Executive Engineer) shall render compiled accounts to the
Accountant General monthly.
The Stores officers and custodians of Stores shall be provided with ministerial and field
staff if required to assist them in the discharge of their duties.
Periodical verification of stores is a matter of great importance and a regular systematic
verification of all the stores has to be carried out at least once a y ear under control of concerned
Superintending Engineer.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

29.13.1. Stationery stores
Stationery items required for each office shall be procured from the government
stationery stores. In the case of non-available items, the Head of Office shall arrange the
procurement, from open market. The Head of Office shall designate custodian of Stationery
store.

29.13.2. Receipt of materials

When materials are received in the stores, the custodian shall verify the supply against
the order both as regards quantity & quality and against specification. It may sometimes happen
that along with serviceable articles, some unserviceable or partly damaged articles are also
received, and only the serviceable articles shall be accepted and the unserviceable articles either
returned to supplier or temporarily kept in the transit shed till it is disposed of in the manner as
settled between the department and the supplier. If any tests are being carried out such tests shall
be arranged and the articles shall be accepted and taken in to stock only after the tests prove
satisfactory. The supplier shall be kept informed of the action taken. The cost of such tests shall
be borne by the department unless the order specifies that the test will be at supplier's cost. The
accepted quantities shall be entered in the Goods Received Sheet. The custodian of the stores
will retain the office copy. The other copies will be sent to the Stores Officer, out of which one
copy will be passed on to the supplier. The measurements shall be got checked by the Stores
Officer and bill prepared for payment.
Booklets will be serially numbered and the issue and the receipt back of the booklets will
be watched through a Register of Goods Received Sheet. The used-up sheets shall be arranged
in chronological order and bound in volumes of convenient sizes and kept under the safe
custody of the Stores Officer.
If the order specifies that supplies shall be completed by a certain date, supplies made
after that date shall be accepted only after getting sanction from the authority who ordered
supply. Should any correction be effected during check-measurement on a subsequent date, such
correction shall be noted in the store records through a plus or minus entry indicating the

414
 reason for such entry in the remarks column.

29.13.3. Store Accommodation

In the case of departmental execution, the accommodation required shall be assessed
based on the expected maximum quantities of materials to be store data time. The provision for
storage shall be on a generous scale to avoid deterioration and consequent loss and to facilitate
inspection. Covered accommodation shall be provided for all materials that deteriorate due to
exposure to weather. Suitable arrangements shall be provided so as to obtain the maximum
storage utilizing the minimum building space. Inflammable materials shall be stored separately
in compartments not likely to catch fire. Explosives shall be stored only in magazines of
approved design with sufficient safety margin all round.
Materials in store shall be properly planned so that supplies received and issues can be traced
accurately and care shall be taken to issue out earlier supplies first and later supplies thereafter.
(i.e. First in First Out)
The custodian of stores, with the following details, shall maintain an indexed register for
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

different
articles.

Type of Material

Sl. Open Receipts To t a l Issue To t a l Balance as Re marks

No ing on date of
Issue
B
a Orde Date of Quantities Issue Date Quantities
l r No. receipt received No. of Issued
a Issue

n
c
e

This register shall be up to date at all times for verification by higher officers.
The store and the yard around it shall be properly protected with only one gate, controlled
by a gateman who shall have a shelter put up near the gate.

2913.4. Issues of articles.

Issues of articles from the stores shall be made only as per issue orders passed by the
Stores Officer. The requisition shall contain the name of the work, names of the articles, the
code numbers, the unit of measurement, quantities required for the whole work, quantities
already obtained and quantities for which requisition is made.
If the articles are to be issued to a contractor, the contractor or his agent/ representative
shall produce the Indent from the Store Control Officer who after verification may issue the
indent. Simultaneously the Assistant Executive Engineer shall be informed of the number and
date of Indent issued against the requisition. At the time of issue,

415
 the custodian shall obtain a receipt from the contactor / contractor's agent
/representative along with the requisition and the issue shall be intimated to all concerned.
The quantity shall be entered in standard units prescribed for each item either in full or part both
in words and in figures. All articles issued shall be counted, measured or weighed as the case
may be before they are issued. There shall be proper measuring and weighing apparatus in each
store for this purpose. The stores officer shall make it a point to test these measuring and
weighing apparatus and keep it accurate.
Counting, measuring or weighing of articles particularly heavy articles may need the
assistance of some labour. This shall be legitimately charged to work. Loading of articles into
lorry or other conveyance for removal from the store is the responsibility of the custodian of
the store. For this purpose, the messenger who arrives with the Indent may be allowed to bring
in his own labour, lorry or other conveyance to the stores for removal of articles from the store
and arrange the loading work.
In the case of issue of stationery items, the custodian shall collect requests for issue and

CHAPTER - 29
get it sanctioned by the store controlling Officer. Each issue shall be entered in the indexed
register shown below then and there and the receiving officer shall sign in the Signature column
as a token of receipt.

Name of article
Sl. Opening Receipts Issue Balance as Remarks
No Balance on
date
of
Issue

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Order Date of Quantities Total Issue Date of Quantities Issued Signature To t a l
receipt received No. Issue issued to
No.

29.14. Hiring of Equipments

The contractor shall provide equipments necessary for a work. PWD shall not hire out any
equipment. In the case of departmental execution, PWD shall take such equipments on hire, if
necessary, with approval of competent authority.

29.15. Repairs and Maintenance

Itisessentialthatallassetsbeproperlymaintainedsothattheycanefficientlyfunctionwhenever
required. The maintenance work may be divided into three broad categories, viz.-
• Preventive maintenance
• Periodical overhauls
• Special repairs
Every repair/ replacement shall be duly noted in the logbook and the history book.

29.15.1. Preventive maintenance

This consists of carrying out certain item of maintenance as a regular feature so as to
reduce the wear and tear of assets. The custodian shall maintain all instruments and equipments
accurately and in working condition.
In the case of tools & plants and Department vehicles, regular lubrication, periodical

416
 cleaning of oil and fuel filters, tightening of loose joints, etc. shall normally be done by the
operating crew when the equipment is in operation. When the equipment is laid off, certain
preventive maintenance items may still have to be done occasionally and this shall be arranged
through any other suitable approved agency.
Checking and correcting contacts in electrical system and works of a similar nature can
be considered as preventive maintenance.
Such preventive maintenance items shall be properly listed out for each equipment and
charts of the same written in English or the language known to the operator and kept with the
equipment and displayed whenever it is in operation.
The cost of preventive maintenance works for the above items shall be included in the
general maintenance estimate for the division concerned. The Executive Engineer shall arrange
such works immediately.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

29.15.2. Periodical overhauls

This shall be arranged at regular intervals for all items including furniture. The interval
may be once every 6 months or once every year or at such periods as decided by the Assistant
Engineer. Worn out parts shall be replaced, adjustments shall be effected wherever necessary
and painting of such portions as needed shall be done, all as a part of periodical overhaul. The
intention is that after every periodical overhaul the equipment is refitted to operate at the
maximum efficiency possible consistent with its age and general condition.
If any Plants/ vehicle or equipment has become so old that replacement of worn out parts
and refitting will be too costly and commensurate with the efficiency of its performance after
the overhaul then it is better that the Plant is disposed off as it is without attending to there pairs.
This aspect shall also be borne in mind when taking up periodical overhaul. Mathematical and
Scientific Instruments shall be serviced regularly as per manufacturer‘s instructions and
measuring instruments calibrated at the specified intervals as p er rules. Electronics equipments
like fax, photocopiers, computers etc. shall be serviced regularly. Annual maintenance contracts
shall be arranged for electronic and other sophisticated equipments, through agencies approved
by manufactures.
The cost of periodical overhauls will depend on the cost of spares replaced, cost of other
materials required including oil and fuel, labour involved etc. The Assistant Engineer under the
control of the equipment shall prepare the estimate for such periodical overhaul after proper
assessment. All such estimates for periodical overhauls to be done during the financial year for
the whole division shall be submitted by the 1st week of April, as proposal to the concerned Chief
Engineer for approval to arrange the works on time and allotment of funds. The competent
authority shall arrange work.

29.15.3. Special repairs

These are taken up as and when necessary mostly to repair unforeseen damages to any
equipment. With proper preventive maintenance, careful operation, and regular periodical
overhauls, the need for special repairs shall arise only very occasionally perhaps due to
accidents.
Special repairs can be estimated only after a proper examination of the plant/ equipment
is done by competent mechanic or Engineer/ Government approved workshop. The Assistant
Engineer shall prepare an estimate based on such assessment including cost of spare and submit
for approval from the competent authority. Work may be arranged after sanction is accorded for
the estimate. In urgent cases, the Executive Engineer shall arrange work in anticipation of
sanction provided funds are available with him to meet thecost.

417
29.16. Workshops
P. W. D. shall make use of the Government approved workshops for all repairs in the
case of vehicles and tools and plants. For electronic and other equipments, the authorized service
centers of the manufacturer shall be utilized.

29.17. Periodical Verification

Periodical verification of all stock items shall cover not only the verification of physical
balances, but also the postings and accounts of all transactions, which have taken place since the
last verification. The physical balance shall be compared against the account balance after
providing for corrections against erroneous entries, if any. Immediate necessary steps shall be
taken to deal with excess and shortage. Concurrently appropriate disciplinary action shall be

CHAPTER - 29
initiated regarding erroneous postings and other irregularities if any detected during verification.
An officer designated by the Store Control Officer shall do verification.

29.18. Verification of Movable Assets and Store item

Movable Assets shall include Equipments, tools, machinery instruments, computers,
vehicles, furniture, books etc. that has to be physically checked and accounted annually. In the
case of items in store, the physical balance of item shall be checked periodically and it shall be
ensured that there is no transaction of that article (either receipt or issue) until the physical
verification of that article is completed.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

29.18.1. Procedure for Verification
1. The object of verification is not only to ensure that the book balances and the actual physical
balances agree but also to see that all the accounts prescribed in the Public Works
Department Manual are maintained, strictly in accordance with rules.
2. Before verification of articles actually in the Stores, the verifiers will make a test check of
the accounts maintained and satisfy them selves that the book balances are arrived at
correctly. This shall be done with reference to the relevant Goods Received Sheets, Indents
and the issues.
3. StockVerifierswillselectatrandomanymaterialforphysicalcheckandcountallthematerials.The
shall open the stock ledgers as in the enclosed form , check articles, opening balance and
entries for each receipts, and issues and closing balances. Differences if any between book
balance and actual stock listed out shall be reported to the concerned Chief Engineer.
4. They will so arrange their program of physical check of the store materials as to cover up all
the important articles. All verification must be made in the presence of the concerned
custodian who will be required to sign the verification sheets or inventories as a token of the
acceptance of the correctness of entries.
5. The Verifiers shall record the following certificate in the Registers ―Certified that the actual
Stocks of
On hand are verified by me on the date noted against each and found to be correct‖
6. If the physical balance as per the findings of the verifier agrees with the balance, the Verifier
will affix his dated initials in register on the next line with the dated initials of the Custodian
of Stores and the Stores Officer.
7. The actual counted figures agreed upon by the Custodian of Stores and the Stores Officer,

418
 will be the basis for regulating future balances, the differences being taken up separately
through the concerned Chief Engineer. Wherever differences are observed between the book
(ledger) balances and the counted balances, the postings shall be checked, the case for the
differences investigated and instructions recorded in the ledger maintained by the Verifier.
8. The result of such verification shall be recorded in the progress reports to be submitted to
the Chief Engineer. Each article counted shall be carefully examined and its condition shall
be noted in the progress report. Also materials, which have not been operated upon for more
than one year noted and explanation called for. There port must be handed over to the
Stores Officer for record.
9. The Verifiers will also see that orders of the concerned Chief Engineer passed on the
different statements are given effect to promptly and action is taken to adjust all shortages
and surpluses in balances.
10. They shall verify whether list of surplus, obsolete and unserviceable articles are promptly
submitted and disposed off.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 CHAPTER - 29

11. The Verifier shall furnish a certificate in the progress reports to the effect that the accounts
prescribed in the Public Works Department Manuals are properly maintained.
12. The progress reports will he prepared in triplicate, with original copy submitted to
the Stores Officer who will record his remarks and submit it to the concerned Chief
Engineer through the Executive Engineer. The duplicate copy submitted directly to the
concerned Chief Engineer. The Verifier will retain the triplicate copy for his reference.
13. The Verifier shall also furnish his remarks in the progress reports about the
adequacy of arrangements made for the custody of materials.
14. The Verifier has also to verify whether reports are periodically sent to the Executive
Engineer.

29.19. Disposal

29.19.1. Disposal of Equipments.

It is unnecessary and costly to maintain old, obsolete and unserviceable equipments.
Every year the Executive Engineer shall review the equipments in his Division and sort out such
items, which in his opinion fall within the above category and may be disposed. In respect of
machinery items, the advice of the competent mechanic/ Engineer/ government approved
workshop/Dept. of Motor garages may also be sought. After finalizing the list, a survey report
shall be prepared. Sanction to this report shall be obtained from the competent authority before
the disposal of equipments in public auction. the auction date should be publicized via
print/electronic media.

29.19.2. Disposal of Unserviceable Articles

All care shall be exercised to prevent or minimize deterioration by proper care in storage
and by timely issues. Some articles may deteriorate or become unserviceable due to long storage.
Frequent inspection of the stores is to be undertaken to identify such articles likely to get
deteriorated, provide them with proper protection if it is lacking. The inspecting officer shall
report the matter to Chief Engineer and following book of financial powers and with his approval
arrange for open sale of the article before it actually gets deteriorated or unserviceable.
An article that has already become unserviceable must be removed from the stores to a

419
suitable place where these unserviceable articles can be retained till disposal. The Stores Officer shall
conduct necessary enquiries as to the reason for the article having become unserviceable and obtain
sanction from competent authority to dispose of the unserviceable articles through a survey report giving
a clear history of the matter. After such sanction is received, the articles shall be disposed off in public
Auction.

29.19.3. Dismantled Materials

In any work the dismantled materials obtained shall be properly accounted. As far as possible,
service able dismantled materials shall be utilized for the concerned work or issued to any other
work. Dismantled materials remaining unutilized shall be physically verified and disposed off in

CHAPTER - 29
public auction after preparing necessary survey report and sanctioning it by the competent authority.
All unserviceable dismantled materials obtained shall also be disposed off.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

420
 GOVERNMENT OF J&K
J&K Public Works Department
Engineering Manual Edition 2020

PART – III
APPENDICES

The Appendices Part III Edition 2020 are General Guidelines for reference only and
shall be subject to change as and when felt necessary by the PW(R&B) Department.
The Department shall not be held responsible for any Errors and omissions. In case
of difference of opinion on any part/s of the manual the decision of the Development
Commissioner Works shall be final and binding upon the parties in such matters.

421
 List of Appendices

S.No. Particulars Page No.

18A Circular of Finance Department 425

18B 1 Submission of DPR‘s for Technical Vetting 426

18B 2 Advisory 427

18B 3 Check list for preparation of DPR 428

APPENDICES
18C SO 15 dated:- 09.01.2020 (Finance Department) 429-435

18D SO 58 dated:- 31.12.2019 (Finance Department) 436-479

200 A Questionnaire 480

200 C Space Standards 481

400 A Areas covered under integrated computerized MIS 482

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

1100-1 Environmental Regulations Management 483

1100-2 Standard EMP for Project works 487

1100-3 Guidance on Oxbow Lands 498

1100-4 Guidance on Quarry and Borrow Area Management 501

1100-5 Guidance on landscaping and Tree species 505

1100-6 Guidance on Public Consultations 511

1100-7 Guidance for preparing management measures 514

where project specific EMP required

1202-B Social Screening Format 534

1202-C Social Impact Data Sheet 536

1202-D Budget estimate to be attached with detailed project 537

report

1500 Design Parameters 541

422
S.No. Particulars Page No.

1500-A Design Data for Major and Minor Bridges 558

1500-B Checklist of details required for approval of 561

alignment of Roads/Bridges

1500-C Checklist of details required for design of 562

Roads/Bridges

1600-A1, A2, Model Preliminary Estimate for 563-565

A3 roads/buildings/bridges.

1600 B Docket Sheet for Issue of Technical Sanction 566

1600-B1, B2, Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project 567-569

B3 Report for bridges/roads/buildings

1600-C Docket sheet (preliminary report / detailed report) 570

1600-D Checklist for Detailed Estimate Report 571

1600-E Deviation Statement in the course of actual 572

construction of works

1600 F DB.4- Comparative Statement (Large) 572

1800 A Register of Sanction to Estimate 572

2100-B Sample form of Work Spot Order Book 573

2100-D Safety Code 574

2100-E1 Measurement Book 577

2100-E2 Level Field Book 579

2100-F Proforma to Accompany Recommendation for 580

Extension of Time of Completion

2100-G Certificate of Completion of Work 581

2200 Execution of Roads, Bridges and Buildings. 582

2200-A Inspection Note 613

2200-B Material Collection Report 614

423
S.No. Particulars Page No.

2200-C Machinery for excavation of different operation of 615

Road Construction

2200-D Tentative output of Road 620

2200-E Details to be submitted for approval from Engineer 621

to start work

2200-F Proforma of Progress of well steining and sinking 621

2200-G Proforma for recording tilts and shifts of wells 622

2200-H Statement showing particulars of different methods 622

adopted and phenomenon encountered during well

sinking on different wells.

2407 A Drain details 623

2600-A Type of distress symptoms probable causes and 624

possible types of treatment.

2600-B Maintenance criteria 626

2600-J Register of avenue trees 629

2600-K Road cutting and Restoration Protocol 629

424
425
426
Annexure – 2600 N
Page-2
ADVISORY:
It has been observed in umpteen cases that the DPRs (Detailed Project Reports) do not contain all the
required information/documents mandatory for accord of Technical Vetting, causing unnecessary delay
in processing of these DPRs in this office.

As is seen during examination/technical scrutiny of the DPRs, concerned departments adopt casual
approach in the preparation of a project irrespective of its size and magnitude thereby missing important
components/items, giving rise to revision of the project cost which could have been otherwise avoided.
This practice contributes to time over-run and subsequent cost over-run of projects and has to be
essentially stopped to save time and money.

APPENDICES
Accordingly, this is in the interest of smooth execution of a project that all the pre-requisites obligatory
for obtaining technical vetting are completed well in advance to ensure its timely processing in this
office.
Rate Reasonability Certificate (issued by an officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or
equivalent) for the items not covered in the relevant schedule of Rates but being imperative for
execution needs to be supported with detailed analysis of rate on correct inputs.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Any proposal to construct additional floor (s) over existing floor ought to be supported with structural
safety certificate issued by an officer not below the rank of Executive Engineer or equivalent certifying
therein that the existing foundation is designed to take the load of additional floor (s) as proposed.

DPRs for CD (Cross drainage like bridges etc) works need to be supported with all relevant Hydraulic
data, including HFL, scour depth behaviour/morphology of river/stream/Nallah with catchment area
etc. The cost of proposal should be based on detailed estimates and not on per meter basis.

For building structures, the DPR should carry Soil Test Report so that soil bearing capacity is known
to justify inclusion of components like Raft foundation, pile foundation, etc. in the DPR.

In case of road projects, pavement design should be supported with important details like CBR
(California Bearing Ratio), daily/yearly traffic details, However, wherever applicable additional details
like habitation/number of souls to be benefitted, layout plan/index man indicating the neighbourhood
and existing road network should also be given.

With a view that above highlighted issues and other requirement are fully taken care of while
forwarding the DPRs to the office of Development Commissioner for Technical Vetting, a check list
has been devised forming Annexure A to this Advisory for information and necessary action by all the
concerned departments, so that Technical Vetting of a DPR is carried out smoothly without delay. Any
DRR is not conforming to the checklist shall not be entertained in future.

427
 Annexure – 2600 N
Page-3

Check List For Preparation of DPR

A) GENERAL

1. Three copies of the DPR to be made available.

2. The technical report showing history of the project proposal, cost of the project, time of
completion.
3. Feasibility report of the Project.
4. General Abstract of Cost duly authenticated by the Competent Authority.
5. All drawings related to the project duly authenticated by Competent Authority.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

6. The DPR should be framed on uniform rates as per J&K SSR (with detail wise estimates) or CPWD
Plinth area rates and where the rates are taken in LMR, reasonability of rate should be given by way
of proper rate analysis as per price index.
7. Approval regarding the overhead charges/agency charges/corporation charges from the
concerned authority.
8. A certificate duly authenticated by the competent authority that project does not fall in any other
scheme or in any other department plan.
9. Revised DPR, if any, should be enclosed with original copy of the DRP of comparison along with
justification for such revision.
10. Source of funding/flow of funds and name of funding agency should be mentioned.

B) FOR ROADS PROJECTS

1. The site plan, index plan, cross-section of road Crest and L-section.
2. Typical X-section, R-Wall, B-Wall/ Drains, Culverts etc. if any, should be appended with the DPR.
3. Details of earthwork X-sections in details along with the earthwork table in cutting and filling
should be provided.
4. If the road passes through forest involving forest land/trees, compensation estimates from Forest
Department should be made available with the project.

C) FOR BUILDING PROJECTS

1. The site plan/index plan, elevations and relevant drawings of the building project.
2. N.O.C from regulatory bodies.
3. Green buildings Norms should be strictly adhered to.

D) EOR BRIDGES PROJECTS

1. Relevant/proposed drawings of the Bridge.
2. X-Section, Plan and Elevation showing details viz. H.FL Scour depth etc. should be clearly
mentioned.
3. Site Plan.

All the above documents need to be kept in original duly countersigned by the Project Authority.

428
 GOVERNMENT OF JAMMU AND KASHMIR
FINANCE DEPARTMENT
Civil Secretariat, Jammu/ Srinagar

Notification,
Jammu, the 9th of January, 2020.

S.O 15 :- In exercise of the powers conferred under section 67 of the Jammu and Kashmir
Reorganisation Act, 20 19,the Lieutenant Governor, Union Tenitory of Jammu and Kashmir is
pleased to delegate his financial powers to accord Administrative Approval, Technical sanctions and
Sanction of contracts, to the Administrative Departments, Major Heads of Departments, Class-I
Officers (Other Officers) and Class-I1 Officers, to the extent as indicated in Annexure-I, to this
Notification.
The financial powers delegated are subject to the condition that all Codal Formalities shall
be followed as per the provisions laid down in General Financial Rules 2017, Manual for
Procurement of Goods and Services, 2017, Manual for Procurement of Works 2019, Manual for
Procurement of Consultancy and Other Services 2017, issued by Ministry of Finance, Department of
Expenditure, GoI, and, other instructions/ orders/ guidelines issued by Government of Jammu and
Kashmir.
By Order of the Lieutenant Governor.

Sd/ -
(Dr. A. K. Mehta), IAS,
Financial Commissioner,
Finance Department.

No. A/PS/DC/2019- 62 Dated 09.0 1.2020

429
 Annexure-I to Notification S.0. 15 Dated 09.01.2020

Delegation of powers to Administrative Departments / Major Heads of

Departments/ Class-I Officers (Other Officers) and Class-II Officers.

A) Powers to accord Administrative Approval:

S.NO NATURE OF TO WHOM EXTENT Remarks
. POWER DELEGATED
1. Administrative Administrative Upto Rs. 20.00 AA in respect of works
Approval to Departments. Crores with / projects above
Expenditure on concurrence of Rs.20.00 crore shall be
individual works. accorded with the
Director Finance/
approval of Hon‘ble
FA&CAO. Lt. Governor after
concurrence of F.D.
Chief Engineer. Upto Rs. 10.00 Note 1:- Accord of AA
Crore is an Administrative-
with concurrence cum- financial
of FA/CAO. decision which needs
Major Heads of Upto Rs. 5.00 to be taken after due
Departments Crores consideration. In no
including District case shall AA be
Development accorded unless the
Commissioner. work / project has been
approved in the Capex
/ Revenue Component
Superintending Upto Rs. 3.00 of the budget, as the
Engineer. Crore case may be, and funds
are available for the
purpose.
Note 2:- where a
scheme/ project is
sanctioned by GoI on
the basis of detailed
project report and
which is 100 lacs
funded by GoI, it shall
be construed as AA
by the Government, of
Union Territory as
well.

2. Execution of petty Administrative Full powers within Subject to the

works, repairs and department. budgetary limits. condition
day to day that the work is
maintenance of Major Head of
executed through
Govt. buildings. department PW (R&B)
including
Department.
Chief
Engineer.
Class I Officer
(Other officers)

430
B) Powers to accord Technical Sanction.-
1. To accord technical Chief Engineer Full powers. Subject to
sanction to detailed Chief Hospital condition that: (a)
estimates of cost of Full powers. estimated cost
original works or Engineers technically
sanctioned does not
parts thereof (SKIMS) exceed the
including special corresponding
repairs, Superintending Upto Rs. 1.00 Crore. administratively
renovations, Engineer approved cost by
additions and more than 10%
alterations and Ex. Engineer Upto Rs. 40.00 lakh subject to a
improvements not Assistant Upto Rs. 1.00 lakh monetary limit of
Rs.5.00 lakhs for
chargeable to Executive estimates upto Rs.
maintenance. 100.00 lakhs and
Engineer 5% of the cost
administratively
approved subject to
a monetary limit of
Rs.10.00 lakhs for
estimates above
Rs. 100.00 lakhs.
b) plans and designs
for individual
works costing over
Rs. 2.50 lakhs and
Rs.10.00 lakhs
are approved by
S.E and C.Es
respectively before
technical sanction
is accorded by
Executive Engineer,
Superintending
Engineer
respectively.
c) post of Chief
Hospital Engineer,
SKIMS is held by a
regular
deputationist Chief
Engineer from
PWD.

To accord technical Chief Engineer Full powers. Provided that the

sanction to detailed Chief Hospital Full powers. estimates
2 estimates sanctioned by the
chargeable to Engineer Superintending
Engineer/ Executive
maintenance and (SKIMS). Engineer, Asstt.
repairs. Superintending Upto Rs. 5.00 lakh Executive
Engineer Engineer are
within the
Ex. Engineer Upto Rs. 2.50 lakh corresponding
Assistant Upto Rs. 0.50 lakh provision approved
Executive by the Chief
Engineer in the
Engineer Annual
Distribution
Statement of
maintenance grant.

431
C) Powers to sanction/ award contracts:
1. To sanction contracts Administrative Full powers within Subject to the
for purchase of Departments budgetary limits. condition that 100%
Stores, Supplies, funding has been
Major Head of accorded/ committed.
Services on the Department
recommendations of
Class I Officers
Purchase Committee.
(Other Officers)
Class II Officers
2. To grant contracts Contract Committee Full Powers. Subject to the
for individual works. Departmental Upto Rs. 40.00 Crore Condition that AA
Contract Committee has already been
accorded and 100%
Chief Engineer Upto Rs. 20.00 Crore funding has been
Superintendent Upto Rs. 7.00 Crore accorded/ committed.
Engineer
Executive Engineer Upto Rs. 1.50 Crore
3 To form Purchase All Departments Provided that senior and experienced
Committee in the officers in the Department are selected as its
Departments, under members, Director Finance/ Financial
them. Advisor or an Accounts Officer, if any,
available in the Department and a
representative from Industries and
Commerce Deptt. should also be selected as
two of its members. In respect of rate
contract the rates fixed will remain valid for
a period as may be specified by the
Committee but not beyond one year from
the date of issue of orders determining the
contract. Where the period of validity of
rates has not been mentioned by the
Committee the same will be valid for one
year from the date of issue of the order. For
individual contracts the rates will be valid
till completion of the contract, as per the
terms of the agreement and/or supply order.
4 To form Contract General The Contract Committee shall comprise the
Committee. Administration foilowing members:-
Department, on the 1. Administrative Secretary concerned.
2. Representative from Finance Department.
proposal of
3. Secretary, (Technical) PW (R&B)/
the
Development Commissioner (Works).
Administrative
4. Chief Engineer PW (R&B) Department /
Departments. PHE (I&FC) Department/PDD.
5. Chief Engineer, of Inspections, Quality
Control and Designs.
6. Chief Engineer (Mech.) for such works as

432
 involves purchase of Mechanical
Equipments.
8. Director/Joint Director PD&M
Department.
9. Director Finance /Financial Advisor.
10. Representative from Industries &
Commerce Department, not below the
rank of Addl. Secretary.
5 To constitute General The Departmental contract committee shall
Departmental Administration have the following constitution:-
contract Department, on 1. Development Commissioner, Public
committee. Works Department.
the proposal of
the Administrative 2. Chief Engineer PW (R&B) Department
Departments. 3. Chief Engineer (Mech.) for such works
as involves purchase of Mechanical
Equipments.
4. Chief Engineer of Inspections,
Quality Control and Designs.
5. Director Finance / Financial Advisor.
6. Director/Joint Director PD&M Deptt.
7. Spl. Secretary/Addl. Secretary of the
Deptt.
8. Representative from Industries &
Commerce Department, not below the
rank of Addl. Secretary.
6 To constitute an General The Empowered Committee shall comprise
Empowered Administration of the following:-
Committee for i) Chief Secretary.
high value and Department.
ii)Administrative Secretary,
prestigious projects Finance Department.
for supervision and iii)Administrative Secretary,
monitoring. Planning, Development & Monitoring
Department.
iv) Principal Secretary to Lieutenant
Governor.
v) Administrative Secretary,
PWD/PHE/PDD.
vi) Administrative Secretary, Housing &
Urban Dev. Department.
vii) Administrative Secretary concerned.
The Committee shall co-opt a Chief
Engineer as and when necessary.
The selection of the projects as would be
monitored by the above Committee shall
be approved by the Hon‘ble Lieutenant
Governor.

435
 GOVERNMENT OF JAMMU AND KASHMIR
CIVIL SECRETARIAT—FINANCE DEPARTMENT
Notification
Jammu, the 31st of December, 2019.

S.O.-58.—In exercise of the powers conferred under section 67 of

the Jammu and Kashmir Reorganization Act, 2019, the Lieutenant
Governor, Union Territory of Jammu and Kashmir is pleased to delegate
his financial powers for incurring Contingent expenditure and
Miscellaneous expenditure to the Administrative Departments, Major
Heads of Departments, Class-I Officers (Other Officers), Class-II and
Class-III Officers, to the extent as indicated in Annexure-I, to this
Notification.

2. The financial powers delegated are subject to the condition that

all Codal Formalities shall be followed as per the provisions laid down in
General Financial Rules (GFRs) read with the Jammu and Kashmir
Reorganization Act, 2019 and other instructions/orders/guidelines issued
by Government of Jammu and Kashmir.

3. The list of Major Heads of Departments, Class-I Officers (Other

officers), Class-II and Class-III Officers of the Union Territory of Jammu
and Kashmir, in whose favour powers have been delegated, forms
Annexure-II, to this notification.

By order of the Lieutenant Governor.

(Sd.) DR. A. K. MEHTA, IAS,

Financial Commissioner,
Finance Department.

436
 ANNEXURE-I TO NOTIFICATION S.O.-58 DATED 31-12-2019

Delegation of financial powers to Administrative Departments/Major Heads of Departments/ Class-I

Officers (Other Officers)/Class-II and Class-III Officers for incurring contingent and
miscellaneous expenditure
S. Nature of powers To whom delegated Extent
Rules, Orders, Restrictions
No. or scales subject to which
the expenditure shall be
incurred
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
1. Unspecified items Administrative Up to Rs. 10.00 Subject to rules laid down in
(Recurring) Departments lakhs per annum GFR 2017.
Major Heads of the Up to Rs. 5.00 lakhs
departments per annum
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 30,000
(Other Officers) per annum in each
case
Class-II and Class-III Up to Rs. 30,000
Officer per annum in each
case

437
2. Unspecified items Administrative Up to Rs. 5.00 lakhs Subject to rules laid down in
Departments per annum in each case GFR 2017.
Major Heads of Up to Rs. 2.50 lakhs
departments per annum in each case
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 30,000
(Other officers) per annum in each case
Class-II and Class-III Up to Rs. 30,000
Officer per annum in each case
3. Purchase of bicycle Administrative Full powers within
for use of their Departments budgetary limit
own office as well Major Heads of
as for their departments
subordinate offices Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
4. Repairs of bicycle Administrative Full powers within
Departments budgetary limit
Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)

438
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
5. Conveyance Hire Administrative Full powers within
Departments budgetary limit
Major Heads of Up to Rs. 50,000
departments per month
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 40,000
(Other officers) per month
Class-II Officer Up to Rs. 20,000
per month
Class-III Officer Up to Rs. 10,000
per month
6. Reimbursement of Administrative Up to Rs. 4,000 per
conveyance charges Department month per person
Major Heads of Up to Rs. 2,000 per
departments month per person
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 1,000 per
(Other officers) month per person
Class-II Officer & Up to Rs. 500 per
Class-III Officer month per person
7. Electricity, water Major Heads of Full powers within
charges, Gas other departments budgetary limit

439
 than LPG Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
8. Purchase of Major Heads of Full powers within Subject to rules laid down
furniture departments budgetary limit in Chapter 6 Procurement
Class-I Officers of Goods and Services in
(Other officers) GFR 2017.
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
9. Repair of Major Heads of Full powers within
furniture departments budgetary limit
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II O fficer
Class-III Officer
10. Freight and Major Heads of Full powers within
demurrage/ departments budgetary limit
wharfage charges Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer

440
 1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
11. Hiring of office Major Heads of Full powers within
furniture, electric departments budgetary limit
fans, heaters, Class-I Officers
coolers, clocks (Other Officers)
etc. Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
12. Legal charges Major Heads of Full powers within Subject to the principles and
departments budgetary limit rates laid down by Law
Class-I Officers Department.
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
13. Maintenance upkeep Administrative Full powers within
and repair of Department budgetary limit
vehicles Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 15,000 per
(Other officers) annum per vehicle
Class-II Officer Up to Rs. 15000 per
annum per vehicle

441
 Class-III Officer Up to Rs. 15000 per
annum per vehicle
14. Condemnation of Administrative Full powers Subject to the fulfilment of
vehicle Department norms.
15. Municipal rates and Major Heads of Full powers within
taxes departments budgetary limit
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
16. Execution of repairs Administrative Full powers within In exercising these powers, the
and day to day Departments budgetary limit, if the provision of rules 132 and 140
maintenance of work is executed of the General Financial Rules,
Govt. buildings through Public Works 2017 shall be observed.
Department.
Major Heads of Full powers within
departments budgetary limit, if the
Class-I Officers work is executed
(Other officers) through Public Works
Department.

442
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
17. Postal and telegraph Administrative Full powers within
charges Departments budgetary limit
Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
18. Printing and Binding Administrative Full powers within
through Government Departments budgetary limit
Press Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
19. Printing and Binding Administrative Up to Rs. 20,00,000 Subject to rules laid down in
through Local Departments per annum Chapter 6 Procurement of
Private Agencies Major Heads of Up to Rs. 5,00,000 Goods and Services in GFR,
departments per annum 2017.

443
 Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 2,00,000
(Other officers) per annum
Class-II Officer Up to Rs. 1,00,000
per annum
Class-III Officer Up to Rs. 50,000
per annum
20. Publication Administrative Full powers within Subject to rules laid down in
(i) Official Departments budgetary limit Chapter 6 Procurement of
publication Major Heads of Goods and Services in GFR,
departments 2017.
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
(ii) Non-Official Administrative Full powers within Subject to rules laid down in
publication Departments budgetary limit Chapter 6 Procurement of
including books Major Heads of Goods and Services in GFR,
also departments 2017.
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer

444
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
(iii) Advertisements Administrative Full powers within Through Information
in Newspaper Departments budgetary limit Department only.
Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer
Class-III Officer
21. To sanction rent for Administrative Full powers Rent is recommended to be
accommodation of Department reasonable by Executive
Offices and other Engineer of the concerned
public institutions in locality in which accommodation
private Buildings has been hired and the
required for non- agreement of the Finance
residential purposes Department has been obtained.
outside J&K when
no Govt. accommo-
dation is available
22. To sanction rent for Major Heads of the Full powers Subject to the condition that the
accommodation of Department rent is recommended by District

445
 Offices and other Level Rent Assessment
public institutions in Committee.
private buildings
required for non-
residential purpose Class-I & Class-II
Officers
23. To sanction rent for General Administration Full powers within Subject to the following
private accommodation Department (Estates) budgetary limit conditions :—
hired for residential (1) Rent is recommended
purpose when suitable by Rent Assessment
Govt. building is not Committee.
available (2) Hiring of accommodation
at the rent recommended
by committee is approved
by LG in coordination.
24. Repair to and removal Administrative Full powers within
of Machinery (Where Departments budgetary limit
the expenditure is not
of capital nature)
Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)

446
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
25. To grant rewards Administrative Full powers within As per the guidelines issued by
Departments budgetary limit the F. D. from time to time.
26. To sanction fluctuating Administrative Full powers within Subject to the rates approved
expenditure in meeting Departments budgetary limit by the Government from time
allowances of Major Heads of to time.
sweepers for part time departments
service. Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officers &
Class-III Officers
27. Purchase of Administrative Full powers within Subject to rules laid down in
stationery articles Departments budgetary limit Chapter 6 Procurement of
Major Heads of Goods and Services in GFR,
departments 2017.
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officer &
Class-III Officer

447
28. Local purchase of Administrative Full powers within Subject to rules as laid down
petty stationery stores Departments budgetary limit in Chapter 6 Procurement
Major Heads of of Goods and Services in
departments GFR, 2017.
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 50,000
(Other officers) per annum
Class-II Officer Up to Rs. 50,000
per annum
Class-III Officer Up to Rs. 50,000
per annum
29. Stores required for Administrative Full powers within Subject to the following
petty works Departments budgetary limit conditions that :
(repairs etc.) (i) Sanction of competent
Major Heads of authority for executing
departments the work carries with it,
sanction for incurring
necessary expenditure on
the purchase of stores
required for the work.
(ii) Rules as laid down in
Chapter 6 Procurement
of Goods and Services
in GFR, 2017.

448
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

30. Other Stores i. e. Administrative Full powers within Subject to rulesas laid down
stores required for Departments budgetary limit in Chapter 6 Procurement of
working of an Major Heads of Goods and Services in GFR,
establishment, departments 2017.
instruments, Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 50,000
equipments and (Other officers) per annum
apparatus Class-II Officer Up to Rs. 30,000
per annum
31. Purchase of Dietary Administrative Full powers within Subject to rules laid down in
articles/clothing and Departments budgetary limit Chapter 6 Procurement of
other items for day- Major Heads of Goods and Services in GFR,
to-day use of departments 2017.
Government Class-I Officers
hospitals (Other officers)
Class-II Officer Up to Rs. 10,000
at a time
32. Supply of uniforms Administrative Full powers within As per the guidelines issued by
Departments budgetary limit the F. D. from time to time.

449
 Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officers &
Class-III Officers
33. To sanction Telephone General Administration As per sanction of
connections for public Department (Estates) Telephone sanctioning
offices and institutions committee
and residences of
Govt. Officers.
34. To sanction telephone Administrative Full powers within
charges Departments budgetary limit
Major Heads of
departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officers &
Class-III Officers
35. Tents and camp Major Heads of the Full powers within
furniture Department budgetary limit
Class-I Officers

450
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
(Other officers)
Class-II Officers
36. Purchase of office Administrative Full powers within Subject to rules as laid down
automation equipment Departments budgetary limit in Chapter 6 Procurement
like photocopier, fax of Goods and Services in
machine, telephone GFR, 2017, and obtaining of
apparatus, computer, concurrence from F. D. if
laptop, printer etc. the expenditure exceeds
Rs. 20,00,000 ;
Major Heads of Subject to rules as laid down
departments in Chapter 6 Procurement of
Goods and Services in GFR,
2017, and obtaining of
concurrence from F. D. if
the expenditure exceeds
Rs. 10,00,000 ; and
Class-I Officers Up to Rs. 2.00 lakhs
(Other officers) per annum
Class-II Officers & Up to Rs. 2.00 lakhs
Class-III Officers per annum

451
37. Hire and maintenance Administrative Full powers The expenditure on the
of all kinds of Departments maintenance (including repairs),
computers/office Major Heads of upkeep when the work is
equipments departments entrusted to a ‗Public Sector
Class-I Officers Undertakings‘ and hire for block
(Other officers) time in case of exigency faced
Class-II & Class-III by breakdowns, erratic power
Officers supply, non-availability of
computer spares of special
nature at short notice, etc.,
when time bound work has to
be completed, shall be incurred
subject to general or special
instructions issued by the
Department of Finance/
Information Technology
Department from time to time
in this behalf.
38. Sanction of G. P. Fund Administrative Full powers (Ordinary, As per provision laid down in
Advance Departments Special and non- ―General Provident Fund
refundable GPF (Central Services) Rules, 1960.
withdrawal)
Major Heads of Full powers (Ordinary,
departments Special and non-

452
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
refundable GPF
withdrawal)
Class-I Officers Full powers
(Other officers)
Class-II Officers & (Ordinary, GPF
Class-III Officers Advance)
39. To sanction House Administrative Full powers As per the guidelines issued by
Building Advance Departments the F. D. from time to time.
40. To sanction an Administrative Full powers within As per the guidelines issued by
allowance to Departments budgetary limit the F. D. from time to time.
Orderlies who handle
Gestetner Machines Major Heads of
in addition to their Departments
own duties
41. To incur expenditure Administrative Full powers within
on service postage Departments budgetary limit
stamps for use in
office Major Heads of
Departments
Class-I Officers

453
 Other officers
Class-II & Class-III
Officers
42. Cost of Petrol, Oil Administrative Full powers within
and Lubricant for Departments budgetary limit
Departmental vehicle Major Heads of
Departments
Class-I Officers
(Other officers)
Class-II & III
Officers
43. To sanction expenditure Administrative Full powers within As per the guidelines issued by
on account of Departments budgetary limit the F. D. from time to time.
refreshment charges in
favour of Government Major Heads of
employees participating Departments
in All India Service
Tournaments
44. To grant compensation Administrative Full powers In accordance with the rules
to Govt. employees Departments framed by Government from
under the Workmen‘s time to time.
Compensation Act

454
1 2 3 4 5
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
45. To sanction expenditure Information Full powers within As per the guidelines issued by
on entertainment under Departments budgetary limit the F. D. from time to time.
the unit, ‗News Service
and Briefing of
Correspondents‘
46. To sanction reimburse- Labour Full powers within
ment of expenses Departments budgetary limit
incurred under
Employees State
Insurance Scheme
(ESI Corporation
of India)
47. To sanction refresh- Administrative Full powers within As per the guidelines issued by
ment charges in favour Departments budgetary limit the F. D. from time to time.
of employees on
following occassions :— Major Heads of
(i) During sessions of departments
Legislature Class-I Officers
(ii) Budget Formation (Other officers)
(iii) Plan formulation

455
 (iv) Conduct of
elections
(v) During Cabinet
meeting
48. To sanction the grant Education Departments In respect of the As per the guidelines issued by
of scholarship in Govt. Head of the Institution students in Colleges the F. D. from time to time.
Colleges and Schools
Provincial Joint In respect of the
Directors of School students in High/
Education Higher Secondary
schools.
Chief Education In respect of the
Officer students in Middle
Classes studying
in schools other
than High/Higher
Secondary
49. Outsourcing of staff Administrative Full powers within Subject to obtaining of
(Cook, Driver, etc.) Departments budgetary limit concurrence from Finance
Department.
Major Heads of
departments
––––––

456
ANNEXURE-II TO NOTIFICATION. S. O.-58 DATED 31-12-2019
CLASSIFICATION OF OFFICERS
Major Heads of Departments
1. Chief Secretary.
2. Advocate General.
3. Financial Commissioner.
4. Principal Secretary to Government.
5. Principal Secretary to Lt. Governor.
6. Principal Secretary to Chief Minister.

7. Commissioner/Secretary to Govt./Secretary to Govt. independent

charge of a Department.
8. Financial Commissioner, Coordination, New Delhi.
9. Commissioner of Vigilance.
10. Chief Electoral Officer.
11. Registrar General High Court.
12. Resident Commissioner, J&K Govt., New Delhi.
13. Press and Publicity Advisor to the Chief Minister.
14. Director, IMPA.
15. Establishment Member Public Service Commission.
16. Chairman Subordinate Service Selection Board.
17. Chairman, J&K Special Tribunal.
18. Director General of Police/Additional DG of Police.
19. Director General of Prisons/Additional DG of Prisons.
19. Director General/Additional DG Fire and Emergency Services
20. Director General/Additional DG Home Guards & Civil Defence.

457
21. Director General, Accounts and Treasuries

22. Inspector General of Police/Prisons/Traffic/Telecom and other

Inspector Generals.
23. Deputy Director General/Director, NCC, J&K.
24. Director Forensic Science Laboratory.
25. Director Sainik Welfare.
26. Director Economic and Statistics.
27. Director Information Department.
28. Chief Project Engineers of Major Hydel Projects.

29. Financial Advisor and Chief Accounts Officer, Power Projects

and Flood Control Department.
30. Development Commissioner, Power Development Department.
31. Director General, Youth Services and Sports.
32. Project Director, J&K Sainik School, Manasbal.
33. Director Technical Education.
34. Directors School Education, Jammu/Srinagar.
35. Principal Govt. College of Engineering and Technology.
36. Principal of Degree Colleges.
37. Director Colleges.
38. Excise Commissioner.
39. Sales Tax Commissioner.
40. Director General Funds Organization.
41. Director General, Audit and Inspection.
42. Director General Budget, Finance Department.
43. Director General Codes, Finance Department.

458
44. Director Institutional Finance and Resources, Finance Department.
45. Secretary Legislative Assembly.
46. Director Accounts and Treasuries Kashmir/Jammu
47. Director Industries and Commerce.
48. Director Geology and Mining.
49. Director Handicrafts.
50. Director Handlooms Development Department.
51. Director Sericulture.
52. Registrar Co-operative Societies.
53. Director Agriculture.
54. Director Horticulture.
55. Director Soil Conservation.
56. Director Animal Husbandry.
57. Director Sheep Husbandry.
58. Financial Commissioner (Revenue).
59. Divisional Commissioner.
60. Relief Commissioner (Migrant).
61. District Development Commissioner.
62. Custodian General.
63. Commissioner Agrarian Reforms.
64. Director Food and Supplies.

65. All Chief Engineers (Electrical, R&B, Irrigation, Public Health,

Designs and Planning, Flood Control, Stores Procurement,
Mechanical, UEED etc.).
66. Chief Town Planner.

459
67. Development Commissioner Works.
68. Director Stores and Procurement Department.
69. Chief Architect.
70. Director Health Services.
71. Drugs Controller.
72. Principal Medical College, Jammu/Srinagar.
73. Director Institute of Medical Sciences, Srinagar (SKIMS).
74. Principal SKIMS Medical College, Srinagar.
75. Principal Dental College, Srinagar.
76. Principal Government Dental College, Jammu.
77. Administrator, Associated Hospitals, Srinagar/Jammu.
78. Director Indian System of Medicines.
79. Director Family Welfare, MCH and Immunisation.
80. Director Social Welfare.
81. Director Tourism, Kashmir/Jammu.
83. Director Gardens and Parks/Floriculture.
84. Director Motor Garages.
85. Principal Chief Conservator of Forests/Addl. PCCF.
86. Chief Conservator of Forests.
87. Chief Wildlife Warden.
88. Director Environment and Remote Sensing.
89. Director Forest Institute.
90. Project Director Social Forestry Project.
91. Chairman Pollution Control Board.
92. Director Hospitality and Protocol.

460
 93. Labour Commissioner.
94. Director Stationery and Civil Supplies.
95. Director Employment.
96. General Managers, Govt. Presses, Jammu/Srinagar.
97. Development Commissioner Fisheries.
98. Director Fisheries.
99. Transport Commissioner.
100. Director Local Bodies.
101. Settlement Commissioner
102. Chief Executive Officer, Pahalgam Development Authority.
103. Chief Executive Officer, Gulmarg Development Authority.
104. Chief Executive Officer, Patnitop Development Authority.
105. Director Horticulture (Planning and Marketing).
106. Director Estates.
107. Director Local Fund Audit and Pensions.
108. Chief Executive Officer, Sonamarg.
109. Chief Executive Officer, Kokernag.
110. Chief Executive Officer, Lakhanpur-Sarthal.
111. Chief Executive Officer, Bhaderwah.
112. Chief Executive Officer, Kishtwar.
113. Chief Executive Officer, Poonch.
114. Chief Executive Officer, Verinag.
115. Chief Executive Officer, Aharbal.
116. Chief Executive Officer, Yousmarg.
117. Chief Executive Officer, Wullar-Manasbal.

461
118. Chief Executive Officer, Surinsar-Mansar.
119. Chief Executive Officer, Lohlab-Bangus-Drangyari.
120. Chief Executive Officer, Tosa-Maidan.
121. Director Command Area Development, Kashmir.
122. Director Command Area Development, Jammu.
123. Director Rural Development, Kashmir.
125. Director Rural Development, Jammu.
126. Director Rural Sanitation, J&K.
127. Commissioner, Food Safety, J&K.
128. Director Libraries and Research, J&K.
129. Director Archives, Archeology & Museums, J&K.

130. Principal, Government Medical College, Anantnag/Baramulla/

Doda/Kathua/Rajouri.
–––––––––

462
 CLASS-I OFFICERS
(OTHER OFFICERS)
1. Secretary to Govt. (not being independently incharge of a
Department).
2. Special Secretary and Additional Secretary to Govt.
4. Secretary, Trade Commission.
5. Secretary, J&K Public Service Commission.
6. Registrar, Special Tribunal.
7. Secretary, Service Selection Recruitment Board.
8. Director-cum-Pilot, Civil Aviation Wing.
9. Deputy Inspector General of Police.
10. Deputy Inspector General of Prisons.
11. NCC Group Commander.
12. DIG (Ranges).
13. Director, Defence Labour Procurement Department.
14. Director, Forensic Science Laboratory.
15. Joint Director J&K Fire Services.
16. Zilla Sainik Welfare Officer.
17. Director Sher-i-Kashmir Police Academy, Udhampur.
18. Joint Director Evaluation and Statistics.
19. Director Audio Visual Division.
20. Joint Director Press and Publication, Information Department.
21. Joint Director Audio Visual Division, Information Department.
22. Joint Director Planning and Administration, Information Deptt.

23. Chief Public Relation Officer, Kashmir Bureau of Information,

New Delhi.

463
24. Principal, Polytechnic.
25. Joint Director, Education.
26. Principal, J&K Institute of Education.
27. Editor, Gazetteers Unit.
28. Principal, College of Physical Education.
29. Principal, Northern Zonal Accountancy Training Institute, Jammu.
30. Principal, Accountancy Training School, Srinagar
31. Examiner, Local Fund Audit.
32. Deputy Sales Tax Commissioner (Appeals).
33. Deputy Director Funds Organisation.

34. Director Finance (Special Scale Officers), Financial

Advisor/Chief Accounts Officer (Selection Grade Officers),
Sadder Treasury Officer, Srinagar/Jammu.
35. Registrar High Court.

36. District and Session Judges, District Magistrate and Additional

District Magistrate.
37. Director Litigation, Srinagar/Jammu.
38. Joint Director Industries.
39. Director Sericulture Development Department, Jammu/Srinagar.
40. Director (Research) Sericulture Dev. Department.
41. Joint Director Handicrafts.
42. Mining Engineers.
43. Chief Drilling Engineers.
44. Joint Director/Dy. Director, Floriculture.
45. General Managers, Industries Centres.
46. Director Extension and Training Sericulture Department.

464
47. Joint Director Handlooms.
48. Joint Director Geology and Mining.
49. Deputy Director Geology and Mining.
50. Additional Registrar Co-operatives.
51. Joint Director, Agriculture.
52. Director, Rakh and Farms.
53. Maize Breeder.
54. Joint Registrar Co-operative Societies.
55. Joint Director Agriculture Multiple Cropping.
56. Deputy Director Horticulture.
57. Agriculture Research Engineers.
58. Rice Specialist.
59. Soil Survey Officer.
60. Agriculture Chemist.
61. Entomologist.
62. Vegetable Specialist.
63. Agronomist.
64. Agriculture Botanist.
65. Geneticist.
66. Deputy Director Training.
67. Wheat Breeder.
68. Deputy Director, Agriculture.
69. Agrostologist.
70. Superintending Engineer, Engineering Wing, Agriculture Deptt.

71. Deputy Director, Marketing (Horticulture, Planning and

Marketing).

465
72. Mushroom Specialists.
73. Director (Provincial), Fire and Emergency Services.
74. Plant Pathologist (Apple Scab).
75. Deputy Director, Animal Husbandry.
76. Manager, Cattle Breeding Farm.
77. Poultry Project Officer.
78. Deputy Director, Sheep Husbandry.
79. Deputy Director, Animal Husbandry.
80. Deputy Director, Poultry.
81. Deputy Director, Research Animal Husbandry Department.
82. Project Officer, Intensive Cattle Development.
83. Deputy Director, Poultry Marketing Jammu/Kashmir.
84. Poultry Geneticist, Jammu/Kashmir.
85. Poultry Nutritionist.
86. Manager, Exotic Cattle Breeding Farm Mansbal.
87. Joint Director, Sheep Husbandry Department.
88. Joint Director, Animal Husbandry Department.

89. Project Director Live Stock Production Programme, Baramulla,

Jammu/Srinagar.
90. Director Land Records.
91. Director of Consolidation.
92. Special Officer, Auqaf.
93. Deputy Commissioners.
94. Additional Commissioners.
95. Superintending Engineer, Electric, R&B, Irrigation, Public Health,
Designs and Planning, Flood Control, Mechanical & UEED.
96. Senior Drilling Engineer of Geology and Mining Department.

466
 97. Deputy Development Commissioner (Works), Jammu/Srinagar.
98. Senior Architect.
99. Superintendents of Hospitals.
100. Deputy Director, Health Services.
101. Superintendents of Nursing Homes.
102. Principal, Ayurvedic College.
103. J&K T. B. Officer.
104. Joint Director Health Services.

105. Controller Stores, Health and Family Welfare Medical Education

Department.
106. Research Officer, Vaccine.
107. Joint Director (Adm.), SKIMS.
108. Medical Superintendent, SKIMS.
109. Chief Hospital Engineer, SKIMS.
110. Deputy Director Indian System of Medicines.
111. Deputy Controller Drugs and Food Organisation.
112. Project Chief Integrated Watershed Dev. Project (IWDP) Hills.
114. Conservator of Forests.
115. Soil Conservation Officer.
116. Director Forest Protection Force.
117. Joint Director Fisheries.
118. Chief Aquaculture Engineer.
119. Assistant Commissioner Dev. (Rural Development).
120. Joint Transport Commissioner.
121. Regional Transport Officer, Jammu/Srinagar.

467
122. Joint Director Field Survey Organisation.
123. Joint Director Town Planning Organisation.
124. Director Urdu Co-ordination Cell.
–––––

468
ANNEXURE-II TO NOTIFICATION, S.O.-58 DATED 31-12-2019
CLASS-II OFFICERS

1. Deputy Secretaries to Government.

2. Deputy Director Estates.
3. Trade Agents.
4. Deputy Comptroller Governor's House-hold.
5. Unit Commanders, National Cadet Corps.

6. Assistant Inspector General of Police/SSP/Superintendent of

Police.

7. Secretary, Advisory Board (Maintenance of Internal Security

Act, etc.).
8. Deputy Director J&K Fire Services.
9. Superintendent Central Jails, Srinagar/Jammu.
10. Deputy Director Statistics.
11. Chief Planning Officers.
12. Principal Information Officers.
13. Assistant Director, Research and Publications.
14. Assistant Directors of Information, Jammu/Kashmir.

15. Public Relation Officer, Kashmir Bureau of Information, New

Delhi.
16. Executive Engineers, Electric.

17. Research Officer, lncharge Hydraulic Research Station, Jammu

and Irrigation Laboratories Jammu and Kashmir.
18. Deputy Director Industrial Training Institute.
19. Principals of District Institutes of Education.
20. Deputy Directors, Archives, Library, Archaeology and Museums.

469
21. Divisional Youth Welfare Officer.
22. Principal Industrial Training Institute.
23. Chief Education Officers.

24. Provincial Social Education Supervisors, Social Education

Department.
25. Deputy Director Technical Education.
26. General Treasurer.
27. Institutional Finance and Resources Officer, Finance Department.

28. District Treasury Officer/Treasury Officer, Additional

Treasury— Srinagar/Jammu.
29. Deputy Director, Audit and Inspections.
30. Sub-Judges.
31. Deputy Registrar, High Court.
32. Deputy Director, Handlooms.
33. Geologist Grade-I.
34. Development Officer, Sericulture Dev. Department.
35. Deputy Director Handicrafts (Trainings).
36. General Manager, Massive Craft Scheme.
37. Deputy Director Quality Control.
40. Chemical Examiner.
41. Principal Extension Training Centre.
42. Deputy Registrars of Co-operative Societies.
43. Manager, Padgampura Farm.
44. Agriculture Engineer.
45. Farm Manager, Seed Multiplication Farm, Chinor.

470
46. Manager-cum-Chemist (Horticulture Deptt.).
47. District Horticulture Officers.
48. Project Officer, Multiple Cropping.

49. Junior Agronomist (All India Coordinator Potato Dev.

Programme).
50. Chief Agriculture Officers.
51. Potato Development Officers.
52. Floriculturists.
53. Executive Engineer, Engineering Wing, Agriculture Department.
54. Agriculture Development Officer.
55. Assistant Director, Horticulture Planning and Marketing.
56. Area Marketing Officer (Horticulture, Planning and Marketing).
57. Vegetable Development Officers.
58. Planning Officer, Co-operative Department.
59. Divisional Seed Certification Officer (Agriculture Dev.)
60. Seed Analyst, Jammu/Srinagar, Agriculture Department.

61. Mushroom Development Officer, Jammu/Kashmir Agriculture

Department.
62. Assistant Agrostologist.
63. Manager, Plant Protection Workshop and Stores Srinagar/Jammu.
64. Chief Animal Husbandry Officer.
65. Veterinary Disease Investigation Officer PDO/LBO.
66. Poultry Development Officer.
67. Assistant Project Officer, Sheep Husbandry Department.
68. Development Officer, DPAP (Sheep), Doda.

471
69. Manager, Poultry Farm, Srinagar.
70. Animal Husbandry Extension Officer, Publicity Wing, Jammu.
71. Poultry Marketing Officer, Jammu/Srinagar.
72. Manager, Rearing Space, Jammu/Srinagar.
73. Dairy Development Officer.

74. Deputy Director, Food and Fodder Programme, Animal

Husbandry Department.
75. Superintendent, Sheep Breeding Farm.
76. Project Officer, Intensive Development Sheep.
77. Research Officer, Disease Investigation Sheep.
78. Sheep and Wool Development Officers.
79. Settlement Officers.
80. Deputy ControIler, Weights and Measures.
81. Assistant Settlement Officers.
82. Assistant Commissioners
83. Principals, Revenue Training School, Jammu and Srinagar.
84. Settlement Officer (Consolidation).
85. Sub-Divisional Officers of the Revenue Department.
86. Deputy Director, Food and Supplies.
87. Deputy Director, Mechanical and Stores Department.
88. Chief Designer, Handicrafts.
89. Executive Engineers, R&B.
90. Executive Engineers, Mechanical and Stores.
91. Drilling Engineer of Geology and Mining Department.
92. Architect.

472
 93. Town Planner.
94. Assistant Executive Engineer.
95. Joint Director (Works).

96. Chief Executive Officer, Project Organisation, Pahalgam and

Gulmarg.
97. Divisional Architect.
98. Executive Engineer, Electric/MechanicaI SKIMS, Srinagar.
99. Senior Resident, SKIMS, Srinagar.
100. Administrative Officer, Associated Hosptials, Srinagar/Jammu.
101. Operation Research Officer, SKIMS, Srinagar.
102. Academic Registrar, SKIMS, Srinagar.
103. Area Development Officers.

104. Project Officer, Rehber-I-Sehat, Ganderbal Block, Health and

Family Welfare and Medical Education Department.
105. Chief Librarian, SKIMS, Srinagar.
106. Executive Hospital Engineers (Electronics), SKIMS, Srinagar.

107. Deputy Controller Stores, Health and Family Welfare and

Medical Education Department.
108. Stores Purchase Officer, SKIMS, Srinagar.
109. Administrative Officer, SKIMS, Srinagar.
110. Principal, Regional Family Planning Training Centre.

111. Medical Officer, Incharge of Centrally Sponsored and Aided

Scheme namely :—
(i) Leprosy Control Programme ;
(ii) Eradication of Small Pox ;
(iii) Family Planning Programme ;

473
 (iv) B.C.G. Programme ;
(v) Trachoma Pilot Project ;
(vi) Health Education Bureau ; and
(vii) Anti V. D. Programme.
112. Deputy Superintendents of City Hospitals and C. D. Hospitals.
113. Deputy Superintendent, SKIMS Hospital, Srinagar.
114. Malariologist.
115. District Medical Officers.
116. Assistant Director, Health Services (Indian Medicines).
117. Special Officer for Special Programme for Nutrition for Children.
118. Programme Officer/Deputy Director, Social Welfare Department.
119. Executive Engineer, UEED.
220. Deputy Director, Tourism.
221. Garden Keepers, Parks and Gardens.
122. Deputy Director, Botanist, Parks and Gardens.
123. Regional Wildlife Warden.
124. Joint Director, Integrated Water Shed Project.
125. Deputy Director IWDP.
126. Chief Executive Officer.
127. Regional Director, Pollution Control Board.
128. Member-Secretary, Pollution Control Board.
129. Deputy Director, Pollution Control Board.
130. Joint Director, Forest Protection Force.
131. Deputy Director, Forest Protection Force.
132. Divisional Forest Officer.

474
133. Deputy Conservator of Forests.
134. Executive Engineers, Irrigation.
135. Executive Engineers, Flood Control, Designs and Planning.
136. Executive Engineers, Public Health.
137. Deputy Director, Hospitality and Protocol.
138. District Employment Officer.
139. Deputy Director, Central Employment Department.

140. Deputy Director, Youth Employment, Information Centre,

Srinagar/ Jammu.
141. Joint Director/Deputy Director, Employment.
142. Deputy Labour Commissioner.
143. Deputy Director/Chief Project Officers, Fisheries.
144. Aquaculture Engineer.
145. Project Officer, District Rural Dev. Agency.
146. District Panchayat Officer.
147. Deputy Directors, Motor Grarages.
148. Superintendent, National Sample Survey.
149. Toshakhana Officers.
150. Deputy Director, Field Survey Organisation.
151. Chairman, Divisional Debt Consultation Board, Jammu/Srinagar.
152. Land Scape Architect Project Organisation, Soura.
153. Deputy Registrar, Special Tribunal.
–––––

475
ANNEXURE-II TO NOTIFICATION S. O.-58 DATED 31-12-2019
CLASS-III OFFICERS
1. Under Secretary to Govt.
2. Administrative Officer.
3. Superintendent of District Jails (other than Srinagar and Jammu).
4. Assistant Directors, Fire Services.
5. Deputy Superintendent of Police.
6. Assistant Director, Statistics.
7. Revenue Officer, Power Development Department.
8. Assistant Director, Physical Education.
9. Officer Incharge Industrial Training Institute.
10. Principals, Higher Secondary Schools (10+2).
11. Assistant Director Archives, Archaeology and Museum.
12. District Youth Welfare Officers.
13. Accounts Officer.
14. Excise and Taxation Officers.
15. Public Prosecutors/Addl. Public Prosecutors.
16. Sub-Registrars.
17. Munsiffs.
18. Manager, Govt. Central Market, Srinagar.
19. Manager, Industrial Estates.
20. Factory Chemists.
22. Inspectors of Factories.
23. Assistant Director, Handlooms.
24. Assistant Director, Handicrafts.

476
25. Sr. Manager, Massive Craft Scheme.
26. Deputy Director of Sericulture Dev. Department.
27. Manager, Industries Centres.
28. Manager, Seed Sericulture Dev. Department.
29. Geologist Grade-II.
30. Manager, Plant Protection Workshop and Stores (Distt. Level).
31. Garden Assistant.
32. Economists, Horticulture, Planning and Marketing.
33. Assistant Soil Chemist, Soil Testing Laboratory.
34. Information Publicity Officer (Horticulture Department).
35. Principal, Malies Training Class.
36. Officer Incharge, Tea Cultivation.
37. Assistant Horticulturists.
38. Zonal Education Officer/Headmaster.
39. Zonal Agriculture Production Officer.
40. Superintendent Gardens, Agriculture Department.
41. Assistant Registrar, Co-operatives.
42. Field Manuring Officer.
43. Assistant Plant Protection Officer.
44. Officer Incharge, Mechanised Farm, Nandpur.
45. Crop Botanist.
46. Mycologist.
47. Veterinary Inspectors.
48. Liver Fluke Control Officers, Agriculture Department.
49. Livestock Dev. Officers, Animal Husbandry Department.

477
50. Hill Cattle Development Officer.
51. Chief Executive Officer, Emergency Relief Organisation.
52. Consolidation Officers.
53. Tehsildars.
54. Provincial Assistant Controllers of Weights and Measures.
55. Officer Incharge Border Area Land Reclamation.
56. Assistant Director, Food and Supplies.
57. Assistant Architect.
58. Assistant Town Planner.
59. Assistant Engineers.
60. Chief B. C. G. Officer.
61. Epidemiologists.
62. Veneriologists.
63. Asstt. Director, Health Services (Small Pox Project Scheme).
64. Nutrition Survey Officer.
65. Malaria Officer.

66. Deputy Superintendents of City Hospital and C. D. Hospital

except Deputy Superintendent, SMHS Hospital, Srinagar.
67. Drug Analyst.
68. Assistant District Medical Officer (Indian Medicine).
69. District Family Planning Officers.

70. Medical Officers (Assistant Surgeons), Incharge Primary Health

Centres.
71. Assistant Director (Crafts) Social Welfare Department.

72. Project Officers Community Projects/District Social Welfare

Officer/CDPOs/Assistant Director, Social Welfare Department.

478
73. Tourist Officer, Katra.
74. Assistant Director, Gardens and Parks.
75. Assistant Director, Tourism.
76. Officer Incharge, Floriculture.
77. Assistant Wildlife Warden.
78. Assistant Director, Forest Protection Force.
79. Assistant Soil Conservation Officer.

APPENDICES
80. Assistant Research Officer, Irrigation, Research Laboratories.

81. Superintendents/Assistant Controller, Stationery and Supplies

Department Jammu/Srinagar.
82. Assistant Labour Commissioner.
83. Assistant Director/Sr. Project Officer, Fisheries.
84. Assistant Aquaculture Engineers.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

85. Block Development Officers.
86. Block Medical Officers.
87. Administrative Officer, J&K, SRTC.
88. Works Manager/Parts Managers, J&K SRTC.
89. Assistant Regional Transport Officer.
90. Central Checking Officer, J&K SRTC.
91. Public Analyst.
92. Supervisors, National Fitness Corps., Jammu/Srinagar.
93. Senior Project Officer/Asstt. Director, Fisheries.

479
 Appendix 200 A
QUESTIONNAIRE (Under duties of Superintending Engineer)

Is the division having adequate staff? If not, indicate where it is deficient.

Is the technical and ministerial staff distributed properly according to requirements? Are
there sanctioned posts left vacant; if so why?
Is there sufficient number of scientific and mathematical instruments?
Are they in good working condition? If there is deficiency indicate the
same.
Are the tools and the plant and the staff to man them adequate?
Have steps been taken to forecast and procure the requirements of departmental materials?
Are the arrangements for conveyance of the required materials to different work sites
adequate?
Has action been taken and followed up in all cases where land acquisition is involved? If
not indicate cases where delays are noticed.
Have estimates been prepared for all budgeted works; if not what are the steps taken? Have
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

steps been taken to regularize works started without adequate funds? Give details.
Are there works started without Administrative Sanction or Technical Sanction? If so give
details and reasons.
Has a Review of expenditure vis-à-vis budget provision been made with regard to works
under various head? If so where performance budget has been introduced, has the review of
the performance been made in accordance with the performance budget?
Have estimates been prepared and sanctioned for all budgeted works? If not, indicate the
present position regarding estimates as given below:
No. of works not yet investigated,
No. of works investigated and in the design stage.
No. of works where estimate is under preparation or scrutiny.
No. of works where investigation design or estimate is held up on account of some special
reasons. Has a test check of the designs approved by the Executive Engineer been made? If
so, are these in accordance with standards followed in the Department?
Where type designs are available are these being adopted?
Are there cases where the actual cost of work has exceeded or is likely to exceed the
Sanctioned Estimate by more than 50%? If so, make a case study and indicate the principal
reasons for the excess and how such large excess can be avoided in future.
Have all safety precautions been taken in the works under execution?
Have the various registers like Revenue Register Tender Register, Building maintenance
register, Acquittance roll been examined? What are the general conclusions after a review of
the register?
Are service books kept up-to-date?
Has a test check of overtime allowances paid been made? If so, does this disclose any
abnormalities or irregularities?
Has a test check been made regarding wages of workers to whom Factory Act is applicable?
If so does this disclose any irregularity?
Has the Executive Engineer inspected the Subdivision office and Stores if any under his
control during the year? If so review any one of the inspection registers of the Executive
Engineer and indicate the findings. Are labour gangs in different sections of roads adequate?
Is sufficient number of quarries available?
Is road traffic statistics conducted and details kept in proper form?
Are there pending replies to remarks of Audit reports, inspection reports and public accounts,
committee estimates committee etc? If so give details.
Have sufficient computers installed in Divisions and are they operational? If not, action
taken.

480
 Appendix 200 C
Space Standards : Standards of space allotment for various types of Buildings :
School Buildings
For Primary Schools.
Class Room : Minimum of 1 sq.m per student
For Secondary Schools.
Class Room : Minimum of 1 sq.m per student
For Colleges (Arts & Science)
Lecture Hall : Minimum of 1.2 sq.m per student Laboratory : Minimum of 2.5 sq.m per student
The requirement for Professional Colleges will be suggested by the authorities concerned.
Standards for student hostels
For Dormitories : Minimum of 4.5 sq.m per student
For triple occupancy : Minimum of 6.5 sq.m per student
For Double occupancy: Minimum of 7.5 sq.m per student
For Single Occupancy: Minimum of 9.0 sq.m per student
Standards For sanitary requirements:
Relevant Rules in JKMBR shall be followed.
For Office buildings, officers above rank of executive engineer and above are eligible for separate
toilet.
Space standards for tourist Bunglows
3.1. Economic Class :
Area for Single Room: 12 sq.m. excluding toilets Area for Double Room: 18 sq.m.excluding toilets

3.1. Upper Class :

Area for Single Room: 15sq.m. excluding toilets
Area for Double Room: 20 sq.m. excluding toilets

Minimum Space Standards for Government Officials

For Gazetted Officer 15 sq.m.

For Non-gazetted Officer 3.75 sq.m
For Records 10% of the Item No.2 above

481
 Appendix 400 A

Areas covered under Integrated Computerised MIS (section 406.5)

Core Business Function Contracts Technical Tools to Network and

Functions /Project Management Management assist core business function Development Information Systems Automation
functions Management

 Roads Information  Inventory/ Assets  Contracts  Contractor  Computer Aided  General Ledger  Personal Files  PWD  eMail
system (with GIS) Management  Contracts Profile Design Tools  Accounts Payables  Service records  Website / P  Messaging
 Roads Maintenance  Procurement and Administration  Projects in  Modeling and  Accounts  Salary Records WINGS  Workflow
Management Tender  Planning progress Simulation Tools Receivables  Seniority,  Secure automation
 Roads Safety Management  Tendering  /completed  Structural  Assets Valuation Promotions and Department  Group ware
Management/Accide  Revenue: Billing  Planning  EMD &BG Analysis  Funds Flow Transfers Intranet / WAN  MS Office
nt Info System & Collection  Costing  Bills Raised Tools Management  Training and for employees equivalent
 Funding  Stage- wise  Satellite Imagery  Cash Management Career &internal tools Files
 Bridges  Budget Planning stakeholders
& Monitoring  Resource payment s made Interpretation/  Cheque Books Development Tracking
Management   Secure Extranet 

Management  Recoveries Due editing tools Management Performance Library
 Pavement Contracts  Aerial Photography  Treasury for external
 Billing  Performance Appraisals Information
Management Management  stakeholders
 Progress Report / Other Integration Management Skills Inventory Management
 Traffic Management  Contractors Tools  Budgeting  Capability Profile and agencies  Legislative
System Management  GIS  Financial Controls  Employee Payroll  Public Assembly &
 Toll ways  Projects  environment  Financial  Expense and Access Parliament
Management System Management  Technical Travel portal Q&A
Reporting
 Real-time Traffic   HW, SW&  Litigation
Stores Accounting  Pay Roll
482

Databases and Processing

Control and  Environment Standards Accounting  Leave Records  Networking and Court
Monitoring System Management  Electronic  Expense and  Loans and Facilities Cases
 Investigation and Management Tracking
 Social and RAP Documents Travels Advances
Management   Configuration  Land
Planning  Monitoring &  Measurement PF/ESI
System  management Acquisition
 Design & Analysis Learning System computerization Staff Welfare
  Formats & Cases
 Works /  Measurement Knowledge
Reports
Management and Tracking
Construction Book
On-Line Management  Legacy
Management computerization Data, Maps,
Training
 Decision Support
 Policies and Drawings,
Systems files
Employee related
 Stakeholders Information  digitization.
Management
Systems
 Strategic
Performance
Reporting &
Management
 Integrated
Computerized
Information
System

APPENDIC PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-

2020
 Appendix 1100.1 Environmental Regulations (National, State and Local) Management

S.No. Name of Act/ Brief description Implementing Agency

Rule
1. The This includes air, noise and water quality standardsMinistry of Environment &
Environmental and the requirements for the preparation ofForests
Protection Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) statements
Act,1986, and the for developmental projects. Expansion orCentral Pollution Control Board
Environmental modernization of any activity shall not be undertaken
Impact in any part of India unless it has been accordedJ&K Science Technology
Assessment (EIA) environmental clearance by the Union Government,&Environment Department
Notification, in accordance with the procedures specified in this
2006 notification. As per the procedure, anybody whoJ&K State Pollution Control

APPENDICES
desires to undertake any project is required to submitBoard
a detailed project report, which shall inter-alia include
an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA).

As per the EIA Notification 2006, (i) new State

highways and (ii) expansion of State highways greater
than 30 km involving additional right of way greater
than 20m involving land acquisition are classified as
Category „B‟ projects. Also, (i) buildings ≥ 20000

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

sq.mtrs and <1,50,000 sq.mtrs. of built-up area and
(ii)Townships and Area Development projects
covering an area ≥ 50ha and or built up area ≥
1,50,000 sq.mtrs are classified as Category „B‟
projects.

In these Category „B‟ projects or activities, PWD

have to submit an application seeking prior
environmental clearance made in Form 1 to the
concerned State level Expert Appraisal Committee
(SEAC) for determining whether or not the project or
activity requires further environmental studies such as
the preparation of an Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA). If SEAC indicates that the project
require an EIA report, then the project shall be
classified as Category „B1.‟ Otherwise, the
project shall be termed Category „B2‟ and will not
require an EIA report.
2. The Water and AirPrevention and Control of Pollution, Setting andCentral Pollution Control Board
(Prevention andmanaging water quality and effluent standards, as
Control ofwell as monitoring water quality, prosecuting ofJ&K State Pollution
Pollution) Acts offenders and issuing licenses for establishment and
1974 and operation of certain facilities.
1981 Empowered for conduct of public hearing of all
(respectively) projects including road

483
 projects. Control Board

3. The Public An Act to provide for public liability insurance for theJ&K State Pollution Control
Liability purpose of providing immediate relief to the personsBoard
Insurance Act, affected by accident occurring while handling any
1991 hazardous substance (defined under the Environment
(Protection) Act 1986 and exceeding such quantity as
may be specified by notification by
the central Government and for matters connected
there with or incidental thereto.
4. The National An Act to provide for strict liability for damagesMinistry of Environment &
Environment arising out of any accident occurring while handlingForests
Tribunal Act, any hazardous substance and for the establishment of
1995 a National Environment Tribunal for effective and
expeditious disposal of cases arising from such
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

accident, with a view to giving relief and

compensation for damages to persons, property and
the environment and for matters connected
therewith or incidental thereto.
5. The National An Act to provide for the establishment of a NationalMinistry of Environment &
Environment Environment Appellate Authority to hear appealsForests
Appellate with respect to restriction of areas in which any
Authority Act, industries, operations or processes or class of
1997 industries, operations or processes shall not be carried
out or shall be carried out subject to certain safeguards
under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and for
matters connected
therewith or incidental thereto.
6. The Forest The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 pertains to the
(Conservation) cases of diversion of forest area and felling of road
Act, 1980 side plantation. Depending on the size of the tract to
be cleared, clearances are applied for at the following
levels of government: Restrictions and clearance
procedure proposed in the Forest (Conservation) Act
applies wholly to the natural
forest areas, even in case the protected / designated
forest area does not have any vegetation cover.
Area of forests to be cleared or diverted as per the Ministry of Environment
latest modification / orders and Forests
Area of forest to be cleared or diverted as per the Chief Conservator of Forests or
latest modification / orders Conservator of Forests of the
concerned Regional Office of
the Ministry of Environment
and Forests.

7. The WildlifeEstablish a number of National Parks and Sanctuaries Ministry of Environment &
(Protection) Actto protect and conserve the flora and fauna. Forests
1972

484
8. The BiologicalAn Act to provide for conservation of biologicalMinistry of Environment &
Diversity Actdiversity, sustainable use of its components and fairForests
2002 and equitable sharing of the benefits arising out of the
use of biological resources, knowledge and for
matters connected there with or incidental thereto.
To develop national strategies, plans, programmes for
the conservation and promotion and sustainable use
of biological diversity including measures for
identification and monitoring of areas rich in
biological resources, promotion of insitu, and exsitu,
conservation of biological resources, incentives for
research, training and public education to increase
awareness with respect to biodiversity.
9. The LAWA Act Establishment of No construction Zones to protect Lakes

APPENDICES
and waterways
and conserve the flora and fauna. Department

10. The Motor Enforce standards for prevention and control ofState Transport Authority /
Vehicles Act, vehicular pollution . The authority also checksPCB
1988 emission standards of registered vehicles, collect road

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

taxes, and issues licenses Pollution Under
Control Certificate (PUC) programme to control
vehicular emissions.
11. The Ancient According to this Act, area within radii of 100m andArchaeological Survey of India
Monuments , 300m from the ―protected property‖ are designated as(ASI) if the
Archaeological ―protected area‖ and ―controlled area‖ respectively.site/remains/monuments are
Sites and No development activity (including building, mining,protected by ASI
Remains Act, excavating, blasting) is permitted in theJ&K Department of
1958 ―protected`area‖ and development activities Archaeology if these are
likely to damage the protected property are not protected by the UT
permitted in the ―controlledarea‖.
12. The Building and All the establishments who carry on any building or The employer to whom the Act
other other construction work and employ 10 or more applies has to obtain a
Construction workers are covered under this Act. All such registration certificate from the
Workers establishments are required to pay cess at rate as per Registering Officer appointed
(Regulation of labour department of construction as may be notified by the Government
Employment and by the Government. The employer of the
Conditions of establishment is required to provide safety measures
Service) Act 1996 at the Building or Construction work and other
welfare measures, such as Canteens, First-aid
facilities,Ambulance,Housing accommodation for
workers near the workplace etc.
13. Explosives Act, An act, to regulate manufacture, possession, use, Central Government
1884 and sale, transport, import and export of explosives. (Department of
Explosive Rules, Explosives)
1983
14. Petroleum Act, An Act to consolidate and amend the law relating to Central Government
1934 and the import, transport, storage, production, refining

485
 Petroleum Rules, and blending of petroleum.
2002
15. The Mines and An Act and rules to provide for the regulation ofState Government
Minerals mines and the development of minerals to be followed
(Regulations and for the extraction of the sand and aggregates through
Development) mining.
Act, 1957 and
rules thereunder
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

486
 Appendix 1100.2 Standard EMP for Projects / Works

Environmental
S. Management Measures
Issue
No.

A. INITIAL JOINT VERIFICATION

The PWD and the Contractor will carry out joint field verification to ascertain the
Initial Joint Field possibility to saving trees, environmental and community resources.
Verification for The verification exercise should assess the need for additional protection measures or
W.A.
modifying changes in design / scale / nature of protection measures including the efficacy of
1
contract enhancement measures suggested in the EMP. Proper documentation and justifications /

APPENDICES
documents reasons shall be maintained in all such cases where deviation from the original EMPis
proposed.
Relocation of All community utilities and properties i.e., water supply lines, sewer lines, bank buildings,
W.A. Community health centers, schools, health clinics and veterinary hospitals will be relocated before
2 Utilities & construction starts, on any section of the project corridor. The PWD will relocate these
Common properties in consultation and written agreement with the agency/ owner/community. The
Property schools and health centers will be constructed as per the relevant state norms.
Resources. All other community property resources within the corridor of impact such as handpumps,
ponds, grazing lands etc. will be relocated.
The relocation sites for these schools will be identified in accordance with the choice of

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the community. Environmental considerations with suitable / required actions including
health and hygiene aspects will be kept in mind while relocating all community utilities
and resources.
All religious property resources such as shrines, temples and mosques within the project
zone will be relocated.
Sites for the relocation of these religious structures will be identified in accordance with
the choice of the community. The NGO and PWD in consultation with local people will
finalize design of these buildings. As far as possible, the architectural elements of the
structure should be conserved / reflected / translated into the design of new structures.
The entire process (i.e. selection of relocation sites and designs) will be under
supervision of the PWD. There location will be completed before the construction starts
in these sites.

The contractor shall take necessary care to ensure no impact on cultural properties such as
(i) historic sites and remains, (ii) places of worship including, mosques, churches, shrines
W.A. Cultural and temples (iii) graveyards and monuments and other important structures as identified
3 properties during the design.
As per design, if there are works that impact these cultural properties, the contractor shall
execute the works in close co-ordination with the PWD and the local community.
B. FLORA & FAUNA

487
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

All efforts will be made to preserve trees including evaluation of minor design
adjustments / alternatives (as applicable) to save trees. Specific attention will be given
for protecting giant trees, green tunnels and locally important trees (religiously
Preservation of important, etc.).
W.B.1
Trees Tree cutting is to proceed only after all the legal requirements including attaining of
In-principle and Formal Clearances from the Forest Dept. / DoEF / MoEF are
completed and subsequently a written order is issued to the Contractor.
Particular species declared as „protected‟ by the State‟s Forest Dept. in the private
land will be felled only after due clearance from the Forest Dept. is obtained.
Contractor shall acquire material only from approved and licensed quarries. If
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

W.C.2 Quarrying contractor intends to develop a new quarry, then all the approvals and licenses must
be obtained prior to withdrawing material from the quarry. Contractor shall adhere to
the separate Guidelines on quarry management as per PCB /DA
D. CONSTRUCTION CAMP
Arrangements forThe contractor as per prevalent rules will carry out negotiations with the landowners
W.D.1 Temporary Landfor obtaining their consent for temporary use of lands for construction sites/hot mix
Requirement plants / traffic detours / borrow areas etc. The PWD will be required to ensure that the
clearing up of the site prior to handing over to the owner(after
construction or completion of the activity) is included in the contract.
Hot mix plants and batching plants will be sited sufficiently away from settlements and
agricultural operations or any commercial establishments. Such plants will be located
atleast 150m away from the nearest village/settlement preferably in the downwind
direction.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed lay-out plan for all such sites and approval of
Crushers, hot-mix
PWD shall be necessary prior to their establishment.
W.D. 2 plants and Batching
Arrangements to control dust pollution through provision of windscreens, sprinklers,
Plants Location
dust encapsulation will have to be provided at all such sites.
Specifications of crushers, hot mix plants and batching plants will comply with the
requirements of the relevant current emission control legislations and Consent / NOC
for all such plants shall be submitted to the PWD.
The Contractor shall not initiate plant/s operation till the required legal clearances are
obtained and submitted.

488
 S. No. Environmental Issue Management Measures

All vehicles, equipment and machinery to be procured for construction will

confirm to the relevant Bureau of India Standard (BIS) norms. The discharge
Other Constructionstandards promulgated under the Environment Protection Act, 1986 will be
Vehicles, Equipmentstrictly adhered to.
W.D.3
and Machinery Noise limits for construction equipments to be procured such as compactors,
rollers, front loaders concrete mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws

APPENDICES
will not exceed 75 d B (A), measured at one meter from the edge of the
equipment in freefield, as specified in the Environment (Protection)
Rules,1986.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of PUC for all vehicles and machinery
used during the contract period.
The contractor will use ground water as a source of water for the construction
and will setup the own bore-well facility for construction work. Contractor
can use the ponds, which are not in use by community or identified to fill up
for the project, but in that case, before using any pond water contractor will
obtain written consent from the owner and submit to PWD.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

To avoid disruption / disturbance to other water users, the contractor will
extract water from fixed locations and consult the PWD before finalizing the
locations.
W.D.4 Arrangement for The Contractor will provide a list of locations and type of sources from where
Construction Water water for construction will be used.
The contractor will not be allowed to pump from any irrigation canal and
surface water bodies used by community.
The contractor will need to comply with the requirements of the State Ground
Water Department and seek their approval for doing so and submit copies of
the permission to PWD prior to initiating the works.
Contractor will arrange adequate supply and storage of water for the whole
construction period at his own costs. The Contractor will submit a list of
source/s from where water will be used for the project to PWD. The
contractor will take all precaution to minimize the wastage of water in the
construction process/ operation.

The Contractor will also provide potable water facilities within the precincts
Potable water for of every work place in an accessible place, as per standards set by the Building
W.D.5
labour and other ConstructionWorkers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Service) Act,1996.
The contractor will also guarantee the supply of sufficient quantity of
potable water (as per IS) in every work place / labor camp site at suitable and
easily accessible places and regular maintenance of such facilities.

489
 Environmental Issue Management Measures
S. No.

E. CONSTRUCTION WASTES

Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing road will be suitably
reused in the proposed construction, subject to the suitability of the materials
and approval of the PWD as follows:
The sub grade of the existing pavement shall be used as embankment fill
material.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

The existing base and sub-base material shall be recycled as sub-base of

the haul road or access roads. The existing bitumen surface may be utilized
for the paving of cross roads, access roads and paving works in
Generation of Debris
construction sites and campus, temporary traffic diversions, haulage
from dismantling
routes, etc.
structures and road
W.E.1 The contractor will suitably dispose off unutilized debris materials either
surface through filling up of borrow areas located in waste land or at pre-designated
disposal locations, subject to the approval of the PWD.
At locations identified for disposal of residual bituminous wastes, the disposal
will be carried out over a 60 mm thick layer of rammed clay so as to eliminate
the possibility of leaching of wastes into the ground water. The contractor will
ensure that the surface area of such disposal pits is covered with a layer of soil
All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision,
maintenance, dismantling and clearing debris, will be considered incidental to
the work and will be planned and implemented by the contractor as approved
and directed by the PWD.
The pre-designed disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Solid
Waste Management Plan to be prepared by Contractor in consultation and with
approval of PWD.
Debris generated from pile driving or other construction activities shall be
disposed such that it does not flow into the surface water bodies or form mud
puddles in the area.
The contractor shall identify dumping sites. The identified locations will be
reported to the PWD. These locations will be checked on site and accordingly
approved by PWD prior to any disposal of wastematerials.

490
 S. No. Environmental Issue Management Measures

The pre-identified disposal locations will be a part of Waste Disposal to be

prepared by the Contractor in consultation and with approval of PWD.
Location of disposal sites will be finalized prior to completion of the
earthworks on any particular section of the road.
Other Construction The PWD will approve these disposal sites after conducting a joint inspection
Wastes Disposal on the site with the Contractor.
W.E.2

APPENDICES
Contractor will ensure that any spoils of material unsuitable for embankment
fill will not be disposed off near any water course, agricultural land, and
natural habitat like grasslands or pastures. Such spoils from excavation can
be used to reclaim borrow pits and low-lying areas located in barren lands
along the project corridors (is so desired by the owner / community). All waste
materials will be completely disposed and the site will be fully cleaned and
certified by PWD before handing over.
The contractor at its cost shall resolve any claim, arising out of waste
disposal or any non-compliance that may arise on account of lack of action
on his part.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

F. SOIL & DRAINAGE
The top soil from all areas of cutting and all areas to be permanently
covered will be stripped to a specified depth of 150mm and stored in stock
piles. A portion of the temporarily acquired area and / or Right of Way will
be earmarked for storing top soil. The locations for stock piling will be pre-
identified in consultation and with approval of PWD. The following
Stripping, stocking andprecautionary measures will be taken to preserve them till they are used:
W.F.1 preservation of topStock pile will be designed such that the slope does not exceed 1:2 (vertical
soil. to horizontal), and height of the pile is restricted to 2m. To retain soil and to
allow percolation of water, the edges of the pile will be protected by silt
fencing.
Stock piles will not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling
will be kept to a minimum to ensure that no compaction will occur. The
stockpiles shall be covered with gunny bags orvegetation.
It will be ensured by the contractor that the top soil will not be unnecessarily
trafficked either before stripping or when in stockpiles.
Such stockpiled topsoil will be utilized for -
Covering all disturbed areas including borrow areas (not those in barren
areas)
Top dressing of the road embankment and fill slopes.
Filling up of tree pits, in the median and in the agricultural fields of farmers,
acquired temporarily.
Residual top soil, if there is any will be utilized for the plantation at median
and side of the main carriageway.

491
 S. No. Environmental Issue Management Measures

W.F.2 Landslides Along landslide prone areas in hilly terrain, the slopes need to be
stablised. As drainage is most critical at these locations, proper drainage
needs to be constructed at these locations.
Contractor will ensure that no construction materials like earth, stone, ash
or appendage disposed off so as not to block the flow of water of any water
Drainage and Flood course and cross drainage channels.
W.F.3
Control Contractor will take all necessary measures to prevent the blockage of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

waterflow. In addition to the design requirements, the contractor will take

all required measures as directed by the PWD to prevent temporary or
permanent flooding of the site or any adjacent area.
Proper drainage should be arranged in the construction camps.
G. WATER BODIES & WATER POLLUTION
The Contractor will not excavate beds of any stream / canals / any other
water body for borrowing earth for embankment construction.
Contractor will construct silt fencing at the base of the embankment
construction for the entire perimeter of any water body (including wells)
Siltation of Water
W.G.1 adjacent to the RoW and around the stockpiles at the construction sites
Bodies and
close to waterbodies. The fencing will be provided prior to commencement
Degradation of Water
of earthwork and continue till the stabilization of the embankment slopes,
Quality
on the particular sub-section of the road.
The contractor will also put up sedimentation cum grease traps at the outer
mouth of the drains located in truck lay byes and bus bays which are
ultimately entering into any surface water bodies / water channels with a
fall exceeding 1.5m.
Contractor will ensure that construction materials containing fine
particles are stored in an enclosure such that sediment-laden water does not
drain into nearby water course.
Water Pollution fromThe Contractor will take all precautionary measures to prevent the waste
W.G.2 Construction Wasteswater generated during construction from entering into streams, water
Fuel & bodies or the irrigation system. Contractor will avoid construction works
Lubricants close to the streams or water bodies during monsoon.
All waste arising from the project is to be disposed off in the manner that
is acceptable to the JKSPCB. The PWD will certify that all liquid wastes
disposed off from the sites meet the discharge standards. The contractor
will ensure that all construction vehicle parking location, fuel/lubricants,
storage sites, vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and refueling
sites will be located atleast 500m from rivers and irrigation canal/ponds.
A minimum distance of any sewage or toilet facility will be 200m from the
water course. All location and lay-out plans of such sites will be submitted
by the Contractor prior to their establishment and will be approved by
thePWD.
Contractor will ensure that all vehicle / machinery and equipment

492
 operation, maintenance and refueling will be carried out in such a fashion
that spillage of fuels and lubricants does not contaminate the ground. Oil
interceptors will be provided for vehicle parking, washdown and refueling
areas as per the design provided. In all, fuel storage and refueling areas, if
located on agricultural land or areas supporting vegetation,the top soil will
be stripped, stockpiled and returned after cessation of such storage.
Contractor will arrange for collection, storing and disposal of oily wastes
to the pre-identified disposal sites (list to be submitted to PWD) and
approved by the PWD. All spills and collected petroleum products will be
disposed off in accordance with MoEF and state PCB guidelines.
PWD will certify that all arrangements comply with the guidelines of PCB/
MoEF or any other relevant laws.

APPENDICES
H. AIR POLLUTION
All vehicles delivering materials to the site shall be adequately covered.
The contractor will take every precaution to reduce the level of dust
emissions from crushers / hotmix plants / batching plant / WMM plant,
construction sites involving earthwork by sprinkling of water,
encapsulation of dust source and by erection of screen/barriers.
W.H.1 Dust Pollution
The contractor shall obtain the necessary consent-to-establish and consent-
to-operate for all its plants from the JKSPCB.
The contractor will provide necessary monitoring reports to confirm that

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

all plants conform to relevant dust emission control legislation. The
suspended particulate matter value at a distance of 40m from a unit located
in a cluster should be less than 500g/m3. The contractor shall conduct
pollution monitoring at periodic intervals.
Dust screening vegetation will be planted on the edge of the RoW for all
existing roadside crushers. Hot mix plant will be fitted with dust extraction
units.

r Emission from Contractor will ensure that all vehicles, equipment and machinery used for
Construction Vehicles, construction are regularly maintained and confirm that pollution emission levels
W.H.2 Equipment and comply with the relevant requirements of PCB. The Contractor will submit PUC
chineries certificates for all vehicles / equipment / machinery used for the project.
Monitoring results will also be submitted to PWD as per the monitoring plan.

493
 S. No. Environmental Issue Management Measures
I. NOISE

Noise Pollution: NoiseThe Contractor will confirm the following:

from Vehicles, PlantsAll plants and equipment used in construction shall strictly conform to the
and Equipments MoEF / CPCB noise standards. All vehicles and equipment used in
construction will be fitted with exhaust silencers.
Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery will be done regularly and
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

during routine servicing operations, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers will be

W.I.1
checked and if found defective will be replaced. Limits for construction
equipment used in the project such as compactors, rollers, front loaders, concrete
mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws shall not exceed 75dB
(A) (measured at one meter from the edge of equipment in the free field) ,as
specified in the Environment (Protection) rules, 1986.
Maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery shall be regular and upto the
satisfaction of the PWD to keep noise levels at theminimum.
At the construction sites within 150 m of the nearest habitation, noisy construction
work such as crushing, concrete mixing, batching will be stopped during the night
time between 9.00 pm to 6.00 am. No noisy construction activities will be done
around educational institutes / health centers (silence zones) up to a distance of
100m from the sensitive receptors i.e., school, health centers and hospital.
Contractor will provide noise barriers (Design of Noise Barrier Provided) to the
suggested locations of select schools / healthcenters. List of locations for noise
barriers is given in specific EMP.
Monitoring shall be carried out at the construction sites as per the monitoring
schedule and results will be submitted to PWD. PWD will be required to inspect
regularly to ensure the compliance of EMP. Workers in the vicinity of loud noise,
and workers working with or in crushing, compaction or concrete mixing
operations shall be provided necessary PPE such as ear plugs and ear muffs.

494
 S. No. Environmental Management Measures
Issue
J. TRANSPORTING MATERIALS

Contractor will maintain all roads (existing or built for the project), which are used for
transporting construction materials, equipment and machineries. All vehicles
delivering fine materials to the site will be covered to avoid spillage of materials.
Transporting
W.J.1 All existing highways and roads used by vehicles of the contractor or any of his sub-
Construction
contractor or suppliers of materials and similarly roads, which are part of the works,

APPENDICES
Materials and
will be kept clear of all dust/mud or other extraneous materials dropped by such
Haul Road
vehicles.
Management
Contractor will arrange for regular water sprinkling as necessary for dust suppression
of all such roads and surfaces.
The unloading of materials at construction sites in/close to settlements will be
restricted to day time only.
K. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
The contractor will provide safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and
livestock to and from roadsides and property accesses connecting the project road,

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

providing temporary connecting road.
W.K.1 Accessibility The contractor will also ensure that the existing accesses will not be undertaken
without providing adequate provisions and to the prior satisfaction of PWD.
The contractor will take care that the cross roads are constructed in such a sequence
that construction work over the adjacent crossroads are taken up one after one so that
traffic movement in any given area not get affected much.

Temporary diversions will be constructed with the approval of the PWD.

Detailed Traffic Control Plans will be prepared and submitted to the PWD for approval,
five days prior to commencement of works on any section of road. The traffic control
plans shall contain details of temporary diversions, traffic safety arrangements for
Planning for construction under traffic, details of traffic arrangement after cessation of work each
day, safety measures undertaken for transport of hazardous materials and arrangement
W.K.2 Traffic Diversions
and Detours of flag men.
The contractor will provide specific measures for safety of pedestrians and workers at
night as a part of traffic control plans. The contractor will ensure that the diversion
/ detour is always maintained in running condition, particularly during the monsoon to
avoid disruption to traffic flow.
The contractor will also inform local community of changes to traffic routes,
conditions and pedestrian access arrangements with assistance from PWD. The
temporary traffic detours will be kept free of dust by sprinkling of water minimum
three times a day and as required under specific conditions (depending on weather
conditions, construction in the settlement areas and volume of traffic).

495
 construction and provide,

W.K.3
Informatory Si approaching or passing through the section of any existing cross roads.
andHoardings
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

the existing lanes of the highway, a Traffic Control Pla

implemented to the satisfaction of the PWD.
The contractor will provide, erect and maintain informatory/safety signs, hoardings

PWD.
L. LABOUR
W.L.1 Labor The contractor preferably will use unskilled labor drawn from local communities to
Requirements give the maximum benefit to the local community.
W.L.2 Personal Contractor will provide:
Measures fo Protective footwear and protective goggles to all workers employed on mixing
Labour asphalt materials, cement, and lime mortars, concrete etc.
Welder's protective eye-shields to workers who are engaged in welding works
Protective goggles and clothing to workers engaged in Factories Act, 1948 stone
breaking activities and workers will be seated at sufficiently safe intervals
Ear plugs to workers exposed to loudnoise, and workers working in crushing,
compaction, or concrete mixing operation.
High visibility overalls particularly when working along the ROW.

are taken up.

The contractor will comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladder

entry and egress.

safety of the workmen as per the International Labor Organization (ILO)

No. 62 as far as those are applicable to this contract.

Workers (regulation of Employment

adhered to.

lead in any form.

The contractor will also
except in the form of paste or ready made paint.
Contractor will provide face masks for use to the workers when paint is applied in the

496
 form of spray or a surface having lead paint dry is rubbed and scrapped.
The Contractor will mark „hard hat‟ and „no smoking‟ and other „high risk‟ areas an
en force non-
the Construction Safety Plant to be prepared by the Contractor during mobilization
and will be approved by PWD.

APPENDICES
W.L.3 First Aid The contractor will arrange for:
A readily available first aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing
materials and appliances as per the Factories Rules in every workzone
Availability of suitable transport at all times to take injured or sick person(s) to the
nearest hospital Equipment and trained nursing staff at construction camp.

The contractor will take all reasonable precautions to prevent danger to the workers
and public from fire, flood etc. resulting due to construction activities.
W.M.1 Risk Forc The contractor will make required arrangements so that in case of any mishap all

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Majeure necessary steps can be taken for prompt first aid treatment. Construction Safety Plan
prepared by the Contractor will identify necessary actions in the event of an
emergency.

497
 App 1100.3 Guidance on Oxbow Lands
General
In rural areas with the realignment of roads, land acquisition is required and ―Oxbow‖ lands can result
from this process.This is the land in between the existing road and the new alignment.
The Government of J&K owns the land and the PWD Chief Engineer have delegated authority to use and
manage this land in the public interest provided proper Mutation of documents

This land can be an opportunity to provide benefits for the road corridor and the community. Oxbow lands
can vary in length ranging from a few metres to a few kilometers with a variable width of a few
metres,which is unlikely to exceed 20 metres. As land is scarce in J&K, the remaining Oxbow lands provide
an opportunity for public and private investment to ultimately provide public benefit.

Each parcel of land will differ in size and context and the area suitable for only certain types of activities.
A preliminary needs analysis should be undertaken initially to identify and establish the feasibility of
options. A detailed plan can then be prepared.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Land Use Options

Options for the use of these lands could include:

Traffic and transport related infrastructure – such as vehicle parking bays, lay-byes, safety bill
boards, bus bays, taxi ranks, bus shelters.
Compensatory habitat – to replace trees that may have been removed during construction.
Rest Area Facilities primarily for travelers and include basic facilities such as seating, play area, signage
and information.
Comfort stops – these could be larger facilities to provide for recreation, rest, toilet and food facilities.
Commercial Facilities.These would be for primary use by commercial travelers and include petrol.
Local Park land, Sport and Recreation and Entertainment spaces.
Visual Amenity Improvement – by providing seating, landscaping, lighting, community art and signage.
Public utility purposes including Waste management facilities for collection.
Tourism related activities - such as interpretation centres.
Expand or complement existing adjoining property activities.
Key Issues and Opportunities

Potential Income Generation: There is potential to generate economic benefit for PWD through the lease,
use or disposal of the land. The local municipality may also have an interest in the land for purchase or
lease.
Capital Expenditure: The type of facilities provided will require capital investment. Options to share in
costs or for generating income to provide facilities should be explored with relevant authorities and non-
government organisations.
Maintenance Costs: Depending upon the type of activity and the land tenure, the areas may require
ongoing expenditure for maintenance by PWD. Self-financing options or income generating activities
should be explored where appropriate.

Liaison with other Stake holders: Consultation with the relevant stakeholders would assist in the decision-
making process for the planning, design and operation of the land. This includes community representatives,
concerned authorities such as the panchayet and non- government organizations.

Encroachments: Signs should clearly state the use of the site and the penalties for encroachment.
Encroachment enforcement should be carried out as per the J&K road Protection Act.

498
Guidelines

The development and use of this land should be considered by PWD in road planning, design,
construction and operation phases.

Stage 1: Planning and Site Analysis: Prepare a Concept Plan(s)

Each oxbow land area is to be considered on its merit. A Concept Plan should be prepared at the same time
as planning for the overall road project. Each site should be assessed before a detailed design is prepared.
The Concept Plan can show:

Environmental characteristics of the land including its topography and significant vegetation or
environmental values that should be retained.
Social characteristics of the land including any cultural values associated with the land, the need for

APPENDICES
community facilities and services in that specific location.
The relationship of the area land to adjoining areas and the type of uses adjoining the area.
The size of the land.
Access control and sight distance. Consider other factors in developing options.
The size of the area and the demand or need for rest stops or facilities in the area identified
(Refer: Tables 1 and 2).
The need to provide compensatory habitat as a result of the roadworks.
Any impact on personal or property safety for any activities proposed on the site.
The need for tourism facilities, rest stops, local facilities such as parking, bus shelters and lay-byes.
Funding Sustainability.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

This process will assist in deciding the best type of use for the site and the task can be assigned to an
Assistant Engineer with appropriate training.

Stage 2: Analysis

Based on the information from Stage1, identify arrange options for the use of the area. Identify Criteria and
weight the criteria according to their importance to the area and the outcomes to be achieved. Each option
can then be evaluated against the specified criteria to select a preferred option. Criteria can include:
Road Safety
Pedestrian Amenity
Public transport use
Transport efficiency
Land use / Resource efficiency
Cultural and Social Values
Environmental Values
Viability Sustainable funding or ongoing income generating economic returns.

Stage 3: Design and Implementation:

Prepare detailed design for the selected option on a site plan / Landscape Plan / Strip Plan for the area.

Stage 4: Specific Design Guidelines

Species should be planted in accordance with the Guidance for Landscaping Species unless the land is used
for agricultural purposes.

Buildings and structures must comply with relevant IRC Codes, building specifications or relevant

499
 Safe access and egress should be provided generally using the existing road, which may require
reconfiguration to enhance safety.

Any proposal for facilities will require the preparation of a Planning Report, which considers the
implications of the proposal and also a site map this should include the following:

Type of facilities, proposed operation of building, hours of operation

Elevation and orientation of the proposed buildings
A dimensioned plan showing the floor space area, height and relationship to existing buildings
Location and number of parking spaces
Pedestrian access
Signage
Waste disposal facilities
Lighting
Utility connections
Landscaping details
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Environmental and Social improvements

Table 1: Typical type of Infrastructure and size for use of oxbow lands

Type of Average Average Infrastructure

Facility Rural Size- Urban Size-

1 Rest Area 300m 100m Seating, tables, lighting, signage, play

equipment for children, fencing,
landscaping, community cultural
feature, information display boards,
garbage bins, parking, bus shelter,
laybye
2 Comfort Stop 500m N/A All of the above including, potable
water, restaurants, limited retail
facilities, toilets.
3 Commercial 500m 400m Service centres such as petrol stations,
truck stops
4 Tourist Places 50m Seating, Parking

3 Other Uses Planting, utility services, stockpile,

weighbridges, public uses, limited
retail uses, parkland

Table 2: Spacing or Distance between Facilities

Type of
Facility
1 Rest Area One every 50 km in rural areas

2 Comfort Stop One every 70 km in rural areas

3 Commercial One every 100km in rural areas

4 Tourist Places As required

5 Other Uses Merits of the Site

500
App 1100.4. Guidance on Quarry and Borrow Area Management
Purpose

To avoid and manage the impact of activities associated with quarry and borrow areas on the environment
and affected community.

Some of the impacts of borrow areas and quarrying activities can include:

 Rock blasting can create air and noise pollution andvibration.

 Transport of material in trucks along roadways may create air and noise pollution.
 Excavated areas can provide places for water to pond and stagnate giving rise to the breedingof
mosquitoes and the spread of malaria and other mosquito borne diseases.
 Excavation can affect the natural beauty of the landscape along the road through the removal of

APPENDICES
vegetation.
 Changes to the natural drainage pattern of the area.
 Loss of agricultural / productive soils especially paddy field areas due to borrow areas / Quarry.
 Digging of borrow areas within and along the proposedroadway.
 Improper management of the quarry/borrow area top soil.
 Over quarrying shall be avoided because of adverse impact on the ecology

These activities can have an affect on ecologically sensitive areas, the visual appearance of an area
and also impact on the health and well being of communities living nearby. Management measures
should be used to avoid and minimize any impacts from quarry relatedactivities.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The guidelines seek to ensure that the contractors and subcontractors:
 comply with the regulatory requirements in force at thetime
 reasonably manage any impacts.
 reinstate and rehabilitate the land appropriately.
 Consult with the affected community. Reference should also be made to the Policy Guidelines
for Public Hearing.

Guidelines

All works to be undertaken in accordance with relevant rules and legislation including IRC guidelines and
MORT&H specification.
Quarry activities cannot commence until consent has been given in writing by the Forest Department or
other concerned authorities.

The Contractor will provide the Employer / Engineer with details of the location, size and shape of
borrow areas / quarry areas for written approval prior to opening the area.
Where specific borrow areas are not designated by the Employer / the Engineer, the Contractor will be
solely responsible for ensuring that the source of supply of material for embankment and subgrade is carried
out in accordance with environmental requirements for excavation and borrow areas as stipulated, from
time to time by the Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India and the local bodies, as
applicable
.

501
 Top soil shall not be unnecessarily trafficked either before stripping or when in a stockpile. Stockpiles
shall not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling shall be kept to a minimum.

Following excavation, the sides of excavated area shall be trimmed and the area contoured to minimize
erosion, subsidence and pounding, allowing for natural drainage to take place.

If trees were removed, new trees shall be planted, as directed by the Engineer. Additional borrow pits
should not be opened without the restoration of those areas no longer in use.

Borrow areas are not permitted to be located in the paddy fields or other agricultural areas.

The contractor is to prepare a Borrow and Quarry Area Management Plan and include the following
details:

 Name.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

 Location.
 Size of the Quarry or Borrow area.
 Ownership of the borrow or Quarry area. Whether purchased or leased. Include a signed
statement of approval from the owner giving approval for the works.
 State the proposed Activities including:
 Approximate quantity and type of the material available.
 Approximate depth of excavation required to obtain the material. Whether the depth and cutslope
areas per IRC guidelines?
 The number, species type, location and maturity of trees to be removed. Quantities of top soil
removed.
 Location of storage of top soil. Estimated daily truck movements.
 Existing land use of the area (including the access road to be developed) to bequarried.
 The relationship to adjoining areas including whether it is located near to ecologically sensitive
area, proximity to residential areas? Specify the nature and approximate distance from the proposed
quarry or borrow area.
 Include details of the safety precautions to be used during quarry operation to protect workers, the
environment and the public.
 Proposed plan for the reuse of top soil.
 Methods used to reduce air (e.g. Dust from trucks) and noise pollution duringoperation.
 Methods for the proper drainage of water.
 Offset form the TOE of the Roadway.
 Distance from the adjacent borrow area.
 A Restoration Plan indicating the location, type and number of trees that will be planted, the method
to rehabilitate the access road, the landscaping plans for the borrow or quarry area and the
maintenance program that will be implemented to ensure the proposed works are properly
maintained following completion of the project.
 The action plan for leveling and landscaping in order to bring the area in conformity to the
neighboring land uses.
 The quality of the proposed borrow materials shall be determined and approved prior to use.

502
Format 1

BORROW AREAS IDENTIFICATION

(To be completed by the Contractor)

Pre-Construction Stage Report- Date ... ... ... ... ... .. Month ... ... ... ... .. Year... ………..

Site Layout of Borrow Area and Proposed Borrow Area Rehabilitation Plan are required to be attached
with format. Format to be submitted before target date as (decided by PWD) for establishing Quarries Area
No. BA.

APPENDICES
Location of Borrow Area (KM) ... ... ... ...(RHS/LHS) Package ... ... ... ... ... ...
S. No. ITEM UNIT DETAILS REMARKS
1 Date of Borrow Area becoming
Operational dd/mm/yy
2 Current Land use
3 No of settlements within 500m of Nos
Borrow Area
4 Distance from the ecologically Km
sensitive Area (River,

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

5 Offset from the ROW M
6 Total Capacity Cum
7 No of Trees with girth more than Nos
0.3 mts
8 Details of the plan for re-plantation
9 Length of Haul Road Km
10 Width of Haul road M
11 Type of Haul Road metal/dirt .
12 No of settlements within 200m of
Haul Road Nos
13 Size of Borrow Area Sqkm
14 Area of Borrow Area Km x km
15 Depth of Borrow area M
16 Cut slope as specifications Yes/No
17 Quantity Available Cum
18 Dist of Nearest Water Source Type / Size/
Capacity/
Present
Use/Ownership
19 Quantity of top soil removed Cum
20 Details of storage of top soil
21 Details of the plan for the reuse of
topsoil
22 Details of the arrangement for proper
drainage.
Certified that the furnished information is correct and all relevant information as required is attached.

Contractor PWD Engineer

503
 Format 2

QUARRY SOURCE IDENTIFICATION

(To be completed by the Contractor)
Pre-Construction Stage Report-Date... ... ... ... .. Month ... ... ... ... ... .. Year... ... ... ... ...

Site Layout of Quarry and Proposed Quarry Re-habilitation Plan to be attached with format. Format to be
submitted before target date quarries as (decided by the PWD) for establishing Quarry No.Q

Location of Quarry (Km)………………………(RHS/LHS)Package……………………..

S. No ITEM UNIT DETAILS REMARKS
1 Location Ch
2 Distance from ecologically sensitive Km
area
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

3 License No.
4 License Valid till Date
5 Size of Quarry mxm
6 Quantity Available Cum
7 Proposed depth M
8 Total Capacity Cum
9 No of Settlements within 500m of Nos
Quarry
10 Width of Haul road M
11 Type of Haul Road Metalled/dirt
12 Length of Haul Road Sqkm
13 No. of Settlements within 500m of Haul Name
14 Road
15 Distance from Nearest Water Source Type/Distance
16 Whether Crusher Plant located on Site Yes/No
17 Details of the safety precautions during
blasting.
18 Whether local people are aware of the Yes/No
proposed quarry ?
19 Quantity of top soil removed
20 Details of the storage of top soil
21 Plan for the reuse of top soil
22 Details of the arrangement for proper
Drainage

Certified that the furnished information is correct and all relevant information as required is attached.

Contractor PWD Engineer

504
App 1100.5. Guidance on Landscaping & Tree Species
General

Purpose: The purpose of this policy is to provide a list of species that can be used in landscaping for road
purposes. Planting is an important part of the road network and can be used as a tool to improve road side
appearance and also to moderate driver behaviour.

Planting is an important part of the road network. It offers an opportunity to:

 Enhance the visual appearance of an area
 Provide shade and shelter for pedestrians
 Improve local air quality and micro-climate
 Reduce soil erosion
 Increase flora and fauna habitat

APPENDICES
 Modify vehicle speeds and driver and pedestrian behaviour

The PWD prefers species that have some or all of the following attributes:
 Are indigenous to the area and can be sourced and grown locally
 Provide weather protection
 Require low maintenance and low water consuming
 Are low hazard to people and property
 Enhance the quality of the environment or streetscape
 Will not interfere with utility services

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The type of species selected will also depend upon the location of the site, the purpose of the planting and
how the space will be used. For example:
 Pedestrian Streetscape Planting
 Median Planting
 Visual Amenity / Thematic
 Waterway Planting
 Noise Barrier and Access Restriction Planting (State and National Highways)
 Planting in Rural Areas

The Process

A Landscape Plan should be prepared for projects either as a separate document or as part of an ESAMP.
A Concept Plan may be prepared initially, based on a preliminary analysis of the site conditions and the
future use of the site. A more detailed Landscape Plan is required when the concept is finalised and should
include relevant supporting information. The Landscape Plan should include a Title block with details
including date, scale and revision number, dimensioned plan of the site, the proposed location and type of
species and the relationship of the site to adjoining areas and the species within those areas. Supporting
documentation is to include a site analysis, species selection analysis, detailed species list, proposed
maintenance management plan and any other information necessary to justify that the use of landscaping,
tree planting and rehabilitation options have been selected to best meet the needs of the specific project.
(Suggest that PWD draft A Guide line on how to prepare a Landscape Plan for inclusion in the Code and
Manual. Until then, it is recommended to retain this clause).
Removal of any vegetation should comply with relevant statutory requirements including the J&K
Preservation of Trees Act which lists species that are not to be removed without first securing permission.

505
 Tree plantation guidelines

The following guidelines need to be adhered:

On State Highways, planting should be avoided within 3 metres of the edge of the carriageway. Beyond 3
metres, planting may be provided where the girth of the trunk of the tree / shrub is less than 300 mm at
maturity and where it satisfies other relevant specified criteria. In areas of high risk, such as the outer edges
of high speed curves, all planting should be avoided within 10 metres of the edge of the carriageways.
Reason: Life Safety
Species are to be planted and maintained in accordance with nursery recommendations.
Reason: Plant survival
Large trees should not be planted in locations, such as road corners, where a loss of vehicle control could
result in a severe accident. Reason: Life Safety
High canopy or low shrubs species should be planted to provide visibility in areas where sight distance may
be obscured or to achieve personal safety and security. Reason: Maintain Sight Distance – safety, personal
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

safety.
Select species that integrate and complement existing indigenous species and could improve vegetation
corridors. Reason: Visual integration and Enhance Habitat Corridor
Where theme planting is required, select a few dominant species and replicate their use through the
streetscape to create a visual rhythm. Reason: Visual enhancement
In urban areas, due to narrow carriageway widths, roadside planting may not be appropriate.
Planting for Medians, traffic islands, traffic management measures, roundabout planting with fencing can
be promoted where it does not obscure sight distance or create a traffic hazard.
Reason: Pedestrian safety and Capacity
For median planting, shrubs should generally not exceed 60 cm in height and should be spaced in
accordance with plant specifications. Reason:Visibility
Plant species should be selected that avoid impacts on utility services and the roadway. For example
potential root damage to underground pipes and pavements and interference with above ground services
such as power lines due to height. Reason: Avoiding Disruption to Services
The potential impact on human health and well being such as respiratory ailments caused by flowering
species, is to be considered in species selection. Reason: Human Health
The propagation and use of native seeds collected from the local site or district is to be promoted.
Reason: Species Health
The type, location and spacing of species is appropriate for the road speed environment. For example shrubs
and small trees could be used in a village area as a tool to reduce driver speeds, manage parking allocation
and alter pedestrian behaviour. Reason: Modify road user behaviour
For large tracts of land consultation is recommended with the Forestry Department regarding the
opportunities associated with mass planting. Reason: Compensatory habitat and Carbon Sequestration.
The planting of productive food producing plants, such as coconut palms or herbs is promoted in appropriate
locations such as certain oxbow lands only if effective management measures can be implemented. Reason:
Food Supply
Adequate watering shall be made available during the contract and maintenance period
Specific Landscaping contracts for routine maintenance and watering of medians / islands / oxbow lands
may be implemented.

Species List
Table A includes a List of Species Indigenous to J&K. Examples of species that can be considered are listed
below by their Scientific Name, Common Name and Kashmiri name. Other species may also be suitable
and the reasons for their use justified in the supporting information accompanying the Landscape Plan.

506
Other Considerations
Aspects to consider in the selection of species also includes:
 whether fruit or limbs will impact on pedestrians or vehicles
 size at maturity and ultimate girth size
 life span of the species and replacement
 attraction of fauna
 shade and shelter potential
 visual interest
 potential interference with drainage or services or other structures
 irrigation requirements
 personal safety and security
 impact on human health e.g. respiratory
 potential carbon sequestration

APPENDICES
 dust and pollution tolerance
Longer Term Suggestions:
Develop Policy Guidelines for Landscape Planning if they don‘t already exist with reference to more
detailed landscape and planting elements including:
 Standard work items
 Payment for landscaping
 Landscape establishment time frame
 Material type and requirements
 Plant Supply – suppliers, plant specifications, ordering

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

 Mulching e.g. organic mulch
 Weed Control
 Erosion Control e.g. matting
 Garden Edge Materials e.g. concrete, paving materials
 Irrigation
 Seeding e.g. seed type, watering
 Planting Layout e.g. stakes
 Surface preparation e.g. tilling, cultivation
 Maintenance requirements and program, e.g., pruning, pest management, drainage.

507
 Table A: SpeciesList

S. No. Kashmiri
Botanical Name Name Trade/Popular Habit/Nature Sutability Character
Name
1 Acalipha Acalipha Evergreen Bet.1200-1800 above SeaOr namental Shrub (2-5m tall)
brachystachya level
2 Acalipha ciliate " Temperate Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
3 Acalipha dalzillii " Tropical Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
4 Acalipha hispida " Sub-tropical Ornamental Shrub (2-5m tall)
5 Araucaria cookie Araucaria Evergreen Sea coast to mid-hills Ornamental,Shade, Landscape
6 Azadirachta Indica Neem Evergreen All over J&K Multi purpose (Tree)
7 Alstonia Scholaris Shaitan wood / Devils ropical Shade, Ornamental Tree
Tree
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

8 Anthocephalus Kadamba Evergreen Coastal areas Shade, Ornamental Tree

Chinensis
9 Agathis robusta Kauri Coniferous Ornamental,Landscape
10 Buettneria Cedar Plains and Valleys Shrub, Ornamental, Landscape
herbacea
11 Butea monosperma Flame of the Forest Deciduous Wastelands, Waterlogged Landscape Tree
areas
12 Bauhinia Purpurea Bauhinia Evergreen Plains and Valleys Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sideTree
13 Bauhinia variegate Kachnar/Mt. ebony Deciduous Subtropical up to 800mAven ue,Ornamental,Road
above sea sideTree
14 Barleria cristata Barleria Evergreen Tropical,Subtropical,hills Hedge,Dwarf tree
15 Chloroxylon Satin wood Shade, Ornamental Tree
swietenia
16 Chassalia cirviflora Ornamental Shrub
17 Cinnamomum Landscape Tree
sulphuratum
18 Caesalpinia Pride of Barbados Avenue,Ornamental,Road
pulcherrinia sideTree
19 Calophyllum Alexandrian Laurel Shade, Ornamental Tree
inophyllum
20 Cllistemon Bottle brush Evergreen Plains and Valleys Avenue,Ornamental,Road
lanceolatus sideTree
21 Cassia Fistula Amaltas Deciduous Plains and Valleys Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sideTree
22 Cestrum Night Jasmine Evergreen Valleys,Low hills Shrub,Ornamental, Landscape
nocturmum
23 Cupressus spp. Cupressus Evergreen Low hills(bushes or small La ndscape, border, Wind break
trees
24 Delonix regia Gulmohar Evergreen All over J&K Landscape Tree
25 Duranta plumieri Duranta Evergreen Warm regions Ornamental long lasting bush
26 Eugenia Cuspidata Jamao Evergreen Moist areas Avenue,Ornamental,Road
Berg sideTree
27 Erythroxylon BastaRoad Sandal Ornamental,Avenue tree
monogynum
28 Elaeocarpus Rudrak Avenue,Ornamental,Road
tuberculatus sideTree
29 Euphorbia Thor Evergreen Waste lnd dev,Shrub
royacana
30 Ervatamia gamblei All over J&K Good foliage & Landscape Tree
31 Ficus robusta Rubber plant tree Evergreen Moist subtropical to tropical Ornamental, Landscaping tree
32 Grevillea robusta Silver oak Deciduous Subtrop 0 to 2300 m abv sea Avenue, Ornamental, Road side
Tree

508
33 Garcinia morella Indian Gamboge Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sideTree
34 Helicters isora East Ind Screw Tree Shrub,Ornamental, Landscape

35 Humboldtia Riverside etc Ornamental, Landscaping tree

vahliana
36 Humboldtia Shade, Ornamental Tree
decurrens
37 Hamelia patens Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sideTree
38 Homskioldia Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sanguinea sideTree
39 Carallia bracteate Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sideTree

APPENDICES
40 Jacaranda Jacaranda Evergreen Valleys,Low hills Avenue,Ornamental,Road
mimosaefolia sideTree
41 Largestroemia Queen's Flower All over J&K Landscape, Road side tree
reginae
42 Largestroemia Naked maiden of All over J&K Road side tree
microcarpa forest
43 Melia azedarach Malabar neem Central and Northern J&K Road side tree

44 Murraya Paniculata Hedge,topiary, road edges. Tree

45 Michelia champaca All over J&K Avenue,Ornamental,Road

sideTree

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

46 Mimusops elenji All over J&K Avenue,Ornamental,Road
sideTree
47 Millingtonia Indian Cork tree All over J&K Road side (arbori culture) tree
hortensis
48 Murraya exotica Kamini Evergreen Warm Subtropical areas Ornamental small tree

49 Nerium Oleander Roadside,Avenue planting Shrub

50 Ochroma Balsa All over J&K Road side planting

Pyramidale
51 Olea europea Olive Evergreen Cold valleys Avenue,wind break,Road sideTree
52 Optunia spp. Nagphani Evergreen Tropical,Dry areas Waste lnd dev,Shrub

53 Plumeria rubra Pagoda tree Avenue, tree/shrub

54 Populus ciliata Poplar Deciduous All over J&K Road side, soil conservation etc
wall.
55 Pongamia pinnata Evergreen All over J&K Ornamental tree
56 Peltrophorum Yellow flame Evergreen All over J&K Roadside shade tree
pterocarpum
57 Pisonia alba Lettuce tree Coastal areas Ornamental shrub
58 Pandanus All over J&K Landscape (20 feet)
odoratissimus
59 Robinia Black Locust Deciduous All over J&K Avenue, Wood is decay resistant
psuedoacacia
60 Rawolfia Evergreen All over J&K Road side, good foliage
macropylla
61 Saraca indica Linn. Asok Evergreen Mild climatic conditions Ornamental and avenue
62

63 Spathodia Tulip Tree Evergreen All over J&K Shade, Avenue, Landscape tree
campanulata

509
 64 Swietenia Mahogany All over J&K Shade Tree
Mahogani
65 Swietenia Mahogany All over J&K Shade Tree
macrophylla
66 Syzygium jambos Evergreen All over J&K Avenue, Road side planting
67 Syzygium Evergreen Valleys,Low hills Roadside planting
wightianum
68 Stereospermum Padri Evergreen All over J&K Avenue, Ornamental
suaveolens
69 Salix tetrasperma Indain Willow Deciduous Tropical, Valley areas Riverside, Wind break,

70 Thespesia Bhendi/Portia tree Deciduous Coastal/All over J&K Road side planting
populnia.Soland
71 Terminalia Catappa Badam All over J&K Road side, Shade tree
72 Terminalia Kindal All over J&K Road side, Shade tree
Crenulata
73 Tectona grandis Teak All over J&K Road side, Avenue
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

74 Tabernae montana All over J&K Road edges

Coronaria
75 Tecoma gaudi Tecoma Evergreen All over J&K Road edges (Shrub)
chaudi
76 Tamarix articulata Pala Deciduous Dry areas Wind break, Shelter, Road side
Vahl
77 Terminalia Arjuna Arjuna Evergreen Near water coarses Shade Tree, Landscape
Bedd.
78
79 Wrightia tinctorial Ivory wood Valleys, Low hills Shade tree
80 Zamia pumila- Good for road islands (Shrub)
Zamiaceae

510
App 1100.6.
Guidance on Public Consultations
General principles

Consultation should be Consultation should be undertaken as early as

undertaken as early as possible possible before the project starts. The need for
information prior to any formal consultation
should be considered. Each circle should prepare
a profile of the community which shows the
demographic profile, groups, cultures, issues etc.
Particularly for face to face consultation such as
workshops, the following is recommended:
 Establish protocols for conducting the

APPENDICES
consultation (e.g. respect the views of all
people even if you don‟t agree, only one
person to talk at a time, max)
 Explain the project / issue
 Outline of the role of the stake holders in
the overall decision-making process
 Identify the key stakeholder issues
 Outline the proposed consultation process
 Approve the consultation schedule

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Consider using an independent person to conduct
The decision-making process the consultation
should be transparent Outline the roles of the decision-makers and the
status of stake holder inputs
Clarify the scope of the consultation discussion
e.g. issues related only to that project
Document input received and allow participants to
access the inputs if required
Record and document all actions
Consider developing criteria with stakeholders to
weigh up or rank the most important issues
Feedback to the stakeholders on the outcomes of
the consultation process and how their input has
been incorporated or why their input was not
incorporated
Use recognized or auditable processes for
information distribution such as press release,
media conference,
Consider establishing a reference group (which
includes external stakeholders) to oversee
implementation of the consultation plan.

Adequate time should be provided to allow

Allow sufficient time for stakeholders to stakeholders to participate in the consultation
participate process process e.g. 10 days notice. Adjust the
Consultation activities (type, timeframe and
location of consultation) to suit the local needs.

511
 Consider the following:
 How accessible it is for stakeholders to
participate, e.g. district or panchayat
 will the time of day and day of the week
affect participation e.g. Sunday
 any cultural activities, holiday periods or
public events
 Advise stakeholders of any changes to
the proposed schedule.

The process should facilitate participation Identify all relevant stakeholders who are
by all relevant stakeholders genuinely interested in or affected by the proposed
project.
This could include:
Affected property owners; occupants; business,
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

institutions; government and non-government

agencies; Elected Representatives; Transport user
groups; Media; Special interest groups
(environment, educational, industry or
representatives of cultural properties).
Consider the input of people with special needs or
interests such as children, visually impaired or
physically less mobile, low literacy or women.
Find ways of including them in the consultation
process.

Access to background information increases

Sufficient information should be made understanding and can better inform stakeholder
available about the project, issue or input. In preparing the Communications Plan,
activity to inform input by consider how participants will be able to get
stakeholders access information easily. Use diagrams, maps,
drawings and easy to understand concepts if
possible when preparing materials. Examples
include:
 Internet, e.g. PWD web portal
 Newspaper advertisements
 Flyers in shops and offices
 Telephone recorded message
 Newsletter or letter
 NGO‟s or other representative groups

Comments should be recorded in a Develop a stakeholder register listing the

database and considered in the participants name and contact details (as agreed)
decision-making process and issues of concern or suggestions. The register
can be used as a base document for the decision-
maker to complete and respond to the issues
identified, record all views, acknowledge different
viewpoints, try to create an environment that
makes people feel comfortable get professional
advice if necessary, e.g. dispute resolution.

512
Respond to all comments and document Respond to each comment and state if and how it
is to be addressed by the decision maker. This
information should be made available for
participants to provide for transparency in
decision-making.

Feedback to stakeholders on the final Feedback helps participants gain a better

decision understanding. They also feel they have been
listened to and their concerns considered. It is not
always possible to address all concerns, so the
extent to which comments or concerns have been
addressed should also be fed back to the
stakeholders. This process builds trust in the

APPENDICES
community and is important for maintaining the
profile of PWD. Similar methods can be used to
feedback to the community as it was to get their
input.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

513
 Appendix 1100.7.
Guidance for preparing management measures where project-specific EMP are
required

S. No. Environmental Management Measures

Issue
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

-
The acquisition of land and private properties will be carried out in accordance with the
PS.P.1 Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) and entitlement framework for the project.

of land shall be addressed and integrated into the EMP and other relevant documents.
All Resettlement & Rehabilitation (R&R) activities will be undertaken in
accordance with the RAP document. It will be ensured that all R&R activities
Sites including environmental management plan preparation are completed before the
PS.P.2
construction activity starts, on any section of ROW of existing road and/or
proposed new bypasses.
EMPs for the Resettlement Site will be prepared in consultation with the concerned
community. Plans will include specific actions in relation to health, hygiene and
plantation

protecting giant trees, green tunnels and local

etc.).
PS.P.3 Tree cutting is to proceed only after all the legal requirements including attaining of In-

subsequently a written order is issued to the Contractor.

Particular species declared as „protected

In the event of design changes, additional assessments including the po

relevant norms.

maintained by the PWD.

All community utilities and properties i.e., water supply lines, sewer lines, bank
buildings, health centers, schools, health clinics and veterinary hospitals will be
PS.P.4 relocated before construction starts, on any section of the project corridor. The
PWD will relocate these properties in consultation and written agreement with
the agency / owner / community. The schools and health centers will be
constructed as per the relevant state/UT norms.

514
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

ponds, grazing lands etc. will be relocated.

The relocation sites for these schools will be identified in accordance with the choice of
the community.
Environmental considerations with suitable / required actions including health and
hygiene aspects will be kept in mind while relocating all community utilities and

APPENDICES
resources.

zone will be relocated.

PS.P.5 Cultural the choice of the communi

Religious Properties
structures. The en
supervision of Environmental Expert of Supervision Consultants / Environment Cell
PWD. There location will be completed before the construction starts in these sites.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Joint Field

and community resources.

PS.P.6.
the
documents
enhancement measures suggested in the EMP. Proper documentatio
reasons shall be maintained in all such cases where deviation from the original EMP is
proposed.
Assessment
Impacts due
The Environmental Expert of SC
Changes/Revisions/
PS.P.7
Additions due
event of changes / revisions (including addition or deletion) in the project‟s scope of work.
PS.P.6 in the
Project Work
Crushers, hot- Hot mix plants and batching plants will be sited sufficiently away from settlements and
agricultural operations or any commercial establishments as per master plan
PS.P.8
Plants Location

515
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

Arrangements to control dust pollution through provision of windscreens, sprinklers, d

encapsulation will have to be provided at all such sites.
Specifications of crushers, hot mix plants and batching plants will comply with
requirements of the relevant current emission control legislations and Consent / NOC for
such plants shall be submitted to the SC and PWD.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

The Contractor shall not initiate plant/s operation till the required legal clearances
obtained and submitted from PCB.

All vehicles, equipment and machinery to be procured for construction will confirm to the
relevant Bureau of India Standard (BIS) norms. The discharge standards promulgated
Other Constru under the Environment Protection Act, 1986 will be strictly adhered to.
Noise limits for construction equipments to be procured such as compactors, rollers, front
PS.P.9
and Machinery loaders concrete mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws will not exceed 75 dB (A),
measured at one meter from the edge of the equipment in free field, as specified in the
Environment (Protection) Rules,1986.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of PUC for all vehicles and machinery used
during the contract period.
Finalizing borrow areas for borr

of the contractor.

agreeme
and the PWD.
Locations finalized by the contractor shall be reported to the Environmental Expert of SC
PS.P.10 Borrow Areas / Environment Cell of PWD and who will in turn report to PWD. Format for reporting
will be as per the Reporting Format for Borrow Area and will include a reference map.

stage. The haul roads shall be routed to avoid agricultural areas as far

Rehabilitation Guidelines) and will use the existing village roads wherever available.
In addition to testing for the quality of borrow materials by the S

approval (follow criteria for evaluation of borrow areas).

516
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

improved before starting the transport work.

APPENDICES
PS.P.11Fly Ash The haul road will avoid

the existing road network of the area wherever possible.

The contractor will consult the Environment
before finalizing

the PWD before giving final approval to the contractor.

Contractor will finalize the quarry for procurement of construction materials after
assessment of the availability of sufficient materials and other logistic arrangements.
In case the contractor decides to use quarries other than recommended by DPR

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

PS.P.12Quarry consultants, then it will be selected based on the suitability of the materials.

submit a copy of the approval and the re

Expert of the SC.
Contractor will also work out haul road network and report to Environmental Expert of SC
/ Environment
Cell of PWD and SC will inspect and in turn report to PWD before approval.

setup the own bore-well facility for construction work.

Contractor can use the ponds, which are not in use by community or ident

Arrangement consent from the owner and submit then to SC.

PS.P.13Construction Water
from fixed

type of sources from where water for construction will be used.

The contractor will not be
bodies used by community.
The contractor will need to comply with the requirements of the State Ground Water

SC and PWD.

517
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

PS.P.14 Labour The contractor preferably will use unskilled labor drawn from local communities to give
Requirements the maximum benefit to the local community.

by the contractor will report as per format given.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Construction camps will not be proposed within 500m from the

Construction Camp avoid conflicts and stress over the infrastructure facilities with the local community.
Locations –
PS.P.15 water courses. The waste disposal and sewage system fo
Selection, Design
and Lay-out and operated such that no odor is generated.

authorities or as directed by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will

have to be provided by the contractor.
Arrangements The contractor as per prevalent rules will carry out negotiations with the l
Temporary
PS.P.16
Requirement traffic detours / borrow areas etc. The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of
PWD will be required to ensure that the clearing up of site
owner (after construction or its completion) is included in the contract.
Orientationof
Implementing stages of the project. This shall include on-
PS.P.17
Agency and context of a sub-
Contractors field level implementation staff of PWD, Environmental Experts of SCs and Contractors.

518
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

PS.C. CONSTRUCTION STAGE

Vegetation will be removed from the construction zone before commencement of construction.
All works will be carried out such that the damage or disruption to flora other than those identified
for cutting is minimal.
Clearing and Only ground cover / shrubs that impinge directly on the permanent works or necessary temporary
Grubbing works will be removed with prior approval from the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment

APPENDICES
PS.C.1
Cell of PWD.
The contractor, under any circumstances will not cut or damage trees. Trees identified under the
project will be cut only after receiving clearance from the Forest Dept. / DoEF / MoEF (as
applicable) and after the receipt of PWD‟s written permission in this regard.

Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing road will be suitably reused in the
proposed construction, subject to the suitability of the materials and approval of the SC and
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD as follows:
The sub grade of the existing pavement shall be used as embankment fill material.
The existing base and sub-base material shall be recycled as sub-base of the haul road or access

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

roads
The existing bitumen surface may be utilized for the paving of cross roads, access roads and
paving works
Generation of in construction sites and campus, temporary traffic diversions, haulage routes etc.
Debris from The contractor will suitably dispose off unutilized debris materials either through filling up of
dismantling borrow areas located in waste land or at pre-designated disposal locations, subject to the approval
structures and of the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
road surface At locations identified for disposal of residual bituminous wastes, the disposal will be carried out
over a 60mm thick layer of rammed clay so as to eliminate the possibility of leaching of wastes
into the ground water. The contractor will ensure that the surface area of such disposal pits is
covered with a layer of soil.

All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision, maintenance,

dismantling and clearing debris, will be considered incidental to the work and will be planned and
implemented by the contractor as approved and directed by the Environmental Expert of SC /
PS.C.2
Environment Cell of PWD.

The pre-designed disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Solid Waste Management
Plan to be prepared by Contractor in consultation and with approval of Enviro nmental Expert of
SC / Environment Cell of PWD.

519
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

into the surface water bodies or form mud puddles in the area.

cordingly approved by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

-identified disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Waste Disposal Solid

section of the road.

nt fill will not be

-lying areas
dors (is so desired by the owner/community).

mbankment elsewhere with proper protection measures. SC will keep strict

Non-bituminous wastes other than fly ash may be dumped in borrow pits (preferably located in
shall be created as part of

/ Environment Cell of PWD before handing over.

-

520
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

The top soil from all areas of cutting and all areas to be permanently covered will be stripped to
a specified depth of 150 mm and stored in stockpiles. A portion of the temporarily acquired
area and / or Right of Way will be earmarked for storing top soil. The locations for stock piling
will be pre-identified in consultation and with approval of Environmental Expert of SC /
Environment Cell of PWD. The following precautionary measures will be taken to preserve them
till they are used:

APPENDICES
a. Stockpile will be designed such that the slope doesnot exceed 1:2 (vertical to horizontal),
and height of the pile is restricted to 2 m. To retain soil and to allow percolation of water, the
Stripping, edges of the pile will be protected by silt fencing.
stocking and b. Stockpiles will not be surcharged or otherwise loaded and multiple handling will be kept to
PS.C.4 preservation of a minimum to ensure that no compaction will occur. The stockpiles shall be covered with
top soil gunny bags or vegetation.
c. It will be ensured by the contractor that the top soil will not be unnecessarily trafficked either
before stripping or when in stockpiles.
Such stockpiled top soil will be utilized for -
Covering all disturbed areas including borrow areas (not those in barren areas)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Top dressing of the road embankment and fill slopes
Filling up of tree pits, in the median and
In the agricultural fields of farmers, acquired temporarily.
Residual top soil, if there is any will be utilized for the plantation at median and side of the main
carriageway.
The contractor will provide safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock to
and from roadsides and property accesses connecting the project road, providing temporary
connecting road.
PS.C.5 Accessibility The contractor will also ensure that the existing accesses will not be undertaken without providing
adequate provisions and to the prior satisfaction of Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell
of PWD.
The contractor will take care that the cross roads are constructed in such a sequence that construction
work over the adjacent cross roads are taken up one after one so that traffic
movement in any given area not get affected much.

521
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Temporary diversions will be constructed with the approval of the SC and Environmental Expert
of SC / Environment Cell / Engineer Incharge of PWD.
Detailed Traffic Control Plans will be prepared and submitted to the Environmental Expert of SC
/ Environment Cell of PWD for approval, five days prior to commencement of works on any section
for of road. The traffic control plans shall contain details of temporary diversions, traffic safety
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Planning
Traffic arrangements for construction under traffic, details of traffic arrangement after cessation of work
PS.C.6 Diversions and each day, safety measures undertaken for transport of hazardous materials and arrangement of flag
Detours men.
The Contractor will provide specific measures for safety of pedestrians and workers at night as a
part of traffic control plans. The Contractor will ensure that the diversion / detour is always
maintained in running condition, particularly during the monsoon to avoid disruption to traffic flow.
The contractor will also inform local community of changes to traffic routes, conditions and
pedestrian access arrangements with assistance from SC and PWD. The temporary traffic detours
will be kept free of dust by sprinkling of water three times a day and as required under specific
conditions (depending on weather conditions, construction in the settlement areas and volume of
traffic).

No borrow area will be opened without permission of the Environmental Expert of SC /

Environment Cell of PWD. The location, shape and size of the designated borrow areas will be as
approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD and in accordance to the
IRC recommended practice for borrow pits for road embankments (IRC10:1961). The borrowing
operations will be carried out as specified in the guidelines for sitting and operation of borrow areas.
The unpaved surfaces used for the haulage of borrow materials, if passing through the settlement
Earth from areas or habitations; will be maintained dust free by the contractor. Sprinkling of water will be
PS.C.7 Borrow Areas carried out twice a day to control dust along such roads during their period of use.
for Construction During dry seasons (winter and summer) frequency of water sprinkling will be increased in the
settlement areas and Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will decide the
numbers of sprinkling depending on the local requirements.
Contractor will rehabilitate the borrow areas as soon as borrowing is over from a particular borrow
area in accordance with the Guidelines for Redevelopment of Borrow Areas or as
suggested by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.

522
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Contractor will ensure that they will strictly follow the specification given in IRC:SP 58 for
flyash embankment construction. Further, Contractor will also ensure that-
Flyash will be transported in covered dump truck to the project site and is directly dumped on
the embankment. This will not be stockpiled at project site.
Weathered (at least not freshly generated) flyash will be collected from the fly ash pond to
reduce the possibility of water contamination due to leaching of heavy metals.
Flyash surface will be graded and sloped at the end of each working day to provide drainage and
to prevent the ponding of water or the formation of run-off channel.

APPENDICES
The side slope will be properly benched and covered with soil and later vegetation will be grown
to prevent the erosion.
Run-off from the fly ash embankment / stockpile will be collected and discharged into proper
PS.C.8 Fly Ash drainage system.
Further handling, if any will be restricted within ROW. During such handling and also after placing
on embankment, if the flyash surface dries up completely, contractor will arrange for frequent
sprinkling of water for dust suppression. Otherwise, surface of the flyash will be covered with
tarpaulin or polyethylene sheets or other suitable material.
The flyash will be placed on an aggregate drainage blanket to prevent water from rising into the
flyash by way of capillary action. Contractor will ensure that flyash layer is separated from the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

drainage blanket by an appropriate filter fabric / sand blanket of adequate thickness over full
width of embankment as capillary cut-off.
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will be required to inspect and report
regularly to ensure the compliance in this regard.

The contractor shall obtain materials for quarries only after consent of the Department of
Mining and District Administration.
Quarry
PS.C.9 Operations The contractor will develop a Comprehensive Quarry Redevelopment plan, as per the Mining
Rules of the state and submit a copy to PWD and SC prior to opening of the quarry site.
The quarry operations will be undertaken within the rules and regulations in force.
PS.C.10 Transporting Contractor will maintain all roads (existing or built for the project), which are used for transporting
Construction Construction materials, equipment and machineries as précised. All vehicles delivering fine
Materials and materials to the site will be covered to avoid spillage of materials.
Haul Road All existing highways and roads used by vehicles of the contractor or any of his sub-contractor o
Management suppliers of materials and similarly roads, which are part of the works, will be kept clear of all
dust/mud or other extraneous materials dropped by such vehicles.
Contractor will arrange for regular water sprinkling as necessary for dust suppression of all such
roads and surfaces.
The unloading of materials at construction sites in/close to settlements will be restricted to daytime
only.

523
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Contractor will arrange adequate supply and storage of water for the whole construction period at
his own costs. The Contractor will submit a list of source/s from where water will be used for the
project to SC and PWD.
Construction The contractor will source the requirement of water preferentially from ground water but with prior
PS.C.11
Water permission from Jal Shakti. A copy of the permission will be submitted to SC and PWD prior to
initiation of construction.
The contractor will take all precaution to minimize the wastage of water in the construction
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

process/ operation.
While working across or close to any perennial water bodies, contractor will not obstruct / prevent
the flow of water.
Construction over and close to the non-perennial streams shall be undertaken in the dry season. If
River Trainingconstruction work is expected to disrupt users of community waterbodies, notice shall be served
and Disruptionwell in advance to the affected community.
The contractor will serve notice to the downstream users well in advance to divert the flow of water
PS.C.12 to Other Users
ofWater of any surface water body. Wherever excavation for diverting water flow will take place, contractor
will ensure that the slopes are not steeper than1:2 (vertical:horizontal) otherwise proper slope
protection measures will be taken as approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment
Cell of PWD.
The contractor will take prior approval of the River Authority or Irrigation Department or SC for
any such activity. The PWD will ensure that contractor has served the notice to the downstream
users of water well in advance.
PS.C.13 Drainage and Contractor will ensure that no construction materials like earth, stone, ash or appendage disposed
Flood Control off so as not to block the flow of water of any water course and cross drainage channels.

524
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Contractor will take all necessary measures to prevent the blockage of waterflow. In addition to the
design requirements, the contractor will take all required measures as directed by the Environmental
Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD to prevent temporary or permanent
flooding of the site or any adjacent area.
The Contract or will not excavate beds of any stream / canals / any other water body for borrowing
earth for embankment construction.

APPENDICES
Contractor will construct silt fencing at the base of the embankment construction for the entire
Siltation of perimeter of any water body (including wells) adjacent to the RoW and around the stockpiles at the
PS.C.14 Water Bodies an construction sites close to water bodies. The fencing will be provided prior to commencement of
Degradation o earthwork and continue till the stabilization of the embankment slopes, on the particular sub- section
Water Quality of the road.
The contractor will also put up sedimentation cum grease traps at the outer mouth of the drains located
in truck laybyes and busbays which are ultimately entering into any surface water bodies / water
channels with a fall exceeding 1.5m.
Contractor will ensure that construction materials containing fine particles are stored in an enclosure
such that sediment-laden water does not drain into nearby water course.
The contractor will take slope protection measures as per design, or as directed by the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD to control soil erosion and sedimentation
through use of dykes, sedimentation chambers, basins, fibbermats, mulches, grasses, slope, drains
and other devices.
Slope ProtectionAll temporary sedimentation, pollution control works and maintenance thereof will be deemed as
and Control ofincidental to the earth work or other items of work and as such as no separate payment will be made
for them.
PS.C.15 Soil Erosion Contractor will ensure the following aspects:
During construction activities on road embankment, the sideslopes of all cut and fill areas will be
graded and covered with stonepitching, grass and shrub as per design specifications.
Turfing works will be taken up as soon as possible provided the season is favorable for the
establishment of grass sods. Other measures of slope stabilization will include mulching netting and
seeding of batters and drains immediately on completion of earth works.
In borrow pits, the depth shall be so regulated that the sides of the excavation will have a slope not
steeper than1vertical to 2 horizontal, from the edge of the final section of the bank.
Along sections abutting water bodies, stone pitching as per design specification will protect slopes.

PS.C.16 Water PollutionT he Contractor will take all precautionary measures to prevent the wastewater generated during
from Construction from entering into streams, water bodies or the irrigation system. Contractor will avoid
Construction construction works close to the streams or water bodies during monsoon.
Wastes All waste arising from the project is to be disposed off in the manner that is acceptable to the State
Pollution Control Board or as directed by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will certify that all liquid wastes
disposed off from the sites meet the discharge standards.

525
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

The contractor will ensure that all construction vehicle parking location, fuel / lubricants storage
sites, vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and refueling sites will be located atleast
500m from rivers and irrigation canal/ponds.
All location and lay-out plans of such sites will be submitted by the Contractor prior to their
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

establishment and will be approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell/

Engineer incharge of PWD and PWD. Contractor will ensure that all vehicle / machinery and
equipment operation, maintenance and refueling will be carried out in such a fashion that spillage
Water Pollution
PS.C.17 of fuels and lubricants doesnot contaminate the ground oil. Interceptors will be provided for
from Fuel and vehicle parking, washdown and refueling areas as per the design provided. In all, fuel storage and
Lubricants
refueling areas, if located on agricultural land or areas supporting vegetation, the top soil will be
stripped, stock piled and returned after cessation of such storage.
Contractor will arrange for collection, storing and disposal of oily wastes to the pre-identified
disposal sites (list to be submitted to SC and PWD) and approved by the Environmental Expert of
SC / Environment Cell of PWD. All spills and collected petroleum products will be disposed off in
accordance with MoEF and state PCB guidelines.
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will certify that all arrangements comply
with the guidelines of PCB/ MoEF or any other relevant laws.
The contractor will take every precaution to reduce the level of dust from crushers / hot mix plants,
construction sites involving earth work by sprinkling of water, encapsulation of dust source and by
erection of screen/barriers.
PS.C.18 Dust Pollution All the plants will be sited at least 150 m in the downwind direction from the nearest human
settlement. The contractor will provide necessary certificates to confirm that all crushers used in
construction conform to relevant dust emission control legislation.
The suspended particulate matter value at a distance of 40m from a unit located in a cluster should
be less than 500 g/m3 or the level standardized by PCB or relivent . The pollution monitoring is to
be conducted as per the monitoring plan.
Alternatively, only crushers licensed by the PCB shall be used. Required certificates and consents
shall be submitted by the Contractor in such a case.
Dust screening vegetation will be planted on the edge of the RoW for all existing roadside crushers.
Hot mix plant will be fitted with dust extraction units.

526
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Emission from Contractor will ensure that all vehicles, equipment and machinery used for construction are
Construction regularly maintained and confirm that pollution emission levels comply with the relevan
PS.C.19 Vehicles, requirements of PCB. The Contractor will submit PUC certificates for all vehicles / equipment
Equipment and machinery used for the project. Monitoring results will also be submitted to SC and PWD as pe
Machineries the monitoring plan.
The Contractor will confirm the following:
All plants and equipment used in construction shall strictly conform to the MoEF / CPCB noise

APPENDICES
standards. All vehicles and equipment used in construction will be fitted with exhaust silencers.
Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery will be done regularly and during routine
servicing operations, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers will be checked and if found defective
will be replaced. Limits for construction equipment used in the project such as compactors
rollers, front loaders, concrete mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws shall not exceed 75
Db (A) (measured at one meter from the edge of equipment in the free field), as specified in the
Noise PollutionEnvironment (Protection) rules, 1986.
Noise from Maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery shall be regular and upto the satisfaction of th
PS.C.20
Vehicles, PlantEnvironmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD to keep noise levels at the minimum.
and Equipments At the construction sites within 150m of the nearest habitation, noisy construction work such a
crushing, concrete mixing, batching will be stopped during the night time between 9.00 pm to

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

6.00 am.
No noisy construction activities will be permitted around educational institutes / health center
(silence zones) upto a distance of 100m from the sensitive receptors i.e.,school, health centers and
hospitals between 9.00 am to 6.00pm.
Contractor will provide noise barriers (Design of Noise Barrier Provided) to the suggested location
of select schools / health centers. List of locations for noise barriers is given in specific EMP.
Monitoring shall be carried out at the construction sites as per the monitoring schedule and result
will be submitted to SC and PWD. Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will b
required to inspect regularly to ensure the compliance of EMP.

527
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

Contractor will provide:

Protective footwear and protective goggles to all workers employed on mixing asphalt materials,
cement, and lime mortars, concrete, etc.
Welder's protective eye-shields to workers who are engaged in welding works
Protective goggles and clothing to workers engaged in Factories Act, 1948 stone breaking
activities and workers will be seated at sufficiently safe intervals
Ear plugs to workers exposed to loud noise, and workers working in crushing, compaction, or
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

concrete mixing operation.

Adequate safety measures for workers during handling of materials at site are taken up.
The contractor will comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working
platforms, gangway, stairwells, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress.
The contractor will comply with all the precautions as required for ensuring the safety of the
PS.C.21 Personal Safety w orkmen as per the International Labor Organization (ILO) Convention No. 62 as far as those are
Measures forapplicable to this contract.
Labour The contractor will make sure that during the construction work all relevant provisions of the
Factories Act, 1948 and the Building and other Construction Workers (regulation of Employment
and Conditions of Services) Act, 1996 are adhered to.
The contractor will not employ any person below the age of 14 years for any work and no woman
will be employed on the work of painting with products containing lead in any form.
The contractor will also ensure that no paint containing lead or lead products is used except in the
form of paste or ready made paint.
Contractor will provide face masks for use to the workers when paint is applied in the form of
spray or a surface having lead paint dry is rubbed and scrapped.
The Contractor will mark „hard hat‟ and „no smoking‟ and other „high risk‟ areas and enforce
non- compliance of use of PPE with zero tolerance. These will be reflected in the Construction
Safety Plan to be prepared by the Contractor during mobilization and will be approved by SC and
PWD.
PS.C.22 Traffic and he contractor will take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic during construction and
Safety provide, erect and maintain such barricades, including signs, markings, flags, lights and flag men
as proposed in the Traffic Control Plan / Drawings and as required by the Environmental Expert
of SC / Environment Cell of PWD for the information and protection of traffic approaching or
passing through the section of any existing crossroads.
The contractor will ensure that all signs, barricades, pavement markings are provided as per the
MoRTH specifications. Before taking up of construction on any section of the existing lanes of
the highway, a Traffic Control Plan will be devised and implemented to the satisfaction of the
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD & informed to district administrartin &
gotveted and followed in letter & sprit.

528
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

The Contractor will take all required precautions to prevent danger from electrical equipment and
ensure that-
No material will be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or the
Risk from
public.
PS.C.23 Electrical
All necessary fencing and lights will be provided to protect the public in construction zones.
Equipment (s)
All machines to be used in the construction will conform to the relevant Indian Standards (IS)
codes, will be free from patent defect, will be kept in good working order, will be regularly
inspected and properly maintained as per IS provision and to the satisfaction of the

APPENDICES
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The contractor will take all reasonable precautions to prevent danger to the workers and public from
Risk Force fire, flood etc. resulting due to construction activities.
PS.C.24 The contractor will make required arrangements so that in case of any mishap all necessary steps can
Measure
be taken for prompt first aid treatment. Construction Safety Plan prepared by the Contractor wil
identify necessary actions in the event of an emergency.
The contractor will arrange for:
A readily available first aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing materials and
PS.C.25 First Aid appliances as per the Factories Rules in every work zone
Availability of suitable transport at all times to take injured or sick person (s) to the nearest
hospital.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Equipment and trained nursing staff at construction camp.
Informatory The contractor will provide, erect and maintain informatory / safety signs, hoardings written in
PS.C.26 Signs and English and local language, wherever required or as suggested by the Environmental Expert of
Hoardings SC / Environment Cell of PWD.

The contractor will do the plantation at median and / or turfing at embankment slopes as per the tree
plantation strategy prepared for the project.
Road side Minimum 80 per cent survival rate of the saplings will be acceptable otherwise the contractor will
PS.C.27 Plantation replace dead plants at his own cost. The contractor will maintain the plantation till they handover the
Strategy project site to PWD.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will inspect regularly the survival rate
of the plants and compliance of tree plantation guidelines.
The contractor will take reasonable precaution to prevent his workmen or any other persons from
removing and damaging any flora (plant/vegetation) and fauna (animal) including fishing in any water
body and hunting of any animal.
PS.C.28 Flora and If any wild animal is found near the construction site at any point of time, the contractor will
Chance found immediately upon discovery there of acquaint the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cel
Fauna of PWD and carryout the SC's instructions for dealing with the same.
The Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will report to the nearby forest office
(range office or divisional office) and will take appropriate steps/ measures, if required in consultation
with the forest official etc.

529
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

All fossils, coins, articles of value of antiquity, structures and other remains or things of geologica
or archaeological interest discovered on the site shall be the property of the Government and shal
be dealt with as per provisions of the relevant legislation.
PS.C.29 Chance Found The contractor will take reasonable precautions to prevent his workmen or any other persons from
Archaeological removing and damaging any such article or thing. He will, immediately upon discovery thereof and
Property before removal acquaint the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD of such
discovery and carry out the SC's instructions for dealing with the same, waiting which all work shal
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

be stopped.
The SC will seek direction from the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) before instructing the
Contractor to recommence the work in the site.
Labour camp Contractor will follow all relevant provisions of the Factories Act, 1948 and the Building and the
PS.C.30 management - other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 for
Accommodatio construction and maintenance of labour camp.
n The location, layout and basic facility provision of each labour camp will be submitted to SC and
PWD prior to their construction.
The construction will commence only upon the written approval of the Environmental Expert of
SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
The contractor will maintain necessary living accommodation and ancillary facilities in
functional and hygienic manner and as approved by the SC & Engineer Incharge.

530
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

The Contractor will construct and maintain all labour accommodation in such a fashion that
uncontaminated water is available for drinking, cooking and washing.
The Contractor will also provide potable water facilities within the precincts of every work
place in an accessible place, as per standards set by the Building and other Construction
Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act,1996.
The contractor will also guarantee the following:

APPENDICES
Supply of sufficient quantity of potable water (as per IS) in every workplace / labor camp
site at suitable and easily accessible places and regular maintenance of such facilities.
Labour campIf any water storage tank is provided that will be kept such that the bottom of the tank at
management -least 1mt. from the surrounding ground level.
PS.C.31
Potable Water If water is drawn from any existing well, which is within 30 mt. proximity of any toilet, drain
or other source of pollution, the well will be disinfected before water is used for drinking.
All such wells will be entirely covered and provided with a trap door, which will be dustproof
and waterproof.
A reliable pump will be fitted to each covered well. The trap door will be kept locked and
opened only for cleaning or inspection, which will be done at least once in a month.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Testing of water will be done every month as per parameters prescribed in IS 10500:1991.
Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will be required to inspect the
labour camp once in a week to ensure the compliance of the EMP.

Labour campThe contractor will ensure that -

management -The sewage system for the camp are designed, built and operated in such a fashion that no
PS.C.32 Sanitation andhealth hazards occurs and no pollution to the air, ground water or adjacent water courses take
Sewage System place separate toilets / bathrooms, wherever required, screened from those for men (marked
in vernacular) are to be provided for women.
Adequate water supply is to be provided in all toilets and urinals
All toilets in workplaces are with dry-earth system (receptacles) which are to be cleaned and
kept in a strict sanitary condition
Night soil is to be disposed off by putting layer of it at the bottom of a permanent tank
prepared for the purpose and covered with 15cm layer of waste or refuse and then covered
with a layer of earth for a fortnight.

531
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Aspect/Issue

The contractor will provide garbage bins in the camps and ensure that these are regularly emptie
Labour campand disposed off in a hygienic manner as per the Comprehensive Solid Waste Management Pla
approved by the Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD.
PS.C.33 management
Waste Disposal Unless otherwise arranged by local sanitary authority, arrangements for disposal of night soil
(human excreta) suitably approved by the local medical health or municipal authorities or as
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

directed by Environmental Expert of SC / Environment Cell of PWD will have to be provided b

the contractor.
Contractor will prepare site restoration plans, which will be approved by the Environmental Exper
of SC / Environment Cell of PWD. The clean-up and restoration operations are to be implemente
by the contractor prior to demobilization. The contractor will clear all temporary structures
dispose all garbage, night soils and POL waste as per Comprehensive Waste Management Pla
Clean-up
PS.C.34 Operations, and as approved by SC.
All disposal pits or trenches will be filled in and effectively sealed off. Residual topsoil, if any wil
Restoration and
be distributed on adjoining/ proximate barren land or areas identified by Environmental Expert o
Rehabilitation
SC / Environment Cell of PWD in a layer of thickness of 75mm-l50mm.
All construction zones including river-beds, culverts, road-side areas, camps, hot mix plant sites
crushers, batching plant sites and any other area used/affected by the project will be left clean and
tidy, at the contractor's expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Environmental Expert of SC
Environment Cell of PWD.

532
 Environmental
S. No. Management Measures
Issue

PS.O. OPERATIONAL STAGE

he PWD will monitor the operational performance of the various mitigation /
Monitoring enhancement measures carried out as a part of the project.
PS.O.1 Operation The indicators selected for monitoring include the survival rate of trees; utility of

APPENDICES
Performance enhancement provision for relocated temples, schools and other relocated structures;
status of rehabilitation of borrow areas; and utility of noise barriers.
PWD will ensure that all drains (side drains, median drain and all cross drainages) are
Maintenance of periodically cleared especially before monsoon season to facilitate the quick passage of
PS.O.2
Drainage rainwater and avoid flooding.
PWD will ensure that all the sediment and oil and grease traps setup at the water bodies
are cleared once in every three months.
The periodic monitoring of the ambient air quality, noise level, water (both ground and
surface water) quality, soil pollution /contamination in the selected locations as suggested
Pollution
MA. O.3 in pollution monitoring plan will be responsibility of PWD. PWD will appoint PCB
Monitoring

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

approved pollution monitoring agency for this purpose.

Atmospheric Ambient air concentrations of various pollutants shall be monitored as envisaged in the
MA. O.4 Pollution pollution- monitoring plan.
Roadside tree plantation will be maintained.
Noise pollution will be monitored as per monitoring plan at sensitive locations. Noise
control programs are to be enforced strictly.
PS.O.5 Noise Pollution
Monitoring the effectiveness of the pollution attenuation barriers, if there is any, will be
taken up thrice in the operation period.
Soil Erosion and Visual monitoring and inspection of soil erosion at borrow areas, quarries (if closed and
PS.O.6 Monitoring of rehabilitated), embankments and other places expected to be affected,will be carried out
Borrow Areas once in every three months as suggested in monitoring plan.
PS.O.7 Changes in Land PWD shall take initiative and act as facilitator to prepare an action plan for balanced
Use Pattern regional development in consultation with Local Development Authority and State
Government to control the ribbon development along the project road including new
bypasses. A land use regulation control, if applicable need to be adopted.
A land use-zoning map may be developed, under which upto a particular distance from
the ROW of the alignment especially in new bypass stretches, no development will be
allowed.
Necessary hoardings will be erected indicating the availability of ROW and legal charges
for encroachment of ROW. Budgetary provisions are to be made to control the ribbon
development along project road.

533
 Annexure 1202B: Social Screening Format for Categorization of Social Impact
Part A
Name of theDepartment:
Name of theCircle:
Name ofDivision:
Districts covered by the Project:_
Name of Sub divisionResponsible:
Name & Address of the Officers Responsible

SuperintendingEngineer:
ExecutiveEngineer:
Sub DivisionalEngineer:
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Category ofProject:

Part B

(Please tick mark (√) in the appropriate column and provide relevant information in Col.6)

Sl. Probable social Impacts

No Screening Questions Yes No Possible Extent/Number/
Remarks
1 2 3 4 5 6

Is land acquisition necessary?

1

Is the ownership status and current usage of

2 the land known?

3
Will there be loss of agricultural plots?

4
Will there be loss of seasonal crops?

5
Will there be loss perennial crops (yielding
and/or fruit bearing and other trees?
6 Will the project displace residential structures
(Houses)?
7 Will the project displace commercial structures
(shops workshops, factory and
other establishments)?
8 Will there be loss of structures other than
buildings? (Compound wall/gate/water tanks/
slabs/ wells/ septic tanks, etc
9 Are any cultural properties (place of worship,
religious structure,memorial,
monument, cemetery, etc) affectedor
displaced?
10 Are any community properties affected or
displaced?
11 Are any tenants running enterprises or
operating from the structures that would be
displaced?
12 Are there any tenants residing in the
structures that would be displaced?
Are there residential squatters within the
right of way?

534
 13 Are there commercial squatters within the right
of way?
14 Are there residential and commercial squatters
within the right of way?

Will there be loss of incomes and livelihoods o

15 employees of affected establishments
structures?

Will people lose access to common facilities,

16 services, or natural resources?

17 Will there be loss of existing access to

private properties and services?

1. Social Screening sheet must be completed by all projects at Investigation Stage and forwarded to social

APPENDICES
cell for review, verification and records

Date Signature and Name of the Officer Responsible

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

535
 Annexure 1202C: Social Impacts Data Sheet– to be attached with investigation Report

Number of Number of Extent of

S. Number of
Category of the Affected households/ persons Land
No. structures
Families affected Involved

A Private Land with Legal Ownership (Titleholders)

Residential properties
Commercial Properties
Residential & Commercial Properties
Agricultural Land
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Vacant Land (urban)

Vacant Land (rural)
Other categories of private land (specify)
B Non-Titleholders attached to Private Properties
Tenants –Residential
Tenants – commercial
Employees
C Cultural Properties (with Legal ownership) Number
Land only
Land and structure (specify)
Cultural Properties (without Legal ownership) of Number of Extent of Number of
D squatter status Number persons land involved structures
affected involved
Shrine
Hundi (Boxes to receive offerings)
Others (specify- arch, gate, c/wall, etc)

E Government /Public sector/Panchayat Properties

Land only
Land with minor structure
Land and building
F Community Properties
Land only
Land with minor structure
Land and building
Land and some public utility (specify eg. well)
G Squatters (Non-titleholders)

Residential

Commercial

Residential & commercial

536
 Annexure1202D: Budget Estimate to be attached with Detailed Project Report

S. Total Units (specify) Estimated

No. Item Unit Cost (Rs) Replacement Cost

1 Private Land Value (specify category)

1 (a)
1 (b)

2 Structure value of (specify type) as per BSR of PWD

2 (a)
3 Compensation towards other immovable properties

APPENDICES
R and R Assistance and Activities
1 Shifting assistance

2 Transitional allowance to those whose livelihood is

affected
3 Additional assistance to vulnerable groups 3 women
headed households
4 Documentation
5 Operational costs
6 Consultancy charges
Total

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Sample SIA for S-1 & S-2 category (Table of Contents)

Executive Summary

Chapter I : THE PROJECT AND SCOPE OF LAND ACQUISITION

1.1 Introduction
Objective of theStudy
The Project and Project Site
Public Consultation
Efforts to Minimize Negative Impacts
Extent of Land Acquisition

CHAPTER II: SOCIAL ASSESSMENT OF PROJECT AFFECTED

Census Survey
Population Profile
Vulnerable Population
Magnitude of displacement
Loss of Immovable Properties
Loss of Livelihood
Gender Impacts
Analysis of Alternatives

CHAPTER-III MITIGATION MEASURES

Targeting Vulnerable Groups
Resettlement and Rehabilitation (R&R)Package
Entitlement Criteria and Framework
R&RBudget

537
 Institutional Mechanism for Implementation andMonitoring
Criteria for Inclusion on PAP List
Methods for determining compensation
Appeal Procedures and Grievance Redressal Mechanism
Procedure and Mode of delivery of compensation and assistances
Monitoring and Evaluation System

The SIA report for S-2 Category Project shall pride the following:
Screening
Transect walk proceedings,
Analysis of alternatives
Consultation proceedings,
Impact Statement,
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Census and socio-economic survey form,

Micro plan and short resettlement Plan,
Land Acquisition Plan.
Budget

Outline for Full Resettlement Plan

CHAPTER I: SCOPE OF LAND ACQUISITION AND RESETTLEMENT
What the project is all about and why land acquisition is necessary. Maps, charts and sketches may be
used to illustrate thepoint.

CHAPTER II: SOCIO ECONOMIC INFORMATION

Define, identify and enumerate the affected people. Describe the possible impacts of land acquisition by
the project on people being affected. Explain the social, cultural and economic impacts of land acquisition
on the community.
Identify all loses of people and quantify them. Special attention must be given to identify the impact of the
project on the poor and the vulnerable population such as the SCs and STs, women and women headed
families. Suggest special measures within the policy framework to restore fully and to enhance their
economic and socialbase.

CHAPTER III: OBJECTIVES, POLICY FRAMEWORK AND ENTITLEMENTS

Explain the purpose and objectives of land acquisition and resettlement. Describe relevant national and state
policy pertaining to resettlement and rehabilitation applicable to the project and the relevant portion of the
LA act
Prepare entitlement matrix for all categories of loss including compensation rates and eligibility criteria.
If the project is financed by any bilateral agency, their policy requirements should be accommodated and
explained in thischapter.
CHAPTER IV: PUBLIC CONSULTATION, PARTICIPATION AND GRIEVANCE REDRESS

Identify project stakeholders, describe mechanisms used to ensure active participation of the primary,
secondary and tertiary, etc. of stakeholders in the planning, implementation, management, monitoring and
evaluation of the development project and the resettlement and rehabilitationcomponent.
Identify local organizations and institutions and suggest ways and means to support the affected population
Establish procedures for public consultation and redress of grievances of the affected population.

538
CHAPTER V: RELOCATION OF HOUSING AND SETTLEMENTS
Identify relocation options for all structures including housing, commercial establishments, cultural and
community properties including cash compensation and self-relocation. Specify measures to assist with
transfer and establishment at newsites
In extreme cases specify measures to include resettlement sites in land acquisition.
Specify means to safeguard livelihoods of the affected population.
Identify and suggest concrete measures to address gender issues and others related to vulnerable groups
Identify cultural and environmental risks precipitated by land acquisition and displacement and measures
to manage and monitor.

CHAPTER VI: INCOME AND LIVELIHOOD RESTORATION STRATEGY

Identify livelihoods at risk. Develop income restoration strategy with options to restore all types of
livelihoods.

APPENDICES
Specify job opportunities and job creation plan; provision for compensating loss of livelihood, retraining
and skill up gradation forself-employment.
Prepare plan to relocate and restore business including income substitution.

CHAPTER VII INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK

Identify various tasks from planning land acquisition to resettlement and allocate responsibilities showing
implementation schedule
Review capacity building requirements and provide for assistance including technical and managerial
skills to manage the tasks athand

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Specify role of NGOs if required for resettlement planning and management

CHAPTER VIII RESETTLEMENT BUDGET AND FINANCING

Identify land acquisition and resettlement costs
Prepare annual budget and specify timing for release offunds

CHAPTER IX IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Prepare a time schedule showing start and finish dates for land acquisition and resettlement tasks.
Show how affected people will be provided before demolition of structures.

CHAPTER X MONITORING AND EVALUATION

Prepare internal monitoring plan for land acquisition and resettlement with targets and key indicators of
progress, mechanism for reporting and resource requirements.
Prepare evaluation plan with provision for external independent evaluation for bilateral funded projects.
Specify participation of affected people in monitoring andevaluation.

Outline for Short Resettlement Plan

Chapter 1: Scope of Land Acquisition and Resettlement

Describe alternative options considered to minimize land acquisition and displacement. Explain why the
remaining effects (land acquisition and displacement if any) are unavoidable. Give a summarized version
of the key effects, the extent of land acquired, the assets people would lose and the people displaced from
homes or from their livelihoods oroccupations.

Chapter 2: Objectives, Policy framework and Entitlements

Describe the resettlement policy of the State which provides resettlement benefits to mitigate the negative
impact and the details of entitlements of the project affected persons and families

539
 Chapter 3: Public Consultation, People‘s Participation and Grievance Redress

Describe consultation process and procedures, how the project will ensure participation of the affected
people in the awareness programs on the proposed project, the processes of land acquisition and
resettlement and how their grievances will beredressed.

Chapter 4: Compensation, Relocation and Income/Livelihood Restoration

Describe arrangement for valuing and disbursing compensation. Explain the arrangements that would be
made for relocation of housing and shifting of establishments. Describe livelihood restoration measures to
be implemented, as to how, when, where and by whom, and the mechanism to monitor the processes and
time-boundprogress.

Chapter 5: Institutional Framework

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Identify main tasks and responsibilities related to planning, implementing and monitoring land acquisition
and resettlement.

540
1500

1500 . Design of Roads

All major PWD roads shall be designed in accordance with the relevant IS/IRC codes and practices. For
this purpose the following list of codes may be made referred.
IRC:32-1969 Standard for Vertical and Horizontal Clearances of Overhead Electric Powerand Tele
communication Lines as Related toRoads
IRC:38-1988 Guidelines for Design of Horizontal Curves for Highways and Design Tables (First
Revision)
IRC:39-1986 Standards for Road-Rail Level Crossings(FirstRevision)
IRC:41-1997 Type Designs for Check Barriers (FirstRevision)
IRC:54-1974 Lateral and Vertical Clearances at Underpasses forVehicularTraffic

APPENDICES
IRC:65-1976 Recommended Practice for TrafficRotaries
IRC:66-1976 Recommended Practice for Sight Distance onRuralHighways
IRC:69-1977 Space Standards for Roads in UrbanAreas
IRC:73-1980 Geometric Design Standards for Rural (Non-Urban)Highways
IRC:80-1981 TypeDesignsforPick-upBusStopsonRural(i.e.,Non-Urban)Highways
IRC:86-1983 Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads inPlains
IRC:92-1985 Guidelines for the Design of Interchanges in UrbanAreas
IRC:98-1997 Guidelineson Accommodation of Underground Utility Services Along and Across
Roadsin Urban Areas (FirstRevision)
IRC:99-1988 Tentative Guidelines on the Provision of Speed Breakers for Control of Vehicular

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Speedson Minor Roads
IRC:103-1988 Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities

IRC: SP: 12- 1973 Tentative Recommendations on the Provision of Parking Spaces for Urban Areas
IRC: SP: 23- 1983 Vertical Curves for Highways
IRC: SP: 41- 1994 Guidelines on Design of At-Grade Intersections in Rural & Urban Areas

IRC: 58-2002 Guidelines for the Design of Plain

Jointed Rigid Pavements for Highways (Second Revision)

IRC:SP: 72. Design of Flexible pavements

(Latest Revision of
relevant codes shall
befollowed.)

541
 1501. Classification of roads
The roads under PWD are classified as Expressways, National Highways (NH), State Highways (SH), and
Major District Roads (MDR), other District Roads as detailed below,
Expressways: The function of Expressways is to cater for movement of heavy volumes of motor traffic at
high speed. They connect major points of traffic generation and are intended to serve trips of medium and
long length between large residential areas, industrial or commercial concentration and the central business
districts.
National Highways (NH): These are main highways running through the length and breadth of the country
connecting major ports, highways of neighbouring countries, state capitals. These are the highways
connecting majorports, industrial and tourist centres with in the state and neighbouring states.
(c) State Highways (SH): These are arterial routs of a state linking district head quarters and important
cities within the state and connecting them with National Highways to the neighbouring state.
Major District Roads (MDR): These are important roads within a district serving areas of
production/markets and connecting these with each other or with the main highways.
Main Link roads (MRL): These are important roads within a district serving areas of
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

production/marketsandconnectingthesewithMDRs/SHs.
Other Village/muncipal roads: These are important roads within a district serving areas of
production/markets and connecting these with MDRs/SHs.
1502. Design Parameters
The main parameters involved in the design of any road is the traffic volume it has to cater to, the speed at
which the traffic flows, and the safety of vehicles in terms of sight distance considerations.
1502.1.Speed: Thedesignspeedistheexpected95thpercentilespeedofthemotorisedtrafficonthenew road in the
design year. The 95th percentile speed is the speed, which only 5% of vehicles will exceed. The choice of
design speed has a big influence on key aspects of highway design, especiallycurvature
In practice it is rarely possible to adopt a uniform design speed for the whole road - design speeds need to
vary from section to section to reflect differences in the road environment, terrain, etc. IRC SP 73 specifies
the design speeds for different types ofterrain.
1502.2. Volume: Traffic data is critically important in the design of roads. Traffic surveys must cover
motorised as well as non-motorised traffic. For new roads on completely new alignments it will be
necessary to assign traffic to them from existing roads and then make an allowance for generated traffic.
Usually mixed traffic volumes are expressed in PCU. The PCU factor for various vehicle types are available
in IRC 73 and the PCU ranges for various class of roads are in IRC 86
1502.3. Sight distance: The need to achieve minimum sight distance standards sets limits on how sharp
the curves can be. The details of sight distance for horizontal curves and vertical curves are given in IRC
73 and IRC SP 23 respectively. In the case of Rural Highways, IRC 66:1976 may be referred. There are
threemaintypesofsightdistancetoconsider:StoppingSightDistance(SSD),OvertakingSightDistance (OSD)
Intermediate Sight Distance(ISD).
1502.4. Stopping Sight Distance. This is the visibility necessary for a driver to be able to see an
obstructionintimetobringthevehicletoahaltwithout acollision.Thisisabasicminimumstandardfor two-lane
single carriageway roads. It is assumed that the driver‟s eye height is 1.2m and the height ofthe obstruction
is at least 0.15m above the roadsurface.
1502.5.Overtaking Sight Distance: This is the visibility necessary for a driver to be able to see whether
the road ahead is sufficiently clear to enable him to overtake a vehicle in front – even if an oncoming vehicle
appears after he has started the overtaking manoeuvre. It is a very long distance, especially at the higher
speeds, and it can be difficult toachieve.
1502.6. Intermediate Sight Distance: This is the visibility necessary for a driver to be able to see whether
the road ahead is sufficiently clear to enable him to overtake, assuming that he will abort the manoeuvre if
an oncoming vehicle appears before he has got level with the slower vehicle. ISD is much less than OSD
yet it permits reasonably safe overtaking. ISD is about twice SSD. It is assumed that the observer and the
obstruction are at eye height (1.2m).
1502.7. Geometric Design Standards: Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads in Plains shall be as
per IRC: 86-1983 and for Rural (Non-Urban) Highways as per IRC: 73-1980. The space standards for Roads
in Urban Areas shall be IRC: 69-1977. In the case of Hill Roads Recommendations About the

542
Alignment Survey and Geometric Design of Hill Roads IRC: 52-2001 may be followed. Appendix 3.4
gives the standards for roads inJ&K.
1503. Cross Sectional Elements
1503.1. Building lines, Control lines, Land width, ROW
Desirable land width in metre for different classes of roads is indicated in Appendix 3.4. The same is also
shown in Figure 3.1

Overall width between Control lines

Overall width between Building lines

Road Land Width

Setback Setback
Distance Distance

APPENDICES
Roadway

Carriageway

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Control Line Building Line
Road Land Boundary Centre Line of Road Building Line Control Line
Road Land Boundary

Figure 3.1: Road Terminology

1503.2. Camber or Cross Fall
Carriageway cross fall must be sufficient to provide good surface drainage, without causing problems for
drivers. On two-way single carriageway roads the carriageway is normally cambered to form an inverted
„V‟, which may be rounded at its highest point, the crown. On dual carriageway roads the carriageway
normally slopes away from the median.
At curves the carriageway and shaller profile may change Shallers having the same surface as the
carriageway may have the same cross fall, but generally shaller cross falls will be a little steeper - normally
5%. The cross falls for different type of pavement surfaces are provided in IRC 73
1503.3. Shaller
Shallers are essential for safety, to ensure capacity utilisation, and must be provided on allroads. Shallers
along Highways must ideally be paved in order to be durable and perform effectively in all weathers. This
can be achieved either by extending the main pavement or using a different construction,
suchasdoublebituminoussealtreatment.Generally,thewidthofShallerswillbeonehalf-thedifference between
the roadway width and carriagewaywidth.
1503.3.1. Factors to be considered when designing shallers:
the shaller needs to be strong enough to take all vehicles in any weather and without needing much
maintenance shallers that are to be used by NMVs and pedestrians must have a good-quality smooth surface
– otherwise NMVs and pedestrians will use the carriagewayinstead
using a different surface to that of the carriageway makes the shaller look different and this helps emphasise
that it has a different function, it is essential to use edge lines (preferably made of thermoplastic) to mark
the divide between carriage way and shaller there shall be no difference in level between the carriageway
and the shaller – an edge drop could discourage smaller vehicles from using the shaller and could be
hazardous, especially for motorcyclists.
On dual carriageway roads there must be a 0.25m wide shaller on the right-hand side of the carriageway
next to the median. The divide between the carriageway and shaller must be marked with an edgeline.

543
 1503.4. Medians
Medians segregate traffic, provides protection from out-of-control vehicles, reduce glare at nighttime, and
acts as pedestrian refuge in urban intersections. For details the chapter on road safety may be referred.
1503.5 Culverts
Culverts must be designed for the entire carriageway width. IRC SP 13 may be referred for details of Culvert
design. Typical drawings are also given. IRC SP 20:2002 also details the different type of culverts.
1503.6. Utilities
Provision for Underground Utility Services Along and Across Roads in Urban Areas shall be as per IRC:
98-1997
1503.7. Bus Bays
In the case of highways, bus bays are to be provided to ensure that the other vehicles in the stream are not
obstructed due to stoppage of buses. The bus bays are usually of one lane width and the length varies
depending on number of buses that stop simultaneously. Details are included in the chapter on Road Safety.
1503.8. Footpath:
Roads passing through urban locales with considerable pedestrian traffic must be provided with footpaths.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

From safety considerations, fencing may be appropriate. IRC 103 shall be referred for pedestrian facilities
Details are also included in the chapter on Road Safety.`
1503.9. Truck Lay byes
Highways usually cater to long distance truck traffic and facilities shall be provided for their parking. These
laybyes shall offer resting facilities for the drivers also. Length of lay bye shall be adequate to cater to peak
parking demand estimated on volume projections and average delay expected.
1503.10. Passing places
On hill roads, passing places are required to facilitate crossing of vehicles. These shall be provided at the
rate of 2 to 3 per km and each shall be of 20 to 30 m length and of 5.5m widths.
1503.11. Lateral and vertical clearances
Lateral clearance is the distance between the extreme edges of the carriageway to the face of the nearest
support, whether it is a solid abutment, pier or column.
Vertical clearance stands for the height above the highest point of the travelled way i.e. the carriageway and
part of the shallers meant for vehicular use (crown/ super elevated edge) to the lowest point of the overhead
structure/ overhangs. For details refer IRC 54. Standard for Vertical and Horizontal Clearances of Overhead
Electric Power and Telecommunication Lines as Related to Roads shall be as per IRC:32- 1969
1503.12.Emb
1503.12.Embankments
The details of embankment design are given in IRC 36 and IRC SP 20, and the Guidelines for the Design
of High Embankments as per IRC: 75-1979

1503.13. Drains
Drains are an integral part of road and must be provided for all roads. These must be permanent structures,
considering the heavy monsoons that the state is subjected to. Moreover, these must be properly maintained,
as otherwise, the entire road gets damaged. The main objective of drainage is to prevent early damage of
the pavement due to entry of excess of water and preventing saturation up to a dept of 1 m below the top of
the sub grade. This can be achieved by providing proper drainage. The two types are surface drains and
subsurface drains.
Details may be referred in IRC SP 42 and IRC SP 50.
1504. Horizontal Alignment
The alignment shall be as directional, fluent and matching well with the surrounding topography as
possible and also to avoid abruptchanges. On new roads, the curve shall be designed to have the large
practical radius, generally not less than the ruling value corresponding to ruling design speed given in
IRC:38-1988. Absolute minimum values based on minimum design speed may be used where economics
of construction and sight conditions so dictates. The radii below absolute minimum shall not be provided
Straight section exceeding 3 km length must beavoided

544
A curvilinear alignment with long curve is better from point of safety and aesthetics. Sharp curve shall not
be introduced at the end of long tangents, since this can be extremely hazardous. Curve shall be sufficiently
long and shall have transition curves at either end to eliminate shock due to application of centrifugal force.
Deflection angle less than 1 no curve is required to be designed. Reverse curves may be needed in difficult
terrain. Sufficient length between 2 curves shall be provided for introduction of requisite transition curve.
To avoid distortion, in appearance, the alignment shall coordinate with longitudinal profile
1504.1. Horizontal curves
The radius of curvature in horizontal curves is decided by the design speed of the road, side friction. In
general Horizontal curves shall consist of a circular portion flanked by spiral transition at both ends. Refer
IRC 38 and IRC 73 for details of horizontal curves, extra-widening super-elevation and setbackdistances.
1505.Vertical Alignment
The general alignment of the road shall follow the terrain as far as possible. Economy and aesthetics are
also of importance is choosing the longitudinal profile.
1505.1.Gradient

APPENDICES
The rate of rise or fall with respect to the horizontal along the length of road expressed as ratio or a
percentage is termed as gradient. Recommended gradients for different terrain conditions are given in IRC
73 and IRC SP 23
1505.2.Vertical Curves
Formula and length of Summit curves and Valley curves are as per IRC SP 23.
1506. Coordination of Horizontal and vertical alignment
Vertical and horizontal curves shall coincide and result in a smooth flowing appearance. If not possible, the
horizontal curve shall be somewhat longer than the vertical curve. Sharp horizontal curve shall be avoided.
If the horizontal scale is large and the vertical scale is relatively small, it may be satisfactory to include two

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

vertical movements on one long horizontal curve.
Grade and curvature shall be in proper balance. Flat horizontal curves at the expense of steep or long grades
or sharp curvature with flat grades shall be avoided.
Broken-back curves (2 curves in same direction with short tangent in between) both in alignment and profile
shall be replaced by a single curve.
Proper coordination in this respect will ensure safety improve utility and enhance aesthetics of the road.
1507. Hairpin bends
A hairpin bend may be designed as a circular curve with transition at each end. Alternately, compound
circular curves may be provided. The general design criteria are as per IRC 73
1508. Intersections
The design for intersections is based on safety conditions and to cater to peak turning traffic volume.
General guidelines to be followed are:
i) The number of intersections shall be kept at minimum
ii) If necessary, some minor roads may be connected with each other before joining a majorroad.
iii) Geometric layout shall be so selected that hazardous movements by drivers are eliminated. This
can be achieved by various techniques such as canalising and staggering.
iv) The design shall permit the driver to discern quickly either from the layout or from traffic signs,
the path he shall follow and the actions of merging and diverging. This can be achieved by a good
layout, traffic islands, signs and carriageway markings. Good visibility improves safety.
v) The number of conflict points shall be minimised.
vi) Vehicles that are forced to wait in order to cross a traffic stream shall be provided with adequate
space at the junctions. Generally intersections are classified as at grade intersections and Grade
separated intersections

At grade intersections(Junctions)
The different types of at grade intersections are given in IRC SP 41. Recommended Practice for Traffic
Rotaries are as per IRC: 65-1976V

545
 Grade Separate dintersections
An intersection layout that permits crossing manoeuvres at different levels is known as grade separated
intersection or an interchange. These are provided when the traffic volumes on the intersecting arms are too
heavy and results in long queues is being formed. Usually these are required in urban intersections where
both the roads are equally important. Also from a safety point, those intersections with high accident records
may be converted into grade separated intersections. IRC 92 gives the details for interchanges in urban
areas.
1509. Sub grade and Pavement
The road structure may be divided into four major components, Viz. Land, Earthwork, pavement and cross
drainage works. The types of pavement are
✓ Flexible Pavement
✓ Rigid Pavement
✓ Composite Pavement (Semi rigid and Roller Compacted Concrete) In case of rural roads, in view of the
stage development strategy and the initial cost advantage, the flexible pavement may be the appropriate
choice. Generally, the choice of pavement will be further guided by several other factors such as
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

✓ Rainfall and temperature

✓ Type and strength of soil along the alignment
✓ Availability of good aggregates
✓ Availability of Industrial wastes like Fly ash slag etc in the proximity. In all designs, economies in the
initial cost as well as in life cycle costs are crucial and very important Components of Pavement are detailed
in the section on Execution of Road Works.

1510. Design of Flexible Pavement

1510.1. Pavement Thickness: The thickness of pavement is designed on the basis of projected number of
commercial vehicles, for the design life using the current commercial vehicles per day and its growth rate.
Based on the strength of granular materials that are used, the total design thickness is divided into base and
sub-base thickness.The principle criteria for determining the thickness of a flexible pavement with a thin
bituminous surfacing is the vertical compressive strain on top of the subgrade imposed by standard axle
load of magnitude 8.17 KN (870 Kg) Excessive vertical Subgrade strain causes permanent deformation in
the subgrade, which is manifested in the form of rutting on the pavement surface. The minimum recommend
pavement thickness is 450 mm for frost prone zones. For rigid and semi rigid pavements, tensile stress is
taken as design criteria. The detail design for flexible pavement may be as per IRC: 37 & IRC SP 72-2015

1511. Design of Rigid Pavements

The main type of rigid pavement usually practiced is cement concrete pavements and Roller Compacted
Concrete Pavements (RCCP). Strict quality control shall be exercised during construction. Cement
Concrete Pavement (CC) Design of cement concrete pavement shall be as per IRC 58. IRC 15 gives the
detailing of joints. These may be used in Special cases only where drainage problem is acute and continuous
and may be used in limited length. However drainage arrangements shall be ensured even for concrete
pavements.
1511.1.Roller Compacted concrete Pavement: RCCP is a technique which makes use laying of zero
slump concrete manually and compacting with vibratory or static road roller.
1512. Design of Bridges

1512.1. Introduction
The design of Bridges shall be carried out as per the provisions and recommendations IRC/IS codes as per
list below. In case of IRC codes being silent about any design aspect, provisions in IS/ International codes
or general practice adopted in DESIGN WING (DIQC) may be followed.

546
1512.1.1. List of Codes to be referred for Design of Bridges
1. IRC: 5-1998 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section I –
General
Features of Design (Seventh Revision)
2. IRC: 6-2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section II – Loads
and
Stresses (Fourth Revision)
3. IRC:18-2000 Design Criteria for Prestressed Concrete Road Bridges (Post-Tensioned Concrete)
(Third Revision)
4. IRC:21-2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section III –
Cement
Concrete (Plain and Reinforced) (Third Revision)
5. IRC:22-1986 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section VI –

APPENDICES
Composite Construction (First Revision)
6. IRC:24-2001 StandardSpecificationsandCodeofPracticeforRoadBridges,SectionV–SteelRoad
Bridges (Second Revision)
7. IRC:40-2002 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IV –
Brick,
Stone and Block Masonry (Second Revision)
8. IRC:78-2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section VII –
Foundations and Substructure (Second Revision)

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

9. IRC:83-1999 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX –
Bearings,
Part I : Metallic Bearings (First Revision)
10. IRC:83-1987 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX –
(Part II) Bearings,
Part II: Elastomeric Bearings
11. IRC:83-2002 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX –
(Part III) Bearings,
Part III: POT, POT-CUM-PTFE, PIN AND METALLIC GUIDE BEARINGS
12. IRC:87-1984 Guidelines for the Design and Erection of False work for Road Bridges
13. IRC:89-1997 Guidelines for Design and Construction of River Training & Control Works for
Road
Bridges (First Revision)
14 IRC SP 20 Specifications for Rural Roads
15. IRC: SP: 33- Guidelines on Supplemental Measures for Design, Detailing & Durability of
1989 Important
Bridge Structures
16 IS 456-2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice
Latest revision of above codes shall be followed.
The competent authority shall approve the design of Bridges and culverts. For any structure for which
detailed investigations are required the same may be conducted by the Assistant Engineer and supervised
by the Assistant Executive Engineer, and details shall be furnished for final design and got approved by the
competent authority. If the designs are decided to be done by DIQC, the relevent details shall be forwarded
by the Chief Engineer to DIQC through DCW.
If the officer competent to approve a design requires the assistance of the Design wing for specific problem,
he shall hold consultation with the DCW.

547
 1512.2. Design Data Required for Design of Bridges
For all bridges to be designed in the make a complete investigation of the site and the design data and
required drawings shall be prepared and submitted along with the proforma given in Appendix1500A.
The other documents required to be submitted along with the investigation report are alignment plan
approved by the Design wing and checklist given in Appendix 1500B & 1500C
1513. Design Procedure for Bridges
1513.1. Preliminary Design: The ARO shall study the investigation details and alignment particular bridge
and shall make note on any modification required for the above alignment plan considering the various
design aspects. The ARO shall also make preliminary design of the bridge in the form of a proposal drawing
and submitted to the superior officers, if the modifications required in the alignment plan are of trivial
nature. If any major alterations are required in the alignment plan, the same may be intimated to the Chief
Engineer with specific recommendations for revision and approval. After receipt of the revised approved
alignment, a proposal drawing shall be prepared on the basis of the same and forwarded the Chief Engineer
who shall subsequently furnish a feasibility report considering the various construction and economic
aspects of the proposed bridge at the site.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

1513.2. Detailed Design: Based on the feasibility report furnished and the alignment plan approved by the
DCW, the Assistant Director shall do a general and detailed design of the bridge. The design shall be done
by manually or by using approved computer software. In both cases a design volume shall be maintained
and approved by the CE. The DRO shall check the general arrangement and detailed design drawing
designed by the ARO. The D.R.O shall review the same and the R.O shall recommend the drawings to
DCW for approval. The CE may entrust the whole design to outside consultant also if found necessary.
1514. Geometrical Criteria
1514.1. Width of Carriageway, Footpath, Median and Kerb; This shall be as per the provisions of IRC
5.
1514.2. Longitudinal Gradient: The Engineer in charge of design has to consider all aspects such as
construction costs, practical problems in construction at the site and the vehicle operation cost, before
finalizing the gradients. Based on the topography of site, IRC has recommended the following categories
of gradients for roads which shall be applicable to bridges also.
Terrain Ruling Limiting Exceptional
gradient Gradient Gradient
a) Plain or rolling 3.3 % (1 in 30) 5 % (1 in 20) 6.7 % (1 in 15)
b) Mountainous terrain 5 % (1 in 20) 6 % (1 in 16.7) 7 % (1 in 14.5%)
c) Steep terrain 6 % (1 in 16.7) 7 % (1 in 14.5%) 8 % (1 in 12.5%)
Where non-motorised vehicle are likely to use the structure more appropriate lower gradients shall be
utilized, but may need to a balance against cost and other environmental issues.
1514.3. Cross gradient
The deck cross gradient shall be adopted with a view that in localities with lower rainfall, a flatter camber
and in places with high rainfall, a steeper camber. The values of cross gradient recommended by IRC for
different types of road surfaces are as follows, which shall be applicable to bridges also.
Range of cross gradient in areas of rainfall
Type of surface coat Heavy to Light
Cementconcrete 2.0%(1in50)to1.7%(1in60)
Bituminous 2.5%(1in40)to2.0%(1in50)
1514.4.Gradients, Super Elevation
If there is a change of gradient on the bridge deck, suitable vertical curve shall be introduced conforming
to the stipulations contained in IRC: SP-23. The super elevation on the deck of a bridge on a horizontal
curve shall be provided in accordance with the relevant IRC Road Standards.
1514.5. Clearances
The minimum vertical and horizontal clearance (clear height and width respectively available for passage
of traffic) to be provided on bridges shall be as specified in IRC:5. For vertical and horizontal clearances at
under passes and / rail over bridges the essential provisions of the code has to be followed.

548
1516. Hydraulic Criteria
1516.1.DesignDischarge: The design discharge, for which the waterway of the bridge is to be designed,
shall be based on maximum flood discharge of 50 years return cycle. In case where the requisite information
is not available, the design discharge shall be the maximum estimated discharge determined by the methods
suggested in IRC:5 or any other rational method. The investigation report shall contain the discharges
obtained by the different methods suggested in IRC: 6.
1516.2. Effective Linear waterway, Afflux and Scour depth
The effective linear waterway may be compared with that provided under other bridges in the vicinity over
the same river after duly considering their performance. IRC 5 may also be referred.
For calculation of afflux IRC SP: 13 may be referred to. To calculate the maximum scour depth, IRC: 5 and
IRC SP: 13 shall be followed.
1516.3. Loading Criteria
The Loading criteria to be adopted for all the bridges are as per IRC: 6.
1517. Selection of Type of Bridge and Span Arrangement

APPENDICES
1517.1.General Considerations: Specific site characteristics like width of crossing, nature of stream, depth
of flow, depth of flow during different seasons, subsoil characteristics, and the capabilities of contracting
agencies, who would be interested in building the structure including the availability of skilled and
unskilled labour are mostly the major considerations in selecting the type of structure and span
arrangements in specialized structures like long span bridges. The attempt of the engineers shall be towards
minimising the overall cost of the total structure including approaches within the site-specific constraints
as obtained. For normal simply supported structures, it has been observed that the total cost of the bridge
proper tends to be the minimum, when the cost of superstructure approaches to that of foundation and
substructure put together which may be applied as a thumb rule for initialtrial.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

1517.2.Environmental Considerations
Aesthetic and environmental considerations are increasingly becoming major factors in the selection of the
type of structure including its foundation to be adopted for a specific site. To achieve aesthetically pleasing
view of bridge structure, attention shall be paid to produce a clean, simple, well proportioned structured
form. In most cases, achieving the desired structural quality may add little to the overall cost of structure.
Aesthetic considerations include harmony with the general topography of the site, optimisation in the use
of materials etc. Environmental considerations include limitation of noise levels during and after
construction of the bridge and the level of pollution due to air and water during construction and service,
conservation of flora and fauna etc.
1517.3. Economical Range of Span Lengths for Different Type of Superstructures
Piers and abutments shall be so located as to make the best use of the foundation conditions available. The
number of supports and their locations shall be so fixed as to provide the most economical design of the
bridge and at the same time to satisfy special requirements, if any, for navigation, railways or other crossings
in consultation with the concerned authorities, floating logs or debris and bridge aesthetics, etc. Placing a
pier at the deepest portion of an active channel may be avoided by suitably adjusting the number and length
of the spans. The ranges of span length within which a particular type of superstructure can be economical
along with other considerations like type of foundation etc. are givenbelow
Type of superstructure Span (metres)
i) RCC single or multipleboxes 1.5 to 15
ii) Simply supported RCCslabs 3 to 10
iii) Simply supported RCC Tbeam 10 to 25
iv) Simply supported PSCgirder 25 to 45
v) Simply supported RCC voidedslab 10 to 15
vi) Simply supported / continuous PSC voidedslab 15 to 30
vii) Continuous RCC voided slab 10 to 20
viii) RCC box sections; simply supported /Balanced cantilever continuous 25 to 50
ix) PSCboxsections;simplysupported/Balancedcantilevercontinuous 35 to 75
x) PSC cantilever construction /continuous 75 to 150
xi) Cable stayedbridges 100 to 800
xii) Suspension bridges 300 to 1500

549
 However,wheneveraneconomicalspanarrangementandtypeofstructureisdecided,ithastobeensured that
the required infrastructure facilities, design and construction capabilities, specified materials etc. are
available.

1518. Superstructure
It is the superstructure of a bridge that directly supports the traffic and facilitates its smooth
uninterrupted passage over natural/man made barriers like rivers, creeks, railways, roads, etc. by
transmitting the loads and forces coming over it to the foundation through the bearings and substructure.
The minimum functional requirement of superstructure is mentioned in section 1617.2. Consistent with
economy and local availability of the materials, labour and technology for a particular type of
superstructure selection may have to be made out of the following: i) Reinforced cement concrete
superstructure: These are the most poplar type of superstructure in the present day which may take the
form of solid slab, voided slab, T-beam and slab, box girder, rigid frame, arch, balanced cantilever or
bow-string girder. ii) Pre-stressed concrete superstructure: This may also take any of the above forms
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

referred in the previous paragraph. Care shall be taken about the provision of future pre- stressing to the
extent of 20 per cent of total pre-stress force. For this purpose, dummy cables may be laid in the
structure, which can be used for further pre-stressing if the need arises afterwards. iii) Steel
superstructure: With increasing availability of quality steel at international prices in recent years the use
of steel for superstructure is becoming attractive option. The forms, these may take are steel beam, plate
girder, box girder, steel truss, arch, cantilever suspension bridges and cable stayed bridges. Any
combination of above materials considering their distinct advantages for particular elements may be
adopted. Most common types of composite construction are cast in situ or pre-cast girder in prestressed
concrete with RCC deck or steel beam/plate girders with RCC deck or cable stayed bridges with RCC
or PSC deck.
1518.1.Design
Relevant IRC Codes which have to be complied in the design of superstructure are IRC: 40, IRC: 21,
IRC: 18, IRC: 24, IRC: 22 for Masonry, RCC, PSC, Steel and Composite Structures respectively. Other
codes applicable for all types of superstructures are IRC: 5 and IRC: 6. Other major guidelines also
include IRC: 85. In case of IRC codes silent about some design aspects, provisions in the
IS/International Codes may be followed.
1518.2. Standard Plans (Type designs)
Wherever possible the adoption of standard plans prepared by the MoRTH shall be followed for
superstructure. These will obviate detailed individual designs for bridge decks and ensure that drawings
are available on time and also maintain accuracy in design.

550
Ministry of Road Transport & Highways have brought out various standard plans which include
standard plan for:
No. Type of Deck Skew Overall Effective span (m)
Angle width of
deck(m)
1.a. RCC Solid Slab without 0° 8.45 3.37, 4.37, 5.37, 6.37, 7.37, 8.37, 9.37,
footpath 10.37
1.b. RCC Solid Slab with footpath 0° 11.05 3.37, 4.37, 5.37, 6.37, 7.37, 8.37, 9.37,
10.37
1.c. RCC Solid Slab without 15°,30° 8.45 5.37, 6.37, 8.37
footpath 45°,60°
1.d. RCC Solid Slab with footpath 15°,30° 11.05 4.37, 6.37 & 8.37
45°,60°

APPENDICES
1.e. RCC Solid Slab with and 0° 12.00 3.00, 4.00, 5.00, 6.00, 7.00, 8.00, 9.00,
without 10.00
Footpath
1.f. RCC Solid Slab without 15°, 12.00 4.00, 6.00, 8.00, 10.00
footpath
22.5°, 35°
2.a. RCC T-beam and slab without 0° 8.45 10.5, 12.5, 14.5, 16.5, 18.75, 21.75, 24.75
footpath (3 girders)
2.b. RCC T-beam and slab with 0° 11.05 10.5, 12.5, 14.5, 16.5, 18.75, 21.75, 24.75

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

footpath (3 girders)
2.c. RCC T-beam and slab with & 0° 12.00 10.0, 12.0, 14.0, 16.0, 18.0, 21.0, 24.0
without footpath (4 girders)
3.a. PSC Girder and RC Slab 0° 8.58 30.0 & 40.0
without
footpath (3 girders)
3.b. PSC Girder and RC Slab with 0° 11.23 30.0 & 35.0
footpath (3 girders)

1519.Bearings
The design of metallic bearings and neoprene bearings shall be in conformity with IRC: 83 Parts I &II.
and clause 2000 of Specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by Ministry of Road Transport
and Highways (MoRTH)
(MoRTH) carries out pre-qualification of the manufacturers of bearings from time to time. The pre-
qualification is valid for a certain period. Bearings have to be procured from such manufacturers only.
1520. Sub-structure
Substructure include those portions of a bridge which are above the foundation which include piers,
abutments, abutment and pier caps, dirt wall, returns, wing wall etc. but excludes bearings and
superstructure. It can be built of brick/stone masonry, plain/reinforced/pre-stressed concrete, steel.
Selection of a particular type of sub structure depends upon the span and type of superstructure, the
height of substructure, availability of construction material and construction equipments, period and
time of construction and above all on overall economy. The shape of piers and abutments in general,
shall be such as to cause minimum obstruction to flow of water.
1520.1.General Considerations:
The following general conditions are to be followed for the construction of substructures: i) On all
exposed faces of concrete member a minimum reinforcement equivalent to 2.5 kg/sq.m. shall be
provided to withstand stresses due to temperature and shrinkage with maximum spacing limited to 200
mm. ii) The width of abutment and pier cap shall be fixed on the basis of design and construction
requirement. Further it shall be sufficient to accommodate not only the bearings but also an offset of
150 mm beyond the edges of the bearings and also facilitate inspection and repairs of bearings. The
thickness of such caps shall not be less than 225m1m19 up to a span of 25 m. iii) In skew bridges, where

551
 bearings are placed at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the bridge, the top width of the
piers/abutment has to be more compared to right bridges in order to have a clear distance of 150 mm
beyond the edges of bearings. iv) It is desirable to lay the abutment caps and the dirt walls over
abutments with the same concrete and in one operation, and make them monolithic by detailing the
reinforcement properly, to avoid cracking at the junction of the two components. v) The top of wing
return walls shall be carried 100 mm above the top of the slope of embankment to prevent any soil from
being blown or washed away by rain. vi) Length of cantilever returns where adopted, shall not be more
than 3.5 metres. vii) All abutments shall be designed for a live load surcharge equivalent to
1.2 m height of earth fill. viii) All wing walls or return walls provided for full height of approaches shall
be designed to withstand a live load surcharge equivalent to 0.6 m height of earth fill. ix) The fill behind
abutments, wing walls, and return walls shall conform to specifications given in IRC:78. x) Suitably
designed cut and ease waters shall be provided in piers up to affluxes High Flood Level or higher from
consideration of waves, etc. xi) If the height of pier exceeds 6 metres, R.C.C. piers may be preferred.
1520.2. Design: Sub-structure shall be designed to withstand the loads and forces as specified in IRC:6,
the worst combination of forces and factors of safety shall be as specified in IRC:78. For allowable 108
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

stresses and other design requirements, IRC Codes depending upon the type of construction material
shall be followed.
1521. Bridge Foundations
The foundations for piers and abutments shall be at such depths that they are safe against scour and
large impacts where necessary and are protected against it. They shall be taken down to a level sufficient
to secure firm foundation from consideration of bearing capacity, overall stability and suitability of the
strata at founding level and sufficient depth below it. The subsoil characteristics obtained at a particular
site and consequently the type of foundations feasible is one of the major considerations in selection of
type of structure and span arrangement.
It is necessary to evaluate, in advance, at the preliminary design stage, the pros and cons of choice of a
particular type of foundation. The selection of wrong type of foundation may lead to delay in
construction, increase in cost, and distress during construction and sometimes impossibilities of
realizing technical requirement. In order to avoid such difficulties that may arise during execution stage,
alternative foundation types shall be suggested in the Proposal Drawing. The concerned authority in the
field office shall study the pros and cons of constructing the suggested types of foundations and shall
record a note about the same in the feasibility report. Based on the above report,
the type of foundation shall be fixed by the engineer responsible for the design. R efer IRC 78 for
different types of foundations.
1522. General Considerations and Design

All Bridges within 20 km of the Saline/Alkline water shall be given anti corrosive treatment for
reinforcements as per specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by (MoRTH) and IS 13260.
Epoxy painting may be given to all exposed surface of RCC structural elements in such area; similar
treatment may also be done in areas prone to industrial/environmentalpollution.
1522.1. Open foundations:
The design aspects of open foundations can be obtained from IRC: 21 and IRC: 78. Excavation on open
foundations shall be done after taking necessary safety precautions for which guidance may be taken
from IS: 3764.
1522.2. Well foundations:
Well foundation shall be designed to withstand the loads and forces as specified in IRC: 6, the stability
and design of well foundations shall be done under the most critical combination of loads and forces as
specified in IRC: 78. The pressure on foundations shall also satisfy the provisions of IRC:
78. For allowable stresses and other design requirements, IRC: 21 shall be followed.
1522.3. Pile foundations:
Piles shall be designed to carry uplift and lateral loads besides direct vertical load. The worst
combination of forces and factors of safety shall be as specified in IRC: 78. For design of piles guidance
may be taken from IS: 2911 subject to limitations/stipulations given in IRC: 78. For allowable stresses
and other design requirements, IRC: 21 shall be followed.

552
1522.4. Expansion Joints
Expansion joints are provided at the end of deck and cater for movement of deck due to temperature,
shrinkage, creep etc. Expansion joints make the deck joint leak proof, protect the edges of slab/girder
and allow smooth passage of loads from one span to other by bridging the gap. Depending upon the gap
width to be bridged, there are various types of expansion joints in use at present. IRC 83- part Part II
and I may be referred for details regarding expansion joints. Specifications for Road and Bridge Works
published by (MoRTH) have issued interim specifications for expansion joints and subsequent
modifications in the list of manufacturers/suppliers, which may be followed. Further, a warranty of 10
years of trouble free performance may be insisted upon from the contractors/suppliers for all type of
joints except for buried joints and filler joints.
1522.5. Railings, Parapets or Guide Posts and Crash Barriers
The forces to be considered in design of Railings, Parapets or Guide Posts and Crash Barriers shall be
shall be as per relevant stipulations of IRC:6. For R.O.Bs across railway lines, those for railway‟s safety
shall govern these requirements.

APPENDICES
1522.6. Surface Finishes and Drainage of Carriageway
All carriageway and footpath surfaces shall have anti-skid characteristics. Average 75 mm thick M20
cement concrete with temperature steel shall be provided for wearing coat with necessary camber and
over it a uniform treatment of 25mm mastic asphalt top layer for waterproofing. Alternately wearing
coat as specified in Specifications for Road and Bridge Works published by (MoRTH) may be provided
depending on site condition. 109 The deck has camber or super elevation, which guides rainwater
towards Kerbs/Devri stones, and waterspouts located near the kerb further disposes the water out. One
waterspout per 20 sq.m. of the deck area is considered adequate and the spacing shall not exceed 10 m.
The spout shall have diameter not less than 100 mm and shall be of corrosion resistant material such as

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

galvanised steel, with suitable clean out fixture. The arrangement of waterspout shall be detailed along
with the Detailed Design Drawing of theSuperstructure.
For drainage of a road over bridge or flyover, a suitably designed drainage arrangement shall be
provided. This may consist of vertical C.I. or rigid PVC pipes connecting the down spouts below the
deck with funnels and along the pier up to ground level and eventually joined to the road drainage
system. Suitable vertical recess in the piers may be provided to accommodate the drainage pipes rather
than providing drip courses underneath the deck slab. If the height of abutment and return wall above
bed level is more than 2 metres, weep holes shall be provided 150 mm above low water level or ground
level whichever is higher at centre of 2 metres horizontally and 1metre vertically (Slope of 1 in 20) and
shall be staggered. Normally 100 mm diameter PVC pipe shall be used. Provision made in IRC: 40 may
also be referred.
15.22.7. Utilities
In all bridges with footpaths, a service duct shall be made under one or both footpaths to take water
supply mains, electric and telephone cables etc. The size and other requirement may be as per standards
in practice. Where footpaths are not provided, provision shall be made for supporting a suspended
service duct under the cross girder. For this purpose suitable boot holes may be left in the cross girders,
which can later be used for fixing steel supports for a suspended deck with due, care for durability and
serviceability of the bridge and its approaches. For details refer IRC 98
15.22.8. Access for Inspection and Maintenance
The design of the bridge shall be such as to provide for adequate access to all parts of the bridge to
facilitate future inspection and maintenance operations without compromising any design claus.
15.22.9. Illumination of Bridge Deck
Provision for Illumination for bridges, grade separators and interchanges shall be an integral part of the
estimate. This shall be done in consultation with the Electrical wing. The installation, lighting
arrangement, and method of control, switches etc. shall all conform to the provision contained in IS:
1944. Illumination levels for the vehicular and pedestrian subway/underpasses may be kept same as
those on the approaches at either end of the subway/underpass
15.22.10. Approaches to Bridges
The approaches on either side of a straight bridge shall have a minimum straight length of 15 meters in
the case of State Highways and MDRs and 10 meters in the case of ODRs and shall be suitably increased
to where necessary to provide for the minimum sight distance for the design speed. In
121

553
 difficult situations, the Engineer responsible for the design may at his discretion permit a reduction in
the minimum straight length of approaches, provided reasons for making a departure from the Code are
clearly recorded in the proforma for Design Data submitted along with the Investigation Report. The
investigation reports shall be accompanied by land plan clearly marking the land to be acquired from
private and public bodies and the extend of each category along with the duly completed social impact
check list. Where horizontal curves have to be provided on the approaches beyond the straight portion
on either side, the minimum radius of curvature, the super elevation and transition length for various
speed and the curve radii shall be provided in accordance with relevant stipulations contained in IRC:
38. If there is a change of gradient, suitable vertical curves shall be introduced conforming to relevant
stipulations contained in IRC: 23. Minimum surfaced width of these straight lengths of approaches shall
be equal to the carriageway width on the bridge. Reinforced concrete approach slab covering the entire
width of roadway shall be provided as per the details given in the Detailed Design Drawing of the
particular bridge. The minimum length of approach slab shall be 3.5 meters and the minimum thickness
as 150 mm. If the approaches is in filling, borrow pits shall not be dug close to the embankment to avoid
risk of parallel flow being developed which may endanger safety of the embankment. In this connection,
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

110 provision made in IRC: 10 may also be kept in view.

Where the ground level falls continuously away from the banks of the stream, the overflow spreads far
and away from banks. In such cases, it is impossible to force the overflow back into the main stream.
The correct thing to do is to pass the overflow through relief culverts at suitable points in the road
embankment. They shall not be too small to cause detrimental ponding up of the overflow, resulting in
damage to the road or some property. Nor, shall they be so big as to attract the main current. Also
protection work has to be designed at downstream of the culverts so as to dissipate the energy of the
falling water, where the water from the relief culvert, rejoins the main stream somewhere lower down.
1522.11. River Training and Protection Work
River training and protective works are required for ensuring the safety of bridges and their approaches
on either side. The selection of the type of river training or protective work will depend upon terrain,
overall behaviour of the river, location of the bridge vis-à-vis the areas of attack of the river, span
arrangement, nearness of the approaches from the influence zone of the river, etc. The types of river
training and protective works generally being used are as follows:
i) Guide bunds
ii) Spurs or groynes
iii) River bank protection
iv) Approach road protection
v) River bed protection The details of river training measures shall be referred to in Section 2500
of Specifications for Road and Bridge works published by (MoRTH)
1523.Road Signs and Signals
All multi-lane bridges, complex interchanges and grade-separated structures shall be provided with
overhead signs and signals conforming to the provision contained in IRC: 67. Non-luminous signs,
however, shall not be permitted. IRC SP 31 may be referred for new sign and IRC: 5 for overhead
structures.
1524. Building Design
This section deals with the general building requirements to ensure safety of public health through open
spaces, adequate room sizes and limitations on area and height of building.
1524.1. Introduction
Based on the preliminary investigation report, the architectural wing prepares a layout plan of the
structure inconsultation with client and the Electric Wing, which shall be got approved by the concerned
department. The architect latest shall then prepare detailed architectural plan. This shall comply withThe
National Building Code 2005 and the J&K Municipal BuildingRules.
R.C.C. design of all load bearing structures and framed structures up to two stories shall be prepared by
the Assistant Engineers and approved by the Executive Engineers and Superintending engineers as per
their powers. Necessary wind and seismic analysis must be performed. If the design is complicated the
engineer can refer it to the DIQCfor detailed design.
Design Wing of the DIQC office will undertake the work of preparing R.C.C, design for a structure
only after the receipt of the following information.

554
Set of original Architectural drawings and CD from DIQC or through website/ webportal.
Copy of Administrative approval to the estimate of the structure, (based on approved Architectural
drawings.)
Soil investigation details.
Proposed construction programme i.e. proposed dates of start of different stages of construction and
scope of different phases of construction in case of phased construction from the Executive Engineers
office.
After the Executive Engineer submits the required documents and architects design on a CD or through
web Portal to the Design Wing (Signed copies also to be forwarded), the Final design shall be prepared
and forwarded to the EE/SE/ CE as per TS issuing powers by the Executive Engineer
/concern officer. The Architects plan shall also be forwarded to Electrical wing simultaneously,
forpreparing layout of electric installations and concerned Executive Engineer for preparing sanitary
and water supply details.
1524.2.Design Philosophy

APPENDICES
design of buildings is being carried out mainly by three methods of design. They are namely: (1)
Workingstressmethod,(2)Ultimateloadmethodand(3)Limitstatemethod.
The Limit state method is now in vogue in all government design offices and premier private consulting
firms .The B.I.S. have published I.S.: 456-2000 incorporating the use of Limit state Method of design.
Working Stress Method: Used over decades, this method is now practically outdated in many advanced
countries of the world, because of its inherent limitations
The I.S: 456-2000 code gives emphasis on Limit State Method which is the modified form of Ultimate
Load Method .
Besides analytical part of structural design, following factors shall also be kept in mind while designing

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the structure.
Strength of structure.
Durability of structure.
Serviceability of structure, during construction as well as during design life time of structure.
Economy in building materials and ease ofconstructions.
Economy in entering andformwork.
Aesthetics and functional use ofstructure.
1524.3. Classification of buildings
BuildingsareclassifiedbasedonoccupancyandtypeofconstructionaspertheprovisionsofNational Building
Code 2005 part III Clause7.
List of I.S. Codes generally required to be referred for Building Design
The National Building Code published by the Bureau of Indian Standards and J&K Municipal Building
Rules has to be followed for the purpose of design of Buildings. The important I.S. Codes (with their
latest editions/ amendments) to be referred to for design of building are as follows:
1. I.S. 456-2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
2. I.S. 800-1962 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building constriction.
3. I.S. 875-1987 Designs load other than (part I to V) earthquake for building Design.
4. Part-I: Dead loads.
5. Part-II: Imposed loads.
6. Part-III: Wind loads.
7. Part IV: Snow loads.
8. Part V: Special loads and load combinations.
9. I.S. 1080-1965 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundation in soils (other
than
Raft, Ring and shell)
10. I.S: 1642-1988 Fire safety of buildings (General) Detail 3 of construction.
11. I.S.: 1643-1988 Code of practice for Fire safety of buildings (General) Exposure Hazard.
12. I.S. 1644-1988 Code of practice for Fire safety of buildings (General) Exit requirements and
personal Hazards.
13. I.S. 1888-1972 Methods of load test on soils.

555
 14. I.S.: 1893-1984 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
15. I.S: 1904-1986 Code of practice for design & construction of pile foundation in soil structural
safety of building foundation.
16. I.S. 2911-1990 Code of practice for design and construction of pile (Part I to IV) foundation.
17. I.S. 2950-1981 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundation.
18. I.S. 3370-1965 Code of Practice for water retaining structures.
19. I.S. 3414-1987 Code of Practice for Design and Installation of joints in buildings.
20. I.S. 4326-1993 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design of structure.
21. I.S. 6403-1981 Code of practice for Determination of bearing pressure of shallow foundation . 112
22. I.S.13920-1993 Code of practice for ductility detailing of reinforced concrete structures subjected
to seismic forces .
Latest revisions of above code shall be followed
I.S. Codes are also available for design of special types of structures like folded plate, shell structures
etc. Refer publication list of BIS for the same.
Similarly there are special publications of I.S., which are useful for design of buildings such as.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

1. SP-16 Design Aids to I.S.: 456-1978

2. SP-22 Explanation to I.S.: 1893 & I.S.: 4326.
3. SP-23 Concrete Mix.
4. SP-24 Explanation of I.S. 456-1978.
5. SP-25 Cracks in buildings and their repairs.
6. SP- 34 Detailing in R.C.C. structures.
7. SP-38 Design of steel trusses.

For aspects, which are not covered by any other I.S. codes available, relevant International Standard
Codes may be referred to. While designing R.C.C. structures, important provisions (as detailed below)
of I.S. 456 must be borne in mind.

General Provisions
Clause No. 20 Deals with stability of the structure against overturning and sliding.
Clause No. 26.2.1: Development length of bars.
Clause No. 26.3.2: Minimum distance between individual bars.
Clause No.26.3.3: Maximum distance between bars in tension.
Clause No.26.4: Cover to reinforcement.
Clause No.27: Expansion joints.
Provision regarding slabs
Clause No.22.2: Effective span.
Clause No.22.4.1: Arrangement of live load.
ClauseNo.22.5:Momentandshearco-efficientforcontinuousbeams.
Clause No.23.2: Control ofdeflection.
Clause No.24.1: Provisions regarding solid slabs.
Clause No. 26.5.2.1: Minimum reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.2.2: Maximum diameter.
Provisions regarding beams
Clause No.22.2: Effective span
Clause No.22.4.1: Arrangement of live load.
Clause No. 22.5: Moment and shear co-efficient for continuous beams.
Clause No. 23.2: Control of deflection.
Clause No. 23.3: Slenderness limits for beams.
Clause No. 26.5.1.1: Tension Reinforcement.
Clause No. 26.5.1.2: Compression reinforcement.
Clause No. 26.5.1.3: Side face reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.1.5: Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement.
Clause No.26.5.1.6: Minimum shear reinforcement.

556
Clause No.26.5.1.7: Distribution of torsion reinforcement.

Provisions for columns;

Clause No.25.1.2: Short and slender compression members.
Clause No.25.1.3: Unsupported length.
Clause No.25.2: Effective length of compression members.
Clause No.25.3: Slenderness limits for columns.
Clause No.25.4: Minimumeccentricity.
Clause No.26.5.3.1: Longitudinal reinforcement.
Clause No. 26.5.3.2: Transverse reinforcement.
Clause No.43: Cracking Consideration.

Provisions for footings

Clause No. 33.1.2: Thickness at the edge of footing.

APPENDICES
Clause No.34.4: Transfer of load at the base of column.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

557
 Appendix- 1500 A
DESIGN DATA FOR MAJOR AND MINOR BRIDGES
A. General
1. Name of Road :
2. Classification of Road : SH / MDR / ODR
3. Road chainage at centre :
4. Land width of road :
5. Formation width of road :
6. Width of Roadway :
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

7. Name of the Stream/Canal/Backwater :

8. What arrangement exists for crossing the river at present
a. during monsoon :
b. during dry season
9. Type of Navigation
(if any, whether country boat / INS / NWW) :
10. Distance of site from the sea

Catchment area and run-off (applicable for rivers only)

11. Catchment area in hilly parts : in plains :
12. Rainfall during the year and maximum recorded intensity :
13. Nature of catchmnet :
14. Any artificial or natural storage present in the catchment :

C. Nature of Stream/Canal:
15. Is the stream
a) alluvial with erodable banks :
b) quasi-alluvial with fixed bed but erodable banks :
c) rigid with inerodable bed and banks :
16. Is the stream
a) perennial : Yes/No
b) seasonal : Yes/No
c) tidal : Yes/No if so
i) High Tide Level (HTL) :
ii)Low Tide Level (LTL) :
d) saline : Yes/No e) polluted with any industrial waste : Yes/No if so, specify thepredominant
chemicals in the waste:
17. Hydraulic particulars at low water level
a) Low Water Level (LWL) :
b) observed water surface velocity :
c) water surface slope :
d) bed slope :
18. Hydraulic particulars at high flood level :
a) High Flood Level (HFL)
i) at site :
ii) at u/s cross section :
iii) at d/s cross section : (specify distance of u/s & d/s from site)
b) estimated water surface velocity :
c) water surface slope :

558
d) area of cross section
i) at site :watersurfaceslope :
area of crosssection at site :

ii) at u/s cross section

iii) at d/s cross section :
f) discharge at H.F.L. :
19. R.L. and location of maximum scour recorded below HFL:
20. R.L. of maximum anticipated scour below HFL (scour depth shall be determined actually by
mechanical means)
21. Nature of bed material: fine sand / loose clay /Coarse sand / fine gravel / Sandy or stiff clay/
Coarse gravel / Boulders /Rock

D. Ventway Parameters:

APPENDICES
22. Vertical clearance above HFL required for navigation:
23. Horizontal clearance required for navigation:
24. Does the stream carry drifting matter in floods? :
25. Details of training works, if needed:

Alignment andapproaches:
26. Whether the bridge proposed is right or skew? : if skew, give the angle of skew :
27. Whether the approaches straight? : if not
i) straight reach and radius of curve at side-1 :

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

ii) straight reach and radius of curve at side-2 :
28. Maximum approach height possible at site:
29. Proposed gradient on approaches:
30. Do the approaches require land acquisition/in voluntary displacement:

Superstructure:
31. Loading to be done for (Class A / 70R):
31. Proposed clear roadway over the bridge:
32. Width of footpath, if any:
33. Formation level
i) at centre of bridge:
ii) at abutment points:
34. Number and size of span recommended:

Foundations:
Foundations recommended: Open / Well /Pile

559
 H. ExistingStructures
Details of each of the existing bridges on the stream/canal in thevicinity
No. Details Upstream Downstream
a) Distance from site
b) Number and size of spans
c) Year of construction
d) Type of structure
e) Width of roadway
f) Provision of footpath
g) Vertical clearance
h) Horizontal clearance
i) Type & depth of foundations
j) Whether the existing structure
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

is trouble free
k) Any other information

I. Miscellaneous
Name of town nearest to the bridge:
Nearest Railway station and its distance from bridge site:
Is the site located in an industrially or otherwise polluted area:
(If so, specify the predominant air and water pollutant):
Nature of terrain: Plain/Rolling/Hilly

Prepared by Verified by Reviewed by Recommended by

Signature
Designation Assistant Asst. Executive Executive Superintending
Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer(R & B)

560
 Appendix 1500B
CHECK LIST OF DETAILS REQUIRED FOR APPROVAL OF ALIGNMENT
Road/ Bridge
Name of Work:
S.E.‟s Authentication in all drawings and data: Yes/No
Investigation report: Yes/No
Form D.A. Completely filled up: Yes/No
Design Data form completely filled up: Yes/No
Index map (Districtmap): Yes/No
Key map (siteplan): Yes/No
Two copies of Alignment plan with the following details: Yes/No
Names of stations connected: Yes/No
North direction: Yes/No
Name of River: Yes/No

APPENDICES
Direction of flow: Yes/No
Skew angle(ifany): Yes/No
Width of riveratHFL: Yes/No
Proposed Land width(available/tobeacquired): Yes/No
Continuous chainages ofapproachroads: Yes/No
Bore hole locations with chainages: Yes/No
Strip plan for affected properties: Yes/No
Social impact assessment (SIA) reports. If theimpactfall
within category AorB Yes/No

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

L.S.PLOT of the road along the alignment: Yes/No
Reducedlevels: Yes/No
Proposed formation levels: Yes/No
LWL, OFL, HFL and LTL &HTL(ifany) :Yes/No
Bore hole details with reduced levels: Yes/No
List of horizontal curves with chain ages: Yes/No
List of gradient with chainages: Yes/No
Note:1 If any of the above items is marked as „No‟, the reasons for the same shall be indicated along
with this. 2 Italicised details not required for roads.

561
 Appendix 1500C
CHECK LIST OF DETAILS REQUIRED FOR DESIGN OF ROADS/ BRIDGE

Name of Work:
S.E.‟s Authentication in all drawings and data: Yes/No
Copy of Administrative Sanction obtained: Yes/No
Investigation report: Yes/No
Design Data form completely filledup: Yes/No
Index map (Districtmap): Yes/No
Key map (siteplan): Yes/No
Catchmentareamap: Yes/No
Two copies of approved Alignment plan with the following details: Yes/No
Names of stations connected: Yes/No
North direction: Yes/No
Name of River: Yes/No
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Direction of flow: Yes/No

Skew angle(ifany): Yes/No
Width of riveratHFL: Yes/No
Proposed Land width(available/to be acquired): Yes/No
Social impact data sheet Yes/No
table of impact by type Yes/No
Continuous chainages of approach roads: Yes/No
Bore hole locations with chainages: Yes/No
L.S. PLOT of the road along the alignment: Yes/No
Reduced levels: Yes/No
Proposed formation levels: Yes/No
LWL,OFL,HFL and LTL&HTL(ifany): Yes/No
Bore hole details with reduced levels: Yes/No
Cross sections of theriver
Atsite: Yes/No
Atupstreamside: Yes/No
Atdownstreamside: Yes/No
List of horizontal curves with chainages:Yes/No
List of gradient with chain ages: Yes/No
Discharge calculation sheets: Yes/No
Vent way calculation sheets: Yes/No
Design Details of pavement (BT/CC/WBM): Yes/No
Resettlement Action plan Yes/No

If any of the above items is marked as „No‟, the reasons for the same shall be indicated along with
this.
2 Italicised details not required for roads.

562
APPENDIX 1600 A1
Model Preliminary estimate for Road Works
Name of Project Name of Division, subdivision, section. (Constituency also)
Part I. Acquisition of site.
(a) Land acquisition.
(b) Acquisition of structures and R& R cost.
(c) Shifting of electrical lines, Telephone/Telegraph lines, Pipe lines etc.
Part II. General improvements.
(a) Felling trees.
(b) Earthwork-widening, raising and/or forming embankments.
(c) Blasting rock.
(d) Conveyance of materials.
Part III. Masonry works.

APPENDICES
(a) Retaining walls.
(b) Construction of culverts.
(c) Construction of small bridges.
Part IV. Surfacing
(a) Gravelling or soling and/or metalling.
(i) Supply of materials.
(ii) Spreading & consolidation of materials to form the road.
(iii) Forming the sides.
(b) Remetalling.
(i) Supply of materials.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(ii) Spreading and consolidation of mate materials to form the road surface.
(iii) Forming the sides.
Part V. Blacktopping.
(i) Supply of materials
(a) metal
(b) sand
(c) bitumen.
(ii) Mixing, spreading and consolidating the materials.
(iii) Forming sides.
Part VI. Miscellaneous and Protective Items.
(a) Turfing slopes of embankments.
(b) Cutting side drains and slope drains.
(c) Providing guard stones.
(d) Providing Km stones.
(e) Providing signboards.
Part VII. Tools and plant.
Part VIII. Value of departmental materials such as rubble credited, if any
Part IX. (a)Contingency charges.
(b) Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materials etc.
(c) Cost for project preparation including investigation and design. TOTAL COST OF WORKS Part
X. Time schedule for the completion of the work.

563
 APPENDIX 1600 A2
Model Preliminary Estimate for Bridge Works
Name of Project Name of Division, subdivision, section. (Constituency also) Part I. Acquisition of
site,
(a) Land Acquisition.
(b) Acquisition of structures and R & R cost.
(c) Shifting of electrical lines, Telephone lines, Telegraph lines, Pipe lines etc.
(d) Felling trees.
Part 11. Construction of temporary site office and working yard when necessary.
Part III Foundation.
Part IV. Sub-structure.
Part V. Super-structure.
Part VI. Approaches.
(a) Earth work filling/Cutting including conveyance if any.
(b) Blasting rock.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

(c) Masonry works.

(i) Retaining walls.
(ii) culverts.
(d) Soling and/or metalling.
(i) Supply of materials.
(ii) Spreading & consolidating the materials for forming the road surface.
(e) Black top surfacing.
(i) Supply of materials
(a) metal
(b) sand
(c) bitumen.
(ii) Mixing, spreading & consolidation for forming the surface of theroad.
(iii) Forming the sides of roads. Part VII. Miscellaneous items.
(a) Providing guard stones & Km. stones.
(b) Name and sign boards.
(c) Turfing slopes of embankments.
(d) Cutting side drains and/or slope drains. 118
Part VIII. Tools & Plant.
Part IX. Value of departmental materials such as rubble credited, if any
Part X. (a)Contingency charges.
(b) Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materials etc.
(c) Cost for project preparation including investigation and design. TOTAL COST OFWORKS
Part XI. Time schedule for the completion of the work.

564
 APPENDIX 1600 A3
Ill. Model Preliminary Estimate for Building Works
Name of Project
Name of Division, subdivision, section. (Constituency also)
Part I. Acquisition of site-. .
(a) Land acquisition.
(b) Acquisition of structures, if any.
(c ) Resettlement and Rehabilitation cost
(d) Shifting of Electrical lines/ telephone/Telegraph lines and Drainage Sewer Pipe lines.
Part II. Preparation of site.
(a) Clearing and levelling site.
(b) Demolishing existing structures, felling trees etc., if any.
Part III. Earth work.
(a) Earth work for foundation.
(b) Filling basement.

APPENDICES
Part IV. Sub-structure and super-structure.
(a) Foundation.
(b) Basement.
(c) Superstructure.
(d) Wood work for doors and windows etc.
(e) Roof timber/trusses.
(f) M. P. tiled/A. C. Sheet/RCC/Roof.
Part V. Finishing items.
(a) Flooring.
(b) Ceiling.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(c) Plastering.
(d) Painting etc.
Part VI. Service connection.
(a) Water supply both internal and external / well with pumping arrangement and overhead tank.
(b) Sanitary installation both internal and external.
(c) Electrical installation both internal and external.
(d) Provision for electronic installation both internal and external.

Part VII
(a) Compound wall/Enclosures. (b)
Approach roads.Part VIII. Tools and Plant.
Part IX. Value of departmental materials such as rubble credited, if any
Part X. Miscellaneous
a) Lift
b) Firefighting
c) HVAC
d) Storm water storage
Part XI. Other items.
(a) Contingency.
(b) Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materialsetc.
(c) Cost for project preparation including investigation and design.

TOTAL COST OF WORKS

Part XI. Time schedule for the completion of work.
Contingency.
Difference in value between recovery rate and issue rate of materialsetc.
Cost for project preparation including investigation anddesign.TOTAL COST OF WORKS
Part XI. Time schedule for the completion of work.

565
 Appendix 1600 B Docket Sheet
ISSUE OF TECHNICAL SANCTION

J&K ...................................................................................... Department

Name of Division
Name of Sub Division
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Name of Work
Amount of Estimate
Reference to Administrative Sanction
Register Number and date of estimate
Source of funds
Duration in which work has to be executed

Estimate enclosed as briefly described above is sanctioned as register number ……………………

…………..dated……………….

Signature of Engineer

566
 Appendix 1600 B1
PreliminaryEstimateReport
1. Name of Work and Scope
2. Authority and Plan Provision
3. Climatic, Geographic and Historic details
4. Necessity/Justification (with traffic counts): Reasons for justifying the work, based on traffic
intensity, proximity and location in relation to important town and industrial and commercial centres,
educational institutions, hospitals etc., which will be served by the road.
5. Existing facilities
i) Road way
ii) Transport
iii) Pavement and Shaller Condition
iv) Cross drainage facilities
6. Engineering facilities required for transport

APPENDICES
i. Classification as per standards.
ii. Alignment with respect of topographical features, bridge sites, important town etc.
iii. Gradient
iv. Type of pavement and surfacing
v. Geometries with reference to the general standards for different classifications.
vi. Protective works required
vii. Drainage facilities and cross drainage works with location and type of each work
viii. Any other technical features as may be found necessary
7. Timeframe to complete proposed project
8. Plans including an index map, location map showing alternative proposals, LS and typical CS.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

9. Rough cost estimate giving a break up of the cost under major heads, viz, land acquisition, R &
R, EW, pavement, surfacing, protective works, cross drainage works as per Appendix 3.13 a.
Note: 1. Where realignment of telegraph posts, telephone lines, cables water mains etc. are involved, the site
survey shall show their present location and the extent of realignment requirement required, so that the
concerned departments may be addressed.
2. The standards prescribed in regard to road width and geometrics of the road shall be fully adhered to through
out the length of the road. If for any reasons such adherence is found not possible, the sanction of the Chief
Engineer shall be obtained for relaxing the standards.

567
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Appendix 1600B2
(Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project Reports for Bridges)
1. Name of Work and Scope
2. Authority and Plan Provision
3. Climatic, Geographic and Historic details
4. Necessity/Justification (with traffic): Reasons for justifying the work, based on traffic intensity,
details of the bridges crossing the river within a reasonable distance of the proposed bridge.
5. Existing facilities
6. Engineering features giving:
i. Class of road in which bridge is proposed and Technical standards for bridge. ii.
Flood characteristics and maximum flood discharge in the stream.
iii. Periods of high flood levels for a number of years.
iv. Soil and sub soil particulars at the site v.
Type of foundation
vi. Type of superstructure suggested.
vii. Angle and direction of skew if any.
viii. Number of spans
ix. Any other technical details as may be necessary
7. Plans viz, index plan, site plan, LS of stream, cross section of stream at site of bridge and at 30
metres upstream and downstream etc.
8. Cross sections of the stream within 250 M. upstream and down stream where the stream is
appreciably narrower than the proposed site (if any)
9. Rough cost estimate with break up of cost under major heads viz, land acquisition, EW,
pavement, surfacing, protective works, cross drainage works as per Appendix 3.13 b.
10. Timeframe to complete proposed project

568
 Appendix 1600 B3
(Details to be incorporated in Preliminary Project Reports for Buildings)
1. Name of Work and Scope
2. Authority and Plan Provision
3. Climatic, Geographic and Historic details
4. Necessity/Justification for the building
5. Details of Existing Facilities and Structures
6. Engineering aspects giving i.
Site condition
ii. Accessibility viz. approaches roads and internal roads within colonies. iii.
Nature of terrain

APPENDICES
iv. Sub soil particulars v.
Prevailing winds
vi. Type of buildings proposed vii.
Type of foundation suggested
viii. Proximity to water and power supply
7. Plans viz, Index map, site plan with layout and line plan of the buildings.
8. Rough cost estimate as per Appendix 3.13 c
Note: i. The sites for buildings shall be chosen in consultation with the Department for which it is
constructed.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

ii. For major buildings, the site shall be selected only after inspection of prospective sites by the Superintending
Engineer and the Chief Architect. The proposal shall conform to the development plan if any prepared for the area
by the Town planning or any other development authority.
iii. The by laws or building rules of the Corporation, Municipality or other Local Body or Development Authority,
as the case may be shall be complied with, in regard to the set back line, free space around building etc.
iv. In the case of buildings to be put up within 5 km of existing aerodrome, the height of the building shall be
restricted by Rules laid down in this regard by the Ministry of Transport and communication (Dept. of Civil
Aviation).
v. Shall be consistent with provisions of National Building Code 2005

569
 Appendix 1600 C
Docket sheet (preliminary report / detailed report)
J&K Public Works Department
Circle.. Division..
SubDivision. ………………………….
Section..

Name ofwork:
Amount of Administrative Sanction*:
Reference to Administrative Sanction*:
Source offunds:
Head of classification as per viz. major head, minorhead, departmental headand
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

The service head :

Recommendation/ Orders of the Assistant Engineer Submitted to the Assistant Executive Engineer
Signature of the Assistant Engineer (with date)

Recommendation/ Orders of Assistant Executive Engineer Submitted to the Executive Engineer

Signature of Asst. Executive Engineer (with date)

Recommendation /Orders of the ExecutiveEngineer.

Submitted to the Superintending Engineer

Signature of Executive Engineer (with date)

Recommendations/Orders of the Superintending Engineer**

Submitted to the Chief Engineer

Signature of Superintending Engineer (with date)

Recommendations/ Orders of the ChiefEngineer.**

*Only for Detailed Reports
**only wherever applicable
Note: - Certificates as detailed under 6.2.2 shall be recorded in the docket sheet along with the
recommendations.

570
 Appendix 1600 D
Checklist for Detailed Estimate Report

1. Name of Work and Scope

2. Authority and Plan Provision with details of administrative sanction
3. Climatic, Geographic, Environmental, Historic, Social details
4. Necessity/Justification (with traffic counts for R& B Works)
5. Pavement and Shaller Condition (for R& B Works)
6. Cross drainage requirements and details (for R& B Works)
7. Rehabilitation works, diversion of utilities.

APPENDICES
8. Details of land acquisition, demolition, Resettlement and Rehabilitation etc.
9. Timeframe to complete proposed project
10. Detailed drawings and designs
11. Itemised detailed estimate

* Note :
(1) An estimate report explaining the location, length of roads and other salient features of the works proposed,
and a site plan shall be furnished.
(2) All the items indicated in the model estimates may not be required in all cases. Where an item is not
required, it may be indicated as 'Nil'.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(3) The standard specification laid down for different classification of roads and bridges and standing circular
orders shall invariably be followed while proposing the works under various sub heads in the model estimates.
(4) Under „Land Acquisition‟ the area of land, plinth area, or other relevant details of the structures to be
acquired and approximate costs for shifting lines shall be furnished.
(5) „Under General Improvements‟ the quantity of earthwork, and rock blasting (Approximate) shall be
furnished.
(6) In the case of retaining walls, the section proposed, height and the type of construction i.e. D. R. or
Masonry, the length etc., shall be indicated.
(7) In the case of culverts, the span, or the size of the culverts shall be furnished.
(8) In the case of small bridge works, which form part of a road work, the span, width of roadway etc.,
shall be noted.
(9) For "Surfacing" the formation width of the roadway, width of soling and/or metalling/ gravelling,
width and type of blacktopping, and the length shall be furnished.
(10) In the model estimate for bridges, in addition to the points mentioned above the following points
shall also be noted.
(a) Under 'Foundation', the type of foundation i.e. open, Pile or well, size and, No. of piles and/or
wells shall be furnished.
(b) Sub-structure. Type and size of piers and abutments have to be noted.
(c) Superstructure. Type of decking, width of roadway, span etc., shall be noted.
(11) With regard to buildings, in addition to the general instructions mentioned above, the following
points shall a1so be noted.
(a) If the estimate provides for residential quarters for Government employees, the pay scales of the
officers for whom the quarters are intended, shall be furnished.
(b) In the case of buildings for accommodating officers, the number of offices, details of
staff and other requirements shall be indicated.
(c) In the case of other buildings also, like hospitals, hostels etc., full details of requirements shall be
given.
(d) The possibility of getting adequate supply, of potable water shall be investigated, where there is no
protected water supply system

571
 PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

APPENDIX 1600 E

J&K ....................................................... DEPARTMENT

8 Deviation statement in the course of actual construction of works
Name of work Sub-heads in which Name of departure Reason for the Results Orders of the
departure occurs Original or sanctioned Arrangements proposed to deviation anticipated …………….
Arrangement be carried out Engineer

APPENDIX 1600 F

FORM No. D.B.4-COMPARATIVE STATEMENT (LARGE)

Abstract of original and revised estimates with explanations for difference in quantities and rates
Subheads Original Estimate Revised Estimate Explanation
of estimates Quantity Rate Amount Quantity Rate Amount for work
572

and items Already To be Total Rs Ps Already To be Total Savings Excess

of works Rs Ps Rs executed executed executed executed Rs. (Minus) (Plus)
Rs. Rs

APPENDIX 1800 A
(Vide Para
G. W. D. 156
Register of sanction to estimates for ................................
Technical Name of work Amount of Reference to Administrative sanction Source of funds
Sanction No. estimate
Authority No. Date
 APPENDIX 2100B
Sample Form of Work spot Order Book ( )

Name of Division………………………….
Book No…………………………………..
INSTRUCTIONS
1. The work spot order book is to be maintained at site of construction works of all types.
2. This Book will be maintained by the Work Superintendent/J.E posted for supervision of the work and
he will be responsible for its proper maintenance and safe custody.

APPENDICES
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

3. After completion of the work, the book will be recorded in the office of the authority who gives
technical sanction to the work.
4. Each book will be numbered serially and an account of the books maintained in the Division Office.
5. The orders issued by the inspecting officers shall be recorded in the work spot order book. If such orders are
beyond his competence, the officer issuing the orders shall address the appropriate authority and obtain
ratification. The instructions and orders issued through the work spot order book will be binding on the
departmental subordinates at site. The J.E/Supervisor shall submit copies of the instructions to the Assistant
Engineer. The Assistant Engineer shall communicate copies of instructions to be complied with by the
contractor to him in writing.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

6. The instructions and orders issued through the work spot order book are binding on the departmental
subordinates in charge of the concerned work. The subordinate keeping the book, to the Junior Engineer and
Assistant Engineer, should send copies of orders noted in the work spot order book. So far as the Contractor is
concerned, all-important instructions should also be intimated in writing to him.
7. The officers, as and when they inspect the work shall record their views in the work spot order book.
1. Name ofwork
2. Estimated cost
3. Do P.A.C
4. Agency for the work
5. No. and date of agreement
6. Date of handing over site
7. Date of commencement
8. Date of completion
AGREED SCHEDULE OF PROGRESS OF WORK
INCUMBENCY OF OFFICERS IN CHARGE OF WORK
Junior Assistant Engineer Assistant Executive Executive Engineer
Engineer Engineer
Name Period Name Period Name Period Name Period

PROGRESS OF WORK
Month Progress
TOOLS AND PLANT AT SITE
INSPECTING OFFICERS ORDERS AND INSTRUCTIONS
Date and time of inspection

Name and Designation of the

Officer

573
 APPENDIX 2100D
SAFFTY CODE (As per para)
1. Suitable scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all work that cannot safely be done from the ground, or from
solid construction except such short period work as can be done safely from ladders. When a ladder is used an extra
mazdoor shall be engaged for holding the ladder and if the ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable
footholds and hand- holds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall be given an inclination not steeper than ¼
to 1 ( ¼ horizontal and
1 vertical).
2. Scaffolding or staging more than 3.25 metres above the ground or floor, swung or suspended from an overhead support
or erected with stationery support, shall have a guard rail properly attached, bolted, braced and otherwise secured at least
1 meter high above the floor or platform of such scaffolding or staging and extending along the entire length of the outside
and ends thereof with only such openings as may be necessary for the delivery of materials. Such scaffolding or staging
shall be so fastened as to prevent it from swaying from the building or structures.
3. Working platform, gangways, and stairways shall be so constructed that they do not sag unduly or unequally, and if
height of a platform or gangway or stairway is more than 3.25 meters above ground level or floor level, it shall be closely
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

boarded, have adequate width and be suitably fenced as described in 2 above.

4. Every opening in floor of a building or in a working platform shall be provided with suitable means to prevent fall
of person or materials by providing suitable fencing or railing with a minimum height of 1 meter.
5. Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working places. Every ladder shall be securely
fixed. No portable single ladder shall be over 9 metres in length. Width between side rails in ,a rung ladder shall in no
case be less than 30 cm. for ladders upto andincluding
3 metres in length. For longer ladders this width shall be increased at least 6 mm. for each additional 30
cm. of length. Uniform step spacing shall not exceed 30 cm.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. No materials on any of the sites shall
be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or the public. The contractor shall provide all
necessary fencing and lights to protect public from accidents and shall be bound to bear expenses of defense of every
suit, action or other proceedings at law that may be brought by any person for injury sustained owing to neglect of the
above precautions and to pay any damages and costs which may be awarded in any such suit, action or proceedings
to any such person or which may with the consent of the Contractor be paid to compromise any claim by any such person.
6. Excavation and Trenching.-All trenches, 1. 5 metres or more in depth shall at all times be supplied with at least one
ladder for each 30 metres in length or fraction thereof. Ladder shall be extended from bottom of trench to at least 1 meter
above surface of the ground. Sides of a trench which is 1.
5 metres or more in depth shall be stepped back to give suitable slope, or securely held by timber
backing, so as to avoid the danger of 1.5 meters of edge of trench or half of depth of trench, whichever is more.
Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. Under no circumstances shall undermining or undercutting be done.
7. Demolition.-Before any demolition work is commenced and also during the process of the work:- (a) All roads and open
areas adjacent to the work site shall either be closed or suitably protected;
(h) No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger over a cable or apparatus used by operator shall
remain clerically charged;
(c) All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed, from risk or fire or explosion, or flooding.
No floor roof or other part of a building shall be so overloaded with debris or materials as to render it unsafe.
8. All necessary safety equipment as considered adequate by the Engineer-in-charge shall he available for use of
persons employed on the site and maintained in a condition suitable for immediate use; and the Contractor shall
take adequate steps to ensure proper use of equipment by thoseconcerned.
(a) Workers employed on mixing asphaltic materials, cement and lime mortars/concrete shall be provided with protective
footwear and protection goggles.

574
(b) Those engaged in handling any material which is injurious to eyes shall be provided with protective goggles.
(c) Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder's protective eye shields.
(d) Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective clothing and seated at sufficiently safe intervals.
(e) When workers are employed in sewers and manholes, which are in use, the Contractor shall ensure that manhole
covers are opened and manholes are ventilated at least for an hour before workers are allowed to get into them. Manholes
so opened shall be cordoned off with suitable railing and provided with warning signals or boards to prevent accident to
public.
(f) The Contractor shall not employment below the age of 18 and women on the work of painting with products containing
lead in any form. Whenever men above the age of 18 are employed on the work of lead painting, the following precautions
shall be taken:
(i) No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used except in the form of paste or readymade pain.
(ii) Suitable face marks shall be supplied for use by workers when paint is applied in the form of spray or a surface having
lead paint dry rubbed and scraped.

APPENDICES
(iii) Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to workmen and adequate facilities shall be provided to enable
working painters to wash during and on cessation of work.
9 When work is done near any place where there is risk of drowning all necessary equipment shall be provided and kept
ready for use and all necessary steps taken for prompt rescue of any person in danger and adequate provision made for
prompt first aid treatment of all injuries likely a be sustained during the course of the work.
10. Use of hoisting machines and tackle including their attachments, anchorage and supports shall conform to the
following:-
(a) (i) These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound material and adequate strength and free from patent defects
and shall be kept in good repair and in good working order.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(ii) Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as means of suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate
strength and free from patent defects.
(b) Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly qualified and no person under the age of 21 years
shall be in charge of any hoisting machine including any scaffold winch or give signals to operator.
(c) In case of every hoisting machine and of every chain ring hook, shackle swivel and pulley block used in hoisting of
lowering or as means of suspension, safe working load shall be ascertained by adequate means. Every hoisting machine
and all gear referred to above shall be plainly marked with safe working load In case of a hoisting machine having a variable
safe working load, each safe working load and the conditions under which it is applicable shall be clearly indicated.
No part of any machine or of any gear referred to above in this paragraph shall be loaded beyond safe working load except
for the purpose of testing.
(d) In ease of departmental machine, safe working load shall be notified by the Engineer-in-charge. As regards Contractor's
machine the Contractor shall notify safe working load of each machine to the Engineer-in-charge, whenever he brings it
to site of work and get it verified by the Engineer-in- charge.
11. Motors, gearing, transmission electric wiring and other dangerous parts of hoisting appliance shall be provided with
efficient safeguards, hoisting appliances shall be provided with such means as will reduce to the minimum risk of
accidental descent of load, adequate precautions shall be taken to reduce to the minimum risk of any part of a suspended
load becoming accidentally displaced. When workers are employed on electrical insulations which are already energised,
insulating mats, wearing apparel such as gloves, sleeves and boots, as may be necessary, shall be provided. Workers shall
not wear any rings, watches and carry keys or other materials, which are good conductors of electricity.
12. All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described herein shall be, maintained in a safe
condition and no scaffold, ladder or equipment shall be altered or removed while it is in use. Adequate washing
facilities shall he provided at or near place of work.

575
 13. These safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a notice board
at a prominent place at the workspot. Persons responsible for ensuring compliance with the safety code
shall be named therein by the Contractor.
14. To ensure elective enforcement of' the rules and regulations relating to safety precautions,
arrangements made by the Contractor shall be open to inspection by the Engineer-in-charge, or his
representatives and the Inspecting Officers.*
15. Notwithstanding the above conditions 1 to 14 the Contractor is not exempted from the operation of
any other Act or Rules in force.
*‟Inspecting Officer‟ means any Labour Enforcement Officer or Assistant Labour Commissioner of the
Chief Labour Commissioner's Organisation
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

576
 Appendix 2100E1
MEASUREMENT BOOK ( )
Circle/Division ...............................................................
Subdivision/Section.......................................................
Measurement Book No ...............................................
Notes
1. The measurement book is the basis of all accounts of quantities, whether for work done by piece work for by
contract, or of materials received for specific works which have to be measured, and should be so kept that the
transaction may be readily traceable into the accounts.
2. (a) Measurements shall invariably and neatly be recorded direct in the measurement books at site, and not copied
into them later on at leisure, from measurement sheets.
(b) Erasures and over writings in the measurement books are strictly prohibited and will be seriously noticed. If
mistakes are made, they should be corrected by neatly scoring off the incorrect entries and inserting the correct

APPENDICES
once between the lines. Dated initials of the recording officer shall be insisted on, on each page of the
measurement book in the case of original entries, and initials, in the case of each and every correction. In the case of
contract work, the contractor's signature should be taken in the measurement book in token of the contractor's
acceptance of the measurements recorded either at the time of measurement or in any case, before payment, to avoid
complaints of omissions, incorrectness, etc.
3. (a) No officer below the rank of a Supervisor in responsible charge of a work, is empowered to measure a
work and make either an entry or a correction in the measurement books in respect of particulars, measurements
or rails. Measurements relating to all supplies and services shall also be recorded by the J.E/ Supervisor. No member
of the clerical staff except the account section responsible for the preparation and checking of the bills, is allowed
to make arithmetical corrections. Such corrections noticed in the preparation of bills, shall be invariably attested by

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

the bill preparing officer, while those noticed during audits shall be attested by the Passing Officer. The store-
keepers in charge of departmental stores may be permitted to record supply bills, and conveyance charges of stores
moved to and for, in measurement books issued to them.
(b) The theoretical issue of departmental materials and receipts and issues of other items based on measurements
against each item in a bill shall be noted in remark column by a technical subordinate while preparing a work bill
and during audit.
(c) The officer to whom a measurement book is issued shall be its custodian until it is finally returned to
the Sub Division office for record after completion or transferred in the meantime by official transfer, to his
successor on relief. Except when the book is sent officially to other offices for preparation, audit and payment of
bills, book must always be kept in the personal custody of an officer not below the rank of a Lower Division Clerk.
4. (a) For easy identification and check, the descriptions of the locality and items must be lucid; and the
measurements shall be recorded systematically item by item of the sanctioned estimates noting also the
respective item numbers. The total of the quantities under the different items as entered in the quantity column
of the measurement book should be in the case of each bill, an up-to-date quantity and not a „since last‟
quantity.
(b) For large works separate measurement books shall be kept by the measuring officer for each individual
work or contract, or if found necessary or convenient separate books may be set apart for different classes of
works or subheads of works, in which himself and the checking officer will have with them at the time of any
measurements or check measurement all the previous measurement in one and the same book for easy
reference and guidance. Promiscuous recording of measurements of one and the same work indiscriminately in
different measurement books, is prohibited and if resorted to will be seriously noticed.
5. In the case of extra items or extra rates, the orders sanctioning its execution or provision should
invariably be quoted in the measurement books and bills before the auditing wing passes such claims for
payment. The measuring officer may however record extra items if any in the measurement book if he is
satisfied that they are covered at least by the written orders of the inspecting officers in the workspot order book
though not at the time of measurement regularised by the formal sanction of the competent authority. The audit
wing will all the same defer passing of such items until formal sanction is secured. Such items will however
be entered in the quantity columns but the rates and amounts will be noted therein only on receipt of formal
sanction from sanction of competent authority to such items. This stipulation is precautionary to ensure that the
measurement and check measurement of extra items which it may be difficult or impossible to measure at a

577
 later stage of work should not be lost sight of , while closing or checking interim bills or at the time of
final payment.
6. The measuring officer shall be responsible for closing the bills in the measurement books and taking
care to enter therein correctly, all references previous measurements and all receipts and issues of materials
utodate and effect all recoveries, they shall be observed as an orthodox rule, as the measuring officer is primarily
and wholly responsible for all entries made by him in the measurement book and for the bills as corrected and
finally passed by on for audit on the basis of those measurements. In fact the bill will be an exact copy of the
closing abstract as made out by the measuring officer, in the measurement book.
7. From the measurement book all quantities should be clearly traceable to the documents on which payments are
made reference to voucher in which the quantities are entered for payment as well as date of entry should be
given by endorsement upon the original entries in the measurement book. No contract certificate or bill should be
signed without crossing out the connected entry in the measurement book and the document on which the
payment is made should invariably bear a reference number and page of the book in which detailed
measurements are recorded.
8. The measurement books are thus one of the most important initial records relating to the execution and
payment of works, they should be carefully checked by Divisional/ Sub divisional officer to see that they are kept
as per complete records of each kind of work done for which certificates have been granted. The eventual return
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

of all books to the division office for record should be insisted upon.
9. Name of officer and check measuring officer shall be noted below the signature.

Name of Work: Date of measurement

Name of contractor AgreementNo.
Reference to Partic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Remark
estimate ulars s

Sub Item Measurement up-to- Rate Total Deduct previousSince last

hea d no date value measurement measurement
to date
No L B D Content Rs p Rs p boo Page quan Quant Value at
s or area k tity ity col rate in col.
(5- 6
8) Rs p

578
 Appendix 2100E2
Level Field Book (As para )
Rules to be observed in leveling and survey operations
Rules to be observed in leveling and survey
operations
1. In all surveys the survey line should be shown with a fine red line that it may
be at once apparent with what degree of accuracy a plan has been made.
2. it is also directed that on every convenient occasion tie lines shall be
introduced to check the general accuracy of the work
Though the features of the ground may not need these tie lines for filling in detail, they
must not be omitted,
as the general accuracy of survey is the chief
point to be ensured
3. It is further directed that all levels should be checked either by returning to the
point originally started upon or by closing on a bench mark known to be accurately

APPENDICES
determined. Under no circumstances shall levels be run from one point to another without
the accuracy of the work being inconsistently proved.
4. The adjustments of instruments including chains and tapes, should be checked
and if necessary adjusted before using. Field book level or survey must be carefully
preserved records. Under no circumstances shall nay page or part of a page be torn from
the book. Entries shall invariably and neatly be recorded direct in the field book in ink
at site. Pencil entries should be avoided but if unavoidable these shall be in indelible pencil
and shall not be inked in, but left untouched. Erasures and overwriting s in the field book
are strictly prohibited. And will be seriously noticed. Any mistakes made should be
neatly scored off and corrected in red ink between lines. Dated initials of the recording

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

officer are to be insisted on, on each page of field book in the case of each and every
correction.
5. The greatest care must be exercised in the use of optical instruments. Peons or
lascars must on no account be allowed to touch an instrument beyond in the actual carriage
of it, and then it should be seen that the instrument is being conveyed in a proper way o
avoid injury. The officer using an optical instrument must take it out of its box and
return thereto with his own hands. Instrument boxes should always be kept locked and
the key kept in the custody of the officer in charge, who is responsible for all instruments
issued to him.

Propose:
Locality
Date: Name of officer

Back Sight Intermediate Foresight Height of Reduced Distance Remark

Sight Collimation Level s

579
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Appendix 2100F
Proforma to Accompany Recommendation for Extension of Time of
Completion ( )
1. Name of work withestimateamount :
2. Agreement numberanddate :
3. Nameofcontractor :
4. Date of commencement as per agreement :
5. Date of completion asperagreement :
6. (a) 1st extension :
(b)2ndextension:
7. Date upto which extension is nowappliedfor :
8. Whether ground for extension applied is default by the
contractor. If not, specify the grounds on which extension is
Applied
9. Present stage of work with percentage of progress so far
Achieved
10. Whether fine has been realised for previous extension. If so
furnish details
11. Period of extensionnowrecommended :
12.Fineproposed :
13.Recommendations :
Assistant Engineer
Assistant Executive Engineer Executive Engineer

580
 APPENDICES
Appendix 2100G
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION OF WORK ( )

Name of Work :
Name of contractor :

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Contract Agreement No. anddate :
Supplemental Agreement No. anddate :

Certified that the works as per the above contract

agreement and supplemental agreements have been
completed in allrespectson The certificate does not
however absolve the contractor from any of the liabilities
for which he is responsible as per terms of the contract.

...................................................... Engineer

581
 APPENDIX - 2200
2217. EXECUTION – ROADS
This section provides a guide to the correct construction practices and procedures for use on
road contracts. Throughout the site (the area where the works are being constructed) the
contractor is responsible for supplying all the necessary signs and other equipment to ensure
the smooth and safe flow of traffic. The construction shall be carried out in a safe and
controlled manner to prevent damage to vehicles and the general public from construction
equipment, site materials and activities.
2218. General
2218.1. Key Points
Before any construction the roadway must be cleared of all vegetation and trees, including
their roots removed.
• Cross sections shall be taken prior to any excavation works.
• Finalize cross section of the alignment and levels prior to excavation.
• All construction works must be carried out in as safe a manner as possible.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

• Excavated materials, if suitable, shall be used wherever possible in theworks.

• Provision has to be made for drainage of the temporary and permanent works.
• Soil containing vegetable matter shall not be used as fill material.
• Borrow pits shall not affect the stability of the road, or any other structure.
Details to be submitted for Approval from Engineer to start work are as per Appendix 2200 E
2219. Setting Out
The working Bench Marks tied with the Reference Bench Mark, wherever necessary, shall be
established before commencement of the work. The working Bench Marks shall be at the rate
of four per km and also at or near all drainage structures over-bridges and underpasses. An up-
to-date record of all bench marks including approved adjustments, if any, shall be maintained
by the Assistant Engineer. The lines and levels of formation, side slopes, drainage works,
carriageways and shallers shall be carefully set out and frequently checked during
construction, care being taken to ensure that correct gradients and cross sections are obtained
everywhere.
In order to facilitate the setting out of the works, the centerlines of the carriageway or highway
must be accurately established based on the investigation report (as specified in chapter 2 of
section 3), in every 30 m or less intervals in plain and rolling terrains and 20m intervals in
hilly terrain and in all curve points
with marker pegs and chainage boards. On construction reaching the formation level stage, the
centerline shall be set out again to avoid any deviation from the approved centre line. No
reference peg or mark shall be moved or withdrawn and no earthwork or structural work shall
commence until the centre line has been referenced and approved by the Junior Engineer.
2220.Public Utilities
The Assistant Engineer shall prepare drawing showing the affected services like water pipes,
sewers, oil pipelines, electric lines and posts, telephone lines, cables, gas ducts etc owned by
various authorities including Public Undertakings and Local Authorities. He shall do this by
collecting necessary details of such utilities in the site or in consultation with the concerned
departments and joint inspection wherever necessary. These drawings shall be finalized during
the tender stage and utilities are to be shifted before the commencement of the work. The
improvement and upgradation of the roads are important for the community; hence all
departments/authorities using PWD land must co-operate to shift the utilities in time.
2221.Clearing of Site:
Clearing of site by dismantling old bridges and culverts and existing pavements shall be as per
section 200 of MoRTH.
2222. Excavation
This work shall consist of excavation, removal and satisfactory disposal of all materials
necessary for the construction of roadway, side drains and waterways in accordance with the

582
lines, grades and cross- sections shown in the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.
Excavation for road works shall conform to the specifications of Section 300 of MoRTH. It
shall include the hauling and stacking of or hauling to sites of embankment and subgrade
construction, suitable cut materials as required, as also the disposal of unsuitable cut materials
in specified manner, trimming and finishing of the road to specified dimensions or as directed
by the Assistant Engineer.

2222.1. Classification of excavated material

The excavated materials shall be classified as specified in section 301.2.1 of MORTH.
2222.2.Authority for classification
The classification of excavation shall be proposed by the Assistant Engineer and
gotapproved by the Assistant ExecutiveEngineer.
2222.3.Road Formation in Cutting
Where hard strata are available, and the formation level is below existing ground level,

APPENDICES
excavation shall be done with due consideration of the stability of slopes. Benching may be
resorted to wherever necessary and other suitable slope protection provided. In case of rocks
the provisions of clause 301.3.5 and 301.6 of MoRTH shall apply.
2223.Embankment construction
2223.1.Key Points
• All fill materials must be free from vegetable matter and the material must be approved as
suitable.
• The material shall be of an appropriate nature and at moisture content that permits
compaction to form a stable layer.
• Generally embankments shall be constructed in 150 mm compacted layers parallel to the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

finished grade of the road.
• For each completed layer the density shall be checked (One test for each 1,000 square
meters) by laboratory personnel. If test results show the required density is not achieved further
compaction is necessary
• Any soft areas must be rectified before further material is placed. Each earthworks layer
requires to be approved before the next layer can be started.
All embankments, subgrades, earthen shallers and miscellaneous backfills shall be constructed
in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed
by the Assistant Engineer. It shall follow the specification as per clause 305 of MORTH

Figure 4.1 Pavement Layers

583
 2223.2. Sub grade
The sub grade is the layer of embankment immediately below the pavement. This may be undisturbed
local material or may be soil excavated elsewhere and placed as fill. In either case it has to be prepared
to give added strength. All subgrade material must be free of vegetable matter. The material also needs
to be of a type and moisture content that it can be compacted to form a stable layer. If the material in
the subgrade level is found to be unsuitable, this must be excavated and replaced with suitable material,
which shall then be compacted. The subgrade must be prepared over the full width of the embankment,
including the shallers. This is generally carried out in lengths of greater than 100 metres. In some cases
to maintain traffic, part width working may be necessary. If this is the case it is vital that the full width
of the embankment meets the subgrade material and compaction requirements. When the road is to be
placed on existing material, this shall be fully loosened to a depth of 150 mm below the subgrade level.
Any lumps shall be removed or broken up to be less than 50 mm in size. The subgrade must be
compacted uniformly by use of adequate and appropriate compaction equipment. The material shall be
at moisture content close to optimum throughout the layer so that it can be compacted to produce a
dense compacted layer. Generally the compaction shall begin at the outer edges of the embankment
and by rolling in a longitudinal direction gradually progress towards the centre so that each section
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

receives equalcompaction.
Laboratory tests shall be performed as specified in the chapter on Quality control.
2223.3.Drainage
The surface of the embankment/subgrade at all times during construction shall be maintained at such
a cross fall (not flatter than that required for effective drainage of an earthen surface) as will shed water
and prevent ponding. For this surface drains and subgrade drains shall be provided.
2223.4. Surface drains
Drains shall follow the slope of embankment. Surface drains shall be excavated to the specified lines,
grades, levels and dimensions to the requirements of Clause 309 of MoRTH Specifications for Road
and Bridge works.
2223.5. Sub grade Drains
Sub grade drains are constructed to ensure that water in the pavement, which would weaken the road,
is allowed to drain way. Subgrade drains shall be extended to the edge of the embankment with drains
on opposite sides of the road being staggered. In case of roads with minimal longitudinal fall it is often
better to install subgrade drains longitudinally at the edge of the road pavement, see Figure 4.1
Subgrade drains shall be excavated by hand in the prepared subgrade. The excavation shall be filled
with clean sand or gravel, which contains no vegetable matter, silt or clay. The backfill must be
compactedbyhandrammingandstruckofflevelwith,orslightlyabove,thefinishedsubgradelevel.The
finished backfill must be immediately covered with an approved separator material. The separator
material is normally specified and will be woven rot proof fabric, geo-textile membrane or perforated
heavy duty polythene sheeting. The separator material shall extend 150mm beyond the edges of the
drain on all exposed faces. Any joints in the fabric shall overlap by at least 150mm. Materials over
the drain shall be placed by hand for at least 100mm above the separator membrane prior to rolling
either the pavement or the shallermaterials.
2223.6.Finishing operations
Finishing operations shall include the work of shaping and dressing the shallers /verge/road bed and
side slopes to conform to the alignment, level, cross-sections and dimensions shown on the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer. Both the upper and lower ends of the side slopes shall be rounded off
to improve appearance and to merge the embankment with the adjacent terrain. When earthwork
operations have been substantially completed, the road area shall be cleared of all debris, and ugly
scars in the construction area responsible for objectionable appearance eliminated.
2224. Sub Base
2224.1. Granular Sub Base
This work shall consist of laying and compacting well-graded material on prepared subgrade in
accordance with the specifications. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as sub-base or
lower sub-base and upper sub-base (termed as sub-base hereinafter) as necessary according to lines,
grades and cross -sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Assistant Engineer.

584
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and Quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MORTH clause 401.
2224.2.Cement treated Soil Sub-Base/Base
This work shall consist of laying and compacting a sub-base/base course of soil treated with cement
on prepared subgrade/sub-base, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and in
conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and Quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MORTH clause 403.
2225. Base Course (Non Bituminous)
• Water Bound Macadam Sub –Base / Base
• Sub Base Course: Normally consists of at least one layer of grading I or II materials.
• Base course: Base course is done using Grade III material.
• Crusher-Run Macadam Base
• Crushed Cement Concrete Sub-Base/Base

APPENDICES
• Wet Mix Macadam Sub -Base/Base
2225.1.Water Bound Macadam Sub –Base / Base
WBM may be used as Sub Base as well as Base course and also surface course of rural roads. This
work shall consist of clean, crushed aggregates mechanically interlocked by rolling and bonding
together with screening, binding material where necessary and water laid on a properly prepared
subgrade/ sub- base/ base or existing pavement, as the case may be and finished in accordance with
the requirements of these Specifications and in close conformity with the lines, grades, cross-sections
and thickness as per approved plans or as directed by the Engineer. It is, however, not desirable to
lay water bound macadam on an existing thin black topped surface without providing adequate

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

drainage facility for water that would get accumulated at the interface of existing bituminous surface
and water bound macadam. The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and
Quality checks and opening to traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 404
2225.2.Crusher-Run Macadam Base
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting crushed stone aggregate sub-base and
base courses constructed in accordance with the requirements set forth in this Specification and in
conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and cross-sections shown on the plans or as directed by
the Engineer,
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish, quality checks and opening to traffic
shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 410.
2225.3.Crushed Cement Concrete Sub-Base/Base
This work shall consist of breaking and crushing the damaged cement concrete slabs and recompacting
the same as sub-base/base course in one or more layers. Where specified, it shall also include treating
the surface of the top layer with a penetration coat of bitumen.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoORTH clause 405.
2225.4.Wet Mix Macadam Sub -Base/Base
This work shall consist of laying and compacting clean, crushed, graded aggregate and granular
material, premixed with water, to a dense mass on a prepared subgrade/sub -base/base or existing
pavement as the case may be. The material shall be laid in one or more layers as necessary to lines,
grades and cross -sections shown on the approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The
thickness of a single compacted Wet Mix Macadam layer shall not be less than 75 mm. When vibrating
or other approved types of compacting equipment arc used, the compacted depth of a single layer of
the sub-base course may be increased to 200 mm upon approval of the Engineer.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 406.
2226.Bituminous Base and Surface Courses 2226.1. General
Bituminous pavement courses shall be in accordance with Specifications of MoRTH clause 501. The
use of machinery and equipment mentioned in various Clauses of these Specifications is mandatory,
and for more details Manual for Construction and Supervision of Bituminous Works by MoRT&H

585
 may be referred.
2226.2. Laying Trials
Once the plant trials have been successfully completed as per MoRTH, and approved, the Contractor
shall carry out laying trials, to demonstrate that the proposed mix can be successfully laid, and
compacted all in accordance with the MoRTH Specifications. The laying trial shall be carried out as
per MoRTH Specifications for road and Bridge works.
2226.2.1.Key Points

• Samples of the material along with laboratory test results shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least 14 days in advance of a proposed material‟s use. If approved, the contractor shall then carry out
trial mixes. This shall also be tested and approved. No dense bituminous surfacing can occur until both
the job mix formula and the trial sections have been approved.
• Thereafter all asphalt work is required to follow the approved Job Mix formula and the
procedures established by the approved trials.
• The surface upon which the bitumen or bituminous mixture is to be placed must be thoroughly
cleaned immediately before the bitumen or mixture is placed.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

• Bituminous materials shall be placed only when the surface is dry, when rain does not appear
imminent and when the prepared road bed is in a satisfactory condition.
• The entire surface to be primed must be covered evenly. The distributor shall be cleaned and
calibrated to ensure the required rate of spray is achieved. Depending on the nature of the surface to
be primed a light application of water just prior to priming may be beneficial to aid penetration of the
bituminous material.
• No bituminous mixtures shall be placed until the prime coat has dried.
• Tack coat may need to be applied to make the road surface sticky prior to the bituminous
carpeting layer being placed.
• For Primer Seals and Bitumen Surface Treatments the aggregate must be spread and rolled
into bitumen immediately after spraying, preferably rolling shall be by multi tyrerollers.
• Each day dense bituminous surfacing is laid, three Marshall specimens shall be prepared and
tested as ASTM D 2041 or relevant IS code.
• Samples to be collected from either the plant or the laid mat, as directed by the Engineer.
Samples shall also be taken each day to determine the mix composition (Extraction of bitumen test and
grading),
• All equipment proposed to be used by the Contractor are in good condition and operated by
competent and experienced operators
• Dense bituminous surfacing must be thoroughly compacted as soon as the material will
support the roller without undue displacement or cracking. Excess use of water on the roller drums is
to be avoided as this cools the asphalt mat.
• The surface of the mixture after compaction must be close and tight, and free from dragging
cracks. Any mixture that is defective shall be removed and replaced with fresh hot material, which
shall be compacted immediately.
• After final rolling, samples shall be cut from areas of bituminous surfacing for density and
thickness at specified intervals. Where samples have been taken, fresh material must be placed and
thoroughly compacted.

2226.2.2. Surface Preparation:

Prime coat shall be provided as per Clause 502 and tack coat as per clause 503 of MoRTH
specifications.
2227. Base Course (Bituminous)
The different types of bituminous base course are as follows
Bituminous Macadam
Bituminous Penetration Macadam
Built-up Spray Grout
Dense Graded Bituminous Macadam
Sand Asphalt Basecourse

586
2227.1. Bituminous Macadam
This work shall consist of construction in a single course having 50mm to 100mm thickness or in
multiple courses of compacted crushed aggregates premixed with a bituminous binder on a previously
prepared base to the requirements of these specifications. Bituminous macadam is more open graded
than the dense graded bituminous materials.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 504.
2227.2. Bituminous Penetration Macadam
A penetration Macadam is a compacted layer of coarse aggregates into which bituminous binder is
introduced. The binder penetrates in to the layer through the voids and binds the stone aggregates. A
layer of small aggregates, called key aggregates, is spread on the surface and rolled so as to fill in the
surface voids in the coarse aggregate layer. A seal coat is provided to make the surface more
impervious to water. This type is commonly used in remote areas where it is difficult to transport
mixing and laying equipment. It can also be used as a temporary emergency material to repair a

APPENDICES
pavementdamaged by rains andfloods.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening
totraffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause505.
2227.3.Built-up Spray Grout
This work shall consist of a two-layer composite construction of compacted crushed coarse aggregates
with application of bituminous binder after each layer, and with key aggregates placed on top of the
second layer, in accordance with the Specifications of MoRTH, to serve as a base course and in
conformity with the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The thickness of the course shall be 75 mm. Built-up spray grout shall be used in a single
course in a pavementstructure.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 506.
2227.4.Dense graded Bituminous Macadam
It may be used as base/binder and profile corrective courses. Apart from Bituminous Macadam, the
only difference is being that the stone aggregates are more closely graded. As a result, the resultant
mixture is denser. DBM is also intended for use as road base material. This work shall consist of
construction in a single or multiple layers of DBM on a previously prepared base or sub-base. The
thickness of a single layer shall be 50mm to 100mm.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks shall and opening
to traffic be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 507.
2227.5. Sand Asphalt Base Course
This work shall consist of a base course composed of a mixture of sand, mineral filler where required
and bituminous binder, placed and compacted upon a prepared and accepted subgrade in accordance
with the Specifications of Clause 520 of MoRTH. The materials to be used, construction operations,
surface finish and quality checks and opening to traffic shall also follow the same.
This is used in special situations when quality coarse aggregates are not available within economical
leads and/or water needed for conventional base course not being readily available, as in desert areas.
50mm to 100mm.
2227.6.Surface (wearing) Course
The following are the surface (wearing) courses usually adopted.
Semi dense Bituminous Concrete(SDBC)
Bituminous Concrete(BC)
SurfaceDressing
Open grade premix carpet
Open grade premix carpet using Penetration Bitumen or Cutback.
Open grade premix carpet using cationic bitumenemulsion
MasticAsphalt
Close graded/ Mixed Seal Surfacing(MSS)

587
 2227.7. Semi dense Bituminous Concrete
This clause specifies the construction of Semi Dense Bituminous Concrete, for use in wearing/binder
and profile corrective courses. This work shall consist of construction in a single or multiple layers of
semi dense bituminous concrete on a previously prepared bituminous bound surface.A single layer
shall be 25mm to 100mm in thickness.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 508.
2227.8. Bituminous Concrete
This clause specifies the construction of Bituminous Concrete, for use in wearing (also used as profile
corrective courses) especially for heavily trafficked highways. This work shall consist of construction
in a single layer (25mm to 100mm in thickness) of bituminous concrete on a previously prepared
bituminous bound surface.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 509.
2227.9 Surface Dressing
This work shall consist of the application of one coat or two coats of surface dressing, each coat
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

consisting of a layer of bituminous binder sprayed on a previously prepared base, followed by a cover
of stone chips rolled in to form a wearing course to the requirements of these Specifications. Surface
Dressing is used in the case of relatively lightly trafficked roads over gravel or other untreated road
bases. It shall be noted that surface dressing is a thin treatment and does not enhance the structural
strength of the pavement. If the existing road is full of irregularities and undulations, it does nothing
to improve riding quality. Design of Surface Dressing may be referred to in the Manual for
Construction and Supervision of Bituminous Works.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 510.
2227.10.Open grade premix carpet
2227.10.1.Open-graded Premix Surfacing using Penetration Bitumen or Cutback.
This work shall consist of the preparation, laying and compaction of an open-graded premix surfacing
material of 20 mm thickness composed of small-sized aggregate premixed with a bituminous binder
on a previously prepared base, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, to serve as
a wearing course.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 511.1.
2227.10.2.Open graded premix surfacing using cationic bitumen emulsion
This work shall consist of the preparation, laying and compaction of an open graded premix surfacing
of 20 mm thickness composed of small-sized aggregate premixed with a cationic bitumen emulsion on
a previously prepared surface, in accordance with the requirements of the relevant Specifications of
MoRTH, to serve as a wearing course.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 511.2.
2227.11 Mixed Seal Surfacing
This work shall consist of the preparation, laying and compaction of a close-graded premix surfacing
material of 20 mm thickness composed of graded aggregates premixed with a bituminous binder on a
previously prepared surface, in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, to serve as a
wearing course. Close graded premix surfacing shall be of Type A or Type B as specified in the
Contract documents.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 512.
2227.12 Mastic Asphalt
This work shall consist of constructing a single layer of mastic asphalt wearing course for road
pavements and bridge decks. Mastic asphalt is an intimate homogeneous mixture of selected well
graded aggregates, filler and bitumen in such proportions as to yield a plastic and void less mass, which
when applied hot can be trowelled and floated to form a very dense impermeable surfacing. Its
consistency is such that it flows like a viscous fluid at temperatures of around 1750 C to 2100 C but,

588
on cooling to normal temperatures; it solidifies in to a dense mass. Thus its construction requires no
compacting effort. Because of its superior properties, it is used as a wearing course material for heavy
duty pavements, city streets carrying high volume of traffic, bus stops where heavy tangential forces
are expected, junctions where cornering stresses are predominant.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and Quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH clause 515.
2227.13. Seal Coat
This work shall consist of the application of a seal coat for sealing the voids in a bituminous surface
laid to the specified levels, grade and cross fall (camber). Seal coat shall be of either of the two types
specified below:
• Liquid seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder followed by a
cover of stone chips.
• Premixed seal coat comprising of a thin application of fine aggregate premixed with
bituminous binder.

APPENDICES
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 513.
2227.14. Bituminous Cold Mix (Including Gravel Emulsion)
Bituminous Cold Mix consists of a mixture of unheated mineral aggregate and emulsified or cutback
bitumen. This Specification deals only with plant mix (as opposed to mixed- in-place). Bituminous
cold mixes are used in situations where hot mix plants are not readily available, including for work in
remote areas and maintenance operations. Two types of mix are considered, namely,
• Designed Cold Mix
• Recipe Cold Mix.
The Design Mix procedure shall be used unless the Engineer specifically approves the Recipe

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Mix procedure.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 519
2228. Concrete Pavement
2228.1. Semi-rigid Pavement Construction
Semi- rigid pavements are a concrete sub base having a wearing course over it. In case of rural roads
the wearing coarse have be a thin bituminous surface. Semi-rigid pavements are also used as a Sub
base for making cement concrete pavement. Generally, the following types are used for Semi-rigid
pavement construction.
Dry Lean Cement Concrete.(DLC)
Cement Fly Ash BoundMacadam
Lime Fly AshConcrete
Lime Fly Ash BoundMacadam
However, Dry Lean Cement Concrete (DLC) is most commonly adopted.
2228.2.Lean Cement Concrete(DLC)
The work shall consist of construction of dry lean concrete sub base for cement concrete pavement in
accordance with the requirements of the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and
cross-sections shown on the drawings.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 601.
2228.3.Rolled Cement concrete Base
The work shall consist of construction of rolled concrete base course for cement concrete pavement in
accordance with the requirements of these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and
cross sections shown on the drawings.
The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 603.
2228.4.Cement Concrete Pavement
The work shall consist of construction of unreinforced, dowel jointed, plain cement concrete pavement
in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and
cross sections shown on the drawings.

589
 The materials to be used, construction operations, surface finish and quality checks and opening to
traffic shall be as per the specifications of MoRTH 602.
2229.Shallers 2229.1. General
Shaller gives adequate side support to the pavement and also drains off surface water from the
carriageway to the roadside drain. The work shall consist of constructing shaller on either side of the
pavement in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and in conformity with the lines,
grades and cross-sections shown on the drawings.
Shaller may be of selected earth/ granular material/ paved conforming to the requirements of MoRT&H
Clause 305/407. Paved shallers shall consist of sub-base, base and surfacing courses, as shown in the
drawings and materials for the same shall conform to relevant Specifications of the corresponding
items. Where paved or hard shallers are not provided, the pavement shall be provided with brick/stone
block edgings as shown in the drawings. The bricks shall conform to Clause 1003 of these
Specifications. Stone blocks shall conform to Clause 1004 of these Specifications and shall be of size
225 mm x 110 mm x 75 mm.
2229.2.Shoulder width
Width of the shoulder shall vary from 1 m to 2.5 m be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Assistant Engineer..
2229.2.1Construction Method
The sequence of operations shall be such that the construction of paved shaller is done in layers each
matching the thickness of adjoining pavement layer. Only after a layer of pavement and corresponding
layers in paved and earth shaller portion have been laid and compacted, the construction of next layer
of pavement and shaller shall be taken up.
Where the materials in adjacent layers are different, these shall be laid together and the pavement layer
shall be compacted first. The corresponding layer in paved shaller portion shall be compacted
thereafter, which shall be followed by compaction of earth shaller layer. The adjacent layers having
same material shall be laid and compacted together.
During all stages of shaller (earthen/ hard/ paved) construction, the required cross fall shall be
maintained to drain off surface water.
2229.3Culverts
Culverts are mainly of two types, Pipe Culverts and Slab Culverts. The width of culvert shall be equal
to the formation width of the road. It shall be generally situated on the straight alignment of the road.
If the road has a gradient the same shall be maintained for deck slab of theculvert.
2229.3.1Pipe Culverts:
2229.3.2NP 4 pipes for national highways conforming to IS 458:1988 shall be used.
Bedding: The bedding must be even and uniform, projecting rock faces and boulders must be removed
before forming the bedding. The thickness of bedding layer shall be minimum 75 mm. The bedding
material shall be well graded sand or granular material passing 75 mm sieve.
For heights of fill greater than 4 m, continuous concrete cradle bedding may be used. The mix shall
not be leaner than M150 concrete and the pipes shall be laid in position before the concrete has set.
Laying: Start Laying from the outlet and proceed towards the inlet ensuring the specified lines and
grade. The minimum longitudinal slope shall be 1 in 1000.
Where two or more lines of pipes are to be laid adjacent to each other, they shall be separated by a
distance equal to at least half the diameter of the pipe subject to a minimum of 450 mm. Ensure that
the pipe has a cushion of at least 0.60 m excluding crust thickness at the top.
2229.3.2.RCC Slab Culverts:
Depending on the scour characteristics of the bed material, open foundations with or without erosion
proof bed flooring is generally adopted. In general, concrete footing shall rest over good stratum at a
depth of about 1.5m below the lowest bed level. Bed flooring where provided shall consist of stone
pitching set in cement mortar 1:3 or two layers of brick on edge set in cement mortar 1:3. These shall
be laid over 150 mm thick foundation concrete M15.
2229.3.3.RCC Box culverts
These are economical in such cases where either the depth of foundation is more than 4 m below bed
level or where the total embankment is very high and are suitable for a situation where the catchment
area is more than 40 hectares. Box section of height less than 2m X 2m is not practicable to implement.

590
2230.Dimensions of abutment and wing wall:
Dimensions of abutment for RCC Slab Culvert
Span 1m to 4 m 5m to 6 m
H 2 3 4 2 3 4
b1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4
b2 0.7 1.1 1.4 0.6 1 1.4
b3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4
b4 - 0.2 0.5 - 0.2 0.6
B1 1.5 2.0 2.4 1.5 2.0 2.5

APPENDICES
B2 2.7 3.6 4.6 2.7 3.6 4.9
Dimensions of wing wall
Span upto 2 m 3m 4m 5m 6m
H 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3
b1 0.23 0.33 0. 0.24 0. 0.44 0.24 0.34 0.44 0.25 0.3 0.45 0.25 0.35
43 34 5

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

b2 0.57 0.82 1. 0.59 0. 1.09 0.6 0.85 1.10 0.62 0.8 1.13 0.63 0.88
07 84 7

B1 1.3 1.65 2. 1.33 1. 2.03 1.34 1.69 2.04 1.37 1.7 2.08 1.38 1.72
0 68 2

B2 2.1 2.45 2. 2.13 2. 2.83 2.14 2.49 2.84 2.17 2.5 2.88 2.18 2.53
8 48 2

0.3 0.3

SectionofAbutment Section of WingWall

b3

BED LEVEL BED

LEVEL
b4 b2 b3 b1 b4 b2 b1 0.4
0.4 0.3
.4
B1 B1
0.2 0.2 0.4
0.4
0.2 0.2

591
 Figure 4.2 Abutment and wing wall section for height more than 4.5m

3000mm 1500mm 3000mm

Road
End Pillar
Parapet CC Bed Construction
Premix
Carpet Joint

40 30 Deck 150
Slab 210 Masonry / mm
mm CCAbutment WBM
Slope 1: 3
H

CC/ RR Packing
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

0
Masonry /
10 CC

CC 1:4:8 , 20mm
Figure 4.3 Typical Details of Abutment and wing wall section for height upto
The following points are to be followed for construction of culverts.
1. The design shall be based on 2lane IRC Class A loading.
2. The length of wing walls shall be sufficient to eliminate any tendency of the embankment slope
to slip into the stream.
3. Construction joint between abutment and wing wall shall be provided to avoid overstressing at
the junction due to differential settlement.
4. The bearing shall be of reinforced bitumen laminated Kraft paper conforming to IS 1938.
While concreting the slabs, care shall be taken to prevent the bearing material from being displaced.
5. All space between foundation, masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled
to the original surface in layers not exceeding 150 mm compactedthickness.
6. The backfill material around the structure shall be of granular type having plasticity index and
liquid limit not exceeding 20 and 40 respectively. The fill material shall be deposited in horizontal
layers not exceeding 200 mm compacted thickness.
7. If the height and abutment and return over bed level is more than 2 m weep hole shall be
provided
150 mm above low water level or ground level whichever is higher. In case of concrete/ masonry,

weep holes of 150 mm dia or 80 X 150 mm size in 1:20 slope shall be provided at 1 metre interval
both horizontally and vertically. Refer IRC 40
8. Water Spout shall be provided for large span culverts. For 5 and 6 m span, one water spout of
100 mm diameter shall be provided in the centre of slab on either side of thedeck.
9. All culverts shall be numbered on the end pillars as per IRC SP 20 with year ofconstruction.
10. In case of stone masonry, coarse rubble masonry is stipulated.
11. Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds and joints so as to give them approximately
rectangular shapes.
12. The hearting or interior filling of the wall shall consist of flat bedded stone carefully laid on
their proper beds in mortar. While the use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of interstices
between the adjacent stones in hearting and these shall not exceed 15 % of the quantity of masonry.
13. Bond stones or headers shall be at 1.5 m or 1.8 m apart clears in every course. The headers shall
overlap at least by 150 mm
14. Face stone shall tail into the work for not less than their heights and at least one third of the
stones shall tail into the work for a length not less than twice the height

592
15. The face joint shall not be more than 20 mm thick.
2231.Causeways and Submersible Bridges.
A causeway is a small submersible structure, which allows flood to pass over it.
2231.1.Flush causeway: It is a paved dip built to cross a shallow water course. The top level shall
be at the same level as that of the bed of the water course.
2231.2. A low level or vented causeway: This is a structure provided with a few openings
comprising of pipes, small span slabs or small arches etc. with a raised road top level to a moderate
height upto 1.5 m height.
2231.3. A high-level causeway: This is a submersible structure provided with larger openings
comprising of a simply supported /continuous RCC slab or multiple arches or boxes and a raised
road top level to a reasonable height 1.5 m to 3 m. The RCC Slab may be supported over a series
of short piers (Masonry/
CC)
To avoid the heading up of water on the upstream side which results in producing high velocities

APPENDICES
leading to structural failure and out flanking, the top level of the causeway shall be kept as low as
possible. The water way provided in the causeway shall not be less than 30 % of the area of the
stream, measured between the stream bed level and the proposed top level of the road.
The details for culvert and causeway design shall be referred to in IRC SP 20-2002.
2232.Side drains
Side drain must be provided to collect surface water from the roadway and lead to an outlet. It also
acts as an outlet for the subsurface drains thereby protecting the base course of the roadway structure
from getting saturated/ lost its load bearing capacity. Side drains are designed for open channel flow
and generally provided on both sides of the road. Road drains in hilly terrain are constructed to
parabolic, trapezoidal, triangular, V-shaped, Kerb and channel or U- shaped cross sections.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

IRC SP 20 and IRC 42 may be referred for details and design of drains.
2233. Geosynthetics
This specification covers the various applications of Geosynthetic materials in road and bridge
works including supplying and laying as per special provisions.
Geosynthetics includes,
(i) Geotextile: Any permeable textile natural or Synthetic, used with foundation, soil, rock, earth,
or any other geotechnical engineering related material. In the present chapter, it is related to
synthetic material only.
(ii) Geogrid: A deformed or non-deformed grid of polymeric material used primarily for
reinforcement purposes with foundation, soil, rock, earth, or any other geotechnical engineering
related material.
(iii) Geonets : These are net made of polymeric material used for drainage of foundation, soil, rock,
earth
or any other geotechnical engineering related material.

(iv) Geomembrane : An essentially impermeable membrane of polymeric material used with

foundation, soil, rock, earth or my other geotechnical engineering related material, to control fluid
migration.-
(v) Geocomposite : A manufactured material using geoiexliles, geogrids, geonet and/ or
geomembrane in laminated or composite form,"
The details on specifications, quality and laying of geosynthetics are given in Section 700 of
MoRTH

593
 2234. Execution – Bridges
2234.1.General
Before starting the construction work, the procedure mentioned in section 2200 must be
followed and care must be taken to ensure that the following documents are available at
site.
1. Sanction letter and technical note, if any
2. Bill of Quantities
3. Copy of contract document
4. Copy of approved set of plans, estimates and detailed working drawings
5. Standards, specifications, guidelines, codes of practices etc., according to which the
work must be executed as per contract
6. Survey, investigation and subsoil test reports
2235. Excavation
Before starting excavation, it is necessary that initial site levels are taken. Protective
works, if any, shall be completed before monsoon so that foundations do not get
undermined. Excavations for laying foundations shall be carried out in accordance with
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Section 300 of MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works. The last 300 mm of
excavation shall be done just before laying of lean concrete below foundation.
Where there is any doubt regarding the bearing capacity or suitability of the foundation
soil the matter shall be reported to the Executive Engineer. In the case of small works up
to TS power of Executive Engineer, if any variation on the width, depth and type of
foundation is found necessary the Assistant Executive Engineer himself may decide the
matter after reporting to the authority sanctioning the estimate.
Load tests shall be conducted in the foundation soil if found necessary. If the contractor
has over excavated the foundation, he shall not be allowed to refill this with earth but, the
additional excavation shall be filled up by concrete. No extra cost is payable to the
contractor on this account. In some cases, it may be possible to reduce the depth or width
of foundation due to existence of harder type of soil or rock in particular localities but the
Assistant Executive Engineer may decide on the alteration necessary and instruct the
contractor accordingly. A report shall be sent to the Executive Engineer clearly indicating
the change effected and the reasons therefore.
The useful materials obtained from excavation like moorum sand stone etc. shall be
stacked separately and properly measured and accounted for. It shall be reused for
backfilling of foundations and other useful works. All spaces excavated and not occupied
by the foundation shall be refilled upto surrounding level in accordance with section 300
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works. All safety measures shall be observed
at site to avoid accidents. Unauthorized entries to site of work shall be prohibited. The
contractor shall obtain proper license for explosives whenever these are to be stored.
The excavation for foundation shall be checked and got approved by the Executive
Engineer
2236. Concreting
All the materials used in concreting must be tested for relative properties before hand.
2236.1. Key Points
• The minimum cement content is based on 20 mm aggregate.
• For 40 mm and larger sized aggregates, cement content may be reduced suitably,
but the reduction shall not be more than 10%
• For underwater concreting, the cement content shall be increased by 10 %.
• Prior to start of construction, the contractor shall design the mix and submit to
the Executive
Engineer for approval of the mix, proportions of materials, including admixtures used.
• Trial mixes: Test cubes shall be taken, from trial mixes. For each mix, set of six
cubes shall be made from each of three consecutive batches. Three cubes from each set of
mix shall be tested at

594
an age of 28 days and three at an earlier date (7 days) approved by the Executive Engineer.
The cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in conformity with the
MoRTH specifications.
• The average strength of the nine cubes at 28 days shall exceed the specified
characteristic strength.
• Concrete shall be mixed either in a concrete mixer or in a batching and mixing
plant approved by the Executive Engineer. Hand mixing shall not be permitted.
• Mixers, which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes, shall be
thoroughly cleaned before putting in a new batch.
• The first batch of concrete from the mixer shall contain only two thirds of the
normal quantity of coarse aggregate.
• The compacted thickness of each layer shall not be more than 0.45 m when
internal vibrators are used and shall not exceed 0.3 m in all othercases.
•

APPENDICES
Do not allow dropping of concrete from a height exceeding 2 m.
• When concreting is to be received on a surface, which has hardened, it shall be
roughened, swept clean, wetted and covered with a 13 mm thick mortar layer composed
of cement and sand in the same ratio as in the concrete mix.
• Do not apply vibration through the reinforcement.
• Keep the compacted concrete continuously wet for a period not less than 14 days
Transporting, placing and compaction of Concrete shall be as per clause 1709 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works. For formwork and staging clause 1500 of
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works shall be followed. The contractor shall
furnish the design and drawings of complete formwork as well as their supports for

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

approval of the Assistant Executive engineer before any erection is taken up. Metal/
laminated board formwork shall preferably be used for achieving good finish. The
formwork shall be robust and strong and the joints shall be leak proof. The formwork shall
be coated with an approved release agent that will effectively prevent sticking and will not
stain the concrete sides. The formwork shall be inspected and approved by Assistant
Executive Engineer before concreting is done.
The requisite properties for structural steel shall be as per clause 1009 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works and its placement shall conform to clause 1600
of MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works. This includes protection of
reinforcement, bar splicing and bending of reinforcement. The size (Maximum nominal)
of coarse aggregates for concrete to be used shall be as given in Table 123.4

595
 Table123.4 Maximum nominal size of Coarseaggregates
Sl Components Maximum nominal size of Coarse
no: aggregates
1 RCC Well kerb 20
2 RCC/ PCC Well steining 40
3 Well cap or pile cap, solid type piers and 20
abutment
4 RCC work in Girders, slabs, wearing coat, curb 20
approach slab, hollow piers and abutments,
piers.
5 Pre stressed concrete (PSC) work 20
6 Any other item. As specified by the Executive
Engineer
The time of removal of formwork and staging shall be as per Table 4.3.2.
Table4.3.2 Time of Removal of Formwork
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

a) Walls, piers, abutments, columns 12 – 48 hours as may be decided by the

and vertical faces of Assistant Executive Engineer
structural members
b) Soffits of slab (with props left 3 days
under)
c) Props (Left under Slabs) 14 days
d) Soffits of Girders (With props left 7 days
under
e) Props (left under Girders) 21 days

596
2237.Foundations 2237.1.
Open foundation:
The plan dimensions of the foundation shall be set out at the bottom of foundation trench and
checked with respect to original reference line and axis. It shall be ensured that at no point the
bearing surface is higher than the founding level shown on the drawing.
Open foundation shall be constructed in dry conditions and the contractor shall provide for adequate
dewatering arrangements to the satisfaction of the Assistant Executive Engineer. Measures such as
bailing out, pumping, constructing diversion channels etc. shall be taken to keep the foundation
trenches dry and to protect the green concrete against damage. Where the bearing surface is earth, a
layer of M15 concrete shall be provided below foundation concrete. The thickness of lean concrete
layer shall be 100 mm minimum unless otherwise specified. All spaces excavated and not occupied
by the foundation shall be refilled and compacted with earth up to the surface of surrounding ground.
In case of excavation in rock, the annular space around foundation shall be filled with M 15 concrete
up to the top of rock.

APPENDICES
The construction procedure shall conform to provisions contained in Section 2100 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2237.2. Well foundation:
This work consists of construction of well foundation, taking it down to the founding level through
all kinds of sub-strata, plugging the bottom, filling the inside of the well, plugging the top and
providing a well cap in accordance with the details shown on the drawing and as per the
specifications of MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works section 1200.
Key points:
• Fix up reference points, away from the zone of blowups/ settlements resulting from well sinking
and mark centre lines of the individual wells in longitudinal and transverse directionsaccurately.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

• Benchmark and reference points shall be checked regularly from permanent points fixed atsite.
• Cutting edge shall be laid on dry ground / Sand Island.
• Sand Island to be protected against scour until the sinking is done to a safe level.
• Floating caisson of steel can be adopted when construction of Sand Island is not feasible.
• Use steel formwork for well curb
• Concreting in the well curb shall be done in one continuous operation.
• Steining shall be cast only after sinking the curb to some extent so that it becomes stable.
• The steining shall be built in one straight line from bottom to top.
• The height of the steining shall be calibrated by marking on outer faces in longitudinal and
transverse directions (4 sides) with every metre mark in paint. Zero shall start from bottom of the
cutting edge.
• For sinking, material be excavated uniformly all round the dredge hole
• De-watering shall not be permitted as a means for sinking.
• A detailed statement with regard to the progress of well sinking shall be maintained at site as per
Appendix 2200 F.
• If a tilt occurs, further steining has to be carried out, with the axis of the extended steining
following the axis of the well already sunk. Tilts shall be corrected as soon as it occurs.
• Sinking history of well including tilt and shift, kentledge, dewatering, blastingdone
during sinking shall be maintained in the format given in Appendix-2200 G
• The depth of sump below the level of cutting edge shall be generally limited to one-sixth
of the outer diameter/ least lateral dimensions of well in place. Normally, the depth of sump shall
not exceed 3m unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer.
• Bottom plugging shall be done with the help of tremie pipe. Additional 10 per cent cement shall be
provided in the concrete for bottom plug.
• A record of the method of sinking adopted, bottlenecks encountered etc. may be kept as per
proforma given in Appendix-2800 H

597
 2237.3. Pile Foundation
Sub-surface investigation shall be carried out by in-situ pile tests. At least one bore- hole for every
foundation of the bridge shall be executed. Depth of boring shall not be less than
• 1.5 times estimated length of pile in soil but not less than 15 m beyond the probable length of pile
• 15 times diameter of pile in weak/jointed rock but minimum 15 m in such rock
• 4 times diameter of pile in sound, hard rock but minimum 3 m in such rock
2237.3.1. Type of piles
The piles may be of reinforced concrete, pre stressed concrete, steel or timber. The piles may be of
solid or hollow sections or steel cased piles filled with concrete. Concrete piles may be driven cast-
in- situ or pre-cast or bored cast- in-situ or pre-cast piles driven into preformed bores. The shape of
piles may be circular, square, hexagonal, octagonal, "H" or "I" Section.
Construction of pile foundations shall be as per the MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge
works clause 1100 and IS: 2911. The construction of pile foundations requires a careful choice of
the piling system depending upon sub-soil conditions and loading characteristics and type of
structure. The method of installing the piles, including details of the equipment shall be submitted
by the Contractor and got approved by the Executive Engineer
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

2237.3.1.1. Key points:

(i) Test piles
• Test piles that are to become a part of the completed structure shall be installed with the same type
of equipment that is proposed to be used for piling in the actual structure.
• Test piles, which, are not to be incorporated in the completed structure, shall be removed to at least
600 mm below the proposed soffit level of pile cap and the remaining hole shall be backfilled with
earth or other suitable material.
(ii) Pre-cast concrete piles
• For pre cast piles, concrete shall be placed continuously until the completion of each pile, the
length of pile shall not normally exceed 25 metres.
• Pre-cast concrete piles shall be lifted by means of a suitable bridle or sling attached to the pilebut
normally at points not more than 3 metres from the ends of the piles
• Pre-cast concrete piles cured with water shall not be driven for at least 28 days after casting ( 10
days with rapid hardening cement )
Detailed procedure for construction and driving of pre-cast pile are given in the MoRTH
Specification for
Road and Bridge works clause 1106
(iii) Cast-in-situ concrete piles
• Cast-in-situ concrete piles may be either installed by making a bore into the ground by removalof
material or by driving a metal casing with a shoe at the tip and displacing the materiallaterally.
• Cast- in-situ concrete piles may be cast in metal shells, which may remain permanently in place.
• The reinforcement cages must be prepared in advance and adjustment to the length done
depending on site requirements.
• This cage shall be lowered just prior to concreting and completed without interruption.
• In case of liners being withdrawn, sufficient head of concrete has to be provided to prevent the
entry of ground water or reduction of cross section (necking of the pile).
• A minimum of 2.0 m length of top of bore shall invariably be provided with casing to ensure
against loose soil falling into the bore.
• If the concrete is placed inside pre-cast concrete tubes or consists of pre-cast sections, these shall
be free from cracks or other damage before being installed.
Specific requirements of cast- in-situ driven piles shall be as per Clauses 1100 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works.

598
2238 SubStructure
The construction procedure shall conform to provisions contained in Section 2200 of MoRTH
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works.
2238.1. Piers and Abutments
In case of concrete piers, the number of horizontal construction joints shall be kept minimum.
• Construction joints shall be avoided in splash zones.
• No vertical construction joint shall be provided.
• In case of tall piers and abutments, use of slip form shall be preferred.

• The surface of foundation/well cap/pile cap shall be scrapped with wire brush and all loose
materials removed.
• In case reinforcing bars projecting from foundations are coated with cement slurry, tapping,
hammering or wire brushing shall remove the same.
• Before commencing masonry or concrete work, the surface shall be thoroughlywetted.
• In case of solid (non-spill through type) abutments, weep holes as shown on the drawings shall be

APPENDICES
provided.
• The surface finish shall be smooth, except the earth face of abutments, which shall be rough,
finished.
• In case of abutments likely to experience considerable movement on account of backfill of
approaches and settlement of foundations, the construction of the abutment shall be followed by
filling up of embankment in layers to, the full height to allow for the anticipated movement during
construction period before casting of superstructure.
Specific requirements of piers and abutments shall be as per Clauses 2204 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

2238.1.1. Pier Cap and Abutment Cap
The locations and levels of pier cap/abutment cap/pedestals and bolts for fixing bearings shall be
checked carefully to ensure alignment in accordance with the drawings of the bridge.
• The surface of cap shall be finished smooth and shall have a slope for draining of water as
shown on the drawings.
• For short span slab bridges with continuous support on pier caps, the surface shall be cast
horizontal.
• The top surface of the pedestal on which bearings are to be placed shall also be cast
horizontal.
• The surface on which elastomeric bearings are to be placed shall be wood float finished to
a level plane which shall not vary more than 1.5 mm from straight edge placed in any direction
across the area.
• The surface on which other bearings (steel bearings, pot bearings) are to be placed shall be
cast about 25 mm below the bottom level of bearings and as indicated on thedrawings.
Specific requirements of Pier Cap and Abutment Cap shall be as per Clauses 2205 of MoRTH
Specification for Road and Bridge works.

2238.2. Dirt/ Ballast Wall, Return Wall and Wing Wall

• In case of cantilever return walls, no construction joint shall generally be permitted.
• Wherever feasible, the concreting in cantilever return walls shall be carried out in
continuation of the ballast wall.
• For gravity type masonry and concrete return and wing wall, the surface of foundation shall
be prepared in the same manner as prescribed for construction of abutment. No horizontal
construction joint shall be provided.
• If shown on drawing or directed by the Assistant Executive Engineer, vertical
construction joint may be provided.
• Vertical expansion gap of 20 mm shall be provided in return wall/wing wall at every 10
metre intervals or as directed by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
• Weep holes shall be provided as prescribed for abutments or as shown on the drawings.

599
 • The finish of the surface on the earth side shall be rough while the front face shall be
smooth finished.
• Architectural coping for wing wall/return wall in brick masonry shall conform tosection
1300 of MoRTH Specifications.
Specific requirements of Dirt/ Ballast Wall, Return Wall and Wing Wall shall be as per Clause
2206 of
MoRTH Specification for Road and Bridge works.
2239. Bearings
Bearings are the part of the bridge structures, which bears directly all the forces from the structure
above and transmits the same to the supporting structure. The different types of bearings currently
in use are Steel bearings, Elastomeric Bearings, Pot Bearings and Special bearings. Bearings shall
conform to the provisions contained under section 2000 of MoRTH Specifications for Road and
Bridge Works.
2240. Super Structure
2240.1. Reinforced Concrete Construction
Construction of Solid Slabs and RCC T-Beam & Slab are carried out as per the clause 2300 set
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

forth in MoRTH Specification.

2240.2. Pre-stressed Concrete Construction
Construction of PSC Girder and Composite RCC Slab, Box Girder and Cantilever shall be carried
out as per the clause 2305 set forth in MoRTH Specifications
2241. Expansion Joint
Expansion Joints shall be provided as per Section 2600 of MORTH specification for Road and
Bridge Works.
2242. Wearing Coat and Appurtenances
2242.1. Wearing Coat
A wearing coat over the deck slab with bituminous material or Cement concrete shall be provided
as per Clause 2702 of MoRTH Specifications.
2242.2. Approach Slab
Reinforced concrete approach slab covering the entire width of the roadway shall be provided as
per details given on the drawings or as approved by the Assistant Executive Engineer. Minimum
length of approach slab shall be 3.5 m and minimum thickness 300 mm. The base for the approach
slab shall be as shown on the drawings.
2242.3. Drainage Spouts and Weep Holes
Drainage spouts and Weep holes shall be provided as per the clauses 2705 and 2706 of MoRTH
respectively.
2242.4. Illumination
Provision for lighting arrangements shall be done as per the drawings.
2242.5. Railings
Bridge railing includes the portion of the structure erected on and above the kerb for the protection
of pedestrians and traffic. Railings can be of Metal, Cast in situ and Pre-cast concrete. These shall
be erected as per the Clause 2703 of MoRTH Specification. Railings or closely spaced guard
stones shall be extended to the approach slabs.
2243.River Training and Protection Works
River training and protection work shall include construction of Guide bunds, Aprons, Stone
pitching or Revetment on Slopes, Flooring, Curtain wall and Flexible Aprons as required for
ensuring safety of the bridge structure and its approaches against damage by flood/flowing water.
Constructions of the above components shall be carried out as per section 2500 of MoRTH
Specifications

600
 2243.1.Brick and Stone Masonry
Where the design suggests the use of Brick or Stone masonry, these shall conform to the
specifications in section 1300 and 1400 of MORTH respectively.

2244. Quality Control

The quality control of Bridge construction shall conform to the section 2500 of this section

2245. Execution – Buildings

2245.1. General
Before start of the construction work, care must be taken to ensure that the documents as specified
in section 2200 are readily available. The site shall be handed over to the contractor within the
stipulated time and acknowledgement in prescribed form forwarded to all concerned officials.

APPENDICES
2245.1.1. Professional Services and Responsibilities
The responsibility and competence of the team of professionals with regard to planning designing
and supervision of building construction work shall be in accordance with Part 2 'Administration' of
National Building Code 2005. The provisions in Part 2 „Administration‟ of National Building Code
2005 shall also govern all applications for permits and issuance of certificates, etc. Employment of
trained workers shall be encouraged for building construction activity.

2245.1.2. Storage, Stacking and Handling of Building Materials

Storage, Stacking and Handling of Building Materials shall be in accordance with the Part 7 section

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

2 of National Building Code.

2245.1.3.Safety in Construction of a Building

The provisions of this Section shall apply to the erection/alteration of the various parts of a building
or similar structure. In case of a doubt or dispute, the specific Rules, Regulations and Acts pertaining
to the protection of the public or workmen from health and other hazards wherever specified by the
Local/State Authority or in the Acts of the Government take precedence over whatever is herein
specified. The safety management of the building site shall be in accordance with Part 7 Section 3
of National Building Code 2005.

2246.Construction Activities Undertaken from Foundation to Roof:

i) The Contractor shall mark the Layout of Building on the ground in the form of centre lines of
walls and columns. These centre lines shall be guided by brick pillars made along the centre line at
a distance of 1.2 m from the outer walls and columns with the centre marked on these reference
pillars with fresh plaster. Excavation is done to the prescribed basement floorlevel.
ii) Balance excavation to be done after remarking the position of columns on excavated ground
and also making temporary markings of centre lines on excavated sides. Marking the foundation/
beams sizes and then doing the balance excavation giving shape to the raft foundation / column
foundations as per the design.
iii) In case external waterproofing is to be done, it is to be done on the PCC and if internal it shall
be done after completing the RCC of the basement. Then the final Layout of walls, columns and
beams on the PCC shall be made and got verified by the Assistant Executive Engineer.
iv) Contractor shall prepare and submit the bar bending schedule as per drawings and get it
approved by the Assistant Executive Engineer. Cover blocks to be made by contractor in PCC at the
time of laying PCC in the thicknesses stipulated and placed below or around reinforcement so as to
provide proper cover. After laying of the Steel reinforcement it is to be checked and measured by
the Assistant Executive Engineer for accuracy and cover to reinforcement. This shall be check
measured by AEE
v) Concrete for columns (or in walls) shall be as per design mix and vibrated properly. Cement

601
 additives can be added for generating proper flow and compaction of concrete as per clause 5.5 of
IS 456: 2000. Single lift shall not be more than 1.2 m
vi) Contractor is to cast the balance height of column after proper shuttering up to beambottom.
vii) Contractor is to provide and do shuttering of the roof as per structural drawings and check its
level. It shall be ensured that proper amount of supports are provided and also that the shuttering is
not uneven or done with very old planks or bent plates. The shuttering of wareproof ply or of steel
sections made to the size required shall be used. Steel shuttering of various column sizes and also
steel plates for roof shuttering shall be used. Assistant Engineer shall check the shuttering for levels
and design aspect he shall also check the supports for any loose ends.
viii) The primary responsibility of ensuring the correctness of the reinforcement details as per
design is vested with the Assistant Engineer. But the contractor‟s Engineer shall certify that the
reinforcement is provided as per structural drawings and bar bending schedule. The J.E/Overseer in
charge shall report the matter to the Assistant Engineer.

ix) In normal course concreting shall be done at a stretch. In the case of emergency, the work shall
be stopped only at supports or at the point of contra flexure.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

x) Time shall be given to the electrical contractor and the plumbing contractor for laying the pipes,
fan and light boxes properly. Thus a gap of one day shall be provided after the bending of steel
reinforcement so that both the electrical and sanitary contractors can execute this work properly and
also for the Assistant Executive Engineer to check the reinforcement, shuttering, electrical and
sanitary work.
xi) Assistant Engineer shall depute one of his Supervisors/ Overseers to keep a check at the point
of mixing for volumes of cement, coarse sand, coarse aggregate. Additives for concrete available in
the market for increasing the workability of concrete shall be used as perrequirement.

2246.1. Site layout

The layout of the construction site shall be carefully planned keeping in view the various
requirements to construction activities and the specific constraints in terms of its size, shape,
topography, traffic and other restrictions, in public interest. A well-planned site layout would enable
safe smooth and efficient construction operations. The site layout shall take into considerations the
following factors:
a) Easy entry and exit, with proper parking of vehicle and equipments duringconstruction.
b) Properly located material stores for easy handling and storage.
c) Adequate stack areas for bulk construction materials.
d) Optimum location of plants and equipments (batching plants, etc).
e) Layout of temporary services (water, power, power generation unit, hoists, cranes, elevators,
etc).
f) Adequate yard lighting and lighting for night shifts.
g) Temporary buildings; site office and shelter for workforce with use of non-combustible
materials as far as possible including emergency medical aids.
h) Roads for vehicular movement with effective drainage plan.
i) Construction safety with emergency access and evacuations and security measures.
j) Fabrication yards for reinforcement assembly, concrete pre-casting and shuttering k) Fencing,
barricades and signage‟s.

2246.2. Buildings Materials

For all Building materials, methods of use and specifications National Building Code 2005, part
V- may be followed

2247. Earthwork Excavation

Excavation wherever required shall be done to the prescribed building plan as per the clause 11, 12
and 13 of Section 3 Part 7 National Building Code 2005.

602
2248. Foundation
Foundation shall be done as per the design drawings. The forms and materials of building
foundations vary according to ground conditions, structural material, structural type, and other
factors. Types of foundation and details shall be referred to in Part VI Section 2 of National
Building Code 2005 (Clause 6 to 13)
2249. Plain Cement Concrete.

Plain Cement Concrete shall be done as per the thickness given in the drawing. The minimum
thickness of PCC must be 100 mm. The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both
longitudinally and transversely or stepped as directed by the Assistant Engineer. Before footing is
laid, the surface shall be slightly watered and rammed. In the event of excavation having been
made deeper than that shown on the drawings or as otherwise ordered by the Assistant Engineer,

APPENDICES
the extra depth shall be made up with concrete of same grade as that of PCC of the foundation at
the cost of the Contractor. Earth filling shall not be used for the purpose to bring the foundation to
level. When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be freed of all soft and loose material,
cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level and stepped as directed by the Assistant Engineer. In
the case of open foundation dewatering shall not be permitted from the time of placing of concrete
up to 24 hours after placement.

2250. Random Rubble Masonry for foundation and Basement:

In this type rubble stones are carefully laid, hammered down in to position and solidly embedded
in mortar, with mortar joints not exceeding 12.5 mm in thickness. The stones will be hammer

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

dressed on the face and stones are so arranged as to break joint as much as possible and long
vertical lines of joints are avoided. The mortar used in the rubble foundation shall be minimum 1:6
proportion. Bond stones must be used at staggered spacing of 1.5 m. The stones must be wetted
before using.

2250.1 Damp proof course

Damp proof courses are inserted in horizontal beds in masonry. In basements vertical damp-proof
courses also are provided. Usually the damp proof course consists of a layer of cement mortar or
cement concrete 25 mm to 40 mm. thick painted over with 2 coats of bitumen - 1st coat at 1.2
Kg./sq. meter and 2nd coat at 0.7 Kg. per sq. meter. This is covered with coarse sand @ 0.006 cum
per sq. meter. Another method of damp proofing consists of adding certain compounds to concrete
or mortar, like chalk, talc etc. which have a mechanical action of pore filling or alkaline silicates,
aluminum or zinc sulphates, calcium, aluminum or ammonium chloride, iron fillings etc. which
react chemically and fill the pores. A third method of damp proofing consists of incorporation of a
layer of water-repellent material such as lead sheet, slates, mastic asphalt etc. between the source
of moisture and part of the building adjacent to it. Alternately one of the specifications as per part
5 of National Building code shall be followed.

2250.1.1. Damp-proof course above ground level

To prevent moisture rising above ground level by capillary action, the damp proof course is
provided above ground level. To form an effective barrier, the course shall extend to the full
thickness of masonry. Damp proof course when provided below flooring shall form a continuous
layer with the damp- proof course in the masonry.

2250.1.2. Damp proof course for basement

This work shall be taken on hand only when the sub-soil water level is at its lowest. Further the site
has to be kept dry by pumping till the work is completed and has set completely. Suitable structural
support shall be provided for the damp - proof course to withstand the anticipated water pressure.

603
 The following methods can be adopted:
a. A base slab of weak cement concrete with a smooth surface finish is constructed on the floor of
the excavation. This shall project at least 15 cm. beyond the outer walls. The damp proof course is
laid over the entire slab.
b.A protective flooring of flat brick or cement concrete 1:3:6 is constructed over the damp proofing
course to protect it. The structural walls and floor are then constructed. They shall be suitably
designed to withstand the anticipated water pressure. The outside faces are plastered and finished
smooth.
c. The damp proof course is then applied to the outside face of the wall, joining at the base to the
projecting damp proof course originally laid over the base slab, taking care to ensure a perfect bond.
A thin protective brick wall, half brick thick, is then constructed over the projecting base slab. The
gap between the walls shall be grouted with cement.
Alternately, where sufficient working space is not available after the base concrete is laid, the outer
protective wall is first constructed. The damp proof course is then laid over the floor and sides. A
protective layer of brick is laid over the floor and a thin inner protective wall is constructed to protect
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

the damp proof course laid over the sides. The structural walls are then constructed.

2250.2. Plinth beam

If the foundation is deep, that is, going more than half a storey in depth below the plinth, the Plinth
shall be connected using beams. Plinth level shall be checked with respect to drawing level. Bottom
of the peripheral plinth beam shall be kept 15cm below the existing ground level. Plinth beam shall
be provided as per structural drawing.

2251. Cement Mortar

Cement and sand shall be mixed intimately in a mechanical mixer in the specified proportions.
Proportioning of cement shall be weighed while sand can be by volumes, after making due allowance
for bulking. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of addition of water.

2252. Brick work for structures

Bricks are to be immersed in water for a minimum period of one hour before use. All brickwork
shall be laid in English bond, even and true to line, plumb and level. Bricks shall be laid with frogs
up, on a full bed of mortar. All joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no
hollow space is left. Thickness of joints shall not exceed 10mm. The masonry shall be kept
constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of 7 days.

2253. Formwork
Most structural concrete is made by placing (also called CASTING) plastic concrete into spaces
enclosed by previously constructed Forms. These forms are usually removed once the plastic
concrete hardens into the shape outlined by the forms. Forms for concrete structures must be tight,
rigid, and strong. The forms must be strong enough to resist the high pressure exerted by the
concrete.

2253.1.Form Materials
Wood, plywood, steel, fiberglass, and other approved materials are commonly used as form
materials.

604
2253.1.1.Foundation Forms
Foundation forms may include forms or parts of forms for column footings, pier footings, and wall footings.
Whenever possible, the earth shall be excavated and the hole used to contain the foundation of footing forms.
Footings are cast directly against the earth, and only the sides are molded in forms. Where there is a firm
natural earth surface, which is capable of supporting and molding the concrete, there is no need of additional
formwork.

Wall forms are made up of five basic parts. They are as follows: Wall forms are made up of five basic
parts. They are as follows:
(1) Sheathing, to shape and retain the concrete until it sets;
(2) Studs, to form a framework and support the sheathing;
(3) Wales, to keep the form aligned and support the studs;

APPENDICES
(4) Braces, to hold the forms erect under lateral pressure; and
(5) Ties and spreaders or tie-spreader units, to hold the sides of the forms at the correct spacing. Wall forms
may be built in place or pre- fabricated, depending on the shape and the desirability
for reuse. Wall forms are usually reinforced against displacement by the use of TIES. Small

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

surface holes remain, which can be plugged with grout. The prefabricated panels for formwork can be used.
The panels can be sized to suit any particular situation. Projects requiring mass concrete are often formed by
the use of giant panels or ganged, prefabricated forms. Cranes usually raise and place these large sections, so
only the available equipment limits their size. These large forms are built or assembled on the ground, and
their only basic difference from regular forms is the extra bracing required withstanding handling. Special
attention must be given to corners when forms are being erected. These are weak points because the continuity
of sheathing and wales is broken. Forms must be pulled tightly together at these points to prevent leakage of
concrete.

2253.2. Column Forms

A typical concrete column form is securely braced to hold the sheathing together against the bursting pressure
exerted on the form by the plastic concrete. Since the bursting pressure is greater at the bottom than the
top, the bracings are placed closer together at the bottom. Bolt holes are bored in projections, and bolts are
inserted to backup the wedges that are driven to tighten.

605
 2253.3. Beam and Girder Forms
The type of construction to be used for beam forms depends upon whether the form is to be
removed in one piece or whether the sides are to be stripped and the bottom left in place until
such time as the concrete has developed enough strength to permit removal of the shoring. Beam
forms are subjected to very little bursting pressure but must be shored up at frequent intervals to
prevent sagging
under the weight of the fresh concrete. The vertical side members are placed to assist in transmitting
slab loads to the supporting shores.

2253.4. Scaffoldings
Properly designed and constructed scaffolding built by competent workmen shall be provided
during the construction in the building site to ensure the safety of workers. Joining the members of
scaffolds only with nails shall be prohibited, as they are likely to get loose under normal weathering
conditions. In the erection or maintenance of tall buildings, scaffoldings shall be of noncombustible
material especially when the work is being done on any building in occupation. Frequent
inspections of scaffolding shall be done after initial construction of thescaffolding.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

2254. Column
Concrete columns shall be executed as per approved structural drawings/ designs. For any change
proposed at site, in the size of column section and reinforcement/or their orientation, etc., approval
of Executive Engineer shall be obtained before execution.

2255. Walls
Walls are differentiated into two types: load bearing and non-load bearing. Load-bearing walls not
only separate spaces, but also provide structural support for whatever is above them. Non- load
bearing walls function solely as partitions between spaces. Partition walls, curtain wall, panel wall
and shear wall come under this category.
Common burnt clay bricks, Burnt clay fly ash bricks, pulverized fuel ash lime bricks, Stones, Sand
lime bricks, Concrete blocks (Solid & Hollow), Lime based blocks, Burnt clay hollow blocks,
Gypsum Partition blocks, Autoclaved cellular concrete blocks and Concrete stone masonry blocks
are used with cement mortar for the construction. The materials used in masonry construction shall
be in accordance with the Part 5 Building Materials and construction shall conform to the accepted
standards of Part 6 Section Masonry of NBC. Height and length of masonry walls shall be restricted
as per clause 4.6 and clause 8 ofSection 4 of part 6 of National Building Code.
Depending on the type of wall to be constructed height of the wall per day shall be restricted to
ensure that the newly constructed wall does not come down due to lack of strength in lower
layers. In long walls adequate expansion/crumple joints shall be provided to ensure safety. If an
opening is necessary in the existing wall then adequate support against the collapse or cracking of
the wall portion above or roof or adjoining walls shall be provided. Whenever projections
cantilever out of the walls temporary form work shall be provided for such projections and the
same shall not be removed till wall over the projecting slabs providing stability load against over
turning are completely constructed.

2256. Lintel, Bond Beams, and Sills

Bond beams are reinforced courses of block that bond and integrate a concrete masonry wall into
a stronger unit. They increase the bending strength of the wall and are particularly needed to resist
the high winds of hurricanes and earthquake forces. In addition, they exert restraint against wall
movement, reducing the formation of cracks. Bond beams are constructed with special-shape
masonry units (beam and lintel block) filled with concrete or grout and reinforced with embedded
steel bars. These beams are usually located at the top of walls to stiffen them. Since bond beams
have appreciable structural strength, they can be located to serve as lintels over doors and windows.
Lintels shall have a minimum bearing at each end equal to depth or 15cms whichever is higher.
Pre-cast concrete lintels can be used with an offset on the underside to suit the modular

606
 openings. Pre-cast concrete sills can be used.

Pre-cast concrete lintels can be used with an offset on the underside to fit the modular openings.

57.1. Sunshade: This is provided for protection of doors windows, ventilators and other openings
from the effect of rain and sunlight. This may be provided as per the provisions of the code IS
456. It must be cast monolithically with the lintel and care must be given to ensure sufficient slope
to aid runoff. Lintel must be raised above the sunshade to a minimum 5 cm so that water seepage
is avoided.

2257. Beam
Beams are the principal load-carrying horizontal members. They take the load directly from the floor
above and carry it to the columns. The beams shall be constructed in accordance with the structural
drawings.

APPENDICES
2258. Slabs
Slabs shall be constructed as per the structural drawings. Top surface of Roof slab shall have
necessary slope to drain off rainwater. In case of sloping roof, the slabs shall rest on RCC beams
over masonry walls, so that crack development can be avoided.
2259. Pre-stressed concrete
For this method of concreting Refer IS 1343: 1980
2260. Ready mixed concrete
For this method of concreting Refer IS 4926: 2003
2261. Doors

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Wood, Metal and Plastic are used for fabrication of doors, windows and ventilators. All wood
components are treated with a water-repellent preservative to provide protection against moisture.
Doors in the traditional pattern are usually of the panel type. Flush doors consist of thin plywood
faces over a framework of wood with a wood block or particleboard core. Exterior doors are usually
4cms thick and not less than 2mts high. The main entrance door is of minimum 100cms width, and
the side or rear door is normally 90cms wide. Novelty doors, such as PVC door unit, are commonly
used for water closets/bath rooms because they provide water resistance. Hinged doors shall open
or swing in the direction of natural entry, against a blank wall, and shall not be obstructed by other
swinging doors. Doors shall never be hinged to swing into a hallway. If there is no sufficient space
for swing doors, sliding doors shall be provided. For the general requirements of the door refer Part
3 Clause D-3.3 of the NBC.
2261.1.Windows
Windows shall be designed to avoid the glare which is a particular problem for people with impaired
vision. Large glass areas close to circulation spaces shall be marked a little below eyelevel with a
coloured band or frame. Normally, the sill shall not be more than 800 mm from the floor. Windows
shall be easy to open and close. A window schedule on the construction drawings shall give the
dimensions, type, such as casement, double-hung, and so forth, and the number of lights (panes of
glass) for each window in the structure.
2261.2.Ventilators
Windows and Ventilators are provided for the air circulation and daylight. But in case where window
is not advisable ventilators are provided. Generally glazed ventilators with wooden or metal frames
shall be provided in bathrooms, toilets, storerooms, dressing rooms etc.
2262. Hardware & Fasteners
Hardware accessories of approved quality made of metal or plastic that includes locks, hinges, door
pulls, cabinet hardware, window fastenings, door closers and checks, door holders, and automatic
exit devices shall be used. The fastening devices like nails, glues, screws, and bolts shall be of
approved quality.
2263. Interior Finishes
Finishes for floors, walls and partitions, and ceilings is an important and make sure that each
finishing job is properly done and gives a neat, attractive appearance Interior finishes are those

607
 materials installed to cover the surfaces of the floors, the walls, and the ceilings.
2263.1. Flooring and Floor Finishes
Floor materials found in shore establishment buildings and structures for various occupancies
include wood, concrete, terrazzo, and clay tile. Common floor coverings include asphalt, vinyl tile,
and linoleum. Common tiles in use are ceramic tiles, stone tiles, granite tile, marble and slate etc

2263.2. Laying of tiles

Clean the surface. Roughen the concrete under-bed to provide a good bond for the new setting
cement. Dampen the under-bed and place the setting mortar mixed in the proportion of 1 part cement
to 3 parts sand. Set the tile, tamping it to the level of the required finished floor. Fill the joints with
grout or pointing mortar, matching the color and finish of floor as closely as possible. Grout joints
3 mm or less in width with neat cement grout of the consistency of thick cream. Point joints one-
3mm to 6mm in width with pointing mortar, consisting of one-part cement to one-part screened
sand. Point joints wider than 6 mm with pointing mortar consisting of one-part cement to two-parts
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

screened sand. I n locations, such as galleys and food-preparation areas, where the floor is directly
exposed to the effects of corrosion agents,
acid-resistant joint material is used to fill the joints. The acid-resistant mortars areproprietary
products and shall be mixed according to the manufacturer‟s recommendations.

2263.3. Grinding and Polishing

When grinding of a floor/Tile is required, it shall be started after the surface has hardened sufficiently
to prevent dislodgement of particles or till the tile is fixed. The machines used shall be of an approved
type. The floor is kept wet during the grinding process, and the cuttings are removed by squeegee
and flushing with water. After the surface is ground, air holes, pits, and other blemishes are filled
with a thin grout. This grout is spread over the floor and worked into the pits with a straightedge and
rubbed into the floor with the grinding machine. When the filings have hardened a final grinding
removes the film and gives the finish a polish. All surplus material is then removed by washing
thoroughly. A rubbed finish is required when a uniform and attractive surface must be obtained. The
first rubbing shall be done with coarse carborandum stones curing must precede until final rubbing.
Finer carborundum stones are used for the final rubbing.
2264. Wall finishes
Plastering is the common type of wall finish for walls and partitions. Other types shall be drywall
and wall tile.
2264.1.Plastering
Plastering using cement mortar as per specification shall be done for both interior and exterior
walls.
2264.2. Drywall
Drywall construction is an alternative to plastering for walls and ceilings. Essentially, it consists of
panels of wallboard of various types with joints tight, true, and effectively concealed. All materials
used shall strictly adhere to the specifications. Ensure that the wallboard is applied accurately.
2264.3. Wall Tile
For wall finishes of baths, galleys, mess halls, hospital rooms, and other applications for which a
highly sanitary, easily cleaned, impervious wall finish is required, glazed ceramic tile, glazed
vitrified (waterproof) clay tile, and plastic tile shall be used. In the case of exterior walls, for better
appearance, suitable tiles shall be used. Ensure that the tile furnished conforms to the specifications
in kind, quality, size, colour, glaze, texture and grip.
2264.4. Stucco
This shall be done on walls, for acoustical effects in interiors and for an ornamental finish for exterior
walls. It has to be ensured that the masonry has an unglazed rough surface with joints struck flush
and adequate key to assure a good bond.
2264.5.Ceiling
Plastering is the common type of ceiling finish. Other types of finishes using tiles, boards etc. may

608
be used. In case of large halls and auditoriums, for acoustics, special acoustical tiles and acoustical
plaster of approved quality and specifications shall be used. Acoustical tiles are available in various
materials, such as wood, vegetable or mineral fibre, perforated metal, or cemented shavings in
different thicknesses, shapes, and dimensions and with varying textures, perforations, and joint
treatment.
2265. Painting
2265.1.Surface Preparation
The most essential part of any painting job is proper surface preparation and repair. Each type of
surface requires specific cleaning procedures. Before painting suitable priming coat shall be applied
as per specifications and maximum possible time gap shall be allowed before painting is done. Paint
will not adhere well, provide the protection necessary, or have the desired appearance unless the
surface is in proper condition for painting. Exterior surface preparation is especially important
because hostile environments can accelerate deterioration.
2265.1.1.Application of Paint

APPENDICES
Painting shall be done to different types of surfaces, such as metal, wood, and concrete/ masonry.
The common methods of applying paint are brushing, rolling, and spraying. The choice of method
is based on several factors, such as speed of application, environment, type and area of surface, type
of coating to be applied, desired appearance of finish, and training and experience of painters.
Brushing is ideal for small surfaces and odd shapes or for cutting in corners and edges. Rolling and
spraying are efficient on large, flat surfaces. Spraying can also be used for round or irregular shapes.
While spraying, adjacent areas not to be coated must be covered. Lacquer products, which dry
rapidly, shall be sprayed.It should be stored as per relevant claus of IS Code.

2265.2.Interior Painting

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Paint for interior walls and ceilings are usually flat wall paint. Interior enamel may be specified
where a semi gloss or gloss washable finish is desired on woodwork or walls. A standard undercoat
for primer under enamel, or use of the enamel with thinner may be permitted. Paint and enamel may
be obtained with color added, or color-in-oil may be added to the white paint on the job.
Specifications may require the sanding of interior woodwork or rubbing with steel wool. Priming of
plaster surfaces with a glue size may also be required. Make sure that finish coats are of uniform
gloss and color and are free from suction spots, highlights, brush marks, and other imperfections.

2265.3.White washing
The interior wall of ordinary buildings and all ceilings shall be whitewashed

2265.4.Colour washing
The interior wall of residential buildings and office buildings shall also be colour washed.

2265.5. Distemper washing

Interior walls of hospitals and other important buildings shall be given distemper coating. In the
case of prestigious buildings, plastic emulsion shall be provided.

2265.6. Exterior Painting

The exterior work includes steel structures, concrete masonry and woodwork. The exterior painting
of steel structures, concrete, masonry and woodwork shall be done with special care for protection
from environment.

2265.7. Metal and Steel Structures

Metal and Steel surfaces shall be cleaned by wire brushing, sandblasting, grit blasting, flame
cleaning, cleaning with solvent, or air blasting, as may be specified; All surface rust, dirt, grease,
oil, and loose scale shall be removed and if specified tight scale shall also be removed. Suitable
priming coat shall be applied after cleaning the surface. The paint is worked thoroughly into all
joints, cracks, and crevices. Each coat is allowed to dry thoroughly before the next coat is applied

609
 and the prescribed number of coats, each conforming to the requirements of the specifications, is
applied. Nonferrous metal is usually not painted.

2265.8. Masonry walls

Painting of concrete, stucco, masonry walls and similar surfaces is done primarily for decorative
purposes or for damp proofing walls. Paints usually are of white Portland cement base with color
but may be of an oil base. Make sure that the materials conform to the standard specifications. Also
determine whether surfaces are clean and free from dust, efflorescence, and other contamination and
whether they are adequately cured. When Portland cement paint is used, be certain that the surface
is thoroughly wetted. If oil-based paints are used, ensure that the surface is thoroughly cured,
pretreated as specified, and thoroughly dry. In the case of prestigious buildings, good quality anti
fungal paints shall be provided

2265.9. Woodwork
Make sure that surfaces are thoroughly dry and clean and are otherwise suitably prepared for painting
before permitting work to proceed. Ensure that the priming coat is intact and is of suitable
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

consistency to protect the wood, but not so tight that moisture in the wood is prevented from
evaporating. Make sure that the wood is smooth enough to assure the continuity and adherence of
the paint film; that holes and cracks are puttied or filled with wood filler; and that knots and pitch
streaks are sealed with shellac, varnish, or other sealer, as prescribed. Make certain that the paints
are of approved quality and color; and are applied by brushing, using high-quality brushes, until the
coat is smooth, even, free from brush marks, and of uniform thickness, texture, and color. Also be
sure that the paint is not brushed too thin to assure satisfactory hiding power; that each coat is
allowed to dry thoroughly to a firm film before permitting application of the next coat; and that the
specified number of coats is applied.

610
. List of relevant codes for painting

IS 144: 1950 Ready mixed paint, brushing, petrol resisting, air-drying, for
interior painting of tanks and container, red oxide (colour unspecified)
IS 145: 1950 Ready mixed paint, slushing, petrol resisting, air-drying forinterior
painting of tanks and containers, red oxide (colour unspecified)
IS 146: 1950 Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, petrol resisting,
stoving, or interior painting of tanks and containers, red oxide
IS 147: 1950 Specification for ready mixed paint, slushing, petrol resisting,
stoving, for interior painting of tanks and containers, red oxide
IS 1200: Part 13: Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works:
Part 13 Whitewashing,
1994 colour washing, distampering and painting of building surfaces

APPENDICES
IS 1200: Part 15: Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works:
Part 15 painting, 1987 polishing, varnishing etc
IS 1477: Part I: Code of Practice for Painting of Ferrous Metals in Buildings - Part I
: Pretreatment
2000
IS 1477: Part 2: Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings: Part2
Painting
1971

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

IS 2395: Part 2: Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces:
Part 2 Schedule
1994
IS 2524: Part 1: Code of practice for painting of nonferrous metals in buildings: Part
1 Pretreatment
1968
IS 2524: Part 2:Code of practice for painting of non-ferrous metals in buildings: Part
2 Painting
1968
IS 3140: 1965 Code of practice for painting asbestos cement buildingproducts
IS 9954: 1981 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting of Steel
Surfaces
IS 14177: 1994 Guidelines for painting system for hydraulic gates and hoists
IS 14428: 1997 Guidelines for painting of structures in aggressive chemical
environment

611
 2266.1. Lighting and Ventilation
Refer National Building Code 2016, Part8Sec
tions 1
2266.2.Electrical and Allied Installations
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 2

2266.3. Heating Ventilation and Air conditioning (HVAC)

Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 3 2266.4. Acoustics sound

Insulation and Noise control Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 4
2266.5. Lift and Escalators

Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 8 Section 5

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

2266.6.Stairs, passages
This shall be constructed as per the architectural and structural drawings.

2266.7.Water supply
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 1 clause 4

2266.8.Rain Water Harvesting

Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 1 clause 5.5.12

2266.9.Drainage and Sanitation

Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 1 clause 5

2266.10.Gas Supply
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 9 Section 2

2266.11.Fire fighting
Refer National Building Code 2005 Part 4 2266.12.
Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures Refer National Building Code 2005
Part 10 Section 2. Latest codes shall be followed

2267. Completion Certificate

After the construction is complete in all respects, including provision of all service
connections, the site must be returned to the parent department. The Assistant Engineer shall
submit the completion certificate along with as built drawings to the higher officers for
approval. The final drawing must also include layouts of water supply and drainage system.
Detailed drawings of electric connections, electronic and communications systems shall be
handed over by the respective wings of PWD.

612
 APPENDIX 2200A
Inspection Note ( )
Inspection Notes of ............
Date of Inspection .................. Estimate amount ..................
Name of work ...................... Date of contract ..................
Name of contractor ................. Date of completion as per agreement…………..

1. What is the stage of progress at present

2. Is the general progress of work satisfactory/unsatisfactory/poor

3. Are there any special difficulties affecting the progress of the work

APPENDICES
4. Is the supply of departmental materials satisfactory

5 Are there any designs, working drawings or special instructions required fromthe
Department which might hold up progress. If so what action has been taken

6 Remarks on the quality of work done so far

7. Do you find any need for deviation from sanctioned estimate of any particular item. If so
briefly indicate measures of the nature of deviation

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

8. Any special instructions to subordinate officers

.General remarks:

613
 Appendix 2200B
Material Collection Repor
Material Collection/ Initial LevelReportNoDate ofReporting
NameofWork Name ofSection
Name of Subdivision
If part supply reference to earlier report and clearance
Estimated PAC Agreed PAC
Name of Contractor Agreement no. and date Tender Excess
Date of handing over of Site Scheduled date of Completion

Sl Descriptio Name of Quantity Quantity Reference to Date of Date of Quantity Upto Remar ks
no. n of item / Locality, Km as per measured M.book/ measurem check as per date
supplied and chainage agreemen Field Book ent measure check quanti
ofroad t me nt measurem ty
ent
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

(M3) (M3) No Page (M3) (M3)

Submitted to the Quality Cell or DIQC

Finance (Inspection Wing –Technical)Department Signature
of Assistant Executive Engineer with date
Srinagar/Jammu

Copy submitted to: Executive

Engineer,PWD Superintending Engineer,
PWD

614
APPENDIX 2200C
MACHINERY FOR EXCAVATION OF DIFFERENT OPERATION OF ROAD
CONSTRUCTION ( )
Sl. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks
No.
A Compaction of Embankment and Sub-grade
A.1 Granular and dry cohesive i 8-10 Ton three smooth
soil wheeled roller
ii 80-100 kN vibratory
compactor
iii Pneumatic tyred roller Load per wheel 20 kN
A.2 Uniformly graded soil i 8-10 Ton three smooth
wheeled roller

APPENDICES
ii Pneumatic tyred roller Load per wheel 15 kN
iii 8-10 Ton vibratory roller
A.3 Cohesive soil Sheep foot roller
A.4 Cohesionless soil Vibratory roller
B Earth Moving Operations
B.1 Clearing and grubbing i Dozer
clearing light scrub,
grass, etc.
ii Motor Grader Can easily be used if scrub is very

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

light
B.2 Clearing debris and rubble i Dozer
ii Front end loader smaller size
iii Tractor with heavy duty For clearance of large objects
B.3 Excavatio earth moveme and
n, nt
embankm
ent
B.3.1 Light and medium soils i Dozer Best unit for hauls of under 90m
requiring preliminary Also, for hill cuts and cuts down
loosening vertical faces for roads
ii Scraper tractor towed/ Tractor towed scraper for hauls for
motorised 60m to 300m. Motorised scraper
for hauls of 300m and above
iii Excavator and dumper Best unit for shallow road
embankments across
generally flat terrains
iv Front end loader and tipping
truck
B.3.2 Heavy soils i Dozer, Crawler/ Dozer
wheeled
ii Towed scraper with pusher/
Motorised scraper
with pusher, proceeded by
rooter
iii Motor grader proceeded by Preliminary rooting is essential
tractortowed from motor graders
rooter

615
 Sl. No. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks
B.4 Spreading : Distributing fill in i Scraper, tractor towed Best machine for
layers of uniform thickness ormotorised hauling and spreading
thin layers of material
ii MotorGrader Used for spreading and
withdrawing
materialsof
workable nature
iii TippingTrucks Can spread their loads
to a limited extent
iv CrawlerDozer Best machine for initial
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

spreading of workable
material
B.5 Cambering i MotorGrader Best machine for
providing final camber
ii CrawlerDozer Can provide camber
during initial
excavation for road
formation
iii Scraper, tractor towed Can provide camber
ormotorized during initial
excavation for road
formation
B.6 Scarifying and shaping earth roads Grader with scarifier Best machine for
loosening for shaping
top layer of
earth
B.7 Maintenance of earth haul roads i Motor grader/ wheelcrawler Best machine for this
work
ii Wheel / Crawlerdozer Should be used only if
grader not available
B.8 Watering i
Truckortrailermountedwatertank
erwitha
sprinkler and water pump
C Compaction
C.1 Soil Stabilisation i 8-10 ton three smooth
wheeledroller
ii Vibratingroller
C.2 Granular base/ Sub Base i 8-10 ton three smooth
wheeledroller
ii Vibratingroller
C.3 Macadam and other coarse i 8-10 ton three smooth
aggregate base wheeledroller
Courses
ii Steel wheeled Vibratoryroller
C.4 Mix-in-place Asphalt base course i 8-10 ton three smooth
wheeledroller

616
 ii Vibratory compactor tandem8-
10ton
iii Pneumatic Tyreroller
C.5 Plant-mix base leveling or surface i 8-10 ton three smooth For break-down rolling
courses wheeledroller
ii Steel wheeled tandemroller For break-down rolling
iii Pneumatic tyred For intermediate rolling
roller(Selfpropelled)
iv TandomRoller For intermediate rolling
v Rubber tyred roller For final rolling

APPENDICES
Sl. No. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks
D Bituminous Pavement
D.1 Surface dressing i Bitumen For uniform application of binder
pressure distributor,
if bulkbitumen
supply is available
ii For even spreading of chips to correct thickness
Chipspread
er
D.2 Bituminous grouting i Bitumen

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

(Penetration machine) boilers withsprayers
Semi grout and Full
Grout
ii Bitumen
pressure distributor
if bitumenis
supplied, in bulk.
D.3 Seal coat Mini hot mix plant For laying manually
(6-10 ton/hr
capacity)
D.4 Premix carpet i 20-30 and If there is sufficient work load
40-60 tons/ hr hot
mixplant
ii Paver finisher for mechanical spreading and tipping
truck for haulage would be a good combination.
Paverfin
isher
iii
TippingTru
ck
iv 8-10 ton
three smooth
wheeledroller
v Rubber
tyred roller
D.5 Hot mix BM/AC i
Mechanical
broom

617
 ii Bitumen For tack coat
boilers withsprayers
iii Bitumen
pressuredistributors
iv Hot mix Batch or continuous type
plant 40-060 ton or
more/hr
v Electronic To match the capacity of hot
paver finisher mix plant
withsensor
vi 6-8 nos depending on the distance from the plant
TippingTru
cks
vii Front For cold feed loading
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

endloaders
viii Generators if For electrical hot mix plants
required
ix 8-10 ton
three smooth
wheeledroller
x Vibratory
tandemroller
xi Rubber
tyred roller
E Sub base/ base course
E.1 Soil Stabilisation i SoilStabiliser
ii Rotavater
iii Vibratory roadroller
iv 8-10 ton three
smooth wheeledroller
v Water Sprinkler
E.2 Water Bound Macadam i Aggregatespreader
(WBM)
ii Water Sprinkler

618
Sl. Type of Soil Choice of Roller/Plant Remarks
No.
iii 8-10 ton three smooth
wheeledroller
iv TippingTrucks
E.3 Wet Mix i Multi-stage stone
Macadam crushingplant
(WMM)
ii Concretemixer Suitable for small quantity of works
iii Wet Mixplant Plant should have tin shaft pug mill

APPENDICES
iv Paver Finisher It has better control of thickness and profile
v TippingTrucks
vi 8-10 ton three smooth
wheeledroller
vii Vibratory roadroller
E.4 Granular Sub base i MotorGrader
(GSB)
ii TippingTrucks
iii 10 ton three smooth
wheeledroller

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

iv Vibratory roadroller
v Water Sprinkler
F Concrete
Pavements
F.1 Dry Lean i Multi Stage Stone
Concrete (DLC) crushingPlant
ii Concrete Batching/
MixPlant
iii Mixed FormPaver
iv TransitMixer
v Compactor
F.2 Paving Quality i Multi Stage Stone
Concrete (PQC) crushingPlant
ii Concrete Batching/
MixPlant
iii Fixed Form/ Slip Form
Paverfinisher
iv Concrete Cutter (Saw
Cuttingmachine)
v Texturingmachine
vi Curingmachine
vii ConcretePlacer
viii Transit Mixer
ix Dowel barInserter

619
 APPENDIX 2200D
Tentative Output of Road Machinery ( )
Machine/ Tool Output
1 Scraper (Motorised)towed 160 cum/day
2 Dozer 200 cum/day
3 MotorGrader 600 cum/day
4 Excavator 1 m3capacity 400 cum/day
5 Three smooth wheeled roadroller
5.1 Earth work 450 cum/day
5.2 Moorum/Gravel 450 cum/day
5.3 Pavement
5.3.1 WBM Stone basecourse 45 cum/day
5.3.2 WBM/ WMM wearingcourse 40 cum/day
5.3.3 DBM 40 cum/day
5.4 Surface Dressing
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

5.4.1 FirstCoat 2500 Sqm/ day

5.4.2 SecondCoat 3500 Sqm/ day
5.5 Premix Carpet
5.5.1 25 mmThick 2000 Sqm/ day
5.5.2 20 mmThick 2000 Sqm/ day
6 Earthwork compaction by sheep foot roadroller 600 cum/day
7 VibratoryRoadRollerearth-work(Dependsonlayerthicknessandtype) 600 cum/day
8 OtherMachinery
8.1 Mini-Hot Mix Plant 6-10 TPH 8 Ton/Hr
8.2 Hot Mix Plant 40-60 TPH 50 Ton/Hr
8.3 Paver Finisher 75-160 TPH 75 Ton/Hr
8.4 Bitumen Boiler 2000 Litr/hr
8.5 Water Tankers 10,000 litres
8.6 Bitumen Pressure Distributors 10,000 litres
8.7 Wet Mix Macadam Plant 60 TPH 50 Ton/Hr
8.8 Stone crusher less than 100 ton/ hr Depends on requirement
8.9 Multistage Stone crusher more than 100ton/hr Depends on requirement
8.10 Concrete Batch mixing Plant upto 50 cum/Hr 40 cum/hr
8.11 Concrete Batching Mix more than 50 cum/Hr Depends on requirement
9 Haulage bytrucks/Tippers
9.1 When lead = 2 km 8 Trips per day
9.2 When lead = 8 km 6 Trips per day
9.3 When Lead = 16 km 5 trips per day
9.4 When lead = 30 km 4 trips per day

620
APPENDIX 2200E
Details to be submitted for Approval from Engineer to start work (As per para 2218.1)
(i) Source and location of all materials;
(ii) Proportions of all materials expressed as follows where each is applicable: (a) Binder type, as
percentage by weight of total mixture;
(b) Coarse aggregate/Fine aggregate/Mineral filler as percentage by weight of total aggregate including
mineral filler;
(iii) A single definite percentage passing each sieve for the mixed aggregate;
(iv)The individual gradings of the individual aggregate fractions, and the proportion of each in the
combined grading.
(v) Physical properties of the mix detailed in the relevant sections as obtained by theContractor;
(vi) Where the mixer is a batch mixer, the individual weights of each type of aggregate, and binder per
batch,
(vii) Test results of physical characteristics of aggregates to be used;

APPENDICES
(viii) Mixing temperature and compacting temperature.

APPENDIX 2200F
PROFORMA OF PROGRESS OF WELL STEINING AND SINKING ( 2237.2)

Note: Give the number plan of the wells on the first page.
*Heading of columns shall be as given below:
1. Date
2. Time of observation
3. Well No.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

4. Work done during 24 hours preceding time of observations steininglsinking
5. Steining works:
(i) R.L. at the top of well and the time of observation. (ii) R.L. at top of well at the time of last
observation (iii) Steining done since last observations (i) minus (ii)
(iv) Gauge upto which steining done todate including height of curbs
(v) R.L. of bottom of curb (i)-(iv) (vi) R.L. of L.W.L. as per contract.
6. Total sinking done up-to-date:
7. Total sinking done as per last observation
8. Sinking done since last observation (6)-(7)
9. Sump observation:
(i) Depth of bottom of sump below top of well
(ii) Magnitude of sump 9(i) - 5(iv)
10. Strata met with at the time of observation
11. Any obstacle met since last observation
12. Any plastering done since last observation
13. Any sand blowing took place since last observation.
14. Kentledge observations:
(i) Extra kentledge over the well (ii) Eccentricity along X - axis (iii) Eccentricity along Y-axis
(iv) Approximate total quantity of dredged materials on last observation (v) Approximate quantity of
dredged materials at the time of observation (vi) Approximate quantity of dredged materials since last
observation
15. Is any special method of sinking being employed at the time of observation?
16. If so, give brief description in Remarks column Remarks.
17. Signature of official taking the observation
18. Signature of Assistant Engineer in token of check.
19. Signature of Executive Engineer/Superintending Engineer in token of having seen the register.

621
 APPENDIX 2200G
PROFORMA FOR RECORDING TILTS AND SHIFTS OF WELLS
Note: Give the numbering plan of the wells on the first page.
*Heading of columns shall be as given below:
1. Date
2. Time of observation
3. Well No.
4. Total steining done in the well up-to-date (vide column 5(iv) of proforma of progress ofsinking)
5. Total sinking done up-to-date (vide column 6 of proforma of progress of sinking).
6. Reduced levels at the gauge marks on the tilted plane: (i) Along X axis (traffic axis)
Side
(say north side) (say south side)
(ii) Along Y axis (perpendicular to traffic axis) On downstream side On upstream side
7. Difference in levels taken on the tilted plane: (i) Along X-axis.
(ii) Along Y-axis
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

8. Extent of tilt:
(i) Along X-axis
(ii) Along Y-axis
9. Shifts:
(i) Along X-axis
(ii) Along Y-axis
10. Action being taken in case tilt has exceeded 1/80 and shift 150 mm
11. Remarks.
12. Signature of the official taking observation
13. Signature of Assistant Engineer in token of check
14. Signature of Executive Engineer/Superintending Engineer in token of having seen the register
APPENDIX 2200H
STATEMENT SHOWING PARTICULARS OF DIFFERENT METHODS ADOPTED AND
PHENOMENON ENCOUNTERED DURING WELL SINKING ON DIFFERENT WELLS (As per
para 2337.2)

*Heading of column shall be as given below:

1. Date
2. Total steining uptodate
3. Total sinking uptodate
4. Working progress on steining or sinking
5. Total weight available for sinking:
(i) Weight of well for portion below water level allowing for buoyancy
(ii) Weight of well above water level
(iii) Kentledge weight
6. Total
7. Eccentricity of kentledge: (i) Along X-axis
(ii) Along Y-axis
8. Hours of working for which sinking was done
9. Quantity of Material taken out from well Pocket: (i) During last 24 hours
(ii) Per running metre of sinking of well done in 24 hours
10. Details of explosive if used and name of person in whose presence it was used.
11. Whether dewatering was done during sinking and if so how much below river waterlevel

12. Whether dewatering was done after bottom plugging and if so how much below river water
level
13. Rate of rise of water inside the well in dewatering testRemarks
14. Signature of person recording the information

622
 PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES
623
 Appendix 2600A
Type of distress, Symptoms, Probable causes and possible types of treatment ( )
Sl Type of Symptoms Probable causes Possible types of
no distress treatment
A Surface
defects
1 Fatty surface Collection of binder on the Excessive binder in premix, spray or tackSand blinding; open-graded
surface coat, loss of cover to aggregates;premix;
excessively heavy axle loads liquid seal coat; burning of
excess binder; removal of
affected area
2 Smooth Slippery Polishing of aggregates under traffic, Resurfacing with surface
surface excessive binder dressing or
premix carpet
3 Streaking Presence of alternate lean and Non-uniform application of bitumen or Application of a new
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

heavy lines at a low surface

of bitumen temperature
4 Hungry Loss of aggregates or presence Use of less bitumen or absorptive Slurry seal or Fog seal
surface of fine aggregates
cracks
B Cracks
1 Hairline Short and fine cracks at close Insufficient bitumen, excessive filler or The treatment will depend
cracks intervals on improper on whether pavement is
the surface compaction structurally sound, or
2 Alligator Interconnected cracks forming Weak pavement, unstable conditions of unsound. Where the
cracks a series of small blocks subgrade or pavement is structurally
lower layers, excessive over loads or sound, the cracks should be
brittleness of binder filled with a low viscosity
3. Longitudinal Crack on a straight line along Poor drainage, shoulder settlement, weakbinder or a slurry seal or fog
cracks the road joint between adjoining spreads ofseal depending upon the
pavement layers or width of cracks Unsound
differential frost heave cracked
4. Edge crack Crack near and parallel to Lack of support from shoulder, poor pavements will need
pavement edge drainage, frost strengthening or
heave or inadequate pavement width rehabilitation treatment
5. Shrinkage Cracks in transverse direction orShrinkage of bituminous layer with age
cracks interconnected cracks forming a
series of
large blocks
6. Reflection Sympathetic cracks over joints Due to joints and cracks in the
cracks and cracks pavement layer
in the pavement underneath underneath
C. Deformation
1. Slippage Formation of crescent-shapedUsual thrust of wheel in a direction, lackRemoval of the surface layer
cracks pointing in the directionor failure of bond between surface andin the affected area and
of the thrust of lower pavement courses replacement with
wheels fresh material
2. Rutting Longitudinal depression in the Heavy channelised traffic, inadequate Filling the depressions with
wheel compaction of premix
tracks pavement layers, poor stability of material
pavement material,

624
 or heavy bullock cart traffic
2. Corrugations Formation of spots regularLack of stability in mix, oscillations setScarification and relaying of
undulations up by vehicles, springs, or faulty layingsurfacings, of cutting of high
of surface course spots
and filling of low spots
3. Shoving Localised bulging of pavement Unstable mix, lack of bond betweenRemoving the material to
surface along the crescentlayers, or stop type movements and thosefirm base and relaying a
shaped cracks involving negotiation of stable mix
curves and gradients
4. Shallow Localised shallow depressions Presence of inadequately compactedFilling with premix
depressions pockets materials

APPENDICES
5. Settlement Large deformation of pavement Poor compaction of fills poor drainage,Where fill is weak, the
and upheaval inadequate pavement or frost heave defective fill should be
excavated and re-done.
Where inadequate pavement
is the
cause, the pavement should
be strengthened.
D Disintegratio
n
1 Stripping Separation of bitumen fromUse of hydrophilic aggregate, inadequateSpreading and compacting
aggregate in the presence ofmix composition, continuous contactheated sand over the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

moisture with water, poor bond between binderaffected area in the
and aggregate, poor compaction, etc. caseofsurfacedressing;replac
ement with fresh bituminous
mix with added anti-
stripping agent inother
cases
2 Loss ofRough surface with loss ofAgeing and hardening of binder,Application of liquid seal,
Aggregate aggregate in some portions stripping, poor bond between binder andfog seal or slurry seal
aggregate, insufficient binder, depending on the extent
brittleness of binder, etc. of damage.
3 Ravelling Failure of binder to hold thePoor compaction, poor bond betweenApplication of cutback
aggregate binder and or aggregate, insufficientcovered with
shown up by pock marks orbinder, brittleness of binder, etc coarse sand or slurry seal or
eroded areas on the surface a premix renewal coat
4 Pothole Appearance of bowl-shapedIngress of water into the pavement, lackFilling potholes with premix
holes usual1y after rain of bond between the surfacing and WBMmaterial or penetration
base, insufficient bitumen content, etc patching
5 Edge- Irregular breakage of pavement Water infiltration, poor lateral supportCutting the affected area to
breaking edges from shoulders inadequate strength ofregular sections and re-
pavement edges, etc building with simultaneous
attention paid to the
proper construction of
shoulders

625
 Appendix 2600B Maintenance criteria (2601.1)
Features Criteria Action Priority
A Features concerned with safety
of
Traffic
A1 Major breaches in the road way Any type of breach which Steps to be taken as Urgent
endangers safety of per clause 14.7 of
traffic and causes obstructions MoRTH
to flow of traffic Handbook
A2 Minor cuts or blockades Cuts or blockades which do Get blockades Urgent
not completely obstruct traffic removed and get the
but endanger safety of traffic cuts repaired
A.3 Branches of trees at height less Any kind Get them cut in Special
than 4.5 m over the roadway order of lower ones attention
first
B. Carriageway and crust conditions
B-1 Cracking not accompanied by a) Cracking in local areas a) Local sealing or Routine
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

rutting equal to or less than 25 per filling of the .cracks

cent of the total area preferably
with slurry seal or
fog seal or as per
Ministry's
Specifications
b) Binder @ 1.5
kglm2 of bitumen
emulsion or 1
kglm2 of cut -back
or local sealing
b) Cracking in large areas c) Surface Dripping Special
exceeding 25 per cent as per Ministry's attention
of the total area specifications
B-2 Stripping a)Inlocalareasnotexceeding25p Apply local sealing Routine
ercentsealing
of the total area
b) In long areas exceeding 25 Apply surface Special
per cent of the total dressing use attention
area antistripping
compounds
B.3 Bleeding a) In local areas not exceeding Spread and roll over Routine
25 per cent of the 6 mm size
total area aggregate, heated
to60°C
b) In local areas exceeding 25 Apply surface Special
per cent of total dressing attention
area
B-4 Rutting a) Less than 50 mm Apply tack coat @ Routine
accompanied by cracking 0.5 kglm2 and fill
bituminous,
mixusingarakeandle

626
 avinganexcessthick
nessof about one-
third the depth of
rut. Compacttill
surfaceislevelledan
dlocalsealingofcrac
ks.
b)More than 50 mm With surface Work of
accompanied by cracking dressing over original
cracks, overlay nature
required
B-5 Potholes Potholes, as soon as they occur required Local Special
restoration by attention

APPENDICES
patching preferable
B-6 Reflection cracks a) Widely spaced cracks Slurry for fog seal Recurrent
b) Closely spaced Apply surface Special
dressing use of attention
geotextiles

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

627
 Features Criteria Action Priority
B-7 Edge subsidence Any extent Patch road edge and repair Recurrent
and rutting shoulder
B-8 Defective camber Any extent Check and correct by Special attention
reconstructing to proper
camber profile
B-9 Undulations Any extent Investigate the cause and rectify Special attention
B-10 Loss of material Any extent Investigate the cause and rectify Special attention
from unpaved
road
C Shoulders-side-
drains
C-I Deformation or Any extent Fill and compact and bring its Routine
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

scour of shoulders surface to desired

camber
C-2 Silting of side- Any extent Clean out the drains Routine
drains
C-3 Damage or scouring Any extent Reconstruct to adequate shape Special attention
of drain and size
D. C.D. Works
D-1 Causeways
a) Potholes in Any extent Repair by filling Special attention
paved. surface
b) Erosion at Any extent Repair Special attention
inlet/outlet
c) Guide posts/ Any Repairs/ Replace Special attention
flood guage
missing
D -2 Culverts
a) Silting Any Desilting Special attention
b) Erosion at Any extent Repairs Special attention
inlet/outlet
c) Settlement cracks Any Repairs Special attention
E. Other Works
E-l Road furniture and Any extent Clean and repair/replace Routine
warning dirty
or corroded or
damaged missing
E-2 Missing road signs Any Fix new one Special attention

628
 Appendix 2600J
Register of avenue trees As on.
Division…………………………. Subdivision………………………
Section…………………………...
Sl. No. Name of Proceeding in the Species Girth at 1 metre Whether Revenue Remarks
of trees road direction of above ground level yielding ornot
Kilometre Kilometerage
Left Right
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Note: - 1. Numbering should be done serially in every road in each kilometer in the direction of
increasing kilometerage first on the left side and then on the right side.
2. The number should be written or stenciled in black with figures 7 ½ cm. height after painting the
background in white.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Appendix 2600K
ROAD CUTTING AND RESTORATION PROTOCOL (As per Para 2607)

1.1 A road-opening permit is required for any digging, excavation or construction of any kind within a
public right of way or that has an effect on the right of way. The road excavations by any person or authority
or agency and its reinstatements there after shall strictly follow thisProtocol.
1.2 A separate permit shall be required for each and every road opening. Excavation for appurtenances
such as manholes, small head walls, cutoff walls, small vaults, valve boxes, catch basins, wall footings, etc.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

shall be deemed to be in the category of trench excavations.
1.3 Planting of poles for electric, telegraph, telephone, and any other cable carrying posts shall be in
compliance with this protocol.
1.4 It shall be unlawful for any person or authority or agency intending to construct, place, maintain or
carry any cable, wire, pipe, drain, sewer, channel of any kind through, across, along, under, in or over any
PWD road to make an excavation in or disturb the surface of any PWD road without a permit in writing
from the Road/ Highway Authority.
2 Definitions – In this protocol, unless the context otherwise requires,-
2.1 Road: The stretch where cutting and restoration has to be done.
2.2 Applicant: The department or individual who applies for the permit
2.3 Permittee : The Individual/ Department in whose name the permit is issued.
2.4 Contractor: The person who executes the work for the Permittee
3 General Regulations
3.1 Permits will be granted by the Highway Authority for all road openings from 1st November to 28th
February every year at which time all excavation will be closed and patched, other than emergencies such
as leakage of sewer lines, water lines, gas lines, disconnection of electric and telephone cables. The issuance
of permits should be closed on 1st March every year
3.2 No road opening permit will be issued for a road that has been resurfaced within the past (three) 3
years, except in the case of an emergency. Request for exemption of this section must be made in writing
to the Highway Authority and exemptions are granted only for new utility connections for the newly
constructed buildings incase no such sources are available.
3.3 The formal application in prescribed format signed by any person or duly authorized officer of the
authority or agency intending to construct utility, should be submitted to Highway Authority
3.4 Such requisition should be accompanied by proper alignment maps drawn to scale and the section of
the trenches to be cut, the length of cuttings, the road crossings, and masonry structures such as manholes
etc. should be clearly marked therein.
3.5 The applicant shall specify on the application the approximate date, the excavation is to be made and
submit at least two months before the works intends to begin. Permits shall be issued 72 (seventy- two)
hours before the work begins. The work shall not be started without 24 hours notice to the Assistant
Engineer of the Department in charge of the Road.
3.6 In low intensity traffic areas all work is to be done between the hours of 8:00 am and 5.00 pm on
week days.
629
3.7 In high intensity traffic areas, wherever possible work shall be done between the hours of 6:00 am
and 3.00 pm on Saturday, Sunday or holidays.
3.8 However, openings are not permitted on Saturdays, Sundays or Holidays, that disrupts essential
services, such as a water, gas or sewer system. These may be done at night time as per the discretion of the
Highway Authority.
3.9 A permit to close the road to traffic will only be issued in the most unusual circumstances. Usually
part of the road must be kept open to traffic at all times as specified in clause6.1.3
3.10 Applicant/PWD is responsible for notifying any other local utilities/ public, which/ who may be
affected namely J&K Water Authority, BSNL and other communication networks, J&K Power
development Corperation (JKPDC) and public services like transport and the Public media.
3.11 On all matters pertaining to the interpretation of these regulations or to the quantity or qualityof
materials or workmanship called for by these regulations, the decision of the Road/Highway
Authority shall be final and binding.

APPENDICES
4 Issuance of Permit
4.1 The Road authority should verify the proposal, conduct a joint inspection if necessary, and prepare a
detailed estimate for restoration works as per the standards. The work should not include any uprooting
of trees.
4.2 The Highway Authority should direct the utilities to make use of any available ducts or channels
provided for this purpose, especially along bridges and across roads orjunctions.
4.3 Validity of permit
4.3.1 Permit shall be in effect for thirty (30) days from date of issue, however any opening should not
be left unfilled for a period exceeding 48 hours. In case the work needs more than 30 days, it shall be at the

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

discretion of Highway Authority.
4.3.2 The maximum length of open trench shall not exceed 200 m in the aggregate at any one location.
Any excavated area shall be considered open trench until all pavement replacement has been done and
compacted to specification. There shall be no open trenches left in the public right of way overnight.
Trenches shall be backfilled or plated with steel plates and necessary warning devices shall be placed by
the contractor to alert motorists of road conditions.
4.3.3 The holder of this permit or any of his designees or other persons, shall indemnify and save
harmless against all claims for damages for injuries to persons or property, and against all costs, suits,
expenses and losses occurred by anyone or anything related to the the conditions in this road opening
permit..
4.3.4 On getting the sanction the utility organization shall execute a memorandum of understanding
with the Highway Authority and follow the guidelines stipulated in GO(Rt)No.684/09/PWD dated
27.5.2009. (given in Appendix 2800N)
5 Contract Requirements
5.1.1 Contractor must provide evidence that he is qualified to do the work to the permittingauthority.
Past experience and necessary tools and plants shall be deemed sufficient. He also has to execute an
agreement with the Highway authority to abide by the specifications for trenching , backfilling and
temporary pavement.
5.1.2 All required traffic warning devices and signs, flagmen, lights, barricades, etc. will be furnished
by the contractor and approved by the Highway Authority and/or his designee, in compliance with
IRC SP 55, at no cost to the department.
5.1.3 All work will be performed in a professional manner that does not impede the flow of traffic. A
Police patrol will be used in high traffic areas, as designated by the Highway Authority and Police, at no
cost to the department. All emergency departments (Fire force Ambulance services, Police) must be notified
by the contractor through the permittee of any work in a public way, which impede the smooth passage of
emergency vehicles.
5.2 The contactor shall be entirely responsible for safeguarding and maintaining all conflicting utilities.
This includes overhead wires and cables and their supporting poles whether they are inside or outside the
open trench.
5.3 During trenching operations, the existing masonry structures and buildings on the roads, culverts,
bridges, retaining walls and drains should not be tampered with. The contractor shall take all

630
 necessary precautions and shall be liable for any damage caused by the construction.
5.4 The contractor will be required to repair the permanent trench for a period of one(1) year.
5.5 The contractor will be responsible for all miscellaneous expenses. For no reason shall the
Department be responsible for any costs incurred from any of the conditions of the road opening permit,
including but not limited to, any costs related to any litigation related to thispermit.

6 Procedure for Cuts

6.1 Excavations in the traveled way shall be cut in a straight line in accepted manner as approved bythe
Highway Authority and/or his designee that will cut full depth of thepavement.
6.1.1 Where trenches lie within Cement concrete section of streets, alleys driveways, sidewalks etc,
such concrete shall be saw cut to neat vertical, true lines or in a method that the adjoining surface hall not
be damaged.
6.1.2 Asphalt shall be cut in neat straight lines by means of an asphalt cutting wheel, milling machine or
cutting saw. The excavation, manually or mechanically shall be between these lines and the sides shall be
truly vertical.
6.1.3 If the excavation extends the full width of the road, only one-half of the road shall be opened, and
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

this is to be properly backfilled before the other half is opened, so as to permit the free flow of traffic. In
some cases it may be possible to open on each side of the road and jack or drive a pipe from one opening
to the other. This should be done whenever possible.
6.1.4 Tunneling or mechanical methods of boring under the road for service installations may be
permitted only on written approval of the Highway Authority, or his representatives.
6.1.5 Excavated material suitable for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner and unsuitable
/ excess mteral shall be disposed off suitably by the contractor. Excavated material will only be placed on
the traveled way when it will not impede the flow of traffic.
7 Pipe/ cable laying:
7.1 The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each
section of the pipe. Foundation and bedding for these underground facilities shall be native material, or
sand or quarry dust, which conforms to the grading requirement of MoRTH for fineaggregate.
7.2 When backfill material consists of aggregate base course, crushed stone, or other material containing
stones, only sand/ Quarry dust will be used for foundation and bedding. In case of PVC and other plastic
type pipes the bedding shall invariably be of sand. The foundation depth below the pipe shall be 15cms and
bedding depth shall be 30cms above the top of the facility.
7.3 Alternately a concrete rectangular open section of maximum width 45 cm could be used as bed and
pipes/ cables placed over it. It shall be continuous true to lines and levels so as to form a channel. This
shall then be sand filled and over it backfilling done. Semi circular concrete sections may also be usedto
cover these pipes before sand filling. Each cast block shall be about 60cms length.

30 cm

7.4 If any utilities are exposed during excavation, i.e. Sewer, Water, Electric, etc., the appropriate
department will be notified for the opportunity for an inspection prior to backfilling. In any case an
inspection by the highway authority is mandatory.
8 Procedure for Backfilling
8.1 Backfilling will be done with excavated material unless otherwise directed by the Highway
Authority. It shall be done, with flowable fill or mechanically compacted materials in 15cms lifts or jetted
with water to within 5cms of pavement grade.
8.2 When material is placed on the traveled way, suitable arrangement shall be in place to sweep and
keep the pavement clean and free of dust after backfilling each day.
8.3 Acceptable backfill material shall conform to clause 305 of MORTH. This does not preclude theuse
of excavated material which may meet these specifications. The Department reserves the right to test any
and all backfill material prior to its use.

631
8.4 Backfill shall be deposited in layers not to exceed 20 cm in depth before compaction. Equipment to
be used for compaction may include vibrating tampers of the mechanical or pneumatic type, impact type
rammers or trench rollers or any other type of equipment, which will produce therequired

degree of compaction. Rolling and compaction shall be done in the longitudinal direction of the trench.
8.5 If the moisture content of the soil is outside of the limits required for achieving 95 percent of
maximum compaction the the addition of water or the use of drier soil so that the required degree of
compaction will be achieved. Water consolidation by jetting of these layers shall be resorted towithout
causing any flooding, when compaction methods are not possible.
8.6 Exceptional cases In case of excavation greater than 1.5m, the in situ densities shall be taken and
compaction done to achieve the same while backfilling upto 1.5 m depth. Top 1.5 m shall be done as per
above specifications.

APPENDICES
8.7 Temporary Pavement
8.7.1 The last 10 cm shall be a temporary bituminous/ concrete patch in case of trenches across or on
the pavement. If pavement restoration is not to be made immediately, backfill shall be carried to the
finished grade of the pavement, the final 10cm to consist of shoulder stone or approvedequal.
8.7.2 In case of trenches for domestic/ residential use, the top 10cm shall be of concrete afterrefilling
and consolidation as specified earlier.
8.8 Driveways, sidewalks, street intersections, shoulders, lawns, shrubs, trees, signs and pavement
markings shall be restored to conditions prior to construction, at no extra cost. No tree limbs, or brushwill
be cut without prior approval of the Highway Authority.
8.9 Reference markers

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

8.9.1 Reference markers shall be placed at every kilometer along the extreme side of the road
indicating the type of utility, its horizontal distance from reference marker and depth from the pavement
surface. Any deviations shall also be referenced.
8.9.2 The typical specification for such markers shall be as follows

35 cm

25 cm

25 cm
(Not to scale)

632
 8.10 At this stage the road shall be inspected by the highway authority and a certificate issued to the
effect that the backfilling has been done as per specifications. Based on thiscertificate, the permittee may
accord sanction for final payment.
9 Final Pavement
9.1 After completion of the work covered by this permit, there will be a surface overlay of bituminous
concrete in case of pavements and shoulder restoration in case of side trenches..
9.2 The temporary bituminous patch as specified above is to be maintained for a minimum of thirty (30)
days. Then the temporary patch shall be removed and a permanent patch shall be applied in
accordance with MoRTH Specification for patch working.
9.2.1 In case of trenches along the road allow sub-grade to dry sufficiently, scarify, digout up to 30cm
on each side of the original cut, so that the patch is placed on undisturbed material when the permanent
patch is applied. Wherever necessary, an additional base course has to be provided.
9.2.2 In case of trenches across roads, bituminous concrete laid to full width of the traveled way, and 3
meters both sides of the excavation at a minimum depth of 2-4 cm or at the discretion of the Highway
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

authority. Any surface undulation shall be rectified prior to this work.

10 Emergencies In case of emergency repairs, localized in a point, telephonic intimation is a must.
For
this, the permit fee and application along with restoration fee has to be submitted within the next 2
working days.
11 Quality Checking
11.1 Quality checks shall be performed at mainly four stages by the highway authority or hisdesignee
11.1.1 The cutting process- the cut should be in straight lines and true toplumb.
11.1.2 Bed laying- the bed should be level, free from undulations. Well graded material conforming to
specifications must be used up to the prescribed level. In case of channel blocks, these must be continuous
and true to lines and levels.

11.1.3 Backfilling- material should conform to specified standards, and compaction shouldachieve
required density.
11.1.4 Pavement layer- should merge with the adjacent surface without causingbumps.

AppendixA (TeStingFrequencieS)
Embankment/Subgrade

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer‟s Audit Check

Frequency

Plasticity Index IS 2720 2 tests per <45% To check at least 15% of

Part 5 3000 m³ the tests during
execution.
Liquid Limit IS 2720 2 tests per <70% To check at least 15% of
Part 5 3000 m³ the tests during
execution.

Free - Swelling IS 2720 As required <50% To check at least 15% of

Index Part 5 the tests during
execution.

633
 Maximum Dry IS 2720 2 tests per 1.52gm/cc(min) for To check at least15% of the
Density Part 8 3000 m³ embankment tests during execution.
(Proctor) 1.75gm/cc(min)
for subgrade

CBR Value IS 2720 1 tests per >5% for To check at least 15% of
Part16 3000 m³ embankment the tests during execution.
>8%for
subgrade

Field Density IS 2720 2 tests per 97%for subgrade To check at least 15% of
Part 8 3000 m³ 95%for embankment the tests during execution.

APPENDICES
GranularSub-Base

Engineer‟s Audit Check

Item Method Frequency Specification Frequency

Liquid Limit IS 2720 1 tests per <25% To check at least 15% of the
Part 5 200 m³ tests during execution

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Plasticity IS 2720 1 tests per <6% To check at least 15% of the
Index Part 5 200 m³ tests during execution.
10% Fines BS 812, 1 tests per >50 KN To check at least 15% of the
Value Part III Source tests during execution.
Water IS 2727 1 tests per <2% To check at least 15% of the
Absorption Part 7 Source tests during execution.

634
 Maximum IS 2720 2 tests per - To check at least 15% of the
Dry Density Part 8 1000 m³ tests during execution.
CBR Value IS 2720 1 tests per As per Grading To check at least 15% of the
Part16 3000 m³ tests during execution.
Sieve Analysis IS 2386 1 tests per As shown in To check at least 15% of the
Part 1 100 m³ table A.3 below tests during execution.

Grading requirement for GranularSub-Base

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Sieve size Specification limits (percent passing)

(mm) Grading I Grading II Grading III
75 100 - -
53 80-100 100 -
25.5 55-90 70-100 100
9.5 35-65 50-80 65-95
4.75 25-65 40-65 50-80
2.36 20-40 30-50 40-65
0.425 10-25 15-25 20-35
0.075 3-10 3-10 3-10
CBR 30 25 20

Wet Mix Macadam & Non-Bituminous BaseCourse

Item Method Frequency Specification Engineer‟s Audit Check

Frequency
Los Angeles IS 2386, <40% To check at least 15% of
1 test per 200 m3
abrasion Part 4 the tests during
execution
Combined IS 2386 <30% To check at least 15% of
1 test per 200 m3
flakiness index Part 1 the tests during execution

Atterberg limits IS 2720, 1 test per 100 m3 - To check at least 15% of

Part 5 the tests during execution

Plasticity index IS 2720 1 tests per <6% To check at least 15% of

Part 5 200 m³ the tests during execution.

635
Temperature

For binder at the time of mixing : 150-163 Degrees For aggregate at thetimeof mixing : 155-163
Degrees For mix attheplant : 130-160Degrees
For layingat site: 120-160Degrees

Rolling operation shall be completed before temperature of mix falls below 100 degrees/ Units.

Bituminous Penetration Macadam

The physical requirements of aggregates shall be the same as that of bituminous macadam. The grading
requirement as follows
TABLE –B.5.1

APPENDICES
IS Sieve Designation Per cent by weight passing sieve
For 50 mm compacted For 75mm compacted
Thickness thickness
Coarse Key aggregate Coarse Key aggregate
Aggregate aggregate
63 mm 100
53 mm
45 mm 100 58-82

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

26.5 mm 37-72 100
22.4 mm 100 5-27 50-75
13.2 mm 2-20 50-75
11.2 mm 5-25
5.6 mm 5-25
2.8 mm 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5

Quantities of materials required for 10 sq.m area for bituminous penetration macadam is givenbelow.
TABLE –B.5.2

Compacted Binder Coarse Key aggregate

thickness Straight run bitumen aggregate
50 mm 50 kg 0.60 cu.m 0.15 cu.m
75 mm 68 kg 0.90 cu.m 0.18 cu.m

636
 Dry and clean coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly at the rate specified by the above
table. After the coarse aggregate has been rolled and checked, the bituminous binder shall be applied at
specified temperature, the rate of application given in the abovetable.

Immediately after the first penetration of bitumen, key aggregate in a clean and dry state shall be spread
uniformly over the surface by means of an approved mechanical spreader at the rate specified in the above
table and rolled in accordance with the specification.

Seal Coat
Seal coat of two types (see MORT&H clause 513)

Type-A- Chip Sealing seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder followed by
a cover of stone chippings.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Type-B- Premixed seal coat comprising of thin application fineaggregate premixed with
bituminousbinder.
Physical requirement of aggregate

Type-A- the aggregate shall satisfy all the physical requirements ofaggregate

for bituminous macadam except for water absorption which shall be less than 1%. Stone chippings shall be
of 6.7 mm size defined as 100% passing through 11.2 mm sieve and retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The quantity
used for spreading shall be0.09cum/10sq.m.
NOTE : The contractor is responsible to ensure that the surface seal coat does not strip, ravel, flush or
bleed. Spray rates for bitumen & spread rates for aggregate chips must be adjusted to allow for the effects
of traffic and size and quality of aggregate chip etc.
Type-B- The aggregate shall pass through 2.36 mm sieve and be retained on 180-micron sieve
. Type-B- The aggregate shall pass through 2.36 mm sieve and be retained on 180-micron sieve
.The quantity used for premixing shall be 0.06 cum/10sq.m.

B.7. The spray rate of bitumen for bituminous works is detailed below

a) For Tack Coat

Normal bituminous surface : 2 to 2.5 kg/10 sq.m

Dry/hungry surface : 3.5 to 4 kg/10 sq.m

Note : There is no need for tack coat on freshly laid bituminous surfaces if overlaid on same day without
opening to traffic.

637
Appendix B (RoadWorkS)
Specification – General requirements (Refer to relevant clauses of latest edition of MORT&H
Specifications for Roads and Bridges for full descriptions)
List of typical equipment that needs to be checked/calibrated

Item What needs to be checked Comments

Level Line of collimation
Measuring tapes Accuracy against standard
Rollers Drums are smooth and round
PTR rollers Tyre pressure is correct

APPENDICES
Graders Blades are straight
Pavers Boards are flat segments are
aligned and angle of attack
correct hydraulics smooth
Trucks Mechanically sound, tyres at
correct pressure
Thermometers Checked against standard
Weigh-Scales Calibrated with standard

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

weights
Laboratory equipment Must all be checked against
standards (see IRC codes)

Requirements of Materials for Earth Work

The material used for embankment/subgrade construction can be from roadway excavation or from borrow
pits.
The essential physical requirements of embankment/subgrade materials are(a) size of coarse material: max
75 mm for embankment and max 50mm for subgrade (b)liquid limit: max 70% (c) free swelling index: max
50% (d) plasticity index: max 45% (e) maximum dry density(MDD):minimum 1.52 gm/cc (f) CBR value:
minimum 5% for embankment and 8%minimum for subgrade (g) thickness of each compacted layer should
not be more than 200 mm.(h) field density: 95% of MDD for embankment layers and 97% of MDD for
subgradelayers.
Requirements Of Materials ForSub-Base
The material to be used for sub-base work shall be natural sand, moorum, gravel, crushed stone or
combinations thereof depending upon the grading requirement for that refer either Table No 400-1 or Table
No 400-2 of MORT&H specifications.

638
 The physical requirements of the materials for sub-base are (a) 10 per cent fines value in soaked condition:
min 50 KN (b) water absorption: max 2%.

BaseCourse
Physical Requirements of Aggregates (WBM)

The requirements for aggregates used are (a) Los Angeles abrasion value :max 40% (b)Aggregate
impact value max 30% (c) combined Flakiness and Elongation index : max 30%.

The grading requirement of the aggregate used is given below

TABLE – B.3.1

Grading Sieve Sieve size % by weight

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

No range (mm) passing

1 90-45 125 100
90 90-100
63 25-60
45 0-15
22.4 0-5
2 63-45 90 100
63 90-100
53 25-75
45 0-15
22.4 0-5
3 53-22.4 63 100
53 95-100
45 65-90
22.4 0-10
11.2 0-5

For WMM grading refer Table 400-11 of MORT&H specification.

Aggregates with bricks, kankar, laterite, etc. which get softened in presence of water shall be tested
for impact value under hot conditions in accordance with IS 5640. Flakiness index and elongation
index shall be enforced only in case of crushed broken stone and crushed slag and the combined
flakiness and elongation shall not exceed 30%.

The screenings used to fill the voids have to satisfy gradation given below. When gravel is used
the liquid limit should be less than 20 and the plasticity index less than 6%. Percent passing 75-
micron sieve should not be morethan10%.

639
TABLE –B.3.2

Grade Size of Sieve size % By weight

classification screening(mm) (mm) passing
A 13.2 13.2 100
11.2 95-100
5.6 15-35
180mc 0-10
B 11.2 11.2 100
5.6 90-100
180mc 15-35

APPENDICES
BituminousMacadam

The physical requirement of aggregate used for bituminous macadam are (a)Los Angeles abrasion value
max 40% (b) aggregate impact value : max 30% (c) flakiness and elongation (total):max 30% (d) water
absorption : max 2% (e) soundness : max loss of weight 12% for sodium sulphate and 18% for magnesium
sulphate.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

The grading requirement as follows

TABLE –B.4.1

IS sieve designation Per cent by weight passing sieve

Grading-1 Grading-2
45.0 mm 100

26.5 mm 75-100 100

22.4 mm 60-95 75-100

11.2 mm 30-55 50-85

5.6 mm 15-35 20-40

2.8 mm 5-20 5-20

90 microns 0-5 0-5

Bitumen content for pre mixing shall be 3 to 3.5 per cent by weight of total mix. The maximum
compacted layer thickness shall be 100 mm. Bituminous macadam mix shall be prepared in a hot
mix plant of adequatecapacity.

640
 Temperature

For binder at the time of mixing : 150-163 Degrees For aggregate at thetimeof mixing : 155-163
Degrees For mix attheplant : 130-160Degrees
For layingat site: 120-160Degrees

Rolling operation shall be completed before temperature of mix falls below 100 degrees/ Units.

Bituminous Penetration Macadam

The physical requirements of aggregates shall be the same as that of bituminous macadam. The grading
requirement as follows
TABLE –B.5.1

IS Sieve Designation Per cent by weight passing sieve

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

For 50 mm compacted For 75mm compacted

Thickness thickness
Coarse Key aggregate Coarse Key aggregate
Aggregate aggregate
63 mm 100
53 mm
45 mm 100 58-82
26.5 mm 37-72 100
22.4 mm 100 5-27 50-75
13.2 mm 2-20 50-75
11.2 mm 5-25
5.6 mm 5-25
2.8 mm 0-5 0-5 0-5 0-5

Quantities of materials required for 10 sq.m area for bituminous penetration macadam is givenbelow.
TABLE –B.5.2

Compacted Binder Coarse Key aggregate

thickness Straight run bitumen aggregate
50 mm 50 kg 0.60 cu.m 0.15 cu.m
75 mm 68 kg 0.90 cu.m 0.18 cu.m

641
Dry and clean coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly at the rate specified by the above
table. After the coarse aggregate has been rolled and checked, the bituminous binder shall be applied at
specified temperature, the rate of application given in the abovetable.

Immediately after the first penetration of bitumen, key aggregate in a clean and dry state shall be spread
uniformly over the surface by means of an approved mechanical spreader at the rate specified in the above
table and rolled in accordance with the specification.

Seal Coat
Seal coat of two types (see MORT&H clause 513)

Type-A- Chip Sealing seal coat comprising of an application of a layer of bituminous binder followed by

APPENDICES
a cover of stone chippings.
Type-B- Premixed seal coat comprising of thin application fineaggregate premixed with
bituminousbinder.
Physical requirement of aggregate

Type-A- the aggregate shall satisfy all the physical requirements ofaggregate

for bituminous macadam except for water absorption which shall be less than 1%. Stone chippings shall be
of 6.7 mm size defined as 100% passing through 11.2 mm sieve and retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The quantity
used for spreading shall be0.09cum/10sq.m.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

NOTE : The contractor is responsible to ensure that the surface seal coat does not strip, ravel, flush or
bleed. Spray rates for bitumen & spread rates for aggregate chips must be adjusted to allow for the effects
of traffic and size and quality of aggregate chip etc.
Type-B- The aggregate shall pass through 2.36 mm sieve and be retained on 180-micron sieve
. Type-B- The aggregate shall pass through 2.36 mm sieve and be retained on 180-micron sieve
.The quantity used for premixing shall be 0.06 cum/10sq.m.

B.7. The spray rate of bitumen for bituminous works is detailed below

a) For Tack Coat

Normal bituminous surface : 2 to 2.5 kg/10 sq.m

Dry/hungry surface : 3.5 to 4 kg/10 sq.m

Note : There is no need for tack coat on freshly laid bituminous surfaces if overlaid on same day without
opening to traffic.

642
 Requirement of sprayed bituminous chip sealing for surface dressing

Spray rates for bitumen and spread rates for aggregate chips depends on traffic, aggregate chip size,
bitumen temperature, and penetration etc and shall be checked with the Engineer before sprayed chip
sealing is attempted
B. 8. Built Up Spray Grout (See IRC47)
The grading requirement is given below are percentage by weight passing the sieve.

TABLE –B-7.1
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

IS Sieve (mm) Coarse Aggregate Key aggregate

(mm) (mm)
53 100
26.5 40-75
22.4 100
13.2 0-20 40-75
5.6 0-20
2.8 0-5 0-5

Requirement of bitumen First

: 15kg/10sq.m

Second : 15kg/10sq.m
Coarse aggregate is spread uniformly at the rate of 0.5-cum/10sq.m areas over a tack coat and inder is
applied at 15kg/10sq.m area. Immediately after key aggregate is spread uniformly at 0.13 cum/10sq.m area
and rolled, brooming. whenever required for uniformity. Then the final surface has to be provided without
delay .If there is delay, a seal coat should be provided as an intermediate step.

B.9. Semi-Dense Bituminous Carpet (MORT&H Clause 508)

Aggregate water absorption 1% (max)

643
Binder content: Minimum 4% of mix by weight. Gradation requirements are given below
TABLE –B.8.1
Grading 1 2
Nominal aggregate size 13mm 10mm
Layer Thickness 35 – 40mm 25 -30mm
+
IS Sieve (mm) Cumulative % by weight of total aggregate passing
19 100
13.2 90 – 100 100
9.5 70 – 90 90 - 100
4.75 35 – 51 35 - 51

APPENDICES
2.36 24 – 39 24 - 39
1.18 15 – 30 15 - 30
0.3 9 – 19 9 - 19
0.075 3–8 3-8
Bitumen content % by mass Min. 4.5 Min 5.0
of total Mix #
Bitumen grade 65* 65*

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Notes:

+ The combined aggregate grading shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the
adjacent sieve.
# Determined by the Marshall method.

* Only in exceptional circumstances, 80/100 penetration grade may be used, as approved by the Engineer.
Requirement of mix

Marshallstability : 8.2 KN (samples compacted with 75blows)

Marshallflow : 2 to 4 mm Percent air voidsinmix : 3 to 5
Percent air voids inaggregates : 13 to 15(minimum)

(13.2 mm max size)

Percent voids in mineral aggregate

Filled withbitumen(VFB) : 65 to78

Bindercontent : 4% minimum Temperature of mixatlaying : 120 to 160 degreeC

644
 Minimum temperature fo rrolling : 90 oC
Field Tests for Bituminousworks

No bituminous work shall be carried out when the atmospheric temperature is less than 16 degree and when
the base or the construction materials are damp. The thickness of the layer can be checked at frequent
intervals after compaction by using pre decided depth blocks. Rolling should continue till the roller marks
are eliminated. Rolling temperature should not fall below 100degree.
It is necessary to conduct tests at frequent intervals during the work to find out whether the prescribed
bitumen quantity is being used in the work. For this a simple field solubility test can be conducted (for field
control) as follows.
About 1 kg of the mix is collected and weighted accurately. The sample is immersed and flushed in either
carbon di-sulphide or carbon tetra chloride liquids (both chemicals are highly toxic and should only be used
in a fully vented fume cupboard). Kerosene can also be used for the purpose. Since the bitumen is
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

completely soluble in these solvents except for negligible quantities of impurities like carbon, salts, etc. the
weight of aggregates without the bitumen can be obtained to arrive at the difference in weight, which
represents the weight of bitumen used in themix.
Marshall StabilityTest

The Marshall stability test shall be used to determine bituminous concrete mix proportions and to test the
product delivered to the job. Mix shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use in theworks.
Other ControlMeasures

The camber of the laid surface should be checked by means of camber board and spirit level. Triangular
wedges may be used for finding out depressions under a 3 metre straight edge. Maximum allowable
depression is 6mm. Templates may also be prepared to check the cambers at different locations. The
longitudinal alignment should be checked by a straight edge and triangular wedge.
Traffic on the fresh surface should not be allowed until the mix has become cool enough to prevent wheel-
marking by traffic.
Standards of surfaceevenness

The surface unevenness should be controlled during construction so that both longitudinal and cross profiles
are simultaneously satisfied. The maximum number of undulations permitted in any stretch of 300 meters
length is 30 and in the cross profile, it is 6 only. The details of the permitted tolerance of surface regularity
of pavement courses are given as under.

645
Permitted tolerances of surface regularity for pavement courses

TABLE –B.10.1

No. Type of Max Longitudinal profile with 3m Cross Profile

construction permis straight edge
sible
Max no of undulations Max permitted
undula
permitted in 300m exceeding variations from
tions
18 12 10 6 mm specified profile
(mm)
mm mm mm under camber
template

APPENDICES
1 Earth subgrade 24 30 15
2 Sub base 15 30 12
3 WBM with 15 30 12
40mm 90mm
rolled
4 WBM with 20- 12 30 8
50mm of 40-
63mm size BPM

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

or BUSG

5 Surface dressing 12 20 8
6 Open graded 10 30 6
premix carpet mix
seal
surfacing

7 Bituminous 10 20 6
macadam
8 Semi dense 10 20 6
carpet
9 Asphalt 8 10 4
concrete

Surface level even-ness shall be in accordance with table 900-1 of MORT&H Specification for Roads and
Bridges. Surface even-ness may be measured by 3m straight edge and wedges or by other acceptable means
approved by the Engineer

Road Maintenance works

Depending on the standards of original construction, change in traffic intensity, climatic conditions etc.,
maintenance of roads presents problems of different nature. A systematic approach involving sequential
operations is necessary.

646
 The different items of maintenance works being carried out fall under three headings

Routine maintenance: including filling up potholes, patches, repairs to side berms, improving surface
drainage, cleaning choked culverts, painting sign boardsetc.
Periodical maintenance: including surface renewals (ie re-gravelling) and
trengthening by way of providing overlaysand Rectification/upgradation: including widening of
roads, improvement of CD works, improved drainage measures, providing new sign boardsetc.

RoutineMaintenance

Potholes

The occurrence of potholes is the most common phenomenon observed especially after rains. These can be
the result of but not limited to:
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

ingress of water into the pavement throughcracks, ingress of water by surface ponding because of
insufficient surface camber or super-elevation. lack of bond between the surfacing and the base course and
(d)use of insufficient bitumen in the surfacing etc.
Patching of these potholes has to be executed with care to make it successful.

The potholes should be cut as nearly as possible to the shape of a rectangle, sides being vertical.
All loose material shall be cleaned out. If there are deep pot holes as a result of improper drainage
or existence of soft pocket in the subgrade, these should be dug out down to solid subgrade, and
made good with well-graded aggregate. In WBM roads, the potholes should be filled with
aggregates and screenings as specified for WBM and compacted with heavy hand rammers. In
asphalt roads, the bottom and sides of the potholes duly trimmed to a rectangular shape should be
coated with bitumen emulsion (using a sprayer or by brushing) and filled with premix. The premix
should be compacted in layers of 25mm at a time, the hand rammers being dipped in water often
so that the coated metal may not stick to it. The finished surface should be compacted level with
(not below, but in any case no more than 5mm above) the surrounding roadsurface.

ShoulderGrading

Shoulders must be graded to slope away from the carriageway such that water can flow across the shoulder
and not run along the pavement adjacent to the carriageway.

647
Grass Cutting-JungleClearance

Grass shall be cut as per the specified interval debri removed from thesite

Repairs To HeadwallsEtc

Headwalls to culverts and masonry to side drains etc shall be repaired using the same techniques as used in
the original structure. Materials used shall be of sound quality according to the specification and
construction shall be in accordance with the best practice techniques
PeriodicMaintenance

Periodic maintenance such as BT overlays or Bitumen Chip Sealing surface dressing, or re-gravelling shall

APPENDICES
be carried out in accordance with the schedules prepared by the RMMS system. Materials and workmanship
shall be in accordance with the Contract andSpecification.

Profile Corrective Courses

Where the maximum profile corrective course thickness works out to not more than 40 mm, it shall be done
as an integral part of the average course. In other cases, the profile corrective courses shall be provided as
a separate layer.
Potholes have to be filled before profile corrective course is laid.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

Profile corrective course shall be measured as volume compacted in position. The volume shall be worked
out by survey control, plotting the exact profile corrective course as built up at site and super imposed on
the existing pavement profile.
BTCarpet

BT Carpeting shall be in accordance with the specification and must be manufactured at 150º C and laid
in accordance with clauses B9 toB13.
BituminousTesting:

The control tests to be conducted on bituminous works are listed below for ready reference.

1. SDBC: a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation index

d) Stability of mix – Marshall test for stability, flow value,

Density and void content

e) Binder content

f) Temperature

2. BUSG/Bituminous penetration macadam a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation index d) Aggregate grading

e) Binder content f) Temperature
3. Tack Coat/Prime Coat:
648
 a) Quality of binder b) Rate of spread
c) Temperature

4. Seal coat: a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation indices

d) Grading of aggregates

e)Average Least Dimension of Chips

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

f) Rate of spread

g) Temperature

5. Bitumimous Macadam:

a) Quality of binder

b) Aggregate impact value

c) Flakiness and elongation index

d) Stability of mix – Marshall test for stability, flow value, Density and void content

e) Binder content f) Temperature

g) Stripping value

h) Rate of spread of mixed material i) Water absorption

k) Grading of aggregate

For all these following tests are also required

a) Temperature to be measured at regular intervals.

b) Depths of bituminous layers measured at regular intervals.
c) Tests to determine the bitumen content in a mix at regular intervals. d) Check on camber and
profile.

649
 Appendix C (Structural WorkS)

Concrete Works

Aggregate

a) Coarse aggregate

For plain and reinforced cement concrete works, coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard,
strong, dense. non-porous and durable pieces of crushed stone, crushed gravel or a suitable
combination thereof or other approved inert materials.

APPENDICES
For every new source the following tests are to be conducted.

Aggregate impact value (max30%)

Water absorption (max2%)
Los Angels Abrasion Value (max40%)
Grading ofaggregate
Flakiness and Elongation index(max35%)
The grading requirement of coarse aggregate as follows

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020

TABLE C-1.1

IS Sieve Size Per cent by weight passing the sieve

40 mm 20 mm 12.5 mm
63 mm 100
40 mm 95-100 100
20 mm 30-70 95-100 100
12.5 mm 90-100
10 mm 10-35 25-55 40-85
4.75 mm 0-5 0-10 0-10

b) Fine aggregate

The fineness modulus of fine aggregate shall neither be than 2.0 nor greater than 3.5.
The grading requirement are given below

TABLE C-1.2

IS Sieve Size Per cent by weight passing sieve

Zone-1 Zone-2 Zone-3

650
 10 mm 100 100 100

4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100

2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100

1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100

600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79

300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10

Cement

Cement to be used in works shall be any of the following

Ordinary Portland cement, 33 grades confirming to IS269
Ordinary Portland cement, 43 grade confirming to IS8112
Ordinary Portland cement, 53 grade confirming to IS12269

The manufacture‟s test certificate can be accepted. The Contractor must produce the
manufacture‟s certificate for the relevant bill. If it is not available contractor must do tests at his
own cost and submit the result to the Engineer.

Steel

The steel used for structural work shall confirm to Table 1000-3 of MORT&H
specifications.

The manufacture‟s test certificate can be accepted. If it is not available contractor must do tests at
his own cost and submit the result to theEngineer.

Concrete mix design andsampling

Prior to construction, the contractor shall prepare a design mix in the case of „Design Mix Concrete‟ or
prepare a nominal mix in the case of „Nominal Mix Concrete‟ and obtain approval from the Engineer before
use. For PCC and small RCC works nominal mix design can be adopted, but for major RCC works and for
the concreting of load bearing structures a design mix must be followed based on the criteria in clause 1704
of MORT&H Roads and Bridges Specifications. For the testing and characteristic strength refer Table1700
MORT&H specification.

651
One set of sample (6nos of cube) shall be taken for every 50m3or for the day‟s work.

Formwork

All formwork and the reinforcement contained in it shall be cleaned and made free from standing water,
dust, snow or ice immediately before placing concrete.

Mixing, Transporting and Placing ofConcrete

Concrete shall be mixed either in a concrete mixer or in batching plant as mentioned in the contract or
approved by the Engineer. Hand mixing shall not be permitted. The mixer or plant shall be at an approved
location considering the properties of the mixers and transportation arrangement available with contractor.
The mixer plant shall be approved by the Engineer.

PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

Concrete shall not be freely dropped in to place from a height exceeding 1.5 m. Concrete shall be deposited
in horizontal layers to a compacted depth of not more than 450 mm and vibrated to eliminatehoneycomb.

Curing

Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously in a damp or wet condition or by covering a layer
of sacks, canvas, hessian or similar materials and shall be kept constantly wet for a period not less than 14
days from the date of placing ofconcrete.

Finishing

Immediately after the removal of forms, exposed bars or bolts if any shall be cut inside the concrete and
resulting holes filled with cement mortar.
.

Shifting ofUtilities
Pavement Shoulder
Length of Cut
Size of Opening
Type of (Material composition )
Bituminous layer
Metalled layer

Whenever Telephone/Electric posts/pipe lines are to be shifted to facilitate widening of roads, the
Executive Engineer concerned should forward a request to the concerned District Officer of the
department for shifting.
12.2 District Officers of the department/organisation concerned should shift the utilities within four weeks
of receipt of requisition and inform the Executive Engineer concerned about the completion of the work.
After the lapse of prescribed time, Highway Authority may initiate necessary steps for removal

of the same and the expenses incurred shall be levied from the concerned department.
12.3 Shifting of these utilities shall be done at the locations specified and directed by thehighway
Authority at the cost of concerned departments.
13 Penalty
13.1 Highway Protection Act clause 26 sub section (1) specifies the necessity for a permit and sub section

652
 (3) describes the fine to be collected for such trespassing.
13.2 Failure to obtain a permit or comply with the regulations in force shall be subject to a fine of 10(ten)
times the estimated restoration charges plus the permit fee or the penalty specified under Clause 26
Sub section (3) of Highway Protection Act, whichever is greater.
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

653
 Bibliography:
Bridges:
1 IRC: 5- 1998 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section I – General
. Features of Design (Seventh Revision)
2 IRC: 6 -2000 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section II – Loads and
. Stresses (Fourth Revision)
3 IRC:18- Design Criteria for Pre-stressed Concrete Road Bridges (Post-Tensioned Concrete)
. 2000 (Third Revision)
4 IRC:21- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section III – Cement
. 2000 Concrete (Plain and Reinforced) (Third Revision)
5 IRC:22- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section VI –
. 1986 Composite Construction (First Revision)
6 IRC:24- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, SectionV–SteelRoad
. 2001 Bridges (Second Revision)
7 IRC:40- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IV – Brick,
PWD ENGINEERING MANUAL-2020 APPENDICES

. 2002 Stone and Block Masonry (Second Revision)

8 IRC:78- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section VII –
. 2000 Foundations and Substructure (Second Revision)
9 IRC:83- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX – Bearings,
. 1999 Part I : Metallic Bearings (First Revision)
10 IRC:83- 1987 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX – Bearings,

Part II: Elastomeric Bearings

11 IRC:83- Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges, Section IX – Bearings,
2002 Part III: POT, POT-CUM-PTFE, PIN AND METALLIC GUIDE BEARINGS
. (Part III)
12 IRC:87- Guidelines for the Design and Erection of False work for Road Bridges
1984
.
13 IRC:89- Guidelines for Design and Construction of River Training & Control Works for Road

. 1997 Bridges (First Revision)

14 IRC SP 20 Specifications for Rural Roads

15 IRC: SP: 33 Guidelines on Supplemental Measures for Design, Detailing & Durability of Important
Bridge Structures
. 1989
16 IS 456-2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of Practice

Roads:
1. IRC:32-1969 StandardforVerticalandHorizontalClearancesofOverheadElectricPowerand
Telecommunication Lines as Related to Roads
2. IRC:38-1988 Guidelines for Design of Horizontal Curves for Highways and Design Tables
3. IRC:39-1986 Standards for Road-Rail Level Crossings
4. IRC:41-1997 Type Designs for Check Barriers
5. IRC:54-1974 Lateral and Vertical Clearances at Underpasses for Vehicular Traffic
6. IRC:65-1976 Recommended Practice for Traffic Rotaries
7. IRC:66-1976 Recommended Practice for Sight Distance on Rural Highways
8. IRC:69-1977 Space Standards for Roads in Urban Areas
9. IRC:73-1980 Geometric Design Standards for Rural (Non-Urban)Highways
10. IRC:80-1981 Type Designs for Pick-up Bus Stops on Rural(i.e., Non-Urban)Highways
11. IRC:86-1983 Geometric Design Standards for Urban Roads in Plains
12. IRC:92-1985 Guidelines for the Design of Interchanges in Urban Areas

654
 13. IRC:98-1997 Guidelines on Accommodation of Underground Utility Services Along and Across
Roads in Urban Areas (First Revision)
14. IRC:99-1988 Tentative Guidelines on the Provision of Speed Breakers for Control of Vehicular Speeds on
-Minor Roads
15. IRC:103-1988 Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities
16. IRC: SP: 12- 1973 Recommendations on the Provision of Parking Spaces for Urban Areas
17. IRC: 58-2002 Guidelines for the Design of Plain Jointed Rigid Pavements for Highways
18. IRC:SP: 72- 2015 Design of flexible Pavements

Buildings

1. I.S.456-2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

2. I.S.800-1962 Codeofpracticeforuseofstructuralsteelingeneralbuildingconstriction.
3. I.S.875-1987 Designs load other than (part I to V) earthquake for building Design.
4. Part-I: Dead loads.
5. Part-II: Imposed loads.
6. Part-III: Wind loads.
7. Part IV: Snow loads.
8. Part V: Special loads and load combinations.
9. I.S.1080-1965 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundation in
soils (other than Raft, Ring and shell)

10. I.S:1642-1988 Fire safety of buildings (General) Detail 3 of construction.

11. I.S.:1643-1988 Code of practice for Fire safety of buildings(General)Exposure Hazard.
12. I.S.1644-1988 Code of practice for Fire safety of buildings (General) Exit
requirements and personal Hazards.
13. I.S.1888-1972 Methods of load test on soils.
14. I.S.:1893-1984 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
15. I.S:1904-1986 Codeofpracticefordesign&constructionofpilefoundationinsoilstructural
safety of building foundation.
16. I.S.2911-1990 Code of practice for design and construction of pile (Part I to IV) foundation.
17. I.S.2950-1981 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundation.
18. I.S.3370-1965 Code of Practice for water retaining structures.
19. I.S.3414-1987 Code of Practice for Design and Installation of joints in buildings.
20. I.S.4326-1993 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design of structure.
21. I.S.6403-1981 Code of practice for Determination of bearing pressure of shallow foundation.
22. I.S.13920-1993 Code of practice for ductility detailing of reinforced concrete
structures subjected to seismicforces.

1. SP-16 Design Aids to I.S.:456-1978

2. SP-22 Explanation to I.S.: 1893 & I.S.:4326.
3. SP-23 Concrete Mix.
4. SP-24 Explanation of I.S.456-1978.
5. SP-25 Cracks in buildings and their repairs.
6. SP- 34 Detailing in R.C.C. structures.
7. SP-38 Design of steel trusses.

8. Maharashtra PWD manual

9. Kerala PWD Manual
10. Punjab PWD
11. CPWD works manual 2019
12. NBC 2016
13. MORTH GUIDELINES
14. GFR 2017

655
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

The Engineering Manual 2020 has been framed after many decades and the
compilation of the same was not possible without the relentless efforts of the
technical advisory team who worked consistently to accomplish this task in a very
short span of time.

The technical advisory team comprising of Er. Aftab Ahmad Darvesh,

Executive Engineer, Er. Arif Mohammad Iqbal, Er. Irfan Parvez Butt, Assistant
Executive Engineers and Irfan Ahmad Reshi, Assistant Engineer was the core team
in formulating and completing the manual in a record time.

The technical advisory team was all along guided by Er. Sami Arif Yasvi,
Development Commissioner Works, J&K PWD who supported the team at every step
during the process of framing this manual.

Sincere efforts of all other officers who contributed towards the

formulation of this manual by giving their valuable suggestions and inputs in
updating and refining the Engineering Manual 2020 are also highly acknowledged.

Able leadership and vision of Sh. Shailendra Kumar, Principal Secretary

PW(R&B) Department, Jammu and Kashmir Government was the main source of
inspiration in creating this manual.

656